KTC

Product system of AirTAC--lndex
Control components
Solenoid valve(3/2 way, 5/2 way, 5/3 way)
- - 3V1 -3V3 Series .. ... ... ....... ........ 14
..,m,,r=- 3V2M Series .. ... .. ....................... 18

- - 3V100-300 Series ..................... ·22
- - 4V100-400 Series ........ .. .......... ··28

- - 4M(NAMUR) Series ... ....... .......... 36
- - Manifold ........... ......................... 38
- - ESV Series(ISO standard) .... ...... 40
Air valve(3/2 way, 5/2 way, 5/3 way)
- - 3A100-300 Series .... .. .. ........... 52

- - 4A100-400 Series .... . .... 55
- - Manifold. 63
- - EAV Series(ISO standard) .... . .... 65
Manual control valve, mechanical control valve and other valves

(3/2 way, 4/2(3) way, 5/2(3) way)
- - 4H Series hand levervalve ..... ..... 74
- - 3L, 4L Series Push-Pull valve .... 76
- - HSV Series hand slide valve ...... 78
- - 4HV, 4HVL Series hand lever valve .... 79
- - S3 Series control valve .. .. ...... .. .. . 81
- - M3 Series control valve ............... 83
- - M5 Series control valve .............. 85
- - CM3 Series control valve ............. 87
........,,,~ - - ZM3 Series control valve 91
- - 3F, 3FM Series foot pedal valve .. .. ..... 93
- - ASC Series flow control valve ..... 95
~ - - - - - - - - - - ~- - NRV Series non-return valve ..... 96
Fluid control valve ( 2/2 way l
- - 2S Series solenoid valve .... 98

- - 2KS Series solenoid valve ....... · 102
- - 2W Series solenoid valve .. ....... 106
- - 2KW Series solenoid valve ... .....11 O
- - 2L Series solenoid valve ... ........ 114
iNDUSTRiAL 36 Taunton Drive Cheltenham VIC 3192 - - 2KL Series solenoid valve .......... 118
- ~ info@idyna.com .au 03 9585 2739 - - 2V Series solenoid valve .... ...... 124
DYNAMiCS . d . Id .
controlled motioo components+syste ms+solu1ions WWW. I n U St rI a Yna mI CS. CO m.aU
- - 2P Series solenoid valve ......... .. 126
• Linear Guides • Steppe r Motion • Direct Drive Motion • Ballscrew s
-
• Rack & Pinion • Electric Cylinders • AC Geared Motors • Bearings ~ - - - - - - - - - - ~- - 2J Series angle seat valve ....... -127
• Screw Jacks • Linear Actuators • Precision Gearboxes • Pneumatics
Preparation unit
G series (F.R.L. combination, FR.L. combination, filter& regulator,
filter.re ulator, lubricator and others
- - GC Series(F.R.L combination) .. ..134

- - GFC Series(FR.L combination) . -136
- - GFR Series(Filter & regulator) ... 138
- - GF Series filter ........... .. . . .. 140
- - GR Series regulator .. ..... ... ... .... . 142
- - GL Series lubricator ......... .... .. .. 144
- - G series (metal bowl) ···· ·· ·· ····· ··· 147
- - GV Series soft start-up valve ... . ·148
- - GZ Series safe on-off valve .. ... . ·149
- - GA Series air distribution block.· 150
A\B series (F.R.L. combination , FR.L. combination, filter& regulator,

filter re ulator lubricator and others
- - AC\BC Series(F.R.L combination) .... .. . 152
- - AFCIBFC Series(FR.L combination) ... . 154
- - AFRIBFR Series(Filter & regulator) .... . 156

- - AF\BF Series filter ........ .. .. .. ...... 158
- - AR\BR Series regulator .. .. ........ 159
~ - - - - - - - - - ~- - AL\BL Series lubricator .. .. ...... ... 161
Other series( regulator, pressure gauge , pressure switch)
- - SR Series regulator ... ...162

- - SOR Series regulator .... . 163
- - ADW Series dripleg drain ........ .. 165
- - GS, GF, GU Pressure gauge .... 166
DPS Series Pressure Switch ..... 167
DPC Series Pressure Switch .. ... 170
Actuator
Standard cylinder (ISO standard , JIS Standard, Other standard)
- - SE Series ................... .. ... .... ·· ··175
- - SI Series ... ..... ...... .. ... .. ... ... ...... .181
- - SGC Series ......... .. .... ......... .. .... 189
- - SU Series ... .. ... .. ... .. .. ..... .. ... .... 195
- - SC Series ... .. ... .. .. ... ........ ...... .. 20 1
- - JSI Series .. ........................... ... 213
-
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ _P_r_o_d_uc_t_s~y_st_e_m_o_f_A_ir_T_A~C~-~-==-=ln~d=e==
x
Actuator
Round line cylinder
- - Ml Series ..... .... ..... .. ...... 219

- - PB , PBR Series .. ........... .... .... 225
- - MF Series ............ .... ...... 233
- - MA Series ....... ················· ········239
- - MAL Series .... .. ..... ..... ...... ... ... .. 247
~~~ MBL Series ··· ··· ········· ··· ·· ········· 253
Compact cylinder
- - ACE Series .. .... ................. .. .... 259
Ultra-Compact cylinder
- - ACQ, TACO Series ...... .... ......... 267
SDA Series ... .... ..... .. ... .... .. ...... 281
Multi-mounting cylinder, twin rod and tri-rod cylinder
- - MD\MK Series ..... ............ .. .........287

MU Series ...... .. ......... ..... .......... 295
- - MPG Series ............... ... .. .. ........299
.~~\,~.-~ ~ MPE Series ... ... ............... ...... .. 303

TN\TR Series .... .. ........ .... ... ... ... 307
TCL\TCM Series ... .. ...... .. .........313
Sl ide table cylinder
STW Series . ... ........ .... ...... ..... 319
HLH Series ...... .. ... .. .. ... ... .. ....... 327
- - HLQ Series ............... .. .. ... ... ... .. 333
,.,. - - HLS Series ... ............ .... .... .. ... 351

:
Magnetic Coupled Rodless cylinder
RMS Series .. .. .. ..... .... ........ .. ... . 369

- - RMT Series(ball bearing).......... 373
11111
Actuator
Rotary table cylinder
Air gripper
- - HFZ Series ............. .... .. ... .. ... ... 387

- - HFP Series ................. .. . ... . 387
- - HFY Series .. . .. . 387
- - HFRSeries .......................... .. 387
Twist clamp cylinder, Clamp cylinder
- - ACK Series .. ... ... ..... ..... ........ .... 409
- - QCK Series ....... .... ... .... ...... ... .. -413
- - MCK Series ...... .. ... ..... .... ....... .. 417
Boosting Unclamping cylinder, Stopper cylinder, accessories
- - NPM Series ...... .. .. .... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 439

- - TW Series ....... .. . .. ... .... 443
- - Cylinder joint accessory... . . .. -453
- - Sensor switch..... .... 457
Accessories
Shock absorber
Polyurethane tubing, Fitting, Silencer, Speed Controller
- - Polyurethane tubing ..... .. ... ...... 486

1 - - One-Touch fittings: PC, POC Series ..439
,,. - - One-Touch fittings: threaded type ..... 490
- - One-Touch fittings : tube_tube type ... 497
- - Metal one-Touch fittings ... ... .. .. 501
- - Silencers .......... ... .... ... .... .... ..... 503
- - Speed controllers .. ....... ........... . 505
- - Fingervalve ........................... .. 508
L - - - - - - - ----=~ k Pilot no-return valve .... .. .. .. .. .. .. . 509
11111
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ _H_o_w_t_o_U
_s_e~ A_ir_T_A_C~P_ro_d_u_c_t~s
When designing, producing and using pneumatic system devices, one must be familiar with the requests and attentions of pneumatic components and pneumatic
system. Use and operate system devices under the situation that necessary examinations have been conducted and the machinery framework, pneumatic control loop
and the electrical control system of pneumatic system are ensured to be in safe condition.
For using our AirTAC products safely, the selection, operation and proper maintenance and management of the products are very important!
To guarantee to use safely, please make sure to operate according to this instruction completely!
Requests of Pneumatic System on Design-Selector and User
0 Attention
0 Warning
• Add shields in the place with direct sunshine.
• Confirmation of product models and specifications prior to use The designer of
pneumatic system and selector of pneumatic components shall consider the • In case the system is used in the place with large humidity and much dust or
security and faults that may occur according to the requests on performance of the place with water drop, oil drop, cutting oil and dispersing cooling fluid,
pneumatic system and decide the specification of pneumatic components proper protective measures shall be taken.
according to the latest product catalog and data. If it is necessary, they shall
make relevant analysis and experiment. When the system is used in some newly • The cylinder with magnet can not be used in the environment with strong
developed industries or special industries, they should cooperate with the magnetic field.
manufacturer of pneumatic components to carry out the selection.
0 Danger
0 Danger
• Special attention to the following conditions • In special temperature environment:
eonce the compressed air is wrongly used, it is dangerous. Thus the assembly, High temperature environment: please use seals resisting high temperature
operation and maintenance of the pneumatic equipment shall be done by Low temperature environment: moisture in loop may freeze and affect the
welltrained person with certain practical experience. action, at this moment, the moisture shall be eliminated to avoid freeze.
eBefore making sure that it is safe, prohibit to use pneumatic equipment or to
disassemble pneumatic components from the equipment.
0 Warning
• After confirming that the above safe treatment has been conducted, cut off the
power and air source, release the remaining air, and conduct maintenance or
disassembly on the equipment.
eBefore starting the equipment, make sure that the piston rod will not stick out
rapidly.
1~k·@·l 1t1¥•;,;;:;,,;;11m,:1;w1t1111.;,;,.;;,;1
1
0 Attention
• It is not allowed to use the system in the environment that includes corrosive gas,
chemicals (such as organic solvent), seawater, water and steam or the place
with the above substances.
• It is not allowed to use it in the place with explosive gas. (If necessary, consider
adopting explosion-proof measure).
• It is not allowed to use it in the situation with oscillation and impact, or the
component capacity to resist to oscillation and impact shall accord with the
specification in this catalog.
• It is not allowed to use ii in the place that has heat source around or is influenced
by radiant heat. Otherwise, it is better to adopt measures to interdict the radiant
heat.
-
How to Use AirTAC Products
Attentions on the Design and Selection of Pneumatic System
0 Attention • When designing the system, please consider the actions during restarting after
emergency stop and abnormal stop.
• Use the product under the stipulated application condition and scope The design shall make sure that the system will not cause personal injury or
This catalogue stipulates the operation scope and condition. Please operate component damage when it restarts. In addition, for safely operation, please
according to it. Any operation beyond the scope and condition may cause design return device.
fault of and damage to the components, even result in danger and harm.
Therefore, please contact our company in case that the products are used • Intermediate stop
under the condition beyond the specified application condition and range, When the cylinder stop in the middle position controlled by three-position
or any other fluid except the compressed air is used. closed center type valve, due to the compressibility of the air, it is hard to
control the precise position of the cylinder. In addition, it can not avoid the air
• Please design and install protective devices in the device part which may leakage of valve or cylinder absolutely, so the stop position is difficult to keep
cause personal injury. The drive part of the cylinder may cause personal on for a long time. Therefore, please design necessary devices when a long-
injury, please design and install protective devices to make sure people term stay in stop position is required.
cannot directly contact the drive part when it works.
• Synchronization of several cylinders in the system
• Please effectively fasten the drive part of the cylinder to avoid the looseness Due to the compressibility of the air, it is difficult to control several cylinders
of connective part. Especially under the circumstance with high action precisely by the same direction control valve. In this situation , special devices
frequency or larger oscillation, effective fastness must be strengthened. or loop shall be taken into consideration when designing.
• Design necessary buffer loop or buffer devices • Please use the purified dry air in the air loop.
When drive objects have higher speed or heavier weight, it is difficult to Do not use the air with synthetic oil (including chemicals and organic solvent),
absorb impact solely by cylinder cushion. Therefore, buffer loop or external salinity and corrosive gas to avoid component damage or poor action.
buffer must be designed or used to absorb the impact. Moreover, the rigidity
of the machinery devices must be considered.
I
Attention for the Use of Lubricant for Pneumatic System

0 Danger
• When designing the system, the devices and personal safety shall be
considered under the situation of power failure or air failure. For the
0 Attention
clamping framework, if the pressure of system loop declines due to power • Generally, the pneumatic components have been lubricated by grease when
failure and air failure, ii will result in falling off of the components and further producing . Therefore, they can be used without additional lubrication for a long
the harm on machinery devices and people, therefore, it is necessary to time.
consider designing antifalling loop or devices.
• In case of using additional lubrication, please use turbine oil (without additive)
• When designing the system, please consider the possibility that power IS0-VG32. Engine oil, spindle oil or other oils are not allowed to avoid soaking
source may produce faults Please adopt relevant measures to make sure and expanding of the seals like NBR.
that the drive devices such as air pressure and electrical power will not
result in personal injury or damages of devices when the power source has • If lubrication is stopped in the midway, the original lubricated grease in side
faults . may have been flushed off, then the lack of lubrication will cause poor action
of elements and accelerate the abrasion of relevant parts. Therefore, please
• Please make a loop that can prevent it from flying out when designing system. make sure to supply oil constantly and an oil misting device with proper flow
When pneumatic system is debugged or overhauled after releasing the shall be equipped.
remaining pressure, the system starts to pressurize the piston at one side,
and the driven object may be pushed in high speed. In this situation , please
design loop or device which can prevent cylinder from rapidly flying out to
0 Warning
avoid personal injury or machinery damage. • When lubricating the compressed air, the oil mist quantity can not surpass
25mg/m.
0 Warning • When the system runs normally, the oil mist quantity is set as 0.2-1 drop or
0.5-5 drops/1OOOL.
• When designing the system, please consider the action status in emergency
stop situation.
The design shall make sure that the action of cylinder will not cause personal • The simple method for testing the oil mist quantity is: put one piece of white
injury or component and device damage under the situation that the system paper at the port of cylinder control valve which is the most far from lubricator,
is in abnormal status such as emergency stop or power failure and that the after a while, the white paper takes on lemon yellow. If there are oil drops
safety devices and the machinery stop. falling down from the while paper, it indicates the excessive lubrication.
111111
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ _H_o_w_t_o_U
_s_e~ A_ir_T_A_C~P_ro_d_u_c_t~s
Requests of Pneumatic System to Compressed Air

I Tubing and Installation of Pneumatic System
0 Attention 0 Attention
• The compressed air ejected by air compressor can not be • Please obey the following stipulations on the entwining method of sealant tape when
directly used in the air loop, since it has certain moisture, oil connecting fitting and tube. Please start to entwine sealant tape from 1st-2nd screw
content and dust, which should be gaseous in the high thread at the front part of tube thread and on both of positive direction and inverse
temperature of about 140-1 ?0'C through the compressor. direction of the thread. If the sealant tape entwines out of the front part of the tubing
thread, it will be torn into fragments which will cause faults and wrong action if they get in
• Make sure to use compressed air that has been purified the system .
+The filtration precision of common machinery and common
pneumatic loop is < 50µm; ~
a:
v ~
a:
X
+The filtration precision of logic elements, jet elements and air "'~
C.
Coat several drops
"'
~
C.
If overmuch of
sealant is coated
motors is < 10µm; -g· / of sealant in the
-g· in the front part of
a:
• middle of part of
a: 6 screw, the sealant
+The filtration precision of food, medicine, electron, tobacco "'<D screws. "'<D f.!lll" / will enter the device
and liquor and pneumatic bearing is < 5µm; ["' 1~111
h,
["' ., to causes air leakage
•• and poor action.
0
•
Danger
The oil mist in compressed air may gather in the container of
1f
v
1f
X
~ .,;,,;,, -·
the seal adhesive
~ )'-''"' ""~·. ,.
[ [ tape will be tigh-
tened and enter
gas tank, pipeline and pneumatic system and forms 'C "'<D "'<D
'C
combustibles which may cause harm to pneumatic system . 1 causes air leak-
·' - age and poor
action.
• The degenerative lubricant will make rubber, plastic and seals
• When connecting the tubing, please fasten with proper torque to prevent air leakage and
materials go bad and block the port, which may cause action
thread damage.
failure of valve.
Table one: Reference value of Fasten torque Unit: N.m
Connective thread M3 MS 1/8' 1/4" 3/8" 1/2' 3/4" 1"
• Moisture and dust will cause erosion and rustiness of metal Fasten torque 0.3- 0.6 1.0- 1.5 7.0- 9.0 12- 14 22-24 28- 30 28-30 36- 40
parts, abrade and trap the action parts, block the ports and
lead to transmission abnormity of air pressure signal. In cold
area, the freezing of moisture will cause freeze and frost-crack
of pipeline and the failure of elements and components.
0 Warning
Pay attention to the following matters when using nylon tube or polyurethane tube
materials:
• It is not allowed to use the compressed air with harmful gas
• Please use flame retardant tube or metal tubing in the environment with high
(such as acid and alkali) .Acid and alkali will cause damage to
internal parts of pneumatic components. temperature spark;
The proof pressure is different according to the bore size of tube and the working
temperature
0 Warning
Table two: Reference data of maximum proof pressure (Unit: kgf/cm' )
• The compressed air without the content of oxygenated oil of air OD/ ID(mm) 4/2. 5 5/3 6/4 8/6 10/7.5 12/9 14/ 11 16/1 2 22/17 28/22
compressor, tar and carbon shall be used. Maximum pressure Nylon tube 28 31 25 19 24 18 15 18 15 15
(-40"C-20"C) PU tube 10 11 9 9 9 9 -
Minimum bending radius Nylon tube 25 2 30 50 60 75 90 95 125 160
• If the oxygenated oil , tar and carbon get into air pressure (mm) PU tube 6 7 9 16 17 25
elements and become additive to them, the resistance of
Using in different working temperatures, +30"C +40"C +50"C +60"C +70°C
slipping parts will be increased and poor action will be caused. the maximum proof pressure shall multiply
The mixture of oxygenated oil, tar and carbon with lubricant the following coefficient. 0.83 0.72 0.64 0.57 0.47
will abrade the slipping parts of air pressure elements.
• The pipeline shall be cleaned with compressed air prior to connecting the tubing and
• II is not suitable to use dry air in air pressure elements. Please fittings to the pneumatic components.
use the elements corresponding to ultra-dry air. The ultra-dry
compressed air will shorten the service life of air pressure
elements.
111111
Unit Conversion
Convert American system and British system unit to international (SI) unit
13%Hldi IM¥HUN 11\Mniiliiili

American and british system Conversion rates International American and british system Conversion rates International American and british system Conversion rates International
1 in = 25.4 mm 1 in' = 6.45 cm' 1 litre = 0.001 m'
1 ft = 0.3048 m 1 ft' = 0.093 m' 1 cu.ft. = 0.0283 m'
1 mile = 1609.3 m 1 cu .in. = 16.39 cm'
1 micron = 10~ m 1 gal(imp) = 4.546 L
MiWiii i,h• 1 1
1
gal(us)
fluid oz.(imp)
= 3.79
= 28.41
L
ml
American and british system Conversion rates International
1 psi = 6.89 kPa
1 fluid oz.(us) = 29.57 ml
1 kgf/cm' = 98.07 kPa
1 lb = 453.6 g
1 bar = 100 kPa
1 cwt = 50.8 kg
=
1 ton(imp) = 1016 kg
1
1
bar
atmosphere =
14.5
98.1
psi
kPa
lifoiliihl
1 ton(us) = 907.2 kg American and british system Conversion rates International
1" (STANDARD) = 101.33 kPa
1 tonne = 1000 kg
1 cm water = 97.89 Pa 1 lbf = 4.45 N
1 in water = 248.64 Pa 1 kgf = 9.81 N
1 mm mercury = 133.3 Pa 1 kp(kilopond) = 9.81 N
IM-ini%iffifii 1 in mercury = 3.39 kPa 1 poundal = 138.3 mN
American and british system Conversion rates International 1 Torr = 133.3 Pa 1 ton force = 9.964 kM
1 inlb = 0.113 Nm 1 ft water = 0.0298 bar
1 ft lb = 1.356 Nm 1 bar = 33.33 ft water
1 kgm = 9.807 Nm
1 ft poundal = 0.0421 Nm IHMHhl
Unit of work and energy
Temperature unit
1 lbft/sec = 1.356 w
American and british system Conversion rates International 1 kgm/sec = 9.807 w
American and british system International
1 lbft = 1.356 J 1 Nm/sec = 1 w
(°F-32) x 5/9 = "C 1 Nm = 1 J 1 Joule/sec = 1 w
K-273.15 = "C 1 kgm = 9.807 J 1 H.P.(imp) = 745.7 w
1 kW/hr = 3.6 MJ
lii.Vhiil •lfflliHHIMlt:ti
Cv value = Unit full name Abbreviation
It's the constant value of flow. when the water flow(US gal/min)is under 60°F, the D- value of
pressure between intake and outlet is 1psi (Cv x 1000= L/min) Pascal Pa
kv value = It's the constant value of flow. when the water flow(L/min)is under 20°C, the D-value of Newton N
pressure between intake and outlet is 1kgf/cm' metre m
KV value = It's the constant value of flow. when the water flow(m'/min)is under 20°C. the D-value of litre L
pressure between intake and outlet is 1kgf/cm' Watt w
S.T.P = Standard temperature and pressure (0°C and 101 .3kPa absolute pressure) Newton metre Nm
N.T.P = Normal temperature and pressure (20°C and 101.3kPa absolute pressure) Jonie J
M.S.C = Standard of metric syctem (15°C and 101.3kPa absolute pressure) Megajoule MJ
ANR = Temperature: 20°C and relative humidity: 65 % Kelvin K
Equivalence conversion
1 psi =6.895 kPa =0.07 kg/cm' =0.06895 bar =0.0703 aim

1 standard atmosphere =14.7 psi =101.3 kPa =1.01325 bar
1 kg/cm' =98.07 kPa =14.22 psi =28.96 ins mercury
1 ft lb =0.13826 kgm =1 .356 Nm
1L =1000 cm' =1 .7598 pint =106 mm'
1 tonne =1000 kg =0.984 ton =2205 lb
1 m' =10' cm'
1 cu ft/min. =28.3 I/min =0.0283 m'/min
1 Pa =28.3 I/min =0.0283 m'/min
111111
Control components--Valves
Summarization of
control components
To make system realize the best performance,
the control components must be precise and
accurate. Component with good performance
is the precondition to realize precise and
exact action. AirTAC has many types of
control components for your choice:
1. Direction control valve-Solenoid valve.
2. Direction control valve-Air valve.
3. Direction control valve-manual control,
mechanical control and other valves.
4. Fluid control valve-two way solenoid
valve, angle seat valve.
Solenoid valve Fluid control valve

3V1 Series ....... ..... ......................... .... 14 2S Series solenoid valve ....................... 98
3V2 Series....... .................................. 16 2KS Series solenoid valve .................... 102
3V2M Series .... ........ ........................... 18 2W Series solenoid valve ..................... 1Q6
3V3 Series ....... ..... ......................... .... 20 2KW Series solenoid valve ................... 110
3V100- 300 Series ........................ . ...... 22 2L Series solenoid valve ... ....... ........ .... 114
4V100-400 Series .. ... ................... ....... 28 2KL Series solenoid valve .......... .. ........ 118
4M100-300 Series .... ........................... 36 2V Series solenoid valve .......... ······ ·····124
Manifold ........ ................... ................... 38 2P Series solenoid valve .......... .......... ·126
ESV Series(ISO Standard) ............. ......... 40 2J Series angle seat valve ................... · 127
Air valve
3A 100-300 Series .... .... ........................ 52
4A100-400 Series ................................ 55
Manifold ........ ... ................................. .. 63
EAV Series(ISO Standard) ...................... 65
Manual control, mechanical control and other valves

4H Series hand lever valve ...................... 74
3L, 4L Series Push-Pull valve ..... ............ 76
HSV Series hand slide valve ..................... 78
4HV, 4HVL Series hand lever valve
..... 79
S3 Series control valve ........................... 81
M3 Series control valve ............... ......... .. 83
MS Series control valve.. ........................ 85
CM3 Series control valve....................... . 87
ZM3 Series control valve....................... . 91
3F, 3FM, 4F Series foot pedal valve
.................................................. ........... 93
ASC Series flow control valve.................. 95
NRV Series non-return valve ................... 96
The selection of valves 13 Notice for Application and Maintenance
1. Form selection
According to application requests and conditions, choose the form of valves:
0 Warning
direct acting or pilot. To maintain normal and good working state of pneumatic system.the following
maintenance work is necessary in actual use:
Valves 2. Selection of control mode 1. Examine application pressure: regularly examine whether the pressure is
According to the control requests upon application, choose the control mode:
air, electrical, manual or mechanical control. normal in work;
2. Examine the filter situation of the compressed air: regula rly examine whether
3. Selection of function of valves
The function of valves is selected upon the working requirements: two-position filters and oil misting device work normally and whether their pollution
two-way, two-position three-way, two-position five-way and three-position five- situation is normal;
way; or middle-sealed, middle leakage and midway pressurizing type, etc. 3. Examine whether system pipeline leaks;
4. Examine whether solenoid valves act slowly and whether the exhaust-
4. Selection of model and specification
Select the model and specification of valves upon the flow requirements of situation is normal;
application. 5. Examine whether the adjustment of oil quantity of oil misting device is normal;
5. Selection of installation way 6. Please read relative content in this manual about the requirements of
The installation way is selected upon the installation requirement of valves: solenoid valves to air quality and application environment, the pipeline
pipe-joint type or containerized type. connection of solenoid valves and the lubrication of solenoid valves;
6. Selection of electric parameters 7. The switching action of valves shall be guaranteed regularly under
Select the electric model of valves upon actual application requirement: voltage, low-frequency application, at least once switching shall be conducted for each
power and grommet type. month.
Attentions on Design and Selection

0 Attention
1. Correctly understand and apply midway stop function of reversing valve
In the place with three-position middle-sealed or middle-pressure reversing valves
to carry out the midway stop of piston in cylinder (double axes or adjustable double
axes), as the air has compressibility, it is difficult to have correct and precise
position stop. In addition, it is not available to make sure that leakage will not occur in
the valves and cylinders, thus it cannot stay in the position of midway stop for a long
time. Other ways shall be taken to maintain a long-term stop.
2. Pay attention to the influences of back pressure caused by the consolidation of
valves on the system;
In the place with consolidation of valves, pay attention to the wrong action of
actuators caused by back pressure; especially pay attention to the place using
three-position midway leakage reversing valves and the place driving single acting
cylinder. Individual intake and exhaust must be carried out in the place that-ay
have wrong action.
3. Fully consider the release of remaining pressure between reversing valves and
cylinders;
Considering the system examination need, the function of releasing remaining
pressure shall be set up. Especially in the place using three-position midway
leakage reversing valves, the remaining pressure between reversing valves and
cylinders must be eliminated.
4. The temporary power supply and air supply of dual controlled valves.
Routine dual electric (air) control valves have memory function (except for three-
position valves), in the place with temporary power supply, the duration of power
supply shall be above 0.1s to make sure that the valve has changed its direction.
5. Application of lowest pressure for air supply
The requirement of lowest application pressure shall be considered for the internal
pilot-oriented valves, while direct drive valves or external pilot-oriented valves are
not limited by lowest application pressure.
6. Use in vacuum condition
If the valves are used in the place with vacuum switching, measures to prevent the
inhalation of dust from suction cup shall be adopted. Moreover, direct drive or
external pilot-oriented reversing valves shall be selected in vacuum condition.
13 The Application of Fluid Control Valves Temperature of the fluid:

1. Refer to temperature scope of each type and the influences of the factors such
0 Attention
as sealed materials, coil insulation, power and air supply. For application in
special circumstance, please contact the supplier.
Pipeline:
1. Completely clean pipeline to eliminate miscellaneous chip, oil pollution and dust.
2. Miscellaneous chip of whorl and sealed materials shall be prevented from
Applied fluid: Valves
1. Fluid grade
entering the pipeline when installing pipeline connection (when adopting whorl
When selecting the valves type, make sure that the fluid is adapted to the
sealant tape, at least one section of thread shall be preserved).
materials of valves. Generally speaking, the maximum viscosity of fluid is 50cst.
3. Pay attention to connective pipe direction (IN, OUT), IN (entrance) or other
Please contact the supplier for specific data.
marks in each interface.
<Reference> Standard materials
4. Never make the coils bear outside force, and only use spanner to clinch the
Valve body: brass or BC6, seal: NBR, coil: insulated B step
installation position in pipeline when revolving into pipeline.
The above valves are used in water, air and oil medium. If they are used in other
5. The pipeline shall not connect the ground; otherwise galvanic corrosion will be
materials, please refer to "option list" and "adaptable fluid sheet". There will be
caused.
a small difference in types.
6. Install overflow valves in circuit to prevent the fluid accumulation in pipeline.
2. Fluid quality
The impurity in fluid will accelerate the abrasion of valve cup and iron core.
Granule that adheres to the iron core and slipping plane will decrease the
function of valves and cause invalidity of seal function . Filter shall be installed in
Wiring: the front of the entrance of valves to avoid the above problems. Net limit of
1. The minimum area of section of the wire is 0.5mm'. 80-100 is normally recommended.
2. Electrical circuit shall be adopted to prevent the vibration in connective points. 3. Lubrication
3. Associate overvoltage suppressor and overvoltage suppressor in coils when Lubrication is not necessary for this valve, but lubricated air will extend its life.
electrical components are easily damaged by overvoltage. 4. If the valves are used in inflammable oil and air, the leakage at the entrance
4. The allowable voltage scope is within -10% - +10% of the rated voltage. If a and exit shall be prevented.
better response of DC power is required, the voltage scope shall be within ±5% 5. If impurity or oil is not allowed in the fluid, the valves without the need of lubri-
of the rated voltage and voltage drop can be measured at the connective points cation shall be applied.
between the leading wires and coils. 6. In case the application condition approaches the limit of valves, the parameter
5. When it is AC power, the backswing voltage is 20% or above of the rated voltage. of the option and fluid may be different from that of routine application. Make
When it is DC power, it is 2% or above of the rated voltage. proper choice according to actual use situation.
Installation:
1. When installing, the coils shall be made upward . The inlet port and outlet port
should be kept horizontal.
2. Never heat coils and insulation components, otherwise they will burn the coils.
Anti-freezing heater can only be used in pipeline and valves body.
3. Never install in the place with violent vibration.
If it cannot be avoided, the arm length shall be regulated to the minimum to avoid
resonance.
Storage:
1. If the water fluid will be kept for a long time after using, the moisture shall be
completely eliminated to avoid corrosion in rubber part.
Long-term open or stop of the valves:

1. The frequency of switching valves depends on the type and performance of the
fluid. When using purified water as standard, the valves shall be switched at least
once every ten days. If the period is longer than ten days, system test devices
shall be installed. Valves shall not be used in the following working environment
such as emergent circuit breaker.
11111
13 Installation of Direction Control Valve

0 Danger
Although direction valves can be installed in any direction, due to the vibration of 5. Install reversing valves closely to cylinder as possible as you can to
devices or flowing of liquids such as condensate and oil to the coil part of solenoid reduce air consumption and achieve a quick response.
valve, poor action of direction valve will be caused. 6. Please make sure completely insert the tubing and use it after
Valves Please take care during installation. confirming that the tubing cannot be pulled out.
1. The influence of vibration on sliding column in solenoid valve shall be avoided. 7. Although our product coils are set as 100% ED, if the product is
During installation, the vibration direction may form a right angle to the action energized for a long time, overheating will be caused, insulation will be
direction (axial direction) of sliding column in solenoid valve to avoid the influence deteriorated and energy will be lost. Solenoid valve with memory
of vibration to sliding column in solenoid valve. function shall be considered to shorten power supply time and extend
-tr Single electric control solenoid valve the service life of coils and save energy consumption under the
~
OThe coil shall be installed upward or horizontally. situation of long-timeconstant power supply.
8. Manual button is not allowed to be used when solenoid valve is
Ero
.........
Vibration direction X V
8
.........
Vibration direction v .........
Vibration direction
energized.
9. The application voltage of solenoid valve shall be kept within the
specified voltage range to avoid causing poor action of valves or
burning coils.
10. As the solenoid valve is installed in the control tank, pay attention to
-tr Dual electric control solenoid valve
OThe coil shall be installed horizontally the ventilation and heat dispersing when ii is energized for a long time
to guarantee that the temperature inside of the tank is within the
IT1°..........1r8
temperature range for the safe application of solenoid valve;
Vibration direction X v
B
.........
Vibration direction
11. Interlock protection control circuit shall be designed to pre vent the
two coils of the dual electrical control solenoid valve from being
energized at the same time.
12. The blowhole in internal control piston of main valve and exhaust
2. To prevent condensate and oil from flowing into coil in solenoid valve, you'd outlet in pilot-oriented valve cannot be jammed or un smooth.
better install the coil upward or horizontally. 13. As solenoid valve in DC specification has polar indicator lights, pay
Installation legend: attention to the positive and negative poles when wiring. Connect "1 "
Attention condensate to the positive pole, and "2" to the negative pole. If connection is
~ ~
inversed, the indicator lights will not shine but valves can still work.
......... .........
ffo t Vibration direction
In addition: refer to page 8 in this manual for the content on the
lubrication, tubing and application environment of solenoid
valve .
V Vibration direction X Vibration direction v

~
Attention
l condensate
~ [
-
Et1 , 1rrJ t
0
r1
1
I - 0
Vibration direction
X
.........
~
Vibration direction v
3. Blow away the miscellanies such as dust, oil pollution and chips in the pipeline to
avoid influencing the action and damage of valves.
4. The intake of internal pilot-oriented solenoid valve cannot throttle to prevent
wrong action caused by too large pressure drop when switching the direction.
llfll
Solenoid valve(3/2, 5/2, 5/3 way)
D Product series
Solenoid valve: 3V1Series 14 Solenoid valve: 3V2 Series 16 Solenoid valve: 3V2M Series 18
So/enoid
va ve
Solenoid valve: 3V3 Series 20 Solenoid valve: 3V100 Serles 22 Solenoid valve: 3V200 Series 24
Solenoid valve: 3V300 Series 26 Solenoid valve: 4V100 Series 28 Solenoid valve: 4V200 Series 30
Solenoid valve: 4V300 Series 32 Solenoid valve: 4V400 Series 34 Solenoid valve: 4M(NAMUR) Series 36
Manifold 38 Solenoid valve(ISO standard): ESV Series 40
D Installation and Application A

1. Before installing, be sure the valve hasn't been damaged via transportation.
2. It's suggested to use the medium lubricated by 40 µ m filter element. Be aware of the flow direction and port size.
3. Please notice whether the installation condition accords with technical requirements (such as ' voltage", "actuation
frequency", 'working pressure" and 'scope of application temperature"), then the equipment can be installed and used.
4. Notice the flow direction of air during installation, Pis the air intake, A{B) is the work port and R (S) is the exhaust outlet.
5. Take measure to avoid vibration and frozen.
6. Before using the fittings and tubes make sure they are clean . When connecting to fittings, be sure the PTFE Thread Seal
Tape is used correctly.
7. To keep the dust away, please use the silencer for the exhaust ports. Never forget to install dirt-proof boot in air intake and
outlet during dismounting.
8.After installing, please use the manual override to test valve first.
Solenoid valve(3/2 way) AlrTAC
3V1 Series
Specification
Model 3V1-M5 3V1 -06
Fluid Air(to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Acting Direct acting
Port size G) MS I 118"
Valve type 3 port 2 position
Lubrication Not required
3V1 Operating pressure 0- 0.8M Pa(0-114psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psi)
Temperature "C -20-70
Orifice size <D1 .2mm
Material of bodv Aluminum alloy
G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
D Symbol D Coil specification

A
ruIZ}-, Item Specitif1cat1on
RP Standard voltage AC220V, AC110V, AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
Scope of voltage AC:±15% DC:±10%
D Product feature Power consumption AC :3.5VA DC:3.0W
Protection IP65(D1N40050)
1. Direct acting type and normally closed mode, flexible in direction Temperature classification B Class
change. Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
2. No need to add oil for lubrication. Activating time 0.05 sec and below
3. Several valves can be installed integrately to save installation space. Max. frequency G) 10 cycle/sec
4. Affiliated manual devices are equipped to facilitate installation and <D The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
debugging.
5. Several standard voltage grades are optional. D Inner structure
D Flow chart No. Item No. Item

1 Connector 5 Armature
2 Gasket 6 0-ring
0.7 t - -"f===.:.::.::.::
3 Coil nut 7 Return spring
~ 0.6 r--~==--
~ 0.5 t-- ~=::=t 4 Coil 8 Body
~ 0.4 r--~=
i 0.3 .---=::::
~ 0.2
~ 0.1
r
g O o~ - ~
2s~ -~
so- ~7~5~ -1~0~0~ -
1~
2s- ~
1so
Flow Q: L/min
~
5 2M4 0 7d 6
D Ordering code W:l "'
Model
3V: Solenoid valve Port size Thread type
(3/2 way) Blank: PT
118" G:G
Code
T: NPT
! 1: 1 Series I MS Not this code
Port size
Electrical entry
MS: MS
Blank: Terminal
06: 118'
l:Grommet
Voltage
A:AC220V
B: DC24V
C:AC110V
E:AC24V
F: DC12V
3V1 Series
D Series connection
3V1
Product structure
Connection Amount\Q.TY 3V1 3V1-P30 3V1-P31 3V1-P32
3V1-D-D-1F 0 0
3V1-D -D-2F 2
3V1-D-D-nF n-1 2
Note: n is the number of junction valve, and n;,,3
D Ordering code for series
Port size Thread type

Blank: PT
1/8" G:G
T: NPT
M5 Not this code
Voltage
A:AC220V
B: DC24V Number of stations
C: AC110V 1F: 1 Station
E:AC24V 2F: 2 Station
F: DC12V 3F: 3 Station
Electrical entry 20F: 20 Station

Blank: Terminal
I: Grommet
The above codes have included the series accessories, so it is unnecessary to order the accessories
specially. But if you like, you could order as follows.
Code of accessories Accessory name Part code Part name Quantity

Coupling screw F-3V1002B Coupling screw(S) 2
3V1-P30
assembly F-3V1003B Coupling screw(M) 2
Coupling screw GOR20008N75 0-Ring 1
3V1-P31
assembly F-3V1004B Coupling screw(L) 2
F-3V1001B Fixed mounting 1
3V1-P32 Bracket assembly Cross round head
GSDA04008ZA screw 2
3V2 Series
Specification
Model 3V206 3V208
Flu id Air(to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Aeling Direct acting
Port size G) 118' I 114"
Orifice size 3.2mm'(Cv=0.18) I 3.4mm'(Cv=0.19)
3V2 Lu brication Not required
Operating I Common 0-0.8MPa(0-114psi)
pressure I vacuum -101.2kPa-0.1 MPa(-14.8-14.Spsi)
Material of body Aluminum alloy
(j) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
D Symbol NC. NO.
A A D Coil specification
ruIZ}vv ~
Rp
Item Spec1tificat1on
RP
Standard voltage AC220V, AC110V, AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
Scope of voltage AC:± 15% DC:± 10%
Power consumption AC:7VA DC:7.0W
Product feature Protection IP65(DIN40050)
2. Normally closed and normally open types are optional. Activating time 0.05 sec and below
3. Structure in coaxial blanking mode: leakage proof and large air flow. Max. frequency G) 10 cycle/sec
4. No need to add oil for lubrication. (j) The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
5. Affiliated manual devices are equipped to facilitate installation and
debugging.
D Ordering code
6. Several standard voltage grades are optional.
7. Can be used under vacuum condition.
Model
! 3V: Solenoid valve(3/2 way) I
D Flow chart
Code
Model: 3V208NC
!2: 2 Series I
Electrical entry
Port size Blank: Terminal
06: 1/8" I: Grommet
08: 114"
i I==•=====~=~=\I
8" 11 0 50
Flow: Umin
100 150 200 250 300 350
D Ordering code of accessories

Acting type
NC: Normally closed
NO: Normally opened
Voltage
A:AC220V
B: DC24V
C:AC110V
E:AC24V
F: DC12V
Valve type
!3V2: Solenoid valve(3/2 way) !
D Inner structure
13
No. Item No. Item

1 Pilot screw 9 Coil
2 Spacer 10 Armature
3 Spool 11 Washer
4 Spring 12 Coil nut
5 Body 13 Manual button
6 Washer 14 Connector
7 Electromagnet set 15 Gasket
8 Man drill
3V2 Series
D Dimensions
2-M4 x 0.7 d :7 3V2
65.5
A
EI)
13
29.5
Manual button
2-CD6 Countersink dp: 4

2-CD3.3 Thru.hole
- - -------------------------·----------------------------------------·----------------------------------------·----------------------------------------···--
2-M4 x0 .7 d :7
36.5
06:3-1/8"
08:3-1 /4"
<O a:i 29.5

c:,c:,
Manual button
-tt--f'-ft-++ 2-CD 6 Countersink dp: 4

2- CD 3.3 Thru.hole
llfll
3V2M Series
Specification
Model 3V2M
Port size (I) 1/8"
Orifice size 1.7mm' (Cv=0.1)
3V2M Exhaust type Centralized exhaust, Separated exhaust
Operating pressure 0-0.8MPa(0-114psi)
G) PTthread, G thread and NPTthread are available.
D Symbol NC NO
A A
Coil specification
Item Specit1f1cat1on
ruIZ}vv ~
Rp Standard voltage AC220V, AC110V, AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
RP
Scope of voltage AC:± 15% DC:±10%
D Product feature Power consumption AC:7VA DC7.0W
Protection IP65(DIN40050)
2. Normally closed and normally open types are optional.
Activating time 0.05 sec and below
3. Structure in coaxial blanking mode: leakage proof and large air flow.
Max. frequency (I) 1Ocycle/sec
4. No need to add oil for lubrication.
5. Affiliated manual devices are equipped to facilitate installation and G) The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
debugging.
6. Valve needs to be used with the sub-base and allows various connection
combinations to save space.
7. It is easy to examine when there are faults owning to the unified air
intake and exhaust and unified wiring.
8. Flexible combination and strong expansion capability can make any Model ~------e Electrical entry
combination or expansion of the numbers of direction control valves ! 3V2M: Solenoid valve(3/2 way, with manifold)! Blank: Terminal
that are connected. Voltage
I: Grommet
9. Can adjust the installation direction of special sub-base seal for NO or Acting type A:AC220V
NC functions. NC: Normally closed B: DC24V
NO: Normally opened C:AC110V
E:AC24V
D Flow chart
F: DC12V
Model: 3V2M
..
ffl,11
a.
::;;
I'! ~ - - - - - - -.. Thread type

~
Ill
3V2M: Solenoid valve Blank: PT
Number of stations
[ (3/2 wa , with manifold) G:G
1F: 1 Station
.[ T: NPT
2F: 2 Station D: Separated exhaust
'"
0
~ 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
20F: 20 Station
Flow: L/min
Note , Manifold kits contains manifold, seal and screw. The port size is only 1/8".
Inner structure
Model Code
! 3V2M: Solenoid valve(3/2 way, with manifold)! I R2: Blank plate for manifold!
12 No. Item
1 Spring Note , Blank plate kits contains blank plate and screw.
14
2 Body
3 Spool
4 Spacer
Washer Model
5
3V2M: Solenoid valve
6 Electromagnet set
(3/2 wa , with manifold)
7 Mandrill NC: Normally closed
8 Coil NO: Normally opened
9 Armature Voltage
10 Washer Number of stations
A:AC220V 1F: 1 Station
11 Coil nut Electrical entry
B: DC24V 2F: 2 Station
12 Manual button Blank: Terminal
C: AC110V
13 Gasket I: Grommet
E:AC24V 20F: 20 Station
14 Connector
F: DC12V
15 Pilot screw Exhaust type
Blank: Centralized exhaust
D: Separated exhaust
3V2M Series
D Dimensions
Valve's group(Termmal, Centralized exhaust)
1/8"
<'")
.....
lli!ID .....
<D
N
..,:
e
3V2M
I
N L1
L2
0
30
oo 0 Thru.hole
L1=24Xn+19, L2=24Xn+9
"n" means number of stations.
Valve's rou Terminal, Se araled exhaust
.....
<D
30
33
L1=24Xn+19, L2=24Xn+9
5 "n" means number of stations.
Valve's group(Grommet, Centralized exhaust)
1/8"
24 19 ~
L1=24Xn+19, L2=24Xn+9
Valve's group(Grommet, Separated exhaust)
L1 =24Xn+19, L2=24Xn+9
3V3 Series
Specification
Model 3V308
Port size G) 1/4"
Orifice size 11mm' (Cv=0.62)
3V3 Lubrication Not required
Operating I Common 0- 0.8MPa(0-114psi)
pressure I vacuum -101.2kPa-0.1 MPa(-14.8-14.5psi)
CD PTthread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
D Symbol NC. NO.
A A D Coil specification
ruIZ}vv ~
Rp Item Spec1tificat1on
RP
Standard voltage AC220V, AC110V, AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
D Product feature Power consumption AC:10VA DC:6.5W
2. Normally closed and normally open types are optional. Activating time 0.05 sec and below
3. Structure in coaxial blanking mode: leakage proof and large air flow. Max. frequency G) 10 cycle/sec
4. No need to add oil for lubrication. CD The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
debugging.
6. Several standard voltage grades are optional. D Ordering code
7. Can be used under vacuum condition .
Model
D Flow chart !3V: Solenoid valve(3/2 way) I Blank: PT
G:G
Model: 3V308NC
Code T: NPT
"'
0..
!3: 3 Series I
illllllll
Electrical entry
Port size Blank: Terminal
Ioa: 114" I: Grommet
Acting type Voltage

o O 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
A:AC220V
NC: Normally closed
Flow : L/min NO: Normally opened B: DC24V
C:AC110V
E:AC24V
F: DC12V
D Inner structure
12 13
No. Item No. Item

1 Pilot screw 9 Coil
2 Spool 10 Armature
3 Spring 11 Washer
4 Body 12 Coil nut
5 Washer 13 Manual button
6 Spacer 14 Gasket
7 Electromagnet set 15 Connector
8 Mandrill
3V3 Series
D Dimensions
2-M5 x 0.8d ; 10 30
"' -+- "'

"'
3V3
"'
"'
2-cP4.2
Thru .hole
- - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-M5x0 .8d : 10 30
"' -+- "'

"'
42
I
I
I ;;;
{!)
.... I "'
"' "' ~
3-1/4"
3V100 Series
Specification
Model 3V110-M5 3V1 20-M5 3V110-06 3V120-06
Actino Internal pilot or external pilot
Port size G) MS I 1/8"
Orifice size 5.Smm'(Cv=0.31) I 12.0mm'(Cv=0.67)
Lubrication (2) Not required
3V100 Operating pressure 0.15-0.8MPa(21-114psi)
® Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
equivalent are recommended.
D Symbol
10-NO 10-NC 20
A
D Coil specification
~ p R ~ ~PR Item Spec1tif1cation
Standard voltage AC220V,AC110V,AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
Scope of voltage AC: ± 15% DC:± 10%
Product feature Power consumption AC:2.SVA DC:2.SW
Temperature classification B Class
1. Pilot-oriented mode: Internal pilot or external pilot.
Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive
reaction.
Max. frequency G) 5 cycle/sec
3. Double control solenoid valves have memory function .
G) The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
4. Internal hole adopts special processing technology which has little
attrition friction , low start pressure and long service life.
debugging.
Model
8. Integrate with the manifold to save installation space.
!3V: Solenoid valve(3/2 way)
Code
! 1: 100 Series
Flow chart Valve type
10: Single solenoid
Model: 3V110-06-NO 20: Double solenoid
W: External pilot
Port size
i!l 1 111
MS: MS
06: 1/8"
Acting type
I Valve type Acting type
~ 01
8- 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 10
NC: Normally closed
Thread type
NO: Normally opened
Flow Q: L/min Port size Thread type
20 Not code
Blank: PT
1/8" G: G
Voltage t------1
T:NPT
A:AC220V
MS Not this code
B: DC24V
C:AC110V Electrical entry
E:AC24V Blank: Terminal
F: DC12V I: Grommet
Please refer to 38 for manifold specification and the order way.

3V100 Series
Inner structure D Dimensions
-~
3V100
No. Item No. Item NO. Item

1 Fixed plate 8 0-ring 15 Piston
2 Manual override 9 Body 16 Pilot screw
3 Override spring 10 Spool spring 17 0-ring
4 Piston 0-ring 11 Bottom cover gasket 18 Armature
5 Pilot body 12 Bottom cover 19 Coil I .
6 Spool packing 13 Screw 20 Coil net
7 Spool 14 Wear ring 21 Connector
2-<03.1
Manual
ovem e
3V200 Series
Specification
Model 3V210-06 3V220-06 3V210-08 3V220-08
Acting Internal pilot or external pilot
Port size CD ln=Out=1/8" I ln=Out=1/4"
Orifice size 14.0mm'(Cv=O. 78) I 16.0mm'(Cv=0.89)
Lu brication (2) Not required
G) PT thread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
® Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve lifespan. Lubricantslike ISOVG32 or
D Symbol equivalent are recommended.
10-NO 10-NC 20
A
Coil specification
~ p R ~ ~PR
Item
Standard voltage
Spec1tif1cat1on
AC220V, AC110V, AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
Scope of voltage AC: ± 15% DC:± 10%
Power consumption AC:3.5VA DC:3.0W
D Product feature
1. Pilot-oriented mode:lnternal pilot or external pilot. Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive Activating time 0.05 sec and below
reaction. Max. frequency CD 5 cycle/sec
3. Double control solenoid valves have memory function.
<D The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
attrition friction, low start pressure and long service life.
5. No need to add oil for lubrication . D Ordering code
debugging.
Model
!3V: Solenoid valve(3/2 way) I
Code
! 2: 200 Series I
Flow chart
Valve type
Model: 3V210 - 08- NO 10: Single solenoid
20: Double solenoid
W: External pilot
IRl
Port size
06: 1/8"
08: 1/4"
!1~1
a o ~ wo~~1~1wo1wo1~1~
Flow Q: L/min
10
Acting type
Valve type Acting type
NC: Normally closed
NO: Normally opened
Thread type
Blank: PT
20 Not code G: G
T: NPT
Voltage
Electrical entry
A:AC220V
B: DC24V Blank: Terminal
C:AC110V l:Grommet
E:AC24V
F: DC12V

3V200 Series
3V200
ltem\Model 3V210-06 3V210-08

D
<(
A 27 .7 28.7
B 0 1.5
C 22 22.5
D 16.7 16.5

3 Override spring 10 Spool spring 17 0-ring u
ltem\Model 3V210-06 3V210-08
4 Piston 0-ring 11 Bottom cover gasket 18 Armature <(
D A 27.7 28.7
5 Pilot body 12 Bottom cover 19 Coil
B 0 1.5
C 22 22.5
D 16.7 16.5
ltem\Model 3V21 0-06 3V210-08

A 81 .4 82.4
B 0 1.5
C 22 22.5
D 70.4 70.2
ltem\Model 3V210-06 3V210-08

A 81.4 82.4
B O 1.5
C 22 22.5
D 70.4 70.2
3V300 Series
Specification
Model 3V310-08 3V320-08 3V310-10 3V320-10
Actina Internal pilot or external pilot
Port size G) ln=Out=1/4" I ln=Out=3/8"
Orifice size 25.0mm'(Cv=1.39) I 30.0mm'(Cv=1 .67)
Lu brication ® Not required
3V300 Operating pressure 0.15-0 .8MPa(2H 14psi)
Temperature 't -20-70
Material of bodv Aluminum allov
D Symbol equivalent are recommended.
10-NO 10-NC 20
A D Coil specification
~ p R ~ ~PR Item Spec1t1f1cat1on
Standard voltage AC220V,AC110V,AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
Scope of voltage AC: ± 15% DC: ±10%
D Product feature Power consumption AC:3.5VA DC:3.0W
1. Pilot-oriented mode: Internal pilot or external pilot. Temperature classification B Class
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive Electri cal entry Terminal, Grommet
reaction. Activating time 0.05 sec and below
3. Double control solenoid valves have memory function. Max. frequency G) 5 cycle/sec
4. Internal hole adopts special processing technology which has little <D The maximum actuation frequen cy is in the no-load state.
6. Affiliated manual devices are equipped to facilitate installation and D Ordering code
debugging.
Model
!3V: Solenoid valve(3/2 way) I
Code
Flow chart
!3: 300 Series I
Model: 3V310-10-NO Valve type
10: Single solenoid
20: Double solenoid
W: External pilot
i!! l11111~1
8" O O 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
Flow Q: L/min
Port size
08: 1/4"
10: 3/8"
10
Acting type
NC: Normally closed

Thread type
NO: Normally opened
Blank: PT
20 Not code G:G
T: NPT
Voltage
Electrical entry
A:AC220V
B: DC24V Blank: Terminal
C: AC110V I: Grommet
E:AC24V
F: DC12V
-·
3V300 Series

69
3V300

3 Override spring 10 Spool spring 17 0-ring
4 Piston 0-ring 11 Bottom cover gasket 18 Armature
5 Pilot body 12 Bottom cover 19 Coil
I .
Solenoid valve(5/2 way,5/3 way) AlrTAC
4V100 Series
D Specification
4V130C-M5 4V130C-06
4V1 10-M5 4V110-06
Model 4V130E-M5 4V130E-06
4V120-M5 4V120-06
4V130P-M5 4V130P-06
..... Acting
Port size G) ln=Out=M5
Internal pilot or external pilot
ln=Out=1 /8"
4V100 5.5mm' 5.0mm' 12.0mm' 9.0mm'
Orifice size
(Cv=0.31) (Cv=0.28) (Cv=0.67) (Cv=0.50)
.. Valve type
Operating pressure
5 port 2 position 5 port 3 position 5 port 2 position
0.15-0.8MPa(21-114psi)
5 port 3 position

D Symbol
10 20
Max. frequency ® 5 cycle/sec 3 cycle/sec 5 cycle/sec 3 cycle/sec
~
RPS
rmfilillF
RPS 4V110-M5:120g 4V110-06:120g
Weight 200g 200g
30C 30E 30P 4V120-M5:175g 4V120-06:175g
~
RP S ~~ G) PTthread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
® Once lubricated air is used, continuewithsame medium to optimisevalvelife span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
@ The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
D Product feature
1. Pilot-oriented mode:lnternal pilot or external pilot. Coil specification
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive
Item Spec1t1f1cat1on
reaction.
Standard voltage AC220V,AC110V, AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
3. Three position solenoid valves have three kinds of central function
for your choice.
Power consumption AC :2.5VA DC:2.5W
4. Double control solenoid valves have memory function .
attrition friction, low start pressure and long service life. Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
6. No need to add oil for lubrication. Activating time 0.05 sec and below
7. It is available to form integrated valve group with the base to save
installation space.
debugging.
Model
D Flow chart j 4V: Solenoid valve(5/2, 5/3 way) I
Model: 4V110- M5 Code

j 1: 100 Series
Valve type
1!111111i
i O O 100 200
Flow Q: L/min
300 400 500 600
I
10: Single solenoid 5/2 way
20: Double solenoid 5/2 way
30C: Double solenoid 5/3 way closed center
30E: Double solenoid 5/3 way exhaust center
30P: Double solenoid 5/3 way pressure center
Port size
W: External pilot
MS: MS
06: 1/8"
Model: 4V110- 06
Thread type
Voltage Port size Thread type
t!Wl lffll
A:AC220V Blank: PT
B: DC24V 1/8" G:G
C:AC110V T: NPT
E:AC24V MS Notthis code
F: DC12V
0 O O 200 400 600 800 1000
Electrical entry
Flow Q: L/min
Blank: Terminal
I: Grommet
4V100 Series
~ -
Modellltem A B C D E F G
4V110-M5 M5x0.8 27 14.7 0 14 21.2 0
4V110-06 1/8" 28 14.2 1 16 20.2 3
I .
~- -~

1 Connector 9 Wear ring 17 Override spring Modellltem C D E F G
2 Coil net 10 Bottom cover 18 Manual override 4V120-M5 57.7 0 14 64.3 0
3 Coil 11 Fixed screw 19 Spring holder 4V120-06 57.2 16 63.2 3
4 Armature 12 Spool spring 20 Return spring
Bottom cover
5 Fixed plate 13 21 Side cover
gasket
6 Piston 14 Spool 0-ring 22 Spring holder
7 Pilot kit 15 Spool
8 Body 16 Piston 0-ring
Modellltem A B C D E F G
4V130-M5 M5x0.8 27 57.7 0 14 64.3 0
4V130-06 1/8" 28 57.2 16 63.2 3
*"*
4V200 Series
D Specification
4V230C-06 4V230C-08
4V210-06 4V210-08
Model 4V230E-06 4V230E-08
4V220-06 4V220-08
4V230P-06 4V230P-08
Port size CD ln=Out=Exhaust= 1/8" ln=Out=1 /4" Exhaust=1/8"
4V200 14.0mm' 12.0mm' 16.0mm' 12.0mm'
Orifice size
(Cv=0.78) (Cv=0.67) (Cv=0.89) (Cv=0.67)
Valve type 5 port 2 position 5 port 3 position 5 port 2 position 5 port 3 position
Operating pressure 0.15-0.8MPa(21-114psi)
D Symbol Max. frequency ® 5 cycle/sec 3 cycle/sec 5 cycle/sec 3 cycle/sec
10 20 4V210-06:220g 4V210-08:220g
Weight 360g 360g
~ ~
4V220-06:320g 4V220-08:320g
RPS RPS
G) PT thread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
30C 30E 30P ® Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32or
~
RPS ~~ equivalent are recommended.
@The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
D Product feature Coil specification

Item Spec1t1f1cat1on
1. Pilot-oriented mode:lnternal pilot or external pilot. Standard voltage AC220V,AC11 0V, AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive Scope of voltage AC:± 15% DC:± 10%
reaction. Power consumption AC:3.5VA DC:3.0W
3. Three position solenoid valves have three kinds of central function for Protection IP65(DIN40050)
your choice. Temperature classification B Class
4. Double control solenoid valves have memory function. Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
5. Internal hole adopts special processing technology which has little Activating time 0.05 sec and below
7. It is available to form integrated valve group with the base to save D Ordering code
installation space.
debugging.
9. Several standard voltage grades are optional. Model
!4V: Solenoid valve(5/2, 5/3 way) I
Code
Flow chart !2: 200 Series I
Valve type
Model: 4V210 - 06
i!ira11
W: External pilot
Port size
8' 0 0 300 600 900 1200 1500 06: 1/8"
Flow Q: L/min 08: 1/4"
Thread type
Voltage
Blank: PT
A:AC220V
Model: 4V210-08 G:G
B: DC24V
T:NPT
C:AC110V
d!f~ 1111
E:AC24V Electrical entry
F: DC12V Blank: Terminal
l:Grommet
! :' 400 800 1200 1600

Flow Q: L/min
Mil••
4V200 Series
4V200
"'
M "'
M
..,. ..,.
...: ...:
"' "'

1 Connector 9 Wear ring 17 Override spring
2 Coil net 10 Bottom cover 18 Manual override E
3 Coil 11 Fixed screw 19 Spring holder 0
4 Armature 12 Spool spring 20 Return spring 3
Bottom cover
5 Fixed plate 13 21 Side cover
gasket
Modellltem A B C D E
4V230-06 118" 118" 18 76.4 0
4V230-08 118" 114' 21 74.9 3
4V300 Series
D Specification
4V330C-08 4V330C-10
4V310-08 4V310-10
Model 4V330E-08 4V330E-10
4V320-08 4V320-10
4V330P-08 4V330P-10
Port size CD ln=Out=Exhaust=1 14" ln=Out=3/8" Exhaust=114"
4V300 Orifice size
25.0mm' 18.0mm' 30.0mm' 18.0mm'
(Cv=1.40) I (Cv=1 00) (Cv=1.68) I (Cv=1.00)
Valve type 5 port 2 position I 5 port 3 position 5 port 2 position I 5 port 3 position
D Symbol Max. frequency @ 4 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec 4 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec
4V3 10-08:310g 4V310-10:310g
10 20 Weight 450g 450g
4V320-08:400g I 4V320-10:400g I
~
RP S
~
RPS G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
30C 30E 30P
~
RPS @ The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
Product feature
Item Specitif1cation
1. Pilot-oriented mode:lnternal pilot or external pilot. Standard voltage AC220V,AC110V,AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive reaction . Scope of voltage AC:± 15% DC:± 10%
3. Three position solenoid valves have three kinds of central function for Power consumption AC:3.5VA DC:3.0W
your choice.
4. Double control solenoid valves have memory function.
Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
7. It is available to form integrated valve group with the base to save D Ordering code
installation space.
debugging.
9. Several standard voltage grades are optional. Model
!4V: Solenoid valve(5/2, 513 way) I
Code
!3: 300 Series
Flow chart
Valve type
Model: 4V310- 08 10: Single solenoid 512 way
20: Double solenoid 512 way
W: External pilot
11i t111m
Port size
08: 114"
8" O O 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 10: 318"
Flow Q:Umin
Thread type
Voltage
Blank: PT
A:AC220V
G: G
Model: 4V310-10 B: DC24V
T: NPT
C:AC110V
!!if111111
E:AC24V
Electrical entry
F: DC12V
Blank: Terminal
l:Grommet

8" O O 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
Flow Q: L/min
·-
4V300 Series
E
0
4

2 Coil net 10 Bottom cover 18 Manual override
E
3 Coil 11 Fixed screw 19 Spring holder
0
4
5 Fixed plate 13 Bottom cover 21 Side cover
gasket
7 Pilotkit 15 Spool
Modellltem A B C D E
4V330-08 1/4" 1/4" 22 83.9 0
4V330-10 1/4" 3/8" 24 82.9 4
4V400 Series
Specification
Model 4V410-15 4V420-15 4V430C-15 4V430E-15 4V430P-15
Port size CD ln=Out=Exhaust= 1/2'
Orifice size 50.0mm'(Cv=2. 79) I 30.0mm'(Cv=1.68)
Valve type 5 port 2 position I 5 port 3 position
Proof pressure 1.5M Pa(215psi)
Lubrication ~ Not required
Max. frequency ® 3 cycle/sec
Weight 590g I 7200g I 770g
CD PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
(2) Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
Symbol
@ The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
10 20
~ RPS
~ RPS
a Coil specification
30C 30E 30P Item Specit1ficat1on
~ RPS
~
RPS ~
A B
Standard voltage AC220V,AC1 10V, AC24V, DC24V, DC1 2V
Scope of voltage AC: ± 15% DC:±10%
D Product feature Protection 1P65(D1N40050)
1. Pilot-oriented mode:lnternal pilot or external pilot. Electrical entry Termina, Grommet
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive reaction. Activating time 0.05 sec and below
3. Three position solenoid valves have three kinds of central fun ction for
your choice.
4. Double control solenoid valves have memory function . D Ordering code
7. It is available to form integrated valve group with the base to save Model
installation space. ! 4V: Solenoid valve(5/2, 5/3 way) I
Code
debugging.
! 4: 400 Series I
Valve type
D Flow chart W: External pilot
Model: 4V410-15 30P: Double solenoid 5/3 way pressure center
0. 7 r==i==i::::--r----i--,---,-,---,
m 0.6 1-~=::±=--+-'~ c:;:---t--+---+--, Port size
"-
:,a 0.5 1-=-l==+--+=--<t:---f"s.c-+--t--, !15: 1/2'
0.4 l -=l==-+----'P"-<--+-4 - --l's--t--,
0.3 l --l-c=-+-----"1"~ -t--"'r i~ +--\--+--, Voltage
Thread type
0.2 r---=-, ----..,- -,._--- r----.- . -------i A:AC220V
Blank: PT
0.1 l---lcc---+"._----i---'\--+--\-+-l--+-\----tt-------i B: DC24V
G: G
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 C:AC110V
T: NPT
Flow Q: L/min E:AC24V
F: DC1 2V Electrical entry
Blank: Terminal
I: Grommet
••
4V400 Series
a,
,_
ci

2 Coil net 10 Bottom cover 18 Manual override
3 Coil 11 Fixed screw 19 Spring holder
Bottom cover
5 Fixed plate 13 gasket 21 Side cover

-~-
4M(NAMUR) Series
D Specification
4M11 0-M5 4M110-06 4M210-06 4M210-08 4M310-08 4M310-10
Model
4M120-M5 4M120-06 4M220-06 4M220-08 4M320-08 4M320-10
Acting Internal piloted
ln=Out ln=Out ln=Out ln=Out ln=Out
Port size CD ln=Out=M5
=1/8" =1/8" =1/4" =1/4" =3/8'
5.5mm' 12.0mm' 14.0mm' 16.0mm' 25.0mm' 30mm'
4M Orifice size
(Cv=0.31) (Cv=0.67) (Cv=0.78) (Cv=0.89) (Cv=1 .40) (Cv=1.67)
Max. frequency @ 5 cycle/sec 4 cycle/sec
Weight 4M110:120g 4M120:175g 4M210:220g 4M220:320g 4M31 0:310g 4M320:400g
Symbol d) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
10 20 ® Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
~ RPS
~ RPS
® The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
Item 4M110 4M120 4M210 4M220 4M310 4M320
D Product feature Standard voltage AC220V, AC110V,AC24V, DC24V, DC12V
Scope of voltage AC:±15% DC:±10%
1. Internally piloted structure. Power consumption AC:2.SVA DC:2.SW I AC:3.SVA DC:3.0W
2. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive reaction. Protection IP65(D1N40050)
3. Double control solenoid valves have memory function . Temperature classification B Class
4. Internal hole adopts special processing technology which has little Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
attrition fricti on, low start pressure and long service life. Activating time 0.05 sec and below
6. Install in the side plate with the surface upward, which can be used by
directly connecting with the actuators.
debugging.
8. Several standard voltage grades are optional. 4M: Solenoid valve Port size Thread type
(5/2 way NAMUR type) 1/8" Blank: PT
1/4" G: G
Code 3/8" T: NPT
Flow chart 1: 100 Series
MS Not this code
2: 200 Series
Please refer to the same types of 4V series solenoid valves.
3: 300 Series Electrical entry
Valve type Blank: Terminal
10: Single solenoid I: Grommet
20: Double solenoid Voltage
Port size A:AC220V
M5: MS B: DC24V
06: 1/8" C:AC110V
08: 1/4" E:AC24V
10: 3/8" F: DC12V
No. Item No.Item

1 Connector 10 Bottom cover
2 Coil net 11 Fixed screw
3 Coil 12 Spool spring
Bottom cover
4 Armature 13
asket
5 Fixed plate 14 Spool 0-ring
Piston 15 Spool
7 Pilot kit 16 Piston 0-ring
8 Body 17 Override spring
9 Wear ring 18 Manual override
...
4M(NAMUR) Series
I .
4M
I .
I .
1--~ ~
06 :1/8' 31 .7
08 :1/4'
I .
Solenoid valve(Accessories) AlrTAC
Manifold
D Specification
ltem\Manifold Model 100M 200M 300M
Adaptable valve's series 3V100 Series I 3V200 Series I 3V300 Series
Manifold D Ordering code

Ordering code contains the two parts of the manifold' sand the blank plate' s.
C, Ordering code for manifold f) Ordering code for blank plate
P-3V100M R2
Product feature
1. It is available to integrate the direction control
valves of the same series to form valve group to
save space and cost.
2. It is easy to examine when there are faults owning
to the unified air intake and exhaust and unified
3V100M: 100 Series manifold
Number of stations
1F: 1 Station
2F: 2 Station
Blank: PT
G: G
T: NPT
Model
- .
wiring.
3. Flexible combination and strong expansion 16F: 16 Station
capability can make any combination or expansion Remark:1. Manifold kits contains manifold, seal and screw.
of the numbers of direction control valves that are 2. Blank plate kits contains blank plate and screw.
connected.
Dimensions
With 3V solenoid valve
Model\ltem B BA BC C CA CB D E F G H K KB p PA PB
3V100M 131.5 88.5 22.7 81 26 27 39 32 19 19 30 4.5 5 1/4" 11.5 22
3V200M 162.5 109 27.7 92.5 26 35 45 40 23 23 35 4.5 6 1/4" 11.5 25
3V300M 175 120 32 .5 99 30 40 52 47 28 27 42 4.5 6 3/8" 13.5 28
A
Model\ltem
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F BF 9F 10F 11F 12F 13F 14F 15F 16F
3V100M 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190 209 228 247 266 285 304 323
3V200M 46 69 92 115 138 161 184 207 230 253 276 299 322 345 368 391
3V300M 54 82 110 138 166 194 222 250 278 306 334 362 390 418 446 474
KA
Model\ltem
3V100M 28 47 66 85 104 123 142 161 180 199 218 237 256 275 294 313
3V200M 34 57 80 103 126 149 172 195 218 241 264 287 310 333 356 379
3V300M 42 70 98 126 154 182 210 238 266 294 322 350 378 406 434 462
Ml=•
Solenoid valve(Accessories) AlrTAC
Manifold
Specification
ltem\Manifold Model 100M 200M 300M 400M
Temperature "C
Adaptable valve's series 4V100 Series I 4V200 Series
-20-70
I 4V300 Series I 4V400 Series If
D Ordering code Manifold
Ordering code contains the two parts of the manifold's and the blank plate 's.
8 Ordering code for manifold f) Ordering code for blank plate
Model Model
Product feature 100M: 100 Series manifold 100M: 100 Series manifold R2: Blank plate
200M: 200 Series manifold 200M: 200 Series manifold for manifold
1. It is available to integrate the direction control 300M: 300 Series manifold 300M: 300 Series manifold
valves of the same series to form valve group to 400M : 400 Series manifold 400M : 400 Series manifold
save space and cost.
2. It is easy to examine when there are faults owning CD Number of stations
to the unified air intake and exhaust and unified 1F: 1 Station
wiring. 2F: 2 Station
3. Flexible combination and strong expansion
16F: 16 Station
capability can make any combination or expansi
on of the numbers of direction control valves that
CD 1OOM, 200M series have a maximum of 16 stations ; 300M series have a maximum of 12 stations;
are connected.
400M series have a maximum of 8 stations.
D Dimensions
With 4V solenoid valve
Model\ltem B BA BC BO C CA CB D E F G H K KB KC p PA PB
100MDF 154.5 142.5 99.5 28 79 26 27 58 43 19 19 36 4.5 5 20 1/4" 12.5 40
200MD F 189 171 117 31 .7 93 27 35 61 51 23 23 38 4.5 6 21 1/4" 13 43
300MDF 208 190 135 40 99.5 31 40 75 65 28 27 54 4.5 6 26 3/8" 15 53
400MDF 243 223 168.5 57 112.5 39 50 104 94.5 35 31.5 75 5.5 7 32 1/2" 19 68
A
Model\ltem
1F 2F 3F 4F SF 6F 7F 8F 9F 10F 11 F 12F 13F 14F 15F 16F
100MDF 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190 209 228 247 266 285 304 323
200MDF 46 69 92 115 138 161 184 207 230 253 276 299 322 345 368 391
300MOF 54 82 110 138 166 194 222 250 278 306 334 362 -
400MDF 63 98 133 168 203 238 273 308 - -
KA
Model\ltem
1F 2F 3F 4F SF 6F 7F 8F 9F 10F 11 F 12F 13F 14F 15F 16F
100MDF 28 47 66 85 104 123 142 161 180 199 218 237 256 275 294 313
200MD F 34 57 80 103 126 149 172 195 218 241 264 287 310 333 356 379
300MDF 42 70 98 126 154 182 210 238 266 294 322 350 -
400MD F 49 84 119 154 189 224 259 294 - -
MUM
ISO Standard solenoid valve(5/2 way, 5/3 way) AlrTAC
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
Specification
.·111, · II II · II 'II
Orifice size(Cv) mm' 32(Cv=1 .8) I 42(Cv=2.32) I 69(Cv=3.85) I 108(Cv=6.0)
Fluid Air(to be filtered by 40 11 m filter element
Lubrication (j) Not required
!Internal pilot 0.2-1.0Mpa(29-145psi)
Operating Pressure
IExternal pilot 0-1.0Mpa(0-145psi)
ESV Control pressure(External pilot) 0.2-1.0Mpa(29-145psi)
Proof pressure 1.5Mpa(215psi)
Temperature -20-10 ·c
Port size(manifold) ® 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/4"
Port size(end plate) 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/4" I 1'
Voltage range AC: ± 15% DC: ± 10%
Activating time 110120 Series 33141ms I 42155ms I 50\68ms I 55185ms
(0.5MPa)Openlclose 130 CIEIP Series 38150ms I 52162ms I 52168ms I 55185ms
Insulation Class B
Symbol Protection IP65
10 20 Installation size IS05599-1 standard
2 4 2 4
,m:rnm
3 15
~
315
CD Note: Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
30C 30E 30P @ Note: PT thread and Gthread are available.
2 4 2 4 2 4
~
J 15
~
315
~
315
Product feature
1. Succinct appearance and compact conformation.
2. The installation size conforms to ISO 5599/1 standard .
3. Because of the special seals, the feature are large flow rate and long ESV: ISO standard Blank: Side port
solenoid valve 1M
lifetime. B: Bottom port
4. For 20013001400 series you can adjust the installation direction of the Code Blank: Left side port
gasket to change the acting type: internal pilot, external pilot, or air control 2: 200 Series 2M R: Right side port
5. You need install the valve together with the sub-base. There are individual 3: 300 Series B: Bottom port
and parallel type for manifold sub-base.
4: 400 Series Blank: Left side port
6. There are various connection and installation method for manifold. It is 4M
easy to use. 6: 600 Series R: Riaht side oort
7. The manifold of 20013001400 series have the function of exhaust throttling,
so no need to connect another throttle valve.
External pilot port type
1M Blank: Individual ilot art
D Ordering code of valve
2M Blank: Individual pilot port
W: Centralized pilot port
ESV: ISO standard

solenoid valve W: External pilot
Code
2: 200 Series Electrial entry
3M: End plate kit
3: 300 Series Blank: Terminal
4: 400 Series I: Grommet
6: 600 Series
Voltage
Valve type A:AC220V
4M: Side port block
B: DC24V
C: AC110V
E:AC24V
F: DC12V
20: Double solenoid 5/2 way Note: 1. For the same model, the port size of the end-plate is bigger than the sub-base (For example ESV202M, the port size
of sub-base is 1/4", and the port size of end plate is 3/8").
~
2. Only individual pilot port is available for individual sub-base.
3. The manifold sub-base must be used with end plate kit, individual pilot port and centralized pilot port can be mixed.
4. 600 series individual sub-base only has side port, 600 series manifold sub-base only has individual pilot port and
bottom port.
5. Only 600 series have side port block.
JOE: Double solenoid 5/2 way exhaust center
~
CD Note: Internal pilot can be changed to external pilot mode(except 600 series),
please adjust the installation method of the gasket refering to article 1o 2 in the
Accessories code
IP: Unit accessories I
Code
ESV200M: 200 Series manifold
Accessories type
IR2: Blank plate for manifold I
installation manual. ESV400M: 400 Series manifold

ESV600M 600 Series manifold
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
Installation and operation(For 200, 300, 400 series)
1. The classification and selection for the pilot type of valve 4. Exhaust throttle function
1.1. According to the source of pilot air, we can divide the valve into two types: the internal pilot and external 4.1. The manifold has exhaust throttle function, the below picture shows the position of the exhaust
pilot. The standard type is internal pilot. throttle orifices on each side.
1.2. You can convert from internal pilot to external pilot by the following methods. 4.2. Use alien key to adjust the screw.
1 2 3 4.3. Rotate the screw clockwise to reduce the exhaust orifice, rotate the screw counter-clockwise to
Remove the 4 phi lips head Assemble the gasket according Assemble the pilot 0-ring
enlarge the exhaust orifice.
screws, and then remove the to the picture, and then assemble
coil, pilot body and cover.
according to the picture, and ESV
the cover, pilot body and then, assemble the cover, pilot
-1-,\
Manifold right side Manifold left side
coil- Internal pilot body and coil-External pilot.
' ''
L' ~
'' '
'' ''
, __.,/ ''
Cl Flow chart
Model: ESV210
2. The classification and selection for the parallel manifold sub-base 1.0 -,-_
2.1. According to the direction of pilot air supply, we can divide the manifold sub-base into two types: the
individual pilot and centralized pilot.
0.9
., 0.8
a. 0.7
-,-_ - -......
--...... I"'-
' r-- '\
2.2. If you select the individual pilot, the fitting must be connected to the individual pilot ports. ~ 0.6 -i--
-----
-......
t--
' I\
'\ \' I\"\
If you select the centralized pilot type, the fitting must be connected to the centralized pilot ports. ~ 0.5 -,._ \
., 0.4 ,..__
'
- --
2.3. If you use parallel manifold, all of the manifold must be used the same pilot type: such as, all of them
[ 0.3
\
are the individual pilot type, or all of them are the centralized pilot type. ~ 0.2 -, ' \
\
• Note: Only when you use the external pilot type, you can select the individual pilot or centralized pilot. 0.1
I I
\ l I I
When you use the internal pilot type, the pilot ports on the manifold are ineffective. OO 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800
3. The position and specification of the manifold sub-base ports Flow capacily(L/min)
Model: ESV310
1.0
0.9 - ,-,.__
.,
a.
~ 0.6
0.8
0.7
-,-_
,-..
-
~
,.... r---.
rs. " I'\
~ 0.5
.. 0.4
,-..
,-..,..__ '" ' \ \
[ 0.3
r---. I'\
" \
' I\ \ I\
~ 0.2
r---. I I
0.1
00
]\ \
'
400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000
Flow capacity(L/min)
I I
Model: ESV410
1.0
0.9
., 0.8 --
-- r---.
.._
'
a. 0.7
~ 0.6
~ 0.5 -,.._
-,-__ - ', :-,,._
'
Is-
"\ I\
.,
~
0.4
o. 0.3
r-
- I'
...... \ I\
I '
~ 0.2
Port status of manifold sub-base 0.1
OO
I'
-i-....
\ "
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000
I\
l
\
I
I
I I
Left side Right side Bottom Centralized Individual
port Flow capacity(L/min)
port port pilot port pilot port
Use Unused Unused Unused Use Model: ESV610

1.0
ESV202MGR Unused Use Unused Unused Use 0.9 -,.__
ESV202MGB Unused Unused Use Unused Use ., 0.8
- -'
r- ls.
ESV202MGW Use Unused Unused Use Unused ~ 0.7 r,.. I\
ESV202MGWR Unused Use Unused Use Unused 0.6 ~,-. \
1'
ESV202MGWB Unused Unused Use Use Unused ~ 0.5 r- I' I'\ \ \
•• 0.4 ,-.. 1,
Note: Please seal the bottom port by plug, when it is unused. [ 0.3 \
,..__ I'- I\ \. I
The above list is an example of 200M series' ordering code, the other series is follow the ~ 0.2 1, I\ ' I
same pattern, only need to change the series code. 0.1
l\
" I\ I I
OO 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 11000 12000 13000 14000
1111111
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
D Inner structure D Dimensions(ESV200 Series)
ESV
0,
"' +----
25
ESV210 (Grommet)
26
27
'"''
1 Bottom cover
•
10 Spacer
•
19 Pilot kit
2 0-ring 11 0-ring 20 Gasket
3 0-ring 12 Big piston sheath 21 Cover plate
N
4 Wear ring 13 Big piston 0-ring 22 Spool 0
5 0-ring 14 Big piston 23 Upper cover gasket

6 Screw 15 Screw 24 Upper cover
7 0-ring 16 Screw 25 Small piston ---+- 0,
"'
8 Body 17 Gasket 26 Small piston 0-ring
4-M xO 8
9 Gasket 18 Manual override 27 Small piston sheath
ESV220 (Grommet)
---+--- "'
"'
4-M xO 8
ESV230C(E\P) (Terminal)
N
0
---+---- "'
"'
4-MS O8
ESV230C(E\P) (Grommet)
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
ESV210+ESV201 M
--t--- ESV
2-(1)5.5
Thru.hole ~~=L!!!-.L.!!!-~~::J...!QL,:::J.c::J....Ll..1
Nole: This is the dimensional drawing of terminal type.

Grommet type, please refer to the dimension of
sub-base and single grommet valve.
Note: This is the dimensional drawing of terminal type.

ESV230+ESV201 M
:10
Left end plate
Right end plate

2-Ql5.5 Note: This is the dimensional drawing of terminal type.
Thru.hole Grommet type, please refer to the dimension of
2-Ql6.5
Thru .hole
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
ESV210+ESV202M+ESV203M D Dimensions(ESV300 Series)
ESV310 (Terminal)
12
Note: n means the number of stations. The 108
dimension of the grommet type(more
than 3 stations), please refer to this
drawing and the single grommet valve
drawing.
ESV
• i•
--j--
• •
WW
•
ESV310 (Grommet)
"'
m
0....:
a,
ESV220+ESV202M+ESV203M
ESV320 (Terminal)
Note: n means the number of stations. The
drawing.
• i•
--j--
• •
WW
55
•
ESV320 {Grommet)
"'"'
co
ESV330C(E\P) {Terminal)

drawing.
• i•
--j--
• •
WW
55
•
ESV330C(E\P) {Grommet)
~ F't'=::::::::::;:::':::=:::::t==,--r
co
a,
"
44+43xn
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
ESV

2-<!)6.5 sub-base and single grommet valve.
Thru .hole
2-1 /8"
2-3/8"
2-<!)6.5
Thru .hole f-'f'!'"°"'""-'!C..,,,...+--"'l""-H'+-"'i-=,i--L-L...JL...L
2-<!)6.5
Thru.hole
55

2-<!)6.5
Thru.hole
~ ,.•,m'"·"''"
1 /2- m 1 ~ I q3
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
ESV310+ESV302M+ESV303M D Dimensions(ESV400 Series)
• I .
131.5
119.5
drawing.
ESV
N
"'
---1-
1
4-M x .
ESV410 (Grommet)
llr1=====~§3:=='====~l~
N
------r -
I -- - --
"'
"' 1
4-M8x1 25

..
drawing.
__ _)_ __ ______ ,_____ _

I I
ESV420 (Grommet)
I
------ , ------ N
~
I
52+56xn
ESV330+ESV302M+ESV303M ESV430C(EIP) {Terminal)

drawing.
_____ ,_____ _
I
ESV430C(E\P) (Grommet)
~M~~~~~n
"' I
-----,------
1
4-M8x1 . 5
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
, I ESV41 O+ESV401 M

2-<1> 6.5 sub-base and single grommet valve.
Thru.hole
2-<1> 6.5
Thru.hole
4-M8X1 .25 d :16

Grommet type, please refer lo the dimension of
Right end plate

ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
ESV410+ESV402M+ESV403M Cl Dimensions(ESV600 Series)

~
drawing.
---- ti ----
i
ESV 4-M8 1.25
71xln-1l ESV610 (Grommet)
.• .:
·---i- -
• •
__IL_ 71xn
30+71xn
70.5 60+71xn
ESV420+ESV402M+ESV403M ESV620/630 (Terminal)

than 3 stations), please refer to this ~
drawing and the single grommet valve ---- ti ----
drawing. i
ESV620/630 (Grommet)
70.5

drawing.
ESV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
2-Cl>9
Thru.hole
2-Cl>9 Thru.hole
,I
«!]' 2-Cl>9 Thru.hole

ESV61 O+ESV602M+ESV603M+ESV604M

., Left end plate
2-Cl>17 d :18
2-Cl> 11 Thru.hole
Right end plate
ESV620/630+ESV602M+ESV603M+ESV604M

Left port
4-Cl> 17 d :11
H >12Thru.hole
Coil AlrTAC
080, 092 Series
The coils and internal wiring drawing in connector and corresponding table of fitted products are provided for
hd convenience of your selection.
D 080 Series
Production . Cml inside Connector Connector 1ns1de
Coil type Voltage connection diagram Memo
series type connection diagram
Applied to
Coil CDA080
PL 1515T-P1 - AC, DC
:J~;,
type coil
CDA080
AC 1 1
Terminal
B. Applied to
PL 1515T-P2 ~,,. LED CDA080 AC
Red type coil
2 2
3V100 Series 1 1
4V100 Series
CDA080 B. Applied to
4M100 Series DC PL 1515T-P3 CDA080 DC
Terminal LED
Ordering code ~
Green type coil
:J~;,
2 2
CDA080A
CLA080
AC - - -
Coil t e
CD: Terminal
l l Voltage
A:AC220V
Grommet
CLA080
DC - - -
CL: Grommet B: DC24V Grommet
C:AC110V
Coll's bore
E:AC24V
A080 : The first reduct of <D8.0mm bore)
A092: The first reduct of <D9.0mm bore)
F: DC12V 092 Series
Production Coil inside Connector Connector 1ns1de
Coil type Voltage connection diagram Memo
series type connection diagram
Applied to
D Attentions for block wiring 4V210-005- CDA092
P1
- AC, DC
Coil terminal with DC specification has polar indicator lights, thus when
type coil
wiring, notice positive and negative poles, "1" shall be connected to CDA092
positive pole, "2" to negative pole. If the poles are connected inversely, the AC
Terminal
]~'
3V1 Series
indicator lights will not shine but valve still actuates. 3V200 Series 4V210- 005- B. Applied to
3V300 Series CDA092 AC
P2 , LE.Q_
:J~"
· 1• to positive pole "2" to negative pole 4V200 Series type coil
2 ' Red 2
4V300 Series
4V400 Series
4M200 Series 1 1
4M300 Series CDA092 4V210-005- B. Applied to
ESV200 Series Terminal DC LE.Q_ CDA092 DC
P3
ESV300 Series ~
Green type coil
ESV400 Series 2 2
ESV600 Series
CLA092 - - -
AC
Grommet
CLA092
Grommet
DC - - -
Air valve(3/2,5/2, 5/3 way)
D Product series
Air valve: 3A 100 Series 52 Air valve: 3A200 Series 53 Air valve: 3A300 Series 54
Air
valve
Air valve: 4A 100 Series 55 Air valve:4A200 Series 57 Air valve: 4A300 Series 59
........
.... ... JI
'
~
-;::;;.~...
~ ~ ..
Air valve: 4A400 Series 61 Manifold Series 63 Air valve(ISO standard): EAV Series 65
.
--·
"""
=;:--.~: .J
1. Before installing, be sure the valve hasn't been damaged via transportation.
2. It's suggested to use the medium lubricated by 40 µ m filter element. Be aware of the flow direction and port size.
3. Please notice whether the installation condition accords with technical requirements (such as"act-uation frequency",
"working pressure" and "scope of application temperature"), then the equipment can be installed and used.
4. Notice the flow direction of air during installation, Pis the air intake, A (B) is the work port and R (S) is the exhaust outlet.
6. Firstly press the base gasket into the base, and then connect the base with the valve body by the affiliated screws. The
base gasket can be pressed into the installation places that are not used temporarily, and then seal them with affiliated
blank cap. When the system expands, take the blank cap off and install relative air valves;
7. To keep the dust away, please use the silencer for the exhaust ports. Never forget to install dirt-proof boot in air intake and
outlet during dismounting.
Air valve( 3/2 way) AlrTAC
3A100 Series
Specification
Model 3A11 0-M5 3A1 20-M5 3A110-06 3A120-06
~ ;
\--
\ j ~· - Acting Exterior control
Port size G) MS I 1/8"
Orifice size 5.5mm'(Cv=0.31 ) I 12.0mm'(Cv=0.67)
3A100 Lubrication (2) Not required
Operating pressure 0.15- 0.8MPa(21-114psi)
Max. frequency @ 5 cycle/sec
D Symbol G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
10-NO 10-NC 20 equivalent are recommended.
A
--i{QX!o-- @ The maximum actuation frequen cy is in the no-load state.
-~ -~
p R PR
D Ordering code
D Product feature
1. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive reaction .
2. Double air control valves have memory function.
I 3A: Air Valve(3/2 way)! Port size Thread type
Blank: PT
attrition friction, low start pressure and long service life. Code
4. No need to add oil for lubrication. I 1: 100 Series I 1/8" G:G
T:NPT
5. Multi-mounting helps to install and apply. Valve type MS No this code
6. Integrate with the manifold to save installation space. 10: Single air control
20: Double air control Acting type
D Flow chart Port size NC: Normally close
10
Model: 3A110-06-NO MS: MS NO: Normally open
06: 1/8" 20 NO code
8:. 0.7
:. 0.6 Please refer to 63 for manifold specification and the order way.
11m1
~ 0.5
-· 0.4
[ 0.3
a Dimension
=
:§ 0.2
; 0.1
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
Flow Q: L/min
Inner structure
M5:0
06:2
-$-
2-(!)3.3 ;; 0
r--
-$-
"'
<i
No. Item No. Item No. Item r~11
~ - '- ~
N
1 Bottom cover gasket 5 Spool 9 Piston

.7
2 Spring 6 Body 10 Pilot body
27
3 Bottom cover 7 0-ring 11 Piston 0-ring
4 Bottom cover screw 8 Wear ring 12 Piston screw
3A200 Series
D Specification
Model 3A210-06 3A220-06 3A210-08 3A220-08
Acting Exterior control
Port size G) ln=Out=1/8" I ln=Out=1 /4"
Orifice size 14.0mm'(Cv=O. 78) I 16.0mm'(Cv=0.89)
Lubrication (2) Not required 3A200
Operating pressure 0.15-0.8M Pa(21-114psi)
D Symbol CD PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
A
-~ -~- @ The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load stale.
-~
p R PR
D Ordering code
Product feature
Model
I 3A: Air Valve(3/2 way)! Blank: PT

G:G
Code
T: NPT
5. Multi-mounting helps to install and apply. I 2: 200 Series I
6. Integrate with the manifold to save installation space. Acting type
Valve type
10: Single air control Valve type Acting type
20: Double air control NC: Normally close
10
D Flow chart NO: Normally open
Port size 20 NO code
Model: 3A210-08-NO 06: 118"
08: 114"
i lllR ll
D Dimension
1/8"
~
i5 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
Flow Q: L/min
D Inner structure
- 2-1/8'
No. Item No. Item No. Item

A
3A300 Series
Specification
Model 3A310-08 3A320-08 3A310-10 3A320-10
~ ;
\--
\ j ~· - Acting Exterior control
Port size G) ln=Out=1/4" I ln=Out=3/ 8"
Orifice size 25.0mm'(Cv=1 .35) I 30.0mm'(Cv=1 .67)
3A300 Lubrication (2) Not required
D Symbol (j) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
A
-~ -~- @ The maximum actuation frequency of no-load state.
-~
p R PR
D Ordering code
D Product feature
2. Double air control valves have memory function. Model
3. Internal hole adopts special processing technology which has little I 3A: Air Valve(3/2 way)! Blank: PT
attrition friction, low start pressure and long service life. G:G
4. No need to add oil for lubrication. Code
5. Multi-mounting helps to install and apply. I 3: 300 Series I T: NPT
6. Integrate with the manifold to save installation space. Valve type Acting type
1O: Single air control Valve type Acting type
20: Double air control NC: Normally close
10
NO: Normally open
D Flow chart Port size
20 NO code
08:1/4"
Model: 3A310-10-NO
10: 3/8"
"'
a.. Please refer to 63 for manifold specification and the order way.
111~1
"'
I::l_ D Dimension
=
~
=
fa
8- 0 0
!!I
0.1
400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
1/8"
Flow Q: L/min
D Inner structure
-1 ' .
<O
a,

Air valve(5/2 way, 5/3 way) AlrTAC
4A100 Series
Specification
4A130C-M5 4A130C-06
4A110-M5 4A110-06
Model 4A130E-M5 4A130E-06
4A1 20-M5 4A120-06
4A130P-M5 4A130P-06
/ ;.
Acting Exterior control ~
Port size G) ln=Out=M5 ln=Out=1 /8"
5.5mm' 5.0mm' 12.0mm' 9.0mm'
Orifice size
(Cv=0.31 ) I (Cv=0.28) (Cv=0.67) I (Cv=0.50) 4A100
Operating pressure 0.15 - 0.8MPa(21-114psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(21 Spsi)
D Symbol Max. frequency® 5 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec 5 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec

4A 11O-M5:85 4A110-06:85
Weight (g) 165 165
10 20 4A120-M5:140 I 4A120-06:140 I
illIID--
RPS
-~-
RPS
G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
~ Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
30C 30E ® The maximum actuation frequency of no-load state.
~\I l~JW~'·-
R Ps
-1A IIiRPI IIS I /Tt'-
Product feature
1. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive reaction. Model
2. Three position air valves have three kinds of central function for your I 4A: Air Valve(5/2, 5/3 way) I Port size Thread type
choice . Blank: PT
Code 1/8" G: G
!1: 100Series I T: NPT
MS No this code
attrition friction, low start pressure and long service life. Valve type
5. No need to add oil for lubrication. 10: Sin le air control 5/2 wa
20: Double air control 5/2 wa Port size
6. Integrate with the manifold to save installation space. MS: MS
30C: Double air control 5/3 wa closed center
30E: Double air control 5/3 wa 06: 1/8"
D Flow chart Please refer to 64 for manifold specification and the order way.
Model: 4A110-M5
i!!lilliNI
8- O O 100 200
Flow (L/minl
300 400 500 600
Model: 4A110-06
i! rfllml
o O O
Flow
200
(l/min)
400 600 800 1000
4A100 Series
D Inner structure D Dimension
~ ;
\--
1/8"
\ j ~· -
4A100
~ ' ' ' Model\ltem

4A110-M5
4A110-06
A
M5x0.8
1/8"
B
27
28
C
14.7
14.2
D
0
1
E
14
16
F
21.2
20.2
G
0
3
16 15 13 14
2-1 /8"

1 Screw 7 Spool 13 Screw
2 Spring Wear ring 14 Spring holder
3 Bottom cover Piston 15 Return Spring
4 Bottom cover gasket 10 Pilot body 16 Spring holder
5 Body 11 0-ring 17 EClip 27
6 0-ring 12 Screw 18 Side cover B C D E F G
4A 120-06 118" 28 26.5 16 32.5 3
2-118"
II 1~ 11
~
Model\ltem A B C D E F G
4A130-M5 M5x0.8 27 42 0 14 33.5 0
4A1 30-06 1/8" 28 41.5 1 16 32.5 3
4A200 Series
Cl Specification
4A230C-06 4A230C-08
4A210-06 4A210-08
Model 4A230E-06 4A230E-08
4A220-06 4A220-08
4A230P-06 4A230P-08
Port size G) ln=Out=Exhaust= 1/8' ln=0Ut=1/4" Exhaust= 1/8"
Orifi ce size
14.0mm' 12.0mm' 16.0mm' 12.0mm' 4A200
(Cv=0.78) I (Cv=0.67) (Cv=0.89) I (Cv=0.67)
Symbol Max. frequency® 5 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec 5 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec

4A210-06: 185 4A210-08:185
Weight (g) 365 365
10 20 4A220-06:285 I 4A220-08:285 I
1tlmJ.--
RP S
-~-
RPS
(1) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
30E 30P @ The maximum actuation frequency of no-load state.
~RPS
- -~\ 11:Vj
R PS
l h~-
Cl Ordering code
Cl Product feature
1. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive reaction.

2. Three position air valves have three kinds of central function for your Model
choice. I 4A: Air Valve(5/2, 5/3 way) I
Code
!2: 200 Series Port size
5. No need to add oil for lubrication. Valve type 06: 1/8"
10: Sina le air control 5/2 wav 08: 1/4"
20: Double air control 5/2 wav
30C: Double air control 5/3 wav closed center
30E: Double air control 5/3 way exhaust center
30P: Double air control 5/3 way pressure center
Cl Flow chart
Model: 4A210-06
i!lrtm11
o O O 300 600 900 1200 1500
Model: 4A210- 08
i!lllltl
o O O
Flow
400
(L/min)
800 1200 1600
4A200 Series
~ ;
\--
\ j ~· -
4A200
~
E
35
' ' ' Modell ltem A B C D E

4A21 0-06 1/8" 1/8" 18 22,7 0
4A210-08 1/8" 1/4" 21 21,2 3
,,-
2-1/8"

2 Spring 8 Wear ring 14 Spring holder
3 Bottom cover 9 Piston 15 Return Spring
35 17
4 Bottom cover gasket 10 Pilot body 16 Spring holder
22
5 Body 11 0-ring 17 E Clip
6 0-ring 12 Screw 18 Side cover Model\ltem A B C D E
4A220-06 1/8" 1/8' 18 37 0
4A220-08 1/8" 1/4' 21 35.5 3
35
Modell ltem A B C D E
4A230-06 1/8" 1/8' 18 37 0
4A230-08 1/8" 1/4' 21 35.5 3
4A300 Series
D Specification
4A330C-08 4A330C-10
4A31 0- 08 4A310-1 0
Model 4A330E-08 4A330E-10
4A320-08 4A320-10
4A330P-08 4A330P-10
Fluid
Acting
Air(to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Exterior control
I~
Port size G) In= Out= Exhaust= 1/4' ln=Out=3/8' Exhaust=1/4"
Orifice size
25.0mm' 18.0mm' 30.0mm' 18.0mm' 4A300
{Cv=1.40) I (Cv=t .00) (Cv=1.68) I (Cv=1.00)
D Symbol
Max. frequency® 4 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec 4 cycle/sec I 3 cycle/sec
4A310-08:275 4A310-10:275
10 20 Weight (g) 505 505
4A320-08: 365 I 4A320-10: 365 I
~-
RPS
--oftlrm.--
RPS
30E 30P @ The maximum actuation frequency of no-load state.
-1~ i it
RPS
n11s'.'_ -1-.\1 W~IIT~-
D Ordering code
D Product feature
Model
2. Three position air valves have three kinds of central function for your
I 4A: Air Valve(5/2, 5/3 way) I
choice. Code
3. Double air control valves have memory function. !3: 300 Series I Port size
ave type
VI 08: 1/4"
10: Sinale air control 5/2 wav 10: 3 8"
20: Double air control 5/2 wav
6. Integrate with the manifold to save installation space. 30C: Double air control 5/3 wav closed center
30E: Double air control 5/3 way exhaust center
30P: Double air control 5/3 way pressure center
D Flowchart Please refer to 64 for manifold specification and the order way.
Model: 4A310-08
rn[1mm
o O O
Flow
400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
(L/min)
Model: 4A310 - 10
i!illBII
o O O
Flow
400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
(L/min)
~ --
4A300 Series
~ ;
\--
\ j ~· -
4A300
~
E
' ' ' Model\ltem A B C D E

4A310-08 1/4" 1/4' 22 29 0
4A310-10 1/4" 3/8' 24 28 4
2-1/8'
~

"'
,..;
.,,.
,~=,
4 Bottom cover gasket 10 Pilot body 16 Spring holder ll , 11
/j
rn
II
5 Body 11 0-ring 17 EClip

6 0-ring 12 Screw 18 Side cover
Model\ltem A B C D E
4A320-08 1/4" 1/4' 22 44.5 0
4A320-10 1/4" 3/8' 24 43.5 4
2-1/8"
Modell ltem A B C D E
4A330-08 1/4" 1/4' 22 44.5 0
4A330-10 1/4" 3/8' 24 43.5 4
4A400 Series
Specification
Model 4A410- 15 4A420-15 4A430C-15 4A430E-15 4A430P-15
AlrTAC
- ;Olkl , 4.!\'10C· 15 Port size G) In= Out= Exhaust= 1/2'
,,__ c.;..""
el ,.• Orifice size 50 .0mm'(Cv=2.79) I 30.0mm'(Cv=1.68)
• Valve type
Operating pressure
5 port 2 position I 5 port 3 position
0.15-0 .8MPa(21-114psi)
4A400
Max. frequency ® 3 cycle/sec
Weight (g) 555 I 685 I 735
CZ> Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
Symbol equivalent are recommended.
@ The maximum actuation frequency of no-load state.
10 20
~- -~-
RP S RPS
30C 30E 30P

A B
-~J lixilJ/Tt'- -~ 11l1J I/Tt'-
RPS RP S Model
! 4A:AirValve(5/2, 5/3way) I
D Product feature Code
!4: 400 Series Port size
1. Structure in sliding column mode: good tightness and sensitive reaction.
2. Three position air valves have three kinds of central function for your Valve! pe 115: 112" I
10: Sin le air control 5/2 wa
choice.
20: Double air control 5/2 wa
3. Double air control valves have memory function . 30C: Double air control 5/3 wa closed center
4. Internal hole adopts special processing technology which has little 30E: Double air control 5/3 wa
6. Integrate with the manifold to save installation space. Please refer to 64 for manifold specification and the order way.
Flow chart
Model:4A410-15
8:. 0.7 r==f=:i:::~- , - , , - , - - ,
::. 0.6 r-=la=t-t----"""t-:::::-t---t---t------1
~ 0.5 r-=l==:l--t=--1:::-- f".._c:--+- +-i
~ 0.4 f--=l==-+----f""--cct------"-k----f'---+-------l
c. 0.3 r --!c=+----i""-c-+ ""-t-'tt----'\c+-------l
g> 0.2 C--- -c-+--=..tc------'k-- t.------\-- +-----i
~
"' 0.1
8"
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000
Flow (L/min)
4A400 Series
~ ; 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
\--
\ j ~· - 118"
,,-
4A400
00
N
~
> '
M it"
V = cell
"'
.,;
N
' ' '
2-118"
r-
• J'
:t

4 Bottom cover gasket 10 Pilot body 16 Spring holder .,,_
"
5 Body 11 0-ring 17 EClip r,,.. = :!l "
6 0-ring 12 Screw 18 Side cover "' >-+-->----I
7.5
50
=
..""
,,j!
·+''
: ' I
7.
Air valve(Accessories) AlrTAC
Manifold
D Specification
ltem\Manifold Model 100M 200M 300M
,,,
Fluid Air(to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element) ,,, ;.
Temperature "C -20~70
u-..._~:-:·~ Adaotable valve's series 3A100 Series I 3A200 Series I 3A300 Series I~
~
D Ordering code Manifold
Ordering code contains the two parts of the manifold's and the blank plate's.
Code
D Product feature 3V100M: 100 Series Manifold Blank: PT 3V100M: 100 Series Manifold R2: Blank plate
3V200M: 200 Series Manifold G:G 3V200M: 200 Series Manifold for manifold
3V300M: 300 Series Manifold T: NPT 3V300M: 300 Series Manifold
save space and cost; Number of stations
2. It is easy to examine when there are faults owning 1F: 1 Station
to the unified air intake and exhaust and unified 2F: 2 Station
wiring;
capability can make any combination or expansion
Remark:1. Manifold kits contains manifold, seal and screw.
of the numbers of direction control valves that
2. Blank plate kits contains blank plate, and screw.
are connected.
D Dimensions
Model\ltem B BA BC C CA CB D E F G H K KB p PA PB
3V100M 70 57.7 22.7 53 26 27 39 32 19 19 30 4.5 5 1/4" 11.5 22
3V200M 84 69.7 27.7 61 26 35 45 40 23 23 35 4.5 6 1/4" 11 .5 25
3V300M 96 80.5 32.5 70 30 40 52 47 28 27 42 4.5 6 3/8" 13.5 28
A
Model\ltem
3V100M 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190 209 228 247 266 285 304 323
3V200M 46 69 92 115 138 161 184 207 230 253 276 299 322 345 368 391
3V300M 54 82 110 138 166 194 222 250 278 306 334 362 390 418 446 474
KA
Model\ ltem
1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F 8F 9F 10F 11F 12F 13F 14F 15F 16F
3V100M 28 47 66 85 104 123 142 161 180 199 218 237 256 275 294 313
3V200M 34 57 80 103 126 149 172 195 218 241 264 287 310 333 356 379
3V300M 42 70 98 126 154 182 210 238 266 294 322 350 378 406 434 462
Air valve(Accessories) AlrTAC
Manifold
a Specification
ltem\Manifold Model 100M 200M 300M 400M
Fluid Air(to be filtered by 40 µ mfilter element)
Adaotable valve's series 4A 100 Series I 4A200 Series I 4A300 Series I 4A400 Series
Manifold
Ordering code contains the two parts of the manifold's and the blank plate's.
a Product feature Model Model

100M: 100 Series Manifold Blank: PT 1QOM: 100 Series Manifold R2: Blank plate
200M: 200 Series Manifold G:G 200M: 200 Series Manifold for manifold
300M: 300 Series Manifold T: NPT 300M: 300 Series Manifold
save space and cost;
400M: 400 Series Manifold 400M: 400 Series Manifold
2. It is easy to examine when there are faults owning
to the unified air intake and exhaust and unified Number of stations
wiring; 1F: 1 Station
capability can make any combination or expansion
of the numbers of direction control valves that 16F: 16 Station
are connected.
(1) 100M, 200M series have a maximum of 16 stations ; 300Mseries have a maximum of 12stations;
400M series have a maximum of 8 stations.
a Dimension
Model\ ltem B BA BC BD C CA CB D E F G H K KB KC p PA PB
100MDF 96 81 68.7 28 53 26 27 58 43 19 19 36 4.5 5 20 1/4" 12.5 40
200MD F 111 92 77.7 31.7 62 27 35 61 51 23 23 38 4.5 6 21 1/4" 13 43
300MD F 130 111 95.5 40 71 31 40 75 65 28 27 54 4.5 6 26 3/8" 15 53
400MDF 163 142 128 57 89 39 50 104 94.5 35 31 .5 75 5.5 7 32 1/2" 19 68
A
Model\ ltem
100MD F 38 57 76 95 114 133 152 171 190 209 228 247 266 285 304 323
200MD F 46 69 92 11 5 138 161 184 207 230 253 276 299 322 345 368 391
300MD F 54 82 110 138 166 194 222 250 278 306 334 362 -
400MD F 63 98 133 168 203 238 273 308 -
KA
Model\ ltem
100MD F 28 47 66 85 104 123 142 161 180 199 218 237 256 275 294 313
200MD F 34 57 80 103 126 149 172 195 218 241 264 287 310 333 356 379
300MDF 42 70 98 126 154 182 210 238 266 294 322 350 -
400MD F 49 84 119 154 189 224 259 294 - -
ISO Standard air valve(S/2 way, 5/3 way) AlrTAC
EAV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
Specification
·1111 · II I I · II , II
Orifice size(Cv) mm' 32(Cv=1.8) I 42(Cv=2.32) I 69(Cv=3.85) I 108(Cv=6.0l

ActinQ Extend pilot
Lubrication CD Not required
Operating ISingle air control 0.2-1.0MPa(29-145psi)
Pressure IDouble air control -0.09-1.0MPa(-13-145psi)
Control pressure(extermal pilot) 0.2-1.0MPa(29-145psi) EAV
Temperature -20-1o·c
Port size(manifold)@ 1/4' I 3/8" I 1/2' I 3/4'
Port size/end plate) 3/8' I 1/2" I 3/4' I 1'
Installation size ISO 5599-1 standard
Nole (j): Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium lo optimise valve life span. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or
@: PT thread and G thread are available.
a Symbol D Ordering code of manifold
10 20
2 4 2 4
{IBDJ,ll- !.1--[I[IlJ,Jl.
3 15 315
30C 30E 30P

2 4
.;.i~ ll~T~ I/,.~-
315
,;.c, j II TII j /,.~- ,Pl~ Ik\1,.! I/T~-
2 4
315
2 4
315
Model
I EAV: ISO standard solenoid valve I
Port position type
Blank: Side port
1M
D Product feature B: Bottom Port
Code
1. Succinct appearance and compact conformation. Blank: Left side port
2: 200 Series
2. The installation size conforms to ISO 5599/1 standard. 3: 300 Series 2M R: Righi side port
3. Because of the special seals, the feature are large flow rate and Jong 4: 400 Series B: Bottom Port
lifetime. 6: 600 Series
Blank: Left side port
4. External pilot, can be used without electrical. 4M
5. You need install the valve together with the sub-base. There are individual Manifold type R: Righi side port
and manifold sub-base. 1M: Individual sub-base
6. There are various connection and installation method for manifold. It is External pilot port type
easy to use. 1M Blank: Individual pilot port
7. The manifold of 200\300\400 series have the function of exhaust throttling,
2M Blank: Individual pilot port
so no need to connect another throttle valve.
2M: Manifold sub-base W: Centralized pilot port
8. Because of be used external pilot, the working pressure of double air
control valve can be zero or vacuum . Thread type
Blank: PT
G: G
3M: End plate kit
Model Valve type

I ESV: ISO standard air valve! rn,s,,,,.,;cro,"" ~ 4M: Side port block
Code
2: 200 Series
3: 300 Series
4: 400 Series
6: 600 Series
,o, '°"'",;coo,.,.~ Note:1. For the same model, the port size of the end-plate is bigger thanthe sub-base ( For example ESV202M, the port size
of sub-base is 1/4" , and lhe port size of end plate is 3/8').
2. Only individual pilot port is available for individual sub-base.
3. The manifold sub-base must be used with end plate kit, individual pilot port and centralized pilot port can be mixed.
30C: Double air control 5/2 way 4. 600 series individual sub-base only has side port, 600 series manifold sub-base only has individual pilot port and
closed center
30E: Double air control 5/2 way bottom port.
exhaust center 5. Only 600 series have side port block.
~P,Do,blo,;,oo,~
pressure center
Accessories type
D Ordering code of cover plate Accessories code
IP: Unit accessories I R2: Blanking plate I
Code
Accessories code ESV300M: 300 Series manifold
IP:Unit accessories I ESV400M: 400 Series manifold
Adapt production
Note: 600 series have not cover plate.

EAV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
D Installation and operation(For 200, 300, 400 series) 4. Exhaust throttle function
4.1. The manifold has exhaust throttle function, the below picture shows theposition of the exhaust
1. How to turn ESV series solenoid valve to EAV series air control valve
throttle orifices on each side.
1.1. To turn ESV series solenoid valve (except 600 series) to EAV seires air control valve, you must order
4.2. Use alien key to adjust the screw.
cover plate first(the ordering code is P-EAV210-R1),then replace the coil unit and lhe pilot body
4.3. Rotate the screw clockwise to reduce the exhaust orifice, rotate the screw counter-clockwise to
with cover plate. the different gasket mounting can create different EAVair valve type as shown below.
enlarge the exhaust orifice.
1.2. Single solenoid valve turn to single air control valve:
Manifold right side Manifold left side
l~nternal pilot External pilot A)Unload the cover plate of "12" end, mounted the gasket r = - - t = = i Exhaust
Exhaus
EAV as internal pilot, then mounted the cover plate and screw. throttle throttle
I B)Unload the pilot valve of "14" end, mounted the gasket H===;!:;;===tt orifice orifice
,
-------.!. ----- as external pilot, and replace the pilot valve with the
cover plate, then mounted screw. ID!<D i CD Cl)
C)After above two steps finished, single solenoid valve has
been turned to single air control valve.
10 ,;x:rrm.H.
2 4
D Flow chart
3 15
~--- r-~
1.3. Double solenoid valve turn to double air control valve
External pilot
/
\
'
External pilot
------+------
\
}
A) Unload the two pilot valves of "12". "14" ends.mounted
the two gaskets as external pilot and replace the pilot
valve with the cover plate, then mounted screw.
B) After above step finished, double solenoid valve has
been turned to single air control valve
"'o.8
~ 0.7
-o.6
~ 0.5
i
Model: EAV210
1.0
0.9
0.4
::;, 0.3
-~-- ' "
r--
-i---
- ,__
- - -,
........
~
.....__
'\
.....
"\
1""'-
' ,._ '\
\
'\
I\ \
20 2 4 30P ' • --.. "\ \ \ \ \
i~~ I~\/.!
_11_,;x:rrm._1~_
315 31 5
I /T~- ~ 0.2
-= 0.1
-, '\
I I
30C , • 30E 2 4
~
\ l I I
00
-~~
12
Il~r~
315
j /T~-
14
-1~111xll!tS:-:.
12 3 15 14
400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
2800
2. The classification and selection of the parallel manifold sub-base

2.1 .According to the direction of pilot air supply, we can divide the sub-base manifold into two types:
the individual pilot and centralized pilot. Model: EAV310
2.2. If you selectthe individual pilot, the fitting must be connected to the individual pilot ports.
If you select the centralized pilot type, the fitting must be connected to the centralized pilot ports.
1.0
0.9
- - ~,___
2.3. If you use parallel manifold, all of the manifold must be used the same pilot type: such as, all of them
-
~
0.8
0.7 -
- ~- ' --- ---
are the individual pilot type, or all of them are the centralized pilot type. - 0.6
~
"
--- ' '
~
*Note: Only when you use the external pilot type, you can select the individual pilot or centralized pilot. ~ 0.5
When you use the internal pilot type, the pilot ports on the manifold are ineffective.
3. The position and specification of the parallel manifold sub-base
::i
a,
0.4
::;. 0.3 --.. I'\ \
\
\
\ \ ' '
~ 0.2
I I I
0.1
I\ --- \ \ I I
00 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000
1"' ~-------------.:'::::::::::::::::::::::::::~---------~
.c Model: EAV41 0
'O
g
1.0
0.9 -- - r---...
- 0.8
-
---
;-....
C iI'. 0.7 "
"'
E ~ 0.6 --- '\
"\ \
I\
0
~ 0.5 '
E
e>
"'
"'
'o
ilot art
:Z 0.4
[ 0.3 r--
~-- -r--..
I"\ ' ' '\

\
' \
I
I
a, r-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,==------,--,-,--,-,----,---:,-------~ a> 0.2 ---..

.c E 0.1
'\ \ \ l
f-- I'\ \ I I I I
00 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000
Centralized ilot Ri ht side ort
Model : EAV6 10
Port status of different manifold sub-base 1.0
Port 0.9
Centralized Individual ~ .....
-, --
Left side port Right side por Bottom port 0.8
ESV202MG Use Unused Unused

pilot port
Unused
pilot port
Use
"'
a.. 0.7
~ 0.6
- ,-.._ - --... t-...
I"
~
r,.
' '
ESV202MGR
ESV202MGB
Unused
Unused
Use
Unused
Unused
Use
Unused
Unused
Use
Use
I~
0.5
0.4
0.3 - --' I, ' '\
I'\ ' '
',
C.
.; 0.2
I'--.. \ I
I\ I
ESV202MGW
ESV202MGWR
Use
Unused
Unused
Use
Unused
Unused
Use
Use
Unused
Unused
~
0.1
0
0
\
"' I I
I
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 10000 11000 12000 13000 14000
' I
ESV202MGWB Unused Unused Use Use Unused Flow capacity(L/min)
Note: Please seal the bottom port by plug, when it is unused.
The above list is an example of 200M series' ordering code, the other series is follow the same
attern, onl need to chan e the series code.
Mdli
EAV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
Inner structure Cl Dimensions of valves
2
'
21 ----+---
22
EAV
23
15
----+---
4-M5x .8
14
..... • •
1 Bottom cover 9 Gasket 17 Cover plate
w
2 0-ring 10 Spacer 18 Spool I
3 0-ring 11 0-ring 19 Upper cover gasket .,,.
0, -
-----+----- ""
<ri
4
5
6
Wear ring
0-ring
Screw
12
13
14
Big piston sheath
Big piston 0-ring
Big piston
20
21
22
Upper cover
Small piston
Small piston 0-ring
""
•
'
7 0-ring 15 Screw 23 Small piston sheath

8 Body 16 Gasket
.,,.
0, <ri"
"
""
rn
•
'
N
""
___ )_ ---- ""
co
I ""
4-M x1. :, 1,1 1;1 4J 4J
I WW
64 I
131
. ' '
@ i @
i I
---------t--------- ----j----
i @ i @
4-MB x 1.25
76
EAV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
D Dimensions of manifold EAV230+ESV201 M

1. The dimensions of manifold are the same as ESV series's, please refer to page 41, 43, 45, 47.
n
· '" · D Valves used with manifolds and their dimensions
1. EAV series valve must be used with the manifolds, the details are below:
Valves
EAV Manifolds
EAV210\ EAV220
EAV310\EAV320
EAV410\ EAV420
EAV230
EAV330
EAV430
I. :~ .I
EAV61 O\EAV620 EAV630
ESV201 M EAV210\EAV220+ESV201M EAV230+ESV201M

ESV301 M EAV}10\EAV320+ESV301M EAV330+ESV301M
ESV401 M ____________________ EAV410\EAV420+ESV401M EAV430+ESV401M
ESV601 M ____________________ EAV610\EAV620+ESV601 M _______________________ EAV630+ESV601M_
ESV202M+ESV203M EAV210\EAV220+ESV202M+ESV203M EAV230+ESV202M+ESV203M

ESV302M+ESV303M EAV310\EAV320+ESV302M+ESV303M EAV330+ESV302M+ESV303M
ESV402M+ESV403M EAV41 O\EAV420+ESV402M+ESV403M
-----------------------------------------------------------------
EAV430+ESV402M+ESV403M
EAV210/220+ESV202M+ESV203M
Nole: n means the number of

ESV602M+ESV603M EAV610\EAV620 EAV630+ESV602M stations.
+ESV604M +ESV602M+ESV603M+ESV604M +ESV603M+ESV604M
2. The dimensions of valve with manifolds

EAV210/220+ESV201 M
~22+43xn
43xn
44 +43xn
Nole: n means the number of

stations.
EAV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
EAV310/320+ESV301 M EAV310/320+ESV302M+ESV303M
Note: n means the number of
•--j--
i• stations.
•@ •
•
EAV
57
2-CD6.5
Thru.hole
-·-·
52+56xn
124 Note: n means the number of

stations.
• i•
- j-
•@ • •
55
57
MffiM
EAV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
EAV410/420+ESV401 M EAV410/420+ESV402M+ESV403M
131
.,
Note: n means the number of • i •• i •• i •
• i • stations. --+-- -+-- ---+---
_____ [____ _
2-1/8"
2-1/2"
I •--+-•
•
2-<1>6.5
Thru.hole
EAV 68
72
2-<1>6.5
Thru.hole
70.5
154 Note: n means the number of

stations.
68
72
2-<1>6.5
Thru.hole
;:::
EAV200, 300, 400, 600 Series
EAV610/620/630+ESV601 M
i i
·-·------t--·-·-·-· ·-·-·-·--t--------·
i i
-.~ $ ~ EAV
2-1/8" 84 ~
85
EAV610/620/630+ESV602M+ESV603M+ESV604M
Note: n means the number of stations.
4-Cll17 dp:1
Memo AlrTAC
Note
..
Manual, mechanical and other valves
D Product series
Hand lever valve: 4H Series 74 Push-pull valve: 3L Series 76 Push-pull valve: 4L Series 77
Control
component
Hand slide valve: HSV Series 78 Hand lever valve: 4HV, 4HVL Series 79 Control valve: S3 Series 81
,_..,..
Control valve: M3 Series 83 Control valve: MS Series 85 Control valve: CM3 Series 87
:. .;
._:_;,,
··~~.• • ·$ t!JH:
__
-·-
:· ~ ' ·_
Control valve: ZM3 Series 91 Foot pedal valve: 3F, 3FM, 4F Series 93 Flow control valve: ASC Series 95
Non- return valve: NRV Series 96
a Installation and Application A

1. Before installing. be sure the valve hasn't been damaged via transportation.
2. It's suggested to use the medium lubricated by 40 µ mfilter element. Be aware of the flow direction and port size.
3. Please notice whether the installation condition accords with technical requirements (such as "working pressure" and "scope
of application temperature"), then the equipment can be installed and used.
5. Before using the fittings and tubes make sure they are clean. When connecting to fittings, be sure the PTFE Thread seal tape
is used correctly.
6. To keep the dust away, Never forget to install dirt-proof boot in air intake and outlet during dismounting .
..
Hand lever valve (5/2 way, 5/3 way) AlrTAC
4H Series
Specification
Model 210-06 230- 06
210-08 230-08 310-08 330-08 310- 10 330-10
Fluid Air (to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Operating Manual control direct acting type)
Port sizeG) ln=0Ut=1/4" ln=Out ln=0Ut=3/8"
ln=Out=Exhaust= 1/8" Exhaust= 1/8" = Exhaust= 1/4" Exhaust= 1/4"
Orifice size 14.0mm' 1 12.0mm' 16.0mm' 1 12.0mm' 25.0mm' 1 18.0mm' 30.0mm' 1 18.0mm'
(Cv=O. 78) (Cv= 0.67) (Cv=0.89) (Cv=0.67) (CV= 1.39) (CV= 1.00) (CV= 1.67) (CV= 1.00)
4H Valve type 5/2 Way I 5/3 Way 5/2 Way I 5/3 Way 5/2 Way I 5/3 Way 5/2 Way I 5/3 Way
Lubrication(2) Not required
Pressure range 0-0.8MPa (0-116psi)
D Symbol Temperature -20-70°C
10(Manual return) 10(Spring return) JOC(Manual return) Material body Aluminum alloy
Operating angle ± 15° I ± 8.5° ± 15° I ±8.5° ± 18° I ± 10° ± 18° I ± 10°
~ ~ ~ RPS (DPT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available;
® Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. It is suggested to use ISO VG32 lubricant or
JOC(Spring return) JOE(Manual return) JOE(Spring return)
the oil with the same grade.
~ RPS
~ RPS
~ RPS
D Product feature
1. Manual operation, smooth actuation, and exact and reliable
orientation.
2. Sliding column structure has good tightness and light weight and
is easy to install and dismount. 4H: Manual return
3. Internal hole adopts special processing technology which has 4HA: S rin
little attrition friction, long service life.
4. No need to add oil for lubrication. Code
5. Panel-mounting makes it convenient to install and apply. 2: 200 Series Port size
3: 300 Series Code Port size
Flow chart 06 : 1/8"
Valve type 200 Series
08: 1/4"
Model: 4H210-08 08: 1/4"
300 Series
closed center 10: 3/8'
il1[Rtl
exhaust center
o O 400 800 1200 1600

Flow capacity (L/min)
Model: 4H310-10
il llB II
0
D Installation
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Item
Round head screw
Bottom cover
Body
0-rino
Soool
Too cover
Round head cover
Axle
1. 5/3 way manual return hand lever valve is positioned by steel ball, 9 Stoo screw
which is convenient to switch. Please applythe proper force to avoid 10 Serino
11 Steel ball jacket
the position mismatch and misoperation.
12 Steel ball
2. When installed by panel, disassemble the gasket according to the 13 Ecl io
practical requirement. 14 Side cover
3. Below is the installation method for reference. 15 Sprin A
Note: Please give your attention on the panel thickness and hole 16 Spring holder
dimension when installed by panel.
200Series: ct> 16
300Series: ct> 20
Dia. of Installation hole
Panel
Panel Installation
.. Body Installation
4H Series
D Dimensions
4H2101310, 4HA210\310
4H
200 : M16X1 .5
Model\ltem A AB AC B C CA D K KA KB p PA Q QA QB QC e
4H210-06
81 .5 69.5 57.5 35 90 22 18 4.3 20 23.5 1/8" 36 1/8" 18 32.5 15
4HA210-06
4H210-08
81 .5 69.5 57.5 35 90 22 18 4.3 20 23.5 1/8" 36 1/4" 21 1.5 32.5 15
4HA210-08
4H310-08
101 87 73 40 93.5 27 18 4.3 24 27.5 1/4" 45 1/4" 22 40.5 18
4HA310-08
4H310-10
101 87 73 40 93.5 27 18 4.3 24 27.5 1/4" 45 3/8" 24 2 40.5 18
4HA310-10
4H230C\330C, 4H230E\330E
4H230C-06
81.5 69.5 57.5 35 90.5 22 18 4.3 20 23.5 1/8" 36 1/8" 18 32.5 8.5
4H230E-06
4H230C-08
81.5 69.5 57.5 35 90.5 22 18 4.3 20 23.5 1/8" 36 1/4" 21 1.5 32.5 8.5
4H230E-08
4H330C-08
101 87 73 40 94 27 18 4.3 24 27.5 1/4" 45 1/4" 22 40.5 10
4H330E-08
4H330C-10
101 87 73 40 94 27 18 4.3 24 27.5 1/4" 45 3/8" 24 2 40.5 10
4H330E-10
4HA230C\330C, 4HA230E\330E
200: M16X1 .5
4HA230C-06
100.5 88.5 76.5 35 90.5 22 18 4.3 20 23.5 1/8" 36 1/8" 18 32.5 8.5
4HA230E-06
4HA230C-08
100.5 88.5 76.5 35 90.5 22 18 4.3 20 23.5 1/8" 36 1/4" 21 1.5 32.5 8.5
4HA230E-08
4HA330C-08
120 106 92 40 94 27 18 4.3 24 27.5 1/4" 45 1/4" 22 40.5 10
4HA330E-08
4HA330C-10
120 92 40 94 27 18 4.3 24 27.5 1/4" 45 3/8" 24 2 40.5 10
..
106
4HA330E-10
Push-pull valve(3/2way) AlrTAC
3L Series
Specification
Model 3L 110-06 3L210-06 3L210- 08 3L310-08 3L310-10
l • ~· ,·
__..
•. .1·1· PortsizeG)
12.0mm'
1/8"
14.0mm' 16.0mm'
1/4"
25.0mm'
3/8"
30.0mm'
Orifice size
(Cv=0 .67) I
(Cv=O. 78) (Cv=0.89) I
(Cv=1 .39) (Cv=1.67)
3L Valve type 3/2 Way
Pressure range 0-0.8M Pa(0-1 16psi)
Temperature -20~ 70°C
Material body Alu minum alloy
D Symbol ® Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. It is suggested to use ISO VG32
lubricant or the oil with the same grade.
~PR
Flow chart
Model: 3L 110-06
Model
i!l
! 3L: 3 port 2 position push-pull valve I
,, I
1:
c 0.2 Port size
l_ 01 Code Port size
o O O 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 100 Series 06: 1/8'
Valve type 06: 1/8'
Flow capacity (L/min) 200 Series
! 10: 2position l 08: 1/4'
08: 1/4'
300 Series
Model: 3L210-08 10: 3/8'
i!l B
g, 0.2
] 0.1
8- 0 0
,, I
l Dimensions
400 800 1200 1600

Model: 3L310-10
i1~1
1•
l
C
o 0
0.2
0.1
400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 1
Flow capacity (L/min) ltem\Type 3L11006 3L21006 3L21008 3L31008 3L31010
A 87 98 98 106.5 106.5
AB 47.8 57.8 57.8 66.5 66.5
D Inner structure AC 10 10 10 10 10
B 18 22 22 27 27
C 27 35 35 40 40
D 25 25 25 25 25
E M1 2X0.75 M14X1.0 M14X1.0 M16X1.0 M16X10
K 3.1 4. 3 4.3 4.3 4.3
KA 21 25 25 30 30
KB 13 16 16 18 18
KC 7.7 8 8 10 10
L 3.3 3.3 3.3 4. 3 4.3
No. Item No. Item No. Item LA 19 30 30 35 35
1 Round head screw 6 Round head screw 11 Hexagon nut LB 13 17 17 20 20
2 Bottom cover 7 Sprinq 12 Top cover LC 14 13.5 13.5 15.5 15.5
p 1/8' 1/8" 1/4' 1/ 4" 3/8'
3 Body 8 Stop screw 13 Safety nut
4 0-ring Spring base 14 Hand grip PA 16 22.5 22.5 24 24
9
PB 2 0 0 0 0
5 Spool 10 Steel ball
PC 15.5 17.5 17.5 21 21
..
PD 24.5 28.5 28.5 33 33
PE 1 0 1.5 0 2
Push-pull valve(5/2way) AlrTAC
4L Series
Specification
Model
Fluid
Operating
4L 110-06 4L210-06 4L210- 08 4L31 0- 08
Air (to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Manual control direct acting type)
4L310-10
i
Port sizeG) 1/8" 1/4" 3/8"
12.0mm' 14.0mm' 16.0mm' 25.0mm' 30.0mm'
Orifice size
(Cv=0.67) I (Cv=O. 78) (Cv=0.89) I (Cv=1.39) (Cv=1.67)
Valve type 5/2Way 4L
Pressure range 0-0.8MPa (0-116psi)
Temperature -20-70°C
Material body Aluminum alloy
<D PTthread, Gthread and NPTthreadare available;
® Once lubricated air is used, continue with same medium to optimise valve life span. It is suggested to use ISO VG32
Symbol Ordering code
A B
~RPS
D Flow chart ! 4L: 5 port 2 position push-pull valv~

Model: 4L 110-06
il l& II 300
Flow capacity
600
(L/min)
900
Model: 4L210-08
1200
Valve type
! 10: 2 position I
Port size
Code
200 Series
300 Series
Port size
100 Series 06: 1/8'
06: 1/8'
08: 1/4'
08: 1/4'
10: 3/8'
Dimensions
.oi!IIIJHI
O O 400
Flow capacity
800
(L/min)
1200 1600
il lld l 0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400

ltem\Type
A
AB
AC
B
4L 11006
98
58 .8
10
18
4L21006
106
65.8
10
22
4L21008
106
65.8
10
22
4L31008
121.5
81
10
27
4L31010
121 .5
81
10
27
D Inner structure C 27 35 35 40 40
D 25 25 25 25 25
E M12x 0.75 M14 x 1.0 M14 x 1.0 M16x1 .0 M16 x 1.0
K 3.3 4.3 4.3 4.3 4.3
KA 14 20 20 24 24
KB 22 22.5 22.5 28.5 28.5
KC 19 23.5 23.5 27.5 27.5
L 3.3 3.3 3.3 4.3 4.3
LA 30 38 38 50 50
LB 13 17 17 20 20
LC 14 13.5 13.5 15.5 15.5
p 1/8' 1/8" 1/8' 1/ 4" 1/4'
1 Round head screw 6 Soring 11 Top cover
PA 16 18 21 22 24
2 Bottom cover 7 Stop screw 12 Safety nut
PB 3 0 3 0 4
3 Bodv 8 Sorino base 13 Hand orio
PC 21 23.5 22 29.5 28.5
4 Spool 9 Steel ball
PD 29 32.5 32.5 40.5 40.5
5 0-rino 10 Hexaoon nut
Q 1/8' 1/8" 1/4' 1/ 4" 3/8'
QA 28 36 36 45 45
..
QB 2 0 0 0 0
QC 15 14.5 14.5 18 18
Hand slide valve AlrTAC
HSV Series
D Specification
Model HSV06 HSV08 HSV10 HSV15 HSV20 HSV25
PortsizeG) 1/8' 1/4" 3/8' 1/2" 3/4" 1'
23.0mm' 40.0mm' 62.0mm' 140.0mm' 250.0mm' 392.0mm'
Orifice size
(Cv=1.28) (Cv=2.20) (Cv=3.50) (Cv=7.80) (Cv=13.80) (Cv=21.78)
HSV Valve type 3/2 Way
Pressure range 0-1 .0MPa(0- 145psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psil
D Symbol
m p R
D Product feature
1. There are several ways of internal and external thread connection, suitable
Port size
for the application in different pipeline systems. 06: 1/8'
2. The direction-change slides smoothly and has good hand feeling. 08: 1/4' Dovtthread
3. There is large effective circulating area. 10: 3/8' Blank: Standard
4. The valve spool surface is treated with acid washing passivation, and the 15: 1/2' SS: Double male thread
20: 3/4' FF: Double female thread
surface of valve body is oxidized to keep the color for a long time.
25: 1"
SF: Male and female thread
D Inner structure
D Dimensions
Double female thread(FF)
No. Item
1 Valve plug
2 Body
3 0-ring
4 Clip
Male and female thread(SF) Double male thread (SS)
• I
·- .._ cc
<( e
A
Type\ltem Double Male and Double male B BA D E EA F FA
Standard
female thread female thread thread
HSV06 50 43 50 57 27.5 17 30 1/8" 1/8" 1/8' 1/8"
HSV08 58 47 58 69 30 19 32.5 1/4" 1/4" 1/4' 1/4"
HSV10 68.5 55 .5 68.5 81.5 35.5 22 39 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8"
HSV15 85.5 70.5 85.5 100.5 44 30 50 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2"
HSV20 96.5 79.5 96.5 113.5 53.5 36 58 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
HSV25 114.5 96.5 114.5 132.5 65.5 44 70 1" 1" 1" 1'
..
4HV, 4HVL Series
D Specification
4HV2D 0 4HV2DD 4HV3D0 4HV3D0 4HV4D0 4HV4D0
Model
-06(L) -08(L) -08( L) -10(L) - 15(L) -20(L)
Portsize<D 1/8" 1/4" 1/4" 3/8" 1/ 2" 3/4"
14.0mm' 16.0mm' 30.0mm' 33.0mm' 88.0mm' 95.0mm'
Orifice size 4HV\4HVL
(Cv=0.78) (Cv=0.89) (Cv=1.67) (Cv=1.83) (Cv=4.89) (Cv=5.27)
Valve type 4/2 Way 4/3 Way
Pressure range 0-1 .0MPa(0-145psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa (215psi)
Temperature -20-70"C
Operating angle 90°(4/3 Way:45°)
D Symbol <D PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
4/2 way 4/2 way with lock
~ p R
l:ITilW
p R D Ordering code
4/3 way closed center 4/3 way closed center type with lock
~ ~
A B '
p R p R
!4HV: Hand lever valve I

Product feature
1. The direction-change turns lightly with good hand feeling and exact
Note
orientation .
Blank: Without lock
2. Large effective circulating area leads to little pressure loss. L: With lock
3. Panel and body installation are optional. The panel installation can be Valve type
attached with installing nut. 10:4 ort2 osition
30: 4 art 3 osition G)
Blank: Bod installation
S: Panel installation ~
Port size
Code Port size
D Flow chart 06: 1/8'
200 Series
08: 1/4'
Model:2 Series 08: 1/4"
300 Series
10: 3/8'
15: 1/2'
400 Series
20: 3/4'
G) 4 port 3 position only has closed center type.

® The panel installation can be attached with installing nut.
200 400 600 800 1000
Flow capacity Umin
Model:3 Series
No. Item No. Item
1 Bogy 12 Pin one
2 Seal base 13 Front cover
3 Valve cover 14 Spring
4 Valve plug 15 Handle
5 Column pin 16 Pin two
1000 2000 6 Shaft 17 Shaft 0-ring
7 18 Spring
Flow capacity Umin
8 19 Iron plate
9 20 Fixin screw
10 21 Bod 0-rin
Model:4 Series 11 22 Seal base 0-rin
Flow capacity Umin
..
4HV, 4HVL Series
Cl Dimensions
4HV\4HVL (.)
(.)
Model\ltem A AB B C CA CB D K KA KB M MA MB p PA
4HV2DD-06 120 62 62 92.5 73 45 M34x1 .5 5.5 49 49 3 40 1.5 1/8' 11 .5
4HV2D D - 08 120 62 62 92.5 73 45 M34x1 .5 5.5 49 49 3 40 1.5 1/4' 11.5
4HV3D0- 08 140 74 74 104 88.5 56 M40x1 .5 6.5 62 62 3 51 1.5 1/4' 13.5
4HV3D0-10 140 74 74 104 88.5 56 M40x1 .5 6.5 62 62 3 51 1.5 3/8' 13.5
4HV4D0-15 160 94 102 128 110 72 M52x1 .5 6.5 89 81 3 64 2 1/2' 18
4HV4D0-20 160 94 102 128 110 72 M52x1 .5 6.5 89 81 3 64 2 3/4' 18
m m m------------- -------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------
<( (.)
(.)
ID
(.)
2- <l>M
AB
A
Panel installation
<(
(.) (.)
ID
(.)
Model\ltem A AB B C CA CB D K KA KB M MA MB p PA
4HV200-06L 120 62 62 92.5 84 45 M34X1 .5 5.5 49 49 3 40 1.5 1/8' 11.5
4HV2DD- 08L 120 62 62 92.5 84 45 M34x1.5 5.5 49 49 3 40 1.5 1/4' 11 .5
4HV3D0- 08L 140 74 74 104 99 56 M40x1 .5 6.5 62 62 3 51 1.5 1/4' 13.5
4HV3D0-10L 140 74 74 104 99 56 M40x1 .5 6.5 62 62 3 51 1.5 3/8' 13.5
4HV4D0-15L 160 94 102 128 121 72 M52x1 .5 6.5 89 81 3 64 2 1/2' 18
4HV4D0-20L 160 94 102 128 121 72 M52x1 .5 6.5 89 81 3 64 2 3/4' 18
Control valve(3/2way) AlrTAC
S3 Series
D Specification
Model S3B S3C S3D
S3V S3R S3L S3Y S3PM S3PP S3PF S3PL S3HS
Operating External control direct acting type
Portsize<D 05:M5; 06:1/8"; 08:1/4'
Orifice size 05:2.5 mm' (Cv=0.14); 06:8.0mm' (Cv=0.45); 08:12.0mm' (Cv=0.67)
Valve type 3/2Way
Lubrication(2) Not required 53
Pressure range 0- 0.8MPa (0- 114psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(21 5psi)
Temperature -20-70 "C
CD PTthread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
D Ordering code
Symbol
Port size Thread type
M5 Not code
Model Blank: PT
1/8"
G:G
1/4"
Product feature T: NPT
1. The external force required by changing the direction of the series of S3B, Button color
S3R, S3L and S3V is provided by external mechanism, which can be used Model Button color
for position test or limit switch. PL R: Red
2. The series of S3PF, S3PM, S3PP, S3PL, S3Y, S3HS, S3C and S3D are R:Red
PP, PF
G: Green
operated manually, owning control joints with several structure forms and PM,HS
B: Black
suitable for application under different conditions. Others Not code
3. Shut-off structure has good tightness and is sensitive in direction changing
and lubricant is not necessary. Port size
4. Multi-mounting makes it convenient to install and apply. 05: MS
5. The control joints of series of S3C, S3D, S3Y, S3R and S3L are made of 06: 1/8"
08: 1/4"
metal which has long service life and more reliable and steady performance.
Flow chart D Inner structure

Model: S3B-05
,f 0.8
-
----
:a; 0.7 ~,___
~
0.6
~ 0.5 ~,----- " '\, No. Item No. Item
-
~ 0.4
~
r--.....
-......_ 1 Body 11 Main body of button
"\" "'
~ 0.3 -...._,_ 2 Bottom cover 12 Top cover
~ 0.2
----..... I' \
i 0.1 \I \ \ I
3
4
Stopper plug
Valve core
13
14
Button ring
Clamping nut
~ 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
0 5 Screw 15 Button bodv
6 Button pressing buckle 16 Connector
7 Spring 17 0-ring
Model: S3B-06
0.8 8 Clamping gasket 18 Spring
"'
[]_
::,; 0.7 9 Dust cover 19 Spring
0.6 10 Button cap 20 0 -ring
~ 0.5
:::,
0.4
"'"'~ 0.3
0.
0, 0.2
..; D Reversal stroke Unit:mm
1§ 0.1
Q)
0.
0 900 Type Spool stroke Button stroke Type Spool stroke Roller(handle) stroke
0 S3B 2.4 - 4.0 - S3R 2.4- 3.4 5.5-7. 8
S3PF 2.4 - 4.0 3.8- 5.4 S3L 2.4- 3.4 6.0-8.6
Model: S3B-08 S3PP 2.4 - 4.0 3.8- 5.4 S3V 2.4- 3.8 3.4- 4.8
"'
[]_
::,;
0.8 S3PM 2.4 - 4.0 3.8- 5.4 S3C 2.4- 3.8 14.4- 18.4
0.7
S3PL 2.4 - 4.0 5.9- 7.5 S3D 2.4- 3.8 7.4- 9.4
0.6
~ 0.5 S3HS 2.4- 4.0 5.1- 6.7
:::,
"'"'~ 0.4
0. 0.3
0,
C:
0.2
~ 0.1
Q)
0. 0
0
Flow capacity
~
S3 Series
...
D Dimension
How to
..... •I•
Ordering code IType

.. I I
Ordering code I Type

• I • .. Ordering code I Type
. . ..
order M3C21 0-P13A IM3C210longhandlelypeconu~sel M3D210-P13A I U30210Sh~lhandlelyprnnu~sel M3Y210-P1 3A I M3Y210 Levertypecontrolset
~PJ~!~~~1e S3C05, S3C06, S3C08 S3D05, S3D06, S3D08 S3Y05, S3Y06, S3Y08
53 I/_
1 ~
st
:!~ ~111 t-i ~

;m
Dimensiom - 30.5 -
~ ~
81 5 33.5
Attentions A ~f!~ -:--- ::::-)~! ~IP3Es- 3

1)The control set is made of engineering plastic which only allows manual
operation and switching valves through metal impact is forbidden.
2)The series of S3B, S3C, S3D, S3PM, S3PF and S3PP get the function of How to
....
Ordering code Type Ordering code Type
..
Ordering code Type
automatic restoration. The hand valves of S3Y, S3HS and S3PL are in the order M3R210-Pl4A M3R210 Rollerlypecontrolsel M3L210-P14A 113~10Ril~li~lre!relurnlipeoonrris~ S3V05106,081-P14A S3V05(06.08)Verlicallypecoolrolse1
type of manual restoration. S3PL will be restored by turning the revolve
button after being pressed into orientation.
3)Pay attention to the reversing stroke. The reversing stroke can not surpass
its stoke stipulated in stroke control table when the direction-change of the
valve is forced by any external forces,otherwise it will cause the damage
of the valve.
4)The S3L can only switch the valve in single direction (impact from right to
left). The impact from the other direction is invalid (from left to right). Dimensions
5)Control joint combination can be ordered individually. Please refer to the
table on the right for order details.
Dimensions of body(S3B)
Model PP Protruding type PM Mushroom type PL Latching type (only red)

Ordering code Type Ordering code Type Ordering code Type
How to S3PP05- P11A S3PPprolnllirrgljpeosel(Green S3PM05- P11A S3l'M nmhrorMTicy~oonl~sel(Green) S3PL05- P12A S3PL Lalcheg lypecontrolset(R
order S3PP05- P12A S3PPprolrudirrgtyier:ootr1Jsel(Red) S3PM05- P12A Sl'll musmiom ljpeconlrolset(Red)
S3PP05-P13A S3PPprolnllirrg~l)erooodsel(Black) S3PM05- P13A S3PM mus.lroom cypeconlrolsel(Blact)
$ "'c..
S3PP05, S3PP06, S3PP08 S3PM05, S3PM06, S3PM08
(])36
S3PL05, S3PL06, S3PL08
(])36
~
p
"'
~
KA KB
T pelltem
05
A
26
B C
16.5 36
D
30
K
M5x0.8
PA
16 15 M5x0.8 13
PB
9
X
,.
N st
N"'
"'"'
a,
I
06
08
30
34
16.5 47
17.5 52
41
46
M5x0.8
M5x0.8
23 20.5 1/8"
24 22.5 1/4"
17.5
21
11.5
12 Dimensions
"';;:;
Model
{ffl (® @
PF Flat type HS Selector type
How to S3PF05-P11A S3PFflattypeconlrolsel (Green) S3HS05-P11A SJHSselecl~typeconlrol set (Green)
order S3PF05- P12A S3PFf~tlypeconlrolset (Red) S3HS05- P12A SJHSselectorlypeconlr~ sel (Red)
S3PF05-P13A S3PFftallypeoon!rolsel (Black) S3HS05-P13A SJHSselecttrtypecoolr~sel (Black)
S3PF05, S3PF06, S3PF08 S3HS05, S3HS06, S3HS08
Dimensions
M3 Series
...Specification
Fluid
: I . . .. .
.
Operatinq External control direct actinq type
Port sized) 05:M5; 06:1/8"; 08:1/4"
0 T I Mini type 05:2.5 mm' (Cv=0.14)
nice 1110 06:8.0mm' (Cv=0.45)
size I 210 06:9.0mm' (Cv= 0.50); 08:12.0mm' (Cv=0.67)
Valve type 3/2 Way M3
. Lubrication(2) Not required
--- .
......
Pressure ranqe
Proof pressure
Temperature
Material bodv
<D PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
0-1 .0MPa(0-145psi)
1.5MPa(215psi)
-20-70 "C
Aluminum allov
. ® Once lubricated air is used, continuewith same medium lo optimise valve life span. It is suggested lo use ISO VG32
---
lubricant or the oil with the same grade .
Symbol.$ .$ ~ .$
Product feature
Exhaust outlet locates over the (body), which is convenient to install muffler Model Button color
to decrease noise and pollution. PL R:Red
2. The external force required by direction-change of series of M3B, M3R and R:Red
M3L is provided by external mechanism.which can be used for position test PP, PF
G: Green
or (stroke switch] limit switch. PM,HS
B: Black
3. M3C, M3D, M3Y, M3PF, M3PM, M3PP, M3PL and M3HS are operated Others Not code
manually, owning control joints with several structure forms and suitable for
application under different conditions.
4. It is in sliding column structure that the control force is not influenced by
working pressure (that is, there is no back pressure effect); internal circle is 100 Series 06: 1/8'
sealed with good tightness and the direction-change is sensitive. Code 061/8'
200 Series
5. No need to add oil for lubrication. 081/4'
6. Multi-mounting makes it convenient to install and apply;
7. The control joints of series of M3C, M3D, M3Y, M3R, and M3L are made of
metal which has long service life and more reliable and steady performance.
Flow chart
Model: M3B-05
il lllllll
~
0
O O 50
Flow capacity
Model: M3B110-06
100
(L/min)
150 200 250 300 350
Inner structure
8
as 1.0
0. 0.9 No. Item No. Item
::.
~
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
-
......
...... ~
...._ r--.... I,
1--......
......
' \
\
\
1
2
3
Botton cover
Screw
Spring
9 Axle
10 Rotating block
11 Screw
i 0.4
0.3
0.2
~
r--
...._
'-
'' " I\ \
I
I
4 Spacer 12 Fore cover
,§ r-... \ 1 1 5 Body 13 Piston 0-ring
I!!
0.1
0 '200 " \ \
6 Screw 14 Spool
~ 0 400 600 800 1000
0 Flow capacity (L/min) 7 Roller holder 15 Positioning block
8 Roller
Model: M3B210-06 Model: M3B210-08
--- - '
8'_ 1.0
::. 0.9
Reversal stroke Unit:mm
~
0.8 Common type Mini type
- - --- " "''

~ 0.7
Tvoe Soool stroke Button stroke Tvoe Soool stroke Roller(handle) stroke Tvoe Soool stroke Roller stroke
" 0.6
ill 0.5
~ 0.4 -...... ~
' t-...
" ''
\
M3B 2.0- 3.3 - M3R 2.0-3.0 4.6-6.8 M3B05 2.0- 3.3 -
~0.3
.5 0.2
~ 0.1
--
.........
'
",. \
',. I\
\
\
\ I I
I I
M3PF 2.0 - 3.3
M3PP 2.0- 3.3
3.8-5.1
3.8-5.1
M3L 2.0 - 3.0
M3C 2.0- 3.0
5.0- 7.8
11 .0- 16.0
M3R05 2.0- 3.0
M3L05 2.0- 3.0
6.0-8.5
7.0- 10.0
~o
0 '
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1300
\ I 1 1 I M3PM 2.0-3.3
M3PL 2.0 - 3.3
3.8-5.1
5.9- 7.2
M3D 2.0-3.0 5.5-8.0
Flow capacity Flow capacity (L/min)
M3HS 2.0 -3 .3 5.1 - 6.4
M3 Series
D Assemble chart D Control set dimensions

...
How to
. . .....
Ordering codelType
. .. I
Ordering codelType
. ... .. Ordering codeIType
. . .
.
order M3C210-P13AIMJC2t0 long haidletype conlrol set M3D21O-P13A 11130210 Short handletype control se M3Y210-Pl3A I M3Y210 Levertypecontrotset
Applicable M3C110, M3C210 M3D110, M3D210 M3Y110, M3Y210
products
Attentions A
2)The series of M3B, M3C, M3D, M3PM, M3PF and M3PP getthe function of
automatic restoration. The hand valves of M3Y, M3HS and M3PL are in the
type of manual restoration. M3PL will be restored by turning the revolve
Dimension ;!~
~m~
30.5 -
81
~:-~-~- )~I ~1P1Es- 1

J ~ 5
~111
;]!~
LIi
'"
t-1 ~
33.5
LIi
-----
....

3) Pay attention to the reversing stroke. The reversing stroke can not surpass
its stroke stipulated in stroke control table when the direction-change of the
... ... -
Ordering codelType
,- ... ..
Ordering code lType
.. -
37
valve is forced by any external forces,otherwise it will cause the damage of How to
the valve. order M3R21O-P14AIM3R210 Roller type control se M3L210-P 14AIM3L210Rolter,nll lreerelurn lypecontra set
4) The M3L can only switch the valve in single direction (impact from right to Applicable M3R110, M3R210
left). The impact from the other direction is invalid (from left to right). I o/ciducts M3L 110, M3L21D
5) Control joint combination can be ordered individually. Please refer to the
table on the right for order details. <ll15 a:, )<"~
-~ ~t/ , r'f('K, '.'. <ll15

a:, /,; ~ U') \ ·11
D Dimensions
!L ,· '..".
Dimension:
.,: ) ~~
~~
'·
'
--
I
'
"'
40
- 1~ ,-r
30.5
32.5
"'
• ~N
co
i]: 1:: ~ r-11t
I "' 30.5 "'
32.S
41.5
·~
9~H~-t-& [ ~~~iJ~!
Ordering code Type Ordering code Type Type
How to S3PP05-P11A S3PP~olrudi,J1Jpecontrol set (Green S3PM05- P11 A S3PM rooshmomfypeconlroset(G"'n) S3PL Latching typecontrol set (Red
ltem\T pe M3B110 M3B210 ltem\T order S3PP05- P12A S3PP protnr<lingtypeconlrolsel(Red S3PM05- P12A S3Pl,I mus~oom fypecontro sel(Red)
A 27 35 KB 15.5 18.5 S3PP05-PI 3A S3PP protrudi,J ljpecontrol sel(Black) S3PM05- PI 3A S3PM n1Jshmom cypecontrolset(Black)
B 18 22 KC 16 20 AftJ~a~le M3PP110, M3PP210 M3PM110, M3PM210 M3PL110, M3PL210
C 52 63.8 P 06:1/8" 06:1/ 8'\08:1/4"
D 46.5 58 PA 16 20
K 3.3 4.3 PB 15.5 18.5
Dimensions
Model PF Flat type HS Selector type

How to S3PF05-P11A S3PF flat type control set (Green S3HS05-P11A S3HSsetectortypecontrolset (Green)
Mini control set dimensions
., order S3PF05-Pl2A S3PF flattype control sel (Red
S3PF05-Pl3A S3PF flattype control set (Black
S3HS05-P1 2I S3HSseleclorlypecontrolset (Red)
S3HS05-P13I S3HSseleclorlypecontrolset (Black)
order M3R05-Pl4A M3R05 Rollertypecontrol set M3L05- P14A Ml~Ro,rnnmrerumt~e~nl~lsel ~ftJLca~1e M3PF110, M3PF210 M3HS110, M3HS210
<ll28.5
AptJLct~le M3R05 M3L05
<ll28.5
J il ~
~
I
X
;
I
§~
l J "'
Dimensions Dimension: I I II
a .m
I · -m
LIi
'"
M:IM
MS Series
...
D Specification
Fluid
: • . . ..
.
Port sizel1J 05:MS; 06 1/8"; 08:1/4' • ! ·.-
.• 0 l I Mini tvoe 05:2.5 mm' (Cv= 0.141
•. n ice 1110
size 1210
06:8.0mm' (Cv=0.451
06:9.0mm' (Cv=0.50); 08:12.0mm' (Cv=0 .67)
Valve type 5/2Way MS
I .,,.
Lubrication(Z)
Pressure range
Proof oressure
Temoerature
Material bodv
Not required
0-1 .0MPa(0- 145psi)
1.5MPa(215osi)
-20-70 "C
Aluminum allov
(j) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
Product feature Model Button color

1. Exhaust outlet locates over the body, which is convenient to install muffler PL R: Red
to decrease noise and pollution. R: Red
2. The external force required by direction-change of series of M5B, M5R and PP, PF
G: Green
M5L is provided by external mechanism, which can be used for position test PM, HS
B: Black
or [stroke switch] limit switch. Others Not code
3. M5C,M5D,M5Y,M5PF,M5PM,M5PP,M5PLand M5HS are operated
manually, owning control joints with several structure forms and suitable
for application under different conditions.
4. It is in sliding column structure that the control force is not influenced by 100 Series 06: 118'
Code
working pressure (that is, there is no back pressure effect); internal circle 06: 118'
200 Series
is sealed with good tightness and the direction-change is sensitive. 08: 114'
5. Lubricant is not necessary.
6. Multi-mounting makes it convenient to install and apply.
7. The control joints of series of M5C,M5D,M5Y,M5R and M5L are made of
metal which has longer service life and more reliable and steady performance
Flow chart
Model: M5B-05
il1~
o
1111~a,1
0
50
Flow capacity
100 150
(L/min)
200 250 300 350
Inner structure
Model: M5B110- 06
-- -
"' 1.0
g, 0.9 No. Item No. Item
0.8 ........_ 1 Screw 9 Spool
0.7 1----.
' '' ' '

2 Fore cover 10 Piston 0-ring
~:~
i[0.4 -...._
g, 0.3
~ 0.2
~
--.
--... '
--- ' I"'-. I'..
r-... ......
......
'\ '\'\
3
4
Body
Spacer
11
12
Screw
Roller holder
8'~.1 ' '\ ' I\

'\.
' I
\
I
\
I
I
l
5
6
Positioninq block
Screw
13
14
Axle
Rotating block
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Flow capacity (L/min) 7 Botton cover 15 Rocker
8 Spring 16 Roller
Model: M5B210-08
--
--.
-
Reversal stroke Unit:mm
" Common type Mini type

---- --....
' '' I
r-.... \
Type Spool stroke Button stroke Type Spool stroke Roller(handle) stroke Type Spool stroke Roller stroke
---- '
-......
'
'\. '\ I
0 200 400 600 800 1000 12001300

I I
"" '\ " I\
I
I
I
I
I
I
M5B
M5PF
M5PP
MSPM
M5PL
2.0- 3.3
2.0-3.3
2.0- 3.3
2.0- 3.3
2.0- 3.3
-
3.8-5.1
3.8-5.1
3.8-5.1
5.9- 7.2
M5R 2.0-3.0
M5L 2.0- 3.0
M5C 2.0- 3.0
MSD 2.0- 3.0
4.6-6.8
5.0- 7.8
11 .0- 16.0
5.5- 8.0
M5B05 2.0-3.3
M5R01 2.0- 3.0
M5L05 2.0-3 .0
-
6.0-8 .5
7.0- 10.0
M5HS 2.0- 3.3 5.1- 6.4

MS Series
D Assemble chart D Control set Dimensions

Fixationwayofbody • • . •. ,. I
How to Ordering code Type Ordering code Type Ordering code Type
order M3C21 0-P13A M3C210lo11Jharnllelypecontrolset M30210-P13A M30210S1orthandle1ype controlset M3Y210-P13A M3Y210 Levertypecontrolset
Applicable M5C110, M5C210 M5D110, M5D210 M5Y110, M5Y210
roducts
MS
!l!r=:: J ~
~,0 ~
Dimensions ;
Attentions A ~~8~1----~-<
2)The series of M5B, M5C, M5D, M5PM, M5PF and M5PP get the function of
automatic restoration. The hand valves of M5Y, M5HS and M5PL are in the
~:-~-C_21
type of manual restoration. M5PL will be restored by turning the revolve
3)Pay attention to the reversing stroke. The reversing stroke can not surpass
its stroke stipulated in stroke control table when the direction-change of the
. ·,.
valve is forced by any external forces.otherwise it will cause the damage of How to Ordering code Type Ordering code Type
the valve. order M3R210-P14A M3R210 Rollertype control set M3L210-P14A MllllO Ro!~~lnlr!erelurnl~econlrosel
4)The M5L can only switch the valve in single direction (impact from right to
left). The impact from the other direction is invalid (from left to right). Applicable
roducts M5R110, M5R210 M5L 110, MSL210
5) Control joint combination can be ordered individually.Please refer to the
table on the right for order details.
D Dimensions

ltem\T e M58110 M58210
Ordering code Type Ordering code Type Ordering code Type
A 27 p 06:1/8"
06:1/8' How to S3PP05-P11A S3PPprolnlli11Jljpenset(Green S3PM05-P11A SJlllj rnushroorn lypeconlrasel(Green) S3PL05- P12A S3PLLatching type contr~ set (Red)
B 18 06:1/8"
order S3PP05-P12A S3PPprolriMl11Jt}1reconlroset(Red) S3PM05- P12A SH nmhrcomlypecontro sel (Red)
C 63 PA 28 36
D 57.5 PB 15 14.5 S3PP05- P13A S3PP prolnlfi11Jljpenset(8lackJ S3PM05- P13A S3PM mushroom lypeconlolrel (Black)
Applicable M5PP110, M5PP210
K 3.3 06:1/8" nroducts M5PM110, M5PM210 M5PL 110, M5PL210
Q 06:1/8'
KA 18 08:1/4" Cll36
Cll28.5 Cll36
KB 14 QA 16 20 ~
KC 22 QB 21 22 .5
QC 29 32.5
I I I "'
"!
I I
"'
N I "'
N
I ';;
j I I IE I ; \E "'"'a;;
~ "'
N I
I sr
" "
N
::;; C,
"
N
::;; "' I II
"'
"'ti "''I " «> /
~
II II II
Dimensions "
I -!111 1 -!fll 'r , -ITTII
a ti ffl
LIJ u.
Model PF Flat type HS Selector type

Mini control set dimensions How to S3PF05- Pl1A S3PFflatlypecontrolset (Green S3HS05- Pl1A S3HSselectortypeconlrolsel (Green
order S3PF05-P12A S3PF flat type control set (Red S3HS05-P12A S3HS selectortypecontrol set (Red
S3PF05-P13A S3PFflattypecontrol sel (Black S3HS05-P13A S3HSselectortypecontroset (Black
Ordering cod Type Ordering cod Type
Applicable
M3R05- P14A M3R05 Roller type control set M3L05-P14A MlOiRolnitllr!erelumlipeconlrfal oroducts M5PF110, M5PF210 M5HS110, M5HS210
M5R05 M5L05 Cll28 .5
g
Cll28.5
Cll12 J ;L "' I
N
X
; N
"'"'
::;;,..;
Dimensions Dimensions {~
r ,- n
I
"'
,m ·- w u.
**"
Control valve(3/2 way, 5/3 way) AlrTAC
CM3 Series
.
' ,•=
"2';=:: <1>;
Specification
Model CM3D-05 CM3D -06 CM3D-08
~. Operatino External control
Pressure range 0-1.0MPa(0-114psi)(O- 1a.Obar)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psi)(15.0bar)
Valve typeG) 3 port 2 position
Orifice size 2.0mm' I 2.5mm' I 15.0mm' CM3
Lubrication 0.11 I 0.14 I 0.84
Portsiz~ M5x0.8 I 1/8' I 1/4"
<D HD series are 5/3 way.® PTthread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
Flow chart
Model: CM3B-05
1.0
-- ,_
-- -
0.9
0.8 r....
~ r-..
~
0.7
0.6
0.5
-- ' ""
....... '-
\
C.
g>
0.4
0.3
,-._
,__ --..... ""' "
""'" '-
\ \ \
D Symbol ~
:i
0.2
0.1
~
I'\ '\
'-
\ '
" \ I
I\
\
I
\ \
HD type O O 0 40 80 120 160 200 240 280
,{filp> ~ ~ ~
AB
Flow capacity (Umin)
-OilP
PA PA PA PA PA
~
RPR
Model: CM38-06
1.0
D Product feature "'
[L 0.9 .......
::. 0.8 --.....
1. The external force required by changing the direction olthe series of CM3B, CM3V, CM3L and
~~ -- r-..
---
0.7 r-..,.._
'- "-
CM3R is provided by external mechanism, which can be used for position test or limit switch. 0.6 .......
2. The series of CM3PF, CM3PM, CM3PMS, CM3PMX, CM3PL, CM3PP, CM3HS, CM3HD and
[ 0.5
0.4 - --.....
r-.. '' " " " \
""
\
CM3Y are operated manually, owning control joints with several structure forms and suitable for ,§ 0.3 r--- "- '\ '\ \ I I
application under different conditions. ~

ll;_
0.2
0.1 ---
I'\ \
"-
\ " I
\ \
\
I \
3. Shut-off structure has good tightness and is sensitive in direction changing and lubricant is not O O 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
necessary. Flow capacity (L/min)
4. Multi-mounting makes it convenient to install and apply.
5. The control joints of series of CM3L, CM3V, CM3R and CM3Y are made of metal which has long Model: CM38-08
service life and more reliable and steady performance. 1.0
-
-----
6. CM3PMS. CM3PMX Series have metallic guard, it can protect the push cup, to avoid misact due to "' 0.9 .......
outside force touching the push cup. So they can be used more reliably.
~ 0.8
0.7 ....... -- "- "'- " '-
-----
0.6
i l,,,~
[
0.5
0.4
r-.. -----......_ ......_
"'
" '\
I'.
"
'\
'\
\
.s ......__"-
\ I
"" "
D Ordering code -;;;
0.3
0.2 ~ '\ \ \ I
~ 0.1 "- \ \ I I I
o O O 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
Valve's type
ICM3: CM type 3/2 5/3 way I Port size Thread type
M5 Not code
Model
Blank: PT
1/8"
G:G
1/4"
T: NPT
Button color
Model Button color
B,R,L,V,Y Not code
PL R:Red
R: Red
PP,PF,PM
G: Green
PMS,PMX
B: Black
HS,HD
Y:Yellow
Port size
05: M5
06: 1/8"
08: 1/4"
CM3 Series
D Installation and operation D Inner structure
1. Mounting way: by body, by panel I, by panel II, latching type, mushroom type. Please refer to the
following picture:
Fixation way of body Fixation way of panel Fixation way of panel II
11 12
Fixed late Fixing plate 12 Shaft
Fixed plate Thickness,;;6 2 Screw 13 Lock pin
Thickness,;;6 Fix hole<l>14.5 '----,..__
3 Spacer 14 Roller bracket
CM3 Fix hole<l>30.~5~~~~
F~ixedplate ~ 4 Body 15 Spring
@
5 Spring 16 0-ring
6 Spool 17 Screw
.. 'O 7 Connerting gasket 18 0-ring
Bottom cover
8 connecting holder 19
gasket
Latching type Mushroom type 9 Clamping nut 20 Spring
10 Spring gasket 21 0-ring
11 Roller
Fixed late ~
Thickness,;;;6 Disassembly:
Fix holeQ)30.5 Remove the
~~s1E~~ screw, then to
draw the button. D Dimension (Basic type)
Assembly:
Install
the button, then
to tighten the
screw.
Big mushroom type(With guard) Mushroom type(With guard)
Push cap
Guard
Fixed plate Fixed plate

Thickness,;;6 Thickness,;; 6
Fix hole<l>30.5 Fix hole<l>30.5
View from A
Disassembly: Remove the push cap, then remove Disassembly: Untighten the guard first, then remove
the guard. thepush cap with the guard. R
Assembly: Install the guard, then to tighten the push cap. Assembly: Install the guard, then to tighten the pushcap. $ I
2. The control set is made of engineering plastic which only allows manual operation and switching valves ...
<C A {TY
through metal impact is forbidden.
3. The series of CM3B, CM3L, CM3V, CM3R, CM3PM, CM3PMS, CM3PMX, CM3PF, CM3PP get the
function of automatic restoration. The hand valves of CM3Y, CM3HS, CM3HD, CM3PL are in type of
manual restoration. CM3PL will be restored by turning the revolve button after being pressed into 25.5
orientation. 42
4. Pay attention to the reversing stroke. The reversing stroke can not surpass its stroke stipulated in stroke
control table when the direction-change of the valve is forced by any external forces, otherwise it will <1>6.3
cause the damage of the valve.
Spool Button (Roller\ Spool Button (Roller\
Type Type
stroke Handle) stroke stroke Handle) stroke
CM3B05(06) 1.5- 3.0 - CM3B08 2.4-4.0 -
CM3R05(06) 1.5- 2.5 3.0- 4.8 CM3R08 2.4- 3.2 6.8- 9.0 I A
N
....
"'"'
$
CM3L05(06) 1.5-2.3 3.0-4.8 CM3L08 2.4- 3.2 7.2-9.7
CM3V05(06) 1.5- 3.0 2.7- 4.2 CM3V08 2.4- 4.0 2.6- 4.2
g: p .,.,
N
CM3Y05(06)
CM3PL05(06)
1.5- 2.5
1.5- 2.5
3.0- 4.8
4.0- 5.0
CM3Y08
CM3PL08
2.4- 3.2
2.4- 3.5
6.8- 9.0
4.0- 5.0
$
CM3PP05(06) 1.5- 3.0 4.0- 5.5 CM3PP08 2.4- 4.0 4.0- 5.5 30
40
CM3PF05(06) 1.5- 3.0 4.0- 5.5 CM3PF08 2.4- 4.0 4.0- 5.5
CM3HS05(06) 1.5- 3.0 4.0-5.5 CM3HS08 2.4- 4.0 4.0- 5.5
CM3HD05(06) 1.5- 3.0 4.0- 5.5 CM3HD08 2.4-4.0 4.0- 5.5
CM3PM05(06) 1.5- 3.0 4.0-5.5 CM3PM08 2.4-4.0 4.0- 5.5
CM3PMS05(06) 1.5- 3.0 4.0- 5.5 CM3PMX08 2.4- 4.0 4.0- 5.5
CM3PMX05(06) 1.5- 3.0 4.0- 5.5 CM3PMX08 2.4- 4.0 4.0- 5.5
5. The CM3L can only switch the valve in single direction(impact from left to right). The impact from the
other direction (from right to left) is invalid .
6. Control joint combination can be ordered individually. Please refer to external specification.
M:t:M
CM3 Series
D Control set dimension
m
·1 • • I.Ut:l!J!llf;fll!J• •
16.5
~
00 5
.;
,----------->o-!-,. I
<'>
'
I CM3
~
LiLl
Nole: CM3R06 control joint, which used in CM3R05
•
and CM3R06, can not be ordered individually.
It should be matched with basic type.
,.. Ordering code CM3V06-P1
Type CM3V vertical type control se
Applicable products CM3V05 CM3V06 CM3V08
Ordering code CM3PP06-P1

Type CM3PP protruding type control set(green)
Applicable products CM3PP05 CM3PP06 CM3PP08
<O
N Tvpe CM3PP protruding type control set(red)
Applicable products CM3PP05 CM3PP06 CM3PP08
Type CM3PP protruding type control set(black)
45 Applicable products CM3PP05 CM3PP06 CM3PP08
Note: CM3L06 control joint, which used in CM3L05 Type CM3PP protruding type control set(yellow)
and CM3L06, can not be ordered individually. Applicable products CM3PP05 CM3PP06 CM3PP08
It should be matched with basic type.
·1:. I.T.lt:l!J=ttJ;fll!.I• •
Ordering code CM3Y06-P1
ffi3
Type CM3Y lever type control set
Ap licable products CM3Y05 CM3Y06 CM3Y08
•
Ordering code CM3R08-P1
Type CM3R08 roller type control set
Applicable products CM3R08
1:.
16 Ordering code CM3PF06-P1
8.8 Type CM3PF flat type control set(green)
Applicable products CM3PF05 CM3PF06 CM3PF08
Ordering code CM3PF06-P2
Type CM3PF flat type control set(red)
Ordering CM3PL06-P2 Ordering code CM3PF06-P3
Type CM3PL latching type control set(red) Type CM3PF flat type control set(black)
Applicable Applicable products CM3PF05 CM3PF06 CM3PF08
CM3PL05 CM3PL06 CM3PL08
roducts
Ordering code CM3PF06-P4
Type CM3PF flat type control set(yellow)
Ordering code CM3L08-P1

Type CM3L08 roller type control set
Applicable products CM3L08
CM3 Series
ORO"o 11;1"1"
Q)40
Ordering code CM3PM06-P1 CM3PMS06-P1
Type CM3PM mushroom type control set(green) CM3PMS mushroom t pe control set reen with uard
I I Applicable products CM3PM05 CM3PM06 CM3PM08 CM3PMS05 CM3PMS06 CM3PMS08
Ordering code CM3PM06-P2 CM3PMS06-P2
<O
" Type CM3PM mushroom type control set(red) CM3PMS mushroom type control set(red with guard)
I
CM3 Applicable products CM3PM05 CM3PM06 CM3PM08 CM3PMS05 CM3PMS06 CM3PMS08
ljJ
i
ljJ
I Ordering code CM3PM06-P3 CM3PMS06-P3
Type CM3PM mushroom type control set(black) CM3PMS mushroom type control set(black with guard)
Applicable products CM3PM05 CM3PM06 CM3PM08 CM3PMS05 CM3PMS06 CM3PMS08
~
Orderina code CM3PM06-P4 CM3PMS06-P4
Type CM3PM mushroom type control set(yellow) CM3PMS mushroom type control set(yellow with guard)
Applicable products CM3PM05 CM3PM06 CM3PM08 CM3PMS05 CM3PMS06 CM3PMS08
-R.,,.,;1-"11!'1!:.I• •
Q)24.5
~ ~~e~
Ordering code CM3HS06-P1 CM3HD05 type
Type CM3HS selector type control set(green)
Applicable products CM3HS05 CM3HS06 CM3HS08
1
Ordering code CM3HS06-P2 CIN
Type CM3HS selector type control set(red)
A ' B
:~-----1-----~
I I
I'~r,._-~I :' p: :-(±)-!-(±:}:
Orderinq code CM3HS06-P3
r-----1-----1
1
Type CM3HS selector type control set(black) - '-"oo

__[ i --- I
----42 ___ _ '--l
--b--*-
---- 1
- I
Applicable products CM3HS05 CM3HS06 CM3HS08 33 U.LI

40
•
Ordering code CM3HS06-P4
Type CM3HS selector type control set(yellow)
CM3HD06 type 0
"
D
",,,, 11'1!:.I.I
Q)75 ~ RPR
; I
CIN
~ I
"' I
e:
"' :
I 1' :
I
~ ~---- , ----1
Lc.-:.-:.r r c::..-..1:•
"' I "'
40
I
__...L Q)60.5 I I I
~T~
I I I
I I
' I I
I
: ,. ~-.. I
- ,-,-
:
I
I
I
I
I co[ \~ ,, i :
--- t-
I
I , I
..... -- ... Ji~ ____ ;
'-----r----.J
~-=-,
Orderina code
Type
Applicable products
CM3PMX06-P1
CM3PMX biq mushroom type control set(qreen with quard)
CM3PMX05 CM3PMX06 CM3PMX08
CM3H DOB type
~
RPR
AB
~J,I~~
[/ '-.-....:: =-"./"
0
"D
Orderinq code
Tvoe
CM3PMX06-P2
CM3PMX bia mushroom tvoe control set(red with auard\
~ _§/
Applicable products CM3PMX05 CM3PMX06 CM3PMX08 Ordering code CM3HD06-P1
Orderina code CM3PMX06-P3 Type CM3HD double-selector type control set(green)
Type CM3PMX biQ mushroom type control set(black with quard) Applicable products CM3HD05 CM3HD06 CM3HD08
Aoolicable oroducts CM3PMX05 CM3PMX06 CM3PMX08 Ordering code CM3HD06-P2
Orderinq code CM3PMX06-P4 Type CM3HD double-selector type control set(red)
Tvpe CM3PMX bia mushroom tvoe control set(vellow with auard\
Applicable products CM3HD05 CM3HD06 CM3HD08
Aoolicable oroducts CM3PMX05 CM3PMX06 CM3PMX08
Ordering code CM3HD06-P3
Type CM3HD double-selector type control set(black)
Ordering code CM3HD06-P4
Type CM3HD double-selector type control set(yellow)
Note: CM3HD control joint can be ordered individually, but should be matched with
the body of CM3HD.
Mm•
Control valve(3/2 way) AlrTAC
ZM3 Series
Specification
Model ZM3R ZM3J ZM3P
Pressure range -0.1-1 .0MPa(-1-10bar)(-15- 114psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(15bar)(215psi)
Valve type 312 Way ZM3
Orifice size 6.0mm' (Cv=0.34)
Portsize<D 1/8"
Lubrication® Not required
, • Material body Aluminum alloy
® Once lubricated air is used,continue with same medium to optimise valve life span.
It is suggested to use ISO VG32 lubricant or the oil with the same grade.
A A
~ ~
PR PR
Product feature
1. The activity direction could be changed(Only adapt to standard type, large angle type unavailable)
Extreme angle of opening
Activity and closing of control head
Blank: Standard t e
Port size
I06: 110" W: Largeanglett
e ~
-
I.
Flow chart '
Model:ZM3R- 06
0.8 ,--,==--,----,-----,-----,---,
2. The rolling wheel could be installed at the inside of leverage 8:. 0.7 1-== ::t-- -+~ ......-=-- +-- -+-- --i
::e 0.6 1-==cl::::----f'.._d - ---"'k-- -+-- --i
~ 0.5 t-=c1:::- ---,-,-..._::--t----'-.s:-t--"sc--+-- --i
gi 0.4 t-=±-- ~-..::----f"-sc---'~ - + - --i
Take off the [ 0. 3 1-=±---""-ls.c---C>fs;-_,.,_t--''.--t\-- --i
Unscrew the socket head cap
socket head cap "' 0.2 1--- - ~......___,_--- --+--t-1t----i
screw to change ,ii
screw to change ~ 0.11---ct--"<--+.,,....--'rl- 'l-+-l--+-+-t---i
the direction
the direction 8' 0 o~-~~~~~~~~~~~ soo
Flow capacity {L/min)
3. Installation position of leverage could be changed 4. Direction of head part could be changed
A ....
'710\ , rr(ti~
I
i
i unscrew the socket
( I I
I
I
r''lw
/(>:
\
~
I
I
0
1
2
3
Bottom cover
0-rino
Sarina
head cap screw, and ht:
1!Q I A l
4
5
Soacer
Spool
the leverage could be t_j 'll'. J 6 Body
installed in any position
7 0-ring
with 360° angle
8 Serino washer
9 Sarina
5. Length of contact pin could be changed 10 Mandrill
11 0-rino
12 Bushino
Unscrew the socket 13 Spring holder
head cap screw to 14 Spring
change the length 15 Screw
of contact pin 16 Front cover
The contact pin 17 Bushino
still could be used 18 Shaft
if transformation 19 Roller
Unscrew the appears, but the 20 Rocker arm
socket head minimal bending 21 Screw
cap screw to radius should be 22 Rotation axis
change the length chosen when it is 23 0-rino
of leverage lager than 1OR.
Control valve(3/2 way) AlrTAC
ZM3 Series
ITT
Description of symbol
a:
LL
40 I
6
ZM3 a
'
F.P. Free position: the position of control head when no

external force applied;
O.P. Activity position: the position when the control head
is applied with external force and the valve is
ltem\Model ZM3R06 ZM3R06-W switched ;
T. T. P. Extreme position of actuation: position of control
F.O.F 20N 20N
head when it is pushed until end position;
P.T. 20° 25°
500 O.F. Actuation power: when driving from free position to
O.T. 30°
30 actuation position, the operation power applied on
40 T.T. 50° 75°
control head;
F.O.F.Extreme actuation power: when driving from free
position to extreme actuation position, the
operation power applied on control head;
P.T. Free route: movement distance or rotation angle
from free position of control head to actuation
position;
O.T. Actuation route: movement distance or rotation
angle from actuation position of control head to
extreme actuation position;
T. T. Total route: movement distance or rotation angle
from free position of control head to extreme
actuation position;
ltem\Model ZM3J06 ZM3J06- W

FOF.G) 20N 20N
P.T. 20° 25°
O.T. 30° 500
T.T. 50° 75°
• When the length of leverage is 38.1 mm
6.4
ltem\Model ZM3P06 ZM3P06- W

F.O.F.G) 2.3N 2.3N
P.T. 20° 25°
O.T. 30° 500
T.T. 50° 75°
• When the length of leverage is 141.2mm
Foot pedal valve ( 3/2way) AlrTAC
3F, 3FM Series
Specification
•
Model 3 FM210-M5 3F210-06 3FM210-06 3F210-08 3FM210-08
Operating Acting type controlled by foot normally closed
PortsizeG) MS I 1/8" I 1/4" I 1/8' I 1/4'
Valve type 3/2 Way
Pressure range 0-0.8M Pa(0-114psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psi) 3F
3FM
Material body 3FM:Plastic; 3F:Aluminum alloy
Symbol
Without lock With lock Port size Thread tvoe
~PR
~PR
MS Not code
Blank: PT
1/8"
G:G
1/4"
D Product feature Port size T: NPT
Model Port size
1. Direct acting and normally closed type. MS: MS Note
3FM210 06: 1/8' Model Note
2. The 3F series has aluminum foot pedal and 3FM series has plastic foot
081/4' 3FM210 Not code
pedal, in direct acting type, horizontal and compact structure. 06: 1/8' Blank: Without lock
3F210 3F210
3. If the duration of direction-change is long, the valves with lock may be 08: 1/4' L: With lock
selected.
4. The clamping framework is steady and reliable that it is easy and quick
Dimensions
to unlock. However, with the limitation of the dimension of structure, it
can not bear frequent strong impact.
M5:2-M5
D Inner structure
~&--t-1I 72 L

1 Bushing 7 Body 13 Base
2 Fixed screw 8 Spring 14 Base pad
3 Fixed plate 9 Eclip 15 Fixed screw
4 Spool 10 Spring bolder 16 Clip
5 Pedal 11 Override spring
6 0-ring 12 Fixed screw
Note: A
Note:Lockable type should be added grease periodically to ensure the machine
can work regularly
·-
Foot pedal valve ( 5/2way) AlrTAC
4F Series
D
...s
Fluid
oec1'f'1ca t'10n
....,: 11!!!11: fl!!!II:
ll!!!lm, • . -
Operating Acting type controlled by foot

Port sizeG) 1/4"
Valve type 5/2Way
Pressure range 0-0 .8MPa(0- 114psi)
4F
Temperature -20-?0"C
D Ordering code
Symbol
Port size
Without lock
AB
With lock
A B I08: 114· I Note
i:::{illJ1), .l±tiIII1Jv. Blank: Without lock
RP S RPS
L: With lock
F: With auard
D Product feature LF: With lock and quard
1. The aluminum foot pedal is designed with direct acting, which is steady
and reliable.
2. If the duration of direction-change is long, the valves with lock may be
selected.
3. The clamping framework is steady and reliable that it is easy and quick
to unlock. However, with the limitation of the dimension of structure, it
can not bear frequent strong impact.
4. Plastic guard with high strength may be selected.
D Inner structure
No. Item No. Item No. Item No. Item

1 Pin 6 Spool 11 Bottom cover 16 Washer
2 Screw 7 0-ring 12 Cclip 17 Screw
3 Spring 8 0-ring 13 Silencer 18 Base pad
4 Eclip 9 Front cover 14 Base 19 Screw
5 Pedal 10 Piston 15 Pedal spring 20 Base pad
Note:A I 1:
Note: Lockable type should be added grease periodically to ensure the machine
can work regularly
NIM
Flow control valve AlrTAC
ASC Series
D Specification
Model ASC1 00-06 ASC200-08 ASC300-10 ASC300-15
PortsizeG) 1/8" I 1/4' I 3/8' I 1/2"
Pressure range 0.05-0.95MPa(7-135psi)
Temperature -20-70"C
I Control flow
ASC
Flow 200 I 450 I 1250 I 1650
(Umin) I Free flow 400 I 800 I 1500 I 2500
<I) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
Symbol
p o::u A
D Product feature
1. Small and compact structure. Model Port size
2. Allows air to exhaust and cut off air flow. The adjustment screw is both 100 series 06: 1/8"
200 series 08: 1/4'
sensitive and precise ..
10: 3/8"
3. Can be mounted in various position to facilitate installation and application. 300 series
15: 1/2"
D Dimensions
D Flow chart II II
ASC100-06 ASC200-08
500
C
400 D
E
:::; (.).- 1-- - ' , - -,.l=::;t...
300
·u
....
.?:-
Q.
200
'-'
~
s> 100
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Needle rotation (Turns)
II
ASC300-10 ASC300-15
D . - c c - ~ - - / : ,~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
(.)t-;===~ i==~
Needle rotation (Turns)
Inner structure
No. Item
1 Adjustment cap Type\ltem A B C CA CB CD D E F K KA KB p PA
2 Clamping cap ASC10006 32 18 52.5 47 26 8.6 23 M6 x0 .5 M12 x 0.75 4.3 22 18 M4 x 0.7 1/8" 10
3 Throttle body ASC20008 36 18 56.5 51 30 8.6 27 M6 x 0.5 M12 x 0. 75 4.3 26 23 M4 x 0.7 1/4" 13.5
4 Hexagon nut ASC30010 50 28 74 65 40.5 10 37 M8x0.75 M16 x 1.0 5.3 35 32 M4 x 0.7 3/8" 17.5
ASC30015 50 28 74 65 40.5 10 37 M8 x 0.75 M16 x 1.0 5.3 35 32 M4 x 0. 7 1/2" 17.5
5 0-ring
6 0-ring
7 Throttle sheath
8 Body
9 Throttle column
10 Spool 0-ring
Non-return valve AlrTAC
NRV Series
Cl Specification
Model NRV06 NRV08 NRV10 NRV15 NRV20 NRV25
Fluid Air (to be filtered by 40 µ m fitter element)
Port sized) 1/8" I 1/4' I 3/8" I 1/2' I 3/4" I 1'
Orifice size mm'(Cvvalve) 18(1.0) I 21(1 .5) I 60(3.33) I73(4.06) I 230(12. 78) 1260(14.44)
Pressure range 0.02-1.0MPa(2.9-145psi)
NRV Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psi)
Note CD: PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
Cl Inner structure
Cl Symbol
· I, 1;
~
Cl Product feature
1. There are many port sizes: 1/8', 1/4", 3/8", 1/2", 3/4", 1' .
2. It allows the fluid to flow in one direction ONLY.
3. It is prevent backflow due to sudden drop in pressure or decrease in air consumption.
4. There is large valid area of section.
5. The spool is made of POM, valve's core sealed with rubber, and it has a compact structure.
No. Item Material

a Ordering code 1 Body Aluminum alloy
2 Spring Stainless steel
3 Spool POM
4 End cover Aluminum alloy
5 Screw Carbon steel
6 0-ring NBR
06: 1/8" 7 Washer SPCC
08: 1/4" 8 Gasker washer NBR/Aluminum alloy+N BR
10: 3/8" 9 Bumper NBR
15: 1/2"
20: 3/4"
25: 1"
Cl Dimension
Flow chart :1
~·'n
1.i1•.1u1 .ml
0.6 ___ _, ___.......... -,........ _ _....

~ 0.5
~ 0.4
i
i
1
;
-------
-------------
a_! ;"J - ---:--?
!'·'; '=
[ 0.3 ' ; ----------------
g> 0.2 .......... -:............ _ _;................ _
A
g OO 500 1000 1500

Flow capacity L/min
~ I ®
a..
r -i1
-[ +- ! i
.t::::.::J
I--
-----ccj~ ----
- EI)-
~ I ~
AB rls
A
Model: NRV20, NRV25 Model\ ltem A AB B BA BC p

"' 0.7 ,-T-""'T~==i==+::==::r----r--il NRV06 50 25 30 1/8'
~ 0.6 t---r- -+=-=-1=:.::=:t:.:-------j"-=4-=t::---1 NRV08 50 25 30 1/4'
., 0.5 i-----i---- -+=c:.:.:.:j:::::::: NRV10 67 26 40 33.6 3/8'
~ 0.4 i----r-~=+=::.:.:::i::::: NRV15 67 26 40 33.6 1/2'
[ 0 3 t - - - ~ == NRV20 95 31.5 52 46.7 3/4'
g, 0.2 l-----+-=c.:±:------..--!....-::c,,,_-i--c.::-------1-----------f....-......-+....-1 NRV25 95 31 .5 52 46.7 1'
~ 0.1 1 - -4"'=--+ ----------'i"---------+ ------- -+ ----------f----------+-----1
1':.
o
o~-
O
- - ~ - - - - ~ - - - ~ - -~
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 14000
Flow capacity L/min
--
Fluid control valve(2/2way)
D Product series
25 Series(Direct-acting and normally closed) 98 25Series(lnternally piloted and normally closed)100 2KS Series(Direct-acting and normallyopened) 102
Fluid
valve
2KSSeries(lnternally piloted and normally opened)104 2WSeries(Direct-acting and normally closed )106 2WSeries(lnternally piloted and normally closed)108
2KW Series(Direct-acting and normallyopened) 11 o 2KWSeries(lnternallypiloted and normally opened)112 2L Series(Direc1-acting and normally closed) 114
2LSer1es(lnternally piloted and normally closed) 116 2KL Series(D1rect-acting and normallyopened) 118 2KL Series(lnternallypiloted and normally opened) 120
2V Series 124 2P Series 126 2J Series 127

1. Before installing, be sure the valve hasn't been damaged via transpor1ation .
2. The coil must be pure vertical, the inlet and outlet on body must be horizontal. it's suggested to use the medium lubricated
by 40 µ m filter element. Be aware of the flow direction and port size.
3. Please notice whether the installation condi1ion accords with technical requirements (such as ' vol1age",'actuation frequency',
"working pressure" and ' scope of application temperature"), then the equipment can be installed and used.
5. Before using the fillings and tubes make sure they are clean . When connecting tofittings, be sure the PTFE Thread Seal Tape
is used correctly.
6. To keep the dust away, Default paragraph font;Never forget to install dirt-proof boot in air intake and outlet during dismounting.
Fluid control valve(2/2way) AlrTAC
2S Series (Direct-acting and normally closed)
D Specification
-06 1/8"
2SH030 2.0 0.18 3.0 2.0 300
-08 1/4"
-06 1/8"
28 2S030
-08 1/4"
3.0 0.33 6.0 1.0 150
-06 1/8" 300
2SL030 4.0 0.55 10.0 0.5 75
-08 1/4"
-06 1/8"
2ST030 6.0 1.10 12.0 0.1 15
-08 1/4"
- 10 3/8"
2SX050 3.0 0.34 6.1 3.0 450
D Symbol -15 1/2" 590 5.0 750
-10 3/8" 600
2SH050 4.0 0.55 10.0 2.0 300
-15 1/2" 590
-10 3/8" 600
2S050 5.0 0.83 15.0 1.0 150
D Product feature -15 1/2"
-10 3/8"
2SL050 7.0 1.40 25.0 0.5 75
1. Direct acting and normally closed type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high -15 1/2"
sensibilily allows it to change direction quickly; - 10 3/8"
2ST050 10.0 2.20 40.0 0.1 15
2. It has wide pressure range, including extra high pressure (X), high pressure - 15 1/2" 590
(H), standard, large volume(L) and extra large volume (T) to choose from; (l) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2S030 series grommet valve's weight is 1Og less than terminal's.
3. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle.
2S050series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
4. The valve body is made of SUS304. Its coil has a Heat resistance
classification of Class B. The standard seal material is FPM-F.Please
contact us if other material are required.
5. The protection class of the coil is IP65 and there is a choice for grommet or
terminal electrical entry.
50 10.0VA 35
CDA116 AC ±15%
2S0030 60 Terminal 8.0VA 30
CLA116
Valve's specification DC ±10% (CDA) 6.5W 30
Class B
50 25.0VA 60
CDA170 AC ±15% Grommet
Initial stats Normally closed 2S0050 60 (CLA) 22.0VA 55
CLA170
Adaptable fluid G) Air, Water, Oil DC ± 10% 10.5W 40
Viscosity limit Under20CST
I Water I Air I Oil I Ambient
Ambient and fluid
Max. I 80 I 90 I 80 I 70 D Ordering code
temperature("C)
Min. I 1 I -20 (2) I -10 @ I -20
(l) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid .
(2) Note: Dew point: -20('C) or less. @ Note:SOCST or less.
Model
J 2s: 2/2 way direct-acting and normally closed!
D Inner structure
I I · Pressure condition
X: Extra high pressure Electrical entry
H: High pressure Blank: Terminal
Blank: Standard l:Grommet
L: Large volume
Voltage
T: Extra large volume
A:AC220V
Size series B: DC24V
030: 030 Series C:AC110V
050: 050 Series E:AC24V
Port size
F: DC12V
Size series Port size
06: 1/8"
No. Item No. Item No. Item 030 Series
~
1 Body 6 Wear ring 11 Connector 10: 3/8"
050 Series
2 Airtight ring 7 Movable core 12 Washer ~
3 Spring 8 Coil 13 Screw
4 Fixed cap 9 EClip D Ordering code of accessories
5 0-ring 10 Gasket
Accessories code
lF: Mounting accessories l
Valve type
Mil=•
2S Series (Direct-acting and normally closed)
Flow Chart D Dimensions

I I
Fluid:Air
2S
<ll1.5
25 50 75 125 200
(!)2
40 80 120 160 200 300 <ll3
100 200 300 400 500 600
<ll 4
150 350 550 750 950
<ll5
200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
<ll6
250 500 750
300 500 700 !IOO 1100 <ll7
(!)10
400 700 1000
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Fluid: Water (!)10
Type\ ltem A AB B C D E F G K KA p PA Q QA
2S0 030-06 72.5 40 29.5 71 20 49 43 .5 10 5.3 40 1/8" 10 M5 16
2S0 030-08 72.5 40 29.5 71 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/4' 10 MS 16
2S0 050 - 10 89.5 52 39 87 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 3/8' 13 MS 23
2S0 050 - 15 89 .5 52 39 87 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 1/ 2' 13 MS 23
2S0 030(Grommet) 2S0 050(Grommet)

0.1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0.001 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
Pressure differentia 6 P=(P1-P2) ( MPa)
Type\ ltem A AB B C D E G K KA p PA Q QA
2S0 030- 06 41 40 29.5 71 20 49 10 5.3 40 1/8' 10 MS 16
2S0 030 - 08 41 40 29.5 71 20 49 10 5.3 40 1/4' 10 MS 16
2S0 050 - 10 60 52 39 87 26 56 10 5.3 48 3/8' 13 MS 23
2S0 050-15 60 52 39 87 26 56 10 5.3 48 1/2' 13 M5 23
·-
2S Series (Internally piloted and normally closed)
D Specification
2$150-15 1/2" 15.0 5.50 100.0

2S200-20 3/4" 20.0 9.50 170.0 875
2S250-25 1" 25.0 12.50 220.0 1120 Max:1.0 Max:150
1.5 220
2$320-32 1 1/4" 35.0 23.00 420.0 2700 Min:0.05 Min:10
28 2S400-40 11/2" 40.0 31.00 560.0 3250
2S500-50 2" 50.0 49.00 880.0 4300
(j) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
@ The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2S150-250 series grommet valve's weight is 1Og less than
terminal's. 2S320-5000series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
D Symbol D Specification of coil
50 10.0VA 35
Product feature 2S150
CDA116 AC ±15%
2$200 60 (Terminal) 8.0VA 30
1. lndirectacting(lnternal pilot) and normally closed type 212 way solenoid CLA116
2S250 DC ±10% (CDA) 6.5W 30
valve. Its can change direction quickly and has large flow. Class B
50 25.0VA 60
2. It is compact, small and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle; 2$320
CDA170 AC ±15% (Grommet)
2$400 60 (CLA) 22.0VA 55
3. The valve body is made of SUS304. The coil has a Heat resistance CLA170
2$500 ±10% 10.5W
classification of Class B. The standard seal material is FPM-F. Please DC 40
4. The protection class ofthe coil is IP65 and there is a choice for grommet or
terminal electrical entry . D Ordering code
D Valve's specification Model

Acting lntermally piloted !2S: 2/2 way internally piloted and normally closed!
Initial stats Normally closed
Adaptable fluid G) Air, Water, Oil
Orifice size
Viscosity limit Under20CST 150: <D15mm Electrical entry
Water Air Oil Ambient 200: <D20mm Blank: Terminal
Ambient and fluid
Max. 80 90 80 70 250: <D25mm I: Grommet
temperature("C)
Min. 1 -20 (2) -10 @ -20 320: <D35mm
400: <D40mm Volta e
(j) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid. A:AC220V
(2) Note: Dew point: -20("C) or less. @ Note:50CST or less. 500: <D50mm
B: DC24V
Port size C:AC110V
D Inner structure Orifice size Port size EAC24V
<D15mm 15: 112' F: DC12V
<D20mm 20: 314'
<D25mm 25: 1'
<D35mm 32: 11/4'
<D40mm 40: 11/2"
<D50mm 50: 2'
Accessories code Accessories type

IF: Mounting accessories I !LB: LB type I
Valve type
2S150: 150 Series bod
2S200: 200 Series body
2S250: 250 Series body
No. Item
1 Body
No.
7
Item
Spring
No.
13
Item
Washer
No.
19
Item
Plug Note: A 320\4001500 series valves do not have mounting accessories.
2 Piston 8 Spring 14 E Clip 20 Spring
3 Wear ring 9 Screw 15 Movable core 21 Bushing
4 0-ring 10 Fixed cap 16 Fixed plate
5 Cover 11 Washer 17 0-ring
6 Screw 12 Coil assembly 18 Airtight ring
2S Series (Internally piloted and normally closed)
Flow chart D Dimensions

2S150- 250{Terminal)
Fluid:Air
"'
~ 1.0 i-~~-.,...- =e
- 0.9 t --t-"f'"'"~c=!::.::t":
"' 0.8 i--;--=::.:.::t1.
a.. 0.7
~ 0. 6 t -""t-""-f"=:::..::t:
"'0 .5 r---,-"'="'-CI.L
[ 0.4 r--=,,, 2S
E 0.3 r-.,..._=.·
;.'l 0.2
~ 0.1
! ~ ...W.....,.."'-.!.'--'-'--'-'--'-.1..J........U.__JL.._-'-...L--'-L.......l-.J.._...J._--1 (ti 15
I (ti~
~ (!125
,____s_o~oo__10_0_0~0_1_s_oo~o__
20_0_00~2_5_oo_o~------< (tlJ5
10000 20000 30000 40000 50000
1----~-20-o~o-o-~-4-oo~o-o-~-60-0~0-0--------1 (!140
2S320- 500{Terminal)
20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 (!150
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Fluid: Water Cll50

900 .-----,-----,-.------,--.--,-r,::,.....-- , - - - - . - - , - - ,
800
700
600
500
400
300
Type\ ltem A AB B BA C D E EA EB EC F p
C 200
E 2S150 - 15 77 70 46 27.5 107 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
? 100 2S200- 20 78.5 82 53 33.5 115.5 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
0 2S250-25 81 92 59 40. 5 124 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1"
~ 2S320 -32 125 80 52 154.5 - - - - - - 1 1/4"
u::
2S400-40 132 90 58 162 - - - - - - 1 1/2"
0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 2S500-50 150 100 70 177 - - - - - - 2"
Pressure differentia 6 P= ( P1-P2) ( MPa)
l2s150- 250{Grommet)
2S320- 500{Grommet)
Type\ltem A B BA C D E EA EB EC F p
2S1 50-15 70 46 27.5 107 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
2S200 - 20 82 53 33.5 115.5 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
2S250- 25 92 59 40.5 124 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1"
2S320-32 125 80 52 154. 5 - - - - - 1 1/4"
2S400-40 132 90 58 162 - - - - - - 1 1/2"
2S500- 50 150 100 70 177 - - - - - - 2"
2KS Series (Direct-acting and normally opened)
D Specification
-06 1/8" 305

2KSX030 1.5 0.10 1.8 2.0 300
-08 1/4" 295
-06 1/8"
2KSH030 2.0 0.18 3.0 1.5 220
-08 1/4"
2KS 2KS030
-06 1/8"
3.0 0.33 6.0 0.7 100
-08 1/4" 295
-06 1/8" 305
2KSL030 4.0 0.55 10.0 0.4 60
-08 1/4" 295
3.0 450
-10 3/8" 610
2KSX050 3.0 0.34 6.1 2.0 300
- 15 1/2" 600
-10 3/8" 610
a Symbol 2KSH050
-15 1/2"
4.0 0.55 10.0
600
1.5 220
-10 3/8"
2KS050 5.0 0.83 15.0 0.7 100
-15 1/2"
D Product feature -10 3/8"
2KSL050 7.0 1.40 25.0 0.4 60
-15 1/2"
1. Direct acting and normally opened type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2KS030 series grommet valve's weight is 1Og less than
sensibilily allows itto change direction quickly; terminal's. 2KS050series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
2. It has wide pressure range, including extra high pressure (X), high pressure
(H), standard and large volume(L) to choose from;
3. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle. D Specification of coil
4. The valve body is made or SUS304. Its coil has a Heat resistance
contact us ifother material are required. 50 15.0VA 50
CDA116 AC ±15%
5. The protection class of the coil is IP65 and there is a choice for grommet or 2KS0 030 60 (Terminal) 11.0VA 40
CLA116
terminal electrical entry. DC ±10% (CDA) 6.5W 30
Class B
50 (Grommet) 35.0VA 65
CDA170 AC ±15%
2KS0050 60 (CLA) 30.0VA 60
CLA170
D Valve's specification DC ±10% 10.5W 40
Adaptable fluid [J Air, Water, Oil D Ordering code
Water Air Oil Ambient
Ambient and fluid
Max. 80 90 80 70
temperature("C) Model
Min. 1 -20 ® -10 @ -20
!2KS: 2/2 way direct-acting and normally opened!
G) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid .
® Note: Dew point: - 20("C) or less.@ Note:50CST or less.
Pressure condition
D Inner structure H: High pressure Blank: Terminal
I I · Blank: Standard I: Grommet
L: Large volume
Voltage
Size series A:AC220V
030: 030 Series B: DC24V
050: 050 Series C: AC110V
E:AC24V
Port size
F: DC12V
Size series Port size
06: 1/8"
030 Series
08:1/4:
10: 3/8"
050 Series
15:112"

1 Body 7 Fixed cap 13 Connector D Ordering code of accessories
2 Airtight ring 8 Electromagnet 14 Washer Ordering code of accessories is the same as 2S series valve's,
3 Spring 9 Man drill 15 Screw Please refer to P98 for details of ordering code.
4 Bead flange 10 Coil assembly 16 Spring
5 Fixed plate 11 Position ring 17 Airtight bush
6 0-ring 12 E Clip
2KS Series (Direct-acting and normally opened)
D Flow Chart D Dimensions

Fluid:Air 2KSD 030(Terminal) 2KSD 050(Terminal)
2KS
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Fluid: Water
50
40
30
20
C
10 Type\ltem A AB B C D E F G K KA p PA Q QA
!-' 5
4 2KSD030-06 72.5 40 29.3 76 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/8' 10 MS 16
0
Q)
~ 2KSD030-08 72.5 40 29.3 76 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/4' 10 MS 16
~ 2KSD050- 10 89.5 52 39 92 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 3/8' 13 MS 23
;:
0
u::
2KSD 050- 15 89.5 52 39 92 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 1/2' 13 MS 23
2KSD 030(Grommet) 2KSD 050(Grommet)
Type\ ltem A AB B C D E G K KA PA p Q QA
2KSD 030- 06 41 40 29.5 76 20 49 10 5.3 40 10 1/8" MS 16
2KSD 030-08 41 40 29.5 76 20 49 10 5.3 40 10 1/4" MS 16
2KSD050-10 60 52 39 92 26 56 10 5.3 48 13 3/8" MS 23
2KSD 050-15 60 52 39 92 26 56 10 5.3 48 13 1/2" MS 23
2KS Series (Internally piloted and normally opened)
a Specification
2KS150-15 1/2" 15.0 5.50 100.0 680

2KS200-20 3/4" 20.0 9.50 170.0 880
2KS250-25 1" 25.0 12.50 220.0 1125 Max:O. 7 Max:100
1.5 220
2KS320-32 1 1/4" 35.0 23.00 420.0 2710 Min:0.05 Min:1 0
2KS 2KS400-40 1 1/2" 40.0 31.00 560.0 3260
2KS500-50 2" 50.0 49.00 880.0 4310
(j) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2S150- 250 series grommet valve's weight is 10g less than
terminal's. 2S320-5000series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
a Symbol a Coil specification
50 15.0VA 50
D Product feature 2KS150
CDA116 AC ±15%
2KS200 60 (Terminal) 11.0VA 40
1. Indirect acting(lnternal pilot) and normally opened type 2/2 way solenoid CLA116
2KS250 DC ±10% (CDA) 6.5W 30
valve. Its can change direction quickly and has large flow. Class B
50 35.0VA 65
2. It is compact, small and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle; 2KS320
CDA170 AC ±15% (Grommet)
2KS400 60 (CLA) 30.0VA 60
3. The valve body is made ofSUS304. The coil has a Heat resistance CLA170
2KS500 DC ±10% 10.5W 40
classification of Class B. The standard seal material is FPM-F. Please
terminal electrical entry . a Ordering code
a Valve's specification Model

Acting lntermally piloted !2KS: 2/2 way internally piloted and normally opened!
Initial stats Normally opened
Orifice size
150: <!>15mm Electrical entry
I Water I Air I Oil I Ambient 200: <!>20mm Blank: Terminal
Ambient and fluid
temperature("C) Max. I 80 I 90 I 80 I 70 250: <1>25mm !:Grommet
Min. I 1 I - 20 ® I - 10 @ I - 20 320: <1>35mm
(j) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid. 400: <1>40mm Voltage
® Note: Dew point: -20(°C) or less. @ Note: 50CST or less. 500: <!>50mm A:AC220V
B: DC24V
Port size C:AC110V
a Inner structure Orifice size
<1>15mm
Port size
15: 1/2"
E:AC24V
2KS150(Grommet) F: DC12V
<!>20mm 20: 3/4"
<1>25mm 25: 1"
<!>35mm 32: 1 1/4"
<!>40mm 40: 1 1/2"
<!>50mm 50: 2"
Ordering code of accessories

Ordering code of accessories is the same as 2S series valve's,
Please refer to P100 for details of ordering code.
Note: A 320\400\500 series valves do not have mounting accessories.

1 Body 8 Screw 15 Movable core 22 Spring
2 Piston 9 0-ring 16 Spring 23 Cover
3 Wear ring 10 Washer 17 Fixed plate 24 Bushing
4 Spring 11 Coil assembly 18 Fixed cap 25 0-ring
5 Screw 12 Position ring 19 Airtight bushing
6 Spring 13 EClip 20 Airtight ring
7 Fixed ring 14 Mandrill 21 Plug
2KS Series (Internally piloted and normally opened)
D Flow chart D Dimensions

2KS150-250(Termmal)
Fluid:Air
'lf O7 r---:-"'i'-==
~ 0.6
0.5 r--4==:c:lf
~ 0.4
2KS
~ 0.3
::,
~ 0.2
a. 0.1
Q)
E
"'~ t:=::::::::::S::::::::::=t.:::::::::'::::;:':::::::::::::::~:::'::::::;:':::::::::::::::::::::::'::::::::::::::l ¢15
<n 1---~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~ ~ 15=0~0~0~ ~2~0~0 0~0~ ~ ~-1 ¢ 20 BA
~
0
i--- -~ - -~ - - 15-0~0-0- -2-00~0-0- 2-50~0-0- - - ---l ¢ 25 B
-0
Q) f---~1~00~0~0-~2~0~00~0-~3~0~00~0-~4~00~0~0-~50~0~0~0----l¢ 35
2c i---~~2~0~00~0~~-4~0~0~0~0-~~6~0~00~0~-----l¢ 40 -
~ 1----~-20-0~00~~40-0~0-0~6-0~00-0~-8-00~0-0~1-00~0-0-0~~--1¢ 50
2KS320 500(Termma
. I)
rr-
m
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
~ i
-~ 2-P
l±f
•
Fluid: Water ¢50

bi ~ ~ 0
~\ i rJ
900 r - - - , - - - - - - , - , - - - - - , - , - - - , - -r::c~-.-----.---,----, = = ,.
~~;
800
700
600
500
400
300
~
lvtl A
--
BA
B
200
C Type\ ltem A AB B BA C D E EA EB EC F p
~ 100 2KS150 - 15 77 70 46 27 .5 112.5 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
0
2KS200-20 78.5 82 53 33.5 121 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
2KS250-25 81 92 59 40.5 129.5 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1"
~
u:: 2KS320-32 125 - 80 52 160 - - - - - - 1 1/ 4"
0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 2KS400-40 132 - 90 58 167 - - - - - - 1 1/2"
Pressure differentia LsP= ( P1-P2) ( MPa) 2KS500-50 150 - 100 70 182 - - - - - - 2"
2KS150-250(Grommet)
2KS320-500(Grommet)
Type\ ltem A B BA C D E EA EB EC F p
2KS150-15 70 46 27.5 112.5 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
2KS200-20 82 53 33.5 121 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
2KS250-25 92 59 40 .5 129.5 95 6.4 8 80 44 .5 36 1"
2KS320 -32 125 80 52 160 - - - - - - 1 1/4"
2KS400-40 132 90 58 167 - - - - - - 11 /2"
2KS500 - 50 150 100 70 182 - - - - - - 2"
2W Series (Direct-acting and normally closed)
D Specification
-06 1/8" 305

2WX030 1.5 0.10 1.8 3.0 450
-08 1/4"
-06 1/8" 305
2WH030 2.0 0.18 3.0 2.0 300
-08 1/4" 295
-06 1/8" 305
2W 2W030 3.0 0.33 6.0 1.0 150
-08 1/4" 295
-06 1/8" 305
2WL030 4.0 0.55 10.0 0.5 75
-08 1/4" 295
-06 1/8" 305
2WT030 6.0 1.10 12.0 0.1 15
-08 1/4" 295
5.0 750
- 10 3/8" 620
2WX050 3.0 0.34 6.1 3.0 450
D Symbol -15 1/2" 600
-10 3/8" 620
2WH050 4.0 0.55 10.0 2.0 300
-15 1/2" 600
-10 3/8"
Product feature 2W050
-15 1/2"
5.0 0.83 15.0 1.0 150
1. Direct acting and normally closed type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high -10 3/8"
2WL050 7.0 1.40 25.0 0.5 75
-15 1/2"
sensibility allows itto change direction quickly;
-10 3/8"
2. It has wide pressure range, including extra high pressure (X), high pressure 2WT050 10.0 2.20 40.0 0.1 15
-15 1/2"
(H), standard, large volume(L) and extra large volume (T) to choose from;
3. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle. CD PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
(2) The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2W030 series grommet valve's weight is 1Og less than
4. The valve body is made of brass. Its coil has a Heat resistance terminal's. 2W050series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
contact us ifother material are required.
5. The protection class of the coil is IP65 and there is a choice for grommet or D Specification of coil
50 10.0VA 35
CDA116 AC ±15%
2W0 030 60 8.0VA 30
CLA116 Terminal
D Valve's specification DC ±10% (CDA) 6.5W 30
Class B
50 Grommet 25.0VA 60
Acting Direct acting AC ±15% (CLA)
CDA170
Initial stats Normally closed 2W0 050 60 22.0VA 55
CLA170
Adaptable fluid G) Air, Water, Oil DC ±10 % 10.5W 40
Water Air Oil Ambient
Ambient and fluid D Ordering code
Max. 80 90 80 70
temperature("C)
Min. 1 -20 ~ -10 @ -20
CD Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid.
(2) Note: Dew point: - 20('C) or less.® Note: 50CST or less.
l2w: 2/2 way direct-acting and normally closed I
Pressure condition
Blank: Standard l: Grommet
L: Large volume
T: Extra large volume Voltage
A:AC220V
Size series B: DC24V
050: 050 Series E:AC24V
F: DC12V

1 Body 6 Fixed plate 11 Connecter
2 Airtight ring 7 Movable core 12 Washer
3 Spring 8 Coil assembly 13 Screw
4 Fixed cap 9 E Clip 14 Filter
5 0-ring 10 Gasket Ordering code of accessories
(j) Extra large volume type has no filter element. Ordering code of accessories is the same as 2S series valve's, Please refer to P98 for details of ordering code.
2W Series (Direct-acting and normally closed)

Fluid:Air 2WD 030(Terminal} 2WD 050(Terminal}
1.0 i--:--t-4'-'=l=~~Jlli
., o.s 1..,-7 =r=::.::.:1.:.:.=.:-
~ o.8r -t-"'+-=r=::.::.:.:t
~ 0.1 r-+--+--4:..:.::::::::::
o.6 ,-i====c
~ 0.5 ;-"'4"===:::
<I) 0.4 r--r-9"'=c-a
e, 0.3r--r-= 2W
::l 0.2
[ 0.1
E O e--'-_:,,,"""'::.1--'--'--'---'--'----'--'-.Ll...----'-~-'--'1.----'-'--'-----'----I
<P1.5
"'e
.;;
25 50 75 150 200
<P2
C 40 80 120 160 250 300
<P3
..,3:
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
<P4
<I) 150 350 550 750 950
> <PS
~ 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800
250 500 750 (!)6
300 500 700 900 1100 (!)7
400 700 11XXl <P10
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Fluid: Water <P10 A

50
40 Type\ ltem A AB B C D E F G K KA p PA Q QA
30
20 2WD030-06 72.5 40 29.5 71 20 49 43 .5 10 5.3 40 1/8" 10 M5 16
C 1g 2WD030-08 72.5 40 29.5 71 20 49 43 .5 10 5.3 40 1/4" 10 M5 16
~. . 1
2
2WD050-10
2WD 050- 15
89.5
89.5
52 39 87 26 56 51 10 5.3
5.3
48 3/8"
1/2'
13 M5 23
52 39 87 26 56 51 10 48 13 M5 23
0 1
.l'!
I;"
3:
0
2WD 030(Grommet) 2WD 050(Grommet}
~ 0.1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0.001 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
Pressure differentia L>P= ( P1-P2) ( MPa)
2WD030- 06 41 40 29.5 71 20 49 10 5.3 40 1/8" 10 M5 16
2WD 030-08 41 40 29.5 71 20 49 10 5.3 40 1/4" 10 M5 16
2WD050-10 60 52 39 87 26 56 10 5.3 48 3/8" 13 M5 23
2WD050-1 5 60 52 39 87 26 56 10 5.3 48 1/2' 13 M5 23
2W Series (Internally piloted and normally closed)

2W ® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, grommet valve's weight is 10g less than terminal's.
Specification of coil
Valve
Coil type
Power Frequency Voltage Electrical Power Consumption 1 1 r " ('t )
type type (Hz) range entry (VA/W) nsu a 10n emp rise
50 Terminal 10.0VA 35
D Symbol 2W150
CDA116 AC ±15% (CDA)
2W200 60 8.0VA Class B 30
CLA116 Grommet
2W250 DC - ±10% 6.5W 30
(CLA)
D Product feature
1. lndirectacting(lnternal pilot) and normally closed type 2/2 way solenoid
valve. Its can change direction quickly and has large flow.
2.11 is compact, small and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle;
3. The valve body is made of brass. The coil has a Heat resistance Model
classification of Class B. The standard seal material is FPM-F. Please !2W: 2/2 way internally piloted and normally closed I
contact us ifother material are required.
Orifice size
terminal electrical entry .
150: <P15mm Electrical entry
200: <P 20mm Blank: Terminal
250: <P 25mm I: Grommet
D Valve's specification
Acting Internally piloted
Port size Voltage
Orifice size Port size A:AC220V
<P15mm 15: 1/2" B: DC24V
<P20mm 20: 3/4" C:AC110V
Viscosity limit Under20CST <P25mm 25: 1" E:AC24V
Water Air Oil Ambient F: DC12V
Ambient and fluid
Max. 80 90 80 70
temperature("C)
Min. 1 -20 (2) -10 ~ -20 Ordering code of accessories
G) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid. Ordering code of accessories is the same as 2S series valve's, Please refer to P1 00 for details of ordering code.
(2)Note: Dew point: -20("C) or less. ® Note: 50CST or less.
D Inner structure

1 Body 7 Screw 13 Coil assembly 19 Airtight ring
2 Filter 8 Spring 14 Washer 20 Plug
3 Piston 9 Spring 15 E Clip 21 Spring
4 Wearring 10 Screw 16 Movable core 22 Spacer
5 0-ring 11 Fixed cap 17 Fixed plate
6 Cover 12 Washer 18 0 -ring
2W Series ( Internally piloted and normally closed)

Fluid:Air
8:. 1.0 r-,----,--,-,-.,.,,=============,--,
~ 0.9 t --;--"'f'"'4 ~ ~
O.B t -1--i-<>=~
~ 0.7 t --:---=:::.:t:
~ 0.6
:: 0.5 r-..-~=
~
~
0.4 r---==
0. 3 . --,--,.__,
2W
:.'l 0.2
~ 0.1
~ I--...UC--"-<:::..l-'--.J...L...J.....L..1.-1..J___J..1-...J....---L_L._...J..1._J__c._..J_----1 ¢15
..,
~ 20000 ¢ 20
~ 10000 25000 ¢ 25
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
D
2W150-15 77 70 46 27.5 107 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/ 2"
Fluid: Water 2W200- 20 78 .5 82 53 33. 5 115.5 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/ 4"
500 . -- - ~ - ~ - . - - - - - , ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ - - . - ~~ 2W250-25 81 92 59 40. 5 124 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1"
400
300
C
200
~
0 100
.,
~
3:
0
u::
Pressure differentia l',P= ( P1-P2 ) ( MPa)
2W150-15 70 46 27.5 107 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30 .5 1/2"
2W200-20 82 53 33.5 115.5 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
2W250-25 92 59 40.5 124 95 6.4 8 80 44 .5 36 1"
Fluid control valve(2/2 way) AlrTAC
2KW Series (Direct-acting and normally opened}
D Specification
1/ 4" 305
-06 1/8' 315
2KWH030 2.0 0. 18 3.0 1.5 220
-08 1/4"
2KW 2KW030
-06 1/8"
3.0 0.33 6.0
315
0.7 100
-08 1/4" 305
-06 1/8" 315
2KWL030 4.0 0.55 10.0 0.4 60
-08 1/4" 305
3.0 450
-10 3/8"
2KWX050 3.0 0.34 6.1 2.0 300
-15 1/2" 615
-10 3/8" 635
D Symbol 2KWH050
-15 1/2"
4.0 0.55 10.0
61 5
1.5 220
-10 3/8" 635

2KW050 5.0 0. 83 15.0 0.7 100
-15 1/2" 615
-10 3/8" 635
D Product feature 2KWL050 7.0 1.40 25.0 0.4 60
-15 1/2" 615
1. Direct acting and normally opened type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high G)pr thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
sensibility allows it to change direction quickly; ® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2KW030 series grommet valve's weight is 1Og less than
terminal's. 2KW050series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
2. It has wide pressure range, including extra high pressure (X), high pressure
(H), standard and large volume(L) to choose from;
3. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle.
D Specification of coil
4. The valve body is made of brass. Its coil has a Heat resistance
50 15.0VA 50
contact us if other material are required. AC ± 15 %
CDA116
5. The protection class of the coil is IP65 and there is a choice for grommet or 2KWD 030 60 Terminal 11.0VA 40
CLA116
terminal electrical entry . DC ± 10 % (CDA) 6.5W 30
Class B
50 35.0VA 65
2KWD 050 60 (CLA) 30.0VA 60
D Valve's specification CLA170
Acting Direct acting DC ±10% 10.5W 40
Initial stats Normally opened
D Ordering code
I Water I Air I Oil I Ambient
Ambient and fluid
temperature("C)
Max. l 80 l 90 I 80 I 70
Min. l 1 l -20 C2> I -10 @ I -20 Model
G) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid. !2KW: 2/2 way direct-acting and normally opened !
® Note: Dew point:-20("C) or less. (3) Note: 50CST or less.
Pressure condition
D Inner structure X: Extra high pressure Electrical entry
2KW030(Grommet)
Blank: Standard I: Grommet
L: Laroe volume
Voltage
Size series A: AC220V
030: 030 Series B: DC24V
E:AC24V
Port size
F: DC12V

No. Item No. Item No. Item Ordering code of accessories is the same as 2S series valve's, Please refer to P98 for details of ordering code.
1 Body 7 Fixed cap 13 Washer
2 Airtight ring 8 Electromagnet 14 Spring
3 Spring 9 Man dril 15 Screw
4 Bead flange 10 Coil assembly 16 Airtight bush
5 0-ring 11 E Clip 17 Filter
6 Fixed plate 12 Position ring
2KW Series (Direct-acting and normally opened)

Fluid:Air 2KWD 030(Terminal) 2KWD 050(Terminal)
.. 1.0 i--:-~-4==:=.::-:Yt!!~io:
~ 0.9 ,i-.at-=i==:::.:.::.t=.:.::t
- 0.8 r-:-=-r=c.;:.::.:C:::.::.::.t
0. 7 r--i---+--=:c:::t:.:::
~ 0.6 r-+====::c
., 0.5 ;-.a;===::=:
~ 0.4 ,---,-~=
gi
a. 0.2
0.3,----~-...ccc::· 2KW
E 0.1
i
C
0 i--- --.t=-- ---=------=~-..-.-- 7'=- --.,C.- --"~ - - - - - , <!>1.5
l--- ~ - -'"-~'-c--~~ - ~ - ~ ~ --=--~- -----i <!) 2
~ i--- ~ - - - " ~---='~- >-=--- ='=- -='=- - - - ----, <!)3
.,
-0
1--- ~ - -.L.,-- ~ - - c " - - - ~ - - - - - -----i <!) 4

>
~ - o- ---1 <1> 5
1--- ~20~0- 40~0- 6~00- a~oo- 1~00~0- 1~2~00- 14~0-o- 16~0-o- 1~ao
,____30-o-5-oo-700-000--11- 00---------------<<1>7
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Fluid: Water
50
40
30
20
·'= 10
:5 ~ Type\ ltem A AB B C D E F G K KA p PA Q QA
0 ~ 2KWD030-06 72.5 40 29.3 76 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/8" 10 MS 16
.$ 2KWD030-08 72. 5 40 29.3 76 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/4' 10 MS 16
~
2KWD 050 - 10 89.5 52 39 92 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 3/8' 13 MS 23
~
u:: 2KWD 050 - 15 89.5 52 39 92 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 112· 13 MS 23
0.11---,-,---..,.-,,-~--,--------,--,..,,..,-,-,-,,--,....,...
0.001 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 2KWD 030(Grommet) 2KWD 050(Grommet)
Pressure differentia L'. P= ( P1-P2 ) ( MPa)
2KWD 030 - 06 41 40 29.5 76 20 49 10 5.3 40 10 1/8" MS 16
2KWD 030-08 41 40 29.5 76 20 49 10 5.3 40 10 1/4" MS 16
2KWD 050-10 60 52 39 92 26 56 10 5.3 48 13 3/8" MS 23
2KWD050- 15 60 52 39 92 26 56 10 5.3 48 13 1/2" MS 23
•II•
2KW Series (Internally piloted and normally opened)
D Specification
2KW150-15 1/2" 15.0 5.50 100.0 730

2KW200-20 3/4" 20.0 9.50 170.0 960 Max:O. 7 Max:100
1.5 220
Min:0.05 Min:10
2KW250-25 1" 25.0 12. 50 220.0 1210
2KW G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.

(2) The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, grommet valve's weight is 10g less than terminal's.
50 Terminal 15.0VA 50
D Symbol 2KW 150 CDA116 AC ± 15% (CDA) >------------<
2KW200 CLA116 >----+--6
_0_-+--------< Grommet 11.0VA Class B t---4_0_------t
2KW250 DC ± 10% (CLA) 6.5W 30
Product feature
1. Indirect acting(lnternal pilot) and normally opened type 2/2 way solenoid D Ordering code
valve. Its can change directionquickly and has large flow.
2. It is compact, small and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle;
3. The valve body is made of brass. The coil has a Heat resistance
classification of Class B. The standard seal material is FPM-F. Please Model
contact us if other material are required. J2KW: 2/2 way internally piloted and normally opened!
terminal electrical entry . Orfflce size
150: Ql 15mm Electrical entry
200: Ql 20mm Blank: Terminal
Valve's specification 250: Ql 25mm !: Grommet
Acting Internally piloted Port size Voltage
Initial stats Normally opened Orifice size Port size A:AC220V
Adaptable fluid G) Air, Water, Oil Ql15mm 15: 1/2" B:DC24V
Viscosity limit Under20CST Ql20mm 20: 3/4" C:AC110V
Water Air Oil Ambient Ql25mm 25: 1" E:AC24V
Ambient and fluid
Max. 80 90 80 70 F: DC12V
temperature("C)
Min. 1 - 20 (2) - 10 (3) - 20
G) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid .
@ Note: Dew point: - 20("C) or less.® Note: 50CST or less. D Ordering code of accessories
Ordering code of accessories is the same as 2S series valve's, Please refer to P100 for details of ordering code.
D Inner structure
2KW1 SO(Terminal)

1 Body 8 Screw 15 Movable core 22 Cover
2 Filter 9 Connector 16 Spring 23 Plug
3 0-ring 1O Washer 17 Fixed plate 24 Bonnet spring
4 Spring 11 Coil assembly 18 Fixed cap 25 Wearring
5 Screw 12 E Clip 19 Airtight bushing 26 Bushing
6 Clip 13 Position ring 20 Airtight ring 27 Piston
0-ring 14 Man drill 21 Spring
•ltli
2KW Series (Internally piloted and normally opened)

Fluid:Air
co
a.
::. 0.7
~ 0.6
0.5
"'
a.
e=> 0.4
~
0.3 2KW
;,;, 0.2
<I)
.,E 0.1
e
.; l:::=::::::::;::::'::::::'::1=,:::::::':::;:::::::::::'::::::;::':::=::::::;:':::=:::::::::::::::::::':::::::::1$15
C:
;: 1--~~~5~00=0~~~1~00=0~0~~ 00~ ~ ~2~00~0~0~ ~---1 $ 20
15~0~
0 BA
'O
<I)
l--~ ~
50~0-0~ -1~00_0_0~ 1~50~0-0~ 2-0~00-0~ 2~50_0_0~ ~ ~---1 $ 25 B
_<C
,!J! Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Type\ltem A AB B BA C D E EA EB EC F p
Fluid: Water 2KW150-15 77 70 46 27.5 112.5 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
500 2KW200-20 78.5 82 53 33.5 121 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
400
300 2KW250- 25 81 92 59 40.5 129.5 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1"
C
E 200
:::;
0 100
Q)
~
;:
0
u::
Pressure differentia 6P= ( P1-P2 ) ( MPa)
Type\ltem A B BA C D E EA EB EC F p
2KW150-15 70 46 27.5 112.5 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
2KW200-20 82 53 33.5 121 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
2KW250-25 92 59 40.5 129.5 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1'
•Mfil
2L Series (Direct-acting and normally closed)
D Specification
-06 1/8" 300

2LH030 2.0 0.18 3.0 2.0 300
-08 1/4" 290
-06 1/8" 300
2L030 3.0 0.33 6.0 1.0 150
-08 1/4" 290
3.0 450
2L 2LH050
-10 3/8"
4.0 0.55 10.0
600
2.0 300
-15 1/2" 590
-10 3/8" 600
2L050 5.0 0.83 15.0 1.0 150
-15 1/2" 590
(1) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2L030 series grommet valve's weight is 10g less than
terminal's. 2L050series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
D Symbol
D Product feature
1. Direct acting and normally closed type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high 50 10.0VA 35
CDA116 AC ±15%
sensibility allows it to change direction quickly; 2L0030 60 Terminal 8.0VA 30
CLA116
2.11 has wide pressure range, including standard high pressure (H) to DC ±10% (CDA) 6.5W 30
Class H
choose from; 50 25.0VA 60
3. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle. 2L0 050 60 (CLA) 22.0VA 55
CLA170
4. The valve body is made of SUS304. Its coil has a Heat resistance DC ±10% 10.5W 40
classification of Class H. The standard seal material is PTFE(Teflon) which
is suitable for a variety of working medium such as water with high
temperature and vapour. D Ordering code
Model
J2L: 2/2 way direct-acting and normally closed J
Pressure condition
H: Hi h pressure Electrical entry
Adaptable fluid G) Steam, High temperature Water, Oil
Blank: Standard Blank: Terminal
I: Grommet
Oil Water Steam Ambient Size series
Ambient and fluid 030: 030 Series
Max. 150 150 183 100 Voltage
temperature("C) 050: 050 Series
Min. -1~ 1 -20
A:AC220V
(1) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid . Port size B: DC24V
® Note: 50CST or less. Size series Port size C:AC110V
06: 1/8" E:AC24V
D Inner structure 030 Series
~ F: DC12V
I I · 10: 3/8"
050 Series
~


1 Body 6 Fixed cap 11 EClip
2 Airtight ring 7 Fixed plate 12 Connector
3 Spring 8 Movable core 13 Bead flange
4 Spring 9 Coil assembly 14 Screw
5 0-rinq 10 Washer
•ltl
2L Series (Direct-acting and normally closed)
..
0.
~ 0.8
1.0
0.9
Fluid: Vacuum I I · I I
0.7
N
0.
0.6
0.5
~ 0.4
0.3 2L
"'~
Q. 0.2
E 0.1
0
i"'
C:
(!)2
(!)3
3' 5 15
.,,
0
10 30
(!)4
g! (!)5
~ FlowQ: kg/h
Type\ ltem A AB B C D E F G K KA p PA Q QA
2L0 030-06 72.5 40 29.5 71 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/8" 10 MS 16
0.001 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
2L0 030-08 72.5 40 29.5 71 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/4" 10 MS 16
Pressure differentia L':. P= ( P1-P2) ( MPa) 2LD 050-10 89.5 52 39 87 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 3/8" 13 MS 23
2L0 050- 15 89.5 52 39 87 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 1/2" 13 MS 23
2LD 030(Grommet) 2LD 050(Grommet)
2L0 030- 06 41 40 29.5 71 20 49 10 5.3 40 1/8" 10 MS 16
2LD 030- 08 41 40 29.5 71 20 49 10 5.3 40 1/4" 10 MS 16
2L0 050-10 60 52 39 87 26 56 10 5.3 48 3/8" 13 MS 23
2LD 050-15 60 52 39 87 26 56 10 5.3 48 1/2' 13 MS 23
-,~...
2L Series (Internally piloted and normally closed)
D Specification
2L150- 15 1/2" 15.0 5.50 100.0 675

2L200-20 3/4" 20.0 9.50 170.0 875
2L250-25 1" 25.0 12.50 220.0 1120 Max:1.0 Max:1 50
1.5 220
2L320-32 1 1/4" 35.0 23. 00 420.0 2700 Min:0.05 Min:10
2L 2L400-40 11/2" 40.0 31.00 560.0 3250
2L500-50 2" 50.0 49.00 880.0 4300
® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2L150-250series grommet valve's weight is 1Og less than
terminal's. 2L320-500series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
DSymbol D Specification of coil

Valve Coil t e Power Frequency Voltage Electrical Power Consumption
Insulation Temp rise('t)
type YP type (Hz) range entry (VA/W)
Product feature 2L150 50 10.0VA 35
CDA116 AC ±15%
2L200 60 Terminal 8.0VA 30
1. lndirectacting(lnternal pilot) and normally closed type 2/2 way solenoid CLA116
2L250 - ± 10 % (CDA) 6.5W
valve. Its high sensibility allows it to change direction quickly. DC 30
Class H
50 25.0VA 60
2. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle. 2L320
CDA170 AC ± 15 % Grommet
2L400 60 (CLA) 22.0VA 55
3. The valve body is made of SUS304. Its coil has a Heat resistance CLA170
2L500 DC - ±10% 10.5W 40
is suitable for a variety of working medium such as water with high
temperature and vapour. D Ordering code
Model
D Valve's specification j2L: 2/2 way internally piloted and normally closeded j
Acting Internally piloted

Initial stats Normally closed Orifice size
Adaptable fluid G) Steam, High temperature Water, Oil 150: <P15mm Etectrlcal entry
Viscosity limit Under20CST 200: <P20mm Blank: Terminal
250: <P25mm
Ambient and fluid
I Oil I Water I Steam I Ambient 320: <P35mm
I: Grommet
Max. I 150 I 150 I 183 I 100 Voltage
temperature("C) 400: <P40mm
Min. I -1 0(2) I 1 I I -20 500: <P 50mm A:AC220V
(j)Note:Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid; B: DC24V
® Note:50CST or less. Port size
C AC11 0V
Orifice size Port size
D Inner structure <P15mm 15: 1/2"
E:AC24V
F: DC1 2V
<P20mm 20: 3/4"
<P25mm 25: 1"
<P 35mm 32: 11/4"
<P40mm 40: 1 1/2"
<P50mm 50: 2"

Note:A. 3201400\500 series valves do not have mounting accessories.

1 Body 10 Spring 19 0-ring
2 Fixed ring 11 Screw 20 Fixed plate
3 Airtight bush 12 Spring 21 Airtight ring
4 0 -ring 13 Bead flange 22 Spring
5 Wear ring 14 Coil assembly 23 Plug
6 Gasket 15 Washer 24 Piston
7 Screw 16 E Clip 25 Bushing
8 Spring 17 Movable core 26 0-ring
9 Cover 18 Fixed plate
•IN
2L Series (Internally piloted and normally closed)

2L 150- 250(Terminal)
Fluid: Vacuum
l 1. 0 t--:--~~-!-=.:!.E
::;; 0. 9 t--+-4'-"'...,..=::c:11
- 0. 8 t--t--,C...-4.::.::.:±/
"' 0. 7 ,-:-~=;.c::;i~
a. 0 .6 r--1-==J
~ 0.5 r-~== 2L
"'0.4,-~="'
t O 3 t---+-=:Cf-
E 0.2
~ 0.1
"'~
0
t--~ ~ ~ ~~ "="=~ -=-"~ ~ ~ ,--~~~~~~-; ¢15
+--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-< ¢20
".,> +--~ ~1~0~0~ ~5- 0~0~ ~7~5~0~ ~1~0-o-o ~ ~ ~ ~ ~--1 ¢ 25
~ l--~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~_,¢35
l--~~5_0_0~_1_0_0~0~~15_0_0~_2_0_0_0~~~~~------1$40
l--~5_0~0~1_0_00~1_5_00~2~00_0~2_50_0~3_0_0_0~~~~------1¢50 2L320- 500(Terminal)
1 000 2000 3000 4000
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Fluid: Water ¢50

900 .--~~-,-~---.~,----,-~,--,-r,:::....--,-~--.~-,---,
800
700
600
500
400
300
-~ 200
:::i 2L 150- 15 77 70 46 27.5 107 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
0 100 2L200- 20 78.5 82 53 33.5 115.5 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
Q)
"§ 2L250-25 81 92 59 40.5 124 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1"

2L320-32 125 80 52 154.5 - - - - - - 11/4"
2L400-40 132 90 58 162 - - - - - - 1 1/2"
0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 2L500-50 150 100 70 177 - - - - - - 2"
Pressure differentia L':.P= ( P1-P2) ( MPa)
2L150- 250(Grommet)
2L320- 500(Grommet)
2L150-15 70 46 27.5 107 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
2L200- 20 82 53 33.5 115.5 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
2L250- 25 92 59 40.5 124 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1"
2L320-32 125 80 52 154.5 - - - - - 1 1/4"
2L400-40 132 90 58 162 - - - - - - 1 1/2"
2L500- 50 150 100 70 177 - - - - - - 2"
.,,.
2KL Series {Direct-acting and normally opened)
-06 1/8" 305

2KLH030 2.0 0.18 3.0 1.5 220
-08 1/4" 295
-06 1/8" 305
2KL030 3.0 0.33 6.0 0.7 100
-08 1/4" 295
3.0 450
2KL 2KLH050
-10 3/8'
4.0 0.55 10.0
610
1.5 220
-15 1/2" 600
-10 3/8"
2KL050 5.0 0.83 15.0 0.7 100
-15 1/2"
<1) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
(2) The weight in the table is !he terminal valve's weight, 2KL030 series grommet valve's weigh! is 1Og less than
D Symbol terminal's. 2KL050series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
Product feature
1. Direct acting and normally opened type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high 50 15.0VA 50
CDA116 AC ±15%
sensibility allows it to change direction quickly; 2KL0 030 60 Terminal 11 .0VA 40
CLA116
2. lt has wide pressure range, including standard high pressure (H) to DC ±10% (CDA) 6.5W 30
choose from; Class H
50 35.0VA 65
3. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle. CDA170 AC ±15% Grommet
2KL0 050 60 (CLA) 30.0VA 60
CLA170
4. The valve body is made of SUS304. Its coil has a Heat resistance ±10% 10.5W
DC 40
is suitable fora variety of working medium such as water with high
temperature and vapour.
D Ordering code
Model
!2KL: 2/2 way direct-acting and normally opened !
Initial stats Normally opened Pressure condition
Adaptable fluid G) Steam, High temperature Water, Oil H: High pressure Electrical entry
Viscosity limit Under20CST Blank: Standard Blank: Terminal
Oil Water Steam Ambient !:Grommet
Ambient and fluid Size series
Max. 150 150 183 100 030: 030 Series
temperature("C) Voltage
Min. -10® 1 -20 050: 050 Series
A:AC220V
<1) Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid .
B: DC24V
(2) Note: 50CST or less.
C:AC110V
E:AC24V
D Inner structure F: DC12V
I I ·

Ordering code of accessories is the same as 2S series valve's. Please refer to P98 for details of ordering code.

1 Body 7 Fixed cap 13 Connector
2 Airtight ring 8 Electromagnet 14 Spring washer
3 Spring 9 Mandril 15 Screw
4 Fixed ring 10 Coil assembly 16 Spring
5 Fixed plate 11 Position ring 17 Airtight bush
6 0-ring 12 EClip
•Ii=•
2KL Series (Direct-acting and normally opened)

Fluid: Vacuum 2KLD 030(Terminal} 2KLD 050(Terminal}
2KL
FlowQ: kg/h
Fluid: Water
40~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
30
20
·= 10
:5 ~
0 ~
~ 1
3: Type\ltem A AB B C D E F G K KA p PA Q QA
0
u: 2KLD030-06 72.5 40 29.3 76 20 49 43.5 10 5.3 40 1/8' 10 M5 16
0 . 1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
0.001 0.005 0.01 0.02 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 2KLD 030-08 72.5 40 29.3 76 20 49 43 .5 10 5.3 40 1/4' 10 M5 16
Pressure differentia L'i.P= ( P1-P2 ) ( MPa) 2KLD 050- 10 89.5 52 39 92 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 3/8' 13 M5 23
2KLD 050- 15 89.5 52 39 92 26 56 51 10 5.3 48 1/2" 13 M5 23
2KLD 030(Grommet} 2KLD 050(Grommet}
2-Q
2KLD030- 06 41 40 29.5 76 20 49 10 5.3 40 10 1/8" M5 16
2KLD 030- 08 41 40 29.5 76 20 49 10 5.3 40 10 1/4" M5 16
2KLD050-10 60 52 39 92 26 56 10 5.3 48 13 3/8" M5 23
2KLD 050-15 60 52 39 92 26 56 10 5.3 48 13 1/2" M5 23
•IPli
2KL Series {Internally piloted and normally opened)
D Specification
2KL150-15 Xi" 15.0 5.50 100.0 675

2KL200-20 3/4" 20.0 9.50 170.0 880
2KL250-251" 25.0 12.50 220.0 1125 Max:O. 7 Max:100
1.5 220
2KL 2KL320-32 11/4" 35.0 23.00 420.0 2710 Min:0.05 Min:10
2KL400-40 1 Y," 40.0 31 .00 560.0 3260
2KL500-50 2" 50.0 49.00 880.0 4310
(l) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
® The weight in the table is the terminal valve's weight, 2KL 150-250 series grommet valve's weight is
10g less than terminal's. 2KL320-500series grommet valve's weight is 20g less than terminal's.
D Symbol
czr{BD' D Specification of coil
D Product feature
1. lndirectacting(lnternal pilot) and normally opened type 2/2 way solenoid 2KL150 50 15.0VA 50
CDA116 AC ±15%
valve. Its high sensibility allows it to change direction quickly. 2KL200 60 11.0VA 40
CLA116 Terminal
2. It is compact, small size and lightweight. It is easy to install and dismantle. 2KL250 ±1 0% 6.5W
DC (CDA) 30
Class H
3. The valve body is made of SUS304 . Its coil has a Heat resistance 50 Grommet 35.0VA 65
2KL320 AC ±15% (CLA)
classification of Class H. The standard seal material is PTFE(Teflon) which CDA170
2KL400 60 30.0VA 60
CLA170
is suitable for a variety of working medium such as water with high 2KL500 DC ±10% 10.5W 40
temperature and vapour.
terminal electrical entry . D Ordering code
Acting Internally piloted Model
Initial stats Normally opened !2KL: 2/2 way internally piloted and normally opened!
Adaptable fluid G) Steam, High temperature Water, Oil
Viscosity limit Under20CST Orifice size
Oil Water Steam Ambient 150: (!)15mm
Ambient and fluid 200: (!)20mm Electrical entry
Max. 150 150 183 100
temperature("C) 250: (!)25mm Blank: Terminal
Min. -1 0(2) 1 - 20 !: Grommet
320: (!)35mm
<D Note: Please refer to P123 for detail of other's fluid . 400: (!)40mm
® Note: 50CST or less. 500: (!)50mm Voltage
A:AC220V
Inner structure Port size B: DC24V
Orifice size Port size C AC110V
(!)15mm 15: 1/2" E:AC24V
(!)20mm 20: 3/4" F: DC12V
(!)25mm 25: 1"
(!)35mm 32: 1 1/4"
(!)40mm 40: 1 1/2"
(!)50mm 50: 2"

Note:A 3201400\500 series valves do not have mounting accessories.

1 Gasket 11 Fixed cap 21 0-ring
2 Piston 12 Bead flange 22 Fixed ring
3 Body 13 Coil assembly 23 Airtight ring
4 Gasket 14 Position ring 24 Plug
5 Screw 15 E Clip 25 Spring
6 Wear ring 16 Mandrill 26 0-ring
7 Spring 17 Electromagnet 27 Bush
8 Cover 18 Spring 28 0 -ring
9 Spring 19 Airtight bush 29 Fixed ring
10 Screw 20 Fixed plate
2KL Series (Internally piloted and normally opened)

2KL 150-250(Terminal)
Fluid: Vacuum
N
o._
0.6
0.5
~
=> 0.4
~
0.3
2KL
~
a_
.,
E
(1)
0.2
!:, 0.1
"'3::
C
t:=:'::::::~:::::::::::'::::':::~::::::::':::::;:::::::::::::::;:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::':::::::==i$15
0
'O t--~~~--c'~~~~~~~c=-=~~~~~~~-t $20
(1)
2 1--~ ~1~0~0~ ~5=0~0~ ~7=5~0~ ~170=0 =0 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~--1$ 25
~ f--~~5~0-0~-1~0~0-0~-1-5~0-0~-2-0~0-0~~~~~~---t$ 35
f--~5~0~0~1~0~0~0-1-5~0-0-2~0~0~0~2~5-00~3~0~0~0~~~~~---t$ 40
2KL320-500(Terminal)
f--~-1~00-0~~2~0-00~~3~00-0~~4~0-00~~~~~~--/$ 50
Flow Q: L/min(ANR)
Fluid: Water $ 50 (.)

900 r-~~,--~---.~.------.~,---,--r:::=,_...--.--~--,-~-.----,
800
700
600
500
400
300 A
c: 200
~ Type\ ltem A AB B BA C D E EA EB EC p
o 100
2KL 150-15 77 70 46 27.5 112.5 80 6.4 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
2KL200-20 78.5 82 53 33.5 121 90 6.4 75 40 34 3/4"
2KL250-25 81 92 59 40.5 129.5 95 6.4 80 44.5 36 1"
0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09 0.1 0.2 2KL320-32 125 80 52 160 11/4"
Pressure differentia 6P= ( P1-P2) ( MPa) 2KL400-40 132 90 58 167 11/2"
2KL500-50 150 100 70 182 2"
2KL 150- 250(Grommet)
2KL320- 500(Grommet)
(.)
2KL 150-15 70 46 27.5 112.5 80 6.4 8 65 36.5 30.5 1/2"
2KL200-20 82 53 33.5 121 90 6.4 8 75 40 34 3/4"
2KL250-25 92 59 40.5 129.5 95 6.4 8 80 44.5 36 1'
2KL320- 32 125 80 52 160 - - - - - - 11/4"
2KL400-40 132 90 58 167 - - - - - - 1 1/2"
2KL500- 50 150 100 70 182 - - - - - - 2'
Coil and accessories
D Specification
50 10.0VA 15.0VA 35 50
220
60 8.0VA 11.0VA 30 40
50 DIN 10.0VA 15.0VA 35 50
AC 110 ±15%
116 60 Terminal 8.0VA 11.0VA 30 40
COIL Series 50 10.0VA 15.0VA 35 50
24 Grommet
60 8.0VA 11.0VA 30 40
24
DC ±10% 6.5W Class B 30 30
12
50 25.0VA 35.0VA Class H 60 65
220
60 22.0VA 30.0VA 55 60
50 DIN 25.0VA 35.0VA 60 65
AC 110 ±15%
170 60 Terminal 22.0VA 30.0VA 55 60
Series 50 25.0VA 35.0VA 60 65
24 Grommet
60 22.0VA 30.0VA 55 60
24
DC ±10% 10.5W 40 40
12
CDA116 AC
PL2925M-P1
116 (Terminal) DC
D How to select coil
::J~"
Series CLA116 AC
(Grommet) DC 116 Series 170 Series
Valve type\ Coil type
CDA170 AC Class B Class H Class B Class H
PL3030M-P1
170
Series
(Terminal)
CLA170
DC
AC
2W0030
2KWD 030
2S0 030
2KS0030 • X X X
(Grommet) DC
2L0 030 2KL0030 X
• X X
2W0 050
2KWD 050
2S0 050
2KS0050
X X
• X
D How to use connector 2LD 050 2KLD050 X X X

•
Screw
2W150-250
2KW150-250
2S150-250
2KS150-250 • X X X
2L 150-250 2KL 150-250 X

• X X
Terminal shell 2S320- 500 2KS320-500 X X

• X
2L320-500 2KL320 - 500 X X X

•
Terminal core How to select accessories
Valve type\ Coil type F-2S030LB F-2S050LB F-2S150LB F-2S200LB F-2S250LB
2WD030
2KW0 030
2S0030
2KS0030
2L0 030
2KL0 030 • X X X X
2W0050
2KW0 050
2S0050
2KS0050
2L0050
2KL0 050
X
• X X X
2W150 2S150 2L150

2KW150 2KS150 2KL 150
X X
• X X
2W200
2KW200
2S200
2KS200
2L200
2KL200
X X X
• X
2W250
2KW250
2S250
2KS250
2S320-500 2L320- 500
2L250
2KL250
X X X X
•
X X X X X
2KS320- 500 2KL320- 500
Temperature resistance class of coil

CD: Terminal Blank: B Class
CL: Grommet
Coil's bore Voltage

A116: Coil Specification(Bore size<ll 11.6mm) A:AC220V
A170: Coil Specification(Bore size<ll 17.0mm) B: DC24V
C:AC110V
E:AC24V
F: DC12V
Usable medium for reference
Usable medium
Series 2W. 2KW series 2S. 2KS series 2L. 2KL series Series 2W. 2KW series 2S. 2KS series 2L. 2KL series
Valve body material Brass SUS304 SUS304 Valve body material Brass SUS304 SUS304
Seal material FPM - F FPM - F PTFE Seal material FPM - F FPM - F PTFE
Dry air © © 0 Hydrogen peroxide t:,. t:,. 6
Carbon dioxide CO, © © 6 Caustic soda t:,. 6 t:,.
Nitrogen © © 6 Gasoline' 0 0 ©
Fluid
valve
Argon © © 6 Glycerin* t:,. 6 6
Water © © © Light oil © © ©
Pure water 6 © © Oxygen © © t:,.
Saturated vapor 6 6 © Heavy oil A © © ©
High temp water(,;;; 150°C) 6 6 © Heavy oil B © © ©
ISOVG32oil © © © Heavy oil C © © ©
JIS#1 oil © © © Nitric acid 30 % t:,. 6 6
JIS#2 oil © © © Vacuum (medium vacuum) 0 0 t:,.
Methanol* 6 6 © Vacuum(high vacuum) 6 t:,. t:,.
Eethanol * 0 0 © Sodium hydroxide under 30% 6 6 6
Medium Glycol * © © © Medium Sodium hydoxide above 30% 6 6 6
Acetone• 6 6 © Hydrogen © © 6
Propylene butyronitrile* 6 6 6 Soap t:,. 6 ©
Acetylene* 6 6 6 Azote © © 6
Acetaldehyde* 6 6 © Natural gas* © © t:,.
Ammonia 6 6 6 Pipeline gas* © © 6
Ammonia water 6 6 t:,. Toluene* t:,. t:,. ©
lsopropanol © © © Ligroine* 6 6 ©
Alcohol(High purity)* © © © Boracic acid t:,. 6 6
Alcohol(lndustrial)* t:,. t:,. t:,. Formalin t:,. t:,. 6
Aether* 6 t:,. © Methane* © © t:,.
Ammonia chioride solution 6 6 6 Lacquer * 6 6 ©
OzoneOow CXJl100lltralion) t:,. t:,. © Ammoniumsulfate solution t:,. t:,. t:,.
Phosphoric acid 6 6 6 Copper sulfate solution 6 6 6
1 Note: © = Excellent(nearly without affect); 0 = Good(workable though some affect); !:o. = Poor(large affect).
2 Note: "'" means inflammable and explosive dangerous fluid. Please use the relative explosion proof coil.
3 Note: Under the corresponding gaseous state medium, PTFE seal is with a little leakage(.;300ml/min).
4 Note: Please consult the technical department before using fluid that has not been shown in the above table.
2V Series
Specification
Model 2V025- 06 2V025-08 2V1 30-1 0 2V130-15 2V250- 20 2V250-25
Fluid Air. Water. Oil
Acting Direct acting Internally piloted acting
Type Normally closed
Orifice size( cP mm) 2.5 2.5 13.0 13.0 25.0 25.0
Cvvalve 0.23 0.25 6.20 6.20 13.00 13.00
2V Port size G) 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2' 3/4" 1'
Viscosity limit Under 20CST
Pressure range 0- 1.0MPa(0-145psi) 0.05-1.0MPa (7-145psi)
Material body Brass with zinc plated Brass
Seal material VITON NBR
Min. activating time sec 0. 05 sec and below
D Symbol
2V025 2V130, 250
cz[II& ~ Specification of coil
Valve type Power type Fre~:(cy ~~l~~~e Electrical Power Consumption
entry (VA/W)
lnsulat1on Temp. nse('t)
D Product feature
50
2V025 AC ± 15 % 7.0VA 35
2V025 series Terminal
2V130 60 Class B
1. Direct acting and normally closed type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high Grommet
2V250 -
DC ±10% 7. 0W 45
sensitivity allows it to change direction quickly.
2. The structure is small and compact.
3. The valve body is made of brass which is heat resistance and the coil
conforms to Class B classification. The seals are made of fluorine rubber
(VITON) which is suitable for several types of working medium.
2V130 and 250 series
1. This 2/2 way diaphragm piloted solenoid valve has low energy Model
consumption and large air flow. !2V: 2 port 2 position solenoid valve I
2. The starting pressure is low and the operational differential pressure
is< 0.05MPa. Orifice size
3. The valve body is made of brass which is heat resistance and the coil 025: cP2.5mm Electrical entry
conforms to Class B classification . The seals are made of NBR. 130: cP13mm Blank: Terminal
250: cP25mm I: Grommet
Port size Voltage
Inner structure Orifice size A:AC220V
cP2.5mm B: DC24V
C:AC1 10V
cP13mm E:AC24V
F: DC12V
cP25mm
Usable fluid
f!piMi!lftmfl€t!••fifi®g-HfM,JiCM,M·ii·EgiiHfiMJ•Hfilh¥~4C•firB~,&I~,
1 Note: © = Excellent(nearly without affect). 0 = Good(workable though some affect). f'.. = Poor(large affect).
No. Item No. Item No. Item No. Item 2 Note: "*" means inflammable and explosive dangerous fluid. Please use the relative explosion proof coil.
1 Connector 3 Nut 5 Armature assembly 7 Diaphragm 3 Note: Please consult the technical department before using fluid that has not been shown in the above table.
2 Connector gasket 4 Coil 6 Body cover 8 Body
2V Series
Flowchart D Dimensions
Model:2V025-06 2V025-08 Fluid:air

~
::::;;
i
1.0
-
0.8
--
~
-...... ......__
-......
::l 0.6
::;_
g, 0.4 -
- ' ''
----- ' ......
.___
'\ " \ 'I '
"
~ 2V
a,
C.
0.2
--- ' '- '\ I I I I I
Cf>2.5
0
75 150 225 300 375 450 525
FlowQ L/min
Model:2V130-10 2V250-20 Fluid:air

2V130-15 2V250-25
.,
0.
1.0
---- ------....
--- ""'"''
::::;; 0 8 .......___
-
---' "'"' '
--......
-----... \
~
--......._
\
\ I
\ \
\
--......._ \ \ I I I
""'-. \ I I I I I
Cll13
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
Cll25
5500 11000 16000 21500 27000
FlowQ L/min
2V130, 250 Term inal

AC
Model:2V025-06 2V025-08 Fluid:water

~~
·~ 10 Cf>2.5 (.)
:::i 5
0
~
---~
15
u::: 0·1 0.01 (0.054)0.01 0.05
Pressure differentia 2V130, 250 Grommet
Model:2V130-10 2V250-20 Fluid:water

2V130-15 2V250-25
"200r
! 100r
'i 200
0
u::
500
::::::: i::-~
U. UJ U.Ut U.1
------
--
u.
----
U.j U.4L.~
Cll25
Cll13
Model\ ltem A AB AC B C CA D p PA
Pressure differentia
2V130-10 72 18.5 71 49 91 103 32 3/8' 15
2V130- 15 72 18.5 71 49 91 103 32 1/2' 15
2V250-20 102 23 74 77.5 107.5 120 45 3/4' 21
2V250-25 102 23 74 77.5 107.5 120 45 1' 21
2P Series
Specification
Model 2P025-06 2P025-08
Fluid Air, Water, Oil
Type Normally closed
Orifice size( Cl> mm) 2.5
Cvvalve 0.23
2P Portsiz G1/8 I G1 /4
Viscosity limit Under 20CST
Pressure range 0- 0.7MPa(0-1 OOpsi)
Material body Nylon 66
Seal material VITON
Min. activating time sec 0.05 sec and below
D Symbol
Cl Product feature
1. Direct acting and normally closed type 2/2 way solenoid valve. Its high
50
sensitivity allows it to change direction quickly. AC ± 15% Terminal ?.OVA 35
2P025 60 Class B
2. Its compact size is small and light weight. It is easy to install and dismantle. Grommet t--- - - - - - - - - <
DC ±10 % 7.0W 45
3. The valve body is made of Nylon 66. Its coil has a Heat resistance
classification of Class B. The seals are made ofViton which is suitable for
different types offluid.
4. The protection class of the coil is IP65, and the electrical entry is grommet
Inner structure Model Thread type

!2P:2 port 2 position solenoid valve(plastic steel type)! [G:G I
Electrical entry
Orifice size [1: Grommet
[025:C02.5mm I
Volta e
Port size A:AC220V
06:G1 /8 B:DC24V
08:G1 /4 C:AC110V
E:AC24V
F:DC1 2V
D Dimensions

1 Body 4 Pilot screw 7 Coil nut
2 Botton cover gasket 5 Armature 8 Fixed plate
3 0-ring 6 Coil 9 Spring
D Flow chart
Model: 2P025-06 2P025-08 Fluid:Air
1.0
"' -----
0.8
--
C.
::;;
......._
-- ---- ---"
....._
0.6 ......._
I
Q)
ci.
0.4 ....._
--..
"\ ""' "
' I
'-
g> 0.2
....._--... '- "
~
'
;;; <1>2.5
C. 75 150 225 300 375 450 525
0
FlowQ L/min
~
,
Model: 2P025-06 2P025-08
10
Fluid: water
<1>2.5
5
l
0
;:
---
0
u:: 0.1
0.01 (0. 054)0.01 0.05
Pressure differentia
Angle seat valve(2/2 way) AlrTAC
2J Series
-10 3/8" 0.8

4.4 4.8 13
2JS150 -15 1/2" 40 0.7
2JW150 -10 3/8" 0.8
15 4.8 4.3 16
-15 1/2" 50 0.7
40 7.9 4.8 6.5 0.9 2J
~j~2~0 -20 3/4" r-5_
0 ---1 20 8 4.3 11 0.95
63 10 4.2 16 1.6
2JS250 19 4.2 11 1.9
1" r-6-3 ---1 25
2JW250 -25 80 20 5.0 16 2.5
2JS320 27 4.2 6 2.5
-32 11/ ," >-6-3- --< 32
2JW320 80 28 5.0 15 3.0
-10 3/8" 0.8
4.4 16
a Symbol 1 A 2 A 2JSK150 -15 1/2" 40
15 ~
0.7
--c{IC}, 0 "'C
p
(NC)
-~
(NO)
p
2JWK150 -10 3/8"
-15 1/2" 50 4.8
-~~a.
--::i::::,
., .,
(D..:: ~ 16
0.8
2JSK200 40 7.9 ~~e

"'.,_ 16
D Product feature 2JWK200 -20 3/4" r-5-0 ---1 20
8 . , C: C:
16 0.9
ci. (I) 0
1. Air piloted and can be used non electric, inflammable and explosive environment. The start-up pressure is 2JSK250 50 14.5 u, O- C."I 16 1.2
low; and the high pressure could be controlled by the low pressure. 2JWK250 -25 1" >-6-3- --< 25 19 2~~ 16 1.6
., "'"'.,
,:, E "'
2. The accessories such as the noumenon and slide bar are made of stainless steel, which are of excellent 2JSK320 _32 1,/," ,_6_3_ _-< 32 27 0
~ ~
0 ~ 16 2.2
"- C: C.
rustproof quality. The seals are made ofTeflon and can be applied extensively in areas with high 2JWK320 80 28 16
temperature and strong corrosive liquids. -10 3/8"
4.4 16
3. The structure of valve is angles at 45' degrees with streamline inner chamber design. The reduced tunnel 2JSY150 -15 1/2" 40
15
resistance allows liquid to run more smoothly thus achieving high flow. Filtration core are added at inlet 2JWY150 -10 3/8" 50
4.8 16
port to prevent the entrance of impurities and extend life span of the seals. -15 1/2"
4. Actuator is fitted with visual position indicator. This allows for visual checking and adjustment of flowrate. 2JSY200 _20 314,. >--4_
0- ----< 20 7.9 16 0.9
5. Control point is made of metal insert. Mounting plate can be used to for NAMUR value. 2JWY200 50 8 16 0.9
6. The actuator part can be rotated at 360' degrees and is easily installed. 2JSY250 _25 1,. ,_5_0_ _-< 25 14.5 16 1.3
2JWY250 63 19 16 1.7
2JSY320 _32 1,/," 63 32 27 16 2.3
2JWY320
D Operation and maintenance

1. Before using, please verify that if the working status of
product is identical with data in catalogue, and it should
not exceed the limits.
Size of actuator 2. Before the pressure releasing and cooling of system,
Q40: Cl>40mm no maintenance, examination and installation of product 2 =
Q50: Cl>50mm should be conducted. 1 =
Q63: Cl>63mm
3. For the normally-closed-type , when its valve is
Q80: Cl>50mm
disassembled, due to the pre-pressure of the relatively
large spring power in controller, the "1" hole should be
Port size
opened for ventilation in advance so to make sure the
Orifice size Port size
The working medium flows to piston could be completely moved to the position, then
the down side of valve inlet 10: 3/8"
150
(Flow from the bottom part to ~ rotate the screw thread between the valve and the
upper part of piston) 200 20: 3/4" connection bar, direct rotation is forbidden, otherwise the
250 25: 1" disassembling would not be conducted in result of the
320 32: 1 scuffing of screw thread .
4. If maintenance of actuator part is needed, special tools should be used for
disassembling and installation, while disassembling, the loading spring could cause
Orifice size
150: Cl>15mm damage. If the customer can not cond uct the maintenance, please retu rn the valve to
200: Cl>20mm manufacturer for maintenance.
250: Cl>25mm
320: Cl>32mm
The working medium flows to
the upper side of valve inlet
(Flow from the upper part to
bottom part of piston)
K: Normal opened
Control
pressur~2 l;;l!Diru;!'!m
1
The working medium flows to

the down sideof valve inlet
(Flow from the bottom part to
upper part of piston)
Work
•tl•
Angle seat valve(2/2 way) AlrTAC
2J Series
Fluid pressure- control pressure curve
....
1 Body Stainless steel
2 Piston Stainless steel
14 3 Sorina washer Solina steel
Q)
e 12 4 Piston rod Stainless steel
~ 10 5
6
Pitman
V-seals
Stainless steel
PTFE
2J "'~
~ a. 7 Filter core Bronze
0
0
"'
C
4 8 Sprinq Sprinq steel
¢2 ~
Q) 9 0-rina NBR
a.
0 10 Bellville sorina Solina steel
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0-rina NBR
Pilot pressure(bar) 12 0-rinq NBR
0 M 13 Hexagon nut steel
Size of actuator = =
Orifice size z~ ~ 14 Sorina Solina steel
C>
z
C>
15 Too cover PA6
16 16 0-ring NBR
14 17 Transoarent cap Plastic
"'
.0
Q) 12 18 Indicative Plastic
Cylinder body
~~ 10 19 PA6
Work pressure 20 Washer SPCC
a.
..
21 Built-in nut Brass nickel-plate
.[ 22 Piston PA6
Q)
4 23 DU dry bearing Wear resistant material
a. 2
The working medium 0 24 Connect nut Brass
flows to the down side 25 0-ring Vrton
of valve inlet 00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
26 Spring holder PTFE
Pilot pressure(bar)
27 Guide sleeve PTFE
28 Seal washer PTFE
29 Screw Stainless steel
30 Seal washer PTFE
Dimensions
I~
4
Q)
a.
0
Pilot pressure(bar)
Size of actuator
Orifice size
16~~.....=;c...-~..,;c~~~~~
:O 14
e
I ;~
~ 8
.[
~
Q)
a.
The working medium 0
flows to the upper side
of valve inlet 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Pilot pressure(bar)
D Ambient and medium temperature

Control medium Air neutral a1r(to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Size of actuator <!>40, 50, 63: 1Obar
Max. control pressure
Size of actuator <!>BO: 7bar
MediumG) air, liquid, vacuum, steam
Viscosity limit 600mm'/s below
Temperatur® -20-+ 180"C
Ambient temp@ -10-+60"C
Note: CD The water-hammer-type can be used for air, or steam only, and can not be used
for liquid.
~ Dew point: - 20"C or less. p 70
® Relationship of working medium I
so •..........., .........,...................................,
temperature and ambient
temperature is shown in ~ 50
a.
following figure.
40 i
Preparation unit
Summary of preparation unit
To achieve the optimization of system performance,

the first thing is to get the gas source which accords
with the specifications. Preparation unit with good
performance are the precondition to make sure the
gas source.
AirTAC has many kinds of preparation unit for your
choice:
1. G series;
2. A, B series;
3. Other accessory series. F.R.L
G Series
GC200-600 Series F.R.L combination ............................. 134
GFC200-600 Series FR.L combination ...................... .... 136
GFR200-600 Series Filter & regulator ............... ..... 138
GF200-600 Series Filter................................................. 140
GR200-600 Series Regulator.......................................... 142
GL200-600 Series Lubricator.......................................... 144
G Series(Metallic bowl type) .... . .. ........... ...... · 147
GV200-400 Series Soft start-up valves ............................ 148
GZ200-400 Series Safe on-off valve ................................ 149
GA200-600 Series Air distribution block ......................... 150
A, B Series
AC, BC Series F.R.L combination ... ......... ..................... . 152
AFC, BFC Series FR.L combination............ .................... 154
AFR, BFR Series Filter &regulator................... ..... .. ........ 156
AF, BF Series Filter....................................................... 158
AR, BR Series Regulator...................... .. .............. .. .. ...... 159
AL, BL Series Lubricator................................................. 161
Others
SR200 Series Regulator .. .... ..... .. .. .. .... ... .... ... ......... 162
SDR Series Regulator .. .. .......... .... .. ... .......... .. ... .. . .. 163
ADW Series Drip leg drain ... ..... .. .... .. . .. .... .... ... ... 165
GS, GF, GU Series Pressure gauge .... ....... .... .......... .. 166
DPS Series Digital Display Pressure Switch .. ..... .. .. ..... . 167
DPC Series Minitype No Display Pressure Switch ... ..........170

Preparation unit
13 How to Correctly Install and Use
The installation and application of the filter Installation and application of regulator
0 Attention 0 Attention
1. Before installation, the sundry granule such as dust, oil pollution and chipping in
1. Before installation, the sundry granule such as dust, oil pollution and chipping in
pipeline shall be cleaned up to prevent the mixture of fragments of seal materials.
pipeline shall be cleaned up to prevent the mixture of fragments of seal materials.
2. Never install reversingly the direction of intake and outlet. It shall be installed vertically
2. When there is more condensate, and if the condensate stays in the valve, poor action
and the bowl is downward. For the convenient of maintenance, proper space around the
of Regulator will be easily caused. Therefore, the handle shall be installed downward.
device shall be left. The installation height of filter shall accord with the elevation that
the filter bowl can be dismantled.
F.R.L
IN ___.
OUT OUT IN
• +- +-
is unfavorable for the drain
of condensate
Distance> the height for

dismantling cup
___.
OUT ' \The downward handle is
unfavorable for the drain
of condensate
X 3. The direction of intake and outlet shall not be installed reversingly, otherwise the
Regulator will leak for a long time and lose pressure- adjustment function.
___.
IN ___.
OUT ___.
IN ___.
OUT
Distance> the height for
•
IN dismantling cup
pneumatic components at the end of pipeline, since the water and oil in the compressed air
v X
with high temperature from air compressor take on gaseous state which will not only
4. The set pressure at the outlet sides of Regulator shall be less than 85% of the pressure
influence the filter effect, but are easy to damage the seals. Please install condenser and
of intake side, which is to avoid overlarge pressure drop and failing in meeting the
dryer in front of the filter.
application requirement.
Filter 5. Two Regulator act as the loop for the intake by turns of high and low pressure. Please
use free flow valve to prevent reflux.
6. If there are condensate, oil pollution and dust
in pressure pipe at intake side, the jam in
Keep certain distance discharge orifice and restriction orifice and Leave proper space
Install condenser and drier in front of filter for operation
poor action of valve will be caused. Therefore,
filter shall be installed additionally in front of
Regulator.
7. It shall be applied in the stipulated temperature
Filter range and direct sunshine shall be avoided .
8. Proper space around the device shall be left for
pressure-adjustment operation and
maintenance.
9. After the pressure-adjustment operation is
finished, the adjustment button of Regulator
shall be locked.
Pneumatic components Leave proper space
(such as solenoid valve) for operation
0 Warning
1. To prevent the external force to damage the filter bowl, never install it in the side of
access of delivery vehicles or a protection barrier may be built.
2. The drain bowl is made of polycarbonate which can not be used in the environment with
synthetic oil, organic solvent, chemicals, cooling fluid, alkali and acidic matter,
gluewater; and the site additive with the above matters. Meanwhile, the direct sunshine
shall be avoided.
3. Regular draining of bowl shall be conducted. Once water level surpasses the
breakwater, the sewage filtered will be carried to the output compressed air again ,
causing secondary pollution .
4. To guarantee the filter effect, the filter core shall be cleaned or changed regularly.
5. Please regularly examine whether the plastic drain bowl has crack, damage or other
aging.
Preparation unit
a How to Correctly Install and Use

The installation and application of oil feeder
0 Attention
1. The direction of intake and outlet shall not be installed reversingly. Before installation,
the sundry granule such as dust, oil pollution and chipping in pipeline shall be cleaned up
to prevent the mixture of fragments of sealmaterial.
•IN
....
OUT
•
IN
....
OUT
F.R.L
+Lubricant
The lubricant that is recommended for pneumatic components is one kind
(ISO VG32) of turbine oil. Especially when pneumatic components are lubricated,
X ts particularity shall be considered . Lubricant shall be anti-rust and avoid swelling,
shrink and deterioration of seal materials (pneumatic components mostly adopt
2. It will be difficult to supply oil and conduct maintenance if the Lubricator is set too high. NBR as the seal's material).ln addition, the performance of oil dripping of lubricant
3. Lubricator shall be installed after the air filter and Regulator to prevent moisture entering shall be considered. The viscosity that is too high or too low is not proper.
the oil bowl and avoid oil emulsification. The throttle orifice in Regulator shall not be 9. Please regularly examine whether the plastics bowl and inspection window of
polluted by oil and the rubber parts shall not be influenced by oil mist. It is good for the Lubricator have crack, damage or other aging situation.
atomization of oil that the velocity of low after Regulator is higher than that in front of the
valve.
The correct installation sequence of Filter Regulator and Lubricator
IN
• ___.
OUT
~,~
IN
• ....
OUT
Regulator
Filter Lubricator
4. The number in dial in adjustment ring of Lubricator
shows the position of oil quantity adjustment. The
larger the number is, the more the oil dripping is. It is
not for oil drops.
5. When Lubricator works, if there is a part in the
pipeline loop that can not be supplied with oil, this
part shall be set with one-way valve to prevent reflux.
6. The airflow that is used by Lubricator must meet the
requirement of necessary quantity of oil dripping
The bigger the number mdial 1s,the
(minimal flow for mist). The insufficient air flow will higher the quantity of 011 dripping 1s
cause the failure of oil dripping.
7. The Lubricator can be added oil under pressure. When oil is added, the oil-fill plug shall be
slowly opened and dismantled after the pressure in oil bowl has been completely
eliminated to prevent oil-fill plug flying off or oil spraying.
8. The oil level in oil bowl shall stay between the up limit and down limit, and please
supplement oil on a timely basis.
+ Method for supplementing oil
When Lubricator is supplemented with oil, the oil-fill plug shall be turned off. Turbine oil
poured into the oil bowl shall reach 80% of its volume .Oil shall be regularly examined
and supplemented to allow the device to work under the situation that oil is sufficient.
(As when the oil level is under the oil suction pipe, it can not supply oil for the system.
Therefore, the oil shall be supplemented before the bottom of oil suction pipe is exposed).
+Oil quantity and its adjustment
Generally speaking, the free air of each 1Om' uses 1cm' as the benchmark oil supply
quantity.
•ii•
Memo AlrTAC
Note
F.R.L
Preparation unit--G Series
D Production's series
F.R.L Combination: GC Series 134 Filter: GF Series 140 G Series(Metallic bowl type) 147
FR.L Combination: GFC Series 136 Regulator: GR Series 142 Soft start-up valve : GV Series 148 GSeries
Lubricator: GL Series 144 Safe on-off valve: GZ Series 149
•
Filter & Regulator: GFR Series 138
Reflux valve: GA315 Series 146 Air distribution block: GA Series 150
Installation and application A

1. Check whether the components have been damaged during transportation before installing and using.
2. Pay attention to whether the flow direction of air (notice "--+" direction) and thread type are correct.
3. Please notice whether installation condition accords with technical requirements (such as 'working pressure" and "applied
temperature range");
4. Avoid usage in an environment that exposes the filter and lubricator bowl through contact with Chlorine, solvent, aromatic
essence, acid and alkali to avoid damage to the Filter and Lubricator bowl.
5. Regularly clean or change filter core. Lubricators and regulators shall be in descending order.
6. Keep the dust away. The dust cover shall be installed in intake and outlet when the device is dismantled and stored.
•@I
Preparation unit--F.R.L. combination AlrTAC
GC Series
D Specification
Model GC200-06 GC200-08 GC300-08 GC300-10 GC300-15 GC400-10 GC400-15 GC600-20 GC600-25
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2' 3/8" I 1/2' 3/4" I 1'
Filtering grade 40µmor 5µ m
Pressure range Semi-auto and automatic drain:0.15-0.9MPa(20-130psi);Manual drain:0.05-0.9MPa(7-130psi)
Max. pressure 1.0MPa(145psi)
Temperature range -5-70'C
Capacity of drain bowl 10cc 40CC 80CC 230CC
Capacity of oil bowl 25CC 75CC 160CC 380CC
Recommended lubricant ISO VG 32 or equivalent
Weight 5809 13009 2360g 5550g
GC !filter GF200-06 IGF200-08 GF300-08 IGF300-10 IGF300-15 GF400-10 IGF400-15 GF600-20 IGF600-25
Constitute IRegulator GR200-06 IGR200-08 GR300-08 IGR300-10 IGR300-15 GR400-10 IGR400-15 GR600-20 IGR600-25
ILubricator GL200-06 I GL200-08 GL300-08 I GL300-10 I GL300-15 GL400-10 I GL400-15 GL600-20 I GL600-25
G) PTthread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
D Ordering code
Model Code of reflux valve (2)

GC200: G200 Series F.R.L unit Blank: No reverse flow valve is attached
D Symbol GC300: G300 Series F.R.L unit K: Reverse flow valve is attached
No reflux valve is attached Reflux valve is attached GC400: G400 Series F.R.L unit
.--,--T- . . . GC600: G600 Series F.R.L unit
~
I __ I_ -=.-~I__ J
Thread type
Blank: PT
Port size
Model Port size G:G
06: 1/8' T: NPT
D Product feature GC200
08: 1/4'
08: 1/4'
1. Oil dripping adopts gap seal structure, which makes GC300 10: 3/8' Filtering grade
the adjustment of oil supply more reliable. 15: 1/2' Blank: 40 µ m
10: 3/8' W:5µm
2. Oil feed ring can only make one full turn . The quantity GC400
15: 1/2'
of oil supply, basically taking on linear distribution.
20: 3/4"
The quantity of oil supply can be generally calculated GC600
25: 1"
according to the position of graduation ring .
3. Filling of oil while the lubricator is under pressure is
made possible. Drain type
4. Special drip nozzle structure will produce negative Drain t e Ada table reduct's series
pressure in oil dripping outlet and the mist flow is Blank: Semi-auto drain GC200, GC300 Pressure gauge shape
minimal. M: Manual drain GC400, GC600 F: S uare
5. Quick and reliable mounting clamps makes it A: Automatic drain GC300, GC400, GC600 C: Circular
convenient to install and use.
6. The performance of pressure adjustment is reliable Type code
with high precision. Blank: Standard
7. The efficiency of eliminating moisture and solid grain L: Lower ressure 1
is high. G) The maximum work pressureof lower pressure type is 0.4MPa(58psi). ® Please refer to page 146 for details of reflux valve.
8. Three drain types are available: manual drain, semi-
auto drain and automatic drain.
D Inner structure
Item No. Item

G series filter ® G series regulator
Bracket @ G series lubricator
•Ml
GC Series
Pressure and feature of flow D Dimensions

Applicable type: GC200
I I I I I
a> '' ''

I I I
'
i
~
c5
02
·
0 18
. 0
-r-n-lr
I I I
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

I I
i
I
:
I
:
I
L sha e bracket
Inlet pressure MPa

-----------------------------------------------------------
~ 0.22 : : : : : : : :
06:1 /8"
08:1/4"
~ : : : I ' I :S~t p~in
[ 0.2 ~i i-
-n=a::ti=t:!: Tt!:i!::i=~t:i GC
~ 0 18 0 'o.~ ' o.'4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Inlet pressure MPa
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
i
ls.
0.2
-(~ t Lsha e bracket
! 0 180 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

Inlet pressure MPa
-----------------------------------------------------------
p
8:. 0.22 ~~~~~~~~~~
::i: : : : : : : : : :
I I I I I I I I I
!! : : : 1 1 1 Set pqint
~ 0.2
!
ls.
Trl~
0·18 o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Inlet pressure MPa
Applicable type: GC200 Model\ltem A B BA C K KA KB p PA PB Q

Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa GC300-08 188 72 41.5 188 6.5 64 9 1/4" 35 143 1/8'
GC300-10 188 72 41.5 188 6.5 64 9 3/8" 35 143 1/8'
GC300-15 188 72 41.5 188 6.5 64 9 112· 35 143 1/8'
GC400-10 248 89 50 216 8.5 84 12 3/8" 40 166.5 1/4'
GC400-15 248 89 50 216 8.5 84 12 112· 40 166.5 1/4"
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000

Flow capacity L/min

Inlet pressure: 0.7MPa
0.6
"'
[]._
::,; 0.5 - - + - - + - - ---l - - --1 - - -1- - -
I I I I
'
I
-
: ;--~
--~---~--:--:
0.4 ' '
irs. 0.3 __ __
"'
0.2
0.1
0
__ __: ~--~--~---~--:--:
8 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Flow capacity L/min

8:.. ~:: r:=__=~.=-=-~+=--=O~-=-=C~-=--~~=-=_rC=-=-.c-=_:r:--i

~ 0.4
i 0.2 --t--+--i--~---t'--t--t--1-
Q)
Q.3 -- +- --+---1----1---1---1- --+--
--t---+--1--1---r--r--t -- :-
I
2- 0.1 --r---t---i--"1---r---r -- r --
~ 0
c5 0 1500 3000 4500 6000
Flow capacity L/min

Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa
0.6
"'
[]._
::,;
0.5 --"""- --1---1--i --t---i --t--i -- 1-
0.4 , I '
"'
~
~
0.3
00
0.2
ls. 0.1
"' 0
c5 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
Flow capacity L/min
Preparation unit--FR.L. combination AlrTAC
GFC Series
D Specification
ll'llll. 111!1 .-ri=i-JIJl!t1:•ri=imc:11Jl!l!:•ri;;;imc:1IJl!!!IIH•ri=iimc:1l l,....-.r1=i-• IIl!llll•ri=i_, tll 1ll!t'.ill•ri=i•1II-.._.
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2' 3/8" I 1/Z' 3/4" I 1'
Filterina arade 40µ mor5µ m
Pressure ranae Semi-auto and automatic drain:0.15-0.9MPaf20-130osi); Manual drain:0.05- 0.9MPaf7-130osil
Max. oressure 1.0MPaf145osi)
Proof oressure 1.5MPaf2 15psi)
Temperature range -5-?0'C
Capacity of drain bowl 10cc 40CC BOGG 230CC
Caoacitv of oil bowl 25CC 75CC 160CC 380CC
Recommended lubricant ISO VG 32 or eauivalent
Weiaht 430a 980a 1950a 4320a
IFilter- GFR200-06 IGFR200-08 GFR300-081GFR300-101GFR300-15 GFR400-101GFR400-15 GFR600-201GFR600-25
GFC Constitute Reaulator
ILubricator GL200-06 IGL200-08 GL300-08 IGL300-10 IGL300-1 5 GL400-10 IGL400-15 GL600-20 I GL600-25
D Ordering code
Model Code of reflux valve (2)

GFC200: G200 Series FR.L unit Blank: No reverse flow valve is
GFC300: G300 Series FR.L unit attached
GFC400: G400 Series FR.L unit K: Reverse flow valve is attached
GFC600: G600 Series FR.L unit
Thread type
Port size Blank: PT
Model Port size G: G
06: 1/8" T: NPT
GFC200
08: 1/4'
a Symbol 08: 1/4"
Filtering grade
GFC300 10: 3/8"
No reflux valve is attached Reflux valve is attached Blank: 40 µ m
1-----.-~ 15: 1/2"
10: 3/8" W: 5 µ m
~ I '
I_ - - ---'- I- _ JI
GFC400
15: 1/2"
20: 3/4"
GFC600
25: 1"
D Product feature
Drain type
1. Quick and reliable mounting clamps makes it Drain type Adaptable product's series
convenient to install and use. Blank: Semi-auto drain GFC200,GFC300 Pressure gauge shape
2. The performance of pressure adjustment is reliable M: Manual drain GFC400,GFC600 F: S uare
A: Automatic drain GFC300, GFC400, GFC600 C: Circu lar
with high precision.
3. The efficiency of eliminating moisture and solid
grain is high. Type code Pressure gauge
4. Three drain types are available: manual drain, Blank: Standard Blank: Pressure au e
L: Lower ressure 1 N: No ressure au e
semi-auto drain and automatic drain.
(j) The maximum work pressure of lower pressure type is 0.4MPa(58psi). (2) Please refer to page 146 for details of reflux valve.
Item G series filter-re ulator Bracket G series lubricator

Preparation unit--FR.L. combination AlfTAC
GFC Series
Pressure and feature offlow D Dimensions

Applicable type: GFC200
~ 0.22 : : '
I
~
0 ·2 -t-1-1--r-:-:
I I I I I I Tsha ebracket
c. I I I I I I
:gl 0· 18 o ' 0'2 ' 0'4 ' 0'0 0.8 1.0
{
6 Inlet press~re · MPa

"'
"-
::. 0.22
-t-r~~n
I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
I[ 0.2
06:1/8"
08:1/4"
GFC
~ 0.18 I I I I I I I I
0 0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Inlet pressure MPa
"'
a_ Applicable type: GFC400
::.; 0.22 ~--,---,---,--,--,--,--,-.,....,
I I I I
~ I I I I I I I I I
~"' _l_J_<j_:;t_~ ~ t
[ 0.
2
iiiiiiii: Tsha ebracket
~ o 18 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
0
Inlet pressure MPa
"' Applicable type: GFC600

~ 0. 22 .--,--,---,---,--,--,--,--,-.,...., I I I I I p
I I I I I I I I I
: : : 1 1 : &et point
Tn~
~ 0· 18 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Inlet pressure MPa
Q
Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa p
Model\ltem A B BA C D K KA KB PA Q
GFC300-08 124 72 41.5 225.5 M40x1.5 6.5 70 9 1/4" 143 1/8'
GFC300-10 124 72 41.5 225.5 M40x1.5 6.5 70 9 3/8" 143 1/8'
GFC300-15 124 72 41.5 225.5 M40x1.5 6.5 70 9 1/2" 143 1/8'
GFC400-10 164 89 50 270.5 M55x2.0 8.5 80 12 3/8" 166.5 1/4'
GFC400-15 164 89 50 270.5 M55x2.0 8.5 80 12 1/2" 166.5 1/4'

"' 0.6 M68 x 1.5
~ 0.5 Tsha
+ 4
" ~ e ' '
:-
'
I
" 0.2
0.4
o.3 -- T'
r
" "
t 1' '
'
' ''
·, ·,'
'
'
~
'
'r
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
T""'
,~
C. 0.1 , ~
'r ' '
'
'
'
'- " '' ' "' ~
~ 0 0 1000 2000
' '
3000
'
4000
'
0
Flow capacity L/min

"' 0.6 s:::=i==f::::;==:;=:::;::=::::=c:=::c=J
~ 0.5 I + 4 ~ -1 ~ i i -~
- _i+---_,7,°_-_--:4-- - -T:_-_-_,
a> 0.4 r-_ _f-f-_-_+r-- - T~_-_-i-
,--_J
~~ D.3L.._j'---"±-::~i-="*' :-c:iit--~,,,:,,=i-,.J
0.2 -t ·1 -1· ·1 ·1 ·1 ·1
_e- Q0.1 I...'.::j"= 'c ::f,= ,±=±=±
~
i:...T
L_'_J_i_j
6 0 1500 3000 4500 6000
Flow capacity L/min

8:. 0.6 FJ=:::;=:;:::::=:::=:;:::::::::::::r:=i
~ 0.5 --~- ~--~--: -- j --j - j --·t - i - =-
1~:~ =r:==:==:==:==:=:==:===;=:..
[ Q.2 L _J .l .l t- ~ ~ ~ I ~
Q) 0.1 ~ - ~ - ~ -- ~-- ~ -- r --r - ---,-- i - ~
8 ° 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000

Flow capacity L/min
•it•
Preparation unit--Filter &regulator AlrTAC
GFR Series
D Specification
Model GFR200-06 GFR200-08 GFR300-08 GFR300-10 GFR300-1 5 GFR400-10 GFR400-15 GFR600-20 GFR600-25
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' I 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/8" I 1/2' I 3/4" I 1'
Filtering grade 40µmor5µm
Temperature range -5-70"C
Capacity of drain bowl 10cc I 40CC I 80CC I 230CC
Weioht 220Q I 500Q I 1030Q I 2400Q
GFR
Model
GFR200: G200 Series filter-re ulator Blank: No reverse flow valve is
GFR300: G300 Series filter-re ulator attached
GFR400: G400 Series filter-re ulator K: Reverse flow valve is
attached
GFR600: G600 Series filter-re ulator
Thread type
Blank: PT
Port size
G:G
Model Port size
T: NPT
06: 1/8"
GFR200
08: 1/4" FIitering grade
a Symbol 08: 1/4" Blank: 40 µ m
No reflux valve is attached Reflux valve is attached GFR300 10: 3/8"
W: 5µm
~.:.-.ii~: 15: 1/2"
~
10: 3/8"
GFR400
15: 1/2"
~_ _ _ _ _ .J
I
I
I _::, I
I 20: 3/4"
GFR600
L...-----....1
25: 1"
D Product feature
Drain type Pressure gauge shape
1. Embedded square pressure gauge is used to save Drain tvoe Adaotable oroduct's series F: S uare
installation space. (External circular pressure gauge Blank: Semi-auto drain GFR200, GFR300 C: Circular
is also optional). M: Manual drain GFR400, GFR600
2. The pressed-in self-locking mechanism can prevent A: Automatic drain GFR300, GFR400, GFR600
Pressure gauge
the abnormal movement of the set pressure caused Blank: Pressure au e
by external interfere. Type code N: No ressure au e
3. Balanced design is adopted for the pressure Blank: Standard
adjustment mechanism. L: Lower ressure 1 Accessories
4. In addition to standard type, lower pressure type is Blank: Bracket
optional (The highest adjustable pressure is 0.4MPa). J: No bracket
5. Unique diversion structure spins the air flowing G) The maximum work pressure of lower pressure type is 0.4MPa(58psi). (2) Please refer to page 146 for details of reflux valve.
through to effectively sparate the liquid from the air
and reliabily filter the solid grain.
D Inner structure and material of major parts
6. The filtering grade includes 5 µ m and 40 µ m
• II
(optional). No. Item Material
7. Three drain types are available: manual drain, semi- 1 Drain bowl Aluminum alloy(GFR600)\PC(others)
2 Umbrella baffle Hioh viscosity POM
auto drain and automatic drain.
GFR600 IAgglomerated by brass grain
8. The bracket can be selected for installation. 3 Filter core th 140 µ m IAoolomerated bv brass orain
12 0 ersl5 µ m IMakrolon fiber
4 Airouider Hioh viscosity POM
5 0-rina NBR
6 Bodv of filter-reaulator Aluminum alloy
7 AdiustinQ spool Brass (GFR600)\POM(others)
8 0-rina NBR
9 Diaphraqm SUS304 & Rubber
18 Aluminum alloy(GFR600)\POM(others)
10 Fixation rina cao
20 11 AdiustinQ spindle Steel
12 Reaulator nut Steel
21 13 Pressure knob POM
22
14 Serina swc
15 AdiustinQ seat Aluminum alloy(GFR600)\POM(others)
16 Feedback tube POM
17 Adiustino pluo Brass & Rubber
Semi-Auto drain Semi-Auto drain 18 0-rina NBR
19 Sprino SUS304
20 Liauid meter cover SPCC
21 Liquid meter seal VITON
22 Liauid meter inside PC
•M=I
GFR Series
Pressure and feature of flow D Selection of drain mode

Applicable type: GFR200 GFR200 GFR300\GFR400\GFR600
~ 0.22 ~ :---r:~~~~~---r~ Manual drain : Semi-auto drain Manual drain : Semi-auto drain : Automatic drain
' ' '
-------------------~--------------------- --------------------------+--------------------------~----------------------------
~
== 0.2
Q)
5_
-:-:--r-:-:-:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Q) 0.18 I I I I I I
's O 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

o Inlet pressure MPa
Applicable type: GFR300

"'
o._
::!E 0.22 I I I I
-(-fnfmff~rt
I I I I I I I I I
i1s. 0.2
~,.- GFR
~ 0.18 0 I I I I I GFR400,GFR600:1/4
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
0 Inlet pressure MPa
PU tube with an inner diameter of Cll 5 or
"' Applicable type: GFR400 Cll5.5mm is recommended
~ 0.22 : : : : : : : : :
~ _i_J_g_j:_~~n
~ 0 ·2 : : : : : : I I I
~ : : : : : : : : :
D Dimensions
i 0· 18 o 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

"'
~ 0.22 ~---r~~~~~---r~
I I I I I I I I I
~ i i i : : i $etipolnt Bracket M68x1 .5

~ 0.2
Q)
ci. Tn~ (Optional}
£1°· 18 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

20:3/4'
Applicable type: GFR200 25:1 '
~ 0.6 ~ - - - - ~ - - - - -
::; 0.5
0.4
~ 0.3
"'
Q)
0.2
a. 0.1
~ O L0--==50:t0=1o"'o""
o=15.i..
00_2_;00-0-25.i..OO_____::i3000
° Flow capacity L/min

Model\ltem A AB AC B BA BC C D
GFR300-08 60 53 38 72 41 31 225.5 M40x1 .5
GFR300-10 60 53 38 72 41 31 225.5 M40x1 .5
GFR300-15 60 53 38 72 41 31 225.5 M40x1 .5
GFR400-10 80 72 52 90 50 40 270.5 M55x2.0
GFR400-15 80 72 52 90 50 40 270.5 M55x2.0
1000 2000 3000 4000 p
Model\ltem K KA KB KC PA Q
Flow capacity L/min
GFR300-08 6.5 40 8 46 1/4" 143 1/8'
GFR300-10 6.5 40 8 46 3/8" 143 1/8'
GFR300-15 6.5 40 8 46 1/2" 143 1/8'
Inlet pressure: 0.7MPa GFR400-10 8.5 52 11 53 3/8 166.5 1/4'
~ o.6 =F'.::~RR=:J=:J=:;:J GFR400-15 8.5 52 11 53 1/2" 166.5 1/4'
~ 0.5 I i i -~
0.4 r-_
-_ij----1t---_,T,_--~-:- --_t-f-_-_+T-__--iT---- ,-i-_-_J
~ 0.3 t- -t i i i i i i
~ 0.2 t -t -1· -1 -1 -r· T ·1
o.. 0.1 K: ' • ' -, i i i i
]; 0
;; 0 1500 3000 4500 6000 Regulating way
° Flow capacity L/min
The use of GFR series regulators is the same as the SDR series, please refer to Page 164 for details.
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000

Flow capacity L/min
Preparation unit--Filter AlrTAC
GF Series
D Specification
Model GF200-06 GF200-08 GF300-08 GF300-10 GF300-15 GF400-10 GF400-1 5 GF600-20 GF600-25
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' I 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/8" I 1/2' I 3/4" I 1'
Filtering grade 40 µ m orsµ m
Temperature range -5-?0"C
Capacity of drain bowl 10cc I 40CC I 80cc I 230CC
Weirht 135g I 360g I 680g I 1440g
CD PTthread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
GF Ordering code
G F200 08 M D W D
Model Thread type

GF200: G200 Series Filter Blank: PT
GF300: G300 Series Filter G:G
GF400: G400 Series Filter T: NPT
GF600: G600 Series Filter
Filtering grade
D Symbol Port size Blank: 40 µ m
Model Port size W: Sµm
06: 1/8"
GF200
08: 1/4"
08: 1/4" Accessories
GF300 10 3/8" Blank: Bracket
15: 1/2" J: No bracket standard confi uration
D Product feature 10: 3/8"
GF400
15: 1/2"
1. Unique diversion structure spins the air flowing 20: 3/4" Drain type
through to effectively separate the liquid from the air GF600
25: 1" Drain type Addable product's series
and reliably filter the solid grain. Blank: Semi-auto drain GF200, GF300
2. It has low pressure loss, high efficiency in M: Manual drain GF400, GF600
separating water and large drain bowl capacity. A: Automatic drain GF300, GF400, GF600
3. Filtering grade includes 5 µ m and 40 µ m (Optional).
4. Three drain types are available: manual drain, D Inner structure and Material of major parts
semi-auto drain and automatic drain.
5. The bracket can be selected for installation.
Semi-Auto drain Semi-Auto drain

No. Item Material
1 Body Aluminum alloy
2 0-rina NBR
3 Airauide Hiah viscosity POM
GF600 IAQQlomerated by bronze Qrain
4 Filter core
Others [40 µ m: Agglomerated by bronze grain\5 µ m: Makrolon fiber
5 Umbrella baffle Hiah viscosity POM
6 Drain bowl Aluminum alloy(GF600)\PC(Others)
7 Liquid meter cover SPCC
8 Liauid meter seal VITON
9 Liquid meter inside cover PC
GF Series

Applicable type: GF200
~ 0.6 r-~=c="!==l=::r:::,----i
:. 0.5 r-=;-a==..:.::.::.:t.::_
i 0.4 ,-:--;._._;.__;_
;; 0.3 r--~=-=:.::
5. 0.2 ·-===
~ 0.1 t-4"=:=c::.::.:.::
0 0
1000 2000 3000
Flow capacity L/min
Applicable type : GF300

"' 0.6
c.. GF
:.
0.5
I 0.4
[ 0.3
-.; 0.2
.c 0.1
0 0
o 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 lmll•~·E~·
m,~· -- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------
Flow capacity L/min B

BA
Applicable type: GF400 Bracket
(Optional)
~ o.6 n=;=;==r==i=:::::::r::r=n---i
:. 0.5 r,-,--;--,---+--4-....!__
~ 0.4 ,;-=;=.,=.=::..::.::~..::.,
~ 0.3 r:=:ccc+cc:;:.~~
5. 0.2 r:=-=~::i..::.2 p
2 01
8 ci O 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500 0
Flow capacity L/min
Applicable type:GF600
Modellltem A B BA C CA K KA KB KC p PA Q
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000
GF300-08 60 67.5 41 182 164 6.5 40 8 27 1/4' 143 1/8"
Flow capacity L/min
GF300-10 60 67.5 41 182 164 6.5 40 8 27 3/8' 143 1/8"
GF300-15 60 67.5 41 182 164 6.5 40 8 27 1/2' 143 1/8"
GF400-10 80 85.5 50 208 191 .5 8.5 55 11 33.5 3/8' 166.5 1/4"
Selection of drain mode GF400-15 80 85.5 50 208 191 .5 8.5 55 11 33.5 1/2' 166.5 1/4"
GF series drain mode is the same as the GFR series,
please refer to the specific P139.
0
co
"'
"'
N
N
DD
•II•
Preparation unit--Regulator AlrTAC
GR Series
D Specification
Model GR200-06 GR200-08 GR300-08 GR300-10 GR300-15 GR400-10 GR400-15 GR600-20 GR600-25
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4" I 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/8" I 1/2' I 3/4" I 1"
Temperature range -20-70' C
Weight 160g I 350g I 720g I 1700g
GR
Model Code of reflux valve
GR200: G200 Series Reaulator Blank: No Reverse flow valve is attached
GR300: G300 Series Reaulator K: Reverse flow valve is attached
Symbol GR400: G400 Series Regulator
No Reverse Flow valve is attached Reverse Flow valve is attached GR600: G600 Series Reoulator
Thread type
Blank: PT
Port size G: G
Model Port size T: NPT
06: 1/8"
GR200
D Product feature 08: 1/4"
08: 1/4"
1. Embedded square pressure gauge is used to save
GR300 10: 3/8"
installation space. (External circular pressure gauge 15: 1/2"
is also optional). 10: 3/8"
GR400
2. The pressed-in self-locking mechanism can prevent 15: 1/2"
the abnormal movement of the set pressure caused 20: 3/4" Pressure gauge shape
GR600
by external interfere. 25: 1" F: S uare
C: Circular
3. Balanced design is adopted for the pressure
adjustment mechanism.
4. In addition to panel installation, the bracket is Type code Pressure gauge
Blank: Standard Blank: Pressure au e
optional for installation.
L: Lower ressure 1 N: No ressure au e
5. In addition to standard type, lower pressure type is
optional (the highest adjustable pressure is 0.4MPa).
Accessories
Blank: Bracket
J: No bracket standard confi uration
G) The maximum work pressure of lower pressure type is 0.4MPa(58psi). ® Please refer to page 146 for details of reflux valve.
D Inner structure and Material of major parts
No. Item Material No. Item Material

1 Valve cap Aluminum alloy 9 Regulator nut Steel
2 0-rina NBR 10 Pressure knob POM
3 Body Aluminum alloy 11 Pressure spring swc
4 Spool Brass(GR600)\ POM (others) 12 Adjusting seat Aluminum alloy(GR600)\ POM(others)
5 0-ring NBR 13 Feed back tuble POM
6 Diaphraam SUS304 &Rubber 14 Pressure plua Brass & steel
7 Fixed ring Aluminum alloy(GR600)\POM (others) 15 0-ring NBR
8 Adiustina spindle Steel 16 Sorina Stainless steel
_J
GR Series
Pressure and feature of flow D Dimensions

Applicable type: GR200
8'_ 0.22 ~~~~~~~~~~
:::.
l 02
~
~
6
0· 18 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Inlet pressure MPa

Bracket
~ 1n1nr~ M3_bx_1_.5_
"'
o._
0.22
"' ''' ''' ''' ''
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i[ 0.2
-r-11 f f r :: :
' ' I
I
: ~in
GR
~ 0.180 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
-(~ t
I I I I I I I I I
10.2
;g1
6
~ 0.22
~
t0.2
0.180
Trl~
0.4
Inlet pressure
0.2
-----------------------------------------------------------
: : : : : : : : :
i i i : : : Se( ptjint
0.6 0.8 1.0
MPa
Bracket rim I D
~ 0·18 o
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Inlet pressure MPa

f ~6 I ,
~ 0.5 ___ i ___ i ___ I --- I -
It~ ===~===~===~) :__;

a, 0.1 ---, ---i --- i --
Modellltem
GR300-08
GR300-10
A
60
60
AB
53
53
AC
38
38
B
72
72
BA
41
41
BC
31
31
C
112.5
112.5
D
M40x1 .5
M40x1 .5
K
6.5
6.5
KA
40
40
KB
8
8
KC
46
46
p
1/4"
3/8"
8 °0
GR300-15 60 53 38 72 41 31 112.5 M40x1.5 6.5 40 8 46 1/2"
1000 2000 3000 GR400-10 80 72 52 90 50 40 140.5 M55x2.0 8.5 55 11 53 3/8"
Flow capacity L/min GR400-15 72 52 40 140.5 M55x2.0 8.5 11 1/2"
80 90 50 55 53
0.6 An
"'
o._
::;; 66
0.5
0.4 ¢64 118
I 0.3
a. 0.2
a,
70
.;; 0.1 13 i
'5 0
0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Flow capacity L/min J-t
t I
i
+ -
Iii
:'.\. ~
Bracket
(Optional) M68x 1.5
Applicable type: GR400 .,a ..,. "'
i
It
~
.....
"' -
;;;
r~ o0.5.6 F=r==r==;:=;=;=:::::r:::+:J,:::J
e?
I- i i i
---l
0.4 --:---:--1---t--t-
-.-l -4
t- - I __I__ _
+
t
I ·-
·-m1-· - - ,_
~ o.3 --r---t---t--i---:---r--i --i --i -- ~

e? 0.2 -l --: --:-· ·1 · "j" "j" I hlFlll'!'Tllf'lln
i" 0.1 L:::±r::::l
,::::l'±:::::!'= T
±' :d i= ':. .1_J_i_Ji_ J
I
8 ° 0Flow1500
99
3000 4500 6000 7500
capacity L/min

Inlet pressure: 0.7MPa D Regulating way
"'
o._
:::;; 0.6 The use of GR series regulators is the same as the SDR series, please refer to Page 164 for details.
a,
0.5 r T
i
0.4
~ 0.3
a a
-~
[ 0.2 L L
·1 ·1 ' ~
: -t' --t '' '
~
0.1
00
·t- ·t
T"t
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000
Flow capacity L/min
•IBI
Preparation unit--Lubricator AlrTAI:
GL Series
Specification
Model GL200-06 GL200-08 GL300-08 GL300-10 GL300-15 GL400-10 GL400-15 GL600-20 GL600-25
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' I 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/4" I 1'
Temperature range -5- 70'C
Capacity of oil bowl 25CC I 75CC I 160CC I 380CC
Weight 130g I 360g I 670g I 1300g
GL Ordering code
GL200 08 D D
GL200
Model
G200 Series Lubricator
l Thread type
Blank: PT
GL300 G300 Series Lubricator G:G
GL400 G400 Series Lubricator T: NPT
GL600 G600 Series Lubricator
D Symbol
Port size Accessories
V Model
GL200
Port size
06: 1/8"
08: 1/4"
Blank: Bracket
J: No bracket standard confi uration
08: 1/4"
D Product feature GL300 10: 3/8"
15: 1/2"
1. The structure of oil dripping adopts gap seal type, 10: 3/8"
GL400
which makes the adjustment of oil supply more 15: 1/2"
20: 3/4"
reliable. GL600
25: 1"
2. Oil feed ring can only make one full turn.The
quantity of oil supply basically takes on linear
distribution. The quantity of oil supply can be
generally calculated according to the position of Inner structure and Material of major parts
graduation ring .
3. Special drip nozzle structure will produce negative No. Item Material
pressure in oil dripping outlet and the mist flow is Aluminum alloy
Oil bowl
(GL600)\PC(others)
minimal.
2 Adjusting spring Stainless steel
4. Filling of oil while the lubricator is under pressure is
0-ring NBR
made possible, and the oil bowl is large; 11 12 4 Body of lubricator Aluminum alloy
5. The bracket can be selected for installation.
5 Steel ball Stainless steel
6 Distance block TPU
7 0-ring NBR
8 0-ring NBR
Indicating ring POM
10 Drip pipe PC
11 Ejector pin Brass
13 Adjusting ring POM
14 0-ring NBR
15 Bowl PC
16 Sprayer body PA66
17 0-ring NBR
18 0-ring NBR
19 Sprayer bottom cap POM
20 Liquid meter cover SPCC
21 Liquid meter seal NBR
22 Liquid meter inside cover PC
•Ill
Preparation unit--Lubricator AlrTAC
GL Series

Applicable type:GL200
1000 2000 3000

Flow capacity L/min
GL
47 40
Flow capacity L/min
GL300/GL400
, =f=;==;==r::I=1,:=J,::J
8!. 0·6 1FFF
~ 0.5 1F,' f
, "'FL:.:"Fc~::=:::J~::.:Js,~t-=- Bracket (Optional)
m o.4 , F+FFFF-=~
~1~i~i=-r·F No bracket is
~ Q.3 1;=-'f ' ~:_:~
' cc·pr::_:,f psqr:.=_Ji=.I_i
- a standard configuration
[ 0.2 I I ~ ~ L : -t r- -~ :
~ 0.1 1 :=+;-=;:.:
" :.:";.:..:.:::.::.::"k.C~L~--t=:'
0 0
0 1500 3000 4500 6000 7500
Flow capacity L/min
p
0.6
0.5
"'
Q.
:::;
0.4
0.3
I 0.2
[ 0.1
" 00 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 12000 A
0
Flow capacity L/min
Modell ltem A B BA BC C K KA KB KC p PA
GL300-08 60 68 41 53.5 169 6.5 40 8 27 1/4" 125
GL300- 10 60 68 41 53.5 169 6.5 40 8 27 318" 125
GL300-15 60 68 41 53.5 169 6.5 40 8 27 112" 125
GL400-10 80 85.5 50 71 190 8.5 55 11 33.5 318" 142
GL400-15 80 85.5 50 71 190 8.5 55 11 33.5 112" 142
70
Bracket
(Optional)
""
"'
N
..."'
en
I99
89
Preparation unit--Reverse Flow valve AlrTAC
GA315 Series
D Working principle
GA315
Normally, as the pressure of intake (IN) is higher than the set value (pressure of outlet), the reverse flow valve closes; if the
pressure of intake (IN) is cut off and starts exhaust, reverse flow valve opens. The pressure of diaphragm chamber is
exhausted from IN orifice. At this moment, the pressure of diaphragm chamber decreases and the diaphragm is pressed down
by the force from adjusting spring to open valve. The pressure from outlet is exhausted from IN port.
D Product feature
1. This reverse flow valve can be used with G series D Inner structure
regulator and also can be ordered individually.
2
2. When it is used with G series regulator, one only
3
needs to change the seal board in the back of
regulator for the reverse flow valve. It is convenient to
install and won't change the external dimension of
regulator. No. Item Material
1 Plua Brass
2 Screw Steel
Applicable products 3 Reverse flow valve's body POM
4 SprinQ SUS304
Reflux valve type Applicable products 's type 5 Gasket NBR
GC200, 300,400,600 6 0-rina NBR
GA315 GFC200, 300,400,600 7 Steel ball SUS304
GFR200, 300,400,600 8 Reflux valve's crust Aluminumallov
GR200, 300,400,600
D Ordering code
When G series regulator is assembled with the reverse flow valve, the valve can be ordered together with the standard product.
What needs to do is to add "-K" to the end of the ordering code of the standard product. Please refer to relevant content for more
detailed order method.
Example for assemble the reflux valve

Take GR300 for example,it is in the same
way to use products of other series.
Cl)
::,
"'
Connectin screw
Take out the back seal board of pressure gauge of GR300 product
and press reverse flow valve GA315 into the position where original
seal board stays upon the direction that is showed and then tighten
the connectin screw.
GA315 reverse flow valve

Preparation unit--Metallic bowl AlrTAC
GCOC, GFCOC, GFROC, GFOC, GLOC Series
D Ordering code
Model
GC200C: G200 Series F.R.L unit Metallic bowl
GC300C: G300 Series F.R.L unit Metallic bowl valve is attached
GC400C G400 Series F.R.L unit Metallic bowl K: Reverse flow valve
is attached
Metallic
Thread type bowl
GFR200C: G200 Series filter-re ulator Metallic bowl Blank: PT
GFR300C: G300 Series filter-re ulator Metallic bowl G: G
GFR400C: G400 Series filter-re ulator Metallic bowl T: NPT
Filtering grade
Port size Blank: 40 µ m
Model Port size W: 5µ m
GC200C 06: 1/8"
GFC200C, GFR200C 08: 1/4"
08: 1/4"
GC300C
10: 3/8"
GFC300C, GFR300C
15: 1/2"
GC400C 10: 3/8"
GFC400C, GFR400C 15: 1/2" Pressure gauge shape
F: S uare
Product feature Drain type C: Circular
Drain type Adaptable product's series
Pressure gauge
1. The metallic bowl type is upgraded G series. Besides Blank: Semi-auto drain GC200C, GC300C, GC400C
Blank: Pressure au e
its speciality are the same as G series, it's below GFC200C, GFC300C,GFC400C
M: Manual drain GFR200C, GFR300C,GFR400C N: No ressure au e
speciality:
2. The bowl is made of metal. It is radiation-proof, GC300C, GC400C, GFC300C Accessories
A: Automatic drain
GFC400C,GFR300C, GFR400C
excellent aging characteristic, and which allows for Product's series Accessories
outdoor application. Type code Blank: Bracket
Blank: Standard GFR200C-400C J: No bracket
3. Metal bowls are suitable for applications requiring
L: Lower ressure 1 (standard configuration)
higher pressure or ru gged environment.
Other series Not code
4. Fuss free installation for most applications.
G) The maximum work pressure of lower pressure type is 0.4MPa(58psi). (2) Please refer to page 144 for details of reflux valve.
The corresponding table of Metallic bowl

type with standard type
GF200C: G200 Series Filter Metallic bowl
Metallic bowl type Corresponding standard type GF300C: G300 Series Filter Metallic bowl
GC200C, 300C, 400C GC200, 300,400 GF400C: G400 Series Filter Metallic bowl
GFC200C, 300C, 400C GFC200, 300, 400
GFR200C, 300C, 400C GFR200, 300, 400 Filtering grade
Port size
GF200C, 300C, 400C GF200, 300, 400 Blank:40 µ m
Model Port size
GL200C, 300C, 400C GL200, 300,400 W:5 µm
06: 1/8"
GF200C
08: 1/4"
Note) Accessories
08: 1/4"
The style, pressure chart, flow chart, Inner structure, GF300C 10: 3/8" Blank: Bracket
dimension etc, are the same as standard type. Please refer 15: 1/2" J: No bracket standard confi uration
to relevant content for details. 10: 3/8"
GF400C Drain type
15: 1/2"
Drain tvoe Addable prod uct's series
Blank: Semi-auto drain GF200C, GF300C
M: Manual drain GF400C
A: Automatic drain GF300C, GF400C
Model
GL200C: G200 Series Lubricator Metallic bowl

Model Port size Blank: Bracket
06: 1/8' J: No bracket standard confi uration
GL200C
08: 1/4"
08: 1/4"
GL300C 10: 3/8"
15: 1/2"
10: 3/8"
GL400C
15: 1/2"
•If•
Preparation unit--Accessories AlrTAC
GV Series soft-start valve
D Specification
Model GV200-06 GV200-08 GV300-08 GV300-10 GV300-15 GV400-10 GV400-15
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' I 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/8" I 1/2'
Acting type Solenoid control
Exhaust port size 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2"
Power connection Terminal. Grommet
Standard voltaae AC220V, 11 OV, 24V(50\60Hz); DC12V,24V
Voltaae ranae -15%-+10%
Insulation Class B
GV Power consumption AC: 3.5VA ; DC: 2.5W
Option pressure gauge F: Square pressure gauge; C: Circular pressure gauge
Suitable F.R.L type GC200-06 I GC200-08 I GC300-08 I GC300-10 I GC300-15 I GC400-10 I GC400-15
(j) PTthread, G thread and NPTthread are available .
D Ordering code
D Symbol
r - - - - - - - - - - -1
I I
I I GV200: 200 Series soft start-up valve
I I
GV300: 300 Series soft start-up valve
op : IA
I GV400: 400 Series soft start-up valve
I
I Port size Electrical entry
I
I Model Port size Blank: Terminal
I
06: 1/8" I: Grommet
200 Series
R 08: 1/4"
08: 1/4" Voltage
300 Series 10: 3/8" A: AC220V(50/60Hz
Product feature
15: 1/2" B: DC24V
Soft start-up valve is used to input compressed air into 10: 3/8" C: AC1 1OV(50/60Hz)
400 Series
pneumatic system slowly and has the effect of safety and 15: 1/2" E: AC24V(50/60Hz)
protection. Air intake is connected with the input P of Soft F: DC12V
Accessories
start-up valve. If coil is energized, the 3/2 way valve Blank: Bracket
opens. At this time, a little air comes to output A through J: No bracket standard confi uration
throttle valve, which increases the pressure of the system Pressure gauge shape
Pressure gauge F: Square
gradually; when the output pressure is equal the half of
Blank: Pressure gauge C: Circular
the input pressure, Soft start-upvalve completely opens
N: No pressure gauge
and the flow at this time reaches the highest value of itself.
Note: When it is used with F.R.L. combination, extra mounting bracket is need. Please refer to P150 for order detail.
When the coil is de-energized, air intake P closes, the air
returns to R orifice through reflux valve and is quickly Inner structure
exhausted. The pressure of the system falls to zero, which
protects the whole system. No. Item No. Item No. Item
1 Bottom cover 13 Gasket 25 Spring
2 Gasket 14 Gasket 26 Manual override
3 Spool 15 Pilot kit 27 Fixed screw
4 Body 16 sprina 28 Sprina
5 0-ring 17 Fixed lpate 29 Valve spool
6 0-ring 18 Coil set 30 0-ring
D Attention
7 Sorina 19 Nut 31 Valve spool
8 Inlet piston 20 Connector 32 0-ring
Manually adjust the"+"
9 Piston gasket 21 Spring 33 0-ring
and ' -"throttle screw at 10 0-rina 22 0 -rina 34 Inlet plua
the bottom of the soft 11 Snap rina 23 Manual override block
start-up valve as per 12 Gasket 24 0-ring
the requirement of
start speed. It shall go
slowly, other wise D Dimensions
sudden acting of the
A
product or system KA
~ ltem\Model
GV200 GV300 GV400
~ I 06 I 08 08 I 10 I 15 10 I 15
shall be caused with a =- g A 80 95 120
'
heavy impact. g ~
15._ .2:- AB 59 74 90
Q. "E
B 57 62.2 80
~ -g I BA 24.5 31.5 40.5
~~
(.)
-· ir 0..
N
C
K
123.5
5.5
131
6.5
142.5
8.5
'"
~
~ KA 67 82 102
KB 8 8 11
KC 30.5 34.5 39
g:_ p 1/8'11/4' 1/4"13/8"11/2" 3/8"11/2'
PA 30 34 40.5
Y=r-AB A Q 1/4' 3/8" 1/2'
~
Preparation unit--Accessories AirTAC
GZ Series safe on-off valve
D Specification
Model GZ200-06 GZ200-08 GZ300-08 GZ300-1 0 GZ300-15 GZ400-10 GZ400-15
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' I 1/4" I 3/8' I 1/2" I 3/8" I 1/2'
Exhaust port size 1/4" I 3/8' I 1/2"
Acting type Manual
Valve type 3 port 2way
Pressure range 0-0.9MPa(0-130psi)
Temperature range -20-70' C
Operation angle 90'
Suitable F.R.L type GC200-06 I GC200-08 I GC300-08 I GC300-10 I GC300-15 I GC400- 10 I GC400-15
CD PT thread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
GZ
D Ordering code
Model Thread type

Symbol GZ200: 200 Series soft on-off valve Blank: PT
~
PR
GZ300: 300 Series soft on-off valve
GZ400: 400 Series soft on-off valve
T: NPT
G: G

Model Port size Blank: Bracket
Product feature 06: 1/8" J: No bracket standard confi uration
200 Series
1. It is module design and can be used with G series 08: 1/4"
F.R.L. combination by bracket. 08: 1/4'
300 Series 10: 3/8"
2. This valve can be used as manual 3/2 way valve.
15: 1/2'
3. Visual indication marked EXH/SUP. 10: 3/8"
4. This valve meets the 400 Series
During Maintenance 15: 1/2"
standard on installation Note: When it is used with F.R.L. combination, extra mounting bracket needed. Please refer to P150 for order detail.
conducted by operator CKnob
Inner structure
~
specified by OSHA
(Occupational Safety &
Health Administration). When
the machinery is maintained 7
and serviced, the purge valve
No. Item No. Item
(Safe on-off valve) for t Exhaust 1 Valve cap 8 0-ring
remaining pressure shall be 2 Bodv 9 Cover
used to eliminate the remaining pressure when the 3 Screw 10 Spool
air source is cut off. Valve must be locked to prevent 4 Operating screw 11 Plug
accidental operation by a third party during 14 5 Adjusting screw 12 Spring
6 Special screw 13 0-ring
maintenance. This prevents accidental system
7 Fixina Plate 14 Cover
pressurization & cylinder actuation which can result
in injuries to the machine operator.
Dimensions
GZ200 GZ300 GZ400

ltem\Model
06 I 08 OB I 10 I 15 10 I 15
A 47 60 75
AB 42 55 65
B 52.6 70.7 83.9
BA 30 41 50
BC 40 53.5 64
BD 42.5 56.5 66
C 89 112.5 134
K 5.5 6.5 8.5
KA 27 40 55
KB 8.5 8 11
KC 23 27 33.5
p 1/81 1/4' 1/4"13/8"11/2" 3/8, 1/2'
PA 36.5 46 58.5
Q 1/4' 3/8" 1/2'
GA series of gas-distribution block
D Specification
Model GA200-06 GA200-08 GA300-08 GA300-10 GA400-10 GA400-15 GA600-20 GA600-25
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4' I 1/4" I 3/8' I 3/8" I 1/2' I 3/4" I 1'
Wav number Four
Pressure ranoe o-o 9MPa(0-130psi)
D Ordering code
GA Product feature
Model
1. It is installed between G series regulator(orfilter &
GA200: 200 Series gas-distribution block
regulator) and G series Lubricator. The airflow is
divided by the device that one enters Lubricator to suppl
oil for lubrication and the other (the second way)
GA600: 600 Series gas-distribution block Port size
directly enters the equipment.
Model Port size
2. Several kinds of bracket can be selected to connect
06: 1/8"
regulator and lubricator. Optional brackets are type T, 200 Series
08: 1/4"
type Land type U. 08: 1/4"
300 Series
10: 3/8"
10: 3/8"
400 Series
D Inner structure 15: 1/2"
20: 3/4"
600 Series
To distribution joint 25: 1"
Note: When it is used with F.R.L. combination, extra mounting bracket is need. Please refer to below for order detail.
From regulator To lubricator
outlet port inlet port
D Dimensions
4-P ,
:, ·1··· Mod ell Item A B C p
06 28.5 36 30 1/8"
:]'tF:
GA200
To distribution joint 08 28.5 36 30 1/4'
08 35 44 38 1/4'
GA300
10 35 44 38 3/8'
10 42 52 52 3/8"
GA400
I. ir-cn .I
15 42 52 52 1/2'
20 60 76 68 3/4'
GA600
25 60 76 68 1"
C
Joint accessories--Bracket
D How to select the bracket

Bracket name Code Photo Adapt accessories model
GA200T- P1 GV200 GZ200 GA200
GA300T-P1 GV300 GZ300 GA300
T shape bracket
GA400T-P1 GV400 GZ400 GA400
GA600T-P1 GA600
GA200L- P1 GV200 GZ200 GA200
GA300L- P1 GV300 GZ300 GA300
L shape bracket
GA400L- P1 GV300 GZ400 GA400
GA600L-P1 GA600
GA200U-P1 GV200 GZ200 GA200
GA300U-P1 GV300 GZ300 GA300
U shape bracket
GA400U-P1 GV400 GZ400 GA400
GA600U-P1 GA600
D How to use the bracket

Use to joint GV and GC series
Preparation unit--A, B Series
D Production's series
F.R.L Combination: AC, BC Series 152 FR.L Combination: AFC, BFC Series 154 Filter & Regulator: AFR, BFR Series 156
ASeries
BSeries
Filter: AF, BF Series 158 Regulator: AR, BR Series 159 Lubricator: AL, BL Series 161
Regulator: SR Series 162 Regulator: SDR Series 163 Drip leg drain:ADW Series 165
Pressure gauge: GS, GF, GU Series 166 DPS Series Digital Display Pressure Swilch 167 DPC Series No Display Pressure Switch 170
a Installation and application A

1. Check whether the components have been damaged during transportalion before installing and using.
2. Pay attention to whether the flow direction of air (notice"--," direction) and thread type are correct.
3. Please notice whether installalion condition accords wilh technical requirements (such as "working pressure" and "applied
temperature range").
4. The medium used or installation environment shall be noticed. The matters with chlorine, carbon compound , aromatic
compound and oxidizing acid and alkali shall be avoided to prevent the damage of bowl and oil bowl.
5. Regularly clean or change filter core. Lubricators and regulators shall be in descending order.
6. Keep dust away. The dust cover shall be installed in intake and outlet when the device is dismantled and stored .
AC, BC Series
D Specification
Model AC1500 AC2000
BC2000 BC3000 BC4000
Fluid Air
Port size 118" I 114" 114" I 3/8" I 112'
Filtering grade 40 µ m or5 µ m
Pressure range Semi-auto and automaticd rain:0.15-0.9MPa(20-130Psi) Manual drain:0.05-0.9MPa(7 -130Psi)
Max. pressure 1. OMPa(1 45Psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa{215Psi)
Temperature range -5-?0'C
Capacity of drain bowl 15CC 60CC
Capacity of oil bowl 25CC 90CC
Recommended ISO VG 32 or equivalent
AC Weioht 700g 900g
BC IFilter AF1500 I AF2000 BF2000 I BF3000 I BF4000
Constitute IRegulator AR1500 I AR2000 BR2000 I BR3000 I BR4000
ILubricator AL1500 I AL2000 BL2000 I BL3000 I BL4000
D Symbol Thread type Scale

Blank:PT MPa or kqf/cm' & psi
r-.,--1-- G:G bar
I' T:NPT psi
~ Port size
I '
I_ _ _
I _--'I
_ _ _ .JI Series Port size
1500: 1/8"
AC FIitering grade
2000: 114"
2000: 114" Blank: 40 µ m
D Product feature W:5 µ m
BC 3000: 318'
1. The structure is delicate and compact, which is 4000: 112"
convenient for installation and application.
Drain type Scale
2. The pressed-in self-locking mechanism can Series Drain tvoe 1: MPa
prevent the abnormal movement of the set pressure Blank: Semi-auto drain 2: psi
AC
caused by external interfere. M: Manual drain 3: bar
3. The pressure loss is low and the efficiency of water Blank: Semi-auto drain 4: Double scale(osi, koflcm'
BC M: Manual drain
separating is high.
A: Automatic drain
4. The quantity of oil dripping can be directly Pressure auge
observed through transparent check-dome. Blank: Pressure gauge
5. In addition to standard type, lower pressure type is T e code N: No ressure au e
optional (The highest adjustable pressure is 0.4MPa). Blank: Standard (0.9MPa)
L: Lower ressure(0.4MPa
D Pressure and feature offlow
Applicable type: AC Series Applicable type: BC Series

"'
0.
~ 0.22 ---i --i --+--i---:---:---r----:- --i --
Q) 0.21 --- ~-- i° --T-- 1---~--~--+-- i --
l~::°
0
~~+T +J~F~~j sett rnr ~
oo.1 0. 2 1
0.3
1
o.4 o'.s 0.6
1 1
0.7 o:a 1
0.9
Inlet pressure MP a Inlet pressure MPa
Applicable type: AC Series Applicable type: BC Series

Inlet pressure: 0.7MPa Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa
~ 0.6 I - - -i- - -1 - - - -1- - - -,- - - ----,- - - i - - -

"'
~ 0.6
0.5 --1----1----1----i ___ i ___i --i -- 0.5
i ~:~ --:---~--~----:---~·-·i --l-· ; 0.4

i:l 0.3 r--:---,c- ..;.........:..._ :.___.. .1. _
~ 0.2 ,..,...--f- .i......--i-_i
! ~:~ ·========~===~===r =r=r= ~
8 ° 0 10~ 2~0 3~0 400 500 600 700
Flow capacity Umin
8
0.1 '--"'- -'---=---'---'---'--'---'---'
° 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
Flow capacity Umin
AC, BC Series
Inner structure D Selection of drain mode

A1500, 2000 Series B2000, 3000, 4000 Series
Manual drain Semi-auto drain Manual drain Semi-auto drain Automatic drain
This semi-auto drain

can also achieve the
GtJ
function of manual
dra;" qJ ~
L
PU tube with an inner
diameter of<D4mm is
recommended
D Dimensions
32 (53)
No. Item
1 AF, BF Series filter 5 A, B Series fix kit
2 A, B Series gasket 6 Screw
3 A, B Series bracket 7 AL, BL Series lubricator
4 AR, BR Series re ulator
Semi-auto drain
~ !Drain
Standard manual drain
Automatic drain
Semi-auto drain
~ l Drain
AFC, BFC Series
D Specification
Model AFC1500 BFC2000 AFC2000BFC3000 BFC4000
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4" I 1/4" I 3/8' I 1/2"
Filtering grade 40 µ m or 5 µ m
Pressure range $emi-autoand automatic drain:0.15-0.9MPa(20-130Psil Manual drain:0.05-0.9MPa(7-130Psi
Max. pressure 1.0MPa(145Psil
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215Psil
Capacity of drain bowl 15CC I 60CC
Capacity of oil bowl 25CC I 90CC
AFC Weight 500g I 700g
BFC C n t IFilter-Regulator AFR1500 I AFR2000 I BFR2000 I BFR3000 I BFR4000
ons I u e ILubricator AL 1500 I AL2000 I BL2000 I BL3000 I BL4000
CD PTthread, G thread and NPTthread are available.
AFC: A Series FR.L unit Thread type Scale

BFC: B Series FR.L unit Blank:PT MPa or kgf/cm' & psi
G:G bar
Port size T:NPT psi
Series Port size
1500: 1/8"
Symbol AFC
2000: 1/4' Filtering grade
r - - - - , - ..... 2000: 1/4" Blank: 40 µ m
BFC 3000: 3/8" W: 5 µ m
IAMIA:
4000: 1/2'
~_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _J
Drain type Scale

Series Drain tvoe 1: MPa
Blank: Semi-auto drain 2: psi
D Product feature AFC
M: Manual drain 3: bar
1. The structure is delicate and compact, which is Blank: Semi-auto drain 4: Double scale/osi, kof/cm''
convenient for installation and application. BFC M: Manual drain
A: Automatic drain
2. The pressed-in self-locking mechanism can
prevent the abnormal movement of the set pressure
caused by external interfere.
3. The pressure loss is low and the efficiency of water Blank: Standard (0.9MPa)
separating is high. L: Lower ressure 0.4MPa
4. The quantity of oil dripping can be directly
observed through transparent check dome. D Pressure and feature offlow
optional (The highest adjustable pressure is 0.4MPa).
Applicable type: AFC Series Applicable type: BFC Series

8:. '"
Cl.
:::: 0.22 --:---r---+---1 ---r --:---r----:---1-- ~ 0.22 ---i --r--+---r--:---:---i---:- --i --
Q) Q.21 --~--}---T- I__ I --~--}---+--i-- 0.21 --- ~-- i° --T-- - 1---i---}---+--i --
l ~:~~ --~
--~)--~--+
_--~--~---~--~--+--+--
Q)
~ 0.18
6
_r_ _L ~---~--~Set: o t
°o o; o'.2 o'.3 o'.4 o'.s o:s o'.1 o'.a o'.g

l~::~° ~
0
JJJJ~~r~: rtr~
oo.1 0. 2 1
0.3
1
o.4 o'.s 0.6 1 1
0.7 o:a 0.9 1
Inlet pressure MPa Inlet pressure MPa
Applicable type: AFC Series Applicable type: BFC Series

Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa Inlet pressure: 0.7MPa
'" Q.6
Cl. '"
Cl.
:::JE I -- - r -----,--- - 1--- --,- -- -,- -- i - -- ::. 0.6
Q) 0.5 --1----1---------1----1----i --j -- ., 0.5
:5 0.4 I I - : --- ~ 0.4
~ 0.3 - -1 ---, ---,----,----,---i __ i __ _ 1B 0.3
2- 0.2 r--i--;.._.__-i-__j
: ~:~ ==;======~===~===r=r=r= ~ 0.1
c5 OOc_20---'~- 4-'00-=:,
-- 60'-0-
-- 8---'00- 100-'--0- 1200
'-----1---'
40-0-16-'----'00
c5 O O 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow capacity Umin Flow capacity Umin
AFC, BFC Series
Inner structure Cl Dimensions
AFC
BFC
"f'"
I Drain
No. Item
1 AFR, BFR Series filter & reaulator
2 A, B Series bracket
3 A, B Series aasket
4 A, B Series fixed kit Manual drain
~
5 Screw
6 AL, BL Series lubricator
Selection of drain mode Automatic drain

Semi-auto drain
The drain modes of different series are different.
~
Please refer to P 153 for details.
I Drain ~!Drain
Preparation unit--Filter & regulator AlrTAC
AFR, BFR Series
D Specification
Model AFR1500 AFR2000 BFR2000 BFR3000 BFR4000
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4" I 1/4' I 3/8' I 1/2"
Filtering grade 40 µ m or 5 µ m
Pressure range Semi-auto and automatic drain:O. 15-0.9MPa(20-130Psi) Manual drain:0.05- 0. 9M Pa(7- 130Psi)
Max. pressure 1.0MPa(145Psi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215Psi)
Temperature range -5-?0' C
Weiqht 260q I 400q
G) PT thread , Gthread and NPT thread are available.
AFR D Ordering code
BFR
AFR: A Series Filter & re ulator Thread type Scale

BFR: B Series Filter & re ulator Blank:PT MPa or kqf/cm' & osi
G:G bar
Port size T:NPT psi
Series Port size
1500: 1/8' Filtering grade
AFR
2000: 1/4' Blank: 40 µ m
2000: 1/4' W:Sµm
Symbol BFR 3000: 3/8'
4000: 1/2'
,-----, Scale
IAA~: 1: MPa
~
_ _ _ _ _ .J
Series Drain tvoe
Drain type 2: osi
3: bar
Blank: Semi-auto drain 4: Double scale(csi, kaf/cm'\
AFR
D Product feature M: Manual drain
Blank: Semi-auto drain Pressure gauge
BFR M: Manual drain Blank: Pressure au e
1. The structure is delicate and compact, which is
A: Automatic drain N: No ressure au e
convenient for installation and application.
2. The pressed-in self-locking mechanism can prevent
Ty e code
the abnormal movement of the set pressure caused Accessories
Blank: Standard (0.9MPa)
by external interfere. L: Lower ressure(0.4MPa Blank: Bracket
3. The pressure loss is low and the efficiency of water J: No bracket
separating is high;
4. In addition to standard type, lower pressure type is Pressure and feature offlow
optional(The highest adjustable pressure is 0.4MPa).
Applicable type: AFR Series Applicable type: BFR Series

"'
~ 0.22 --i --i --+---1---t --i --i -- -:- --1--
IL
~ 0.22 ---i --i --+--i ---r --:---i ---:- --1--
Q) 0.21 - - ~ - - i- - - T - I __ 1---~--i--- +--i -- Cl> 0.21 - - - ~ - - i- - - T - - 1---:---i---+--i --
!~::~: t+JJ):)J~~t~~L
0_20 : : : : 1
1Set:pot~t
!0 ~::°o==~)==EEE= ~)==i==~==
o.; o'.2 o'.3 a:4 o:s 0.6 o'.a o'.e 1
o'. 1
":,
O
Q I I I I I I I
O 0.1 0.2 03 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

I I
Inlet pressure MPa Inlet pressure MPa
Applicable type: AFR Series Applicable type: BFR Series

Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa
~ 0.6 I ---r-----,--- --,----,----,---i---

Q) 0.5 --1----1----f- ---1----1----:- --:---
rn ;
~ o.1 I
~c
I
~~ h
I
1:===
c5 O O 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
Flow capacity Umin
....
AFR, BFR Series
Inner structure and Material of major parts D Dimensions

------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
1- -----:i.- - 2
3- ~~11 4
5 6
7___r,-,__,=;;,__rr,
22 B
+-llt-l!I.E::llt-lf
~d
19 M30 x 1.5
Semi-auto drain
13
~
AFR
BFR
I Drain
2
4
6
22l=iRi~~ ~
~d
19
23
25 Manual drain
~P,,~!
No. Item Material Automatic drain
1 Push button POM Semi-auto drain
~
2 Adjusting button POM
3 Adjusting nut Steel
4 Adjusting seat POM
5 Adjusting spring SWC I Drain
'Drain
6 Fixed ring POM
8 Diaphragm SUS304 & rubber
9 Balance needle POM
10 needle Qasket Aluminum alloy & rubber
11 Air guider POM
12 Umbrella baffle POM
13 Drain bowl PC
14 Drain kit POM
15 Return spring Stainless steel
16 Drain seat POM
17 Drain pillar POM
18 Drain 0-ring NBR
Filter 15 µ m Makrolon fiber
19
element 140 µ m Agglomerated by bronze grain
21 Drain bowl 0-ring NBR
22 Needle 0-ring NBR
23 Bowl guard switch POM
24 Gasket POM
25 Bowl guard PA66
26 Clip Spring steel
Selection of drain mode

Please refer to P 153 for details.
AF, BF Series
D Specification
Model AF1500 AF2000 BF2000 BF3000 BF4000
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4" I 1/4' I 3/8' I 1/2"
Filtering grade 40µmor5µm
Pressure range Semi-auto and automaticdrain:0.15-0.9MPa(20 - 130Psi) Manual drain:0.05-0.9MPa(7-130Psi)
Weight 140g I 330g
AF
BF
D Symbol
Model
AF: A Series Filter
BF: B Series Filter
D Product feature
Port size Filtering grade
AF series Series Port size Blank: 40 µ m
1. The structure is delicate and compact. 1500: 1/8" W:S µ m
2. The pressure loss is low and the efficiency of water AF 2000: 1/4"
separating is high; 2000: 1/4" Drain type
3. The filter precision includes 5 µ m and 40 µ m BF 3000: 3/8"
Series Drain tvoe
(optional); 4000: 1/2"
Blank: Semi-auto drain
AF
BF series M: Manual drain
1. The pressure loss is low and the efficiency of water Blank: Semi-auto drain
separating is high. BF M: Manual drain
A: Automatic drain
2. The bowl has high-strength plastic shields outside,
which is more safe and reliable to use.
3. The filter precision includes 5 µ m and 40 µ m D Flow chart
(optional).
Applicable type: AF Series Applicable type: BF Series
"' "'
~ ~:~ -=~================;-=+== ~ ~: ~
nnni
Inner structure and material of major parts --:=======:======:===;===:===f
I.ill
II 11
ID
Ir-' ~ r-11 111 I~j =t=t=;===~==~===:-==f=)
ai 0.1 __ _j _ _ _ _i _ _ _ ~---t--- I - - -;- - - - ~ - - - ~
II JI 1 II
6 ° 8 °oFlow2~0capacity
1LI ~ 3--2
- 3
4
11-i
r ~~
-J
!, ..
~ 3
o 1oo 200 300 400
Flow capacity
soo 600 100
Umin
40'0 soo so'o 1~ 0 12;0 14;0 1s~
Umin
i
- 5 i
H3
c--5
Dimensions
,Ii 14 _ l;. i
10 5
10 6
Semi-auto drain
_R/'"''- 7
:R
8
No. Item Material

1 Drain bowl 0-ring NBR
I Drain
Filter 15µ m Makrolon fiber
3 element140 µ m Agglomerated by bronze grain
4 Umbrella baffle POM
5 Drain bowl PC
6 Drain kit POM
7 Drain seat POM
8 Drain pillar POM Standard manual drain
10 Gasket POM
11 Air guider POM
12 Bowl guard switch POM
m ~~~i E·1. J
13 Bowl guard PA6
14 Drain seat 0-rinq NBR ggg ·u, Semi-auto drain
15 Clip Spring steel NM V ,S
Automatic drain
LL LLLL 0
mmcc ca
Selection of drain mode

I
I Drain
I
~ I Drain
Please refer to P153 for details.
AR, BR Series
D Specification
Model Ar1500 AR2000 BR2000 BR3000 BR4000
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4" I 1/4' I 3/8" I 1/2"
Pressure range 0.05-0.9MPa (7-130Psi)
Max. pressure 1.0MPa(1 45Psi)
Temperature ranQe -20-70"C
Weight 200g I 230g
<D PTthread, Gthread and NPTthread are available.
AR
BR
AR: A Series Re ulator Thread type Scale

BR: B Series Re ulator Blank:PT MPa or kgf/cm' & psi
G:G bar
Port size T:NPT psi
D Symbol
Series Port size
~'
1500: 1/8"
AR
2000: 1/4" Scale
- - 2000: 1/4" 1:MPa
BR 3000: 3/8' 2:osi
4000: 1/2" 3: bar
D Product feature
4: Double scale(csi, kaf/cm'
1. The structure is delicate and compact, which is Type code
convenient for installation and application. Blank: Standard(0.9MPa)
Pressure gauge
2. The pressed-in self-locking mechanism can prevent L: Lower ressure(0.4MPa
Blank: Pressure gauge
the abnormal movement of the set pressure caused N: No pressu re au e
by external interfere.
Accessories
Blank: Bracket
optional (The highest adjustable pressure is 0.4MPa). J: No bracket
D Pressure and feature of flow
Applicable type: AR Series Applicable type: BR Series

"'
0..
:::;
~"' 0.22 0.22 - - r - - t- - - + - - , - -
I I I
--i- - -t- - -
I I
+- - - + - - -+ - -
I I I
., 0.21 Q) 0.21 --~--+--T-- 1---:---~--+--i--
~ 0.20
[ 0.19
.;
c;c
0.18
l~:~~ :t t:j::(rr-r~:ot
ai 0.18 --i --i ---:- --i -- i ---:----i ---:- --1--
0 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9
Inlet pressure MPa
0 °oInleto.1pressure
0.2 o'.3 0.4 o'.s 0.6 0.1 0.8
1 1 1 1 1
o:g
MPa
Applicable type:AR Series Applicable type: BR Series

Inlet pressure: 0.7MPa Inlet pressure: 0. 7MPa
100 200 300 400 500 600 700

Flow capacity L/min Flow capacity L/min
....
AR, BR Series
Inner structure and material of major parts D Dimensions
50
c:"'l'l=l"':ilH+-- 3 34 Cll27.5
Rt-H-- 4
'C
Q&t-"-::-5
6
="'
"
0
~ C
0
.~~~!l=19o '7===m::;;~=---. ~
j
~
lt9t-f-iHtt-11
~
'i5'
~ m ~1+-12 "'
C
AR 13 "'
BR
Jl~IIH-lfl-l---
w;;;....,.=.i. -- 15
14
\Dal[jl,,Cl~ ~--'---'- ~
Pressure gauge port
1
2
c:"'l'l=l"':ilH+-- 3
Rt-H-- 4
'-""-==- 5
6
~~~5=10
~
lt9t-t-tt---tt- 11
~ m ~.,,lf-- 12
Jl~IIH-lfl-l--
w;;;o.,..=.i. -- 15
rn C
"'
....._ _'-----h~ ~ ~ ~
No. Item Material 2-1/4"
1 Push button POM Pressure gauge port
2 Adiustinq button POM
3 Adiustinq nut Steel
4 Adiustinq pillar Steel
5 Adjusting spring SWC
6 Fixed ring POM
9 Diaphragm SUS304 & rubber
10 Needle 0-rinq NBR
11 Balance needle POM
12 Needle casket Aluminum allov & rubber
13 CapO-ring NBR
14 Return sprinq Stainless steel
15 Regulator cap POM
Preparation unit--Lubricator AlrTAC
AL, BL Series
D Specification
Model AL 1500 AL2000 BL2000 BL3000 BL4000
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8" I 1/4" I 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2"
Pressure range 0.05-0.9MPa(7-130Psi)
Capacity of oil bowl 25CC I 90CC
Recommended ISO VG 32 or equ ivalent
Weight 170g I 250g
<DPT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
AL
BL
Symbol
AL: A Series lubricator

BL: B Series lubricator
Product feature
Port size
1. The structure is delicate and compact.
Series Port size
2. The quantity of oil dripping can be directly observed 1500: 1/8"
through transparent inspection sheet. AL
2000: 1/4"
3. BL has high-strength plastic shields, which is more 2000: 1/4"
safe and reliable to use. BL 3000: 3/8"
4000: 1/2"
4. The pressure loss and the flow of miststart is low.
Flow chart
Applicable type: AL Series Applicable type: BL Series
"' "'
a.
~ 0.6 --1 ---r ---1--- - 1--- -,--- -,--- i --- ~ 0.6 - 1---, ---r---r --, ---T---r---i
Q) 0.5 - -1- - - - 1- - - - 1- - - -1- - - -1- - - -i --i -- Q) 0.5 - ---1- - - ---+ - - - -l- - - - l- - - i - - - 1 - - I ---i
Ui
~ Q.1
==~===~===:=======~===~
__
--=~===
L ___ L ___ I____:- - - - , --:----:---
lti
~
="===~===;===~==~=)--T=
0.1 __ _j _ _ _ ~---t----:---
I
--+---t----~ I
8 °o 1~o 2~0 3~0 400

Flow capacity
s~o e~o 1~0
Umin
Q O O 2~0 400 600 8~0 10~0 12~ 1400 16~0
Flow capacity
1
Umin
D Dimensions
No. Item Material

1 Drip pipe PC
2 Dripper 0-ring NBR
3 Oil adjusting dial POM
4 Adjusting ring NBR
5 Lubricator seat POM
6 Partition PU
7 Lubricator kit gasket NBR
8 Adjuster HDPE
10 Oil bowl PC
11 Sunk tube PU
12 Lubricator kit POM
13 Ball Stainless steel
14 Lubricator fixed plate SPCC
15 Oil bowl 0-ring NBR
17 Oil filling nut 0-ring NBR
18 Oil filling plug Steel
19 Needle spring Stainless steel
20 Injector pin Bronze ~~~ti)
...- ("') . - Q)
21 Check-dome PC ci cici :E
0 0 0 ti)
000,.c:
22 Bowl guard switch POM NM-.::t-
....J....J...J 0
a:unmco
23 Bowl guard PA6
•M•
SR Series
D Specification
Model SR200-06 SR200L-06 SR200-08 SR200L-08
Fluid Air
Portsize G) 1/8" I 1/4'
Pressure range Standard type:0.05-0.9MPa(7-130psi); Lower pressure type 0.03-0.4MPa(4-57psi)
Max. pressure 1.0MPa(1 45psi)
<D PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
SR
Model
ISR: Regulator(Mini type) I Thread tvoe Scale
Blank:PT MPa or kgf/cm' & psi
G:G bar
Serles code T:N PT I Psi
! 200: 200 Series!
Symbol
Scale
1:MPa
2: psi
3: bar
D Product feature 4: Double scale(osk kaf/cm'
1. Panel support can be chosen for the installation of

regulator with independent use in pipeline. Pressure gauge
2. The structure is delicate and compact, which is Blank: Pressure gauge
convenient for installation and application. N: No ressure au e
3. The performance of pressure adjustment is reliable Accessories
and steady. Blank: Bracket
4. In addition to standard type, lower pressure type is J: No bracket
optional (The highest adjustable pressure is 0.4 MPa).
Pressure and feature of flow
Applicable type: SR200- 06 Applicable type: SR200- 06

"'
C.
:::;0.22 ~~~~~~~~
~
5l
~ 02
C.
.;
8 0.18 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Inlet pressure MPa
Flow capacity Limin
D Dimensions
M30x1 .5
SR200- 06:1/8"
SR200-08:1/4"
Both sides
..,.
0
2-1 /8"
Pressure gauge port
51.5
SOR Series
D Specification
Model SDR100-M5 SDR100-06 SDR200-06 SDR200-08 SDR100L- M5 SDR100L-06 SDR200L-06 SDR200L-08
Fluid Air
Pressure range 0.05- 0.9MPa(7-130psi) I 0.03-0.4MPa(4-58psi)
Max. pressure 1.0MPa(14Spsi) I 0.4MPa(58psi)
Port size G) MS I 1/8' I 1/4' I M5 I 1/8' I 1/4'
CD PTthread, G thread and NPTthread are available.
D Ordering code
SDR
Serles code
100: 100 Series
Scale
200: 200 Series
1: MPa
2: si
D Symbol Port size 3: bar
4: Double scale si, k I/cm'
~
Model Port size
- _, MS: MS
100 Series
06: 1/8" Pressure gauge
06: 1/8" Blank: Pressure au e
200 Series
08: 1/4" N: No ressure au e
D Product feature
1. Back pressure structure, compact type, cost-effective, Type code Accessories
installation time saving. Blank: Standard Blank: Bracket
2. Broad regulating range; low-pressure type is optional L: Lower ressure J: No bracket standard confi uration
other than the standard type; stable output pressure;
applicable to situation which has low expectation on
output pressure but high expectation on performance
and cost-effectiveness.
3. Single unit installation; easy to mount
D Pressure and feature offlow
Applicable type: SDR100 Applicable type: SDR 100

"' 0.7~-----------~
~ 0.6
~0.31•• • •I• ~
f-2 ~
..
.t.~
;•••1 ::;; 0.5
~ 0.4
gi 0.3
.a ci.0.2
Q 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.65 0 .75 :gj 0.1 -...-..-.;,-
..-...-.......
;.-..-... :
Inlet pressure MPa 6 ' ' :
OO 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
.t.lnlet pressure 0.2MPa
Flow capacity L/min
• inlet pressure 0. 3MPa
,..,,
2 Needle oasket NBR
3
4
5
0-rino
0-ring
Fixed ring
NBR
NBR
POM
i::1 }:rAppill~bl,cypo:SD:r1
6 Identification ring POM
8 Adjusting pillar Brass 8 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.65 0.75
9 Adiustino button POM Inlet pressure MPa
10 Adjusting nut Steel .t.lnlet pressure 0.2MPa 400 600 800 1000 1200
11 Adjusting spring swc • Inlet pressure 0.3MPa Flow capacity L/min
12 Piston rode POM
14 Return spring SUS304
••
SOR Series
D Dimensions
A
KA BC
<!>AB
SDR100: M22x1.5
M30 x 1.5
C
e
SOR
11•1•••·
SDR1000M5
SDR100006
35
35
.,..:
20
20
32
32
:
65.5
65.5
:••• :
26
26
39.5
39.5
:11• :
14.5
14.5
29
29
62.5
62.5
·- I
54.5
54.5
33
33
17
17
7
7
: . ··-
22 5.5 29 MS 7.5 1116"
.
22 5.5 29 118" 7.5 1/16"
SDR200006 50 28 40 80 30 50 20 35 83.5 72.5 42 24 7.5 34 5.5 38 1/8" 10 1/8"
SDR200008 50 28 40 80 30 50 20 35 83.5 72.5 42 24 7.5 34 5.5 38 1/4" 10 1/8"
Note: Bracket and pressure gauge are optional.
Attentions of application
Unlock the regulating knob before pressure adjustment,

Orange marking ring
(saffron) then lock it after the adjustment. Otherwise, may cause the
regulating knob damage or the outlet pressure change .
1. Pull the regulating knob to unlock, when the orange
marking ring below the regulating knob appears,
indicating that the regulating knob is unlocked.
2. Push the regulating knob to lock, when the orange
marking ring below the regulating knob disappears
completely, indicating that the regulating knob is locked.
•bl•
Preparation unit--Dripleg drain AlrTAC
ADW Series
Specification
Model ADW400-10 ADW400-1 5
Fluid Air
Pressure ranee 0.15-1.0MPa(22-145osil
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psil
Temperature range 2-60"C
Port size (1) ln=3/8' I ln=1/2"
D Ordering code
ADW
D Symbol Series code

!400: 400 Series I
Port size
10: 3/8"
15: 1/2"
D Product feature
Inner structure and material of major parts
1. The float is with lever structure. Low position enables more stable drain.
2. The bowl made of High intensity PC and covered by steel case is safer to use.
'"" '
3. Double strainer guarantees the operation of the drainer. 1 Body Aluminumalloy
4. Inlet with large port size prevents accumulation of particles or rust. 2 0-rina NBR
3 Body nut Aluminumalloy
5. The drainage bowl with large capacity can keep more rust and dirt than 4 Filter aauze Stainless steel
general drains. 26 5 Fixed rino NBR
6. The drain is equipped with large float and sensitive to control. 6 Filter POM
7 Drain bowl PC
7. The bowl with large size can store a certain amount of water which reduces
8 Bowl guard 08F
discharging time and extends the service life. 9 Valve Stainless steel & & rubber
10 Piston Aluminumallov
11 Float PC+ABS
D Installation and application 12 Silencer Agglomerated by brass grain
13 Filter element Stainless steel & & rubber
1. ADW400 series are applicable to following air compressing equipments: 14 0-ring NBR
air storage tank, dryer, filter, and piping. 15 Drain joint set
16 Drain baffle POM
2. Minimum 300mm room is required if the bottom end of above-mentioned
17 0-rina VITON
equipments being connected with a (1/2") joint. 18 0-ring NBR
3. Using a 1/2" hand lever valve between the air compressing equipment 19 Spring Spring steel
20 Float PU rigid foam
and the inlet of ADW400 is good for maintenance. 21 Link iron Stainless steel
4. The air displacement of the air compressing equipment can't be lower 22 Lever Stainless steel
23 Adjustable screw Stainless steel
than 182 Umin.
24 Gasket EPDM
5. Make sure the drain is vertical downward and the drain pipe is not bended 25 Balance needle seat Stainless steel
upside. 26 Screw Steel
6. Do not use acidoid or volatile oil gas (hydrochloric acid , petrol,
methylbenzene, etc.) to clean the PC bowl. This may cause break. Dimensions
7. Push the hexagon nut of the body to release the residual pressure before
<1> 93
dissembling the PC bowl and metal protection case to avoid any injury or
flN
harm.
l
0
C)
Pressure gauge
D Specification
Model GS-40 GF-40 GU-40 GS-50 GF-50 GU-50 GF-60 GU-60
Fluid Air
Port size 1/8' I 114" I 1/4"
Accuracy grade 2.5
M 0-1.0MPa(Standard type); 0-0.4MPa(Lower pressure type)
The pressure B 0-10 bar (Standard type); 0-4 bar (Lower pressure type)
range of units and p 0-140psi(Standard type); 0-60psi(Lower pressure type)
instructions 0- 10kgf/cm2 and 0-140psi(Dual-scale display, Standard type);
z 0- 4kgf/ cm2 and 0-60psi(Dual-scale display, Lower pressure type)
Gauge Material of major parts Shell: SPCC; Core: Brass
D Ordering code
D Symbol
Mount Type Code

S: Standard Mount
F: Flan e Mount
D Product feature U: Pannel Mount
1. It has sensitive reaction and can work under low Dial diameter
pressure. 30: OD30mm
2. The displayed words in the dial are clear and there 40: 0040mm
are several pressure units to be selected. 50: 0050mm
60: 0060mm
3. There are several installation ways and installing
accessories to be selected. D Dimensions
4. Various dimensions of screw thread are available.
~B
<( w
Model A B C D E
GS-40 42 11 24.5 38.5 118'
GS-50 52 14 26.5 44.5 114'
C
D
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Model A B 81 C D E F(max) G H
GU-40 42 11 7 28 43.5 1/8" 5 21 24.5
GU-50 52 14 8 30.5 50 1/4" 7 24 35
GU-60 62 14 8 30.5 50 1/4" 7 25 35
••
DPS Series digital display pressure switch
D Specification
Voltage 12-24 VDC ± 10% R1pple(p-p) < 10%
Input power > - - ~ ~ - - - - j
Current consumption Under 45mA Max (No load)
Pressure type Non- corrosive gas
DPSN1(P1)-01: -100kpa-100kpa
Measurement range
DPSN1(P1)-10: -100kpa - 1,000kpa
I,
Pressure DPSN1(P1 )-01: 200kpa
Withstand pressure > - - - ~ ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
range DPSN1(P1)-10: 1500kpa
Measurement error ± 0.2%F.S. ± 1digit(Temperature:25 ± 3°C)
Repetitive accuracy ± 0.2 % F.S.
Symbol Temperature error ± 3%F.S.(Base 2S"C, Range Oto 50°C)
DPS
Type Double row LCD display,4-digit measurement, 3 .5 -digit setting
Output Double output LCD display
Display
Color 2-color LCD (Red/Green)
D User interface Instruction
Display period 100ms, 2SOms, SOOms, 1,000ms
DPSN1:Built-in two sets of NPN output
Output group
DPSP1 :Built-in two sets of PNP output
NPN:Maximum applied voltage 30V/ 1OOmA, Retained voltage < 1 .5V
Transistor output
Output PNP: Maximum applied voltage 30V/ 1OOmA,Retained voltage < 1.5V
Response time 2ms, 20ms, 50ms, 100ms, 250ms, 500ms, 1,000ms, 2, 500ms, S,OOOms
Hysteresis 1ms, 2ms, 3ms, 4ms, Sms, 6ms, 7ms, 8ms
Output mode Basic mode, Hysteresis mode, W indow comparator mode
Pressure Unit MPa, kPa, kgf/cm\ bar, psk mmHg, cmHg(Not available for ±100kPa type)
,..,, Vibration resistance 10 to 500Hz with 10mm Amplitude in X, Y, Z directions for 2hrs
A Value up button Impact resistance Maximum 100m/s', X, Y, Z directions 3 times each
B Setting button Operating Temp. range 0-SO"C
C Value Down button Stored Temp. range -20- 65"C
D Pressure display area
Humidity range 35 %- 80% RH(No condensation)
E Set pressure display area
F Output 1 indicator light
G Output 2 indicator light
H Power and signal connector
J Pressure input
D Dimensions/Assembly Instruction
------~ Model Pi in s ecifications
Panel mount adapter+ Front protective cover
Order the Install accessories (Ordering code: F-DPSEB)
IDPS: Digital Display Pressure Switch I Space: PT 1/8 with MS female thread
G: Male thread G1/8 ; female thread: MS
Output type T: Male thread NPT1/8 ; female thread: 10,32UNF
N1 : NPN N: Male thread free with M5 female thread
9
P1 : PNP
Lead wire length
Electrical entry 020: Length 2m
u....~ ~ -----' Space: Plug-in connector 030: Length 3m
,I I: Pre-wired t pe
Panel frame dimension
Measurement ran e
01: -100kPa-100kPa
10: -100kPa - 1,000kPa
D Dimensions
Order the Install accessories (Ordering code: F-DPSLB)
6 =1.6
Piping specifications ,
Space: PT 1/8 with M5 female thread
Im 1---1--·~
T: Male thread NPT1/8; female thread: 10-32UNF
G: Male thread G1/8 ; female thread: M5
N: Male thread free with M5 female thread
1"--'------1Female th ad: M5
28.6
44 .6
••
D User Interface Instructions

1. Mode switch 5. Interface of advanced mode
(Basic mode) (Measurement mode) (Advanced mode) Display color: orange

Press the SET button Press the SET button
Bottom row
Display color: orange Valuedlsplay
DPS
(ERSYJ~~g ~ Display
[ ol:l~~L.:::_J period setting
[~~:'E
Basic mode
[ lo2oj
Hysteresis mode
1(2o
Window comparator mode
lo2[ 1[2( ~g Output-

Normally open
Hysteresis
setting
Color choice in basic mode

no( no( no( nod=~ or close
Output1-N.O. Output1-N.C. Output1-N.O. Output1-N.C.
[ Output2-N.O . Output2-N.O. Output2-N.C. Output2-N.C.
~O~?~
L.ITJ [lr [lr [lr c:,
~'.'.-'.:'.-seti~me
Colorselection
Copy function
[ Output Red
No output Green
Output Green
No output Red
All-time display red All-t1med1splayGreen
Factory-fresh Factory-fresh
~ state OFF stale ON
MPa
nfn~ :fP~!f~[~~t:1 6 ~~~
kPa kgf/cm1 bar
0 Press the SET button to change menu
6. Copy function
~
0 ress the SET button \ PS~ ririH6 [riH6 - Pressure unit
6.1. Hardware: Connect the
second pin of master
r - - Power: DC24V(+Hbrown)- - 1
I r- Power: DC24V(- HGreen)-, :
;o change menu Uni: Un~ Un~ 0
device with the third pin
psi mmHg cm Hg : : 11
of slave device, then
~~~~~~~~~~i :
power on after connecting 1 ,
3. Base mode pressure setting
6.2 . Software:Set ' CP-M' on master device. II
Set ' CP-S' on slave device. :1 ll
6.3. Icon of copy completed

1'
L L-------~i
Repeat step 1 and 2 I I : I
J L - -Output1 (B1ack)J :
if copy failed.
L---0 utput2(White)- _J
6.4. Turn off the power,
Press 1he value up and down
Rolling display button to set the pressure value disconnected
~ress the SET button devices and restart
0 ;o change menu it after setting
7. Zero- Clear Function

4. Hysteresis /window comparator mode
Press up and down simultaneously to reset
lhe display value to zero.
l·H =:>
'""6 -. IDD.6
6 ¢ = [ •ura.o SO. I
'=
-----,------:
r ~-"-- c,olling
"R display
Press 1he value up and down
button to set the pressure value
Press button simultaneously ,g ~
~ I109a~I : I 109~1
8. Key lock Function
10~-~ 8.1. Press up and the set
button,gsimultaneously. c)
~S'E~
10
J
'
9~ ~ Imqa~I : mq~
Rolling display
Press the value up and down
button to set the pressure value
Release it when the
display turns to ' LoCK on'
8.2. Press down and Press button
"~===- '
Press button - - - - - - - - -
simullaneously8 +Set button simultaneously~ +Set button
rmnhl ~ I IDD.61
the set button w'
.§ I IDD.6J
~ress the SET button
0 fo change menu L.:EJ 16 w 15
simultaneously. Release it when the display turns to "LoCK oFF'.
8.3. Press any button will display "LCK' in lock on mode.
•ffl:i
D Connection Example
DPS
D Notes
1. Do not drop· knock or apply excessive impact while handling. Otherwise
could cause damage and a malfunction.
2. The tensile strength of the cord is 60N. Applying a greater pulling force on it
can cause a malfunction.
3. Do not exceed the screw-in torque of 7N.m when installing piping.
Exceeding this value may cause malfunctioning of the sensor.
4. Do not use it with corrosive and/or flammable gases or liquids.
5.Please use it within rated pressure range.
6. Turn off the power before connecting the wires.
7. Don 't use in an environment with spattering liquid of oil or solvent.
8. Separate power lines from high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same
conduit with these lines.
••
DPC Series minitype no display pressure switch
D Specification
ltem\Model DPC DPCN DPCP
Voltaqe DC12-24V±10%
Pressure ranae DPCD10 : -100-1 OOOkPa ; DPCD 01 : - 100- 100kPa
Applied flu id Air, Non-corrosive gas, lncombustibility gas
Output mode Two-lines, NPN, PNP, Max.30V-100mA
Reoetitive accuracv +0.7%F.S
Temperature accuracy ±2.5%F.S
Operatinq Temp. ranqe 0- 60't
Method of adiustina pressure Learnina button
Tube O.D. Cll 4mm , Cll 6mm, (!)1/4"
Special function Two sets model, NO/NC switch
DPC D Symbol Protection IP40
D Ordering code
D Product feature
1. Larger measurement range.
2. Single button to finish learning setting. Model
3. Normally close and normally open can be exchanged. !DPC: Minitype no display pressure switch I Cll4mm
Cll6mm
4. Easy to install. Output type Cll 1/4"
Blank: Two-lines
N:NPN Lead wire length
P: PNP 020: Length 2m
030: Length 3m
Measurement range 050: Length 5m
01 , -100kPa-100kPa
10 , - 100kPa- 1,000kPa
D Dimensions
"'m_l__6=~;;;;;~~-----
Tube O.D.:
D4: CJ>4mm ~
D6 : CJ>6mm "'
N
08 : CJ>1 /4"
D Installation and application

1. Connection Example:
Brown
Brown + Brown +
~
z
(.)
Load t Black
a.. a..
Cl Black o Load
Blue Blue Blue
2. Function operation:
2.1. Quick setting: Press the SET button for less then two seconds to finish quick setting.
2.2. Middle valve setting : Press the SET button for two to five seconds to finish setting valve A;
Press the SET button again to finish setting valve B.
* Middle valve=(A+ B)/2 *
2.3. N.0./N.C. switch: Press the SET button for six to ten seconds
to finish N.0 ./N.C. switching.
2.4. Lock/ Unlock switch: Press the SET button for eleven to twenty seconds
to finish Lock/Unlock switching.
2.5. Factory- fresh state: Press the SET button for over twenty seconds
to return factory-fresh state.
~·~~~~~~~~~_:_~=- - -=~=
~
Summary of actuator
Actuator component-Cy_linder
components
To make system realize the best performance,
advanced actuator components are necessary.
AirTAC has many types of actuator components for
your choice:
1. Standard cylinder series
2. Mini cylinder series
3. Tight cylinder series
4. Compact cylinder series
5. Twin-rod cylinder, multi-rod cylinder, stopper
cylinder and other series of the cylinder;
Standard cylinder Slide table cylinder

SE Series ............ .. ...... ... ......... .. ........... · 175 STW Series .. ... ......... ....... .. ..... .... ....... ..... 319
SI Series ........... .. ..... .. .... ........ ............... 181 HLH Series ..... .. ............ ................ .. ........ 327
SGC Series .. .. .. ..... .... ...... .. ... .. .. ... ...... .... 189 HLQ Series(ball bearing) .................................. 333
SU Series .... .. .... ..... ........ .. ... .. ... .... ... . .... 195 HLS Series(roller bearing) ................................ 351
SC Series ...... ... .. ................. .. ......... .. ... . 201
JSI Series ........... .. .... ....................... ....... 213 Rodless magnetic cylinder
RMS Series .................. .. ....................... 369
Mini cylinder RMT Series .... ..... ... .... .. .......... .... .......... 373
Ml Series ....... ..... ... ... ... .... .. .. .... .. .... .. ... ... 219
PB, PBR Series ..... .. ...... ........... .... ...... . · · 225

Rotary table cylinder
MF Series ..... .... ... .......... ............. .. .. 233
HRQ Series rotary table cylinder .. .. 379
MA Series .... .. ..... .. .. .. ..... ... ..... .. . 239
MAL Series ....................................... .. ... 247
MBL Series ......... ... ........................... .. ... 253 Air gripper

HFZ, HFP, HFY, HFR, HFC Series air gripper ... ·387
Tight cylinder \Compact cylinder

ACE Series .... . ... ... 259 Twist clamp cylinder
ACQ, TACQ Series ... ... ...................... ..... .. 267 ACK Series twist clamp cylinder ......... •......... 409
SDA Series ..... .... .. .. ... .. .. ......... ........ .. .. ... 281 QCK Series rotary clamp cylinder. ................ 413
MCK Series clamping cylinder ... 417

Multi-mounting cylinder, twin rod and tri-rod cylinder JCK Series power clamping cylinder ....... .. .. ... 421
MD, MK Series multi-mounting cyl inder ... . 287
MU Series Mini Free Mount Cylinder.. . ... 295
Boosting Unclamping cylinder\Stopper cylinder\Cylinder accessory
MPG Series Plate Cylinder. ..... .... . . . .. . 299
NPM Series boosting unclamping cylinder .... .. -439
MPE Series Threaded Cylinder ...... ... .. .. .. .. .. .. 303
TW Series stopper cylinder. .. 443
TN, TR Series twin-rod cylinder ...... .. ... ... .. .... 307
Cylinder joint accessory .... ..... ....... ......... .... 453
TCL, TCM Series tri-rod cylinder... . .. 313
Sensor switch ......... ....... .. .. ... ........ .. .... .... 457
•fl•
Actuator com pone nt-Cyl ind er
13 Product selection Maintenance and Service
D Confirm the internal diameter of the cylinder 0 Attention

A) Axial load thrust of the cylinder shall be confirmed according to the actual 1. There should be no damage in the sliding parts of the cylinder and piston rod to
load situation of the required cylinder. prevent the air leakage caused by poor action of the cylinder and damage of
B) Load rate TJ of the cylinder shall be confirmed according to the action seal parts of piston rod;
situation of the load. 2. If the cylinder is not used for a long time, it shall be regularly actuated and shall
Load rate has relationship with action speed of the cylinder, which is be coated with oil to prevent rusting;
generally recommended as:
3. Please read the relevant content in this manual for the requirement of the
Under static load or low speed: ~ ,s;; 0.7
Speed 50-500mm is: ~ ,s;; 0.5 cylinder to air quality and application condition, pipeline connection and
When speed > 500mm is: ~ ,s;; 0.3 lubrication.
C) Working pressure of the cylinder shall be confirmed according to the
condition of air supply.
Cylinder Confirm the cylinder stroke

The stroke of the cylinder is pre-selected upon the operation distance of the Debugging
cylinder and the stroke ratio of transmission mechanism. To facilitate installing
and debugging, the calculated stroke shall be with a proper margin. Standard
strokes which can guarantee quick supply and low cost shall be selected as
0 Attention
possible as you can. 1. Speed control valve shall be installed at the two sides of the cylinder.
+Check valve shall be opened gradually from completely closed state
when the cylinder is debugged and the drive speed of the cylinder shall be
Confirm the cylinder type gradually and slowly adjusted to the required value.
The variety of the cylinder shall be selected according to the specific + There are two ways for installing check valve, including exhaust throttle
l requirements of application and installation of the cylinder.
Selection of buffer way of the cylinder

and inlet throttle. Exhaust throttle is mostly adopted in pneumatic system
since cylinder will produce back pressure during work through exhaust
throttle and make the moving speed or the adjustment of the speed steady
and will avoid impact on cylinder cover caused by sudden and quick
propulsion of piston rod when starting.
There are different buffer devices equipped to the cylinders made by our
2. When the cylinder with buffer function is debugged, the cushion valve on
company. Customer shall choose them according to the action situation of
the cylinder cover shall be adjusted to the state that the cylinder has no
actual load. If both of the load and speed are higher, it is difficult to absorb the
rebound from low to high level according to load and speed. What shall be
impact only by the buffer of the cylinder. Therefore, buffer circuit must be
noticed is not to adjust the buffer to dead state in debugging the stroke,
designed or use external buffer to release the impact.
otherwise there will be poor buffer or damage of seals caused by piston
under high-speed situation.
Confirm whether the cylinder has magnet.

Whether the cylinder has sensor switch shall be confirmed according to the
actual situation and relative inducting switch shall be selected.
Selection of installation mode of the cylinder

Installation mode of the cylinder shall be selected according to the application
and installation requirements of the cylinder.
D Selection of connecting mode of piston rod of the cylinder

After the cylinder is pre-selected, it is necessary to check the stability of
piston rod (especially the piston rod is thinner, longer and larger) of the
cylinder according to different installation modes and the air consumption
under actual application condition shall be checked.
•fili
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~A
_c_t_u_a_to_r_c_o_m~p_o_n_en_t~~- c~~l=in~d=e==
r
13 Installation and Use
The axes of piston rod shall accord with the moving direction of load (coaxial}. It tends to bend in long stroke, thus the installation bracket shall be moved to
Piston rod and cylinder will produce opposite force which can easily damage the front cover
the internal surface of the cylinder, guide sleeve, the surface of piston rod and seals.
The support bracket shall be moved to the front

---- -
------------
- -- - --- ---
-. -·
Avoid direct connection of piston rod and vertical gravity: add idler wheel to The fixed cylinder shall not be connected with the rocker carrying out circular
support the rail. Piston rod and cylinder will produce opposite force which can action (LB fixation). At this time, it shall be connected with swing cylinder
easily bend piston rod and damage the internal surface of the cylinder, guide sleeve, (CAICBITC fixation)
the surface of piston rod and seals. 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - r - - - - - - - - - - - - - , Cylinder
If back activity hinge is far from force supply point, piston rod will be influenced If the height (H) between installation surface of bearing bracket and the position
by torque force. To prevent that, middle action support shall be used to shorten of bearing is too great, when cylinder works, the installation part of the support
the distance between support point and force supply point. will produce great torque force, which may cause damage to installing bolt and
other parts
-
To prevent that back activity hinge is far from force supply point, thus the piston
rod will be influenced by torque force and change to use middle action support
to shorten the long distance between support point and force supply point.
-
IJ Proper installation shall be adopted considering the direction of load
(flange type installation)
Using in extrusion Using in extrusion
X
~I I~ / X
v
lJ iiloa ; Using in pullback Using in pullback
Long-stroke cylinder shall set middle guide support to prevent natural droop
X
of piston rod and to prevent the damage on piston rod caused by the droop of
piston rod, bend of the cylinder, vibration and external load.
Using in extrusion Using in pullback
JJ
•ti•
Memo AlrTAC
Note
Cylinder
•N•
Standard cylinder--SE Series
In accordance with 1$015552 and VDMA24562 standard
D Product series
Mounting type Collocation of sensor switch
Series name
Basic LB FA FB CA CB CR TC FTC CS1-E DS1-E
Double acting type: SE
32
40
Double rod type: SED 50
Double 63
acting
80
100
Adjustable stroke type: SEJ 125
SE
176 178 457

1. When load changes in the work, the cylinder with abundant output capacity shall be selected.
2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition of high temperature
or corrosion.
3. Necessary protection measure shall be taken in the environment with higher humidity, much dust or water drops, oil dust and
welding dregs.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of particles
into the cylinder.
5. The medium used by cylinder shall be filtered to 40 µ m or below.
6. Anti-freezing measure shall be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent moisture freezing.
7. The cylinder shall be carried out test run without load before application. Prior to run, buffer shall be turned to the minimum and
gradually released to avoid the damage on cylinder caused by excessive impact.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal work of cylinder and extend the service life.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust caps shall be
added in air inlet and ouUet ports.
D Criteria for selection: Cylinder thrust Unit: Newton(N)
acting Pull side 690 207.0 276.0 345.0 552.0

Double Push side 1256 125.6 251.2 376.8 502.4 628.0 753.6 879.2 1002.4 1130.4
40 16 acting Pull side 1055 105.5 211.0 316.5 422.0 527.5 633.0 738.5 844.0 949.5
Double Push side 1963 196.3 392.6 588.9 785.2 981.5 1177.8 1374.1 1570.4 1766.7
50 20 acting Pull side 1649 164.9 329.8 494.7 659.6 824.5 989.4 1154.3 1399.2 1484.1
Double Push side 3117 311 .7 623.4 935.1 1246.8 1558.5 1870.2 2181 .9 2493.6 2805.3
63 20 acting Pull side 2803 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121 .2 1401.5 1681.8 1962.1 2242.4 2522.7
Double Push side 5026 502.6 1005.2 1507.8 2010.4 2513.0 3015.6 3518.2 4020.8 4523.4
80 25 acting Pull side 4536 453.6 907.2 1360.8 1814.4 2268.0 2721.6 3175.2 3628.8 4082.4
Double Push side 7853 785.3 1570.6 2355.9 3141 .2 3926.5 4711.8 4288.2 6282.4 7067.7
100 25 acting Pull side 7362 736.2 1472.4 2208.6 2948.6 3681.0 4417.2 5153.4 5889.6 6625.8
Double Push side 12272 1227.2 2454.4 3681 .6 4908.8 6136.0 7363.2 8590.4 9817.6 11044.8
125 32 acting Pull side 11468 1146.8 2293.6 3440.4 4587.2 5734.0 6880.8 8027.6 9174.4 10321.2
•f4-ii
IS015552 Standard cylinder AlrTAC
SE Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Actinq type Double actinq
Mounting lsE Basic FA FB CA CB CR LB TC FTC TCM1 TCM2
type ISED, SEJ Basic FA LB TC FTC TCM1 TCM2
Operatinq pressure 0.1 -1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psi)(15bar)
Speed range mm/s 30-800 I 3o-soo
Stroke tolerance 0-250•1, 0 251-1000•), 5 1001-1500·~·0
Cushion type Variable cushion
Adjustable cushion stroke mm 27 I 30 I 36 I 40
Port size CD 1/8" I 1/4' I 318" I 112"
Add) Refer to P457 -480 for detail of sensor switch.
SE SED SEJ
SE ~ 00 00 4,
SE-S SED-S SEJ-S
~ 00 00 4' 32 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1000 1800
40 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 1200 1800
50 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1800
D Product feature 63 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
1. IS015552 and VDMA24562 standard cylinder; 80 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
2. The piston seal is composed of two Y-shape one-way seal structure, which 100 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
has compensation function, long service life and low start-up pressure; 125 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
3. The square aluminum pipe without tie rod has good corrosion resistance; Note) Consult us for non- standard stroke.
4. The buffer adjustment of cylinder is smooth and steady;
5. Cylinders and accessories for installation with several specifications are D Ordering code
optional.
pe
SE: Double acting type
SED: Double rod type
SEJ: Adjustable stroke type
Bore size Seals Material

!32 40 50 63 80 100 125 I Blank: TPU
H: Viton
Rod Material N: NBR
Blank: Medium carbon steel
A: SUS420J2 CD
B: SUS304 Mounting type
C: SUS316 Mounting Available
Memo
ltvPe series
Stroke Blank "1:CJJ
IRefer to stroke table for details I SE
Adjustable stroke
LB "!iCJl SED
SEJ
10: 10mm FA ,,tc::::JJ
20: 20mm
30: 30mm FB «!q
40: 40mm
50: 50mm CA o,[(D}, mi
75: 75mm SE
100: 100mm CB ~Dl_ill
Be used
Ma net
CR ~ with CB
Blank: Without magnet
S: With magnet
FTC ~ SE Be used
SED withTCM1
TC ..:[@] SEJ TCM2
G) Please refer to page 178-180 for accessory parts.
•flli
SE Series
D Inner structure and material of major parts D Dimensions
l:'131
1. '- .a 1. 5.. 2-. Z a, .9..1.QU µ P JA .~ )..6
AE NA
~el
l~lt
1 Rod nut Carbon steel\Stainless steel
a,
a.
•ET
PA
z
e
2
3
Piston rod
Carbon steel with 20 µ m chrome plated
or Stainless steel
Front cover packing TPU
:
32
.. 142
•:
48
.
94
•I
27.5 27.5
=-•-•·
46.512 29 M10•1 .25 22
4 Front cover Aluminum alloy 40 159 54 105 32 32 54 16 33 M12•1 .25 24
5 Bushing Wear resistant material 50 175 69 106 31 31 64 20 42 M16•1.5 32
6 Cushinq 0-rinq TPU 63 190 69 121 33 33 75 20 42 M16•1.5 32
SE
7 Barrel Aluminum alloy 80 214 86 128 33 33 93 25 53 M20•1 .5 40
8 0-ring NBR 100 229 91 138 37 37 110 25 55 M20•1 .5 40
9
10
11
Piston
Piston Seal
Wear ring
Aluminum alloy
TPU
Wear resistant material
125
:
32
.. 279
17 6
119
10
160
M6
46
16
46
:
32.5
134
30
32
19 30
74
3
M27•2.0
.
1/8"
..
13.5
54
6
•=•
12 Magnet Plastic\Rubber( CD 125)
40 17 7 13 M6 16 38 35 21 35 3.5 1/4" 17.5 6
13 Bolt Carbon stee I
50 23 8 17 M8 16 46.5 40 27 40 3.5 1/4" 14 8
14 Buffer gasket TPU
63 23 8 17 M8 16 56.5 45 27 45 4 3/8" 17 8
15 Back cover Aluminum alloy
16 Screw Carbon steel\Stainless steel 80 26 10 22 M10 17 72 45 33 45 4 3/8" 16.5 8
100 26 10 22 M10 17 89 55 36 55 4 1/2" 19.5 10
125 41 13.5 27 M12 20 110 60 45 60 4 1/2" 23 11
Remark: The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder.
32 190 188 48 94 29 27 M10X1 .25 6

40 213 208 54 105 33 28 M12X1 .25
50 244 231 69 106 42 29 M16X1.5
63 259 246 69 121 42 29 M16X1.5
80 300 282.5 86 128 53 35.5 M20X1 .5 10
100 320 300 .5 91 138 55 35 .5 M20X1 .5 10
125 398 366.5 119 160 74 42.5 M27X2.0 13.5
Remark:
1. The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder.
2. The unmarked dimension is the same as SE standard type.
•fl•
Accessories
D Ordering code Dimensions
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
ri-~ :==:::::_·::::::_·::::::=·===- rrr

CA CA type
Mounting CB · CB type®
L;:! !__ _
Model
accessory TC; TC type
Bore size
<D The listed accessories are for SE cylinder. Accessories that are adaptable AD
to other cylinders are not shown. Please refer to accessory list on P180 for AC+Stroke
AA+Stroke
selection and ordering information.
® CB is attached with relevant PIN. :, - •I
..
32 142 94 158 142 8 47 32 24 32 7
40 159 105 179 161 9 53 36 28 36 9 3
50 175 106 190 170 10 65 45 32 45 9
Cylinder model SE SED SEJ 63 190 121 209 185 12 75 50 32 50 9 3
Accessories Standard With magnet Standard With magnet Standard With magnet 80 214 128 248 210 19 95 63 41 63 12.5 4
SE LB
FA
•• •• •• •• •• •• 100
125
229
279
138
160
266
290
228 19
250 20
115
140
75
90
45
45
71
90
14.5
16.5
4
8
s::
0
C:
FB
CA
•• •••
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X A+Stroke
~-
:::,
<C
0)
CB
CR
•• ••
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
BB
-
C+Stroke
•• •• •• •• ••
(")
(")
~
TC
••
------------------------ .. ----
"'
0 FTC
'< TCM1
TCM2
•• •• ••• ••• •• •• ·:J--.c,I
E-H~;_ ·~)\ !@
:,
..
•• •• ••
- 1-- - - • ..
;,s
" :..;:} , ,,, ''' ''' --1{j}
~
~ y
•• •• •• ••
•• •••
,.- u
••• • ••
<D F
u,
CS1-E X X X
~
"'
Q
CS1-EX x X
•• X
•• A+Stroke
•••
DS1-E X X X
l0 C+Stroke BB
(2)
DS1-EN x
DS1-EP x
X
X
•• X
X
••
<D Please refer to P453- 456 for knuckle detail,
® Please refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch .
D Material of accessories
• - Aluminum alloy, A - -S45C, • - cast steel,

:
32
.. 142 94
;.-1
30.5
..
10
:
47
:I
32
:
80
:
64
:•
7 32.5
0 - Low carbon steel, <>---Nodular cast iron, 0 - Carbon steel.
40 159 105 35.5 10 53 36 90 72 9 38
50 175 106 40.5 12 65 45 108 90 9 46.5
63 190 121 45.5 12 75 50 118 100 9 56.5
80 214 128 45.5 16 95 63 150 126 12.5 72
100 229 138 55.5 16 115 75 176 150 14.5 89
125 279 160 60.5 20 139 90 218 180 16.5 110
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
- ~.~r~ ~~~:=_:~:=:=-f;~,
----~
+-
~-t_ \,_~1 ------------ -,..~,
---- ------------ --- -
:, -
32 142 94 46.5 32.5
I
22
.
10.5
I
10
I
13
...
25.8
40 159 105 54 38 25 12 12 16 27.8
50 175 106 64 46.5 27 12 12 17 31 .7
63 190 121 75 56.5 32 15 16 22 39.7
80 214 128 93 72 36 15.5 16 22 49.7
100 229 138 110 89 41 20 20 27 59.7
125 279 160 134 110 50 24 25 33 69.7
Accessories
PA1
~ K
A+Stroke
A+Stroke
C+Stroke .f.L
+ ~~r~+i. l~=~==
'--li _
-~=~iit-l ~
----
::::::::::::
------------ ---
" ~ to
:, . :, . I
32 142 94 22 10.5 10 13 26 45 51 45.5 46.5 32.5 32 142 94 19 66 40 11 9 60 80 52 12 20 50 62 77 12

40 159 105 25 12 12 16 28 52 59 52.5 54 38 40 159 105 21 86.5 54 11 12 75 100 65 16 27 63 79 98 16
50 175 106 27 12 12 17 32 60 67 60.5 64 46.5 50 175 106 26 91.5 54 11 12 75 100 75 16 31 75 91 110 16
63 190 121 32 15 16 22 40 70 77 70.5 75 56.5 63 190 121 28 115 70 11 12 85 110 90 20 42 90 110 133 20
80 214 128 36 15.5 16 22 50 90 97 90.5 93 72 80 214 128 31 126 70 11 12 85 110 112 20 54 110 130 153 20 SE
100 229 138 41 20 20 27 60 110 119 110.5 110 89 100 229 138 35 157.5 90 19 18 115 155 135 25 68 135 157 185 25
125 279 160 50 24 25 33 70 130 139 130.5 134 110 125 279 160 43 169.3 90 19 18 115 155 170 25 80 160 185 213 25
Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
m A+Stroke
A+Stroke
I I H I l
I
:,
32
40
.
142
159
..
32
36
:
26
28
94 10 50
105 12 56
·---·
10
12
21
24
18
22
31
35
8
10
38
41
51 6.6
54 6.6 -
:,
32
40
. ..
142 14 52
159 17 65
:--·
12
16
I
20
27
50
63
66
82
80
99
32
36
46
55
11
15
7
9
30
36
50 175 45 32 106 12 68 13 33 30 45 12 50 65 9 - 50 175 17 75 16 31 75 94 111 36 55 15 9 36
63 190 50 40 121 16 77 17 37 35 50 12 52 67 9 63 190 20.5 90 20 42 90 113.5 134 42 65 18 11 40
80 214 63 50 128 16 93 19 47 40 60 14 66 86 11 18 80 214 20.5 112 20 54 110 133.5 154 42 65 18 11 40
100 229 71 60 138 20 106 22 55 50 70 15 76 96 11 18 100 229 24.5 135 25 68 132 159.5 184 50 75 20 14 50
125 279 90 70 160 25 135 26 70 60 90 20 94 124 14 20 125 279 24.5 170 25 80 160 187.5 212 50 75 20 14 50
Note) CR can't be used alone, it must be used with CB. Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
A+ Stroke
A+Stroke
K C+Stroke
ill , --- (? i>i

!
I Ir::~=
. ,-------,
Y'! ,
---i --1-- ~61
t=
~ i ./
------
:
32
.. 142 94
..
74
:--·-·
50 12 32.546 19 10
:, .
32
. .
142
..
74 94 12 52 31 68
G
40 159 105 95 63 16 38 52 21 10 40 159 95 105 16 63 33 78

50 175 106 107 75 16 46.564 26 12 50 175 107 106 16 75 35 95
63 190 121 130 90 20 56.574 28 12 63 190 130 121 20 90 37 108
80 214 128 150 110 20 72 94 31 16 80 214 150 128 20 110 41 130
100 229 138 182 132 25 89 114 35 16 100 229 182 138 25 132 47 148
125 279 160 210 160 25 110 139 43 20 125 279 210 160 25 160 51 173
•fdi
Accessories
D List for ordering code of accessories How to mount TC bracket
Accessories Mounting accessory The process of mounting
Bore size LB FA FB CA
32 F-S132LB F-S132FA F-SE32CA
80 F-S180LB F-S180FA F-SEBOCA ~ Clamp block
~
100 F-S1100LB F-S1100FA F-SE100CA
125 F-S1125LB F-S1125FA F-SE125CA
Accessories Mounting accessory The barrel of SE series
Bore size CB CR TC G)
F-SE32CB F-S132CR F-SE32TC TC bracket
F-SE40CB F-S140CR F-SE40TC
F-SE50CB F-S150CR F-SE50TC
F-SE63CB F-S163CR F-SE63TC ~ 0 ----
F-SEBOCB F-S180CR F-SEBOTC ~~'9,-l- -- --O=
SE 100 F-SE100CB F-S1100CR F-SE100TC
125 F-SE125CB F-S1125CR F-SE125TC
.----0=
Accessories
Bore size FTC
Mounting accessory
TCM1 TCM2
~ o-
32 F-S132FTC F-S132TCM1 F-S132TCM2 oment M(N .ml
Max. 1ockin9 m
40 F-S140FTC F-S140TCM1 F-S140TCM2
100 F-S1100FTC F-S1125TCM1 F-SI 125TCM2 The accomplished of mounting
125 F-S1125FTC F-S1125TCM1 F-SI 125TCM2
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size I: I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F. F Knuckle U: U Knuckle
32 F-M10X1251 F-M10X125Y F-M10X125F F-M10X125U
80 F-M20X1501 F-M20X150Y F-M20X1S0F F-M20X150U
100 F-M20X1501 F-M20X150Y F-M20X1S0F F-M20X150U
125 F-M27X2001 F-M27X200Y F-M27X200U
Please install TC bracket by below steps:

G) Hitched half of TC bracket over the barrel, and adjust it to the adapted position .
(2) Insert the both sides pin of the TC bracket.
® Aimed another half of TC bracket's pin hole at pin and hitched another half of TC
bracket over the barrel.
@ Posting clamp block in the four nook of TC bracket by upper picture.
@ Screw down eight locked screws from side face of TC bracket, and lock TC
bracket with the max. locking moment of below table . the static clamp force(F)
as below table:
Bore size Max . locking moment M(N .m) Static clamp force F(N)
32 3 800
40 6 1200
50 6 2000
63 12 3000
80 20 5000
100 20 8000
125 30 12000
Standard cylinder--SI Series
In accordance with 1$015552 standard
Product series
Series name
Basic LB FA FB CA CB CR TC FTC CS1-B DS1-B CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
Double acting type: SI
32
40
Double rod type: SID 50
63
Double
acting 80
100
125
160
200
With valve type: SIF 32

40
Double
1--_.1--.---41----~----------...._,-----1 acting
Page 182 186 457
D Installation and application A

or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the nonmal work of cylinder and extend the service life.
added in air inlet and outlet ports.
138.0 207.0 276.0 345.0 414.0 483.0 552.0 621.0

125.6 251.2 376.8 502.4 628.0 753.6 879.2 1002.4 1130.4
40 16 acting Pull side 1055 105.5 211.0 316.5 422.0 527.5 633.0 738.5 844.0 949.5
Double Push side 1963 196.3 392.6 588.9 785.2 981.5 1177.8 1374.1 1570.4 1766.7
50 20 acting Pull side 1649 164.9 329.8 494.7 659.6 824.5 989.4 1154.3 1399.2 1484.1
Double Push side 3117 311.7 623.4 935.1 1246.8 1558.5 1870.2 2181.9 2493.6 2805.3
63 20 acting Pull side 2803 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121 .2 1401 .5 1681.8 1962.1 2242.4 2522.7
Double Push side 5026 502.6 1005.2 1507.8 2010.4 2513.0 3015.6 3518.2 4020.8 4523.4
80 25 acting Pull side 4536 453.6 907.2 1360.8 1814.4 2268.0 2721.6 3175.2 3628.8 4082.4
Double Push side 7853 785.3 1570.6 2355.9 3141 .2 3926.5 4711.8 4288.2 6282.4 7067.7
100 25 acting Pull side 7362 736.2 1472.4 2208.6 2948.6 3681 .0 4417.2 5153.4 5889.6 6625.8
Double Push side 12272 1227.2 2454.4 3681.6 4908.8 6136.0 7363.2 8590.4 9817.6 11044.8
125 32 acting Pull side 11468 1146.8 2293.6 3440.4 4587.2 5734.0 6880.8 8027.6 9174.4 10321.
Double Push side 20106 2010.6 4021.2 6031 .8 8042.4 10053.0 12063.6 14074. 16084.
160 40 acting Pull side 18849 1884.9 3769.8 5654.7 7539.6 9424.5 11309.4 13194. 15079.
Double Push side 31416 3141 .6 6283.2 9424.8 12566.
200 40 acting Pull side 30157
•1:1•
SI Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200
Actino tvoe Double acting
Mounting ISI Basic FA FB CA CB CR LB TC FTC TCM1 TCM2
type ISID, SIJ Basic FA LB TC FTC TCM1 TCM2
Operating pressure 0. 1-1.0MPa(1 5-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Proof oressure 1.5MPa(215psi)(15bar)
Speed range mm/s 30-800 I 30-500
Stroke tolerance 0-250·~ 0 251-1000·~ 5 1001 - 1500 ·~· 0
Cushion tvoe Variable cushion
Adiustable cushion stroke mm 27 I 30 I 36 I 40 I 50
Port size CD 118" I 1/4" I 3/8" I 1/2" I 3/4"
SI SID SIJ
~ 00 QE4<
51
SI-S SID-S SIJ-S
~ 00 Qlf,]4'
40 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 1200 1800
50 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1800
80 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
1. IS015552 (original IS06431 ) standard cylinder; 100 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
2. The piston seal is composed of two Y-shape one-way seal structure, 125 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
which has compensation function, long service life and low start-up 160 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
pressure; 200 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
3. The *-shaped aluminum pipe without tie rod has good corrosion Note) Consult us for non- standard stroke.
esistance;
4. The buffer adjustment of cylinder is smooth and steady;
5. Cylinders and accessories for installation with several specifications are
D Ordering code
optional.
SI: Double acting type

SID: Double rod type
SIJ: Adjustable stroke type

I32 40 50 63 80 1oo 125 160 200 I Blank: TPU
H: Viton
Rod Material N: NBR
Blank: Medium carbon steel
A: SUS420J2 Mounting type CD
B: SUS304 Mounting Available
Memo
type series
Blank ..q:cJJ
Stroke SI
IRefer to stroke table for details I LB ~ SID
SIJ
Adjustable stroke
10: 10mm
FA '4t::JJ
20: 20mm FB ~
30: 30mm
40: 40mm CA ~ml
50: 50mm SI
75: 75mm CB ~ llll
100: 100mm Be used
CR
~ with CB
Ma net
FTC <§:CJ] SI Be used
SID with TCM1
S: With magnet TC <([ljd] SIJ TCM2
G) Please refer to page 186- 188 for accessory parts.
SI Series
1:11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A+Stroke
~~
1~1,
1 Rod nut Carbon steel
Carbon steel with 20 µ mchrome plated
2
3
4
Piston rod
Front cover
or Stainless steel
Front cover packing TPU
Aluminum alloy
:
32
.. 142
··--:
48 94
..•
27.5 27.5
:
47
I
12
I•
29 M10x1 .25 22 17 6 30 19
7
5 Bushing Wear resistant material 40 159 54 105 32 32 53 16 33 M12x1 .25 24 17 7 35 21
6 Cushinq 0-rinq TPU 50 175 69 106 31 31 65 20 42 M16•1 .5 32 23 8 40 27
SI
7 Barrel Aluminum alloy 63 190 69 121 33 33 75 20 42 M16x1.5 32 23 8 45 27
8 Rod 0-ring NBR 80 214 86 128 33 33 95 25 53 M20•1.5 40 26 10 45 33
9 Piston Aluminum alloy 100 229 91 138 37 37 115 25 55 M20•1 .5 40 26 10 55 36
10 Piston seal TPU 125 279 119 160 46 46 140 32 74 M27•2.0 54 41 13.5 60 45
11 Wear ring Wear resistant material 160 332 152 180 50 50 180 40 94 M36•2.0 72 55 18 65 58
12 Magnet Plastic( 100 or below)\Rubber(other)
13
14
Bolt
Buffer gasket
Carbon steel
TPU
200
:u.
32
347
10 M6
167
.
180
MS
50 50
16
220 40
.100
14
M36•2.0
:
32.5
72 55
30 3
18
.
1/8"
75
13
67
.. ·=·
55
16 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel 40 13 M6 MS 16 16 38 35 3.5 1/4" 17 6
50 17 M8 M6 16 16 46.5 40 3.5 1/4" 15.5 7.5
63 17 M8 M6 16 16 56.5 45 4 3/8" 16.5 7.5
80 22 M10 M8 17 16 72 45 4 3/8" 16.5 9
100 22 M10 M8 17 16 89 55 4 1/2" 18.5 9.5
125 27 M12 M12 20 20 110 60 4 1/2" 23 14
160 36 M16 M16 24 24 140 65 4 3/4" 25 15
200 36 M16 M16 24 24 175 75 5 3/4" 25 15
A+Stroke x2
AB AC+Stroke
Cushion
A+Stroke x 2+Adjustable stroke

AB
DB+Ad'ustable stroke
32 190 188 48 94 29 27 M10X1 .25 6

40 213 208 54 105 33 28 M12X1 .25 7
50 244 231 69 106 42 29 M16X1 .5 8
63 259 246 69 121 42 29 M16X1 .5 8
80 300 282.5 86 128 53 35.5 M20X1 .5 10
100 320 300.5 91 138 55 35.5 M20X1 .5 10
125 398 366.5 119 160 74 42.5 M27X2.0 13.5
160 484 458 152 180 94 68 M36X2.0 18
200 514 482 167 180 100 68 M36X2.0 18
Remark :
2. The unmarked dimension is the same as SI standard type.
•i:BI
SIF Series{With valve)
Specification
Bore size(mm) 32 I 40
.. ..I .
50 63 I 80 I 100
Acting type Double actino
Mounting type Basic FA FB CA CB CR LB TC FTC TCM1 TCM2
Operating pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(1 5-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Temperature °C -20-80
Speed range mm/s 30-800
Stroke tolerance o-25o•k 0 251-1000•1 5 1001-1500+~.o
Cushion tvpe Variable cushion
D Symbol SIF SIF-S
Adjustable cushionstroke 27 I 30 I 36
~~
Port size 1/8" I 1/4" 3/8" I 1/2"
D Product feature
PU tube size(ODXID)
Model
. .... .. ..
.
4M210-06 & 4M210-08
<D8 x <05 I (D 10 X
4M31 0-08 & 4M310-10

<06.5

1.For Standard Cylinders: use 4M210 valve for bore size 32,40 & 50; 4M310
SIF valve for bore size 63,80 & 100mm; Acting type Internal piloted
2.lndividually control, no need for extra solenoid valves; ln=Exhaust=1/8' & ln=Exhaust= 1/4' &
Port size G)
ln=1/4" Exhaust=1/ 8' ln=PT3/ 8 Exhaust=1/4'
3.lnstallation time & space saving; suitable for decentralise installation in large
4M210-06: 14.0mm'(Cv=0.78) 4M310-08 : 25.0mm'(Cv=1.40)
system. Orifice size
4M21 0-08: 16.0mm' (Cv=0.89) 4M310-10: 30.0mm'(Cv=1.68)
4.0ptions of mounting accessories & easy installation.
Operating pressure 0.1 5-0.8MPa(21-114psi)
D Stroke Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psi)
Body material Aluminum alloy
Lubrication @ Not requined
50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250

1800 Max. frequency @
Standard voltage
5 cycle/sec
. .. .
4 cycle/ sec
300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 50 Scope voltage AC : ±15% DC: ±10%
= c=--c~ +1 - 0_0_12_5_1-50_1_60
_ 17-5-200
- 2-50_ 3_0_0_-+---1 1200 1800
Power consumption AC : 3.5VA DC: 3.0W
t e 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 100
50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175
Standard 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Temperature classification B Class
50
type 600 700 800 900 1000 Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
50 f - - - - t - c c - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - < 1200 1800 Activating time 0.05 sec and below
w·th TC 100 125150160175 200
t I 250 300 350 400 450 500 100 (j) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
ype 600 700 800 900 1000 (2) It cann't stop in the midway of lubricating. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or equivalent are recommended.
50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 @ The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
Standard 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 50 Add) Refer to P457 -480 for detail of sensor switch.
63 type 600 700 800 900 1000
80 t - - - - - - - < - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - < 1500 1800
100 w·th TC 100125150160 175 200 D Ordering code
t I 250 300 350 400 450 500 100
ype 600 700 800 900 1000
Note) Consult us for non-standard stroke.
Model e
!SIF: Double acting with valve type!
Bore size
132 40 50 63 80 100 I
Electrical entry
Stroke Blank: Terminal
IRefer to stroke table for details I I: Grommet
Magnet VoItage
Blank: Without magnet A:AC220V
S: With magnet B: DC24V
C:AC110V
G) Mountln t pe
E:AC24V
Mountin Available series Memo
F: DC12V
Blank: Standard type
LB: LB type
FA: FA type
FB: FB type
CA: CA type
CB: CB type SIF
>--- - - ----1
Be used
CR: CR type
with CB
FTC: FTC type Be used
withTCM1
TC: TC type TCM2
(j) Please refer to page 186-188 for accessory parts.
Mt:!•
SIF Series{With valve)
D Main combination D Dimensions

Pull when electrify
A+Stroke
AB
DA
E=El~~~~~~::::!!E!~M~A1 EA
111,
4-sides
1 4M series solenoid valve 6-sides
2 Unite block
3 APC series tube connector
4 PU tube Push when electrify
5 SI series cylinder
SIF
6 APH series tube connector
D How to use
1.0ptions for piston rod to retract or extend when solenoid coil is energized.
2.Default factory setting will be piston rod to retract when energized (see Drawing
one).Should you require piston rod to extend when energized, reposition the
solenoid valves as shown in Drawing two. AG
Pull when energized .

: -
32 142
'l•:
48 94
• I
27.5 27.5 117.5 53.5
:-:,r•-:,-:11
47 78.5 67 67.5 91 69
:-
40 159 54 105 32 32 120 51 53 82 67 70 97 75

50 175 69 106 31 31 118.5 52.5 65 89.5 67 74.5 109 87
63 190 69 121 33 33 137 53 75 94.5 69.5 79.5 124 97
80 214 86 128 33 33 137 53 95 105.5 69.5 88 144 117
100 229 91 138 37 37 137.5 52.5 115 118 69.5 96 164 137
Please amend drawing of cylinder piston

rod & cylinder symbol to extended position.
Push when energized

:,
32
40
-
·-··
12
16
29
33
M10X1 .25
M12X1 .25
22
24
17
17
6
7
10
13
30
35
19
21
30
35
3
3.5
50 20 42 M16X1.5 32 ~3 8 17 40 27 40 3.5
63 20 42 M16X1.5 32 ~3 B 17 45 27 45 4
BO 25 53 M20X1 .5 40 6 10 22 45 33 45 4
100 25 55 M20X1 .5 40 ~6 10 22 55 36 55 4
:, - lllllft:IIU •
4M210-06
, .. '
1/8"
' . =·
32 1/8" M6 M5 16
14 32.5
4M210-08 1/4"
4M210-06 1/8"
40 1/8" M6 M5 16 16 38
4M210-08 1/4"
4M210-06 1/8"
50 1/8" MB M6 16 16 46.5
4M210-08 1/4"
Ensure that the seals between the mounting block & valve 4M310-08 1/4"
QAttention are placed correctly when repositioning the valve. 63 1/4" MB M6 16 16 56 .5
4M310-10 3/8"
4M310-0B 1/4"
80 1/4" M10 MB 17 16 72
4M310-10 3/8"
4M310-08 1/4"
100 1/4" M10 MB 17 16 89
4M310-10 3/8"
Accessories
111111!'9!1,.... A+Stroke
C+Stroke
Accessory Accessorv tvoe

LB: LB type
Model FA: FA type
FB: FB type
Bore size CA: CA type
Mounting CB: CB type (2)
accessory CR: CR type
TC: TC type
FTC: FTC type
TCM1:TCM1 type
:, . '' • • .. .
32 142 94 158 142 8 47 32 24 32 7 3
TCM2: TCM2 type 40 159 105 179 161 9 53 36 28 36 9 3
50 175 106 190 170 10 65 45 32 45 9 3
<D Please refer to accessory list on P188 for selection and ordering information. 190 121 209 185 12 75 50 32
63 50 9 3
(2) CB is attached with relevant PIN.
80 214 128 248 21 0 19 95 63 41 63 12.5 4
100 229 138 266 220 19 115 75 41 71 14.5 4
SI D Accessory selection 125 279 160 290 250 20 140 90 45 90 16.5 8
160 332 180 340 300 20 180 115 60 115 18.5 8
200 347 180 380 320 30 220 135 70 135 24 9
A+Stroke
s::
FA
FB
•• •• • •
X X
• •
X X
BB C+Stroke
0
C:
;cl.
5·
CA
CB
•• •• X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(0
Q)
<">
<">
CR
TC
•• •• X
••
X
••
X
••
X
••
"'
"'"'
0
'<
FTC
TCM1
•• •• •• •• •• ••
~
TCM2
•• •• •• •• •• ••
C:
<">
y
•• ••
•• ••• •• •••
""
a, u A+Stroke
<D
en
F
CS1-B
•
X
•• X X
C+Stroke BB
DS1 - B X
•• X
•• X
••
*
~
~
CS1-F
DS1-F
X
X
••
X
X
••
X
X
••
Ir , ... ........... r
~ CS1-U X X X
~~j. ~ @f
.:. ::1:.:~'. --:, , .·.·.i ---,.----~ !~
' ·!.-.~} -
(2)
DS1-U X
• X
• X
• -- . 1
L--~\_ __ J, -,
-rs; :
1
:
1 , ,.
(I) Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail, : ________~

..---- -- ------ - -· ----i,
______________________
<ID Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
:, . : ·- :i:- :,-:i,- =·=-=•=-:·

32 142 94 30.5 10 47 32 80 64 7 32.5
40 159 105 35.5 10 53 36 90 72 9 38
50 175 106 40.5 12 65 45 108 90 9 46.5
63 190 121 45.5 12 75 50 118 100 9 56.5
•-Aluminum alloy, •-cast steel, 80 214 128 45.5 16 95 63 150 126 12.5 72
0 -Low carbon steel, <>-Nodular cast iron, D-Carbon steel. 100 229 138 55.5 16 115 75 176 150 14.5 89
125 279 160 60.5 20 139 90 218 180 16.5 110
160 332 180 65.5 20 180 115 280 230 18.5 140
200 347 180 75.5 25 220 135 320 270 24 175
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
--------
................. •----~--------
r-H:i(I. ---:;:rr @ !$
. . .. . . . . . .)(>
:, DC
32 142 94 47 32.5 22 9 10 13 25.8
40 159 105 52 38 25 10.5 12 16 27.8
50 175 106 64 46.5 27 11 12 17 31.7
63 190 121 74 56.5 32 13.5 16 22 39.7
80 214 128 94 72 36 14.5 16 22 49.7
100 229 138 113 89 41 17 20 27 59.7
125 279 160 139 110 50 22 25 33 69.7
160 332 180 180 140 55 30 30 35.5 89.7
200 347 180 220 175 60 30 30 37 89.7
Accessories
m
l~I
E- 3-
A+Stroke
:, . :, . .. '' : I
32 142 94 22 9 10 13 26 45 51 45.5 47 32.5 32 142 94 74 50 12 32.5 46 19 10
40 159 105 25 10.5 12 16 28 52 59 52.5 52 38 40 159 105 95 63 16 38 52 21 10
50 175 106 27 11 12 17 32 60 67 60.5 64 46.5 50 175 106 107 75 16 46.5 64 26 12
63 190 121 32 13 16 22 40 70 77 70.5 74 56.5 63 190 121 130 90 20 56.5 74 28 12 SI
80 214 128 36 14 16 22 50 90 97 90.5 94 72 80 214 128 150 110 20 72 94 31 16
100 229 138 41 17.5 20 27 60 110 119 110.5 113 89 100 229 138 182 132 25 89 114 35 16
125 279 160 50 21.5 25 33 70 130 139 130.5 139 110 125 279 160 210 160 25 110 139 43 20
160 332 180 55 30 30 35.5 90 170 181 170.5 180 140 160 332 180 264 200 32 140 179 56 20
200 347 180 60 30 30 36 90 170 181 170.5 220 175 200 347 180 314 250 32 175 218 64 20
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
dt:lT- :-~11-:--
L.-~ --
a ,- ,- (:,:!••: 1
r=,
------ ·------ <(
4-CDE 0
:, . .. :
32
40
50
142 32 26 94 10 50 10 21
159 36 28 105 12 56 12 24
175 45 32 106 12 68 13 33
18
22
30
31
35
45
8
10
12
38
41
50
51
54
65
6.6
6.6
9
-
- :
32
..
63 190 50 40 121 16 77 17 37 35 50 12 52 67 9 -
40 159 105 28 86.5 54 11 12 75 100 65 16 27 63 79 98 16
80 214 63 50 128 16 93 19 47 40 60 14 66 86 11 18
50 175 106 28 91 .5 54 11 12 75 100 75 16 31 75 91 110 16
100 229 71 60 138 20 106 22 55 50 70 15 76 96 11 18
63 190 121 30 115 70 11 12 85 110 90 20 42 90 110 133 20
125 279 90 70 160 25 135 26 70 60 90 20 94 124 14 20
80 214 128 32 126 70 11 12 85 110 112 20 54 110 130 153 20
160 332 115 90 180 30 171 25 97 88 126 25 118 156 14 20
100 229 138 38 157.5 90 19 18 115 155 135 25 68 132 157 185 25
200 347 135 90 180 30 185 31 105 90 130 30 122 162 18 26
125 279 160 40 175 90 19 18 115 155 170 25 80 160 185 213 25
Note) CR can't be used alone, it must be used with CB. 160 332 180 50 215 110 24 22 140 190 210 32 100 200 232 267 32
200 347 180 50 262.5 135 27 22 150 200 255 32 125 250 282 317 32
IS A+Stroke Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
JT C+Stroke When TCM1 be used with FTC, please refer to page 179.
11~
IA:11;r
I 1 1 1
rtt1(
l-ic~~:rokel/2
:, . I
32 142 94 12 52 50 74 22 47 3 32.5
40 159 105 16 65 63 95 28 53 3.5 38
50 175 106 16 75 75 107 28 65 3.5 46.5
63 190 121 20 90 90 130 30 75 4 56.5
80 214 128 20 112 110 150 32 95 4 72
100 229 138 25 135 132 182 38 115 4 89
125 279 160 25 170 160 210 40 140 4 110
160 332 180 32 210 200 264 50 180 4 140
200 347 180 32 255 250 314 50 220 5 175
Note) The TC accessory has been installed on the barrel of cylinder before it worked off,
and the position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
If consumer orders the TC solely, he will not install it on the barrel of standard cylinder
directly.
.JI 111:tll
Accessories
List for ordering code of accessories
B Accessories Mounting accessory
A+Stroke Bore size LB FA FB CA
H C+Stroke 32 F-S132LB F-S132FA F-S132CA
A
40 F-S140LB F-S140FA F-S140CA
50 F-S150LB F-S150FA F-S150CA
'
' 63 F-S163LB F-S163FA F-S163CA
@), ~ 80 F-S180LB F-S180FA F-S180CA
"w "4\El~Ztt 100

125
160
200
F-S1100LB
F-S1125LB
F-S1160LB
F-S1200LB
F-S1100FA
F-S1125FA
F-S1160FA
F-S1200FA
F-S11 00CA
F-S1125CA
F·S1160CA
F-S1200CA
Accessories Mounting accessory
Bore size CB CR TC
..
32 F-S132CB F-S132CR F-S132TC
: . . .. : . I
40
50
F-S140CB
F-S150CB
F-S140CR
F-S150CR
F-S140TC
F-S150TC
32 142 14 52 94 12 20 50 66 80 32 46 11 7 30
51 40 159 17 65 105 16 27 63 82 99 36 55 15 9 36 63 F-S163CB F-S163CR F-S163TC
50 175 17 75 106 16 31 75 94 111 36 55 15 9 36 80 F-S180CB F-S180CR F-S180TC
63 190 20.5 90 121 20 42 90 113.5 134 42 65 18 11 40 100 F-S1100CB F-S1100CR F-S1100TC
80 214 20.5 112 128 20 54 110 133.5 154 42 65 18 11 40 125 F-S1125CB F-S1125CR F-S1125TC
100 229 24.5 135 138 25 68 132 159.5 184 50 75 20 14 50 160 F-S1160CB F-S1160CR F-S1160TC
125 279 24.5 170 160 25 80 160 187.5 212 50 75 20 14 50 200 F-S1200CB F-S1200CR F-S1200TC
160 332 30 210 180 32 100 200 234 264 60 92 26 18 60
200 347 30 255 180 32 125 250 284 314 60 92 26 18 60
Bore size FTC TCM1 TCM2
When TCM2 be used with FTC, please refer lo page 179. 32 F-S132FTC F-S132TCM1 F-S132TCM2
100 F-S1100FTC F-SI 125TCM1 F-S1125TCM2
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size 1· I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F· F Knuckle U: U Knuckle
32 F-M10X1251 F-M1 0X125Y F-M10X125F F-M10X125U
50 F-M16X15D1 F-M1 6X150Y F-M16X150F F-M16X150U
125 F-M27X20D1 F-M27X200Y F-M27X200U
160 F-M36X20D1 F-M36X200Y F-M36X200U
200 F-M36X20D1 F-M36X200Y F-M36X200U
Accessories Sensor switch
Bore size CS1-BD DS1-BD CS1-F DS1 - F CS1-U DS1-U
32 CS1-B1 DS1-B1
40 CS1-B1 DS1-B1
50 CS1-B2 DS1-B2
63 CS1 - B2 DS1 - B2
80 CS1 - B3 DS1 - B3 CS1 - F DS1 - F CS1 - U DS1 - U
100 CS1-B4 DS1-B4
125 CS1 - B5 DS1 - B5
160 CS1- B6 DS1 - B6
200 CS1-B7 DS1-B7
Standard cylinder--SGC Series
In accordance with 1$015552 standard
D Product series
Series name
Basic LB FA FB CA CB CR TC FTC CS1-B DS1-B
Double acting type: SGC
Double rod type: SGCD 125 1------....--------1

----------+--+---+---+-------1 acting
Double
160 r-------11...,_---t.,_J(lj
200 f------>----t------f
250 f------>----t------1
SGC
Page 190 192 457

or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the norrral work of cylinder and extend the service life.
Double Push side 12272

acting Pull side 11468
250 50 acting 23757.8 28470.1 33182.4 37894.7 42607.0
Pull side 471 23
SGC Series
Specification
Bore size(mm) 125 160 200 250
Acting type Double acting
Mounting ISGC Basic FA FB CA CB CR LB TC FTC TCM1 TCM2
type ISGCD, SGCJ Basic FA LB TC FTC TCM1 TCM2
Operating pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-1 a.Obar)
Stroke tolerance 0- 250·~ 0 251 - 1000·~-5 1001-15oo·i 0
Adjustable cushion stroke mm 40 I 50 I 60
Port size G) 1/2" I 3/4" I 1"
D Symbol G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT threadare available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
SGC SGCD SGCJ
SGC -Stl 00 00·•·

SGC-S SGCD-S SGCJ-S
--B(l 00 00 j< 125 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
160 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
200 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
D Product feature 250 25 50 75 801001251 501 60 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
1. IS015552 (original IS06431 ) standard cylinder. Note) Consult us for non-standard stroke.
2. The piston seal is composed of two Y-shape seals of single-direction
structure, which has compensation function , long service life and low
start-up pressure.
3. SGC series cylinders are made of aluminum pipe.
4. The buffer adjustment of cylinder is smooth and steady.
5. Cylinders and accessories for installation with several specifications are
optional.
6. The seal material with high temperature resistance is adopted to guarantee
the normal operation of cylinder at 150°C.
SGC: Double acting type

(Aluminum barrel)
SGCD: Double rod type
(Aluminum barrel)
SGCJ: Adjustable stroke type
(Aluminum barrel) Seals Material
Blank:TPU (Z)
H: Viton
Bore size N:NBR
1125 160 200 250 I
Mounting type G)
Stroke
IRefer to stroke table for details I Mounting
e
Available
series
Memo
Ad' ustable stroke Blank ..:[CJ)

10: 10mm
20: 20mm
LB "S[CJl SGC
30: 30mm SGCD
SGCJ FA ..[C:JJ SGCJ
40: 40mm
50: 50mm FTC ~ Be used
75: 75mm withTCM1
100: 100mm TC ..::[00) TCM2
Others No this code
FB ~
Magnet CA ...::[D)~ SGC
SGC, SGCD Blank: Without magnet
SGCJ S: With magnet CB ~
Others No this code
Be used
CR ..:r:m. with CB
(Z) TPU seals are not available for SGC250.
SGC Series
.rr Tl n,.
1:1!1!11
1
\'1)1 A+Stroke
t
~\ ~_J_~--
.. \ \
t[)i_ ~LL_L-:1:
D ~~ ;11r15
1
..
AB AC+Stroke
.._) L__
~ ·
J1'
=-- ~ ~ 17
R - -1- - · ·<-++
E
1~1,
2
3
4
Piston rod
Bushing
Front cover packing NBR(SGC250)\TPU(Other)
=·.
125
160
279
332
•:
119 160
152 180
··- ··=-=-•-• ·
46
50
46
50
140
180
32
40
74
94
M27x2.0
M36x2.0
54
72
41
55
13.5
18
5 Front cover Aluminum alloy M36x2.0
200 347 167 180 50 50 220 40 100 72 55 18
6 Aluminum pipe Aluminum alloy
250 389 189 200 58 58 282 50 11 1 M42x2.0 84 65 21 SGC
7
8
0-ring
Piston seal
NBR
NBR
=·. : . ., ·:-
125 27 M12 20 110 60 45 60 4 1/2" 23 14
9 Wear ring Wear resistant material
160 36 M16 24 140 65 58 65 4 3/4' 25 15
10 Magnet Rubber
200 36 M16 24 175 75 67 75 5 3/4" 25 15
11 Piston Aluminum alloy
250 46 M20 25 220 90 78 90 8 1" 31 22
12 0-ring NBR
13 Cushion 0-ring NBR(SGC250)\TPU(Other)
16 Tie-rod Carbon steel A+Stroke x 2
17 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel AB AC+Stroke AB+Stroke
DA Cushion DA+Stroke
A+Stroke x 2+Ad·ustable stroke
125 398 366 .5 119 160 74 42.5 M27X2.0 13.5

160 484 458 152 180 94 68 M36X2.0 18
200 514 482 167 180 100 68 M36X2.0 18
250 578 547 189 200 11 1 80 M42X2.0 21
Remark:
2. The unmarked dimension is the same as SGC standard type.
•N•
Accessories
D Ordering code
1!111!!1~~!1'-!
A+Stroke
Accessory Accessory type G)
FA: FA type
Model Mounting TC: TC type
accessory TCM1 : TCM1 type
Bore size TCM2: TCM2 type
G) The listed accessories are for SG cylinder. Accessories that are adaptable
to other cylinders are not shown. Please refer to accessory list on P194 for AG AD
selection and ordering information. AC+Stroke
D Accessory selection
Accessories
Cylinder model
Standard
SGC SGCD,SGCJ
With magnet Standard With magnet
:..
125 279 160
,,
290 250
.
20
. 140 90 45
AA+Stroke
90
..
16.5 8
160 332 180 340 300 20 180 115 60 115 18.5 8
LB
FA
•• •• •• •• 200
250
347
389
180
200
380
410
320
350
30
30
220
275
135
165
70
75
135
165
24
28
9
19
SGC FB
CA
•• •• X
X
X
X
Mounting
CB
CR
•• •• X
X
X
X BB
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
accessory TC
FTC
•• •• •• ••
TCM1
TCM2
•• •• •• •••
••• ••• ••• -Et~~: -€'11.:----=---==+-+~] ,
I
Knuckle
G)
y
u
•• l....... - -
1/ _,
-~
~
'
Sensor
CS1-B
CS1-BX
X
X
•• X
X
•• '
switch
(2)
DS1-B
DS1-BN
X
X
•• X
X
••
DS1-BP X
<D Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail,

• X
• A+Stroke
C+Stroke BB
® Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch .
4~--~1c?j ------~G1-
: t--- ------- --------------I ·----
L_______________ J--------------------------------1._______________
•--Aluminum alloy, •-cast steel,

D - -Carbon steel, x - -No this type.
:..
125 279 160
:•1
60.5
..
20
:
139
:t
90
:
218
:
180
.
16.5 110
160 332 180 65.5 20 180 115 280 230 18.5 140
200 347 180 75.5 25 220 135 320 270 24 175
250 389 200 90.5 25 270 165 380 330 26 220
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
~ -lc{§}f- - =~--==i~- -=,---

'
- ---+------- - - - - - - ,- -- ---
, ••• OOOOHOOOU.OO• • • ••• •••••••• • • ,
..
125
.
279 160 139 110
• 22•1•- 25
50 ··-· 33
.,
69.7
160 332 180 180 140 55 30 30 35.5 89.7
200 347 180 220 175 60 30 30 37 89.7
250 389 200 270 220 70 35 40 46 109.5
Accessories
~ fill!
PA1 / ~-~ t-rJ>

A+Stroke
C+Stroke
111---~1 I PA1
PB1 I
\ - ~DD
- 3-
(Applied to: Cll 125-200)
Fl+
(Applied to: Cll250)
--~ ' ' '
' ' ::
A+Stroke
C+Stroke __f,!_, tf+------)i1)-+i
r€~r ==
~---------------, r·---------------1---+-I~-~
-----~_:::-_::::::.-::::.=---=_::::::+-------V
{{J=@~
- __ : -- --+- --- --- - :- - - ~-h-fl---+i,-i,1.----'-
=1~'1) ~ . , ~" L •••••••••••••••..I
______________ J ' ----------------'--"'!'I~+-'~~
:, - :, -
125 279 160 50 21.5 25 31 70 130 139 130.5 139 110 125 279 160 210 139 43 20
160 332 180 55 30 30 35.5 90 170 181 170.5 180 140 160 332 180 264 179 56 20 SGC
200 347 180 60 30 30 36 90 170 181 170.5 220 175 200 347 180 314 218 64 20
250 389 200 70 35 40 46 110.3 200 230 208 270 220
B A B
Cl
e
I I ~ I I '
~ :, - .. : • .
• 199
:, - .I ·.1• : ·---· 125 160 25 40 25 19 18 185 213 169.3 90 115 155 119 160 80
125 279 90 70 1160 125 135 126 170 160 190 20 94 124 114 20 160 200 32 46 32 24 22 232 267 208.8 110 140 190 152 180 90 242
160 332 115 90 1180 130 171 125 197 188 I126 25 118 156 I14 20 200 250 32 46 32 27 22 282 317 257.5 135 150 200 167 180 90 257
200 347 135 90 1180 130 185 131 1105 190 1130 30 122 162 118 26 250 320 40 56 40 27 22 360 400 312 160 170 220 189 200 100 289
Note) CR can't be used alone, it must be used with CB. Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
When TCM1 be used with FTC, please refer to page 179.
m
M N+Stroke
4- Cll !(Countersink)
H J+Stroke dp:J 4-Cll F thru _hole
"' - - - - --r --
---- -< I
-~~ -i
I I
I S
_J!1?:\"JL1:
:'~~
: :
~~~~j
"'
:, - :, - : • .
• 199
125 160 25 40 25 158.5 110 M12 119 80 160 199 125 160 24.5 25 50 14 187.5 212 20 14 50 75 119 160 80
160 200 32 46 32 197.5 140 M16 152 90 180 242 160 200 30 32 60 18 234 264 26 17.5 60 92 152 180 90 242
200 250 32 46 32 245 175 M16 167 90 180 257 200 250 30 32 60 18 284 314 26 17.5 60 92 167 180 90 257
250 320 40 56 40 304 220 M20 189 100 200 289 250 320 50 40 70 22 374 424 33 22 90 140 189 200 100 289
Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily. Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
When TCM2 be used with FTC, please refer to page 179.
•Ml
Accessories
D List for ordering code of accessories
125 F-S1125LB F-S1125FA F-S1125CA
160 F-S1160LB F-S1160FA F-S1160CA
200 F-S1200LB F-S1200FA F-S1200CA
250 F-SG250LB F-SG250FA F-SG250CA
Bore size CB CR TC
125 F-S1125CB F-S1125CR F-SG125TC
F-S1160CB F-S1160CR F-SG160TC
F-S1200CB F-S1200CR F-SG200TC
F-SG250CB F-SG250TC
Bore size FTC TCM1 TCM2
SGC 200 F-S1200FTC
!--~~~~-+-~~~~~-+-~~~~~-+-~~~~~~
F-S1200TCM1 F-S1160TCM2
250 F-SG250TCM1 F-SG250TCM2
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size I. I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle U U Knuckle
125 F-M27X2001 F-M27X200Y F-M27X200U
160 F-M36X2001 F-M36X200Y F-M36X200U
200 F-M36X2001 F-M36X200Y F-M36X200U
250 F-M42X2001 F-M42X200Y
Bore size CS1 - BD CS1 - BO X DS1 - BD DS1 - BD N DS1 - BD P
125 CS1 - B1 CS1 - B1X DS1 - B1 DS1 - B1N DS1 - B1P
160 CS1 - B8 CS1 - B8X DS1 - B8 DS1 - B8N DS1 - B8P
200 CS1-B8 CS1-B8X DS1-B8 DS1-B8N DS1-B8P
250 CS1-BS CS1-B5X DS1-BS DS1-BSN DS1-BSP
Standard cylinder--SU Series
Profile type
Product series
Series name
Basic LB FA FB CA CB TC CS1-B DS1-B CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
Double acting type: SU
Double rod type: SUD

32
40
50
Double
acting 63
80
100
With valve type:SUF 32

40
Double 50
acting
63
80
100
Page 196 200 209 457

or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
207.0 276.0 345.0

Double Push side 125.6 251.2 376.8 502.4 628.0 753.6 879.2
40 16 acting Pull side 1055 105.5 211.0 316.5 422.0 527.5 633.0 738.5 844.0 949.5
Double Push side 1963 196.3 392.6 588.9 785.2 981 .5 1177.8 1374.1 1570.4 1766.7
50 20 acting Pull side 1649 164.9 329.8 494.7 659.6 824.5 989.4 1154.3 1319.2 1484.1
Double Push side 3117 311 .7 623.4 935.1 1246.8 1558.5 1870.2 2181.9 2493.6 2805.3
63 20 acting Pull side 2803 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121 .2 1401.5 1681.8 1962.1 2242.4 2522.7
Double Push side 5026 502.6 1005.2 1507.8 2010.4 2513.0 3015.6 3518.2 4020.8 4523.4
80 25 acting Pull side 4536 453.6 907.2 1360.8 1814.4 2268.0 2721 .6 3175.2 3628.8 4082.4
Double Push side 7853 785.3 1570.6 2355.9 3141 .2 3926.5 4711.8 5497.1 6282.4 7067.7
100 25 acting Pull side 7362 736.2 1472.4 2208.6 2944.8 3681.0 4417.2 5153.4 5889.6 6625.8
Standard cylinder(Profile) AlrTAC
SU Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Mounting lsu Basic FA FB CA CB LB TC TCM1
type ISUD, SUJ Basic FA LB TC TCM1
Qperatinq pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(1 5-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Stroke tolerance 0-250+~0 251-1000+~ 5 1001-1500+~0
Port size CD 1/8" I 1/4' I 3/8" I 1/2"
D Symbol G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
SU SUD SUJ
SU ~ 00 00 4,
SU-S SUD-S SUJ-S
~ 00 00 4' 32 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1000 1800
40 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 1200 1800
50 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1800
1. Standard cylinder manufactured by our enterprise. 80 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
2. The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two way seal structure. It's 100 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
dimension is tight and it has the function of oil reservation. Note) Consult us for non-standard stroke.
3. It is no tie rod cylinder. The cylinder barrel is "Mickey Mouse" shape ,and
have good corrosion .
4. Compared with IS015552 standard cylinder, SU series cylinder with the
same bore size is shorter.
6. Mounting accessories are the same as SC series.
the normal operation of cylinder at 150't.
SU: Double acting type

SUD: Double rod type
SUJ: Adjustable stroke type

132 40 50 63 00 100 I Blank: TPU
H: Viton
Stroke N: NBR
IRefer to stroke table for details I
• Mount ng type
Adjustable stroke Mounting Available
Memo
10: 10mm ltvpe series
20: 20mm Blank ~
30: 30mm SU
40: 40mm LB ~ SUD
50: 50mm SUJ
75: 75mm FA
~
100: 100mm
FB
~
Ma net CA 4{[D)C§J SU
S: With magnet CB 4{[D)O!ID
SU, SUD Be used
TC ~ SUJ with TCM1
G) Please refer to page 209-21 2 for accessory parts .
••
SU Series

1:1!1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 14 15
~~~
1~1•
2 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ mchrome plated
3 Front cover packing TPU
4
5
Bushing
Front cover
6 Cushino 0-rino
7 Cushion gasket
Aluminum alloy
NBR
TPU
:,
32
40
-
140
142
·=- ·---···- ·J·=-=- ...
47
49
93
93
27.5
27.5
27.5
27.5
45
50
·-
12
16
32
34
M10x1 .25
M12x1 .25
22
24
17
17
6
7
10
14
28
32
15
15 SU
8 Barrel Aluminum alloy 50 150 57 93 27.5 27.5 62 20 42 M16x1 .5 32 23 8 17 38 15
9 Piston Aluminum allov 63 153 57 96 27.5 27.5 75 20 42 M16X1 .5 32 23 8 17 38 15
10 Piston rod 0-ring NBR 80 182 75 107 33 33 94 25 54 M20x1 .5 40 26 10 22 47 21
11 Piston seal NBR 100 188 75 113 33 33 112 25 54 M20x1 .5 40 26 10 22 47 21
12 Magnet
13 Wear ring
Plastic
:, -
' ' . .. ·:•
32 M6x1.0 M5x0.8 9.5 10 33 1/8" 14 5.5
14 Bolt Carbon stee I
15 Back cover Aluminum alloy 40 M6x1.0 M5x0.8 9.5 9 37 1/4" 15 6
16 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel 50 M6x1.0 M5x0.8 9.5 9.5 47 1/4" 17 8.5
63 M8x1.25 M6x 1.0 9.5 7.5 56 3/8" 15 9.5
80 M10x1.5 M8x1 .25 11.5 11 70 3/8" 19.5 10
100 M10x1 .5 M8x1.25 11 .5 11 84 1/2" 16.5 11
A+Stroke x2
AC+Stroke
~ ----- .
Cushion
~
A+Stroke x 2+Adjuslable stroke

AC+Stroke
- -·- - ·$- •
32 187 182 47 93 32 27 M10X1 .25 6

40 191 185 49 93 34 28 M12X1.25 7
50 207 194 57 93 42 29 M16X1 .5 8
63 210 197 57 96 42 29 M16X1 .5 8
80 257 238.5 75 107 54 35.5 M20X1 .5 10
100 263 244.5 75 11 3 54 35.5 M20X1.5 10
Remark:
2. The unmarked dimension is lhe same as SU standard type.
•ft•
SUF Series(With valve type)
Cl Specification
.. ..I . . 50 63 I 80 I 100
Acting type Double actina
Mounting type Basic FA FB CA CB LB TC TCM1
Operating pressure 0.1 - 1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Proaf pressure 1.5MPa(215osi)(15bar)
Stroke tolerance 0-2so•), 0 251-1ooo•k5 1001-150o·t· 0
Symbol Adjustable cushionstroke 21 I 28 I 29
SUF SUF-S Port size 118" I 114" 318" I 112"
. .... .. . .
~~
PU tube size(ODXID) <D8 x <D5 I <D 10x <06.5
.
Model 4M210-06 & 4M210-08 4M310-08 &4M310-10
SU F Cl Product feature Acting type Internal piloted
1.For Standard Cylinders:use 4M210 valve for bore size 32, 40 & 50; 4M31 Ovalve ln=Exhaust=1/8' & ln=Exhaust=114" &
Port size G)
for bore size 63,80 & 100mm. ln=1/4" Exhaust- 1/ 8' ln-PT3/ 8 Exhaust-1/4'
4M210-06: 14.0mm' {Cv=0.78) 4M310-08 : 25 .0mm'(Cv=1.40)
2.lndividually control, no need for extra solenoid valves. Orifice size
4M210-08: 16.0mm'(Cv=0.89) 4M310-10: 30.0mm'(Cv-1.68)
3.lnstallation time & space saving; suitable for decentralize installation in large
system.
Operating pressure 0.15- 0.BMPa(21-114psi)
4.0ptions of mounting accessories & easy installation.
Proaf pressure 1.5MPa(215psi)
Cl Stroke Body material Aluminum alloy
Lubrication (2) Not requined
32
Standard
type
50 75 80 100 125150 160 175
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 50
1000 2000
Max. frequency @
Standard voltage
5 cycle/sec
. .. .
4 cycle/sec
With TC 100 125150 160 175 200 250

type 300 350 400 450 500 100 Scope voltage AC: +15% DC: +10%
50 75 80 100125150160 175 Power consumption AC: 3.5VA DC: 3.0W
Standard Protection IP65(DIN40050)
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 50
type
40 600 700 800 900 1000 Temperature classification B Class
100125150160 175 200 1200 2000
50 Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
With TC
250 300 350 400 450 500 100 Activating time 0.05 sec and below
type 600 700 800 900 1000
75 80 100 125150 160 175 (j) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
Standard (2) It cann't stop in the midway of lubricating. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or equivalent are recommended.
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 75
63 type @The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
600 700 800 900 1000
80 1500 2000 Add) Refer to P457 -480 for detail of sensor switch.
125150 160 175 200
100 With TC
250 300 350 400 450 500 125
type 600 700 800 900 1000
Model
ISUF: Double acting with valve type I
Bore size
132 40 50 63 80 100 I
Electrical entry
Magnet Voltage
C: AC110V
G) Mounting type
E:AC24V
Mounting type Available series Memo
F: DC12V
LB: LB type
FA: FA type
FB: FB type SUF
CA: CA type
CB: CB type
Be used
TC: TC type
withTCM1
SUF Series(With valve type)

Pull when electrify
111,
1 4M series solenoid valve 6-Sides
H
2 Unite block 4-Sides
5 SU series cylinder SUF
D How to use
2.Default factory setting will be piston rod to retract when energized(see Drawing
one). Should you require piston rod to extend when energized, reposition the
solenoid valve as shown in Drawing two.
Pull when energized

:, . •: . ..• =-=··-:,-:,,-
32 140 47 93 27.5 27.5 118 53 45 67 67 77
40 142 49 93 27.5 27.5 118 53 50 68.5 67 80.5
50 150 57 93 27.5 27.5 120 51 62 72 67 89
63 153 57 96 27.5 27.5 135.5 54.5 75 77.5 69.5 96.5
80 182 75 107 33 33 137 53 94 86.5 69.5 106.5
100 188 75 113 33 33 135.5 54.5 112 96 69.5 115
:, . :- •-•·32 .
32 89 67 12 M10X1 .25 22 17 6 10 28 15
40 94 72 16 34 M12X1 .25 24 17 7 14 32 15
50 106 84 20 42 M16X1 .5 32 23 8 17 38 15
63 124 97 20 42 M16X1.5 32 23 8 17 38 15
80 143 116 25 54 M20X1 .5 40 26 10 22 47 21
100 161 134 25 54 M20X1 .5 40 26 10 22 47 21
:, . .. . . . ..
4M210-06
,..
1/8"
' M6X1 (No TC) 9.5(No TC)
:
32 1/8" M5X0.8(With TC) 10(With TC) 33

4M210-08 1/4"
4M210-06 1/8" M6X1 (No TC) 9.5(No TC)
40 1/8" M5X0.8(With TC) 9(WithTC) 37
4M210-08 1/4"
4M210-06 1/8" M6X1(No TC) 9.5(No TC)
50 1/8" M5X0.8(With TC) 9.5(With TC) 47
4M210-08 1/4"
Ensure that the seals between the mounting block & valve 4M310-08 1/4" M8X1 .25(No TC) 9.5(No TC)
63 1/4" 56
0Attention are placed correctly when repositioning the valve. 4M310-10 3/8" M6X1 (With TC) 7.5(With TC)
4M310-08 1/4" M10X1.5(No TC) 11 .5(No TC)
80 1/4" M8X1 .25(With TC) 11(WithTC) 70
4M310-10 3/8"
4M310-08 1/4" M10X1.5(No TC) 11 .5(No TC)
100 1/4' M8X1 .25(With TC) 11(WithTC) 84
4M310-10 3/8"
••
Accessories
D Ordering code
111111!'. . .!IIII
Accessory Accessor t e G)
Mounting accessory TC: TC type
Model
Bore size
G) The listed accessories are for SU cylinder. Accessories that are adaptable
to other cylinders are not shown. Please refer to accessory list for selection
and ordering information.
HA
s: LB
g FA •• •• •• •• •• •• :, . - - : . a .
•• ••
::>
§' FB X X X X 32 140 93 80 60 72 62 9 12 74 11 40
CD
SU 0) CA X X X X 40 142 93 103 80 109 86 11 23 113 12 50
0
0
(1)
~ TC
CB
•• •••
X
••
X
••
X
•• ••
X
50
63
150 93
153 96
103 80
103 80
122 99
134 111 11
11 23
23
126 12
138 12
50
50
••
0
'< TCM1
80 182 107 110 85 160 137 13 23 164 12 70
••• ••• ••• ••• •••

"'I
•• 100 188 113 110 85 178 155 13 23 182 12 70
::>
5 y
~u
G) F
en CS1-B X
• •• X
• •• X
• •••
~ DS1-B
"' CS1-F
Q
X
X
•• X
X
•• X
X
••
EC
~- DS1 - F X
•• X
•• X
••
g: CS1 - U X X X
® os1-u X
•
X
• X
® Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.

"'w
• - -Aluminum alloy, <>--Cast steel, D - -Carbon steel.

C+Stroke)/2
Accessories
Bore size LB
Mounting accessory
FA FB CA
:, . - - . : I .
32 F-SC32LB F-SC32FA F-SC32CA 32 140 93 20 74 52 33 50 12 22 17 45
Accessories Mounting accessory Note) The TC accessory has been installed on the barrel of cylinder before it worked off,
Bore size CB TC TCM1 and the position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
32 F-SC32CB F-SU32TC F-Sl32TCM1 If consumer orders the TC solely, he will not install it on the barrel of standard cylinder directly.
40 F-SC40CB F-SU40TC F-SC40TCM1 The others accessories are the same as SC series's accessories, please refer to P207-210 for details.
50 F-SC50CB F-SU50TC F-SC40TCM1
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size 1· 1Knuckle Y· Y Knuckle F F Knuckle U U Knuckle
50 F-M16X150I F-M16X150Y F-M16X150F F-M16X150U
63 F-M16X15D1 F-M16X150Y F-M16X150F F-M16X150U
Bore size CS1-BD DS1-BD CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
32 CS1-B1 DS1-B1
40 CS1-B1 DS1-B1
50 CS1 - B1 DS1 - B1
CS1 - F DS1 - F CS1- U DS1 - U
63 CS1-B2 DS1-B2
80 CS1 - B3 DS1 - B3
100 CS1-B4 DS1-B4
Standard cylinder--SC Series
Tie-rod type
Product series
Series name
CS1-A DS1-A CS1-F DS1-F CS1 -U DS1-U CS1-B DS1-B
32
40
50
63
80
Double
acting 100
125
160 SC
200
250
With valve type:SCF 32

40
Double 50
acting 63
80
100
202 209 457

1. When load changes in the worl<, the cylinder with abundant output capacity shall be selected.
or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal worl< of cylinder and extend the service life.
: ..
Criteria for selection: Cylinder thrust
Rod size (mm) 12

•I
16
I
20 20
:1
25
II
25 32
,I
40
II
40
Unit: Newton(N)
50
I
Double actina
Acting type
Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull Push Pull
Pressure area(mm') 804 690 1256 1055 1963 1649 3117 2803 5026 4536 7853 7362 12272 11468 20106 18849 31416 30159 49087 47124
0.1 80.4 69 125.6 105.5 196.3 164.9 311.7 280.3 502.6 453 .6 785.3 736.2 1227.2 1146.8 201 0.6 1884.9 31 41.6 301 5.9 4908.7 4712.4
0
'O
(1)
0.2 160.8 138 251.2 211 .0 392 .6 329.8 623.4 560 .6 1005.2 907 .2 1570.6 1472.4 2454.4 2293.6 4021 .2 3769.8 6283.2 6031.8 9817 .4 9424.8
el.
3·
0.3 241 .2 207 376.8 316.5 588.9 494.7 935. 1 840 .9 1507.8 1360.8 2355.9 2208.6 3681.6 3440.4 6031.8 5654.7 9424 .8 9047.7 14726.1 14137.2
co 0.4 321 .6 276 502.4 422.0 785.2 659.6 1246.8 11 21.2 2010.4 1814.4 3141 .2 2944 .8 4908.8 4587.2 8042 .4 7539.6 12566.4 12063.6 19634.8 18849.6
'O
co 0.5 402 345 628.0 527 .5 981.5 824.5 1558.5 1401 .5 2513.0 2268.0 3926.5 3681. 0 6136.0 5734.0 10053.0 9424 .5 15708.0 15079.5 24543.5 23562.0
"'"'<= 0.6 482.4 414 753.6 633 0 1177.8 989.4 1870.2 1681 .8 3015.6 2721 .6 4711 .8 4417 .2 7363.2 6880.8 12063.6 11309.4 18849.6 18095.4 29452.2 28274.4
co 0.7 562 .8 483 879.2 738 .5 1374.1 1154.3 2181.9 1962 .1 3518.2 3175.2 5497.1 5153.4 8590.4 8027.6 14074.2 13194.3 21991 .2 21111 .3 34360.9 32986.8
~
-u 0.8 643 .2 552 1004.8 844.0 1570.4 1319.2 2493.6 2242.4 4020 .8 3628.8 6282.4 5889 .6 9817.6 9174.4 16084.8 15079.2 25132.8 24127.2 39269.6 37699.2
~
0.9 723 .6 621 1130.4 949.5 1766.7 1484.1 2805.3 2522.7 4523 .4 4082.4 7067.7 6625.8 11044.8 10321 .2 18095.4 16964.1 28274.4 27143.1 44178.3 42411 .6
Standard cylinder(Tie-rod) AlrTAC
SC Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Mounting lsc Basic FA FB CA CB LB TC TCM1
type ISCD, SCJ Basic FA LB TC TCM1
Operatinq pressure 0.1 - 1.0MPa(15- 145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Stroke tolerance o-25o•k 0 251-1ooo•k 5 1001 - 1500·~ 0
Port size CD 1/8" I 1/4' I 3/8" I 1/2"
~
SC SCD SCJ
SC ~ 00 00 4,
SC-S SCD-S SCJ-S
~ 00 00 4'
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 1200 2000
50 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 2000
D Product feature
63 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
1. Standard cylinder manufactured by our enterprise. 80 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
2. The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two way seal structure. It's 100 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
dimension is tight and it has the function of grease reservation. Note) If the stroke is ;;, 1600mm within the maximum stroke scope, it is treated as non-standard one.
3. It is tie rod cylinder. The cylinder barrel and fronUrear cap is jointed by tie Please contact the company for other special strokes.
rods with high reliability.
4. Compared with IS015552 standard cylinder, SC series cylinder with the same
bore size is shorter. D Ordering code
6. Cylinders and mounting accessories with several specifications are optional.
SC: Double acting type

SCD: Double rod type
SCJ: Adjustable stroke type

132 40 50 63 80 100 I Blank: TPU
H: Viton
Stroke N: NBR
Mounting type CD
Ad'
11ustable stroke • Mounting Available
Memo
10: 10mm type series
20: 20mm Blank ~
30: 30mm SC
40: 40mm LB ~ SCD
50: 50mm SCJ
75: 75mm FA
~
100: 100mm
FB
~
Ma net CA ~ ~ SC
S: With magnet CB ~OOD
SC, SCD Be used
TC ~ SCJ withTCM1
G) Please refer to page 209-21 2 for accessory parts.
SC Series

1:1.!1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 14 15
~~~~§
,~
1
..
Rod nut Carbon stee I 4-sides
2 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ m chrome plated
3 Front cover packing TPU
4
5
Bushing
Front cover
6 Cushino 0-rino
7 Cushion gasket
Aluminum alloy
NBR
TPU
:u .
32 140
•:
47 93
.
27.5
·- ·--=-=-·-··
27.5 45 12 32 M10x1.25
M12X1.25
22 17 6
40 142 49 93 27.5 27.5 50 16 34 24 17 7 SC
8 Barrel Aluminum alloy 50 150 57 93 27.5 27.5 62 20 42 M16x1.5 32 23 8
9 Piston Aluminum alloy 63 153 57 96 27.5 27.5 75 20 42 M16x1 .5 32 23 8
10 Piston rod 0-ring NBR 80 182 75 107 33 33 94 25 54 M20x1.5 40 26 10
11 Piston seal NBR
12 Magnet
13 Wear ring
Plastic
100
:
32
.. 188
10
75
M6x1.0
113 33
9.5
33
33
:
112
28
25
15
54
.
1/8"
M20x1.5
..
14
·:-
5.5
40 26 10
14 Bolt Carbon steel

15 Back cover Aluminum alloy 40 14 M6x1.0 9.5 37 32 15 1/4' 15 6
16 Tie-rod Carbon steel 50 17 M6x1.0 9.5 47 38 15 1/4" 17 8.5
17 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel 63 17 M8x1.25 9.5 56 38 15 3/8' 15 9.5
80 22 M10x1.5 11.5 70 47 21 3/8" 19.5 10
100 22 M10x1.5 11.5 84 47 21 1/2' 16.5 11
A+Strokex2
AC+Stroke AB+Stroke
DA+Stroke
·- ·- ·- ·- ·- .
•~
Cushion
A+Stroke x 2+Adjustable stroke

AB AC+Stroke
•-~
32 187 182 47 93 32 27 M10X1.25 6

40 191 185 49 93 34 28 M12X1 .25
50 207 194 57 93 42 29 M16X1 .5
63 210 197 57 96 42 29 M16X1 .5
80 257 238.5 75 107 54 35.5 M20X1 .5 10
100 263 244.5 75 113 54 35.5 M20X1 .5 10
Remark:
2. The unmarked dimension is the same as SC standard type.
SC Series(Big bore size type)
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 125 160 200 250
Mounting lsc Basic FA FB CA CB LB TC TCM1
type ISCD, SCJ Basic FA LB TC TCM1
Operatinq pressure 0.1 -1.0MPa(1 5-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Stroke tolerance 0-250+~ 0 251-1000+~ 5 1001-1500+~ 0
Adjustable cushion stroke mm 28 I 29 I 33 I 40
Port size CD 1/2" I 3/4" I 1"
~
SC SCD SCJ
SC ~ 00 00 4,
SC-S SCD-S SCJ-S
~ 00 00 4'
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
200 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 2000
1. IS06430 standard cylinder. Note) Consult us for non-standard stroke.

2. The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two way seal structure. It's
dimension is tight and it has the function of grease reservation.
3. It is tie rod cylinder. The cylinder barrel and fronUrear cap is jointed by tie
rods with high reliability.
4. Compared with IS015552 standard cylinder, SC series cylinder with the same
bore size is shorter.
SC: Double acting type

SCD: Double rod type
SCJ: Adjustable stroke type

!125 160 200 250 I Blank: NBR
H: Viton
Stroke
IRefer to stroke table for details I Mounting type CD
Mounting Available
Memo
Ad"IIUStablestroke• type series
10: 10mm Blank ~
20: 20mm SC
30: 30mm LB c,gI::Jl_ SCD
40: 40mm SCJ
50: 50mm FA {[:::I]
75: 75mm
100: 100mm
FB
~
CA o{[[J), ~ SC
Ma net
Blank: Without magnet CB ~~
S: With magnet
SC, SCD Be used
TC ~ SCJ withTCM1

Others: the TPU seal material is unavailable for big bore sized cylinder.
SC Series(Big bore size type)
DB
l~[t
2 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ mchrome plated
3 Front cover packing TPU 2- P 8-KD : KA
4 Bushinq Wear resistant material
5 Front cover Aluminum alloy
6 Cushinq 0-rinq TPU SC
7 0-ring NBR
8 Barrel Aluminum alloy 41 13.5
55 18
10 Piston rod 0-ring NBR
55 18
11 Piston seal NBR
65 21
12 Maqnet Plastic
13 Wearring Wear resistant material
15 Back cover Aluminum alloy 160 M16•2.0 15 134 15
16 Tie-rod Carbon steel 200 36 M16•2.0 15 163 62 30 3/ 4" 20 15
17 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel 250 46 M20•2.5 19.5 202 86 35 1" 25.5 22
A+Stroke x 2
AC+Stroke AB+Stroke
DA Cushion DA+Stroke
A+Stroke x 2+Ad'ustable stroke

AC+Stroke DB+Stroke+Adjustablestroke
DB+Adjustable stroke
FA
125 291 265.5 88 115 68 42.5 M27X2.0 13.5

160 352 332 113 126 88 68 M36X2.0 18
200 362 342 118 126 88 68 M36X2.0 18
250 435 409 141 153 106 80 M42X2.0 21
Remark:
2. The unmarked dimension is the same as SC standard type.
SCT Series(Multi-position type)
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
AclinA type Double actinA
MountinA type Basic FA FB CA CB LB TC TCM1
OperatinApressure 0.1-1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215osi)(15bar)
Stroke tolerance 0-250+1,0 251 - 1000+),5 1001 -15oo+i 0
Cushion tvoe Variable cushion
SGT SCT- S Port size G) 1/8" I 1/4' I 3/8" I 1/2'
,~)~t'.-)~tl l)lf .dltl G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT threadare available.
Stroke
D Product feature Bore s1ze(mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max. std stroke Max stroke
SC 1. Standard cylinder manufactured by our enterprise. 32 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800
2. The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two way seal structure. It's 40 25 507580100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800
dimension is tight and it has the function of grease reservation. 50 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800
3. It is tie rod cylinder. The cylinder barrel and front/rear cap is jointed by tie rods
63 25 50 7580100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800
with high reliability.
80 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800
•. """ rod!,;;;be positioned ;~;;v:eralpositio:;gr tion process. 100 25 50 7580100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800
Note) If the stroke is ;;,800mm within the maximum stroke scope, it is treated as non-standard one.
Please contact the company for other special strokes.
Stroke2 : Stroke1 ~ -
5. The buffer adjustment of cylinder is smooth and steady. D Ordering code
Model
ISCT: Double acting Multi-position type I
Bore size
132 40 50 63 80 100 I
Stroke 1 Seals Material
IRefer to stroke table for details I Blank: TPU
H:Viton
Stroke 2 N: NBR
!Refer to stroke table for details I G)
Mountin t e
Ma net
1
• Rod nut Carbon steel 11
• Magnet Plastic
Mounting type is the same as SC,
please refer to pa e 203 for details.
Carbon steel with S: With magnet
12 Gasket NBR
2 Piston rod 20 µ m chrome plated 13 0 - ring NBR G) Please refer to page 209-212 for accessory parts.
3 Packing TPU 14 Joint seat Aluminum alloy
4 Bushing Wear resistant material 15 Silencer Dimensions
5 Front cover Aluminum allo 16 Piston Aluminum alloy
6 Cushing 0-ring TPU 17 Bolt Carbon steel
7 Barrel Aluminum allo 18 Back cover Aluminum alloy
8 Rod 0-ring NBR 19 Tie-rod Carbon steel
9 Piston seal NBR 20 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel
:
32
.. 233
•:
47 186
•I
27.5
.
27.5 55
38
. :
45
I
12
...
32 M10•1 .25 22
40 235 49 186 27.5 27.5 55
38 50 16 34 M12x1 .25 24
50 243 57 186 27.5 27.5 55
38 62 20 42 M16x1.5 32
63 249 57 192 27.5 27.5 55
41 75 20 42 M16x1.5 32
80 296 75 221 33 33 73
41 94 25 54 M20x1 .5 40
100 308 75 233 33 33 73
47 112 25 54 M20•1 .5 40
=·. : . .. ·:•
32 17 6 10 M6•1 .0 9.5 33 28 15 1/8'
14 5.5
40 17 7 14 M6x1 .0 9.5 37 32 15 1/4' 15 6
50 23 8 17 M6• 1.0 9.5 47 38 15 1/4' 17 8.5
63 23 8 17 M8x1.25 9.5 56 38 15 3/8' 15 9.5
80 26 10 22 M10•1 .5 11.5 70 47 21 3/8' 19.5 10
100 26 10 22 M10•1.5 11 .5 84 47 21 1/2' 16.5 11
SCF Series(With valve type)
D Specification
.. ..I . . 50 63 I 80 I 100
Acting type Double actina
Mounting type Basic FA FB CA CB LB TC TCM1
Operating pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Stroke tolerance 0-250•), 0 251-1ooo•k5 1001-150o·t·0
~
Adjustable cushionstroke 21 I 28 I 29
Port size 118" I 114" 318" I 112"
D Symbol SCF SCF-S

PU tube size(ODXID)
Model
. .... .. . .
.
4M210-06 & 4M210-08
<D8 x <D5 I
4M310-08 &4M310-10
<D 10x <06.5
~~
Acting type Internal piloted SCF
ln=Exhaust=1/8' & ln=Exhaust=114" &
Port size G)
ln=1/4" Exhaust- 1/8' ln-PT3/ 8 Exhaust-1/4'
D Product feature 4M210-06: 14.0mm' {Cv=0.78) 4M310-08 : 25 .0mm'(Cv=1.40)
Orifice size
1.For Standard Cylinders:use 4M210 valve for bore size 32, 40 & 50; 4M31 Ovalve 4M210-08: 16.0mm'(Cv=0.89) 4M310-10 : 30.0mm' (Cv-1.68)
for bore size 63,80 & 100mm. Valve type 5 port 2 position
2.lndividually control, no need for extra solenoid valves. Operating pressure 0.15- 0.8MPa(21-114psi)
3.lnstallation time & space saving; suitable for decentralize installation in large Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215psi)
system. Temperature "C -20-70
4.0ptions of mounting accessories & easy installation. Body material Aluminum alloy
Lubrication (2) Not requined
D Stroke
Max. frequency @
Standard voltage
5 cycle/sec
. .. .
4 cycle/sec
Scope voltage AC: +15% DC: +10%

Standard 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 50 Power consumption AC: 3.5VA DC: 3.0W
type
32 1000 2000 Protection IP65(DIN40050)
With TC 100 125150 160 175 200 250
type 300 350 400 450 500 100 Temperature classification B Class
50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 Electrical entry Terminal, Grommet
Standard
200 250 300 350 400 450 500 50 Activating time 0.05 sec and below
type
40 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 2000 (j) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
50 100 125 150 160 175 200 (2) It cann't stop in the midway of lubricating. Lubricants like ISO VG32 or equivalent are recommended.
With TC 250 300 350 400 450 500 100 @ The maximum actuation frequency is in the no-load state.
type 600 700 800 900 1000 Add) Refer to P457 -480 for detail of sensor switch.
75 80 100 125150 160 175
Standard 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 75
63 type 600 700 800 900 1000
80 1500 2000
125150 160 175 200
100 With TC 250 300 350 400 450 500 125
type 600 700 800 900 1000
Note) Consult us for non- standard stroke.
Model
ISCF: Double acting with valve type I
Bore size
132 40 50 63 80 100 I
Electrical entry
Magnet Voltage
C:AC110V
G) Mounting type
E:AC24V
Mounting type Available series Memo
F: DC12V
LB: LB type
FA: FA type
FB: FB type SCF
CA: CA type
CB: CB type
Be used
TC: TC type
withTCM1
SCF Series(With valve type)

Pull when electrify
111,
1 4M series solenoid valve 6-Sides
H
2 Unite block 4-Sides
SCF 5 SC series cylinder
D How to use
2.Default factory setting will be piston rod to retract when energized(see Drawing
one). Should you require piston rod to extend when energized, reposition the
solenoid valve as shown in Drawing two.
Pull when energized

:, . •: . ..• =-=··-:,-:,,-
32 140 47 93 27.5 27.5 118 53 45 67 67 77
40 142 49 93 27.5 27.5 118 53 50 68.5 67 80.5
50 150 57 93 27.5 27.5 120 51 62 72 67 89
63 153 57 96 27.5 27.5 135.5 54.5 75 77.5 69.5 96.5
80 182 75 107 33 33 137 53 94 86.5 69.5 106.5
100 188 75 113 33 33 135.5 54.5 112 96 69.5 115
:, . :- •-•·32 .
32 89 67 12 M10X1 .25 22 17 6 10 28 15
40 94 72 16 34 M12X1 .25 24 17 7 14 32 15
50 106 84 20 42 M16X1 .5 32 23 8 17 38 15
63 124 97 20 42 M16X1.5 32 23 8 17 38 15
80 143 116 25 54 M20X1 .5 40 26 10 22 47 21
100 161 134 25 54 M20X1 .5 40 26 10 22 47 21
: .. ........ .
4M210-06
,. . '
1/8"
. :
32 1/8" M6X1 9.5 33

4M210-08 1/4"
4M210-06 1/8'
40 1/8' M6X1 9.5 37
4M210-08 1/4'
4M210-06 1/8"
50 1/8' M6X1 9.5 47
4M210-08 1/4'
Ensure that the seals between the mounting block & valve 4M310-08 1/4'
63 1/4" M8X1 .25 9.5 56
0Attention are placed correctly when repositioning the valve. 4M310-10 3/8'
4M310-08 1/4"
80 1/4" M10X1.5 11.5 70
4M310-10 3/8"
4M310-08 1/4'
100 1/4' M10X1.5 11.5 84
4M310-10 3/8'
Accessories

._.. .IIIIRIIIIIIII
G)
Accessory Accessory type
LB: LB type
Model FA: FA type
Mounting FB: FB type
Bore size accessory CA: CA type
CB: CB type (2)
TC: TC type
TCM1 : TCM1 type
<D125-C!>250 A+Stroke
G) Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
hm _______c ~Strok;: :: :,[!)
(2) CB is attached with relevant PIN.
I : ',, ' t, ,,
4_1dt1f~j-- --1--~------,
_____ _.::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::L-----j,=~=J--'
AD
SC
• AC+Stroke
••• ••• ••• •••

X X AA+Stroke
CA
CB
X
X
X
X
: .. - - .. •I ..
TC
TCM1
•• •• •• •• •• •• 32
40
140
142
93
93
153
169
134
140
9.5
14.5
50
57
33
36
20.5
23.5
28
30
9
12
3
3
;,s I
::,
g y •• •• •• •• ••• •••
50
63
150
153
93
96
173
184
149
158
12
13
68
80
47
56
28
31
36.5
41
12
12
3
3
~u •• •• •• •• •
80 182 107 199 167 16 97 70 30 49 14 4
•••
G) F 100 188 113 209 173 18 112 84 30 57 14 4
CS1-A
DS1-A
X
X
•• X
X
•• X
X
125
160
203
239
115
126
221
246
185
206
18
20
136
174
104
134
35
40
70
91
17
17
6
8
~ CS1-F
Q DS1-F
X
X
•• X
X
•• X
X
•• 200 244 126 276 226 25 214 163 50 113.5 22 9
~ CS1-U
~ DS1-U
X
X
•••
X
X
•• X
X
•• 250 294 153 323 273 25 267 201 60 141 26 15
••
:r
(2) CS1-B X X X X
DS1 - B X
• X X X
<D Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail. F knuckle unviable for 125 or above
<D32 - C!>100
cylinder.
® Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch. CS1-B, DS1-B sensor switch
only viable for 125 or above cylinder.
•-Aluminum alloy, •-cast steel, C!>125-C!>250 A+Stroke

<>- Nodular cast iron, D - Carbon steel. C+Stroke
i 1 -:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:-:~J
! ! i
~!]{jJ+ [$
:_____I ===============================.. __ ____ ,--"•- - --'
:, . 11- I J I - 11_... _,.1•

32 140 93 34 44.5 12 9 16 45 33 (J)0E
40 142 93 34 45.5 14 9 20 49 37
50 150 93 34 46 14 10 20 61 47
63 153 96 34 46.5 14 10 20 74 56
80 182 107 48 64.5 20 14 32 93 70
100 188 113 48 65 20 14 32 111 84
125 203 115 32 52 20 17 31 .7 135 104
160 239 126 40 68 28 19.5 39.7 173 134
200 244 126 60 90 28 23 39.7 213 163
250 294 153 70 106 36 24 49.7 255 202
Accessories
Bl
<1>32-<1>100 <1>32-<1>100
FA
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -~ A+Stroke CJ
_flt -!-=-:=---------! _flt l C+Stroke cc
©i t'*
------~:F=---~_:_:::-::_-::~~-~-----J
A+Stroke
FB
C+Stroke PA1
:
-------- ,
--::=---==-=--=--.::..::..::..::-::.-=--::..
r---
11
IE3
PB1 11
~-~
SC ~-~ic _m_r= -:=-~-=-J_flt
l___ ~ ~ --------------------- ~
~ t --~-~..
"----~ E
L________ ;=_-_::::-:-_:_:::-::_-::=c_______ _
BB
<1>125-<1>250 <1>125-<1>250
A+Stroke
BB C+Stroke FA
A+Stroke CJ
C+Stroke CC
-----~----_-_-_-;_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-.. ;-----
•!
*v1 '*0T
----·- --1 i
: :
_____: -- ________ _-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-_-t ____ :
A+Stroke FB
C+Stroke
~
l: _-'t -----------------------------
- ------- - --------}-- IAI
IE3l ~~~~j r-~.
l____ . (fJ
\ - <!>CE
(Applied to:$250) (Applied to: Ql 125-200)
ftt:~H~i~------+~- f ::
' -----~=-=-==-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-==-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=~-----
BB -
:, . 1:1:- : 1 -:i1- 1:,=-:1=-: • :, . •1:••

32 140 93 10 47 33 80 58 7 17 45 33 32 140 93 45 19 9 12 29.5 16.3 32 39 32.8
40 142 93 10 53 36 90 70 7 17 50 37 40 142 93 49 19 9 14 30.5 20.3 44 51 44.8
50 150 93 10 65 47 104 86 9 23 62 47 50 150 93 61 19 10 14 31 20.3 52 59 52.8
63 153 96 12 75 56 118 98 9 23 75 56 63 153 96 74 19 10 14 31.5 20.3 52 59 52.8
80 182 107 16 95 70 140 119 11 26 94 70 80 182 107 93 32 14 20 48.5 32.3 64 73 64.8
100 188 113 16 115 84 160 138 11 26 112 84 100 188 113 111 32 14 20 49 32.3 64 73 64.8
125 203 115 20 135 104 196 168 14 41 136 104 125 203 115 135 32 14 20 52 32.1 64 73 64.8
160 239 126 20 173 134 248 212 18 55 174 134 160 239 126 173 40 15 28 68 40.1 80 90.2 80.8
200 244 126 25 213 163 286 250 18 55 214 163 200 244 126 213 60 23 28 90 40.1 80 90.2 80.8
250 294 153 25 255 201 356 312 22 65 267 202 250 294 153 255 70 24 36 106 50.1 100 130 108
Accessories
<1>32-<1>100 <1>32-<1>100
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
( C+Stroke)/2
,- -,
~-i rr11=- I I
~ I- - - - - I -
...,-H I I
I I
---ii I I
ll... _ -1 r
L ___ _i- -,
:c
I I I I ....
:,::
HA
SC
<1>125 - <1>250 <1>125- <1>250
A+Stroke A+Stroke
C+Stroke C+Stroke
ET C+Stroke)/2 • HR
-----,------------- ------------,-----
t------------ ------------1. i
~1tl[ (:+~~
!
! m w
w w
i _____ -r--=-~=-=-== ••==c",J$!

------------.J. . _____.,
(C+Stroke)/2
: • a .. :-~• . :, a . . : . ' .
32 140 93 87 33 55 16 22 17 45 32 140 93 100 75 90 71 12 16 87 11 54
40 142 93 113 37 63 25 28 17 50 40 142 93 103 80 109 86 11 23 113 12 50
50 150 93 126 47 76 25 28 23 62 50 150 93 103 80 122 99 11 23 126 12 50
63 153 96 138 56 88 25 30 23 75 63 153 96 103 80 134 111 11 23 138 12 50
80 182 107 164 70 114 25 32 26 94 80 182 107 110 85 160 137 13 23 164 12 70
100 188 113 182 84 132 25 38 26 112 100 188 113 110 85 178 155 13 23 182 12 70
125 203 115 208 104 158 25 40 41 136 125 203 115 145 105 211 183 18 25 208 20 85
160 239 126 272 134 200 36 46 55 174 160 239 126 185 140 272 236 22 36 272 25 130
200 244 126 318 163 246 36 46 55 214 200 244 126 185 140 318 282 22 36 318 25 130
250 294 153 394 202 304 45 56 65 267 250 294 153 21 5 165 394 349 26 45 394 28 160
Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily. Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
Accessories

32 F-SC32LB F-SC32FA F-SC32CA
Bore size CB TC TCM1
32 F-SC32CB F-SC32TC F-Sl40TCM1
40 F-SC40CB F-SC40TC F-SC40TCM1
SC 80 F-SC80CB F-SC80TC F-SC80TCM1
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size 1· I Knuckle Y· Y Knuckle F· F Knuckle u· u Knuckle
40 F-M12X1251 F-M12X125Y F-M12X1 25F F-M12X125U
63 F-M16X150I F-M16X150Y F-M16X150F F-M16X150U
125 F-M27X200I F-M27X200Y F-M27X200U
160 F-M36X2001 F-M36X200Y F-M36X200U
200 F-M36X2001 F-M36X200Y F-M36X200U
250 F-M42X2001 F-M42X200Y
Standard cylinder--JSI Series
D Product series
Series name
Basic LB FA FB CA CB CR TC CS1-B DS1-B CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
Double acting type:JSI
32
40
Double rod type: JSID 50

63
Double
acting 80
100
Adjustable stroke type: JSIJ 125
JSI
214 216 457

1. When load changes in the worl<, the cylinder with abundant output capacity shall be selected.
or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal worl< of cylinder and extend the service life.
Pull side 690 69.0 138.0 207.0 276.0 345.0 414.0 483.0 552.0 621.0
Push side 1256 125.6 251 .2 376.8 502.4 628.0 753.6 879.2 1002.4 1130.4
40 16 acting Pull side 1055 105.5 211.0 316.5 422.0 527.5 633.0 738.5 844.0 949.5
Double Push side 1963 196.3 392.6 588.9 785.2 981.5 1177.8 1374.1 1570.4 1766.7
50 20 acting Pull side 1649 164.9 329.8 494.7 659.6 824.5 989.4 1154.3 1399.2 1484.1
Double Push side 3117 311.7 623.4 935.1 1246.8 1558.5 1870.2 2181.9 2493.6 2805.3
63 20 acting Pull side 2803 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121 .2 1401.5 1681.8 1962.1 2242.4 2522.7
Double Push side 5026 502.6 1005.2 1507.8 2010.4 2513.0 3015.6 3518.2 4020.8 4523.4
80 25 acting Pull side 4536 453.6 907.2 1360.8 1814.4 2268.0 2721.6 3175.2 3628.8 4082.4
Double Push side 7853 785.3 1570.6 2355.9 3141 .2 3926.5 4711.8 4288.2 6282.4 7067.7
100 30 acting Pull side 7147 714.7 1429.4 2144.1 2858.9 3573.6 4288.3 5003.0 5717.7 6432.4
Double Push side 12272 1227.2 2454.4 3681 .6 4908.8 6136.0 7363.2 8590.4 9817.6 11044.8
125 32 acting Pull side 11468 1146.8 2293.6 3440.4 4587.2 5734.0 6880.8 80276 9174.4 10321 .2
Standard cylinder AlrTAC
JSI Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125
Mounting IJSI Basic FA FB CA CB CR LB TC TCM1 TCM2
type IJSID, JSIJ Basic FA LB TC TCM1 TCM2
Operatinq pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Speed range mm/s 30-800 I 3o-5oo
Stroke tolerance 0-250•~ 0 251-1000•~ 5 1001-15oo•i·0
Adjustable cushion stroke mm 24 I 32 I 37.5 I 40
Port size CD 1/8" I 1/4' I 318" I 112"
D Symbol G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available.
JSI JSID JSIJ
JSI ~ 00 00 4,
JSI-S JSID-S JSIJ-S
~ 00 00 4' 32 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1000 1800
40 1200
25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1800
50 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1200 1800
D Product feature 63 1500
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1800
1. JIS standard cylinder. 80 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
2. The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two way seal structure. It's dimension 100 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1500 1800
is tight and it has the function of greasel reservation. 125 25 50 75 80100125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1500 1800
3. The Mickey Mouse-shaped aluminum barrel of JSI series has no tie rod and Note) Consult us for non- standard stroke.
good performance of corrosion resistance.
4. Compared with IS015552 standard cylinder, the cylinder of JSI series with the
D Ordering code
same cylinder diameter is shorter.
6. Cylinders and mounting accessories for installation with several specifications
are optional.
7. The seal material with high temperature resistance is adopted to guarantee the
normal operation of cylinder at 150't.
JSI: Double acting type

JSID: Double rod type
JSIJ: Adjustable stroke type
Bore size Mounting type CD

!32 40 50 63 80 100 125 ! Mounting Available
Memo
type series
Stroke Blank <>C[CJJ
IRefer to stroke table for details I JSI
LB ".![Di JSID
Ad'lJustable stroke JSIJ
10: 10mm FA '1CIJ
20: 20mm
30: 30mm FB ~
40: 40mm
50: 50mm CA ~C!D
75: 75mm JSI
100: 100mm CB ~[ll
Be used
Magnet
CR ~ with CB
JSI Be used
S: With magnet TC «1:00) JSID with TCM1
JSIJ TCM2
JSI Series
Rod nut Carbon steel\Stainless steel
2 Piston rod
or Stainless steel :, . .I:• .._.,_ .I•=-:-,- I• .
3 Front cover packing NBR 32 135 47 84 27 27 46 12 34 M10x1.25 22 17 6 10 30 13
4 Bushing Wear resistant material 40 139 51 84 27 27 52 16 38 M14X1.5 30 19 8 14 35 13
5 Front cover Aluminum alloy 50 156 58 94 31.5 31.5 65 20 44 M18x1 .5 35 27 11 18 40 14
6 0-rin NBR 63 156 58 94 30.5 30.5 75 20 44 M18x1 .5 35 27 11 18 45 14
JSI
7 Barrel Aluminum alloy 80 190 72 114 38 38 95 25 52 M22x1 .5 40 32 13 22 45 20
8 0-ring NBR 100 190 72 114 38 38 114 30 52 M26x1 .5 40 36 13 26 55 20
9 Piston Aluminum alloy 125 223 97 120 38 38 137 32 70 M27x2.0 54 41 13.5 27 60 27
10
11
Piston seal
Magnet
NBR
Plastic
:, . I I : .. ·=·
32 M6 M5 16 14 32.5 30 4 1/ 8" 13 4
40 M6 M5 16 14 38 35 4 1/ 4' 14 4
13 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy
50 MB M6 16 16 46.5 40 4 1/ 4" 15.5 5
14 Buffer asket NBR
63 MB M6 16 16 56.5 45 4 3/8' 16.5 9
16 Back cover Aluminum alloy 80 M10 MB 16 16 72 45 4 3/8" 19 11.5
17 Tie-rod nut Carbon steel 100 M10 MB 16 16 89 55 4 1/ 2' 19 17
125 M12 M12 20 18 110 60 6 1/2" 19 17
Remark : The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder.
A+Stroke x2
AB AC+Stroke AB+Stroke
DA DA+Stroke
A+Stroke x 2+Ad"ustable stroke

AB AC+Stroke
DA DB+Stroke+Adjustable stroke
32 178 171 47 84 34 27 M10X1.25 6 M10X1 .25

6
40 186 176 51 84 38 28 M14X1.5 M12X1.25
50 210 195 58 94 44 29 M18X1.5 11 M16X1.5
63 210 195 58 94 44 29 M18X1.5 11 M16X1 .5
80 258 241.5 72 114 52 35.5 M22X1.5 13 10 M20X1 .5
100 258 248.5 72 114 52 42.5 M26X1.5 13 13.5 M27X2.0
125 314 286.5 97 120 70 42.5 M27X2.0 13.5 13.5 M27X2.0
Remark:
2. The unmarked dimension is the same as JSI standard type.
Accessories
Wll!IIW!l!Wl!!l'I
Accessory Accesso e <D

FA: FA type
Model Mounting LB: LB type
accessory CA: CA type
Bore size CB: CB type (2) AC+Stroke LAU
AE
CR: CR type AA+Stroke
<D The listed accessories are for JSI cylinder. Accessories that are adaptable
to other cylinders are not shown. Please refer to accessory list on P218 for
:, . .'
(2) CB is attached with relevant PIN. 32 146 128 9 50 32 22 30 3
40 154 132 11 55 38 24 33 3
50 170 148 11 70 46 27 40 3
63 176 148 14 80 56 27 45 12 4
80 202 174 14 100 72 30 55 12 5
JSI 100 210 178 16 120 89 32 65 14 5
;;:: 125 250 210 20 136 90 45 81 14 8
0
c=
~-
::,
FB
CA
•• •• X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
'°
0)
0
0
~
CB
CR
•• •• X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A+Stroke 4-Q>BP
"' TC
•• •• •• •• •• ••
i=~
0
,.:2
TCM1
•• •• t{~~
••• ••• ••• •••
TCM2
I
"'
•• ••
::,
c= y 4- <l>AK(Thru.hole)
~ 4- <l>AJ(Dp: BH)
0)
<D F
u
• •• •• •• •• ••
BB C+Stroke
u,
(1)
~
CS1-B X
DS1-B X
•• X
X
•• X
X
••
~
u,
CS1-F X
'!;, DS1-F X
••X
X
•• X
X
•• 4-<l>BP
®
0
CS1-U X
DS1 - U X
•• X
X
•• X
X
•
G) Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail,
® Please refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Material of accessories 4-<l>AK(Thru.hole)

c··
4-Q>AJ(Dp:BH) C+Stroke ~ BB
A+Stroke
801100
125 •• D D :, . :•• .. : a : : : :•
• - -Aluminum alloy, • - - cast steel, 32 131 84 11 6.5 30.5 10 47 32 80 64 6.5 7 32.5

0- Nodular cast iron, 6 - FC25; D ---Carbon steel. 40 135 84 11 6.5 35.5 10 53 36 90 72 6.5 9 38
50 152 94 14 9 40.5 12 65 45 108 90 8.5 9 46.5
63 152 94 14 9 45.5 12 75 50 118 100 8.5 9 56.5
80 186 114 17 11 45.5 16 95 63 150 126 10.5 12.5 72
100 186 114 17 11 55.5 16 115 75 176 150 10.5 14.5 89
125 217 120 19 13 60.5 20 138 102 216 180 12.5 14 110
A+Stroke
C+Stroke
-·"!'1 1--- -- -1
------- :q:r-
m
t{t:(:--
0
- --- --
---- --- -------
...
T
s
:, -
32 131 84 46 32.5
'
23
" 10' 13'
10.5 13.8
40 135 84 52 38 23 11 10 13 13.8
50 152 94 65 46.5 30 15 14 17 19.8
63 152 94 75 56.5 30 15 14 17 19.8
80 186 114 95 72 42 23 22 27 29.8
100 186 114 114 89 42 23 22 27 29.8
125 217 120 136 110 50 28 25 28 31.8
Accessories
r,~l~"l"l --m:E
A+Stroke
l. C+Stroke I C+Stroke
~ >- I ,_ ;b CD
~~ti .
~t[,ttt: :~~=;"'t tt t{]3!~
n
~ 1 r i t:{tJt~~ =~---:.:... ~ ,_r

-------
,- CJ ------- 6
~ st I .
,____fil__
OS
:, . I . ..
32 131 84 23 10.5 10 14 14.2 32.5 28.8 34.6 46 28
40 135 84 23 11 10 14 14.2 38 28.8 34.6 52 28 40 135 44 62 84 22 65 23 42 12 13.8 10 32 25 45 160
50 152 94 30 15 14 18 20.2 46.5 40.8 47 65 40 50 152 60 81 94 30 84.5 31.5 53 15 19.8 14 45 43 40 60 190
63 152 94 30 15 14 18 20.2 56.5 40.8 47 75 40 63 152 60 81 94 30 84.5 31.5 53 15 19.8 14 45 43 40 60 190
80 186 114 42 23 22 27 30.2 72 60.8 69.2 95 60 80 186 86 111 114 45 120 47 73 11 18 10 29.8 22 65 64 30 55 175 JSI
100 186 114 42 23 22 27 30.2 89 60.8 69.2 114 60 100 186 86 111 114 45 120 47 73 11 18 10 29.8 22 65 64 30 55 175
125 217 120 50 28 25 32 32.2 110 64.8 73.2 136 64 125 217 110 136 120 60 143 53 90 13.5 20 14 31 .8 25 75 78 30 50 170
Note) CR can't be used alone, it must be used with CB.
m
F
~
I
ftil~]-$.[J,-w
r---- ----··1------
h@j,( ·,,@
I<!l
ff(!~, )
I
;~+St~oke~ LL-
C+Stroke
A+Stroke
:, .
32 135 84 12
I
32.5 52 50 74 22
:
32
.. 135 22 66 84 40 11 9 60 80 52 12 20 50 62 77 12
40 139 84 16 38 65 63 95 28 40 139 28 86.5 84 54 11 12 75 100 65 16 27 63 79 98 16
50 156 94 16 46.5 75 75 107 28 50 156 28 91.5 94 54 11 12 75 100 75 16 31 75 91 110 16
63 156 94 20 56.5 90 90 130 30 63 156 30 115 94 70 11 12 85 110 90 20 42 90 110 133 20
80 190 114 20 72 112 110 150 32 80 190 32 126 114 70 11 12 85 110 112 20 54 110 130 153 20
100 190 114 25 89 135 132 182 38 100 190 38 157.5 114 90 19 18 115 155 135 25 68 132 157 185 25
125 223 120 25 110 170 160 210 40 125 223 40 175 120 90 19 18 115 155 170 25 80 160 185 213 25
Note) The TC accessory has been installed on the barrel of cylinder before it worked off, Note) The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
and the position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
If consumer orders the TC solely, he will not install it on the barrel of standard cylinder
directly.
4-<l>K(Countersink) c--- ~ - -1
(Dp:J) 4-<l>N(Thru.holel
:
32
.. . .
135
··-:
14 52 84 12
I
20 50 66 80 32 46 6.8 11 30 7
40 139 17 65 84 16 27 63 82 99 36 55 9 15 36 9
50 156 17 75 94 16 31 75 94 111 36 55 9 15 36 9
63 156 20.5 90 94 20 42 90 113.5 134 42 65 11 18 40 11
80 190 20.5 112 114 20 54 110 133.5 154 42 65 11 18 40 11
100 190 24.5 135 114 25 68 132 159.5 184 50 75 14 20 50 14
125 223 24.5 170 120 25 80 160 187.5 212 50 75 14 20 50 14
Accessories
32 F-JS132LB F-S132FA F-JS132CA
125 F-JS1125LB F.JS1125FA F-JS1125CA
Bore size CB CR TC
F-JS132CB F-JS132CR F-S132TC
JSI 100 F-JS1100CB F-JS180CR F-S1100TC
125 F-JS1125CB F-JS1125CR F-S1125TC
Bore size TCM1 TCM2
32 F-S132TCM1 F-S132TCM2
40 F-Sl40TCM1 F-S140TCM2
50 F-Sl40TCM1 F-S140TCM2
100 F-S1125TCM1 F-S1125TCM2
125 F-S1125TCM1 F-S1125TCM2
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size I: I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F. F Knuckle U: U Knuckle
80 F-M22X1501 F-M22X150Y
100 F-M26X150I F-M26X150Y
125 F-M27X2001 F-M27X200Y F-M27X200U
Bore size CS1-BD DS1-BD CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
32 CS1-B1 DS1-B1
40 CS1-B1 DS1-B1
50 CS1-B2 DS1-B2
63 CS1 - B2 DS1 - B2 CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
80 CS1 - B3 DS1 - B3
100 CS1 - B4 DS1 - B4
125 CS1-B5 DS1-B5
Mini cylinder(Stainless steel)--MI Series
In accordance with IS06432 standard
D Product series
Collocation of sensor switch
Series name
CS1-M DS1-M CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
g'~
l----l--~--1----4--~--l----4--~--l---l ~ t
Q) <O
1----1--~--1----t--~--1----t--~--1---1 o
~e
-c ·-
0
- a,
1----1--~--1----t--~--1----t--~--1---1 ~~
N C:
1----1--~--1----t--~--1----t--~--1---1 ·00 o
~~
0:::,
1 - - - - - 1 - - ~ - - 1 - - - - < 1 - - ~ - - 1 - - - - < 1 - - ~ - - 1 - - -1 ~ 0
Q).S::::
1 - - - - - 1 - - ~ - - 1 - - - - < 1 - - ~ - - 1 - - - - < 1 - - ~ - - 1 - - -1 ~ ]
Page 220 457

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Ml
or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
added in air inlet and outlet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be especially noticed.
Criteria for selection: Cylinder thrust Unit: Newton(N)

Bore size Rod size Pressure area Operating pressure(MPa)
Acting type
(mm) (mm) (mm') 01 02 0.3 04 05 0.6 0.7
Single Push side 50.2 3.6 8.6 13.6 18.6 23.6 28.7
acting Pull side 37.7 1.0 4.8 8.6 12.3 16.1 19.9
8 4 Double Push side 50.2 5.0 10.1 15.1 20.1 25.1 30.1 35.2
acting Pull side 37.7 3.7 7.5 11.3 15.1 18.8 22.6 26.4
Single Push side 78.5 5.9 13.8 21.6 29.5 37.3 45.2
acting Pull side 65.9 3.4 10.0 16.6 23.2 29.8 36.4
10 4
Double Push side 78.5 7.9 15.7 23.6 31.4 39.3 47.1 55.0
acting Pull side 65.9 6.6 13.2 19.8 26.4 330 39.5 46.1
Single Push side 113.0 10.1 21.4 32.7 44.0 55.3 66.6
acting Pull side 84.8 4.5 12.9 21.4 29.9 38.4 46.9
12 6 Double Push side 113.0 11.3 22.6 33.9 45.2 56.5 67.8 79.1
acting Pull side 84.8 8.5 17.0 25.4 33.9 42.4 50.9 59.4
Single Push side 201.0 14.6 34.7 54.8 74.9 95.0 115.1
acting Pull side 172.7 8.9 26.2 43 .. 5 60.8 78.0 95.3
16 6
Double Push side 201.0 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7
acting Pull side 172.7 17.3 34.5 51.8 69.1 86.4 103.6 120.9
Single Push side 314.0 25.3 56.7 88.1 119.5 150.9 182.3
acting Pull side 263.8 15.3 41 .6 68.0 94.4 120.8 147.1
20 8 Double Push side 314.0 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.6 157.0 188.4 219.8
acting Pull side 263.8 26.4 52.8 79.1 105.5 131.9 158.3 184.7
Single Push side 490.6 43.1 92.2 141.3 190.3 239.3 288.4
acting Pull side 412.1 27.4 68.6 109.8 151.1 192.3 233.5
25 10
Double Push side 490.6 49.1 98.1 147.2 196.2 245.3 294.4 343.4
acting Pull side 412.1 41.2 82.4 123.6 164.8 206.1 247.3 288.5
Single Push side 804.3 30.2 110.9 191 .3 277.1 352.1 432.6 513.0
acting Pull side 691 .2 19.1 88.2 157.4 226.5 295.6 364.7 388.8
32 12 Double Push side 804.3 80.4 160.9 241 .3 321 .7 402.2 482.6 563.0
acting Pull side 691.2 69.1 138.2 207.4 276.5 345.6 414.7 483.8
Single Push side 1256.6 64.7 190.3 316.0 441.7 567.3 693.0 818.7
acting Pull side 1055.6 44.6 150.1 255.7 361.2 466.8 572.4 677.9
40 16 Double Push side 1256.6 125.7 251 .3 377.0 502.6 628.3 754.0 879.6
acting Pull side 1055.6 105.6 211 .1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.4 738.9
Mini cylinder(Stainless steel, IS06432) AlrTAC
Ml Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40
Double acting, Single acting_push, Single acting _pull
Acting type
- I Double acting with cushion
Operating IDouble actinq 0.1-1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
pressure ISinqle actinq 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145psi)(2.0-10 Obar)
Speed range mm/s Double actino: 30-800 Sinole actino: 50-800
Stroke tolerance o-250•~-0 >25o•P
Cushion type MIC Series: Variable cushion Other series: Bumper
Port size G) M5x 0.8 I 1/8" I 1/4"
G) PT thread, Gthread thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
..
D Stroke
: • 1..;111
8 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150
.. 150
'
. .
200
. . : .. 8 1015 20 25 30 40 50
1i,;111 ..
- 10 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150160175 200 200 200 10 1015 20 25 30 40 50
12 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150160175 200 250 250 500 12 1015 20 25 30 40 50
-16 500 600 MSI 16 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100
Ml
1Q_ 500 800 MTI 20 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150160175 200 250 300
Ml
MIC
i
-
40
350 400 450 500
500
500
500
800
800
800
25
32
40
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150
8 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 100 -
- 10 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 100 -
12 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 200 -
MID 16 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 300 -
MIJ 20 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 300 -
MICD -
25 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 300
MICJ
32 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 500 -
40 350 400 450 500 500 -
D Symbol D Ordering code

Ml MIC MTI MSI Ml 10 x 40 SCA O 0
-so
MI-S
-St]
MIC-S
----ijEJ
MTI-S
-Sl]
MSI-S
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MID10x40
1. . . . . . . . . . . .
S DD
-SID
MID
~
MIJ
~
MICD
-em
MICJ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . .
MIJ 10 x 40-30 S O0
-sE- -8&4- -SE-

MID - S MIJ- S MICD- S
~
MICJ - S Ml: Mini cylinder(Double acting)
•1111
MSI: Mini cylinder(Single acting push
BB- ~ -BIS- ~ MTI: Mini cvlinder(Single acting_ pull)
MID: Mini cvlinder(Double rod)
G)
MIJ: Mini cvlinder(Adiustable stroke) Mounting type
D Product feature MIC: Mini cylinder Model Mounting type
(Double acting with cushion)
1. In accordance with IS06432 standard(<ll8-<1>25). Blank: No accessories
MICD: Mini cylinder Ml
2. Front and back cover owns fixed bumper pad which can reduce the impact (Double rod with cushion) FA: FA type
MIC
of direction-change of the cylinder. MICJ: Mini cylinder MSI SOB: SDB type
3. There are several mode of back cover, which makes the installation of (Adjustable stroke with cushion) MTI LB: LB type
cylinder more convenient. TC: TC type
4. Front and back cover and stainless steel block adopt riveted rolling packed Bore size MID Blank: No accessories
structure to form a reliable connection.
Model Bore size MICD FA: FA type
MIC, MICD, MICJ 16 20 25 32 40 MIJ LB: LB type
5. Piston rod and cylinder body with the material of stainless steel make the Others 8101216 20 25 32 40 MICJ TC: TC type
cylinder adapt general working environment with corrosivity.
6. There are cylinders and accessories with several specifications for Stroke Back cover
installation for your choice. IRefer to stroke table for details I Model Back cover Bore size
CA: Pivot type <ll 8-(1)25
Ml
Ad'ustable stroke U: Per endicular90' <1>8-<1>40
MSI
Model Ad'ustable stroke MTI <1>16-<1>40
10: 10mm <1>16-<1>40
20: 20mm CA: Pivot ! e <1>16-<1>25
30: 30mm
MIC U: Per endicular 90' <1>16-<1>40
MIJ 40: 40mm
CM: Round-end type <1>16-<1>40
MICJ 50: 50mm
75: 75mm Others No this code
100: 100mm
Others No this code Magnet
G) Please refer to page 223-224 for accessory parts. S: With magnet
Ml Series
CA Type
1~11
1 Rod SUS304
3 Front cover packing NBR
U Type R Type CM Type
4 Front cover nut Carbon steel
5 Bushing Wear resistant material
7 Barrel SUS304
8 Bumper TPU
Piston1<P 8-<P 12 SUS304
9
'lathers Aluminum alloy
10 Piston seal NBR
12 Nut Carbon steel
M5 x 0.8
M5 x 0.8
94 111 M5 x 0.8
20 126 106 106 126 44 62 14.5 14.5 14.5 118' 7.5 7.5 29
25 137 114.5 115 137 50 65 16 16 16 104 118' 8 8 33.5
32 125 126 140 58 16.5 16.5 118' 9 9 37.5
40 158 158 174 69 22 22 114' 12 12 46.5
:,
8
.
=--·-
15 8 4
I •
16 M4 x 0.7 10.5
:
12 7 2.2 17 6 4 10 M12x 1.25 12 12
:
10 15 8 4 16 M4 x 0.7 10.5 12 7 2.2 17 6 4 10 M12 x1 .25 12 12

12 18 12 6 21 M6x 1.0 14 16 10 5 22 6 5(2-sides) 6 14 M16 x 1.5 17 17
16 20 12 6 21 M6x 1.0 14.5 16 10 5 22 6 5(2-sides) 6 13 M16 x 1.5 17 17
20 25 16 8 24 M8x 1.25 18 20 12 6 29 7 6(2-sides) 8 11 M22 x 1.5 20 20
25 30 16 10 28 M10 x1 .25 20.5 22 17 6 29 7 8(4-sides) 8 11 M22 x 1.5 22 22
32 34.5 - 12 28 M10 x 1.25 17.5 20 17 6 36 7 10(4-sidesl - - M30 x 1.5 30 14
40 42.5 - 16 34 M12 x1.25 21 24 17 7 46 8 14(4-sidesl - - M38 x 1.5 35 16
<!>16-<1>25
CA Type
U Type Total length=A+Stroke CM Type Tolal len th=A+Stroke
~
AE MB
@j' ~R
:, - : . .. . ·-
16 110 15 122 16 15(2-sides) 16 I 13 IM16 x1 .5 117 17 M5x0.8 17.5 7 22 I
20 112 16 129 17 16(2-sides) 18 111 IM22 x1 .5 120 20 118' 17.5 7.5 29 I
25 117 16 129 17 18(4-sides) 18 111 IM22 x1 .5 122 22 118" 18 8 33.5 I
Ml Series
CD32, <!>40
CM Type
UType
~
Remark : The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder.
A+Stroke x 2
AC+Stroke
Ml
UTypo ~
~tm
CM Type
@,f
111 99 71
130 113 75
136 161 119 144 81 106
151 176 201 131 156 87 112 137 170
162 187 212 90 115 140 179
5 M16x1 .5
16 10.5 10.5 20 12 21 14.5 16 10 5 13 M16x1.5 17 17 8 6 6 22
20 14.5 14.5 25 16 8 24 18 20 12 6 11 M22 x 1.5 20 20 7.5 7.5 7.5 29
25 16 16 30 16 10 28 M10 x 1.25 20.5 22 17 6 11 M22 x 1.5 22 22 1/8" 8 8 8 33.5
32 16.5 34.5 - 12 28 M10x1.25 17.5 20 17 6 M30 x 1.5 30 14 1/8" 9 9 37.5
40 22 42.5 - 16 34 M12 x 1.25 21 24 17 7 M38 x 1.5 35 16 1/4" 12 12 46.5
Ml Series
~
A-A
I ~
A-A
Model
(2) SDB is attached with relevant PIN.

Bore size
Mounting FA: FA type
accessory SDB: SDB type (2)
TC: TC type
CD Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
I
Cl Accessory selection
;;,;
16 12
•• •• •• •• •• ••
:,
C: y
104 48 11 .5 4 16 15 M4 x 0.7 10.5 12 ~
128 52 12.5 6 21 21 M6x 1.0 14 16
ro u
134
150 151
58
62
12.5
14.5
6
8
21
24
21
25
M6x 1.0 14.5 16
M8x 1.25 18 20
<.D
(fJ
F
CS1- M x
• •• X
• •• •
X
•• Ml
25
32
165
184
164 50
183 58
65
68
16
16.5
10
12
28
28
27
27
M10x1.25 20 22
M10x1.25 17.5 20
<D
:,
"'
Q
DS1-M x
CS1-F X
•• X
X
•• X
X
••
40
.. 227 221 69 89 22 16 34 28 M12 x 1.25 21 24 "'
:i.
c=;
::::r
DS1-F X
CS1 - U X
•• X
X
•• X
X
••
• • •
~
(2)
M12x1.25 12 MS x 0.8 DS1- U X X X
8 7 2.2 17 6
10 7 2.2 17 6 M12x1.25 12 MS x 0.8 CD Please refer to P453- 456 for knuckle detail,
12 10 5 22 6 M16 x 1.5 17 MS x 0.8 8 Cg) Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
16 10 5 22 6 M16 x 1.5 17 M5x0.8 8
20 12 6 29 7 M22 x 1.5 20 1/8" 7.5
25 17 6 29 7 M22 x 1.5 22 1/8" 8 Material of accessories
32 17 6 36 7 M30 x 1.5 30 1/8" 9
40 17 7 46 8 M38 x 1.5 35 1/4" 12
~
A.- SUS304, f'..-SPCC, D - Carbon steel.
A-A
I
Bore size LB FA SDB TC
8
F-Ml10LB F-Ml8FA F-Ml8SDB F-Ml10TC
10
12
16
20
~
A-A
25
32
40
F-M132LB
F-Ml40LB -
F-Ml32SDB
F-Ml40SDB
F-Ml32TC
F-Ml40TC
I
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size I: I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F: F Knuckle U: U Knuckle
10
12
F-M6X1001 F-M6X100Y F-M6X100F F-M6X100U
16
20 F-M8X1 251 F-M8X125Y F-M8X125F F-M8X125U
32
20 150 151 44 62 14.5 8 20
25 165 164 50 65 16 10 28 27 M10 x 1.25 20.5 22 Accessories Sensor switch
32 184 183 58 68 16.51 2 28 27 M10 x 1.25 17.5 20 Bore size CS1-MD DS1-MD CS1-F DS1-F CS1-U DS1-U
40 227 221 69 89 22 16 34 28 M12 x 1.25 21 24 CS1-M-S08 DS1-M-S08
:
16
.. 10 5 22 6 5(2-Sides) M16 x 1.5 17
.
MS x0 .8
..
7.5
8
10
12
CS1 - M-S10 DS1- M-S10
CS1-M-S12 DS1-M-S12
20 12 6 29 7 6(2-Sides) M22 x 1.5 20 1/8" 7.5 16 CS1-M-S16 DS1 -M-S16
25 17 6 29 7 8(4- Sides) M22 x 1.5 22 1/8" 8 20 CS1- M-S20 DS1 - M-S20 CS1-F DS1 - F CS1 - U DS1 - U
32 17 6 36 7 10(4- Sides) M30 x 1.5 30 1/8' 9 25 CS1 - M-S25 DS1 - M-S25
40 17 7 46 8 14/4- Sidesl M38 x 1.5 35 1/4" 12 32 CS1-M-S32 DS1-M-S32
40 CS1 - M-S40 DS1- M-S40
Accessories
D Dimensions
ID
A ClJBe9
<1>8-<1>25
B ~:=.::_-_:_:=.:::~ ~-t
~j[ _________Jff A~, 4-ClJAP <!>8-<1>25
AC+Stroke AQ
I AA+Stroke I
H+Stroke E
.,,, •., ~l{ ]iij,,_ •., ClJBe9
Ab;;~A_L_AC+Strok~~
AE
..
AA+Stroke
:
8
.. .IW.I
78
•:
68
•I
35 25 16 10 11
. ..
4.5 5 3
:
28 12
68 10 11 4.5
'
10 78 35 25 16 5 3 28 12
E
12 90 78 42 32 20 13 14 5.5 6 4 38 17
16
20
25
96
112
115
84
96
99
42
54
54
32
40
40
20
25
25
13
20
20
14
17
17
5.5
6.6
6.6
6
8
8
4
5
5
38
44
50
17
20
22
:
8
.. 6
:
4 26
I
38 20 12 28 58
MI 32 110 49 96 28 66 52 28 14 7 7 4 58 30 10 6 4 26 38 20 12 28 58
40 149 58 129 30 80 60 33 20 9 10 5 69 35 12 8 6 38 58 25 17 38 67
16 8 6 38 58 25 17 38 73
BIi 20 8 6 46 66 32 20 44 82
ri"~====~
2 -dlBP
Q>8-Q>25
C+Stroke
tEB-r
Ut-J
~1 25
32
40
8
11
12
6
9
10
46
54
64
66
74
84
32
45
55
22
30
35
50
58
69
87
82
101
BE
=·. : .. : : : .
8 28 46 3 22 40 30 4_5 12
10 28 46 3 22 40 30 4.5 12
12 38 50 4 30 52 40 5.5 17
16 38 56 4 30 52 40 5.5 17
20 44 62 5 40 66 50 6.6 20
25 50 65 5 40 66 50 6_6 22
Q>8-Q>25
<1>32, <1>40 CB+Stroke

·-1-·mITt.-------------- ~
n I~
CA
Q
Et~~-. -!~ : --- -©-\:

I
e-La
'--i Ji!______ ' -------------~ 4-Q>CP b.. l_;:- ~
Lc.sJ
D ________QQ___
CR D
<1>32, <1>40
6
- f~ --t-1~ --]mJ
-,1:g1r -~
-- :Asr-
1
:
8
.. ·-·
11 8.1 18.4 76 20
=--• 12_5 24 4.5
. •
13.1 2.5 -
.
10 11 8.1 18.4 76 20 12.5 24 4.5 13.1 2.5
12 13 12.1 28 91 25 15 27 5.5 18.1 3
16 13 12.1 28 98 25 15 27 5.5 18.1 3 .
20 16 16.1 38 115 32 20 30 6.6 24.1 4 .
25 16 16.1 38 126 32 20 30 6.6 24.1 4 .
32 20 34.6 55.5 117 41 20 24 35 7 46.6 4 67
40 27 42.6 69.6 146 52 28 30 40 9 58.6 5 81
.,.,.z,
Pen size cylinder--PB Series
D Product series
Series name
Basic LB FA CJ CS1-M DS1-M
4
:g"'
0
6
0
Double rod type: PBD
12
16
Adjustable stroke type: PBJ 10
- 12
16
Front mounting type: PBR
6
:g"' 8
0
0
Page 226 232

I=~:: 457

or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
7. The load of the cylinder with the diameter of <!>4 needs to be coaxial with the cylinder to avoid side load, otherwise, piston rod will
be bent and deformed and damage the thread at the end of the rod. Single-acting type can not be added in return.
8. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, Please to conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust caps shall
be added in air inlet and outlet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be especially noticed.

(mm) (mm) Acting type (mm') 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
SinQle actinQ-Push side 12.6 0.3 1.6 2.8 4.1 5.3 6.6
4 2 Double Push side 12.6 1.3 2.5 3.8 5.0 6.3 7.6 8.8
acting Pull side 9.4 0.9 1.9 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 6.6
Single Push side 28.3 2.2 5.0 7.8 10.6 13.5 16.3
acting Pull side 21 .2 0.7 2.9 5.0 7.1 9.2 11.3
6 3
Double Push side 28.3 2.8 5.7 8.5 11 .3 14.2 17.0 19.8
acting Pull side 21.2 2.1 4.2 6.4 8.5 10.6 12.7 14.8
Single Push side 50.3 3.6 8.6 13.6 18.7 23.7 28.7
acting Pull side 37.7 1.0 4.8 8.6 12.4 16.1 19.9
8 4 Double Push side 50.3 5.0 10.1 15.1 20.1 25.2 30.2 35.2
acting Pull side 37.7 3.8 7.5 11.3 15.1 18.9 22.6 26.4
Single Push side 78.5 6.2 14.1 21.9 29.8 37.6 45.5
acting Pull side 65.9 3.7 10.3 16.9 23.5 30.1 36.7
10 4
Double Push side 78.5 7.9 15.7 23.6 31 .4 39.3 47.1 55.0
acting Pull side 65.9 6.6 13.2 19.8 26.4 33.0 39.5 46.2
Single Push side 113.0 9.0 20.3 31.6 42.9 54.2 65.5
acting Pull side 93.4 5.1 14.4 23.8 33.1 42.4 51 .8
12 5 Double Push side 113.0 11 .3 22.6 33.9 45.2 56.5 67.8 79.1
acting Pull side 93.4 9.3 18.7 28.0 37.4 46.7 56.0 65.4
Single Push side 201.0 14.5 34.6 54.7 74.8 94.9 115.0
acting Pull side 181 .3 10.6 28.7 46.8 65.0 83.1 101.2
16 5 Double Push side 201 .0 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7
acting Pull side 181 .3 18.1 36.3 54.4 72.5 90.7 108.8 126.9
Pen size cylinder AlrTAC
PB Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 4 6 10 12 16
ACting type Double acting, Single actina oush I Double acting, Single acting _push, Single actina oull
Operating IDouble acting 0.2-0. 7MPa(28- 100psi)(2.0- 7.0bar) 0.1-0.7MPa(15-100psi)(1.0-7.0bar)
pressure ISingle acting 0.3-0. 7MPa(36-100psi)(3.0-7.0bar) 0.2-0.7MPa(28-100psi)(2.0-7.0bar)
Speed range mm/s 50-500 50-800
Stroke tolerance +~.O 0-250 +1, 0 >250+), 5
Cushion tvPe No cushion Bumoer
Port size Tube M5 x 0.8
Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
..
D Stroke
:
4 5101520
~ ei,:111 .
.
20
. I•
20
. . =· .
4 5101520
• tt:Ht ..
6 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 60 60 6 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
PB 10 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 200 200 PSB 10 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
PTB
12 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 200 300 12 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
16 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 300 300 16 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
PB 6 510152025304050 50 -
PBD
10 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 100 -
PBJ 12 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 200 -
16 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 200 -

D PB 10 x 30 S CB
PB
-BD -sll
PSB
~
PTB PBD
-BB- ~
PBJ
.......................................
PB-S
-sJD
PSB-S
-em ---as
PTB-S PBD-S
-816- -6&4'
PBJ-S
............................
D PBD10 x 30
PBJ 10 x 30-10 S
S
D Product feature Model Mounting type CD

PB: Pen size cylinder Model Mounting type
1. JIS standard is implemented. (Double acting) Blank: No accessories
2. It belongs to mini cylinder that has compact structure, small volume and PSB: Pen size cylinder PB FA: FA type
lightweight. (Single acting_push) PSB
PTB: Pen size cylinder PTB LB: LB type
3. The guide precision of piston rod is high and no additional lubricant is CJ: CJ type
needed. (Single acting pull)
Blank: No accessories
PBD: Pen size cylinder PBD
4. PB4 and PB6 can only be front mounted. PB10, PB12 and PB16 has the FA: FA type
(Double rod) PBJ
flexibility of both front and rear mount. LB: LB type
PBJ: Pen size cylinder
5. Piston rod stainless steel barrel make the cylinder adapt general (Adjustable stroke)
corrosive working environment. Back cover
6. There are cylinders and accessories with several specifications for Model Back cover Bore size
Bore size
installation for your choice. Model Bore size CB : Double clevis <010-<!>16
7. It has small cylinder diameter and quick reaction , suitable for the working PB U: Perpendicular so· <P10-<P16
PB, PSB 4 6 10 12 16 PSB
environment with higher frequency. PTB,PBD 6 10 12 16 R: Axial air-in <P6-<P 16
PBJ 10 12 16 CB : Double clevis <P10-<P16
PTB
R: Axial air-in <P6-<P 16
Stroke PBD, PBJ No this code
Magnet
Ad"ustable stroke
Bore size Ma net
Model Adjustable stroke
<P 4 Blank: Without magnet
10: 10mm
<P 6_ <P 16 Blank: Without magnet
20: 20mm
S:With magnet
30: 30mm
PBJ
40: 40mm
50 : 50mm
75: 75mm
100: 100mm
Others No this code
(j) Please refer to page 232 for accessory parts.

PB Series
Double acting without magnet(CJ>6)

IP4(Without magnet)(R Type)
, :Wmc , . ,
Double acting without magnet( CJ> 10- CJ> 16)
~-~
11 ,, ,,
..... IP6(R Type)

1 Rod nut Carbon steel 49.5+Stroke
~
2 Piston rod SUS304
M3X0.5
4 Packing retainer Brass(CJ>4)\Aluminum alloy(Others)
~
6 Front cover 0-ring NBR
7 Front cover Brass(CJ>4)\Aluminum alloy(Others)
8 Barrel Bronze( CJ> 4)\SUS304(0thers)
9 Bumper TPU
10 Piston seal NBR Note) Only axial air intake type of back cover is available for ¢4, ¢6mm bore size.
12 Bumper TPU <1>10- CJ> 16
13 Back cover Brass(CJ>4)\Aluminum alloy(Others)
U Type(Perpendicular90" )
A+Stroke
AC+Stroke
"J"'
~ A
~
"~
CB Type(Double clevis) R Type(Axial air-In)
PB Series
Cl>4(Without magnet)(R Type)

A
AC 7.5
....., •.,,1,1·•• .
5 40 19.5
10 49 28.5
15 58 37.5
20 67 46.5
Cl>S(RType)
A+Stroke
AC+Stroke
~'"·' """·"t=€D~j~j[=======~~JDmm•••
5-15 70 42
16-30 79 51
31-45 83 55
Note) Only axial air intake type of back cover is available for <!>4, <!>6mm bore size. 46-60 97 69
PB
<!>10-<!>16
A+Stroke
~
E
., +"'A
~ PB ..~
CB Type(Double clevis) R Type(Axial air-in)
Total len th=A+Stroke
AE
ffl '~""''""[j~ AE
PB Series
Cl>6(R Type) A+Strokex2
··~ 5-15
.. 82 54
~
16-30 91 63
31-45 95 67
46-60 109 81
Note) Only axial air intake type of back cover is available for c)l6mm bore size.
----------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ---------------------------------------- -------------------------------------
C!>1 O-Q>16 R Type(Axial air-in) A+Stroke x 2
AB+Stroke AC+Stroke
., -i'lq.,
~ .,~
Total len th=A+Stroke x 2
AE ~
CB Type(Double clevis) ~
~1
Note)c)l10-c)l16 bore sized don't have perpendicular(90" ) air-,n.
PB
117.5+ Stroke x 2
Cl>6
C!>10-C!>16
AC+Stroke
R
Cl>10-C!>16 A+Stroke x 2+Ad·ustable Stroke

AC+Stroke
DB+ Stroke+ Mu stable Stroke
1
PBR Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 6 8 10 12 16
Acting type Double acting, Sinale actina oush, Sinale acting _pull
Fluid Air(to be filtered bv 40 µ m filter element)
Operating IDouble actina 0.1 - 0.7MPa(15-100osi)(1.0-7.0bar)
pressure ISine le actina 0.2-0.7MPa(28-100osi)(2.0-7.0bar)
Proof oressure 1.1 MPa(160osi)(11bar)
Stroke tolerance 0-250+~ 0 >250+;5
Cushion tvoe Bumoer
Port size M5 x 0.8
D Symbol
Stroke
1:, .
6 1015 20 25 30 40 50 60
• I, I .. 60
. .. . 60
.
PBR PSBR PTBR
--E;3D
PBR-S
-sll
PSBR-S
-asPTBR-S
PBR
8
10
12
1015 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200
150
200
200
150
200
300
16 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 300 300
-BID -f;3U ~ 6
8
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
PBR PSBR 10
PTBR
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
12 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75
Product feature 16 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100
1. JIS standard is implemented.
2. It belongs to mini cylinder that has compact structure, small volume and
light weight.
3. The guide precision of piston rod is high and no additional lubricant is
needed.
4. Screw holes are designed for mounting directly at the front cover without
any accessories. Model Back cover
5. Piston rod stainless steel barrel make the cylinder adapt general PBR: Pen size cylinder Model Back cover Bore size
(Double acting) PBR U: Perpendicular 90' 8101216
corrosive working environment.
PSBR: Pen size cylinder PSBR R: Axial air-in 6 8101216
6.lt has small cylinder diameter and quick reaction, suitable for the working (Single acting push)
PTBR R: Axial air-in 6 8 101216
environment with higher frequency. PTBR: Pen size ctlinder
(Single acing pull)
Bore size Magnet

Is8101216 I Blank: Without magnet
S: With magnet
Stroke
IRefer to stroke table for details J
Mounting type
Top bolt mounting
Bottom bolt mounting
Note: Use an applicable bolt to mount upward from the bottom.
•..ffl••
PBR Series

Double acting with magnet
A+Stroke
AC+Stroke
l~lt
1 Rod nut Carbon steel R Type U Type
(Axial air-in) (Perpendicular 90' )
4
2
3
Piston rod
Front cover 0-ring
Front cover
SUS304
NBR
Aluminum alloy
:
6
.. 70
•:
20 50
.,
19 7
:
17.2
:••
10 14 7 3
I
M3x0.5 15
:
16 5.5 2.4
5 Barrel SUS316L 8 74 20 54 19.5 9.5 19.2 12 16 8 4 M4x0.7 15 16.5 7 2.2
6 Bumper TPU 10 74 20 54 19.5 9.5 19.2 12 16 8 4 M4x0.7 15 16.5 7 2.2
7 Piston SUS303\Aluminum allov 12 74 20 54 19.5 9.5 24.2 15 20 10 5 M5x0.8 15 16.5 8 4
8 Piston seal NBR 16 76 20 56 20 9.5 24.2 18 20 10 6 M5•0.8 15 16.5 8 4
9 Magnet
Sintered metal :, . : . .. .
(Neodymium-iron-boron) 6.5 4 M4x0.7 7 3.3 10 M5•0.8 14 11
6 8
10 Magnet washer NBR 8 6.5 4 M4x0.7 7 3.3 8 12 M5x0.8 15 5 14
11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 10 6.5 4 M4x0.7 7 3.3 8 12 M5x0.8 15.5 5 14
12 Wear ring Wear resistant material 12 8 5 M5•0.8 8 4.3 8 16 M5•0.8 15.5 5 17
PBR
13 Bumper TPU 16 8 5 M5•0.8 8 4.3 8 16 M5x0.8 15.5 5 20
14 Back cover Aluminum alloy Remark: The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder.
Only axial air intake type of back cover is available for <l>6mm bore size.
A+Stroke
AB AC+Stroke
ra~
~~~
R Type U Type
(Axial air-in) (Perpendicular 90' )
AB+Stroke AC+Stroke
m
A
--f~----
~ :)-1--+--'l-,...._--i
PTBR 10 84 108 20 56.5 64

12 84 96 108 11 4.5 20 56.5 64 76 88 94.5
16 86 98 110 116 122 20 57.5 66 78 90 96 102
:, . I
10 14 M3x0.5 15 16 5.5 2.4 6.5 4 M4x0.7 3.3 8 10 M5x0.8 14 11
12 16 4 M4x0.7 15 16.5 2.2 6.5 4 M4x0.7 3.3 8 12 M5x0.8 15 14
10 12 16 4 M4x0.7 15 16.5 2.2 6.5 4 M4•0.7 3.3 8 12 M5•0.8 15.5 5 14
12 15 20 10 M5•0.8 15 16.5 4 8 M5•0.8 4.3 8 16 M5•0.8 15.5 5 17
16 18 20 10 M5x0.8 15 16.5 4 8 M5•0.8 4.3 8 16 M5•0.8 15.5 5 20
Only axial air intake type of back cover is available for <ll6mm bore size.
•.BJ•
Accessories
D Dimensions
ID
-bi~ ! */)
B
Accessor t e CD •;!;:• \
LB: LB type
Mounting FA" FA type
;1: 1 1r
.!.:t i,
~
c,±,,.-----------,,:ccc,
1<:. <.
..( )'<":::.
____
; ... ::
---;-,-1-,,-- -
__ _:::~
:: ,,~r
II r!'-
II _________ _JL..(_
_J-.LL
fl
:~
___
2- CJ>G
-......_
r,(.,- ,,"1
ftr,,,
l,
-._ ../"
\
I 8) 0
Model
accessory CJ: CJ type (2) -I
E F I A
Bore size I: I Knuckle C+Stroke BB
Knuckle® Y: Y Knuckle
<D Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
:
6
.. 24
:
28
..
32 56.5 9 16.5
I
5 7 4.5 1.5
® CJ is attached with relevant PIN. 10 24 28 32 53 9 16.5 5 7 4.5 1.5
® Please refer to page 453,454 for others knuckle. 12 33 28 42 55 14 25 6 9 5.5 2.5
16 33 28 42 57 14 25 6 9 5.5 2.5
Accessory selection la B C+Stroke
Cylinder model PB PSB,PTB PBD, PBJ CJ>F 2-CJ>E
Accessories Standard With magnet Standard With magnet Standard With magnet ~~
\ Mounting LB
FA •• •• ••• ••• •• •• ~'*~ ~==~·~~l' ~ ~
- -r,-.../-~
:- JL.___
--------- -,,...t""~+"'!f
_ II '/ l f1 }
8[
-E~
accessory CJ
•• •• c:..,... '/
_,, ' II / '
X X
l.._.
==}lL---------U== ='.J
:i.J....~ -< \\,
Knuckle
I
y
•• •• •• •• ••• •• -D - A
PB
CD F
u • •• •• •• • •• :, .
6 24
:-:i:
28 32 49.5 14
I
1.5 4.5 6.3
BB
Sensor
switch(Z)
CS1-M x
DS1-M x
•
X
X
•• X
X
•• 10
12
24
33
28 32
28 42
46
46
14
20
1.5
2.5
4.5
5.5
8.3
10.3
<D Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail, 16 33 28 42 48 20 2.5 5.5 10.3
ID
'" '"· tr
B
Material of accessories r1Li 4-CJ>E
,,------- ----t4--
! J! -
=-
~ _____ ~~-=-=-~-=~
- -_1c-__ -+~li..:!.._ - -,
----- -ire: - - - - ~-
6-SPCC, D-Carbon steel.

~ ·l'·~!}-- ..JO
~~ -j1_ _ -

$T$ -
C+Stroke ~ -G l
A+Stroke F
Bore size LB FA CJ :, . : I
4 10 82
154 22
40 4.5 29 21 12 2 18 9.1 132 I
6 F-PB6LB F-PB6FA 12 84 156 28
48 5.5 35 25 16 2.5 20.4 14.1 138 I
10 F-PB10LB F-PB10FA F-PB10CJ 16 86 158 28
48 5.5 35 25 16 2.5 20.4 14.1 138 I
12 F-PB12CJ Note) CJ type accessories need to be matched with I joint and I joint has to be ordered individually.
F-PB12LB F-PB12FA F-PB16CJ
16
"~·. rr ~
·i
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size I: I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F· F Knuckle U: U Knuckle t
4
6
10
F-PB61
F-PB101
F-PB6Y
F-PB10Y
.
F-M3X040F
F-M4X070F F-M4X070U
....
ucf _ ,e
tr
12
F-PB121 F-PB12Y F-M5X080F F-M5X080U
w -1i1
16
Ul,A
Sensor switch F-P861: <llB, Others: DB
..
Accessories
Bore size CS1-MD DS1-MD
. : I
4
F-PB61 IM3x0.5 16 3 13 112 15 15 5
6 CS1 - M-S06 DS1 - M-S06
F-PB101 IM4x0.7 112 3.3 13 121 19.1 17.5 8
10 CS1 - M-S10 DS1 - M-S10
F-PB121 IM5x0.8 112 5 16.3 125 114.1 17.5 12
12 CS1-M-S12 DS1-M-S12
16 CS1-M..S16 DS1-M-S16
___lL_
~D
~ [<
i.+. iI
nrn1 Clip
..
..
F-PB6Y
~
15.5 12 5
=--·
16 M3•0.5 16 9
E
3 3
F-PB10Y 28 21 10.2 112 M4x0 .7 110 15.5 3.2 3.3
F-PB12Y 28 21 10.2 112 MSx0.8 110 15.5 6.5 5
Mini cylinder(Stainless steel)--MF Series
D Product series
Series name
Basic LB FA SOB TC CS1-M DS1 -M
.c
~
u
~
.c "'
"3:
C)
C:
ti ti
"' "'
Q)
C)
C:
Q)
--- 20
25
:c :c 32
:::, :::,
0 0
00 40
rn---
Single acting type:
C:
-
Page 234 237 457

MF

or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
8. To avoid side load, otherwise, piston rod will be bent and deformed and damage the thread at the end of the rod. Single-acting type
can not be added in return.
added in air inlet and ouUet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be especially noticed.
D Criteria for selection: Cylinder thrust Unit : Newton(N)

Single Push side 314.0 . 24.3 55.7 87.1 117.5 149.9 181.3
acting Pull side 263.8 14.3 40.6 67.0 93.4 119.8 146.1
20 8
Double Push side 314.0 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.6 157.0 188.4 219.8
acting Pull side 263.8 26.4 52.8 79.1 105.5 131.9 158.3 184.7
Single Push side 490.6 . 45.6 94.7 143.8 192.8 241.9 290.9
acting Pull side 412.1 29.9 71.1 112.4 153.6 194.8 236.0
25 10
Double Push side 490.6 49.1 98.1 147.2 196.2 245.3 294.4 343.4
acting Pull side 412.1 41.2 82.4 123.6 164.8 206.1 247.3 288.5
Single Push side 804.3 82.2 162.6 242.9 323.3 403.7 484.1
acting Pull side 691.2 59.6 128.6 197.7 266.8 335.9 405.0
32 12
Double Push side 804.3 80.4 160.9 241.3 321.7 402.2 482.6 563.0
acting Pull side 691.2 69.1 138.2 207.4 276.5 345.6 414.7 483.8
Single Push side 1256.6 158.5 284.1 409.7 535.3 660.9 786.5
acting Pull side 1055.6 118.3 223.8 329.3 434.8 540.3 645.8
40 16
Double Push side 1256.6 125.7 251.3 377.0 502.6 628.3 754.0 879.6
acting Pull side 1055.6 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.4 738.9
·-
Mini cylinder(Stainless steel) AlrTAC
MF Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 20 25 32 40
Acting type Double acting, Double acting with cushion, Single actina oush, Single acting__pull
Operating IDouble acting 0.1 - 1.0MPa(1 5-145psi)(1.0- 10.0bar)
pressure ISingle acting 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145psi)(2.0-10.0bar)
Sneed ranoe mm/s Double actino: 30-800 Sinole actino: 50-800
Stroke tolerance 0-250+bo >250+b 5
Cushion tvPe MFC, MFCD, MFCJ Series: Adiustable cushion Other series: Bumper
Port size G) 1/8' I 1/4'
: ..
D Stroke
• tt:•tt. . .. . .. :, . • ti-:111 ..
-:, MF
20
25
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
500
500
800
800 MSF
20
25
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150
~ MFC 32
40
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
500
500
800
800
MTF 32
40
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125150
10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150
MFD 20 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 300 -
MF MFJ 25 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 300 -
MFCD 32 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 -
MFCJ 40 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 -
D Symbol
MF MFC MTF MSF
-BD -S!l
MF-S MFC-S
~
MTF-S
-ell
MSF-S
-sJD -SIO
MFD MFJ
~
MFCD
-sm MFCJ
-SB-
MFD-S
~
MFJ-S
-BE- -oo-+
MFCD-S MFCJ-S
MF: Mini cylinder(Double acting)
MSF: Mini cylinder(Sinole actino push)
-SIB- ~ ~ ~ MTF: Mini cylinder(Single acting_ pull)
MFD: Mini cylinder(Double rod)
MFJ: Mini cylinder(Adiustable stroke) G)
Mounting type
Product feature MFG: Mini cylinder Model Mounting type
(Double acting with cushion)
1. JIS standard is implemented. Blank: No accessories
MFCD: Mini cylinder MF
2. Piston adopts heterogeneous two way seal structure. It has compact size FA: FA type
(Double rod with cushion) MFC
and has the function of oil reservation.
MFCJ: Mini cylinder MSF SOB: SOB type
3. Front cover owns fixed anti-impact pad which can reduce the impact of
(Adjustable stroke with cushion) MTF LB: LB type
direction-change of the cylinder. TC: TC type
4. There are several modes of back cover, which makes the installation of MFD Blank: No accessories
cylinder more convenient. Bore size MFCD FA: FA type
5. Front and back cover and stainless steel block adopt riveted rolling packed 120 25 32 40 I MFJ LB: LB type
structure to form a reliable connection. MFCJ TC: TC type
6. The cylinder body has stainless steel pipes with high precision to produce Stroke
high strength and corrosion resistance. !Refer to stroke table for details I Back cover
Model Back cover
7. With the same bore size and stroke, cylinders of MF series are shorter than
IS06432 standard cylinders. Adjustable stroke • MF,MFC CA: Pivot type
8. There are cylinders and mounting accessories with several specifications for MSF U: Flat-end type
your choice. MTF CM: Round-end type
10: 10mm
30: 30mm
MFJ
MFCJ 40: 40mm Ma net
50: 50mm Blank: Without magnet
75: 75mm S: With magnet
100: 100mm
Others No this code
G) Please refer to page 237 for accessory parts.
MF Series

A+Stroke
Double acting without magnet type CM Type AC+Stroke
AD MB
~~$1lm3
Double acting with magnet I CA Type
w
U Type
fl
,.,..
1 Piston rod
2 Rod nut
Carbon steel with 20 µ m
chrome plated
Carbon steel
y '
.tIJ B

25 120 128 108 45 62 14.5 15.5 MF
32 122 136 110 45 64 14.5 15.5 34.5 20 14 27 13
40 154 165 138.5 50 88 21.5 22 42.5 20 16 27 16
7 Barrel
8 Bumper
SUS304
TPU :, . ,_ '. ; . . .. ·:-
··-
9 Piston Aluminum alloy 20 8 27 MS x 1.25 15.5 18 13 5 26 8 6 8 9 1/8" 7.5 7.5 29
10 0 - ring NBR 25 10 31 M10 x 1.25 19.5 22 17 6 32 8 8 8 9 1/8" 7.5 8 33 .5
11 Piston seal NBR 32 12 31 M10 x 1.25 19.5 22 17 6 32 8 10 10 12 1/8" 7.5 8 37 .5
12 Wear ring Wear resistant material 40 16 34 M14x1.5 21 24 19 8 41 10 14 10 12 1/4" 11 11 .5 46 .5
13 Screw Carbon steel Remark:
2. The dimensions of MFC series are the same as MF series.
Sintered metal
15 Magnet (Neodymium-iron-boron) A+Stroke
16 Magnet washer NBR CM Type AC+Stroke
·~ B
w
EB
fl
CA Type U Type
'''''""''"~ P AE
~ 'fM
'''
32 161 186 211 135 160 185 89 11 4 139

40
:,
20
.
229
14.5 25 12
190
..
215
27
240 163.5
M8 x 1.25 15.5 18
188.5
13
213.5
26
113 138 163
25 15.5 30 12 10 31 M10 x 1.25 19.5 22 17 32

32 15.5 34.5 20 12 31 M10 X 1.25 19.5 22 17 32 10 10 12
24 19 41 10 14 10 12
Remark:
The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as
25 M26 x 1.5 26 14 21 13 1/8" 7.5 8 33.5 non-magnet typecylinder.
32 M26x 1.5 26 14 27 13 1/8" 7.5 8 37.5
40 M32x2.0 32 16 27 16 1/4" 11 11 .5 46.5
MF Series
CM Type
I
CA Type
w
U Type
I
j1 ·m B
MF r2_5~ ~ ~ - +1_45- +1_7_0 ----1_

19_5~-+1_53- +1_7_8 ----1_
20_3~-+1_33----1_
15_8~+1_8_3 ~+-
87----1_
11_2~+1_3_7~+-
M~26~x_ 1~.5=-+--
2_6 r 1_4+2_1+-
13__,
32 147 172 197 161 186 211 135 160 185 89 114 139 M26x 1.5 26 14 27 13
:
20
..
40 179 204
•:
41
'•11-
14.5
229 190 215
·•=-:--•· ••
25 12 8 27 MBx 1.25
14.5
240 163.5 188.5 213.5
15.5
:
18 13
113 138
5 26 8
.
163
6
M32x2.0 32 16 27 16
8 9
. . .. .
1/8' 7.5 29
25 45 14.5 15.5 30 12 10 31 M10x 1.25 19.5 22 17 6 32 8 8 8 9 1/8' 7.5 33.5
32 45 14.5 15.5 34.5 20 12 31 M10x1.25 19.5 22 17 6 32 8 10 10 12 1/8" 7.5 37.5
40 50 21 .5 22 42.5 20 16 34 M14x 1.5 21 24 19 8 41 10 14 10 12 1/4' 11 46 .5
25 152 148 45 62 14.5 10 31 27 M10x1 .25 19.5 22 17

32 154 150 45 64 14.5 12 31 27 M10 x 1.25 19.5 22 17
..
40 188 182 50 88 21 .5 16 34 28 M14 x 1.5 21 24 19
:
20 26 8 6 M20 x 1.5
·-. ..
14 1/8' 7.5
.
29 MB x 1.25 5
25 32 8 8 M26 x 1.5 14 1/8' 7.5 33.5 M10 x 1.25 6
32 32 8 10 M26 x 1.5 14 1/8' 7.5 37.5 M10x1.25 6
40 41 10 14 M32 x 2.0 16 1/4' 11 46 .5 M12 x 1.25 7
Accessories
D Ordering code D Dimensions
A1 +Stroke
A+Stroke D1
Accessor t e
LB: LB type
Model Mounting FA: FA type
accessory SDB: SDB type ®
Bore size TC: TC type
I: I Knuckle I F
Knuckle® Y: Y Knuckle E
CD Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
® SDB is attached with relevant PIN.
:
20
.. 62 116 7 3 20 ·-·
8 13 55 40 25 40 118
@ Please refer to page 455,456 for other knuckles. 25 62 120 7 3 20 8 13 55 40 28 47 118
32 64 122 7 3 20 8 13 55 40 28 47 120
D Accessory selection 40 88 154 7 3 23 10 16 75 55 30 54 154
Cylinder model MF, MFC MSF, MTF MFD,MFCD,MFJ,MFCJ

Accessories Standard With magnet Standard With magnet Standard With magnet
BIi -F f-
2-QlDD
,--------,.
••• ••• ••• ••• •• ••

l!l;:: LB
0 0
0) C: FA
u, :,
(I) ~
0:, SDB X X
'<"' TC
;;,s I
•• •• •• •• •• •• B
~
~
y
u
•• •• •• •• •• •• r--
4-QJDD MF
'° • •
<1>40
••• ••• • •••

CD F
Sensor CS1-M x X X
switch® DS1-M x X X
CD Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail,

® Please refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch.
AA
..
B
D Material of accessories :
20 62 124 75
•-•1•
21 4
60 34
25 62 128 60 75 40 21 4
32 64 136 60 75 40 27 4
• - - cast steel, /",- SPCC, 0 - Carbon steel. 40 88 165 66 82 52 27 5 36
A2+Stroke
Bore size LB FA TC SDB
20 F-MF20LB F-MF20FA F-MF20TC
F-MF20SDB
25
F-MF32SD8
Knuckle
20
Accessories
Bore size I. I Knuckle
F-MF201
Y. Y Knuckle
F-MF20Y
F. F Knuckle
F-M8X125F
U. U Knuckle
F-M8X125U 20 62 115 59
=--·
30 32 18.1 30 40 12 12.1 8 3 6.8 37 15
25 25 62 119 59 30 32 18.1 30 40 12 12.1 8 3 6.8 37 15
F-MF251 F-MF25Y F-M10X125F F-M10X125U 32 64 124 75 40 44 28.1 40 53 15 20.1 10 4 9 50 15
32
40 F-MF40I F-MF40Y F-M14X150F F-M14X150U 40 88 153 75 40 44 28.1 40 53 15 20.1 10 4 9 50 15

Bore size CS1-MD DS1-MD
20 CS1-M-S20 DS1-M-S20
25 CS1 - M-S25 DS1 - M-S25
32 CS1-M-S32 DS1-M-S32
40 CS1-M-S40 DS1-M-S40
:, .
20 62 124 10 21 32 52 8 12 32
25 62 128 10 21 40 60 9 12 40
32 64 136 10 27 40 60 9 12 40
40 88 165 11 27 53 77 10 14 53
Special nut for TC E
:,
20
25
32
40
.
26
32
32
41
28
34
34
45
8
8
8
10
25
31
31
40
M20•1.5
M26• 1.5
M26•1.5
M32x2.0
ii ~
•.St•
Accessories
F-MF201_ F-MF251 F-MF401

D <(
ffi;
0 a::
I
0
e-
o~J
,.
F-MF201 9.5 20 9 9 14 16 36 M8x1 .25 18
F-MF251 9.5 20 9 9 14 18 38 M10x1 .25 18
15 24 12 16 20 22 55 M14X1.5
~
F- MF20Y
F-MF25Y
MF
'
C
F-MF40Y
D
F-MF20Y 46 17.5 M8x1.25 16 16 24 9 9

F-MF25Y 48 17.5 M10x1.25 18 16 24 9 9
F-MF40Y 68 22 25 44 16 12
Mini cylinder(Stainless steel)--MA Series
D Product series
I Mounting type I Acting IBore I I Collocation of sensor switch
Series name
I Basic LB FA SOB I type ~ 1!===
cs=1=-M===o=s=
1-M
= ===
cs=1=-F===o=s=
1-=
F===
cs=1=-u===o=s1=-u====!
Double acting type: MA
Double acting with adj. cushion:MAQ_~.~;:;::: ~ .4.. • :g ~
_.. 11t. .....
0)
C:
~
C
0
:.;:::; o,:C:
..
16 t-----<-------+----+---t---t---i
- - - - - -...-------...---,i _; ~ ......
- ._.
..JWi. :::, ..o~
c38~ "'
20 t - - - - - < - - - - - - - + - - - - + - - - t - - - t - - - i
25 "' ..."'
"
[}
Single acting type: MSA, MTA
.. ..... 32
""'
"'
"
""' ""'
40
- - ;..-
=
"'
""'..."'
Double rod type: MAD, MACO --- -
16
.~ , ; r ;...: : : ; ; ~ ,___ _
. . ._ _ _
.._ _ ..,___+---I
._
... °2
0 20
""'
.. .. .
-~.[~
0 0°
<V a, . ....:..
-
~2~ -- 25
32
..""' "
"'
A
~-
Adjustable stroke type: MAJ,= ~ ~
..""' "'
.....
.D .D .c: 40
:, :,
88~ "
_..., ...... " 50
"' .. 'I'//
.."'
63 r,•
=20 /
Other series: MAR C:
.Q "'
--
0)
C:
o,.C:
C: <I)
25
·- ·-:::,
32
0 0°
MA
co a, . .....:..
~~~
.D .D
:, :, -
.c:
40
50
..
c3 c3 ~ l..fil_ ... ...
240
I 245
I I 457

or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
can not be added in return.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please to conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust caps shall

Single Push side 201.0 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5
acting Pull side 172.7 11.6 28.9 46.2 63.4 80.7
16 6
Double Push side 201.0 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7
acting Pull side 172.7 17.3 34.5 51.8 69.1 86.4 103.6 120.9
Single Push side 314.0 15.7 47.1 78.5 109.9 141.3 172.7
acting Pull side 263.8 5.7 32.0 58.4 84.8 111.2 137.5
20 8
Double Push side 314.0 31 .4 62.8 94.2 125.6 157.0 188.4 219.8
acting Pull side 263.8 26.4 52.8 79.1 105.5 131.9 158.3 184.7
Single Push side 490.6 24.6 73.7 122.8 171 .8 220.9 269.9
acting Pull side 412.1 8.9 50.1 91.4 132.6 173.8 215.0
25 10
Double Push side 490.6 49.1 98.1 147.2 196.2 245.3 294.4 343.4
acting Pull side 412.1 41.2 82.4 123.6 164.8 206.1 247.3 288.5
Single Push side 804.3 40.2 120.6 200.9 281.3 361.7 442.1
acting Pull side 691.2 17.6 86.6 155.7 224.8 293.9 363.0
32 12
Double Push side 804.3 80.4 160.9 241.3 321 .7 402.2 482.6 563.0
acting Pull side 691.2 69.1 138.2 207.4 276.5 345.6 414.7 483.8
Single Push side 1256.6 62.8 188.4 314.0 439.6 565.2 690.8
acting Pull side 1055.6 22.6 128.1 233.6 339.1 444.6 550.1
40 16
Double Push side 1256.6 125.7 251 .3 377.0 502.6 628.3 754.0 879.6
acting Pull side 1055.6 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.4 738.9
Double Push side 1962.5 196.3 392.5 588.8 785.0 981 .3 1177.5 1373.8
50 16 acting Pull side 1761.5 176.2 352.3 528.5 704.6 880.8 1056.9 1233.1
Double Push side 31 15.7 31 1.6 623.1 934.7 1246.3 1557.9 1869.4 2181 .0
63 16 acting Pull side 2914.7 291 .5 582.9 874.4 1165.9 1457.4 1748.8 2040.3
MA Series
: ..
Specification
MSA,MTA
I
SinAle actinA
,,
I
I
-
Acting MA, MAD, MAJ Double actinQ I -
type MAR - I Double actino
MAC, MACO, MACJ - I Double acting wtth cushion
Operating Double actinA 0.1 - 1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
pressure Single acting 0.2- 1.0MPa(28-145psi)(2.0-10.0bar)
Soeed range mm/s Double acting: 30-800 Single acting: 50-800
Stroke tolerance 0-250+1,.u >250·1,-"
Cushion type MAC, MACO, MACJ Series: Adjustable cushion Other series: Bumper
Port size G) M5x0.8 I 1/8" I 1/4"
G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Stroke
...... ..
\:
I• I I• I• : • ••nt I•
16 25 50 75 80 100 125150160175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 600 16 25 50 75 100
20 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800 0 25 50 75 100 125150
25 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800 MSA 5 25 50 75100 125 150
MAC 32 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800 l2 25 50 75 100 125 150
\ f---
MAR 40 25 50 75 80 100 125150160175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800 0 25 50 75100 125150
f---
50 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800 16 25 50 75100
- 63 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800 ?O 25 50 75100
MA 16 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 300 - MTA 25 25 50 75 100
20 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 300 - 32 25 50 75 100
MAD 25 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 300 - 40 25 50 75 100
MAJ
MACO 32 25 50 75 80 100 125150160175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 - Note) Consult us for non-standard stroke.
f---
MACJ 40 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 -
f---
50 25 50 75 80 100 125150160175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 -
- 63 25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 -

MA-S MAC-S, MAR-S MTA-S MSA-S
-SID ~ --BEJ -SIO

MAD-S MAJ-S MACD-S MACJ-S
-816- ~ ~ ~
Product feature
1. Standard cylinder manufactured by our enterprise.
2. Piston adopts heterogeneous two-way seal structure. It has compact size
and has the function of grease reservation.
Mounting type G)
3. Front cover has fixed bumper which can reduce the impact of direction
Model Mounting type
change of the cylinder.
4. There are several modes of back cover, which makes the installation of MAC: Mini cylinder MA
cylinder more convenient. (Double acting with cushion) MAC FA: FA type
MSA SOB: SOB type
5. Front and back cover and stainless steel block adopt riveted rolling packed MTA LB : LB type
structure to form a reliable connection. MACJ : Mini cylinder
(Ad·ustable stroke with cushion) MAD Blank: No accessories
6. The cylinder body has stainless steel pipes with high precision to produce MACD
high strength and corrosion resistance. MAJ FA: FA type
Front cover MACJ LB : LB type
7. There are cylinders and mounting accessories with several specifications for
Model Front cover MAR No this code
your choice.
F: Front mounting type
8. All cylinders of this series have magnet. MAR Back cover
U: Up mounting type
Others No this code Model Back cover
MA,MAC CA: Pivot type
MSA U: Flat-end type
Bore size MTA CM: Round-end type
Model Bore size
Others No this code
MA, MSA, MTA, MAD, MAJ 16 20 25 3240
MAC,MAR,MACD, MACJ 2025 32405063 Ma net
S: With magnet
Stroke Ad ustable stroke
!Refer to stroke table for details I Model Ad"ustable stroke
10: 10mm
20: 20mm
30: 30mm
MAJ 40: 40mm
MACJ 50: 50mm
75: 75mm
G) Please refer to page 245 for accessory parts. 100: 100mm
~ Standard thread is blank here. Others No this code
MA Series

Cll16-Cll40
Cll20-Cll40
CA type
1~1•
2 Piston rod chrome plated
4 Bushing Wear resistant material CM type U type
5 Front cover nut Carbon steel Total len lh=A+Stroke
Total length=A+~
6 Front cover Aluminum alloy MB
7 Barrel Stainless steel
8 Bumper NBR
9 Piston Aluminum alloy ·~
10 Piston seal NBR

11 Magnet Plastic
13 Wear ring Wear resistant material MA
14 Washer Free cutting material
15 Nut Carbon steel
15 M24 x 2.0 14 27 14
15 M30 x 2.0 14 27 14
M14 x 1.5
19
46
CM Type UType
Total len 1h=167+Stroke
Total leng1h=147+S1roke
2
/BBJ-1~ - - - -~
MA Series
· (1)16-(1)40
CA Type
AF+Stroke
CM Type
UType Total.'f .·-~"J1

- -
~
-
AD
- a:::i
PA
188
188
41.5 20 16 32 M12x1.25 24 17 7 41 9 14 12 12 M30x 2.0 14 27 14
CA Type
UType
"""'"'~"'-fj]
. -
M8 x 1.25 20
M10 x 1.25 22
32 44 16 35 16 M10 x 1.25 22 17 6 32 8 10 10 12 M24 x 2.0 14 27 14
40 46 16.5 4 1.5 20 M12 x 1.25 24 17 7 41 9 14 12 12 M30 x 2.0 14 27 14
MA Series
• I I I
Cll16-Cll40 A+Stroke x2
Cll50, Cll63
..
:,
16
20
.
136
156
.:
38
40
.,_
60
76
.....
10
16
=-··
21
27
6
8
I•
22
28
M6 x 1.0
MS x 1.25
16
20
10
12
5
6
22
29
6
7
5
6
M16x 1.5
M22x 1.5
'
16
12
.
M5 x 0.8
1/8'
5
8
MA
25 164 44 76 16 30 10 30 M10x 1.25 22 17 6 29 7 8 M22x 1.5 14 1/8' 8
32 164 44 76 16 35 12 30 M10x 1.25 22 17 6 32 8 10 M24 x 2.0 14 1/8' 8
40 168 46 76 16.5 41.5 16 32 M12x 1.25 24 17 7 41 9 14 M30 x 2.0 14 1/8' 8
50 199 52 95 23 53 16 32 M14x 1.5 24 19 8 46 11 14 M36 x 2.0 20 1/4' 11 .5
63 199 52 95 23 67 16 32 M14x 1.5 24 19 8 46 11 14 M36 x 2.0 20 1/4' 11 .5
<ll16-<ll40 A+Stroke x 2+Adjustable Stroke

AB AC+Stroke
DA MA AO AD MA
<ll50, <ll63
A+Strokex2+Ad·ustable Stroke
AC+Stroke
AD MA DB+Stroke+Ad·ustable Stroke
:, .
16 135
.:
38
··- •• =-·· •..
60
•
10 21 6 22
11:
21 M6x 1.0 16 10 5
20 153 40 76 16 27 8 28 25 M8x 1.25 20 12 6
25 161 44 76 16 30 10 30 27 M10x 1.25 22 17 6
32 161 44 76 16 35 12 30 27 M10x 1.25 22 17 6
40 164 46 76 16.5 41.5 16 32 28 M12x 1.25 24 17 7
50 195 52 95 23 53 16 32 28 M14 x 1.5 24 19 8
63 195 52 95 23 67 16 32 28 M14x 1.5 24 19 8
:, . . ..
16 5 M16 x 1.5 16 M5 x0.8 5 22 6 M6x 1.0 5
20 6 M22 x 1.5 12 1/8" 8 29 7 M8x 1.25 6
25 8 M22 x 1.5 14 1/8" 8 29 7 M10x1.25 6
32 10 M24 x 2.0 14 1/8" 8 32 8 M10 x 1.25 6
40 14 M30 x 2.0 14 1/8" 8 41 9 M12x1 .25 7
50 14 M36 x 2.0 20 1/4" 11 .5 46 11 M12 x 1.25 7
63 14 M36 x 2.0 20 1/4" 11 .5 46 11 M12 x 1.25 7
MA Series
'. ' ' ····1:,.,;,. .,,...... ~
. "" ....... =--•
CJ>20-Cl>40 CJ>20-<1>40
A+Stroke
AB AC+Stroke
DA AD fl A
/
U""'
"'']
A+Stroke
uo'f
:g
g
wL
EA. .[L.
~~ ~
----- - - - - --- - - - - -- er AB
DA AD
~
AC+Stroke
2-P A rKA
~v
~
~
\ ,...,
• ..MA_
~
PA 2-KDp: KA
Thru.hole: J
r
0~
~
~
wI
FA
-~
11
M
~
lx'I
~j
MA....~
l ~-- •·
i---EA.-
{- - · -·- · - · - ·
Cushion
4, tr
n
~
~ -j - (
~~~ ~
__f_
DKB
tt·, I
$I I DB
-----e-
'
ID
ID ,0::
- -lo.(- 1 - - · - · -· - · - · -
'
1(1-
$
Cushion
. .. . .
\
MA :
20
.. 120
,-.:
31 89 29 16
. :
33.5 30.5
•
8
28 M8x 1.25 20
:,
20
.
120
•:
31 89
.
29 16
:
30.5
•• . MB x 1.25
8 28 20
25 122 33 89 29 16 39 36.5 10 30 M10x1.25 22 25 122 33 89 29 16 36.5 10 30 M10 x 1.25 22
32 122 33 89 29 16 47 42.5 12 30 M10 x 1.25 22 32 122 33 89 29 16 42.5 12 30 M10x 1.25 22
40
:
20
.. 132.5
13 5
35
6
97.5 37.5 16.5 58.5
<!>5.5 <1>9.5 6.5 21

:
12
52.5 16 32
20 3
. ..
1/8"
M14 x1.5
22 8
·-
27
24 40
:, .
20
132.5
13 5
35
6
97.5
MS x 0.8
37.5 16.5
9
. :
22
52.5
20
16
3
32 M14 x 1.5
. .. . ·-
1/8" 22 8
24
27
25 17 6 8 <!>6.5 <!>11.0 7.5 25 12 26 3 1/8' 22 8 30 25 17 6 8 M6x 1.0 11 26 26 3 1/8" 22 8 30
32 17 6 10 <!>9.0 <!>14.0 10 30 12 26 3 1/8" 22 8 35 32 17 6 10 M6x 1.0 11 30 26 3 1/8" 22 8 35
40 19 8 14 <1>11 <1>17.5 12.5 38 15 32 3 1/8" 27 8 41.5 40 19 8 14 MBx 1.25 14 36 32 3 1/8" 27 8 41.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cl>50 , CJ>63 151 +Stroke Cl>50, <1>63

147+Stroke
1? ~? 73+Stroke ,? 95+Stroke
~ 11 32 20 22 73+Stroke
~ f 2-1/4" 14 - .i ~ e
I
= ~
•
M14 x 1.5
\ '4-Sides "'
M14x1.5 8
a: '4
~
\1J1~ -($- Ej}1~r""- I
:-1=~=~~===t I
. ~·t-t-·
I~ {~ IH
- - - - - · - · - · H)- ~
I\
...
~[ -
•--
~~ -
-,- --"·-
·
-.1= . .:...-:-~-:::[_ _
i[ -~ -"" I -$-
I
- · -· - · - · - ~ }- i - ·- ·
~Ir
I
·-
~Ir
,_B_ ~~ I
~ •=
I ~
Thru .hole: J
'
~ x j.9_ -1L -~ .1 x 1]__
D KB
40 36 81 +Stroke
<( DB <(
:;;
:;; DB
e e
1: • .
ISO
163
:
62 <!>6.5 IBoth sides:())11.0 16.5 44
74 <1>9.0 IBoth sides:<1>14.0 18.5 48
. =-~-
53 I
67 I
•••
50
63
£ :
62 16.5 48 153 I
74 19.0 sa 167 I
--~-
Accessories
Accessor t e G)
LB: LB type
accessory SDB: SDB type (2)
Bore size Knuckle® I: I Knuckle
Y: Y Knuckle
G) Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
(2) SDB is attached with relevant PIN.
® Please refer to page 455,456 for other knuckles.
Accessory selection
20 122 147 172 197 106 131 156 181
Accessories\Cyl1nder model MA, MAC MSA, MTA MAD, MACD MAJ, MACJ MAR 25 122 147 172 197 106 131 156 181
Mounting
LB
FA
•• •• •• •• X
32 142 167 192 217 126 151 176 201
..
X
·•- 5.5..
accessory 40 142 167 192 217 126 151 176 201
SDB
I
•• X
•• X
•• ••
X
•• : : ,:
Knuckle G)
y
u
•• •• •• •• ••
16
20
38
40
44
16
12
25
25
44
54
32
40
13
15
6
8 6.5
3
3
20
25
F
CS1-M
•• •• •• •• ••
25
32
40
44
46
14
14
14
29
19
21
54
59
64
40
45
50
15
25
25
8
8
8
6.5
6.5
6.5
3
4
4
25
32
36
MA
DS1-M
•• ••
••• ••• •••
Sensor switch (2) CS1-F
DS1-F
CS1 - U
•• ••
DS1 - U
•
G) Please refer to P453- 456 for knuckle detail,
• • • • (1)16-(1)25 (1)32, (1)40
0 - Low carbon steel, D -----<:arbon steel.
D List for ordering code of accessories 4

Accessories Mounting accessory 44 76 101 126 151 4 64 50 6.5 14
Bore size LB FA SDB 32 44 76 101 126 151 4 47 33 72 58 6.5 14
16 F-MA16LB F-MA16FA F-MA16SDB 40 46 76 101 126 151 4 50 36 84 70 6.5 14
20
F-MA20LB F-MA20FA F-MA20SDB
25
32 F-MA32LB F-MA32FA F-MA32SDB ,:
40 F-MA40LB F-MA40FA
50 F-MA40SDB CB+Stroke
63
Accessories
Bore size I I Knuckle Y Y Knuckle
Knuckle
F F Knuckle U U Knuckle
.::::t;:::~r::r~-+JI+-·- - -+ll:1i ~,-- --,.
' --------~- ----------------------·---------'
16 F-MA161 F-MA16Y F-M6X100F F-M6X100U
25
F-MA251 F-MA25Y F-M10X125F F-M10X125U
32
40 F-MA401 F-MA40Y F-M1 2X125F F-M12X125U
50
F-MAC501 F-MAC50Y F-M14X150F F-M14X150U
63
Accessories Sensor switch 20 21 12 16 51 128 153 178 203 48 67 32 32 3 6.5 22
Bore size CS1 - MD DS1 - MD CS1 - F DS1 - F CS1 - U DS1- U 25 21 12 16 51 132 157 182 207 48 67 32 32 3 6.5 22
16 CS1-M-S16 DS1-M-S16 32 27 15 16 51 135 160 185 210 52 67 36 36 4 6.5 24
20 CS1 - M-S20 DS1 - M-S20 40 27 15 20 55 137 162 187 212 56 71 40 40 4 6.5 28
25 CS1 - M-S25 DS1 - M-S25 - -
32 CS1 - M-S32 DS1 - M-S32
40 CS1-M-S40 DS1-M-S40
50 CS1-M-S50 DS1-M-S50
CS1 - F DS1 - F CS1-U DS1 - U
63 CS1-M-S63 DS1-M-S63
Accessories
...... •
F·MA161 5 21 28 8.5 8 M6•1 .0 6
F-MA201 8 30 40 11 15 M8•1 .25 8
F-MA251 10 40 50 15 20 M10•1.25 10
F-MA401 10 45 57 16 23 M12x1.25 14
MA
F-MAC501 52.5 50 12.5 22 21 19
ONA
PA
12 5 21 6 M6•1.0
25.4 10 45 14
OD
Clip
42 16 M8x1.25 14 21 8 8
52 19 M10x1.25 18 25 10 10
I ~ I
E-- 3 I
z
e,
a::
z
F-MAC50Y 14.2 10 M14•1 .5 51 22 34.6

Mini cylinder(Aluminum barrel)--MAL Series
Product series
.!:
Series name
Basic LB FA SOB CS1-M DS1 -M
Double acting type: MAL 0,
u
"'
-g
0
0
::::=======================================;
- - -[!: __. 1-------------
1--~~~~~~-----~-----~~~~--1
1--~~~~~~-----~-----~~~~--1
20
25
Double rod type: MALO
0,
C:
32
40 1--~~~~~~-----~-----~~~~--1
:g
"'
Q)
,5
:,
0
---
0
Page 248 251 457

1. When load changes in the work, the cylinder wi1h abundant output capacity shall be selected.
or corrosion.
3. Necessary protection measure shall be taken in 1he environment with higher humidity, much dust or water drops, oil dust and
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
can not be added in return;
be added in air inlet and oullet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be especially noticed.

Single Push side 314.0 12.6 44.0 75.4 106.8 138.2 169.6
acting Pull side 263.8 2.6 28.9 55.3 81.7 108.1 134.4
20 8
Double Push side 314.0 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.6 157.0 188.4 219.8
acting Pull side 263.8 26.4 52.8 79.1 105.5 131 .9 158.3 184.7
Single Push side 490.6 29.2 78.3 127.4 176.4 225.5 274.5
acting Pull side 412.1 13.5 54.7 96.0 137.2 178.4 219.6
25 10
Double Push side 490.6 49.1 98.1 147.2 196.2 245.3 294.4 343.4
acting Pull side 412.1 41.2 82.4 123.6 164.8 206.1 247.3 288.5
Single Push side 804.3 76.6 157.0 237.3 317.7 398.1 478.5
acting Pull side 691.2 54.0 123.0 192.1 261.2 330.3 399.4
32 12
Double Push side 804.3 80.4 160.9 241.3 321 .7 402.2 482.6 563.0
acting Pull side 691.2 69.1 138.2 207.4 276.5 345.6 414.7 483.8
Single Push side 1256.6 37.5 163.1 288.7 414.3 539.9 665.5 791 .1
acting Pull side 1055.6 17.4 122.9 228.4 333.9 439.4 544.9 650.4
40 16
Double Push side 1256.6 125.7 251.3 377.0 502.6 628.3 754.0 879.6
acting Pull side 1055.6 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.4 738.9
Mini cylinder(Aluminum barrel) AlrTAC
MAL Series
: ..
Acting
Specification
IMSAL, MTAL
I
Single acting
,,
type IOthers Double acting
Operating I Double acting 0.1-1 .0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
pressure ISingle acting 0.2-1 .0MPa(28-145psi)(2.0-10.0bar)
Sneed range mm/s Double acting: 30-800 Single acting: 50-800
Stroke tolerance 0-250+ ,u >250 +~,
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) 1/8" I 1/4"
G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Symbol
MAL MAL-S MSAL MSAL-S
..
D Stroke
:
20
• tt;llf .-
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500
.. .
1000
..
-BD -BID -S] -em MAL
25
32
40
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
500
500
500
1000
1500
1500
MTAL MTAL- S MALD MALD-S 20 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 300
~~ -BB- -816- MALD 25

MALJ 32
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300
25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
300
500
MAL MALJ MALJ-S 40 25 50 7580100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500
20 25 50 75 100 125 150 -
-8&4' ~ MSAL
25 25 50 75 100 125 150
32 25 50 75100 125150
40 25 50 75100 125150
Product feature 20 25 50 75100
1. Manufactured by our enterprise. MTAL
25 25 50 75100 -
2. Front and back cover and cylinder tube are connected by threads. 32 25 50 75 100 -
3. Piston adopts heterogeneous two-way seal structure. It has compact size
40 25 50 75100 -
4. Front cover adopts self-lubrication bearing guide that has good performance
-------·-----------
of lubrication and guide.
_______...___________
D Ordering code
5. There are several modes of back cover, which makes the installation of
cylinder more convenient. MAL 20 x 50 S CM D D
6. There are cylinders and mounting accessories with several specifications for
your choice. MALD20x50 S D D
•••••
MALJ 20 x 50-20 S D D
MAL: Mini cylinder(Double acting)

MSAL: Mini cylinder(Single acting_push)
MTAL: Mini cylinder(Single acting pull)
MALD: Mini cylinder(Double rod)
MALJ: Mini cylinder(Adjustable stroke)
Mounting type G)
Model Mounting type
Bore size
120 25 32 40 I MAL
MSAL FA: FA type
MTAL SDB: SDB type
Stroke
LB: LB type
IRefer to stroke table for details I Blank: No accessories
MALD
MALJ FA: FA type
Ad'11ustable stro e • LB: LB type
Model Adiustable stroke
10: 10mm
Back cover
20: 20mm
30: 30mm Model Back cover
MALJ 40: 40mm MAL CA: Pivot type
50: 50mm MSAL U: Flat-end type
75: 75mm MTAL CM: Round-end type
Others No this code
Ma net
S: With magnet
<D Please refer to page 251 for accessory parts.
MAL Series
CA Type
1~1•
2 Piston rod chrome plated
CM Type U Type
3 Front cover packing NBR Total len th=A+Stroke Total length=A+Stroke
~
4 Bushing Wear resistant material AD MB
6 Front cover
7 0-ring
8 Barrel
Aluminum alloy
NBR
Aluminum alloy
~3
~
9 Bumper NBR
10 0 - ring NBR Bore size\ltem A MB
Backcover CA CM U AB AC AD AF B C D DA M MA CA CM
11 Piston seal NBR
12 Piston Aluminum alloy IDlfDIIDlmlllfDIIDIIIIBfJilllDlll-f11111 lfllfDllfll MAL
25 135 70 M22 x 1.5
13 Wearring Wear resistant material
32 141 70 107 39.5 M24 x 2.0 27
14 Washer Free cutting material
40 165 152 92 129 49.5 M30 x 2.0 27
:, .
20 MS x 1.25 20 12 6 29 6 8 9 1/8" 8
25 M10x1 .25 22 17 6 29 7 8 8 9 1/8" 8
32 M10x 1.25 22 17 6 32 8 10 10 12 1/8" 8
40 M12x 1.25 24 17 41 9 14 12 12 1/4" 11
A+Stroke
CA Type AC+Stroke
AD
~ I
w -------
PA M
AF+Stroke KA
U Type
95 145 132 157

11 7 167 154 179
:, .
20 M8 x 1.25 20 12 6 29 7 6
25 M10 x 1.25 22 17 6 29 7 8
32 M10 x 1.25 22 17 6 32 8 10 10 12
24 17 7 41 9 14 12 12
14 27 14
M30 x 2.0 14 27 14
MAL Series
A+Stroke x 2
CA Type AC+Stroke
AB+Stroke
DA+Stroke MA AD
H
2(4rSides
FA M
EA AF+Stroke KA
CM Type U Type
Total length=A+Stroke x 2
~
ffi3
25 156 34 16 10 30 M10x1.25 22 17 8 8 9 M22 x 1.5

32 162 39.5 16 12 30 M10x1.25 22 17 10 10 12 M24x 2.0
40 184 49.5 20 16 32 M12x1.25 24 17 14 12 12 M30 x 2.0
' I
A+Stroke•2+Adjustable Stroke
AC+ Stroke
Accessories
Accessories of MAL series cylinder are the same with that of MA series.
Please see accessory list for detail of selection and order information.
Cylinder model MAL MSAL, MTAL MALD, MALJ
Accessories Standard With magnet Standard With magnet Standard With magnet
Mounting
LB
accessory FA
•• •• •• •• •• ••
SDB
I
•• •• •• X
•••
X
•• ••
Knuckle
G)
y
u
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Sensor
F
CS1-M x
• •• X
• •• X
••
switch (2) DS1-M x
•
X X
@ Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch. 20 40 12 25 54 40 15 8 6.5 3 25

25 44 14 29 54 40 15 8 6.5 3 25
32 44 14 19 59 45 25 8 6.5 4 32
D Material of accessoriesselection 40 46 14 21 64 50 25 8 6.5 4 36
MAL
C!>16-C!>25 (!)32, C!>40
0 -Low carbon steel, 0-Carbon steel.
if I
B

Bore size LB FA SDB
20
25
32 F-MA32LB F-MA32FA F-MA32SDB
Accessori es Knuckle
Bore size I: I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F: F Knuckle U: U Knuckle
32 44 70 95 120 145 4 47 33 72 58 6.5 14
25
F-MA251 F-MA25Y F-M10X125F F-M10X125U 40 46 92 117 142 167 4 50 36 B4 70 6.5 14
32
Accessories Sensor switch ,:
Bore size CS1 - MD DS1-MD
20 CS1 - M-A20 DS1 - M-A20
25 CS1 - M-A25 DS1 - M-A25
32 CS1 - M-A32 DS1 - M-A32
40 CS1 - M-A40 DS1 - M-A40
4-<l>CP
21
>-----"""'-----' 1·
Accessories
...... I
F-MA201 18 130 140 111 115 IM8•1.25 18
F-MA251 110 140 ISO 115 120 IM10•1.25 110
F-MA401 110 145 157 116 123 IM12•1 .25 114
Clip
16 M8x1 .25 8
19 M10•1 .25 10
DNA
PA NM
c--j
It PB II I
E3 I
F-MA40Y 25.4 10 45 20 57 14
Mini cylinder(Aluminum barrel)--MBL Series
Product series
Mounting type Acting Collocation of sensor switch
Series name type
Basic LB FA SOB CS1-M DS1-M
Double acting type: MBL
Double acting with cushion type: MBLC
C:
0
i: 20
Double rod type: MBLD "'
::,
Double rod with cushion type: MBLCD "

:5 25
'ii:
Cl Cl 32
-~ .S:
u t5 40
"' "'
Q) Q)
:g0 :g0 50
Cl Cl
63
~
Single acting type: MSBL, MTBL 20 MBL
25
32
40
254 257 457

or corrosion.
welding dregs.
into the cylinder.
can not be added in return;

Bore size Pressure area Operating pressure(MPa)
(mm) ri~tze Acting type (mm') 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Single Push side 314.0 15.7 47.1 78.5 109.9 141.3 172.7
acting Pull side 263.8 5.7 32.0 58.4 84.8 111.2 137.5
20 8
Double Push side 314.0 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.6 157.0 188.4 219.8
acting Pull side 263.8 26.4 52.8 79.1 105.5 131.9 158.3 184.7
Single Push side 490.6 24.6 73.7 122.8 171.8 220.9 269.9
acting Pull side 412.1 8.9 50.1 91.4 132.6 173.8 215.0
25 10
Double Push side 490.6 49.1 98.1 147.2 196.2 245.3 294.4 343.4
acting Pull side 412.1 41.2 82.4 123.6 164.8 206.1 247.3 288.5
Single Push side 804.3 40.2 120.6 200.9 281.3 361 .7 442.1
acting Pull side 691.2 17.6 86.6 155.7 224.8 293.9 363.0
32 12
Double Push side 804.3 80.4 160.9 241.3 321 .7 402.2 482.6 563.0
acting Pull side 691 .2 69.1 138.2 207.4 276.5 345.6 414.7 483.8
Single Push side 1256.6 62.8 188.4 314.0 439.6 565.2 690.8
acting Pull side 1055.6 22.6 128.1 2336 339.1 444.6 550.1
40 16
Double Push side 1256.6 125.7 251.3 377.0 502.6 628.3 754.0 879.6
acting Pull side 1055.6 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.4 738.9
Double Push side 1962.5 196.3 392.5 588.8 785.0 981.3 1177.5 1373.8
50 16
acting Pull side 1761.5 176.2 352.3 528.5 704.6 880.8 1056.9 1233.1
Double Push side 3115.7 311.6 623.1 934.7 1246.3 1557.9 1869.4 2181.0
63 16
acting Pull side 2914.7 291.5 582.9 874.4 1165.9 1457.4 1748.8 2040.3
MBL Series
: ..
Specification
IMSBL, MTBL
I
SinQle actinQ
,,
I
I
Acting
I MBL, MBLD, MBLJ Double actinA
type
IMBLC, MBLCD, MBLCJ Double actina with cushion
Operating I Double acting 0. 1- 1.0MPa(1 5-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
pressure ISinQle actinQ 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145psi)(2.0-1 a.Obar) I
SnAAd ranae mm/s Double actina: 30-800 Sinale actina: 50-800
Stroke tolerance 0-15o+~u >150 +~,
Cushion type MBLC, MBLCD, MBLCJ: Adjustable cushion; Others: Bumper
Port size G) 1/8' I 1/4"
G) PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Symbol Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max std stroke Max stroke
MBL MBL-S MBLC MBLC-S 20, 25 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500 800
MBL
-BD -BID --5m ---st] MBLC
32,40
50, 63
25 50 75 80 100 125150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
500
500
800
800
MSBL MSBL-S MTBL MTBL-S MBLD 20, 25 25 50 75 80 100 125150160 175 200 250 300 300
MBLJ 32, 40 25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500
~ -8!0 ----ijS ~ MBLCD 50
MBLCJ 63
25 50 75 80 100 125 150 160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500
MBL MBLD MBLD-S MBLCD MBLCD-S
25 50 75 80 100125 150160 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 500
-BB- -Bl6- Bt;r -ee-- MSBL
MTBL
20, 25
32,40
20, 25
32,40
25 50 75100 125150
25 50 75100 125 150
25 50 75 100
25 50 75100
MBLJ MBLJ-S MBLCJ MBLCJ-S
-a:&4' -BllS* ~~
-------·-----------
D Ordering code
Product feature MBL 20 x 50 SCA D D
-------------------·
1. Manufactured by our enterprise.
2. Riveted structure is adopted to connect front and bak cover and cylinder tube MBLD20 x 50 S DD
to make it credibility.
•••••
3. Piston adopts heterogeneous two-way seal structure. It has compact size MBLJ 20 x 50-20 S DD
-
4. There are several modes of back cover, which makes the installation of
MBL: Mini cylinder(Double acting)
cylinder more convenient.
MBLC: Mini cylinder
5. There are cylinders and mounting accessories with several specifications for (Double acting with cushion)
your choice. MSBL: Mini cvlinder(Sinale actina _push)
MTBL: Mini cvlinder(SinAle actinA _pull)
MBLD: Mini cvlinder(Double rod) Mounting type (j)
MBLCD: Mini cylinder Model Mounting type
(Double rod with cushion) Blank: No accessories
MBL
MBLJ : Mini cylinder(Adjustable stroke)
MBLC FA: FA type
MBLCJ : Mini cylinder MSBL SOB: SOB type
(Adjustable stroke with cushion) MTBL LB: LB type
MBLD Blank: No accessories
Bore size MBLCD
FA: FA type
Model Bore size MBLJ
MBL/MBLD/MBLJ 20 25 32 MBLCJ LB: LB type
MBLC/MBLCD/MBLCJ 40 50 63
MSBL/MTBL 20 25 32 40 Back cover
Model Back cover
Stroke MBL, MBLC CA: Pivot type
I Refer to stroke table for details I MSAL, MTAL U: Flat-end type
Others No this code
Ad'ustable stroke
Model Ad'ustable stroke
10: 10mm Magnet
20: 20mm Blank: Without magnet
MBLJ 40: 40mm
MBLCJ 50: 50mm
75: 75mm
100 100mm
Others No this code
G) Mounting accessories is common used with MALIMAseries, Please refer to page 257 for accessory parts.
MBL Series
A+Stroke
AB AC+Stroke MB
AD AD
CA Type DA MA
H 0 J:E_ ct>K
l~[t
,
C!- . . ~
0
ti
(.)
-
' IM
+' I+, -
'
I
FA
~ 1~e-
H~
'-ti ~
M/
,. I-
I-
- I~
--------------
Cushion screw
i
r++
L_j_j_ ~l
Carbon steel with 20 µ m GA Available
2 Piston rod chrome plated PA
.2L PA
3 Front cover packing NBR EA AF+Stroke KA
Total len th=A+Stroke
5 Bushing Wear resistant material U Type
7 Bumper TPU
8 Barrel Aluminum alloy
10 Piston seal NBR
11 Magnet Plastic
12 Wear ring Wear resistant material Bore size\ltem A AB AC AD AF B C D DA M MA MB MBL
Back cover type CA U
mllrmlrnllllfl!lllllmll!FII 27 8 lfDI
25 135 70 15.5 105 30 10 M22 x 1.5 14 Ill
32
40
50
141
165
173 54
70
92
92
15.5
22
22
108 37
130.5 45
138 55 20
12
16
16 32
M24 x 2.0
M30 x 2.0
M36 x 2.0
16
16
22
••
27
63 173 54 92 22 138 68 20 16 32 M36 x 2.0 22 27
:, .
20 MB x 1.25 20 18.5 12 6 29 7 6 9 1/8' 7.5 22
25 M10x1.25 21 19.5 17 6 29 7 8 8 9 1/8' 7.5 23.5
32 M10x1.25 21 19.5 17 6 32 8 10 10 12 1/8" 7.5 29.5
40 M1 2 x 1.25 22.5 21 17 7 41 9 14 12 12 1/4' 11 33
50 M14 x 1.5 24 22.5 19 8 46 11 14 12 11 1/4" 11 38
63 M1 4 x 1.5 24 22.5 19 8 46 11 14 12 11 1/4' 11 44.5
A+Stroke
AB AC+Stroke MB
AD AD
CA Type
Total len th =A+Stroke

p
U Type
32 216 139 164 189 44 120 145 15.5 133 158 16

40 240 163 188 213 46 117 142 167 22 155.5 180.5 20
:, .
20 26 M8x 1.25 20 18.5 12 6 29 7 6 8 M22 x 1.5 14 21 1/8" 7.5
25 10 30 M10 x 1.25 21 19.5 17 6 29 7 8 8 M22 x 1.5 14 21 1/8' 7.5
32 12 28 M10 x 1.25 21 19.5 17 6 32 8 10 10 12 M24 x 2.0 16 27 1/8" 7.5
40 16 30 M12 x 1.25 22.5 21 17 7 41 9 14 12 12 M30 x 2.0 16 27 1/4' 11
i'+i-ii
MBL Series
A+StrokeX2
AB+Stroke AC+Stroke MB
AD AD
DA+Stroke MA
CA Type p
~ EA AF+Stroke KA
I
Total len th=A+StrokeX2
U Type
AD
MBL 95 15.5 158 37

215 117 22 155.5 180.5 45
:, .
20 MS x 1.25 20 18.5 12 6 29 7 8 9 M22x 1.5 14 21 1/8" 7.5
25 M10 x 1.25 21 19.5 17 6 29 7 8 9 M22x 1.5 14 21 1/8" 7.5
32 M10 x 1.25 21 19.5 17 6 32 8 10 10 12 M24x 2.0 16 27 1/8" 7.5
40 M12 x 1.25 22.5 21 17 7 41 9 14 12 12 M30x2.0 16 27 1/4" 11
A+StrokeX2
AB AC+Stroke AB+Stroke
AB
A+StrokeX2+Ad'. stroke
AC+Stroke
I
AD AD
MA DB+Stroke+A j . stroke
25 155 44 70 15.5 30 10 30 27
32 157 44 70 15.5 37 12 28 27
40 182 46 92 22 45 16 30 28
50 200 196 54 92 22 55 16 32 28 M14x1 .5
63 200 196 54 92 22 68 16 32 28 M14x1.5
: • A
20 20 18.5 12 6 29 7 6 M22 x 1.5 14 1/8" 7.5 6 M8x 1.25

25 21 19.5 17 6 29 7 8 M22 x 1.5 14 1/8" 7.5 6 M10 x 1.25
32 21 19.5 17 6 32 8 10 M24 x 2.0 16 1/8" 7.5 6 M10 x 1.25
40 22.5 21 17 7 41 9 14 M30 x 2.0 16 1/4" 11 7 M12 x 1.25
50 24 22.5 19 8 46 11 14 M36 x2.0 22 1/4" 11 7 M12 x 1.25
63 24 22.5 19 8 46 11 14 M36 x 2.0 22 1/4" 11 7 M12x 1.25
e,.Mli
Accessories
Accessories of MBL series cylinder are the same with that of MAL\MAseries.
Please see accessory list for detail of selection and order information.
Cylinder model MBL/MBLC MSBL, MTBL MBL(C)D, MBL(C)J
Accessories Standard With magnet Standard With magnet Standard With magnet AQ
Mounting
LB
accessory FA
•• •• •• •• •• ••
SDB
I
•• •• •••
X
•• X
•• ••
Knuckle
G)
y
u
•• •• •• •• •• ••
Sensor
F
CS1-M x
• •• X
•• X
••
switch (2) DS1-M x
• X
<D Floating Joint(F) and Universal Joint(U) are common use part,
• X
Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail, 20 6.5 3 25

® Please refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch. 25 44 21 14 29 54 40 15 8 6.5 3 25
32 44 27 16 19 59 45 25 8 6.5 4 32
Material of accessoriesselection 40 46 27 16 21 64 50 25 8 6.5 4 36
C!>1 6- C!>25 C!>32/ C!> 40
0 -Low carbon steel, 0-Carbon steel. C+Stroke
LfJf---------~q I
D List for ordering code of accessories 11 II I

--ir·-------------·-r1-·-1
11 II I
Accessories Mounting accessory _ .l[_ _________ IJ.___J
Bore size LB FA SDB

20
25
40 F-MA40LB F-MA40FA
50 F-MA40SDB
63
Accessories Knuckle 32 44 70 95 120 145 4 47 33 72 58 6.5 16
Bore size I. I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F F Knuckle u· U Knuckle 40 46 92 117 142 167 4 50 36 84 70 6.5 16
25
F-MA251 F-MA25Y F-M10X125F F-M10X125U ,:
32
50 CB+Stroke
F-MAC501 F-MAC50Y F-M14X150F F-M14X150U
63
Accessories Sensor switch _r;J;ijITTJ,------------,mi
Bore size CS1 - MD DS1 - MD
4-CIJCP
c~t ~~J-------------------+r--
.__ 11 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 11 _ _,
20 CS1-M-A20 DS1-M-A20
25 CS1-M-A25 DS1-M-A25 ~
32
40
CS1-M-A32
CS1-M-MO
DS1-M-A32
DS1 -M-A40 >-----'"'"'-----< I'
50 CS1-M-A50 DS1-M-A50
63 CS1 - M-A63 DS1 - M-A63
204 52 6.5 24
40 27 228 56 40 4 6.5 28
Accessories
...... I
F·MA201 18 130 40 111 I 15 IM8•1 .25 18
F-MA251 110 140 50 115 120 IM10•1.25 110
F-MA401 110 145 57 116 123 IM12•1 .25 114
a:, <(
zZ
<IJND
MBL
F-MAC501 52.5 50 12.5 22 21 19 13.8 10 19 40 M14x1.5
G
H
~
Clip
42 M8x1.25 21 8 8
52 M10x1.25 25 10 10
DNA
~
El
F-MA40Y 25.4 10 45 20 57 14
I ~~ I
-E---- 3 :,:
z
&
0::
z
F-MAC50Y 14.2 10 M14X1 .5 27.8 19 51 22 34.6

Compact cylinder--ACE Series
In accordance with 15021287 standard
D Product series
Series name
l~===== M=ou=n=ti=ng= t=y= I I
pe=====~I !Acting ! B_ore I Collocationofsensorswitch
::========================:;-~~~~~~~~~~~--I I Basic FA FB CA CB CR FTC LB SDB I ~ ~ I CS1-E DS1-E

L.-~~~~~~~~~~~~~.------' ~ -
Double acting type:ACE - 12
~
16
20
C)
C:
25
~ 32
"'
~ 40
Double rod type:ACED_ _ _
_ Adjustable stroke type:ACEJ .c
::,
0
50
Q
c:,
~
63
80
100
125
C)
C:
t5
"'
Q)
C, 12
C:
u5 16
20
Double acting non-rotating 25
with yoke : TACE ~ =-:::'
.r~ < - :::
,. g>
32
40
\ 50
t5
~
63
"'
Q)
:g 80
Double rod non-rotating
withyoke:TA~CED =- 0
c:,
100
,
'·
'
<
- .
-
ACE
~
-
260
I 264
I I 457

2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition of high temperature or corrosion.
3. Necessary protection measure shall be taken in the environment with higher humidity, much dust or water drops, oil dust and welding dregs.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of particles into the cylinder.
6. As both of the front cover and piston of the cylinder are short, typically too large stroke can not be selected.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust caps shall be added in air
inlet and outlet ports. The frcnt and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be especially noticed.
Single
acting Pull side 84.8 8.9 1143.5 42.9 157.2 271.6 614.6 729.0
12 6
Double Push side 113.1 11.3 22.6 33.9 45.2 67.9 79.2 40 12 1256.6 125.7 251.3 377.0 502.7 628.3 754.0 879.6
acting Pull side 84.8 8.5 17.0 25.4 33.9 42.4 50.9 59.4 acting Pull side 1143.5 114.4 228.7 343.1 457.4 571 .8 686.1 800.5
Single Push side 201.1 18.1 38.2 58.3 78.4 98.5 118.6 Single Push side 1963.5 90.1 286.5 482.8 679.2 875.5 1071.9 1268.2
acting Pull side 150.8 8.1 23.1 38.2 53.3 68.4 83.5 acting Pull side 1762.4 70.0 246.3 422.5 598.8 775.0 951.3 1127.5
16 8
Double Push side 201.1 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100. 120.6 140.7 50 16 Double Push side 1963.5 196.3 392.7 589.0 785.4 981 .7 1178.1 1374.4
acting Pull side 150.8 15.1 30.2 45.2 60.3 90.5 105.6 acting Pull side 1762.4 176.2 352.5 528.7 705.0 881 .2 1057.5 1233.7
Single Push side 314.2 33.1 64.5 96.0 127. 158.8 190.2 Single Push side 3117.2 173.6 485.3 797.1 1108.8 1420.5 1732.2 2044.0
acting Pull side 235.6 17.4 41.0 64.5 88.1 111.7 135.2 acting Pull side 2916.2 153.5 445.1 736.8 1028.4 1320.0 1611 .6 1903.2
20 10
Double Push side 314.2 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.7 157.1 188.5 219.9 63 16 Double Push side 3117.2 311 .7 623.4 935.2 1246.9 1558.6 1870.3 2182.1
acting Pull side 235.6 23.6 47.1 70.7 94.2 117.8 141.4 164.9 acting Pull side 2916.2 291.6 583.2 874.9 1166.5 1458.1 1749.7 2041.3
Single Push side 490.9 13.8 62.9 112.0 161.0 210.1 259.2 308.3 Single Push side 5026.5 305.6 808.2 1310.9 1813.5 2316.2 2818.8 3321 .5
acting Pull side 412.3 5.9 47.2 88.4 129.6 170. 212.1 253.3 acting Pull side 4712.4 274.1 745.4 1216.6 1687.9 2159.1 2630.3 3101.6
25 10
Double Push side 490.9 49.1 98.2 147.3 196.3 245. 294.5 343.6 80 20 Double Push side 5026.5 502.7 1005.3 1508.0 20106 2513.3 3015.9 3518.6
acting Pull side 412.3 41 .2 82.5 123.7 164.9 206. 247.4 288.6 acting Pull side 4712.4 471.2 942.5 1413.7 1885.0 2356.2 2827.4 3298.7
Single Push side 804.2 Single Push side 7854.0 499.1 1284.5 2069.9 2855.3 3640.7 4426.1 5211 .5
acting Pull side 691.2 acting Pull side 7539.8 467.7 1221.7 1975.7 2729.6 3483.6 4237.6 4991 .6
32 12
Double Push side 804.2 100 20 Double Push side 7854.0 785.4 1570.8 2356.2 3141.6 3927.0 4712.4 5497.8
acting Pull side 691.2 acting Pull side 7539.8 754.0 1508.0 2262.0 3015.9 3769.9 4523.9 5277.9
Double Push side 12271 .8 1227.2 2454.4 3681.5 4908.7 6135.9 7363.1 8590.3
125 25 acting Pull side 11780.9 1178.1 2356.2 3534.3 4712.4 5890.5 7086.5 8246.6
It.I.ill
Compact cylinder AlrTAC
ACE Series
Specification
: ... . I
,,_,,
Double actinq
:11-,111-·~-
Acting type
Sinqle actinq-Push type, Sinqle actinq-Pull type I -
OperatingIDouble acting 0.1-1.0MPa(14-145psi)
pressure ISinale actina 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145csi)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa(215csi)
Soeed range mm/s Double acting: 30-500 Single acting: 50-500
Stroke tolerance Stroke,,; 100+).-0 Stroke>100+)., 5
Cushion type Bumoer
Port size (1) M5x 0.8 I G1/8 I G1/4
<D PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
Stroke
Bores1ze mm Standard stroke mm Max std stroke
12 51015 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 50
g, 16 51015 20 25 30 3540 45 50 55 60 70 75 75
C. ~
Q)
20 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100 100
~ Q) 25 510 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100 110 120 125150 150
C: :0
0 ::,
0
32 40 510 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100 110 120 125150 160 175 200 200
E Cl
Symbol E 50 63 510 15 20 25 30 35 4045 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100 110 120 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 250
0
(.) 80 100 125 510152025 30 354045 50 5560 70758090100110 120125150160175200 225250 275 300 300
ACE ASE ATE ACED ACEJ ~~ 12 510 10
cij~ 16-100 510152025 25
BB-~ ~
g_ 0 ) 12
C: 16
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
510 15 20 25 30 3540 45 50 55 60 70 75
50
75
ACE-S ASE-S ATE-S ACED-S ACEJ-S -~ u
-eo ~ = "' 20 25 510 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100 100
-sJD -BE- -a&+" ~
1
Q)
= :0 32 40
::,
8 50 63
510 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100
510 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100
100
100
TACE TACE-S TACED TACED-S :z 80 100 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 75 80 90 100 100
~~~~
ACE Note) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
. .. . ....
2. The dimensions of non-std stroke cylinder has the same dimensions as the next longer stroke std. stroke
cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of 25 std. stroke cylinder.
.
Product feature
ACE 20 x 30 SBD D
1. In accordance with IS021287 standard, the mounting size is vogue. ....................................................
2. The cylinder body connects with the threads of the front and back cover,
forming high strength and convenient maintenance.
3. The internal diameter of the body is treated with rolling followed by the
..........................................
DD
DD
ACED20x30
ACEJ 20 x 30-30 S B
SB
treatment of hard anodizing, forming an excellent abrasion resistance

Model
and durability.
ACE: Compact cylinder(Double acting)
4.The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two-way seal structure. It has ASE: Compact cylinder
compact dimension and the function of oil reservation. (Single acting-push)
5. Compact structure can effectively save fifty percent installation space ATE: Compact cylinder
(Single acting-pull) Mounting type l2l
with IS015552 standard cylinder. ACED: Compact cylinder(Double rod) Model Mounting type
6. There are magnetic switch slots around the cylinder body, which is ACEJ: Compact cylinder All model Blank: No accessories
(Adjustable stroke) FA: FA type
convenient to install inducting switch.
TACE : Compact cylinder FB: FB type
7.Bumper is available and it can availably absorb excrescent energy. (Double actinq non-rotatinq with yoke)
ACE CA: CB type
8. Installing accessorirs with various specifications are optional. TACED: Compact cylinder ASE CB: CB type
(Double rod non-rotatina with yoke)
ATE CR: CR type
Bore size FTC: FTC type
Model Bore size LB: LB type
ACE 1216 20 25 32 40 SDB: SDB type
ACED/ACEJ 50 63 80 100 125 FA: FA type
ACED
FTC: FTC type
ASE/ATE 1216 20 25 32 40 ACEJ
LB: LB type
TACE/TACED 50 63 80 100
FB: FB type
Stroke CA: CB type
IRefer to stroke table for details I TACE CB: CB type
CR: CR type
Adjustable stroke FTC: FTC type
Model Adjustable stroke TAC ED FB: FB tvce
10: 10mm
Rod type
20: 20mm
30: 30mm Model Rod type
ACE/ ASE/ATE Blank: Female thread
40: 40mm
ACED/ACEJ B: Male thread
ACEJ 50: 50mm TACE/TACED No this code
75: 75mm
100: 100mm
Magnet
Others No this code
S: With magnet
G) Standard thread is blank here.
(2) Please refer to page 264 for accessory parts; CR must be used with CA,FTC must be used with TCM2.
ACE Series
D Inner structure and material of major parts Dimensions
<1>12
DB
<1>16-<1>25
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
H
2-Sides
H
m, 2-Sides ACE
3 Bumper TPU
4 0-ring NBR <1>80-<1>125
5 Wear ring No( Cl> 12-20)\Wear resistant material(Others) ~ ~
JA ~
I
.•.
ED · EA(Screw hole) .•.
<PR D · RA(Countersink)
~
Sintered metal(Neodymium-iron-boron)( Cl> 12-20) co
6 Magnet
Plastic(Others) • . I . .
7 Piston seal NBR
"' ~
I
"' t.:: -----
bl
9 Piston rod
10 Body
11 Front cover
12 Bushing
S45C
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
No( Cl> 12-25)\Wear resistant material(Others)
~~ ~ ~·
2-Sides
~I -1-o,
~ I\
- F--t
,-~ ~
~r --- ---
----
13 Front cover packing NBR I

14 Panal Aluminum alloy
PA
\ \2-=.e_
$ $-
15 Screw Carbon steel ~ D JB
_fill_ ][
16 Bushing
17 Guide rod
Stainless steel( Cl> 12-40)\S45C(Others)
AB AC+Stroke
A+Stroke
I. DB .I
=· .
12 40
.:•
5
l· -··· =-·
35 10 27.5 6 M3 x 0.5 8 5 6 3.5
:
16 M4 x 0.7 18.5
16 40 5 35 10 30 8 M4 X 0.7 10 7 6 3.5 18 M4 x 0.7 18.5
20 43 6 37 10.5 35.5 10 M6x 1.0 14 9 9 4.5 22 MS x 0.8 23.5
25 45 6 39 11 40 10 M6x 1.0 14 9 9 4.5 26 MS x 0.8 23.5
32 51 7 44 14 49.5 12 MB x 1.25 16 10 9 4.5 32.5 M6 x 1.0 28.5
40 52.5 7 45.5 14.5 55 12 M8x 1.25 16 10 9 4.5 38 M6 x 1.0 28.5
50 53.5 8 45.5 14.5 65.5 16 M10 x 1.5 20 13 11 4.5 46.5 MB x 1.25 30.5
63 57 8 49 15 75.5 16 M10 x 1.5 20 13 11 4.5 56.5 MB x 1.25 30.5
80 63 9 54 16 95.5 20 M12x1 .75 20 17 15 2.5 72 M10x 1.5 -
100 76 9 67 19 113.5 20 M1 2x1.75 20 17 15 2.5 89 M10x 1.5 -
-
125
:, .
92
.
11
..
81 20 134.5
. . ..
25 M16 x2.0 25 21 - 110 M12x 1.75-
12 MS x 0.8 5.5 2 3.5 1.5 9 2.1

16 MS x 0.8 5.5 2 4.5 1.5 9 2.1
20 MS x 0.8 6 2 6.5 2.5 9 2.1
25 MS x 0.8 6 2 6.5 2.5 9 2.1
32 G1/8 7.5 3 8.5 3.5 9 2.1
40 G1/8 7.5 3 8.5 3.5 9 2.1
50 G1/8 7.5 3 10.5 4.5 12 2.6
63 G1/8 7.5 4 10.5 4.5 12 2.6
80 G1/8 8.5 6 12.5 6 12 2.6
100 G1/8 10.5 7 12.5 6 12 2.6
125 G1/4 10.5 8 16.5 7 12 2.6
Remark: The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non- magnet type cylinder.
Please refer to page 263 for male thread dimensions.
ACE Series
Cll16-Cll25 <!J16-Cll25
H H
2-Sides 2-Sides
Cil32-Cll63 (!)32-(!)63
H H
ACE 2-Sides
(il80/(il100 <!JB0/(!)100
JA JA JA
H H
2-Sides 2-Sides
DB DB
:.
12
a
40
•:
5 35
.
10
. :
27.5
•
6 M3 x 0.5 8 5 6 3.5
:
16
:,
12
a
40
•:
5 35
J
10
•• :
27.5
•
6 M3 x 0.5 8 5 6 3.5
=-
16
16 40 5 35 10 30 8 M4 X 0.7 10 7 6 3.5 18 16 40 5 35 10 30 8 M4 x 0.7 10 7 6 3.5 18
20 43 6 37 10.5 35.5 10 M6x1 .0 14 9 9 4.5 22 20 43 6 37 10.5 35.5 10 M6 x 1.0 14 9 9 4.5 22
25 45 6 39 11 40 10 M6 x 1.0 14 9 9 4.5 26 25 45 6 39 11 40 10 M6 x 1.0 14 9 9 4.5 26
32 51 7 44 14 49.5 12 MB x 1.25 16 10 9 4.5 32.5 32 51 7 44 14 49.5 12 MB x 1.25 16 10 9 4.5 32.5
40 52.5 7 45.5 14.5 55 12 MB x 1.25 16 10 9 4.5 38 40 52.5 7 45.5 14.5 55 12 MBx 1.25 16 10 9 4.5 38
50 53.5 8 45.5 14.5 65.5 16 M10 x 1.5 20 13 11 4.5 46.5 50 53.5 8 45.5 14.5 65.5 16 M10 x 1.5 20 13 11 4.5 46.5
- -- --
63 57 8 49 15 75.5 16 M10 x 1.5 20 13 11 4.5 56.5 63 57 8 49 15 75.5 16 M10x1.5 20 13 11 4.5 56.5
80 63 9 54 16 95.5 20 M12 x 1.75 20 17 15 2.5 72 80 63 9 54 16 95.5 20 M12 x 175 20 17 15 2.5 72
100 76 9 67 19 113.5 20 M12x1 .75 20 17 15 2.5 89 100 76 9 67 19 113.5 20 M12 x 175 20 17 15 2.5 89
~
12 M4 x 0.7 18.5 MS x 0.8 5.5 2 3.5 1.5 9 2.1
iiiiimii
12
iiiiiii·iiiiiiiiiD
M4 x 0.7 18.5 MS x 0.8 5.5 2 3.5 1.5 9 2.1
16 M4 x 0.7 18.5 MS x 0.8 5.5 2 4.5 1.5 9 2.1 16 M4 x0.7 18.5 MS x 0.8 5.5 2 4.5 1.5 9 2.1
20 MS x 0.8 23.5 MS x 0.8 6 2 6.5 2.5 9 2.1 20 MS x0.8 23.5 M5 x 0.8 6 2 6.5 2.5 9 2.1
25 MS x 0.8 23.5 MS x0.8 6 2 6.5 2.5 9 2.1 25 MS x0.8 23.5 MS x 0.8 6 2 6.5 2.5 9 2.1
32 M6 x 1.0 28.5 G1/8 7.5 3 8.5 3.5 9 2.1 32 M6x 1.0 28.5 G1/8 7.5 3 8.5 3.5 9 2.1
40 M6 x 1.0 28.5 G1/8 7.5 3 8.5 3.5 9 2.1 40 M6 x 1.0 28.5 G1/8 7.5 3 8.5 3.5 9 2.1
50 MB x 1.25 30.5 G1/8 7.5 3 10.5 4.5 12 2.6 50 MB x 1.25 30.5 G1/8 7.5 3 10.5 4.5 12 2.6
63 MB x 1.25 30.5 G1/8 7.5 4 10.5 4.5 12 2.6 63 MB x 1.25 30.5 G1/8 7.5 4 10.5 4.5 12 2.6
80 M10 x 1.5 - G1/8 8.5 6 12.5 6 12 2.6 80 M10 x 1.5 - G1/8 8.5 6 12.5 6 12 2.6
100 M10 x 1.5 - G1/8 10.5 7 12.5 6 12 2.6 100 M10 x 1.5 - G1/8 10.5 7 12.5 6 12 2.6
Remark: The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder. Remark: The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder.
Please refer to page 263 for male thread dimensions. Please refer to page 263 for male thread dimensions .
ACE Series
AB(AB+Pull type Stroke)

EB
EA
FA
a,
D
D
a- w
F
2-Sides
Z DA AC+Stroke
A+Stroke
:. - • :t I :
12 15 6 MS x0.8 9 10 8 4 5
16 17 8 M6 x 1.0 11 12 10 5 7
20 22 10 M8x 1.25 15 16 12 6 9
25 22 10 M8x 1.25 15 16 12 6 9
32 26 12 M10 x 1.25 17 19 17 6 10
40 26 12 M10 x 1.25 17 19 17 6 10
50 30 16 M12 x 1.25 20 22 17 7 13
63 30 16 M12 x 1.25 20 22 17 7 13
80 37 20 M16x1.5 26 28 23 8 17
100 37 20 M16 x 1.5 26 28 23 8 17
125 51 25 M20 x 1.5 38 40 26 10 21
ACE
Z DA AC+Stroke DA+Stroke
A+Strokex2
:, - . . I : I • ••:
12 46 51 35 27.5 5 16 3 12 M3 x 0.5 6 26.5
16 46 51 35 30 5 18 3 14 M3 x 0.5 6 29
AB AC+Stroke AB+Stroke 20 51 57 37 35.5 6 22 4 17 M4x0.7 8 34.5
25 53 59 39 40 6 26 5 22 M5 x 0.8 8 39
A+Strokex2
32 61 68 44 49.5 7 32.5 5 28 M5 x 0.8 10 48
40 62.5 69.5 45.5 55 7 38 5 33 M5 x 0.8 10 53.5
50 65.5 73.5 45.5 65.5 8 46.5 6 42 M6x1 .0 12 64
63 69 77 49 75.5 8 56.5 6 50 M6x1 .0 12 74
80 77 86 54 95.5 9 72 8 65 M8 x1 .25 14 94
100 90 99 67 113.5 9 89 10 80 M10 x 1.5 14 112
Remark:
1. The unmarked dimension is the same as ACE standard type
w 2. The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non-magnet type cylinder.
AF+Adjustable Stroke
AB AC+Stroke AF+Stroke+Adjustable Stroke

A+S1rokex2+Adjustable Stroke
:
12
. - ..
45
I ..
57
•:
5 35 17 4 M5 x 0.8
16 45 61 5 35 21 5 M6 x 1.0
20 49 68 6 37 25 6 M8 x 1.25
25 51 70 6 39 25 6 M8 x 1.25
32 58 78 7 44 27 6 M10 x 1.25
40 59.5 79.5 7 45.5 27 6 M10 x 1.25
50 61.5 81 .5 8 45.5 28 7 M12 x 1.25
63 65 85 8 49 28 7 M12 x 1.25
80 72 92 9 54 29 8 M16 x 1.5
100 85 105 9 67 29 8 M16 x 1.5
125 103 127.5 11 81 35.5 10 M20 x 1.5
Remark:
1. The unmarked dimension is the same as ACE standard type
2. The dimensions of magnet type cylinder are the same as non- magnet type
c linder.
Accessories
Dimensions
Accessory Accessory type CD ,- T ----- T -,

I L_______ J I
I 1--------1 I
Model
Bore size
+~-1-------fEb'=ja~
I
1~ 7j
I I ~
I
L
-+"-='='=-~ - \
- _L - - - - - _L - 4-Q>F
G) The listed accessories are for ACE cylinder. Accessories that are adaptable
to other cylinders are not shown . Please refer to accessory list on P266 for m , ~~~

1. ~:~:;:~: .I
D Accessory selection E+Stroke
:, &
: I
12 21 3 35 61 71 5.5 16 25
16 22 3 35 61 70.6 5.5 18 27
20 27 3.8 37 69 81.6 6.5 22 34
25 29 3.8 39 71 83.6 6.5 26 38
32 33.5 4 44 76 89 7 32 48
40 38 4 45.5 81 .5 97.5 10 36 54
50 45 5 45.5 87.5 103.5 10 45 65
Standard 63 so 5 49 91 107 10 50 75
Female thread
With m net x X X X
• • 80 63 6 54 106 127 12 63 95
ACE
ACE
Male thread
Standard
Withm net
•• •• •• •• X
• •
X
100 74 6 67 121 146 14.5 75 112
Note) Valve C in the above table is only for ACE series. Please refer to relevant content for valve C of other series.
X X X X X
ASE
ATE
X
•
X
•• X
•
X
•• X
•
X (!>12-(!>25
Male thread
Withm net
Standard
•
X
••
X
•X X X
•
X
Female thread
• • • •• • •
ACED Wijh m net x X X X T--- T ,
ACEJ Standard X X ~------------·!I
I
I
TACE
Male thread
With magnet
Standard
• • • •
x X X X X
•
X
·~ i------r
f-··--··--··-·1 I
TACED Female thread With magnet X
•
X X X
•
G)The I knuckle and Y knuckle for bore <ll 12 are adaptable toACQ cylinders, and other
__L _ - _ __L_ _J
knuckles are common parts. Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail.
® Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch. A N+Stroke
<1>32-<1>125
_ T _____ T _ l
I I I
H
1- - - - - - - 1 I
I I . L
•-Aluminum alloy; • - c ast iron ; . d-------1C:
_g:,; _t~,;;;\
F=i--
<>---Ductile Iron ; !':,-SPCC ; D - Carbon Steel; ~/ I I ,
l _______ J I
1------- 1 I
_ _L _____ _L _ J
A N+Stroke
:, . : I
12 8 25 5.5 16 40 55 10 40
16 8 30 5.5 18 43 55 10 40
20 8 35 6.6 22 55 68 16 43
25 8 39.5 6.6 26 60 76 16 45
32 10 32 47 7 32.5 64 80 30.5 51
40 10 36 53 9 38 72 90 35.5 52.5
50 12 45 65 9 46.5 90 108 40.5 53.5
63 12 50 75 9 56.5 100 118 45.5 57
80 16 63 95 12.5 72 126 150 45.5 63
100 16 75 115 14.5 89 150 176 55.5 76
125 20 90 139 16.5 110 180 218 60.5 92
Accessories
I:
Cl>12-Cl>25 Cl>12-Cl>25
--; --------r--1 B
: --------:
I
- - -1:i ri·------+±.+~t:j
I
i
1'"i.r3. i T:.:..~T f:~t_
,, f--------i r ~ -- -- -- -~~H·tt'{;"'}')-\- t - - .
__ _J_ ________ .l_ __ _j
I _t.........j_ [~3
N+Stroke
C+Stroke F
Cl>32-Cl>125
- T ----- T -, A+Stroke CD
I I I
r-- ----- 1 I
I 1,,-A I
~ ·-·-·~ft::B'::14
·1~~1
L_______ J
: ~ :'g I
I I I
_ _l__ _ _ _ _ _ _l__ _.J
A
B N+Stroke
:
12
.. 16
:
22 6 16 11.9 24 40
:
12
.. 40
..
27
:
12.1 35 6
•
34 16
•
13 15 25 3 18.1 5.5
16 16 22 6 18 11 .9 28.5 40 16 40 27 12.1 35 6 34 16 13 15 25 3 18.1 5.5
20 20 28 8 22 15.9 34.5 43 20 43 30 16.1 37 8 42 20 16 20 32 4 24.1 6.6
25 20 28 8 26 15.9 38.5 45 25 45 30 16.1 39 8 42 20 16 20 32 4 24.1 6.6
ACE
32 22 32.5 10 32.5 25.8 46.5 51
Note) SOB cann't be used alone, it must be used with CA.
40 25 37 12 38 27.8 54 52.5
50 27 39 12 46.5 31.7 64 53.5
63 32 47 16 56.5 39.7 75 57
80 36 51 .5 16 72 49.7 93 63
100 41 61 20 89 59.7 110 76
125 50 74 25 110 69.7 134 92
Cl>32-Cl>125
Cl>32-Cl>125 B
- T -----T- ,
I I I
i _i _____ T--LJi D
EJ~_l"'ir--~ -~-kt# J).

r-------1 I
. ; I
I l t'A I
_tc:l;'::i,6l 1 ~~::.•.;-··*·. - f---~
+:P y
~./ I
L_______ J
I ~
I
19
II 4-C)ll{Countersink) ~./;:] :· ,.+!-:/ ! !
4-C))K{Thru. hole) 1 L J i [;-- -- ·+--·
I
_ _l__ _ _ _ _ _ _l__ _ .J
I I I _ _i_---~=~-_-_i__ ( ·it
B N+Stroke
C+Stroke '"'C..J ~ -~ __,
A+Stroke CD
:
32
.. 22
:
32.5 10
•
26 32.5 45 46.5 51 51
:,
32
.
51
.'
32
:
26 44 10 50 ·---·
10 21 18 31 8 38 51 6.6 11
40 25 37 12 28 38 52 54 59 52.5 40 52.5 36 28 45.5 12 56 12 24 22 35 10 41 54 6.6 11
50 27 39 12 32 46.5 60 64 67 53.5 50 53.5 45 32 45.5 12 68 13 33 30 45 12 so 65 9 14
63 32 47 16 40 56.5 70 75 77 57 63 57 so 40 49 16 77 17 37 35 so 12 52 67 9 14
80 36 51 .5 16 50 72 90 93 97 63 80 63 63 50 54 16 93 19 47 40 60 14 66 86 11 17
100 41 61 20 60 89 110 110 119 76 100 76 71 60 67 20 106 22 55 50 70 15 76 96 11 17
125 50 74 25 70 110 130 134 139 92 125 92 90 70 81 25 135 26 70 60 90 20 94 124 14 20
Note) CR cann't be used alone, it must be used with CB.
Accessories
F C+Stroke 4.7 ±0. 1 SR6.3

<P32-<P125 F-ACQ121
w Cl>10
D Note) Other I knockles are common parts .Please refer to P453 for knuckle detail,
5.3±0.1
F-ACQ12Y 1.5 1.5
~
~'---'f-ffl------tt1
C+Stroke F
:, - .. :
32 63 74 50 44 12
40 66.5 95 63 45.5 16
50 71.5 107 75 45.5 16
63 77 130 90 49 20
80 85 150 110 54 20
,-T-----T-
100 102 185 132 67 25
: I I
: I I 125 124 210 160 81 25
J I I _;.,_
:, -
_F,;:_____dcJ _ __ _ ri-~ I
Note) Other Y knockles are common parts .Please refer to P454 for knuckle detail,
1++-?--1 ~ 32 32.5 46 19 10
i ~#'I I
i r-----~~,
L_ _ _L _____ ___i___
40
50
63
38
46.5
56.5
52
64
74
21
26
28
10
12
12
Accessornes Mounting accessory
80 72 94 31 16
100 114 16 Bore size LB FA/FB CA CB
89 35
A+Stroke 12 F-ACE12LB F-ACE12FA F-ACE12CA
125 110 139 43 20
16 F-ACP12LB F-ACE16FA F-ACE16CA
32 F-ACE32LB F-S132FA F-SE32CA F-SE32CB
125 F-S1125FA F-SE125CA F-SE125CB
w
D Accessonies Mounting accessory
Bore size CR SDB FTC TCM2
12 F-Ml12SDB -
16 F-Ml12SDB -
20 F-Ml20SDB -
25 F-Ml20SD8 -
\ 4-Cl>K(Countersink) 32 F-S132CR F-S132FTC F-S132TCM2
4-Cl>L(Thru. hole) 40 F-Sl40CR F-Sl40FTC F-S140TCM2
50 F-S150CR F-S150FTC F-S140TCM2
, - T ----- T - 63 F-S163CR F-S163FTC F-S163TCM2
i L_______ J
, r I 80 F-S180CR F-S180FTC F-S163TCM2
~ . I I 100 F-S1100CR F-S1100FTC F-SI 125TCM2
- - - - 1~ ----
125 F-S1125CR F-S1125FTC F-SI 125TCM2
~ +~#'I I
: I I Accessonies Knuckle
: r --------1
L_ _ _L _____ _L _ Bore size I I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle F F Knuckle U: U Knuckle
12 F-ACQ121 F-ACQ12Y F-M5XOBOF F-M5X080U
20
A+Stroke 25
:
32
.- 63
..
14
:
52 12
I
32.5 46 66 80 32 46 11 7 30
32
40
50

40 66.5 17 65 16 38 52 82 99 36 55 15 9 36 63
50 71.5 17 75 16 46.5 64 94 111 36 55 15 9 36 80
63 77 20.5 90 20 56.5 74 113.5 134 42 65 18 11 40 F-M16X15ot F-M16X150Y F-M1 6X150F F-M16X150U
100
80 85 20.5 112 20 72 94 133.5 154 42 65 18 11 40
100 102 24.5 135 25 89 114 159.5 184 50 75 20 14 50
125 124 24.5 170 25 110 139 187.5 212 50 75 20 14 50
Note) TCM2 cann't be used alone, it must be used with FTC.
The installation position of the accessories can not be adjusted arbitrarily.
Compact cylinder--ACQ Series
D Product series
Series name
Basic FA FB CB LB CS1-J DS1-J CS1-G DS1-G DS1-H
C)
C:
Adjustable stroke type: ACQJ u
"'
Cl)
:0
::,
0
0
Single acting type: ASQ, ATQ

C)
C:
u
"'
(I)
0,
C:
i:n
With guider type: TACQ
C)
C:
u
"'
Cl)
:0
::,
0
0
1----~---~---.>------t1t--~----tACQ
Page 268 279 457

4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of particles into the cylinder.
inlet and outlet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be especially noticed.
10.C clip Installation:
10.1. Removal & Installation of C clip must be done with proper tool & care.
10.2. Ensure C clip is securely fitted into the proper slot to prevent leakage.
235.7 552.3 657.9

12 6 40 16 377.0 754.0 879.6
acting Pull side 84.8 17.0 25.4 42.4 59.4 acting Pull side 1055.6 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.3 738.9
Single Push side 201.1 27.0 47.1 67.2 87.3 Single Push side 1963.5 96.3 292.7 489.0 685.4 881 .7 1078.1 1274.4
acting Pull side 150.8 17.0 32.0 47.1 acting Pull side 1649.3 64.9 229.9 394.8 559.7 724.7 889.6 1054.5
16 8 Double Push side 201.1 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 20 Double Push side 1963.5 196.3 392.7 589.0 785.4 981.7 1178.1 1374.4
acting Pull side 150.8 15.1 30.2 45.2 60.3 acting Pull side 1649.3 164.9 329.9 494.8 659.7 824.7 989.6 1154.5
Single Push side 314.2 36.8 68.2 Single Push side 3117.2 141.7 453.4 765.2 1076.9 1388.6 1700.3 2012.1
acting Pull side 235.6 acting Pull side 2803.1 110.3 390.6 670.9 951.2 1231.5 1511.9 1792.2
20 10 Double Push side 314.2 31. 94.2 20 Double Push side 3117.2 311.7 623.4 935.2 1246.9 1558.6 1870.3 2182.1
acting Pull side 235.6 23. acting Pull side 2803.1 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121 .2 1401 .5 1681.9 1962.2
Single Push side 490.9 Double Push side 5026.5 502.7 1005.3 1508.0 2010.6 2513.3 3015.9 3518.6
acting Pull side 377.8 25 acting Pull side 4535.7 453.6 907.1 1360.7 1814.3 2267.8 2721.4 3175.0
25 12 Double Push side 490.9 Double Push side 7854.0 785.4 1570.8 2356.2 3141.6 3927.0 4712.4 5497.8
acting Pull side 377.8 100 32 acting Pull side 7049.7 705.0 1409.9 2114.9 2819.9 3524.9 4229.8 4934.8
Single Push side 804.2 27. Double Push side 12271.8 1227.2 2454.4 3681 .5 4908.7 6135.9 7363.1 8590.2
acting Pull side 603.2 7.3 125 32 acting Pull side 11467.6 1146.8 2293.5 3440.3 4587.0 5733.8 6880.6 8027.3
32 16 Double Push side 804.2 80. Double Push side 15393.8 1539.4 3078.8 4618.1 6157.5 7696.9 9236.3 10775.
acting Pull side 603.2 60. 140 32 acting Pull side 14589.6 1459.0 2917.9 4376.9 5835.8 7294.8 8753.8 10212.7
Double Push side 20106.2 2010.6 4021.2 6031.9 8042.5 10053.1 12063. 14074.3
160 40 acting Pull side 18849.6 1885.0 3769.9 5654.9 7539.8 9424.8 11309.8 13194.7
It.rill
ACQ Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Double acting
Acting type
Single acting-Push type, Single acting-Pull tvoe I -
Operating IDouble actina 0.1-1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
pressure ISinale actina 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145psi)(2.0-10.0bar)
Procf pressure 1.5MPa(215osi)(15bar)
Soeed ranae mm/s Double actina: 30-500 Sinale actina: 50-500
Stroke tolerance o-1oo·k 0 >1oo·k5
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) M5x 0.8 I 1/8" I 1/4" I 3/8"
G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Symbol
ACQ ASQ ATQ ACQD ACQJ
-SU
ACQ- S
-so -BE]
ASQ- S ATQ- S
-sB-
ACQD- S
~
ACQJ - S
-BID -em~ -as-~

Product feature 32
40 Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 100 100 100
1. JIS standard is implemented. 50
2. C clip is adopted to connect the cylinder body and back cover or front cover, 63 Single acting 5 10 15 20 25 30
ACQ
and riveted structure is adopted to connect piston and piston rod to make it
compact and reliable.
~~O Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 100
3. The internal diameter of the body is treated with rolling followed by the Note) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
treatment of hard anodizing, forming an excellent abrasion resistance and 2. The dimensions of non-std stroke cylinder has the same dimensions as the next longer stroke std. stroke
durability. cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of 25 std. stroke cylinder.
4. The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two-way seal structure. It has
compact dimension and the function of grease reservation.
5. Compact structure can effectively save installation space.
6. There are magnetic switch slots around the cylinder body, which is convenient
to install inducting switch.
7. Installing accessories with various specifications are optional.
Model
ACQ: Compact cylinder(Double acting)
ASQ: Compact cylinder
(Single acting-push)
ATQ: Compact cylinder
(Single acting-pull)
ACQD : Compact cvlinder(Double rod)
ACQJ: Compact cylinder
(Adjustable stroke)
ACQ
ASQ
Bore size
ATQ
Model Bore size
ACQ 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 Blank: No accessories
ASQ 1216 20 25 32 40 50 63 ACQD FA: FA t pe
ATQ 1216 20 25 32 40 50 63 ACQJ FB: FB t e
ACQD 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 LB: LB t e
ACQJ 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Rod t e
Stroke
Blank: Female thread
B: Male thread
Adjustable stroke
Model Adiustable stroke Ma net
10: 10mm Blank: Without ma net
30: 30mm
ACQJ 40: 40mm
50: 50mm
75: 75mm
100: 100mm
Others No this code
G) Please refer to page 279 for accessory parts.
® Standard thread is blank here.
ACQ Series
. .
. . . .
Dimensions
<1>12,<1>16
,__~~~~"-------< With magnet
AB
,,,,,
1 Back cover No( 12, 16)\Aluminum allov(Others)
With magnet
2 Bumper TPU( 12-25)NBR(Olhers)
3 Piston Brass( 12, 16)\Aluminum allov(Others) 4-CJ>J
4 Wearrina No( 12-32)\Wear resistant material(Others)
5 Piston seal NBR
6 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ m chrome Plated
8 Bushing No( 12-32)\Wear resistant material(Others)
9 0-ring NBR
11 Cclip Spring steel
13
I <1>12-25 Sintered metal(Neodvmium-iron-boron)
Magnet IOthers Plastic
14 Maanet holder Brass( 12, 16)Aluminum allov(Others)
12 20.5 17 7.5 31.5 28 9 7 3.5 ACQ
16 22 22 18.5 18.5 8 5.5 34 30.5 9.5 5.5 3.5
20 24 34 19.5 29.5 9 5.5 36 31.5 9.5 5.5 4.5
25 27.5 37.5 22.5 32.5 11 5.5 37.5 32.5 11 5.5 5
:, . :- I : .
12 25 6 M3 x 0.5 6 5 6.5 3.5 M4x0.7 Thru.hole:<1>3.4 11 15.5 M5 x 0.8 22
16 29 8 M4 X 0.7 8 6 6.5 3.5 M4 x 0.7 Thru.hole: 3.4 11 20 M5 x 0.8 28
20 36 10 M5 x 0.8 7 8 9 7 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: <1>5.2 17 25.5 M5 x 0.8 36
25 40 12 M6 x 1.0 12 10 9 7 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: <1>5.2 17 28 MS x 0.8 40
<1>32 - <P 100 (Stroke,;, 100)

AB
32 30 40 23 33 40 33 7 45 49.5 16 M8 x 1.25 13
40 36.5 46.5 29.S 39.S 46.5 39.5 7 53 57 16 M8 x 1.25 13
50 38.5 48.5 30.S 40.S 48.5 40.5 8 64 71 20 M10x 1.5 15
63 44 54 36 46 54 46 8 77 84 20 M10x 1.5 15
80 53.5 63.5 43.S 53.S 63.S 53.5 10 98 104 25 M16 x 2.0 20
100 65 75 53 63 75 63 12 117 123.S 32 M20 x 2.5 26
40 14 9 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: <1>5.2 17 40 11 8

St=5 9
so St>S
17 11 8 M8 x 1.25 Thru.hole:<P6.8 22 so 1/4" 10.S 10.5
10.5 10.5
St=5 14 9.5
63 17 14 10.5 M10 x 1.5 Thru.hole:<P8.5 28.5 60 114" 15 10.5
St>S 15 10.5
80 22 17.S 13.5 M12 x 1.75 Thru.hole: 10.3 35.5 77 3/8" 16 14 16 14
--
100 27 17.S 13.5 M12x 1.75 Thru.hole:CJ>10.3 35.5 94 3/8" 20 17.5 20 17.5
ACQ Series
With magnet
12 25.5 30.5 36.5 41.5 3.5 25 6

16 27 32 39 44 3.5 29 8
20 29 34 39 41 46 51 4.5 36 10
25 32.5 37.5 42.5 42.5 47.5 52.5 5 40 12
32 35 40 45 45 50 55 7 45 49.5 16
40 41.5 46.5 51.5 51.5 56.5 61.5 7 53 57 16
50 53.5 58.5 58.5 63.5 68.5 8 64 71 20
12 22 27 33 38 M3 x0.5 6 5
16 23.5 28.5 35.5 40.5 M4 x0.7 8 6
20 24.5 29.5 34.5 36.5 41.5 46.5 MS x0.8 8
25 27.5 32.5 37.5 37.5 42.5 47.5 M6 x 1.0 12 10
32 28 33 38 38 43 48 M8 x 1.25 13 14
40 34.5 39.5 44.5 44.5 49.5 54.5 MS x 1.25 13 14
50 40.5 45.5 50.5 50.5 55.5 60.5 M10 x1 .5 15 17
<1>20 <1>25
63
:
12
.. 46
6.5
51
3.5
56 56 61
M4 x 0.7 Thru.hole: <1>3.4

66
11
M10x 1.5
15.5
15
MS x 0.8
17
Without magnet With magnet 16 6.5 3.5 M4 x 0.7 Thru.hole: <1>3.4 11 20 MS x 0.8
ASQ
20 9 7 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: 5.2 17 25.5 MS x 0.8
25 9 7 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: 5.2 17 28 MS x 0.8
32 9 7 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: 5.2 17 34 1/8"
40 9 7 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: 5.2 17 40 118"
ACQ
50 11 8 M8 x 1.25 Thru.hole: <1>6.8 22 50 114"
63 14 10.5 M10 x 1.5 Thru.hole: <1>8.5 28.5 60 114"
16 9.5 28
ATQ 20 9 5.5 9.5 5.5 36
25 11 5.5 11 5.5 40
32 10.5 7.5 10.5 7.5
40 11 8 11 8
50 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
63 15 10.5 15 10.5
D
e........~~+---~~---+-.....
H
ASQ
8-K
ACQ Series
A+Stroke x 2
(!)12 (!)16 AB AC+Stroke AB+Stroke
(Bore size: ClJ 12-C!J 100, Stroke,;, 100)
ABIAB+Pull type Stroke)
(!)20 (!)25
Without magnet With magnet
:
12
16
20
.. •:
14
15.5
18.5
2-Sides
6
8
10
M5 x 0.8
M6x 1.0
M8 x 1.25
9
10
12
:
10.5
12
14
8
10
12
4
5
6
5
6
8
C!J32-C!J100
AB
A+Strokex2
AB+Stroke
.''" til~
25 22.5 12 M10x 125 15 17.5 17 6 10
32 28.5 16 M14x 1.5 20.5 23.5 19 8 14
40 28.5 16 M14 x1.5 20.5 23.5 19 8 14
50 33.5 20 M18x1.5 26 28.5 27 11 17
63 33.5 20 M18x 1.5 26 28.5 27 11 17
80 43.5 25 M22 x 1.5 32.5 35.5 32 13 22
100 43.5 32 M26 x 1.5 32.5 35.5 36 13 27 With magnet
ACQ
(!)20 (!)25
AB Without magnet With magnet
ti. . ·~
39.4 52.4 32.4 32.4
16 43 60 36 36 21
20 55 47 67 38 38 25
25 60.5 49 70.5 39 39 27
32 64.9 54.5 74.9 40.5 40.5 28
40 74.5 64 84.5 7 50 50 28
50 77 66.5 87 8 50.5 50.5 29
63 78.4 68 88.4 8 52 52 29
80 95.8 81 105.8 10 61 61 35.5
100
:
12
.. 84.5 114.3
M3 x 0.5 6
94.5 124.3 12
4
..
9
70.5
.
70.5
M5x 0.8
42.5
16 M4 x 0.7 8 5 9.5 M6x 1.0

20 MS x 0.8 7 6 9.5 M8 x 1.25
25 M6x1.0 9.5(St=5)/12(St>5) 6 11 M10x1.25
32 M8 x 1.25 9(St,;; 10)/13(St>10) 7 10 M12 x 1.25
40 M8 x 1.25 11(St,;, 10)/13(St>10) 7 13 M12 x 1.25
50 M10 x 1.5 12(St,;; 10)/15(St>10) 8 13.5 M16 x 1.5
63 M1 0x 1.5 12(St,;; 10)/15(St>10) 8 14.5(St=5)/16(St>5) M16x 1.5
80 M16 x 2.0 14(St,;; 15)/20(St>15) 10 16 M20 x 1.5
100 M20 x 2.5 20(St,;, 25)/26(St>25) 13.5 21 M27 x2.0
Remark) The unmarked dimension is the same as ACQ standard type. Please refer to this page for male thread dimensions.
W.tJI
ACQ Series{Big bore size)
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 125 140 160
Operating pressure 0.05- 1.0MPa(7- 145psi)
Temperature "C -20- 80
Stroke tolerance mm o-1oo+i o >100+1 5
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) 3/8"
(D PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch.
Stroke
:,
125
.
I
- t.cnt . . .. ..
D Symbol
140 110 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 250 300 1300 1300
ACQ-S ACQD-S ACQJ-S 160 I
-BID -816- {31&4' Note) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
D Product feature
2. C clip is adopted to connect the cylinder body and back cover or front cover to
make it compact and reliable.
ACQ 3. The internal diameter of the body is treated with rolling followed by the
treatment of hard anodizing, forming an excellent abrasion resistance and
durability.
6. There are magnetic switch slots around the cylinder body, which is convenient ACQ: Com act cylinder(Double acting)
to install inducting switch. ACQD : Com act c linder(Double rod)
ACQJ : Compact cylinder(Ad·ustable stroke)
Bore size
1125 140 160 I Rodi e
B: Male thread
Stroke
I Refer to stroke table for details I
Magnet
IS: With magnet I
Adjustable stroke •
Model Adiustable stroke
10: 10mm
20: 20mm
30: 30mm
ACQJ 40:40mm
50: 50mm
75: 75mm
100: 100mm
Others No this code
Male thread
:, . ' :1
·- t. .
125 58 32 13 M30x1.5 l42 146 118 127 I
140 58 32 13 M30x1 .5 l42 146 118 127 I
160 64 40 14 M36 x 1.5 l47 155 121 136 I
ACQ Series{Big bore size)

' .
Dimensions
A+Stroke
l~ll 8-
1 Back cover Aluminum allov
2 Screw Carbon steel :, -
3 C clio Sorina steel 125 99 M22 x 2.5 22.5 30 27
4 0-ring NBR 140 M22 x 2.5 22.5 30 27
160 M24 x 3.0 26.5 33 36
6 Wear ring Wear resistant material :, -
7 Piston seal NBR 125 21.5 43.5 114 3/8" 24.5
140 21.5 43.5 128 3/8" 24.5
8 Bumper NBR
160 24.5 49 144 3/8" 27.5
Remark) Washer must be used when the cylinder be mounted by through hole.
10 0-rina NBR Please refer to page 272 for male thread dimensions.
11 Front cover Aluminum allov
12 Bushina Wear resistant material A+Stroke x 2 ACQ
13 Front cover packing NBR AC+Stroke AB+Stroke
AB
14 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ m chrome elated
15 Maanet Rubber ~•~-~•- ~
-E~+- ,, -~
a a
Remark) The unmarked dimension is the same asACQ standard type.

A+Stroke x 2+Ad'ustable Stroke
AF+Adjustable Stroke
FA
f---+- - --+---1~A_F_+_S_tr_ok~e-Adjustable Stroke
Remark) The unmarked dimension is the same as ACQ standard type.

•.Jil
ACQ Series{Longer stroke)
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100
Operating pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(15- 145psi)
Speec range mm/s 30-500
+ 1.5
Stroke tolerance mm 0
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) 1/8" I 1/4" I 3/8"
CD PT thread, Gthread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Stroke
:, -
D Symbol
32 40 50 63 80 100 125 150 175 200 250 300 300 350
ACQ ACQD ACQJ Note) Within allowable stroke scope, when the stroke is larger than the maximum value, it shall be treated as
non-standard one. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
-BD -BE- ~
ACQ-S ACQD - S ACQJ - S
-BID -816- ~
D Product feature
2. C clip is adopted to connect the cylinder body and back cover or front cover,
ACQ and riveted structure is adopted to connect piston and piston rod to make it
ACQ: Compact cylinder
compact and reliable. (Double acting)
3. The internal diameter of the body is treated with rolling followed by the ACQD: Compact cylinder
treatment of hard anodizing, forming an excellent abrasion resistance and (Double rod)
durability. ACQJ: Compact cylinder
4. The seal of piston adopts heterogeneous two-way seal structure. It has (Adjustable stroke)
compact dimension and the function of greasel reservation.
Bore size
132 40 50 63 so 100 I ACQ
to install inducting switch. Stroke

7. Installing accessories with various specifications are optional. IRefer to stroke table for details I
ACQD
Adjustable stroke , ACQJ
10: 10mm
20: 20mm Rod t e
30: 30mm Blank: Female thread
ACQJ 40: 40mm B: Male thread
50: 50mm
75: 75mm Ma net
100: 100mm Blank: Without ma net
Others No this code
S: With ma net
CD Please refer to page 279 for accessory parts.
.
.
1 Magnet washer NBR 9 Wearring No(<D32)\Wear resistant material(Others)

2 Magnet Plastic 10 Piston seal NBR
3 Body Aluminum alloy 11 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy
4 0 - ring NBR 12 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ m chrome plated
5 Bumper NBR 13 Front cover Aluminum alloy
6 Back cover Aluminum alloy 14 Bushing No(<D32)\Wear resistant material(Others)
7 Piston Aluminum alloy 15 Front cover packing NBR
•.JI•
ACQ Series{Longer stroke)
' .
Dimensions
CD32- CD 1OO(Stroke > 100)
8-K
:, .
32 62.5
•: ! , - : -
17 45.5 45
=·-·-
49.5 16
I•
12 MS x 1.25 13
40 72 17 55 53 57 16 12 MS x 1.25 13
50 73.5 18 55.5 64 71 20 13 M10 x 1.5 15
63 75 18 57 77 84 20 13 M10 x 1.5 15
80 86 20 66 98 104 25 15 M16 x 2.0 21
100 97.5 22 75.5 117 123.5 32 17 M20 x 2.5 27
:, . : . ..
32 14 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: CD5.2 17 34 22 1/8" 12.5
40 14 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: CD5.2 17 40 28 1/8" 14
50 17 MS x 1.25 Thru.hole: CD 6.8 22 50 35 1/4" 14
63 17 M10 x 1.5 Thru.hole: CD 8.5 27 60 35 1/4" 16.5
80 22 M12 x 1.75 Thru.hole: CD 10.3 32 77 43 3/8" 19
100 27 M12 x 1.75 Thru.hole: CD 10.3 33 94 59 3/8" 23
' • I
CD 32- CD 1OO(Stroke > 100)
A+Slroke x 2
ACQ
' . CD 32- CD 1OO(Stroke > 100)

7
107.5 117.5 18 29 8 14 M16 x 1.5
109 57 119 18 29 15 8 16.5 M16 x 1.5
126.5 66 136.5 20 35.5 21 10 19 M20x1 .5
145 75.5 155 22 42.5 27 13.5 23 M27 x 2.0
Remark) The unmarked dimension is the same as ACQ standard type.
(Bore size: CD32- CD100 Stroke> 100 Longer type)
:, . ••:• I
32 38.5 16 M14 x 1.5 23.5 8 19 14 22

40 38.5 16 M14 x 1.5 23.5 8 19 14 28
50 43.5 20 M18 x 1.5 28.5 11 27 17 35
63 43.5 20 M18x1 .5 28.5 11 27 17 35
80 53.5 25 M22 x 1.5 35.5 13 32 22 43
100 53.5 32 M26 x 1.5 35.5 13 36 27 59
2-Sides
TACQ Series(With guider type)
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Acting type Double actinq
+ 1.0
Stroke tolerance 0
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) M5 x 0.8 I 1/8" I 1/4" I 3/8'
Non-rotating tolerance (2) ± 0.2° I ±0.1°
CD PTthread, Gthread and NPTthread are available. ® Retract position.
D Symbol
TACQ TACQ-S
~ ~
•• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• •• ••
20 25 X X 1-49
32 40 1-99
50 63 80 100 X 100 5-99
D Product feature Note) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
1. JIS standard is implemented and with guider. cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of25 std. stroke cylinder.
2. C clip is adopted to connect the cylinder body and back cover or front cover
to make it compact and reliable.
TACQ 3. The internal diameter of the body is treated with rolling followed by the
treatment of hard anodizing, forming an excellent abrasion resistance and
durability.
compact dimension and the function of greasel reservation.
TACQ: Compact cylinder
5. Compact structure can effectively save installation space. (Double acting with guider)
6. There are magnetic switch slots around the cylinder body, which is
Bore size
7. Double rod non-rotating structure enables to bear large working load and 112 15 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 1oo I Magnet
lateral load. Blank: Without magnet
Stroke S: With magnet
!Refer to stroke table for details I

' .
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
'"''
•
2 Bumper NBR 11 0-ring NBR
3 Piston Aluminum alloy 12 Front cover packing NBR
4 Piston seal NBR 13 C clip Spring steel
5 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ m chrome plated 14 Fixing plate Aluminum alloy
6 Magnet Sintered metal(Neodymium-iron-boron) 15 Screw Carbon steel
7 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy 16 Leader Stainless steel
8 Body Aluminum alloy 17 Bushing Brass
9 Wear ring NBR

1. TACQ series cylinder is designed with double guide rod which is non-rotating. Make sure the 5. Caution before mounting:
non-rotating accuracy of the fixing plate is in the allowable range. 5.1) Do not put hands between the mounting
bracket and cylinder, which may cause
damage to a human body when the
+A• piston rod retracts.
: ..
Non-rotating tolerance ± 0.2°
-A•
5.2) Make sure the external force against the mounting bracket is concentric with the
piston rod. Any extra torque may cause damage to the cylinder.
2. Do not apply reverse torque to the piston rods. The torque beyond the limits may cause
malfunction or reduction of the service life.
F
,4-- T
f ~®~ }
~
T
:, -
12
. 0.11
I
0.10 0.08
I
0.07 0.07
I
0.06 -
•I
- - - -
I
Unit : N·m
-
...
16 0.15 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.09 0.08 - - - - - - 5. 3) Install the fixture onto the mounting bracket only when the piston rod is in the
20 0.37 0.32 0.28 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.19 0.18 0.17 0.16 - - retraction state. Do not apply the installation torque on the guide rod.
25 0.40 0.35 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.23 0.21 0.20 0.18 0.17 - - 5.4) Avoid any damage on piston rod and guide rod, which may cause damage on seals
32 0.66 0.59 0.53 0.49 0.45 0.42 0.39 0.36 0.34 0.32 0.25 0.20
and air leakage or malfunction.
40 1.06 0.96 0.88 0.81 0.75 0.70 0.65 0.61 0.58 0.55 0.43 0.36
50 - 1.70 1.56 1.45 1.35 1.26 1.19 1.12 1.06 1.01 0.80 0.67
63 - 3.90 3.62 3.37 3.15 2.96 2.80 2.65 2.51 2.39 1.92 1.61
80 - 7.44 6.98 6.56 6.20 5.87 5.57 5.31 5.07 4.84 3.98 3.37 TACQ
100 - 11.85 11 .19 10.61 10.08 9.60 9.17 877 8.41 8.07 6.73 5.77
3. Make sure the lateral load on the mounting bracket is within the limits. Any exceeding may
cause malfunction or reduction of the service life.
1000 -------------------------~------------------~-------------------------~-----
z :::::,::::::+::::::r:::::+:::::-1::::::r::::: 1.:::::,::::::+::::::,:::::+::::: Stroke
2 -----:------:---·-·:··-·· :··---:------:-----·:··--- ,-----:------:----· : ··---
Q.) ---T· --··1··--··r --··r··---T· ----
~ _:__:::t ::~:1·-----r ::J:::::t ::·

i
f
_c
100
' !
----~- ~ n--.
0
.,
E ~ ;j_}': J
:5
C: Lateral load
..,0
.2 "'
~ .,
:lii
.,
:0 1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
"'
~ 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100110120
< Stroke+Prejudicial distance(mm)
4. Make sure the load quality and the maximum speed are within the limits. Any exceeding may
cause malfunction or reduction of the service life.
Pressure: 0.5MPa
100 200 300 1000

Max. S eed(mm/s)
•.Ji•
D Dimensions
z
A+Stroke
~ ~-----------------------------------------------------------------
...... ·I
4-K
2-Cl>X
2-Y
:
12
.. M4 x 0.7 Thru.hole: Cll3.4 11.5
:
15.5 15 3
:
10 7.1 M3 x 0.5 6 25
16 M4x0.7 Thru.hole Cll3.4 11 .5 20 21 3 14 9.9 M3 x 0.5 6 29
20 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole Cll 5.2 18 25.5 26 4 17 12 M4 x 0.7 8 35
25 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: Cll 5.2 17.5 28 30 5 22 15.6 MS x 0.8 8 40
-'--+----l~~~~~--+--1 9
..,.I
St>5
40 17.5 40 1/8' 11 8 46 5 33 M5 x 0.8 10 51
50 22.5 50 1/4' 10.5 10.5 58 6 42 M6 x1 .0 12 62
63 28.5 60 1/4' 15 10.5 69 6 50 M6 x1.0 12 75
80 35.5 77 3/8' 16 14 90 8 65 MB x 1.25 14 95
100 35.5 94 3/8' 20 17.5 113.5 10 80 M10 x 1.5 16 114.5
•.J4:•
Accessories
<1>12-<1>25
Accessory Accesso t pe G) A+Stroke
LB: LB type C+Stroke FT
accessory FB: FB type
Bore size CB: CB type (2)
Knuckle@ I: I Knuckle
Y: Y Knuckle
(1) Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
® CB is attached with relevant PIN .
@ Please refer to page 455,456 for others knuckle.
Accessory selection
<1>32-<1>100
A+Stroke
M C+Stroke FT
4-ct>N1
ACQ
•• •• •• X
•
X X
ASQ
ATQ
•• •• •• •• X
•• •
X
•• •• •• • X X
•
X
-:-
,.. _______________________ _
'-------------------------
••• ••• ••• •

X X FX
X
X
•• X
•
Female Standard
thread With ma net •• •• •• X
X
X
X
X
•
ACQ
ACQJ Male Standard
thread With ma net
•• •• •• X
X
•• X
• 12 20.5 31.5 17 28 15.5 4.5 7.5 4.5 5.5 25 45 55

16 22 22 34 18.5 18.5 - 30.5 20 4.5 7.5 4.5 5.5 30 45 55
(1) Please refer to P453-456 for knuckle detail,
® Please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch. 20 24 34 36 19.5 29.5 31.5 25.5 6.5 10.5 6.5 8 39.5 48 60
@ Mounting accessories and Knuckle unavailable for bore size 125,140,160 cylinder. 25 27.5 37.5 37.5 22.5 32.5 32.5 28 6.5 10.5 6.5 8 42 52 64
DS1-H sensor switch only available for bore size 125,140,160 cylinder. 32 30 40 40 23 33 33 34 6.5 10.5 5.5 B 48 56 65
40 36.5 46.5 46.5 29.5 39.5 39.5 40 6.5 10.5 5.5 B 54 62 72
D Material of accessories 50 38.5 48.5 48.5 30.5 40.5 40.5 50 8.5 13.5 6.5 9 67 76 89
63 44 54 54 36 46 46 60 10.5 16.5 9 10 80 92 108
BO 53.5 63.5 63.5 43.5 53.5 53.5 77 12.5 18.5 11 12 99 116 134
100 65 75 75 53 63 63 94 12.5 18.5 11 12 117 136 154
•--Aluminumalloy: .a.--S45C, •-Cast iron, 1::,-SPCC,

Sensor switch
Bore size LB FA FB CB
12 F-ACQ12LB F-ACQ12FA F-ACQ12CB
16 F-ACQ16LB F-ACQ16FA F-ACQ16CB CS1-G
20 F-ACQ20LB F-ACQ20FA F-ACQ20CB DS1-G
25 F- ACQ25LB F- ACQ25FA F- ACQ25CB
32 F- ACQ32LB F- ACQ32FA F- ACQ32CB
40 F-ACQ40LB F-ACQ40FA F-ACQ40CB CS1 - J
50 F-ACQ50LB F-ACQSOFA F-ACQ50CB DS1 - J
63 F- ACQ63LB F- ACQ63FA F- ACQ63CB CS1-G
80 F- ACQ80LB F- ACQ80FA F- ACQ80CB DS1 - G
100 F-ACQ100LB F-ACQ100FA F-ACQ100CB
125 - - - DS1-H
140 - - - CS1-G
160 - - - DS1-G
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size I: I Knuckle Y· Y Knuckle F· F Knuckle U: U Knuckle
12 F- ACQ121 F- ACQ12Y - F- M5X080U
16 F- ACQ161 F- ACQ16Y - F- M6X100U
20 F-ACQ201 F-ACQ20Y F-M8X125F F-MBX125U
25 F-ACQ251 F-ACQ25Y F-M10X125F F-M10X125U
32
F- ACQ321 F- ACQ32Y F- M14X150F F- M14X150U
40
50
F- ACQ501 F- ACQ50Y F- M1BX150F F- M1BX150U
63
80 F-ACQ80I F-ACQ80Y - -
100 F- ACQ1001 F- ACQ100Y - -
Accessories
F ±0,1 SR H
<1>12-<1>25
0 - ' - ~
:i:• -
~L - e
~r
<(
-
0
<!)32-(1) 100
'
G
'
nc
A+Stroke
C+Stroke ..
F-ACQ121 21.5
:
16 9
I
6 5 4.7 M5•0.8 6.3 10
? ~;----------~~' F- ACQ161 32 25 11 8 5 6.2 M6•1 .0 8.1 12
-- ~ ==--::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::- F-ACQ201 34 25 13.5 8.5 8 7.7 M8•1 .25 10.3 16
F-ACQ251 41 30 16 11 10 9.7 M10•1 .25 12.8 20
F-ACQ321 42 30 16 14 10 17.6 M14•1.5 12 22
~ -- ---- ----------
F-ACQ501 56 40 20 18 14 21.6 M18•1.5 16 28
::;:;;:-:~:;;;;;;;: F-ACQ801
F-ACQ1001
71
79
50
55
23
24
21
22
18
22
27.6
31.6
M22•1 .5
M26•1 .5
21
24
38
44
...
,
F- ACQ12Y F- ACQ32Y
F-ACQ16Y F-ACQ50Y
F-ACQ20Y F-ACQ80Y
F-ACQ25Y F-ACQ1 00Y
24 34 36 19.5 31.5 36 25.5 6.5 8 27 18 8.3 15.8
27.5 37.5 37.5 22.5 32.5 40 28 6.5 10 30 20 10.3 19.8
32 30 40 40 23 33 33 45.5 34 6.5 10 30 20 18.3 35.8
ACQ 40 36.5 46.5 46.5 29.5 39.5 39.5 53.5 40 6.5 10 32 22 18.3 35.8
50 38.5 48.5 48.5 30.5 40.5 40.5 64.5 50 8.5 14 42 28 22.3 43.8
63 44 54 54 36 46 46 77.5 60 10.5 14 44 30 22.3 43.8 D±0.1 ~
80 53.5 63.5 63.5 43.5 53.5 53.5 98.5 77 12.5 18 56 38 28.3 55.8 -~
~
1 -~ -f--
100 65 75 75 53 63 63 117.5 94 12.5 22 67 45 32.3 63.8
CD Value A and value Cin the above table is only for ACQ series.
Please refer to relevant content for value C of other series.
C+Stroke
<1>12- (1)25
_k__
E
~-·~·-·~~
r-
----------------
----------------
----------------
3
-,
..
F-ACQ12Y 22
:• I
16 5.3 5 6 M5•0.8 9 10 10.2 1.5 4 5
... 0.7 14.6
'
+--
'
--- -- ..
---+- F-ACQ16Y 28 21 6.6 5 11 M6•1.0 11 12 12.4 1.5 4 5 0.7 16.8
L_ ---------------- _ .J
F-ACQ20Y 34 25 8.3 8 8.5 M8•1.25 15 16 16.2 1.5 7 8 0.9 21
X X F- ACQ25Y 41 30 10.3 10 10.5 M10•1 .25 19 20 20.2 2 8 10 1.1 26.4
F- ACQ32Y 42 30 18.4 10 16 M14•1.5 22 22 36 36.2 2 8 10 1.1 42.4
C+Stroke
F-ACQ50Y 56 40 22.4 14 20 M18x1.5 28 28 44 44.2 2 12 14 1.1 50.4
<1>32- (1)100
f _lif ;;;;;;;~=fl;~ F- ACQ80Y 71 50 28.4 18 23 M22x1 .5 38 38 56 56.2 2 15 18 1. 7 63.6
L____ 1______________ 1 ____ J
F- ACQ100Y 79 55 32.4 22 24 M26x1 .5 44 44 64 64.2 2.5 19 22 1.7 72.6
~=::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~
~··~·~
12 17 28 15.5 4.5 8 4.5 17 2 34 29.5 44
16 18.5 18.5 30.5 20 4.5 8 4.5 19 2 38 33.5 48
20 19.5 29.5 31.5 25.5 6.5 9.2 6.5 24 3 48 42 62
25 22.5 32.5 32.5 28 6.5 10.7 6.5 26 3 52 46 66
32 23 33 33 34 6.5 11.2 6.5 13 3 57 20 71
40 29.5 39.5 39.5 40 6.5 11.2 6.5 13 3 64 20 78
50 30.5 40.5 40.5 50 8.5 12.2 8.5 14 3 79 22 95
63 36 46 46 60 10.5 13.7 10.5 16 3 95 26 113
80 43.5 53.5 53.5 77 13 16.5 13 20.5 4.5 118 32 140
100 53 63 63 94 13 23 13 24 6 137 36 162
CD Value Cin the above table is only for ACQ series.
Please refer to relevant content for value C of other series.
•·l:t••
Compact cylinder--SDA Series
D Product series
Series name
CS1-J DS1-J CS1-G DS1-G
Double acting type: SDA Adjustable stroke type: SDAJ
12
16
20
0) 25
C:
.,
~ 32
Double rod type: SDAD
"'
:0
::,
40
0
0 50
63
80
Single acting type: SSA, STA
Page 282 457

SDA
2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition
of high temperature or corrosion.
3. Necessary protection measure shall be taken in the environment with higher humidity, much dust or water drops,
oil dust and welding dregs.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the
entrance of particles into the cylinder.
7. Anti-freezing measure shall be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent mcisture freezing.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal work of cylinder and
extend the service life.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface.
Anti-dust caps shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled,
which shall be especially noticed.
Single Single
acting acting
12 Double Push side 113.1 22.6 33.9 45.2 56.5 67.9 79.2 40 16 Double Push side 1256.6 125.7 251.3 377.0 502.7 628.3
acting Pull side 84.8 17.0 25.4 33.9 42.4 50.9 59.4 acting Pull side 1055.6 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8
Single Push side 201 .1 20.2 40.3 60.4 80.5 100. 120.7 Single Push side 1963.5 89.3 285.7 482.0 678.4 874.7
acting Pull side 172.8 14.6 31.8 49.1 66.4 83.7 101.0 acting Pull side 1649.3 57.9 222.9 387.8 552.7 717.7
16 Double Push side 201.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7 50 20 Double Push side 1963.5 196.3 392.7 589.0 785.4 981.7
acting Pull side 172.8 34.6 51.8 69.1 86.4 103. 121.0 acting Pull side 1649.3 164.9 329.9 494.8 659.7 824.7
Single Push side 314.2 39.8 71 .2 102.7 134.1 165. 196.9 Single Push side 3117.2 135.7 447.4 759.2
acting Pull side 263.9 29.8 56.2 82.6 108.9 135.3 161.7 acting Pull side 2803.1 104.3 384.6 664.9
20 Double Push side 314.2 62.8 94.2 125.7 157.1 188. 219.9 63 20 Double Push side 3117.2 311.7 623.4 935.2
acting Pull side 263.9 52.8 79.2 105.6 131.9 158. 184.7 acting Pull side 2803.1 280.3 560.6 840.9
Single Push side 490.9 69.7 118.8 167.8 216.9 266. Double Push side 5026.5 502.7 1005.3 1508.0 2010.6 2513.3 3015.9 3518.
acting Pull side 412.3 54.0 95.2 136.4 177.7 218. 25 acting Pull side 4535.7 453.6 907.1 1360.7 1814.3 2267.8 2721.4 3175.
25 10 Double Push side 490.9 98.2 147.3 196.3 245.4 294. Double Push side 78540 785.4 1570.8 2356.2 3141 .6 3927.0 4712.4 5497
acting Pull side 412.3 82.5 123.7 164.9 206.2 247. 32 acting Pull side 7049.7 705.0 1409.9 2114.9 2819.9 3524.9 4229.8 4934.
Single Push side 804.2 105.3 185.8 266.2 346.6 427.
acting Pull side 691.2 82.7 151.8 221.0 290.1 359.2 428.3
32 12 Double Push side 804.2 160.8 241.3 321.7 402.1 482. 563.0
acting Pull side 691.2 138.2 207.3 276.5 345.6 414. 483.8
lt~:111
SDA Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Double acting
Acting type Single acting-Push type, Single acting-Pull type -
I
Operating IDouble acting 0.1-1.0MPa(1 5-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
Ipressure ISingle acting 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145psi)(2.0-10.0bar)
Sneed ranqe mm/s Double actinq: 30- 500 Sinqle actinq: 50-500
Stroke tolerance 0- 100+1, o >101+1,5
Cushion type Bumper
Port size (1) MS x 0.8 I 118" I 114" I 318"
<D PT thread, Gthread and NPTthread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Symbol
SDA SSA STA SDAD SDAJ
-BD -eu~ -a:s-

SDA-S SSA-S STA-S SDAD-S
~
SDAJ-S 12
-SD -em --ij]S -00-

16
-616* 20
130
SDAT SDAT- S 100 140
-+3ff;HI 150
160
SDAW SDAW-S
80 150
100 130 160
Note) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
D Product feature 2. The dimensions of non-std stroke cylinder has the same dimensions as the next longer stroke std. stroke
SDA
1. Manufactured by our enterprise. cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of 25 std. stroke cylinder.
2. Riveted structure is adopted to connect the cylinder body and back cover, and
piston and piston rod to make it compact and reliable;
3. The inner diameter of the body is treated with rolling followed by the treatment
of hard anodizing, forming an excellent abrasion resistance and durability.
to install sensor switch
7. Mounting accessories with various specifications are optional.

Bore size B: Male thread
Model Bore size ~------Manet
SSA, STA 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ~ - ----~
Others 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
S: With magnet
Stroke Ad ustable stroke
IRefer to stroke table for details I Model Ad·ustable stroke
10:10mm
20: 20mm
30: 30mm
SDAJ 40: 40mm
50 : 50mm
75: 75mm
100: 100mm
Others No this code
Bore size
112 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 ao 100 1 Rod t e
Stroke 1 B: Male thread
!Refer to stroke table for details I
S1roke2
<D Standard thread is blank here.
SDA Series

I• I•
(])12 (])16
ED : EA
4-K
• No(CD12, 16)
Back cover
Aluminum alloy(Others)
2 Bum er NBR
Brass( CD 12, 16)
3 Piston
Aluminum alloy(Others)
4 Piston seal NBR
Carbon steel with
5 Piston rod
20 µ m chrome plated
11 Piston nut Carbon steel

No(CD12- 32) 12 22 17 32 27 5 25 6 4 M3 x 0.5 6 5 6.5 4.5 M5 x 0.8 Thru.hole: CD4.2
12 Bushing
Wear resistant material(Others) SDA
16 24 18.5 34 28.5 5.5 29 6 4 M3 x 0.5 6 5 6.5 4.5 M5 x 0.8 Thru.hole: CD4.2
20 25 19.5 35 29.5 5.5 34 36 8 4 M4 X 0.7 8 6 6.5 4.5 MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: CD4.2
25 27 21 37 31 6 40 42 10 4 MS x 0.8 10 8 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: CD4.6
32 31.5 24.5 41.5 34.5 7 44 50 12 4.5 M6 x 1.0 12 10 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: CD4.6
40 33 26 43 36 7 52 58.5 16 4 MB x 1.25 12 14 10 7.5 MB x 1.25 Thru.hole: CD6.5
50 37 28 47 38 9 62 71.5 20 5 M10 x 1.5 15 17 11 8.5 MB x 1.25 Thru.hole: CD6.5
63 41 32 51 42 9 75 84.5 20 M10x 1.5 15 17 11 8.5 MB x 1.25 Thru.hole: CD6.5
80 52 41 62 51 11 94 104 25 6 M14 x 1.5 20 22 14 10.5 M12 x 1.75 Thru.hole: CD 9.2
100 63 51 73 61 12 114 124 32 M18 x1 .5 20 27 17.5 13 M14 x 2.0 Thru.hole: CD 11 .3
12 12 16.2 10.2 1 M5x0.8 7.5 7.5 5 5 23

16 12 19.8 11 1.5 M5x0.8 8 8 5.5 5.5 28
20 14 24 13 1.5 MS x 0.8 9 9 5.5 5.5
25 15 28 17 2 M5 x 0.8 9 9 5.5 5.5
32 16 34 22 2.5 1/8" 9 9 6.5 9
40 20 40 28 3 1/8" 9.5 9.5 7.5 7.5
50 25 48 38 4 1/4" 8 10.5 8 10.5
63 25 60 40 4 1/4" 9.5 12 9.5 11
80 25 74 45 5 3/8" 11.5 14.5 11.5 14.5
100 30 90 55 5 3/8" 16 20.5 16 20.5
SDA Series

<D12 (!)16 (!) 12 (!)16 DA DA+Pull t pe Stroke)
EB I
i---~
ED : EA
4-K
A+Stroke
(!)20-(!)63 2-Sides
(!)20-(1)100
DA(DA+Pull type Stroke)
EB I
i---~
ED : EA
SDA 4-K
AB+Stroke AC+Stroke
A+Strokex2
----------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------ ---------------------------------------------
16 17.5 6 16 M5 x 0.8 10 12 8 4 5 11 1.5 1.5
<D20-(!)63 20 20.5 8 19 M6x1.0 13 15 10 5 6 13 1.5 1.5
25 23 10 21 MB x 1.25 15 17 12 6 8 17 2 2
32 25 12 22 M10 x 1.25 15 18 17 6 10 22 3 2.5
40 35 16 32 M14 x1 .5 25 28 19 8 14 28 3 3
50 37 20 33 M18 x 1.5 25 28 27 11 17 38 4 4
63 37 20 33 M18x 1.5 25 28 27 11 17 40 4 4
80 44 25 39 M22 x 1.5 30 33 32 13 22 45 5 5
100 50 32 45 M26 x 1.5 35 38 36 13 27 55 5 5
I I
12 42 27 37 42 52 37 47
16 44 28.5 38.5 44 54 38.5 48.5
20 45 29.5 39.5 45 55 39.5 495 36
25 47 31 41 47 57 41 51 42
32 51.5 34.5 44.5 51.5 61.5 44.5 54.5 7 50
40 53 36 46 53 53 46 56 7 58.5
50 57 38 48 57 67 48 58 9 71.5
63
:
12
.. 6
I
4
I•
61
M3 x0.5
42
6
52
5
61
6.5 4.5
71 52 62
MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: (!)4.2

9
12
84.5
16.2
16 6 4 M3 x 0.5 6 5 6.5 4.5 M5 x 0.8 Thru.hole: (!)4.2 12 19.8
20 8 4 M4 X 0.7 8 6 6.5 4.5 MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: (!)4.2 14 24
25 10 4 MS x 0.8 10 8 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: (!)4.6 15 28
32 12 4 M6 x 1.0 12 10 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: (!)4.6 16 34
40 16 4 MB x 1.25 12 14 10 7.5 MB x 1.25 Thru.hole: (!)6.5 20 40
50 20 5 M10x1.5 15 17 11 8.5 MB x 1.25 Thru.hole: (!)6.5 25 48
63 20 5 M10x1.5 15 17 11 8.5 MB x 1.25 Thru.hole: (!)6.5 25 60
:, .
12 10.2 1 M5 x 0.8 7.5 5 23
16 11 1.5 MS x 0.8 8 5.5 28
20 13 1.5 MS x 0.8 9 5.5
25 17 2 M5 x 0.8 9 5.5
32 22 2.4 1/8" 9 9
40 28 3 1/8' 9.5 7.5
50 38 4 1/4' 10.5 10.5
63 40 4 1/4' 12 11
e,.i:11
SDA Series
I• I
<1>12 <1>16
A+Stroke x 2
<1>20-<1>100 <1>20-<!>100
MA
16 29.5 18.5 39.5 28.5 5.5 4 16 42.5 52.5 28.5 5.5 17 M3 x 0.5
20 30.5 19.5 40.5 29.5 5.5 4 20 47.5 19.5 57.5 29.5 5.5 21 M4x0.7
25 33 21 43 31 4 25 54 21 64 31 25 MS x 0.8
32 38.5 24.5 48.5 34.5 4 32 61 .5 24.5 71 .5 34.5 27 M6 x 1.0 SDA
40 40 26 50 36 4 40 64 26 74 36 28 M8x 1.25
50 46 28 56 38 5 50 70 28 80 38 29 M10 X 1.5
63 50 32 60 42 5 63 74 32 84 42 29 M10 x 1.5
80 63 41 73 11 6 80 92.5 41 102.5 51 11 35.5 M14x 1.5
20 M4 x 0.7 8(St=5 is 6.5) 15 7.5 7.5 20 8(St=5 is 6.5) 15 1.5 7.5 7.5
25 M5x0.8 1O(St=5 is 7) 17 8 8 25 10(St=5 is 7) 17 2 8 8 M8 x 1.25
32 M6x 1.0 8 12 22 8 32 8 12 22 3 M10x1.25
40 M8x 1.25 8 12 28 8 10 40 8 12 28 3 10 M12 x 1.25
50 M10x 1.5 8 15 38 8 10.5 50 8 15 38 4 10.5 M16x1.5
63 M10 x 1.5 10 15 40 9.5 11.8 63 10 15 40 4 9.5 11.8 M16x 1.5
80 M14 x 1.5 13 20 45 11.5 14.5 80 13 20 10 45 5 11.5 14.5 M20x 1.5
100 M18 x 1.5 18 20 55 16 20.5 100 18 20 13.5 55 16 20.5 M27 x 2.0
Note) The unmarked dimension is the same as SDAstandard type. Note) The unmarked dimension is the same as SDA standard type.
Please refer to Page 284 for the dimension of male thread . Please refer to Page 284 for the dimension of male thread.
SDA Series
I •
(1)12 (1)16 (1)12 (1)16
AD+Stroke2 AD+Stroke1
AB AC+(Stroke1 x 2+Stroke2)
AB AC+(Stroke1+Stroke2) AB
<D20-<D100 <D20-<D100
A+(Stroke1 x 2+Stroke2)
Note) Please refer to Page 284 for the dimension of male thread.
42.5 37 18.5 62.5 57 28.5 5.5 37 57 28.5 5.5

44.5 39 19.5 64.5 59 29.5 5.5 36 8 4 50 39 70 59 29.5 5.5 36 4
48 42 21 68 62 31 6 42 10 4 54 42 74 62 31 6 42 4
56 49 24.5 76 69 34.5 7 44 50 12 4 63 49 24.5 83 69 34.5 44 50 4
40 59 52 26 79 72 36 7 52 58.5 16 4 40 66 52 26 86 72 36 7 52 58.5 16 4
50 65 56 28 85 76 38 9 62 71.5 20 5 50 74 56 28 94 76 38 9 62 71.5 20 5
63 73 64 32 93 84 42 9 75 84.5 20 5 63 82 64 32 102 84 42 9 75 84.5 20 5
80 93 82 41 113 102 51 11 94 104 25 6 80 104 82 41 124 102 51 11 94 104 25 6
.
100
: ~
12
114 102
M3 x 0.5
51
6 5
134 122
6.5
61 12 114 124
4.5 M5 x 0.8 Thru.hole: <D4.2

32 7
12
.
100
: ~
12
126 102
M3 x 0.5
51
6
146
5
122
6.5 4.5
61 12 114 124 32
MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: <D4.2

7
12
16 M3 x 0.5 6 5 6.5 4.5 MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: <D4.2 12 16 M3 x 0.5 6 5 6.5 4.5 MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: <D4.2 12
20 M4 x 0.7 8 6 6.5 4.5 MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: <D4.2 14 20 M4 x 0.7 8 6 6.5 4.5 MS x 0.8 Thru.hole: <D4.2 14
25 MS x 0.8 10 8 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: <D4.6 15 25 MS x 0.8 10 8 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: <D4.6 15
32 M6 x 1.0 12 10 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: <D4.6 16 32 M6x1.0 12 10 8.2 5.5 M6 x 1.0 Thru.hole: <D4.6 16
40 MS x 1.25 12 14 10 7.5 MS x 1.25 Thru.hole: <D6.5 20 40 MS x 1.25 12 14 10 7.5 MS x 1.25 Thru.hole: <D6.5 20
50 M10 x 1.5 15 17 11 8.5 MS x 1.25 Thru.hole: <D6.5 25 50 M10x1.5 15 17 11 8.5 MS x 1.25 Thru.hole: <D6.5 25
63 M10x 1.5 15 17 11 8.5 MS x 1.25 Thru.hole: <D6.5 25 63 M10 x 1.5 15 17 11 8.5 M8 x 1.25 Thru.hole:<D6.5 25
80 M14x1.5 20 22 14 10.5 M12 x 1.75 Thru.hole: <D9.2 25 80 M14 x 1.5 20 22 14 10.5 M12 x 1.75 Thru.hole:<D9.2 25
100 M18 x 1.5 20 27 17.5 13 M14 x 2.0 Thru.hole: <D 11 .3 30 100 M18 x 1.5 20 27 17.5 13 M14 x 2.0 Thru.hole: <D 11.3 30
1.5 M5 x 0.8 5.5 5.5 19.8 1.5 M5 x 0.8 5.5 5.5

1.5 M5 x 0.8 5.5 5.5 24 1.5 M5 x 0.8 5.5 5.5
25 17 2 M5 x 0.8 5.5 5.5 25 28 2 M5 x 0.8 5.5 5.5
32 22 2.5 1/8" 6.5 9 32 34 2.5 1/8" 6.5 9
40 40 28 1/8" 7.5 7.5 9.5 9.5 40 40 28 3 1/8' 7.5 7.5 9.5 9.5
50 48 38 4 1/4" 8 10.5 8 10.5 50 48 38 4 1/4" 8 10.5 8 10.5
63 60 40 4 1/4" 9.5 11 9.5 12 63 60 40 4 1/4' 9.5 11 9.5 12
80 74 45 5 3/8" 11.5 14.5 11.5 14.5 80 74 45 5 3/8" 11.5 14.5 11.5 14.5
100 90 55 5 3/8" 16 20.5 16 20.5 100 90 55 5 3/8" 16 20.5 16 20.5
Multi-mount cylinder--MD, MK Series
D Product series
Acting Bore Collocation of sensor switch
Series name
type size CS1-G DS1-G
Double acting type: MD Double acting

no-rotating type: MK
Double rod type: MDD Double rod g>

no-rotating type: MKD
:g
"'
Q)
:0
::,
0
D 6
10
Adjustable stroke type: MDJ Adjustable stroke
no-rotating type: MKJ 16
20
25
32
Single acting type: MSD Single acting
no-rotating type: MSK
C)
C:
:g
"'
Q)
C)
Single acting type: MTD Single acting C:
no-rotating type: MTK en
Page 288 291 457

2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition of high
temperature or corrosion; MD,MK
welding dregs.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be cleared away before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of
particles into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation maintain the normal work of cylinder and extend the service life
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, pay attention to conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust
caps shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports.
Pull side 21.2 1.5

6 3 Push side 28.3 2.8 5.7 11.3 14.1 17.0 19.8
Pull side 21.2 2.1 4.2 6.4 8.5 10.6 12.7 14.8
Push side 78.5 3.9 7.9 11.8 15.8 19.7 23.7
Pull side 66.0 1.4 4.1 6.8 9.5 12.2 14.9
10 4 Push side 78.5 7.9 15.7 23.6 31 .4 39.3 47.1 55.0
acting Pull side 66.0 6.6 13.2 19.8 26.4 33.0 39.6 46.2
Single Push side 201.1 10.1 30.2 50.3 70.4 90.5 110.6
acting Pull side 172.8 8.7 25.9 43.2 60.5 77.8 95.1
16 6 Double Push side 201 .1 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7
acting Pull side 172.8 17.3 34.6 51 .8 69.1 86.4 103.7 121.0
Single Push side 314.2 15.7 47.1 78.6 110.0 141.4 172.8
acting Pull side 263.9 13.2 39.6 66.0 92.3 118.7 145.1
20 8 Double Push side 314.2 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.7 157.1 188.5 219.9
acting Pull side 263.9 26.4 52.8 79.2 105.6 131 .9 158.3 184.7
Single Push side 490.9 24.7 73.8 122.8 179.1 221.0 270.1
acting Pull side 412.3 20.7 61.9 103.1 144.4 185.6 226.8
25 10 Double Push side 490.9 49.1 98.2 147.3 196.3 245.4 294.5 343.6
acting Pull side 412.3 41.2 82.5 123.7 164.9 206.2 247.4 288.6
Single Push side 804.2 40.2 120.7 201.1 281.5 361.9 442.4
acting Pull side 691 .2 34.7 103.8 173.0 242.1 311 .2 380.3
32 12 Double Push side 804.2 80.4 160.8 241 .3 321 .7 402.1 482.5 563.0
acting Pull side 691.2 69.1 138.2 270.3 276.5 345.6 414.7 483.8
~ lt~:tll
Multi-mount cylinder AlrTAC
MD Series
: ..
Acting
Specification
I MD, MDD, MDJ

. I . I
Double acting
type IMSD, MTD Single acting-Push type, Single acting-Pull type
OperatingI Double acting 0.1-1.0MPa(14- 145psi)
pressure ISingle acting 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145psi)
Speed range mm/s Double acting: 30-500 Single acting: 50- 500
+1.0
Stroke tolerance 0
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) M5 x0.8 I 1/8'
<D PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
:,
Stroke
.
Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
~ • ~11• ..
35
.. 40
. ..
6
Single acting 5 10 15 20 20
Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 35 40
10
D Symbol Single acting 5 10 15 20 20
Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 50 70
MD MSD MTD MDD MDJ 16
-BO~~ -BB- -6&4' 20

Double acting
Single acting
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
5 10 15 20
60
20
80
MD-S MSD-S MTD-S MDD-S MDJ-S Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 60 80

25
-sJD -SIU~ -BE-- -6&4' 32
Single acting
Double acting
5 10 15 20
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
20
60 80
D Product feature Note) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
1. Manufactured by our enterprise. cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of 25 std. stroke cylinder.
2. There are several ways to fix the cylinder and it is convenient to install and
MD,MK use.
3. Several cylinders can be assembled together to effectively save the
• I t • t I I•
installation space.
4. The guide precision of piston rod is high and no additional lubricant is MD 32x30 SD
needed. ....................................................
MDD32x30 SD
5. Cylinders of various specifications are optional.
6. The seal material with high temperature resistance is adopted to guarantee .............................................
••
the normal operation of cylinder at 150"C(Option). MDJ 32 x 30-30 SD
, D
MD: Multi-mount cylinder(Double acting type)
MSD: Multi-mount cylinder(Single acting-push type)
MID: Multi-mount cylinder(Single acting-pull type)
MDD: Multi-mount cylinder(Double rod type)
MDJ: Multi-mount cylinder(Adjustable stroke type)
Ma net
Bore size
S: With magnet
!61016202532 !
Stroke Adjustable stroke

IRefer to stroke table for details I Model lAdjustable stroke
10: 10mm
MDJ 120: 20mm
30: 30mm
<D When the thread is standard, the code is blank . Others No this code
•..m:•
MD Series
2-<l>K Thru.hote
4-Q>J(Countersink) Op: JA
,.,,.
1 Rod nut Carbon steel A+Stroke
2 Piston rod Stainless steel
2-P
3 Rod packina NBR
4 Bodv Aluminum allov
5 Bumper TPU
7 Magnet washer NBR
8 Maanet Sintered metal(Neodvmium-iron-boron)
9 Piston seal NBR
10 Wearrina Wear resistant material
11 Piston Aluminum allov
12 0-ring NBR
10 52 36 52 36 16.5 24 4 16 10 11 7
13 C-clip Spring steel
16 46 30 56 40 20 32 6 16 11 12.5 8
14 Back cover Aluminum alloy 20 55 36 65 46 26 40 8 19 12 14 10
15 Bumper TPU 25 63 40 73 50 32 50 10 23 15.5 18 12
32 69 42 79 52 40 62 12 27 19.5 22 17
:
6
. -
2.5 6 5 10
: :
7 3.3 7 M3 x 0.5 5 17
:
M5 x 0.8
..
14
·:• .,..
10 -
10 2 6 5.5 11 7 3.3 9 M3 x 0.5 5 18 M5 x 0.8 15.5 10 -
16 4 5 7.5 6.5 14 7 4.5 12 M4 x 0.7 5 25 M5 x 0.8 14.5 10 3
20 5 6 9.5 8 16 9 5.5 16 M5 x 0.8 7.5 30 M5 x0.8 19 11 9
25 6 8 9.5 9 20 10 5.5 20 M5 x 0.8 8 38 M5 x 0.8 21.5 8.5 12
32 6 10 11 11.5 24 11 6.5 24 M6 x1.0 9 48 1/8" 23 12.5 13 MD,MK
AC
A
10 62 67 77 82 62 67 77 82 46 51 61 66 46 51 61 66
16 61 66 81 86 71 76 91 96 45 50 65 70 55 60 75 80
20 70 75 90 95 80 85 100 105 51 56 71 76 61 66 81 86
25 78 83 98 103 88 93 108 113 55 60 75 80 65 70 85 90
32 84 89 104 109 94 99 114 119 57 62 77 82 67 72 87 92
Remark) The unmarked dimension is the same as MD standard type.
MD Series
'' H 2-<!JK Thru.hole H

4-IPJ(Countersink) Op: JA 2-Sides
E
AC+Stroke
A+Strokex2
6 8
10 74 74 4 11 7
16 69.5 79.5 7.5 6 12.5 8
20 83 93 9 8 14 10
25 95 105 9 10 15.5 18 12
32 106 116 10 12 19.5 22 17
:n - : : :- . .. ·:• ,._
6 2.5 6 5 10 7 3.3 7 M3 x 0.5 5 17 MS x 0.8 14 16 -
10 2 6 5.5 11 7 3.3 9 M3 x 0.5 5 18 MS x 0.8 15.5 16 -
16 4 5 7.5 6.5 14 7 4.5 12 M4 x 0.7 5 25 MS x 0.8 14.5 17.5 3
20 5 6 9.5 8 16 9 5.5 16 MS x 0.8 7.5 30 M5 x 0.8 19 20 9
25 6 8 9.5 9 20 10 5.5 20 M5 x 0.8 8 38 M5 x 0.8 21.5 17.5 12
32 6 10 11 11.5 24 11 6.5 24 M6 x 1.0 9 48 1/8" 23 22.5 13
FA
AC+Stroke I DB+Stroke+Adjustable Stroke

A+Stroke x 2+Ad·ustable Stroke
:
6
.. 70
. .. .
70
.. .
38
. .. .
38
. .. II:
13 M3 x 0.5 2.5
10 73 73 36 36 15 M4 x 0.7 2
16 70.5 80.5 30 40 17 M5 x 0.8 4
20 85 95 36 46 21 M6 x 1.0 5
25 97 107 40 50 25 M8 x 1.25 6
32 106 116 42 52 27 M10 x 1.25 6
Remark) The unmarked dimension is the same as MD standard type.
e,.;u,1
MK Series
: ..
Specification
Acting I MK, MKD, MKJ

. I . I
Double acting
type IMSK, MTK Single acting-Push type, Single acting-Pull type
OperatingI Double acting 0.1-1.0MPa(14-145psi)
pressure ISingle acting 0.2-1.0MPa(28-145psi)
Speed range mm/s Double acting: 30-500 Single acting: 50-500
+1.0
Stroke tolerance a
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) M5 x 0.8 I 1/8'
(j) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Stroke
6
:. &
Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
~ .~·· . .
35
.. 40
. ..
Symbol 10
Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 35 40
MK MSK MTK MKD MKJ Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 50 70
-eD
MK-S
-eu~
MSK-S MTK-S
~~
MKD-S MKJ-S
16
20
Single acting
Double acting
Single acting
5 10 15 20
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
5 10 15 20
20
60
20
80
~-ai~ ~~ 25
Double acting
Single acting
5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
5 10 15 20
60
20
80
Double acting 5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60
~
60 80
32
D Product feature
1. Manufactured by our enterprise. 2. The dimensions of non-std stroke cylinder has the same dimensions as the next longer stroke std. stroke
2. There are several fixation ways for the cylinder, and also convenient to cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of 25 std. stroke cylinder.
install and use.
3. Several cylinders can be assembled together to effectively save the
MD,MK
installation space. D Ordering code
4. The guide precision of piston rod is high and no additional lubricant is needed. MK 32x30 SD
5. Fixated block is attached to piston rod, which prevents it from rotating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
6. Various cylinders are available for your choice. MKD32 x 30 SD

7. The seal material with high temperature resistance is adopted to guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
the normal operation of cylinder at 150"C(Option). MKJ 32 x 30-30 S D
MK: Multi-mount cylinder

11111 1'' D
(Double acting no-rotating type)
MSK: Multi-mount cylinder
(Single acting-push no-rotating type)
MTK: Multi-mount cylinder
(Single acting-pull no-rotating type) Ma net
MKD: Multi-mount cylinder Blank: Without magnet
(Double rod no-rotating type) S: With magnet
MKJ: Multi-mount cylinder
(Adjustable stroke no- rotating type)
Adjustable stroke
Bore size Model Adjustable stroke
!6 10 16 20 25 32 ! 10: 10mm
MKJ 20: 20mm
30: 30mm
Stroke Others No this code
(j) When the thread is standard, the code is blank.
MK Series
++GHA~a-i,~~=4=-~
2-~K Thru.hole
=J=(C=o=un=te=rs=in-l-k)Dp 1~~~~
0
1~1,
~
4 No-rotating plate Aluminum alloy
5 Bushing Brass
6 Fixed rod Stainless steel
7 Rod packina NBR
Bodv Aluminum alloy
..
8
9
10
Bumper
Magnet holder
TPU
Aluminum alloy
:,
6
.
51
. ., .
51
.
33
'
., .
33
., . :
16.5 22
11 Magnet washer NBR 10 57 57 36 36 16.5 24
12 Magnet Sintered metal Neodymium~ron-boron) 16 56 66 30 40 20 32
13 Piston seal NBR 20 65 75 36 46 26 40
14 Wearrina Wear resistant material 25 73 83 40 50 32 50
15 Piston Aluminum allov 32 84 94 42 52 40 62
16 0 - ring NBR :, . I I• : : I
17 C-clip Spring steel 6 3 18 M3 x 0.5 7 8 5.5 2.5 8 9 11 19 10.9 6 5
18 Back cover Aluminum alloy 10 4 21 M4 X 0.7 10 11 7 2 8 12 13 20.5 11 .9 6 5.5
19 Bumper TPU 16 6 26 MS x 0.8 11 12.5 8 4 8 17 13 26.5 15.9 5 7.5 6.5
20 8 29 M6 x 1.0 12 14 10 5 8 20 16 32 19.8 6 9.5 8
25 10 33 M8 x 1.25 15.5 18 12 6 10 22 19 40 24.8 8 9.5 9
MD,MK 32 12 42 M10x 1.25 19.5 22 17 6 12 29 24 49 30.8 10 11 11.5
:, - : : : . .. . .
6 10 7 3.3 7 M3 x 0.5 5 17 M5 x 0.8 14 10 -
10 11 7 3.3 9 M3 x 0.5 5 18 M5 x 0.8 15.5 10 -
16 14 7 4.5 12 M4 x 0.7 5 25 MS x 0.8 14.5 10 3
20 16 9 5.5 16 MS x0.8 7.5 30 MS x 0.8 19 11 9
25 20 10 5.5 20 MS x0.8 8 38 M5 x 0.8 21.5 8.5 12
32 24 11 6.5 24 M6x 1.0 9 48 1/8" 23 12.5 13
AC
10 67 72 82 87 67 72 82 87 46 51 61 66 46 51 61 66
16 71 76 91 96 81 86 101 106 45 50 65 70 55 60 75 80
20 80 85 100 105 90 95 110 115 51 56 71 76 61 66 81 86
25 BB 93 108 113 98 103 118 123 55 60 75 80 65 70 85 90
32 99 104 119 124 109 114 129 134 57 62 77 82 67 72 87 92
Remark) The unmarked dimension is the same as MK standard type.

MK Series
2-<JJK Thru.hole
4-<JJJ(Countersink) Dp: JA E
H
EA 2-Sides
AE EB
AC+Stroke DB+Stroke
A+Stroke x2
2-<JJK Thru.hole
4-<JJJ(Countersink) Dp: JA E
FA
0 ~
AE DB+Adjustable Stroke I !~ ~ I
,__~D~A~_,___ _AC_+_S_
tr_ok_e_ __, DB+Stroke+Ad'ustabl Stroke
MD,MK
~~t]~~~ JC PB
PA
10 79 78 79 78 36 36 6 16.5 24 4 21 14.7
16 79.5 80.5 89.5 90.5 30 40 7.5 20 32 26 16 17
20 93 95 103 105 36 46 9 26 40 29 19 21
25 105 107 115 117 40 50 9 32 50 10 33 23 25
32 121 121 131 131 42 52 10 40 62 12 42 27 27
=·. : : I :-
6 M3 x 0.5 7 8 5.5 2.5 8 9 11 19 109 6 5 10
10 M4 x 0.7 10 11 7 2 8 12 13 20.5 11 .9 - 6 5.5 11
16 M5 x 0.8 11 12.5 8 4 8 17 13 26.5 15.9 5 7.5 6.5 14
20 M6 x 1.0 12 14 10 5 8 20 16 32 19.8 6 9.5 8 16
25 MB x 1.25 15.5 18 12 6 10 22 19 40 24.8 8 9.5 9 20
32 M10 x 1.25 19.5 22 17 6 12 29 24 49 30.8 10 11 11.5 24
:
6
.. 7 3.3 7
:
M5x0.8
.. .
14 16 -
10 7 3.3 9 M5 x 0.8 15.5 16 -
16 7 4.5 12 M5x0.8 14.5 17.5 3
20 9 5.5 16 M5 x 0.8 19 20 9
25 10 5.5 20 M5 x0.8 21.5 17.5 12
32 11 6.5 24 1/8" 23 22.5 13
Memo AlrTAC
Note
MD,MK
MU Series Mini Free Mount Cylinder
D Product series
Series
DS1-H DS1-HL
Double acting type: MU
6
8
Single acting-push: MSU 10
C)
C:
:g
l'O
Q)
0,
C:
ci5
Page 296 457
c Installation and application A

2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition of
MU
high temperature or corrosion.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance
of particles into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal work of cylinder and extend
the service life.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dusl
caps shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be
especially noticed.
6 4
13.4 18.4 23.4 28.5

8 5 10.1 15.1 20.1 25.2 30.2 35.2
acting Pull side 6.1 9.2 12.2 15.3 18.4 21.4
Single acting-Push side 78.5 8.7 16.5 24.4 32.2 40.1 47.9
10 6 Double Push side 78.5 7.9 15.7 23.6 31.4 39.3 47.1 55.0
acting 50.3 5.0 10.1 15.1 20.1 25.2 30.2 35.2
Mini free mount cylinder AlrTAC
MU Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 6 8 10
Acting type MU: Double acting MSU : Single acting-Push type
Operating IDouble acting 0.15- 0.7MPa(22-100psi) I 0.1- 0.7MPa(14- 100psi)
pressure ISingle acting 0.3- 0. 7MPa(44-100psi) I 0.2-0.7MPa(29- 100psi)
Temperature "C -20- 80
Speed range mm/s Double acting: 30-500 Single acting: 50-500
+1 .0
Stroke tolerance 0
Cushion type No
Port size M3 x 0.5
D Stroke
•=·. Double actinq
4 6 8 10 15 20 25 30
~ ...... . .
30
.. .
6
Single acting 4 6 8 8
Double acting 4 6 8 10 15 20 25 30 30
8
Sinqle actinq 4 6 8 10 10
D Symbol 10
Double acting 4 6 8 10 15 20 25 30 30
MU MU-S MSU MSU-S
-SD -SID -S] -eio 2. The dimensions of non-std stroke cylinder has the same dimensions as the next longer stroke std. stroke
· • D Product feature
2. Cylinder can be mounted from 4 directions, and convenient to install and use.
3. Multitudinous cylinder can be mounted side by side to save space.
4. The front end of the cylinder is designed with boss. Centering can be done
easily.
MU
5. The internal diameter of the body is treated with rolling followed by the Model
treatment of hard anodizing, forming an excellent abrasion resistance and MU: Mini free mount cylinder
durability. (double acting)
6. With magnet type is of the feature of position sensing. MSU: Mini free mount cylinder
(single acting-push) Ma net
7. There are magnetic switch slots around the cylinder body, which is
Bore size S: With magnet
!6 8 10
Stroke
D Mounting type
Fixing plate, Fixing plate

MU series cylinder
Bolt
l1mmmim1MU.rseries cylinder Fixing plate:

1111,,.1-M,niffli
Fixing plate
Bolt
·-
Mini free mount cylinder AlrTAC
MU Series
Model: MU\MU-S\MSU\MSU-S
5 6 7 8 9 10
AB
DA MA PA
H
2-Sides
" W----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
~ 4 67 8 9 10
::;; 0
e e
KA KB+Stroke
Thru. hole
mt
1 Rod nut Stainless steel
3 0 - ring NBR
5 Magnet holder Brass
6 Magnet washer NBR
7 Magnet Sintered metal (Neodymium-iron-boron)
8 Piston seal NBR
9 Piston Brass
10 0 - ring NBR
Model: MU-B\MU-S-B\MSU-B\MSU-S-B
13 Spring Spring steel
14 Silencer Agglomerated by brass grain
AB
DA MU
H
2- Sides
FA
EA
$
EB
.. M3 x 0.5 5.5 6.5 2.4 3.5

11.5 M4 x 0.7 7 8.5 3 4.5
13.5 MS x 0.8 9 10.5 4 5
Memo AlrTAC
Note
MU
MPG Series Plate Cylinder
D Product series
Series
Basic LB FA SDB DS1-H DS1-HL
Standard type: MPG
en
C:
~ 8
"'a, 10
~ 12
0
0 16
Hinge mounting type: MPGH
Page 300 457

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ MPG

2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition of high
temperature or corrosion.
3. Necessary protection measure shall be taken in the environment with higher humidity, much dust or water drops, oil
dust and welding dregs.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of
particles into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal work of cylinder and extend the
service life.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust caps
shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be especially
noticed.
acting 8.5 12.7

Double Push side 50.3 5.0 15.1 20.1 25.2 30.2 35.2
4
acting Pull side 37.7 3.8 7.5 11 .3 15.1 18.9 22.6 26.4
MPG Double Push side 78.5 7.9 15.7 23.6 31.4 39.3 47.1 55.0
10 4
MPGH acting Pull side 65.9 6.6 13.2 19.8 26.4 33.0 39.5 46.1
Double Push side 113.0 11.3 22.6 33.9 45.2 56.5 67.8 79.1
12 6
acting Pull side 84.7 8.5 17.0 25.4 33.9 42.4 50.8 59.3
Double Push side 201.0 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7
16 6
acting Pull side 172.7 17.3 34.5 51.8 69.1 86.4 103.6 120.9
·-
Plate Cylinder AlrTAC
MPG Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 6 8 10 12 16
Mounting type Basic FA LB SDB
Speed range mm/s 30- 500
+ 1.0
Stroke tolerance n
Cushion type Bumper
Port size M3 x 0.5 I M5 x 0.8
D Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max. std stroke
6 5 10 15 20 25 25
8 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 40
10 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 40
12 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 40
16 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 40
D Symbol
MPG MPG-S
-SD -SID
D Product feature
1. It is compact, small size and light weight. It is easy to install and dismantle.
2. The guide precision of piston rod is high and no additional lubricant is
needed. Model Mounting type
MPG
3. Advanced rubber coating process is applied to the back cover. MPGH: Hinge mounting type cylinder
double actin
Blank ae
4. Mounting accessories with various specifications are optional. MPG LB ~
5. With magnet type is of the feature of position sensing.
Bore size FA ~
6. There are magnetic switch slots around the cylinder body, which is !68101216
convenient to install inducting switch. Blank ~ ~
Stroke MPGH
7. Cylinders of various specifications are optional. !Refer to stroke table for details I SDB ~Et
Magnet Rod type
Blank: Without magnet Blank: Male thread
S: With magnet N: No thread

MPG(ct>8- ct>16}
Rod nut Stainless steel

6 Bumper TPU
7 Piston seal NBR
Brass(Others)
8 Piston Aluminum alloy( ct> 16)
9 clip Spring steel
MPG(ct>8- ct>16}·S Aluminum alloy &
10 Back cover Rubber
8
ct> 6: Stainless steel
11 Magnet holder ct>8- ct> 12: Brass
ct> 16: Aluminum alloy
9 12 Magnet washer NBR
Sintered metal
10 13 Magnet (Neodymium-iron-
boron
MPG Series
D Installation and application Dimensions
Model: MPG/MPG-5
1. Select the plate width and tightening torque of the front cover thread
A+Stroke
according to the table below:
Bore s12e Front cover thread Maximum allowable torque(N m) Maximum w1dth(A)
6 M10x 1.0 12.5 4
8 M12x 1.0 21.0 4
10 M12x 1.0 21.0 4
12 M14x 1.0 34.0 5
16 M14x 1.0 34.0 5
2. The extra torque produced by the load at the piston rod end cannot exceed
Piston rod without thread
the allowable value specified in the table below. Otherwise may cause
damage to the cylinder or reduce the service life.
20 23 14.5
L~ 10 39.5 44.5 20 19.5 24.5 15 19 4 12
12 43.5 48.5 24 19.5 24.5 17 21.5 8.5 14
16 43.5 48.5 24 19.5 24.5 20 24.5 10 14
Bore size Piston rod thread Maximum allowable torque(N.m) :, - . . .. ·:-

·-
6 M3 x 0.5 0.3 6 M3 x 0.5 7 5.5 2.4 13 3 M10 x 1.0 8 M3 x 0.5 5.5 6.5 2
8 M4 x 0.7 0.8 8 M4 x 0.7 10 7 2.2 17 3 M12x 1.0 8 M3 x 0.5 6 7 2
10 M4 x 0.7 0.8 10 M4 x 0.7 10 7 2.2 17 3 M12x 1.0 8 M3 x 0.5 6 7 2.5
12 MS x 0.8 12 8 3 19 4 M14x 1.0 10 MS x0.8 6.5 7.5 2.5
12 MS x 0.8 1.6
16 MS x 0.8 12 8 3 19 4 M14x 1.0 10 MS x0.8 6.5 7.5 3
16 MS x 0.8 1.6
3. Allowable Rod End Lateral Load

MPG
Model: MPGH\MPGH-5
A+Stroke
AC+Stroke
CJ>K(With bushing)
'' '' '' ' ' '' '' ''
1il 0.8 IJ>16+······;·······;·······'······ '······;·······;······>·····
!:::;™
~ 0o ~ 1~ 1~ 20 2s 3'0 ;s 4:\s
[fl
DA
M
AD+Stroke KB
~
~ Stroke (mm)
Piston rod without thread
:, - : . .. •: .
6 M3 x 0.5 7 5.5 2.4 3 +i.os 4 M10 x1 .0 8 M3 x 0.5 5.5 11.5 2
8 M4 x 0.7 10 7 2.2 4 +ios 5 M12x1 .0 8 M3 x 0.5 6 15 2
10 M4 x 0.7 10 7 2.2 5 +ioos 6.5 M1 2x1.0 8 M3 x 0.5 6 18 2.5
12 MS x 0.8 12 8 3 6 +ioos 10 M14x 1.0 10 MS x 0.8 6.5 22 2.5
16 MS x 0.8 12 8 3 6 +i.oes 10 M14 x 1.0 10 MS x 0.8 6.5 22 3
IUeS•
MPG Series --Accessories
G)
Accessory Accesso t pe
LB: LB type
Model Mounting FA: FA t e
accessory YP
SDB: SDB type (2)
Bore size 2-CllD
Knuckle FC: Rubber bumper (flat head)
RC : Rubber bumper (ball head)
<D Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
® SOB is attached with relevant PIN.
-1--~:- - 1 . I
Accessory selection :, . . : I
MPG MPGH 6 20 28 11 3.4 6.5 10.5 1.6 19 21.5

Accessories\Cylinder model 8 24 33 13 4.5 7 12 1.6 22 23.5
Without magnet With magnet Without magnet With magnet
Mounting
LB
FA
•• X
X
•• X
X
10
12
24
30
33
43
13
18
4.5
5.5
7
10
12
16.5
1.6
2.3
22
29
25
31
accessory
SDB X
••
X
•• •••
16 30 43 18 5.5 10 16.5 2.3 29 32.5
•••
FC
Knuckle
RC
I G)
•• •• ••
••• •
y
Sensor switch DS1-H
(2) DS1-HL
X
X
X
X
•• (.)
<D Please refer to P453-456 for I knuckle and Y knuckle detail,

:, . . =--•
6 24 32
16 3.4 1.6 18.5
8 28 37 18 4.5 1.6 19.5
/':,,--SPCC; D--POM; <>--Cast iron 0 10 28 37 18 4.5 1.6 21
MPG 12 36 49 22 5.5 2.3 24
16 36 49 22 5.5 2.3 25.5
Accessories Mounting accessories
Bore size LB FA SDB ,:
6 F-MPG6LB F-MPG6FA F-MPG6SDB B
8 F-MPG8SDB
10 F-MPG10LB F-MPG10FA
F-MPG10SDB
12 F-MPG12SDB
16 F-MPG16LB F-MPG16FA
F-MPG16SDB
Accessories Knuckle
Bore size FC Rubber bumper flat head RC Rubber bumper ball head
6 F-MPG6FC F-MPG6RC
8
F-MPG10FC F-MPG10RC
10
12 • I 1.2-(])D
F-MPG16FC F-MPG16RC
16 F
Accessories Knuckle Sensor switch
Bore size I: I Knuckle Y: Y Knuckle DS1 - HD DS1 - HLD
6 F-M3x050I F-M3x OSOY
8
F-M4 x0701 F-M4 x 070Y DS1 - HO DS1 - HLO
10
12
F-MS x OBOI F-MSx 080Y
16
. . ._,i i SR -
E
~
e
~ :, . ' ' : .. I .
m~
RC C
:, .
:--· . 6
8
18.5
19
55°
55°
21.5
23
110 °
110 °
16
18
3.4
4.5
18
21
26
30
1.6
1.6
20
23
4
5
12
13
3
4
m
w FC
6
8
10
12
16
6
8
8
10
10
6
8
8
10
10
11
13
13
15
15
8
10
10
12
12
5
6
6
7
7
M3 x0.5
M4 x 0.7
M4 x 0.7
MS x 0.8
MS x 0.8
8
10
10
12
12
10
12
16
20.5
25
28
65°
55°
55°
24.1
29
32
110 °
110 °
110 °
20
25
25
4.5
5.5
5.5
24
26
29
33
39
42
1.6
2.9
2.9
25.5
32
32
6.5
10
10
* Note: AA and BB are for reference only. Specific value depends on the actual situation.
13.5
15
15
5
6
6
MPE Series Threaded Cylinder
D Product series
Mounting type
Series
Basic
Embedded mounting type: MPEF
C,
C:
6
t5 8
"'a, 10
C>
C: 12
Standard type, MPE u5
16
Page 304 304

MPE

2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition of
high temperature or corrosion.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance
of particles into the cylinder.
8. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal work of cylinder and extend
the service life.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long lime, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust
caps shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports. The front and back cover can not be dismantled, which shall be
especially noticed.
Single Push side 50.3

8 4
acting Pull side 37.7
MPE Single Push side 78.5
10 5
MPEF acting Pull side 58.9
Single Push side 113.0
12 6
acting Pull side 84.7
Single Push side 201 .0
16 6
acting Pull side 172.7 4.8
Threaded cylinder AlrTAC
MPE Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 6 8 10 12 16
Acting type Single acting
Operating pressure 0.2-0.7MPa(28-100psi) I 0.15- 0.7MPa(22- 100psi)
Proof pressure 1.05MPa(1 50psi)
Mounting type Embedded type, End inlet type
+1 .0
Stroke tolerance 0
Cushion type No
Port size MS x 0.8
Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max. std stroke
6 5 10 15 15
8 5 10 15 15
10 5 10 15 15
12 5 10 15 15
16 5 10 15 15
D Symbol Nole : Please contact the company for other special strokes.
~
MPE
• ••• ...
MPE 16x 15 N
D Product feature ......................................................
MPEF16x 15 N
1. It is compact, small and light.
2. Multi cylinders can be integrated to save room.
MPE: Standard type(single acting-push) Blank Male thread
3. Mounting accessories are not necessary. MPEF: Embedded type (single acting-push) N No thread
4. Cylinders of various specifications are optional.
MPE Bore size Stroke
!68101216 ! IRefer to stroke table for details I
1 2 3 4 6 7 8
l~[t
1 Rod nut Stainless steel

3 Front cover Brass
1 2 34567 89
4 Body Brass (nickel-plated)
5 Body nut Carbon steel
6 Spring Spring steel
7 Piston Stainless steel
8 Piston seal NBR
9 0-ring NBR
Threaded cylinder AlrTAC
MPE Series
D Mounting and use Dimensions
1. Select applicable cylinder model and mounting method according to actual
situation:
With mounting bracket Embedded mounting

(used for MPE type) (used for MPEF type)
2. MPE series are single acting cylinders. No load is allowed at the piston rod
when it is on the retraction state.
3. The force of the spring of the cylinder is for retraction of the piston rod only.
The piston rod may not retract to the bottom end if there's any load.
14
4. Make sure the rod end lateral load is allowable. Otherwise may cause
:, -
6 14 4 M10x 1.0 9 8.5 6
damage to the cylinder or reduce the service life. 17 4 M12x 1.0 11 10
8 6
0.7 10 19 4 M16x 1.5 14 12 6
C!>16 12 24 M18x 1.5 16 15
0.6 ~ - =·························+-··································· ·········1
5 6
16 27 5 M22 x1 .5 20 19 7
....=:
0.5 ..................~ : : : : ....::::
....::::
....=····=····-· -..J
f C!>12 .
GA
:;:: 0.4 ~
............................... ······"·············································
FA
!
~~
10=======::::::i::.:::::::.:::...:..:::::::...:.::.::::::...:=J
0.3 r(j)~,
:;; C!>8
]! 0.2 r-~===:t:::.:::.::..::.::::.:.::.::.:.:::.::.::.:.::::::::::::j
~ C!>6
~ 0.1 · ··=···=···~···~··=···=···=..~~--;---·=·
r··=···=··= ··=
· ··=···~··~
· ··~···~···~···~··~···=···=···:::::l
···
~
<i: 0.0 ~ - - - - - - - ~ - - - - - - - - - - <
5 10 15 No thread
Stroke (mm)
27 7
46 12 28 4 10
46.5 12 28.5 5 10
47 12 29 6 10
50 14 29 6 12
:, -
6 14 4 3.5 M10x 1.0 9 8.5 0.8
8 17 4 3.5 M12x 1.0 11 10 0.8
10 19 4 3.3 M16x 1.5 14 12 1
12 24 5 3 M18 x 1.5 16 15 1.3
16 27 5 4 M22 x 1.5 20 19 1.7
A
Bls D
C
f- - - - - - - -
1 "'
:i:::
u.
e
Note: Size E and F must be concentric.

Memo AlrTAC
Note
MPE
Twin-rod cylinder--TN, TR Series
Product series
Series name
CS1-J DS1-J
TN Series
C)
10
C:
:g 16
"'
Q)
20
:0
::,
25
0
Cl 32
TR Series CS1-G DS1-G
C)
C: 6
u 10
"'
Q)
16
:0
::,
0 20
Cl
25
32
Page 308 457

2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the condition TN,TR
of high temperature or corrosion;
entrance of particles into the cylinder;
6. As both the front cover and piston are short, too large stroke can not be selected.
8. The cylinder shall avoid redial load in operation to maintain the normal and extend service life.
9. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust
cap shall be inserted into the inlet and outlet ports. As the precision of the manufacture and guide is high, Please
do not dismantle the fixed block or cylinder cover .
acting Pull side 31.4 3.1 9.4 12.6 15.7 18.8 22.0
Double Push side 157.1 15.7 47.1 62.8 78.6 94.3 110.0
10 6 acting Pull side 100.5 10.1 20.1 30.2 40.2 50.3 60.3 70.4
Double Push side 402.1 40.2 80.4 120.6 160.8 201 .1 241.3 281.5
16 8 acting Pull side 301 .6 30.2 60.3 90.5 120.6 150.8 181 .0 211.1
Double Push side 628.3 62.8 125.7 188.5 251.3 314.2 377.0 439.8
20 10 acting Pull side 471.2 47.1 94.2 141.4 188.5 235.6 282.7 329.8
Double Push side 981.7 98.2 196.4 294.5 392.7 490.9 589.0 687.2
25 12 acting Pull side 755.6 75.6 151 .1 226.7 302.2 377.8 453.4 528.9
Double Push side 1608.5 160.9 321.7 482.6 643.4 804.3 965.1 1126.0
32 16 acting Pull side 1206.4 120.6 241.3 361.9 482.6 603.2 723.8 844.5
Twin-rod cylinder AlrTAC
TN Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 10 16 20 25 32
ActinA type Double actina
Operatinq pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(14-145osi)
• Proof pressure
Temperature "C
SnAAd ranae mm/s
1.5MPa(215psi)
-20-70
30-500
Adiustable stroke mm -10-0
Stroke tolerance 0-100+1·0 >100 +1·5
Cushion type Bumcer
Non-rotating tolerance <D ± 0.40 I ±0.3°
Port size (2) M5 x 0.8 I 1/8"
G) Retract position.
® PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Symbol
Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max. stroke
10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 100
16 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
Product feature 20 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
1. Enterprises standard is implemented. 25 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
2. Embeded installation and fixation mode saves the installation space. 32 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
3. It is good resistance to bending and twisting moments. Note) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
4. Mounting holes on three sides facilitates multi-position mounting. 2. The dimensions of non-std stroke cylinder has the same dimensions as the next longer stroke std. stroke
5. Bumper in front of the barrel can adjust the stroke of cylinder and relieve cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of 25 std. stroke cylinder.
impact.
6. Standard configuration of this series has magnet and the type without
magnet is not available.
·D How to mount
TN,TR
110 16 20 25 32 !
Magnet <D
Stroke IS: With magnet I
G) TN Series are all with magnet.

® When the thread is standard, the code is blank.
p· d <ll32 S45C 12 Aluminum allo

1ston ro B Other SUS304 13 TPU
2 Screw Carbon steel SUS303
3 Bumper POM 14 Aluminum allo
4 Ad'ustable nut Carbon steel 15 NBR
5 Piston rod A S45C 16 Wear resistant material
6 late SUS303
7 Aluminum allo
8 NBR
9 19 TPU
10 Front cover Aluminum allo 20 Aluminum allo
11 0 - rin NBR 21 Sintered metal Nead mium-iron-boron
TN Series
D Max. weight of allowable side-load Dimensions
o I
w
I
B= --4~---+-------------~
f //////// //////-3-
~
~*'~~~fl 2-M5 x a.a
Port size
58+Stroke
12 46+Stroke
7 15 10±0.2+Stroke Thru.hole: 2-<1>3.5
N
ri-=i>J=:::;z:j.._2_-_Si~des: <1>6 Dp: 6.5
N -r-...,.._ ,-1 N
0 0
ti
"'"''- ' -- -i.f'-1 ....ti
"'
Thru.hole: 2-<1>3.5
2-M3 x 0.5
2-Sides: <1>6 Dp: 3.5
•I :t •I II
LB 30 30 35 40 50 55 60 65 70
- m m·---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
_.. o PA PB
20 40 60 80 100
~~~*-+1 \2-M5x0.8
Port size
Stroke (mm)
f'o"'-.-~~=~---, 2-J
Mountin hole
"!
0
tl
0
-'
TN,TR
:
16
.. Mounting hole
I•
2-M4 x 0.7
7 24 6 2-Sides: <ll7.5 Dp: 7.5 Thnu.hole : <ll4.5 20

20 10 28 8 2-Sides:<ll7.5 Dp: 7.5Thnu.hole: <ll4.5 20
25 9 34 10 2-Sides: <ll7.5 Dp: 7.5 Thnu.hole : <ll4.5 30
ls(!~~1 1/8"- 28
Port size
108+Stroke
Thru.hole :2-(1)5.5
r - i ---::iiii.:=t=::t+'.:.....=..
2-Sides: <1>9 Dp: 13.5
N
0
tl
"'
"'
Thru.hole: 2- <1>5.5
Dp: 10 2-Sides: ¢l9Dp:5.5
I I I •I
LB 45 50 55 60 102.5 115 127.5
PA 35
TR Series
Specification
---- Bore s1ze(mm)

Actinq type
Fluid
6 10 16 20
Double actinq
25
Air(to be filtered bv 40 µ m filter element)

32
Operatina pressure 0.1-1.0MPa(14-145DSi)

Speed ranae mm/s 30-500
Adiustable stroke mm -5-0
Stroke tolerance 0-100+1° >100 +1s
Cushion type Bumper
Non-rotatinq tolerance G) ±0.2° I ± 0.15° I ±0.1 °
Port size (2) M5x0.8 I 1/8"
Symbol ® PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max stroke
6 10 20 25 30 40 50 50
D Product feature 10 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 100
1. JIS standard is implemented. 16 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
2. The non-rotating precision is high and deflection of the end of piston rod is 20 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
25 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
low, which is suitable for precise guide.
32 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
3. It adopts lengthening type sliding supporting guide. No additional lubricant
Nole) 1. Please contact the company for other special strokes.
is needed and it has good performance of guide.
4. Mounting holes on three sides facilitates multi-position mounting. cylinder. e.g. 23mm stroke cylinder has the same dimensions of 25 std. stroke cylinder.
5. It is good resistance to bending and twisting moments.
6. Except for the axial, each side of the cylinder has installation orifices to
provide several installation and fixation ways for the customers. D Ordering code
7. There are two groups of air intake and outlet at two sides of the cylinder for
the actual selection.
8. Bumper in front of the barrel can adjust the stroke of cylinder and relieve
impact.
TN,TR
9. Standard configuration of this series has magnet and the type without
magnet is not available.
I6 1o 16 20 25 32 I
Magnet G)
D How to mount Stroke IS: With magnet!
G) TR Series are all with magnet.


8 9 10 11
1
• Screw Carbon steel <1>6,1 0
SUS304
10 Piston
2 Fixing plate Aluminum allo Other
Aluminum allo
3 Bumper POM 11 Wearrin N Ion 6
4 Screw Free cutting steel 12 Back cover Aluminum alloy
5 Nut Carbon steel 13 Bumper TPU
Piston Cll25,32 Carbon steel 14 Piston seal NBR
6
rod Other SUS304 Magnet <1>6,10 SUS304
15
7 C cli S rin steel holder Other Aluminum allo
8 Front cover Aluminum allo 16 Screw Carbon steel
Cll32 Plastic 17 Body Aluminum alloy
9 Magnet
Other Sintered metal(Neodymium-iron-boron 18 Back cover 0-ring NBR
19 Wiper seal NBR
TR Series
D Max. weight of allowable side-load D Dimensions
O, 0 ,
JB JC
Mounting type
!W Level mounting 2.5

.oc~
QU 2.0
"'~ (!)32
f'cl I 2-K
''
' (!)25°'
r>. 1 I
4-M5 0 : 4.5
.
, CJl20
~
2-Sides
~16~
<D
'"
en ~
-
"'
O 20 40 60 80 100 150 200
Ad'ustable Stroke
: :
··"
A+Stroke
Stroke (mm)
AC+Stroke
Cl>6 ([)10- 16
JB JC
D Safe deflection
I~:::.
:; 0.10
t-,
The average value of deflection
I ~j -B=1f 2-J
cg
(I)
0.06
of rod end of the whole series
~ 0.02 basically stays in the line showed
o 20 60 100 150 200 in the chart on the right.
Stroke (mm)
10 46 44 17 15 6 9 20 60
16 58 56 20 18 8 9 25 55
:, -
......
One-side: CJl6.5 Op: 3.5 Thru.hole : CJl3.5 13 M3x0.5 Op: 4.5 10
10 One-side:CJl6.5 Op: 3.5Thru.hole :CJl3.5 20 M4x0.7Dp: 7 M3x0.5 D : 5 20
TN,TR
16 One-side: CJl8.0 Op: 4.5 Thru.hole : CJl4.5 30 M5x0.8 Op: 8 M4x0.7 D : 5 30
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
!llllall O JB JC
<D
z -- <t9- -~ -
!!en!
; ;1
'-·_j
Ad'ustable Stroke -5~0
A+Stroke
AC+Stroke
JC
2-J
<D
z - -@)- ~ -- +-
@
Thru .hole
Memo AlrTAC
Note
TN,TR
icltli
Tri-rod cylinder--TCL, TCM Series
D Product series
Series name
DS1-H DS1-HL
TCM6 , TCM10
C)
C:
:g
6
~"'
.c 10
::,
0
Cl
TCM(TCL)12-TCM(TCL)63 CS1-G DS1-G
12
16
C)
C: 20
u 25
"'
Q)
:c 32
::,
0
Cl
40
50
63
TCM(TCL)80, TCM(TCL)100
C)
C:
:g
80
"'
Q)
:c 100
::,
0
Cl
TC
Page 314 457

4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be cleared away before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of particles into the cylinder.
8. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust cap shall be inserted into the
inlet and outlet ports. As the precision of the manufacture and guide is high, never dismantle the fixed block or cylinder cover without permission.
Tri-rod cylinder AlrTAC
TCL,TCM Series
: ..
Specification
Actino tvPe
. I
Double actino
. I •I I . :1-·11

Operatino pressure 0.15-0.7MPa(23-100psi)I 0.1- 1 OMPa(14-1 45psi)
Proof pressure 1.05MPa(152psi) I 1.5MPa(215psi)
Speed range mm/s 50-500 I 30-500 I 50-400
Stroke tolerance 0-100 +~.u >100 +~.,
Cushion tvoe Bumper
Non-rotating I Linear bearino I ± 0.08° I ± 0.07° I ± 0.06° I ± 0.05° I ± 0.04°
tolerance G) I Bronze bearinq ± 1.0° I ± o.10° I ± 0.09° I ± 0.08° I ± 0.06° I ± o.os0
Port size (2) M3 x 0.5 I MS x 0.8 I 1/8' I 1/4" I 3/8'
D Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max stroke
6 5 10 15 20 20
10 5 10 15 20 25 30 30
12 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 150
16 10 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 200
20, 25 20 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 250
32, 40, 50, 63, 80, 100 25 30 40 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 250
Note) If non-standard stroke is ordered, backing plate will be added in the cylinder of standard stroke if the gap of the
standard stroke and non-standard stroke is 1mm ( Cl> 12-Cl>32) or 5mm ( Cl>40-Cl>63). For example, the
non-standard stroke cylinder with a stroke of 28mm is transformed fromthe standard cylinder whose standard
stroke is 30mm through adding a pad and their shape and dimension are the same.
D Symbol
D Product feature
TC 1. JIS standard is implemented.
2. Two guides of special bearing steel and linear bearing or bronze bearing guide
are used to prevent rotating. They can bear high torque and radial load. Bearing type
* Note: Steel ball linear bearing: It is suitable for elevation action of cylinder or L: Linear bearing Ma net
the situation requiring high precision and high bearing ability, especially for M: Bronze bearing 6-100 S: With magnet
the situation requiring low fraction action process.
Bronze sliding bearing: it is suitable for the action that has radial load Bore size Stroke
resistance. Compared with normal cylinder of same use, the horizontal 1e 1o 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 I IRefer to stroke table for details I
impact resistance is doubled and it has stronger torsion rigidity. G) When the thread is standard, the code is blank. Add) TC Series are all with magnet.
3. Drive unit and guide unit are in the same barrel that no additional accessories
are needed with minimal space required. The air intake is optional and it is
convenient to install. o, o 11 . . 0 o 11
4. The bottom, back side and fixing plate of main body respectively has two exact
orientation orifices (See Cl> PA orifice and the orifice in XX point), which can m CJ>12-Cll100
provide orientation installation with high precision for the special situation. Cll6\Cll10 ~
5. Options of switch mounting with provision 4 mounting slots.
6. Special design of main bcdy provides multi-mount;
Jif·---·--ifg JM~G
l--1; ~
~
Fixation ofT slot at bottom(C1>12- Cll 100)
0 D
Fixation of screw at back side( <D 6- Cll 100)
Cll6\Cll10 Cll12- Cll100
6 20.5 X
10 23 X
o i
: Q ! 12 41 8
!
i, 1I I 16 46 10
i I i
o ; 20 54 12
; l(j) 1 .N ! 25 64 14
m
32 78 18
CllD 40 86 18
50 110 22
Orifice for leader
63 124 22
80 156 30 25
100 188 32 30
Ell ~
TCL,TCM Series
D Safe load and torque

Bore Stroke(mm)
size
Type 10 15 40 70 75 100 125 150 175
5 20 25 30 50 60 80 90 200 225 250
...... . '
Fi Fi,
£re ES
12
TCM 44 - 33 29 26 41 36 30 28 26 25 24 22 19 17
TCL 37 - 27 25 22 35 30 27 24 23 21 19 18 15 12
16
TCM 67 51 42 37 63 58 49 41 37 35 33 32 27 24 22 20
TCL 54 40 37 32 54 47 42 38 35 32 30 28 23 20 17 15
20
TCM 78 61 57 123 112 99 91 67 84 79 75 66 59 54 49 45 42
TCL - 58 52 48 101 90 83 74 70 69 63 58 62 54 48 43 39 35
25
TCM 93 89 76 142 131 119 107 101 97 90 85 68 79 71 65 61 55
TCL - 82 79 68 132 118 109 99 93 88 81 77 80 70 62 55 50 45
32
TCM - 203 190 179 164 221 197 182 172 163 157 142 127 116 106 98 91
TCL - 191 182 166 157 207 178 164 156 150 144 203 186 171 158 146 137
40
TCM 203 190 179 164 221 197 182 172 163 159 142 127 116 106 97 91
TCL 190 182 166 157 210 179 163 156 150 144 203 185 171 158 146 137
50
TCM 296 283 268 245 303 288 273 266 253 241 216 195 179 164 155 142
TCL 208 196 185 173 259 232 223 212 207 199 264 242 224 207 195 181
TCM 296 283 268 245 303 288 273 266 253 241 216 195 179 164 153 142
63
TCL
''
- 206 196 180 171 259 232 221 212 205 196 262 240 221
.
205 191
. .
178
(~~-$f)
12
TCM 0.90 0.79 0.71 0.65 0.77 0.72 0.65 0.53 0.50 0.47 0.41 0.36 0.31 0.27
TCL 0.61 0.45 0.40 0.35 0.58 0.50 0.44 0.39 0.37 0.35 0.32 0.29 0.24 0.20
16
TCM 1.21 1.04 0.94 0.88 1.23 1.11 0.99 0.72 0.69 0.65 0.61 0.58 0.50 0.44 0.40 0.36
TCL 0.99 - 0.74 0.66 0.59 0.99 0.86 0.77 0.69 0.65 0.61 0.57 0.52 0.43 0.37 0.32 0.28
20
TCM - 1.57 1.42 1.31 2.39 2.15 1.97 1.90 1.88 1.86 1.72 1.63 1.44 1.28 1.16 1.06 1.01 0.90
TCL - 1.26 1.14 1.03 2.17 1.94 1.79 1.59 1.52 1.46 1.33 1.25 1.34 1.17 1.03 0.93 0.88 0.76
25
TCM 2.40 2.22 2.01 3.66 3.35 3.17 3.06 2.96 2.91 2.77 2.57 2.26 2.02 1.83 1.67 1.57 1.42
TCL 2.11 1.96 1.75 3.37 3.02 2.71 2.42 2.38 2.33 2.19 1.97 2.05 1.78 1.58 1.41 1.22 1.16 TC
32
TCM 6.35 6.00 5.73 5.13 5.98 5.74 5.69 5.62 5.11 4.97 4.42 3.98 3.61 3.31 2.97 2.84
TCL 5.95 5.73 5.44 4.89 5.43 5.15 5.11 5.02 4.70 4.51 6.34 5.79 5.33 4.93 4.33 4.29
40
TCM 7.00 6.60 6.11 5.66 6.66 6.31 6.27 6.23 5.86 5.48 4.78 4.38 3.98 3.65 3.34 3.13
TCL - 6.55 6.21 5.77 5.39 6.17 5.67 5.62 5.58 5.33 4.96 6.98 6.38 5.87 5.43 5.00 4.72
50
TCM - 13.00 12.60 11 .00 10.80 13.70 12.70 12.00 11.80 11.10 10.80 9.50 8.60 7.86 7.24 6.80 6.24
TCL - 9.17 8.75 8.30 7.62 10.30 9.94 9.83 9.77 8.82 8.74 11 .60 10.70 9.83 9.12 8.95 7.95
63
TCM - 14.70 13.60 12.90 12.10 19.40 16.20 13.50 12.70 12.10 11.90 10.70 9.69 8.86 8.16 7.52 7.04
TCL 10.20 9.74 9.20 8.48 17.50 14.00 11 .00 10.60 10.20 9.74 13.00 11.90 11.00 10.20 9.63 8.84
TCM 21.9 20.8 19.7 18.6 15.8 24 22.9 21.7 21 20.5 18.6 17 15.6 14.5 13.5 12.6
80
TCL 15.1 14.3 13.6 12.9 12.2 23.8 22.7 21.6 21 20.6 18.9 17.3 16 14.8 13.5 12.9
100
TCM 38.8 36.8 35 33.5 28.5 39.4 37.5 35.6 34.5 33.8 30.9 28.4 26.2 24.4 22.5 21.4
TCL - 27.1 25.7 24.4 30.6 26 39.8 37.9 36 35.2 34.6 31 .8 29.3 27.2 25.3 23.5 22.1
TCL,TCM Series
D Inner structure
10
late 11 Ma net washer
12 Ma net
13 Piston seal
14 Piston
15 Ma net holder
16 Piston rod
17 Bum er
Bore sizeCl>20-Cl>63mm Bore size Cl> 12-C1>63mm

Stroke,;;50mm Stroke,;;50mm '"'
1 Fixing plate
• 0-ring
13
2 Leader 14 Back cover
3 Body 15 Piston rod
4 C clip 16 Piston
Bore sizeCl>20- Cl>63mm Bore size Cl> 12-Cl>63mm 5 Front cover 17 Magnet holder
50 < Stroke,;; 100mm 50 < Stroke,;; 100mm 6 Bumper 18 Magnet washer
7 Piston rod 0-ring 19 Magnet
n n p 8 Screw 20 Screw
~
((@ rz
----~-----~-----
z:r-'
--- wt~ 7 f
~ '2,~,,~ /'~
~-:::--f
wm
t~i~;;,-~
,;Z~~
---Es___,
----f 9
10
11
0-ring
Bearing
Cclip
21 Screw
22 Bearing
23 Spacer
Bore sizeCl>20- Cl>63mm Bore size Cl> 12-Cl>63mm 12 Piston seal
Stroke > 100mm Stroke> 100mm
'"' • Piston seal

TC 1 Fixing plate 12
2 Leader 13 0-ring
3 Body 14 Back cover
Stroke S;25-60mm Stroke S;25-250mm 4 C clip 15 Piston rod
t::~::i
n 2M
Stroke S; 70-150mm
5
6
7
8
Front cover
Bumper
16
17
Piston rod 0 - ring 18
Screw 19
Piston
Magnet holder
Magnet washer
Magnet
22 9 0-ring 20 Screw
10 Bearing 21 Screw
t;~--:Zii-E--1
/),.2
Stroke S; 175-250mm
;;
11 C clip 22 Spacer
Dimensions
2- K(Thru.hole)
a:, _,
< 0
AD
MB
AB AC+Stroke
A+Stroke
14.5 9 5 20.5 M2.5X0.45 M3X0.5 5 20.5 6 9

32 18 10 6 23 M3X0.5 M4X0.7 5 23 8 11
• I
9.5 5.5
8
TCL,TCM Series
Dimensions
TCL/TCM12-TCL/TCM63
Cl>20-ct>63 Cl> 12\Cl>16
KA
K'8°1 t
Partial view ofT slot
~~~-i <l>K+8-02 D : KA
4-<l>M Countersink Dp: MA 4-L Thru .hole
Partial XX
.--+---+--v 4-<l>NThru.hole
DA
A+Stroke
17
TC
20 53 80 104 122 0 27 51 69 0 27 51 69 24 44 120 200 29 39 77 117
25 53.5 82 104.5 122 0 28.5 51 68.5 0 28.5 51 68.5 24 44 120 200 29 39 77 117
Stroke .,;50 .,; 50 51 - 100 101 - 200 > 200 .,;50 51 - 100 101 -200 > 200 .,;50 51 - 100 101 - 200 >200 .,;40 41 - 100 101 - 200 >200 .,;40 41 - 100 101- 200 > 200
32 65 78 102 118 140 5.5 42.5 58.5 80. 5 18.5 42.5 58.5 80.5 24 48 124 200 33 45 83 121
40 66 78 102 118 140 0 36 52 74 12 36 52 74 24 48 124 200 34 46 84 122
50 76 89 118 134 161 4 46 62 89 17 46 62 89 24 48 124 200 36 48 86 124
63
:,
12
.
77
.:
13
89
29
118
.
8
. 134
:
58
161
:••
56
0
26
41
22
•
6
57 84
•
8
12
41
41
3.5
57
3
84
3
28
6
52
23
:
128
M4•0.7
200 38
10
50
50
:
88
18
124
•
48
16 13 33 8 64 62 30 25 8 10 46 3.5 3 3 6 24 M5x0 .8 12 56 22 54
20 16 37 10 83 81 36 30 10 12 54 3.5 3 3 6 28 M5x0 .8 13 72 24 70
25 16 37.5 10 93 91 42 38 12 16 64 4.5 3 4 6 34 M6x1 .0 15 82 30 78
32 22 37.5 12 112 110 48 44 16 20 78 4.5 3 4 6 42 M8x1 .25 20 98 34 96
40 22 44 12 120 118 54 44 16 20 86 4.5 3 4 6 50 M8x1 .25 20 106 40 104
50 28 44 16 148 146 64 60 20 20 110 6 4 5 8 66 M10•1.5 22 130 46 130
63
:11.
12
28
14
49
8
16
4.5
162
5
:
158 78
4.5
.
70
M5x0.8
20
..
8
20
18
.
11
..
124
11
6
13
4
. . .
7.5
5 8
M5x0 .8
80
..
10
M1 0•1.5
37 7.5
22
4. 5
142
4
58
2
130
6.5
16 16 8 4.5 5 4.5 M5x0.8 10 19 11 11 15 8 M5x0.8 10 38 7.5 4.5 4 2.5 7
20 18 9.5 5.5 17 5.5 1/8" 10.5 25 10.5 10.5 12.5 9 M6x1.0 12 44 8.5 5.5 4.5 3 8
25 26 9.5 55 17 5.5 1/8" 13.5 28.5 11 .5 11.5 12.5 9 M6•1.0 12 50 8.5 5.5 4.5 3 8.5
32 30 11 7.5 21 6.5 1/8" 15 34 12.5 12.5 7 9 M8•1 .25 16 63 10.5 6.5 5.5 3.5 9.5
40 30 11 7.5 22 6.5 1/8" 18 38 14 14 13 10 M8•1 .25 16 72 10.5 6.5 5.5 4 11
50 40 14 9 24 8.5 1/4" 21 .5 47 12 14 9 11 M10x1.5 20 92 13.5 8.5 7.5 4.5 13.5
63 50 14 9 24 8.5 1/4" 28 55 16.5 16.5 14 13.5 M10x1.5 20 110 18 11 10 7 18.5
•If•
TCL,TCM Series
D Dimensions
Leader dia: TCM is Cll 30, TCLisCll25

4-M 12X1 .75(Thru.hole)
16.5
NN 28
I •I .. 52
:I II
128
II
200
E TCM=16/TCL=10 69 91
l~ --------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------- ----------------------------------------- ----------

·1~ II
Leader dia: TCM is Cll32, TCL is Cll30 4-M1 4X Thru.hole)
TC ---+-------- -
I
--@)- -
1
+_____,___..
116+S E
I •I ., : I II II
NN 48 72 148 220
E TCM=12/TCL=6 70 92
Slide table cylinder--STW Series
D Product series
Series name
CS1-G DS1-G
STWA
10
O>
C:
16
i5
"'
Cl)
20
:c
STWB
.•,_. 0
::,
0
25
32
Page 320 457

2. Relative cylinder with high temperature resistance or corrosion resistance shall be chosen under the
condition of high temperature or corrosion;
3. Necessary protection measure shall be taken in the environment with higher humidity, much dust or water
drops, oil dust and welding dregs.
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent
the entrance of contaminants into the cylinder.
6. The cylinder shall avoid the influence of side load in operation to maintain the normal work of cylinder and ..J..
extend service life.
Anti- dust cap shall be inserted into the inlet and outlet ports. As the precision of the manufacture and
guide is high, dismantle the fixed block or cylinder cover.
STW
20 12 40.2 80.4 120.6 160.8 201 .1 241.3 281.5

25 16 58.0 115.9 173.9 231.8 289.8 347.8 405.7
32 20 98.0 196.0 294.1 392.1 490.1 588.1 686.1
Slide table cylinder AlrTAC
STW Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 10 16 20 25 32
Operatinq pressure 0.1 - 1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10bar)
Stroke tolerance 0-100+~0 >100+~S
Cushion tvoe Shock absorber
Non-rotatina tolerance <D ±0.1 ° I ± 0.05° I + 0.03°
Port size (2) MS x 0.8 I 1/8"
<D Retract position.
D Stroke
Symbol 10 l2s so 1s
100 I 100
16, 20, 25, 32 125 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 1200
D Product feature
1. Both body and fixing plates can be installed.
2. Three sets of air inlet and outlet are available for customer to choose and Model
convenient for piping. !STW: Slide table cylinder(Double acting type)!
3. The structure of double-piston rod provides the good performance of Mounting t pe
anti-bending and anti-torsion and can bear relatively stronger movement A: Fixing plate mounted
radial and load. Sensor switch mounting rail Magnet
4. Buffer device such as the integrated shock absorber can effectively IS: With magnet I
) ...
slowdown impact velocity and extend life.
Stroke
Bore size
B: Body mounted 110 16 20 25 32 !
STW
Magnet mounting rail
<D When the thread is standard, the code is blank.
Inner structure and material of major parts

(STWA16-S, Stroke 25mm)
1
• Hexa on nut Carbon steel
2 Fixin late Aluminum alto
3 Washer NBR
Sintered metal
4 Magnet (Neodymium-iron-boron)
5 Bod Aluminum alto
6 Piston rod Carbon steel
Sensor switch
7 mounting rail Aluminum alloy
8 Aluminum alto
(STWA16-S, Stroke 50-200mm) 9
10
11 steel
12
13 Carbon steel
14 Combination
15 NBR
16 Carbon steel
17 NBR
18 Aluminum alto
19 Piston seal NBR
21 Countersink screw Carbon steel
STW Series
Installation and application

1. There are 3 sets of air inlet and outlet ports on body and fixing 5. About shock absorber
plates, which are available for pipe connection from three directions. 5.11 Shock absorbers are consumable parts. When a decrease in energy absorption capacity is noticed , it must be replaced.
Refer to the table below for shock absorber type.
5.21 Never loosen the bottom screw of the shock absorber. (It is not an adjustment screw.) That may cause oil leakage.
5.31 Refer to the table below for tightening torques of the shock absorber setting nut.
C linder Shock absorber Ti htenin tor ues(Nm)

STW10 ACA0806-1N 1.67
• •
w _§ ______ C C1 STW16 ACA0806-1N 1.67
..
STW20 ACA1007-1N 3.14
t__ ~ STW25 ACA1007-1N 3.14
/ // / // / // / // / // / STW32 ACA1412-1N 10.8
~
2. When air inlets and outlets are connected, the movement direction Never loosen the bottom screw of the shock absorber
of cylinder is different. For example, when fixing plate is mounted on the That may cause oil leakage.
machine, it's corresponding movement is indicated as the table below;
Pressure port A A1 B B1 C C1 6. About sensor switch
6.1) STW series are all with magnet, the revelant sensor switchs are CS1-G, DS1 -G. Please refer to page 457- 480 for details.
Movement direction Right Left Right Left Left Right 6.2) The magnet locations of STWA & STWB are different, so sensor switch's position is different, please refer to below for details.
3. Loading of piston rod- -reference value for deflection
The fixing plates are fixed, the loading is acting on
the center of body ' G) Please refer below to secure sensor switch in sensor switch
--__§ ______ 1t_

mounting rail.
Allowable deflection value (mm)

Model Load(N)\Stroke 100 200
STW10 9.81 0.07 -
STW16 39.2 0.05 0.20
STW20 49 0.04 0.15
STW25 58.8 0.02 0.08 ...J..
STW32 98.1 0.02 0.07
The body is fixed, the loading is acting on the fixing p - i

® Adjusting sensor switch position, tightening screw to
secure sensor switch.
® Adjusting sensor switch position, tightening screw to
secure sensor switch . ,..
..
uHl~77777T~i~1-----Bt STW
Deflection value (mm)

Model Load(N)\Stroke 50 100 100 200
STW10 2.94 0.06 0.30 - -
STW16 4.84 0.03 0.10 0.25 0.45
STW20 7.48 0.03 0.09 0.1 8 0.35
STW25 9.81 0.03 0.09 0.16 0.25
STW32 29.42 0.02 0.05 0.10 0.15
Cl Mounting type
4. Reference value of allowable moment (M1, M2 and M3)
Body mounted (B) Fixing plate mounted(A)
t
w~t -~~
M1
Load
Load
t w Load
t t
7 / / / / /) / / / / / / / /
ijR-0 --- ~~
Operating direction 4 6;:iing direction 4
Load
t
Load
t Load i
-x~
20
: : : : : : : :
E 10
~ ;, ~/;/~/~;;;;~
•
~ Allowable
;
II
"'
::;;
c
<I)
Bore
size
bending
moment(M2)
10 0.11
Operating direction t
-
Operating direction
E 16 0.55
0 0.5
E
-~ 0.2
···UDB···r···r···:···:···· 20 0.81
25 1.03
u
C 32 2.70
<I)
a, 0.1
50 100 150 200
Stroke (mm)
STW Series
D Dimensions
, Stroke=25mm ' Stroke=50 75 100mm
A Type(Fixing plate mounted) A Type(Fixing plate mounted)
CJ) 4:~:~~
Dp:6
N
N
6 6 2x2-Cll3.5
-~ Thru.hole
..
X X -5 ==
~ '§ ~ '§
N 0..
=
C
C
~
0
E
2 X 2-CIJ6.5
Countersink Dp:3.5
N 0..
!I
WC
C ~
., 0
Countersink Dp:3.5
en E
15 PA ~
Max.12 10 10 12
10 10 9.5
21 2 X 2-<t>4 :~:~ KB KC
2 X 2-<1>4:~:~~
Dp:5
Dp1: 5~~~~-:-i===a!====a!====.r------1--:4
2 X 2-M4 X 0.7
Thread Dp: 8 Countersink Dp:3.5 Thru.hole
Countersink Dp:3.5 Thru.hole
) ...
B Type(Body mounted) B Type(Body mounted)
STW
~
ii
·~
=
C
2-M5x0.8 t} 2-M5x0.8
"'"' ~E
~
W C
t~--w
C ~
., 0
en E
f{l .------
.. @- - - - -®
i ___ I ____ j__ -t:=~~
i <4r----~
50
. .:- ··-·:-:•:
188 192 52 I154 126 140 162
..
75 238 1117 77 1204 126 165 187
100 288 I142 102 1254 126 190 I112
STW Series
• Stroke=50 75 100 125 150 175 200mm
Max.A
B
AC
2-MB x 1.0
Adjustable nut
x2-Cll8
"'
0 Countersink Dp:4.5 "'
0 4-M5x0.B(ThreadDp:10) 2 x2-Cll8
X X
Dp:6 Thread Dp: 10 Dp: 6 2 X 2-Cll4.5 Countersink Dp:4.5
~~ ~~
H Q.
N 0..
,oO
NO..
Thru.hole
12 12 Max.10

..-'..
STW
·~ ·~ 2-M5 x 0.8
ii ",: / Port
"'
::E f0
E
"'
::E f
0
E
~cr-,----i!J-_-
__-___ 1---+-,-b-----Ef
50
. 196
.:- l· - · : -:•:
100 52 164 35 30
..
62
75 246 125 77 214 32.5 60 87
100 296 150 102 264 37.5 75 112
125 346 175 127 314 42.5 90 137
150 396 200 152 364 55 90 162
175 446 225 177 414 67.5 90 187
200 496 250 202 464 80 90 212
STW Series
• Stroke=25mm ' Stroke=50 75 100 125 150 175 200mm

:,
C
-~~ ..
x ;;;
0:,
I - - -+--~ i ~
Countersink Dp:5
"-
e
....
X
Countersink Dp:5.5 Thru.hole

) ...
STW
..
"§ 2-M5 x0.B
2-M5x0.B
,___ _ __,/~Port .. ..
~
= "
C
C =
C Port\
i~ QL::!+=--=-=-1; J=b=
C
Q.
C
:,
0
E
~
::, :,
0
E ---:::i!JQ
0
!
.,~
I I (/) I I
·+ --1- - ---l- ·-1---
1 I t-----,
1 I
50
'
184
'••:-
104
·-·=-~·=
52 170 34.5 35
···-
64
75 234 129 77 220 34.5 60 89
100 284 154 102 270 39.5 75 114
125 334 179 127 320 44.5 90 139
150 384 204 152 370 57 90 164
175 434 229 177 420 69.5 90 189
200 484 254 202 470 82 90 214
STW Series
Stroke=25mm Stroke=50 75 100 125 150 175 200mm
.....
<O
Countersink Dp:5
Op: 8
16 Max.9
2-M10 x 1.0
Adjustable nut
Countersink Dp:5.5 Thru .hole

CountersinkDp:5.5 Thru.hole ....(

..,..
•
~t
•
~
.._.~
@
--~-.
-G--
I
...
I
...
·-
...
-©-- · -•
-G-
I
I
------
------
-
~
~
@
. STW
-~ ""'
C,
2-1 8"
Port
"'
u-
.---------+-,f>=-D
C,
"
-'
"0
~
"'
E
50
. 209
···:
107 52
:
175 31
:
45
··-
66
75 259 132 77 225 33.5 65 91
100 309 157 102 275 33.5 90 116
125 359 182 127 325 46 90 141
150 409 207 152 375 58.5 90 166
175 459 232 177 425 71 90 191
200 509 257 202 475 83.5 90 216
STW Series
Stroke=25 50mm Stroke=75 100 125 150 175 200mm

Max.46 A
Dp: 12 Countersink Dp:6.5
2 x2-M8x 1.0
Thread D1f-p:~1~s~ ~;;;;;;;~~~i~~~~~~
). ...
2 X 2·<ll8!i:~
Dp: 12 Countersink Dp:7 Thru.hole Countersink Dp:7 Thru.hole
"f.."f: ••
STW
.,
-.------- i----,~
..
C "§
C,
"' C
"'
-+---
C
:,
0
E r,-[J L-,t>----{}
4' I
I I
- - - 1-- - - - - - -
I --
I 1 I
' '
4 I I
75
. 263
···:
146
.
77
:
243 70
..
90
25 163 22 40 100 313 171 102 293 95 115
50 213 45 65 125 363 196 127 343 120 140
150 413 221 152 393 145 165
175 463 246 177 443 170 190
200 513 271 202 493 195 215
Compact slide cylinder--HLH Series
D Product series
Series name
DS1-H
6
0)
.!:
0 10
"'"'
:c
::,
0
16
Cl
20
Page 328 457
Installation and application.A

1. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to
prevent the entrance of impurities into the cylinder.
2. The medium used by cylinder should be filtered to 40 µ m or below.
3. Anti- freezing measure shall be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent moisture
freezing.
4. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, pay attention to conduct anti-rust treatment
to the surface. Anti-dust caps shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports.
<, I
HLH
Double Push side 28.3 5.7 8.5 11.3 14.2 17.0 19.8
6 3 acting Pull side 21.2 4.2 6.4 8.5 10.6 12.7 14.8
Double Push side 78.5 7.9 15.7 23.6 31.4 39.3 47.1 55.0
10 4 acting Pull side 66.0 6.6 13.2 19.8 26.4 33.0 39.6 46.2
Double Push side 201.0 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7
16 6 acting Pull side 172.7 17.3 34.5 51. 8 69 .1 86 .4 103.6 120.9
Double Push side 314.0 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.6 157.0 188.4 219.8
20 8 acting Pull side 263.8 26.4 52.8 79.1 105.5 131 .9 158.3 184.7
Compact slide cylinder AlrTAC
HLH Series
Specification
:, . I . ,-
Guide rail width mm 5 I 7 I 9 I 12
Operating I<IJ6 0.15-0.7MPa(22-100psi)(1.5-7.0bar)
pressure IOthers 0.06-0.7MPa(9-1 OOpsi)(0.6-7 Obar)
Allowable kinetic enerov J 0.008 I 0.025 I 0.05 I 0.1
+1.0
Stroke tolerance 0
Cushion type Bumper
Sensor switches G) DS1-HD N, DS1-HD P
Port size M5 x 0.8
G) Sensor switch should be ordered additionally, please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
Stroke
:, .
6 I510 15 20 25 30 130
10 I5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 150
Symbol 16, 20 I5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 lea
D Product feature
Model Magnet
1. Miniature linear roller ball bearing integrated wise cylinder. !HLH: Compact slide cylinder(Double acting type) I IS: With magnet I
2. With the excellent straightness
and non-rotation precision, it Bore size
Stroke
is more suitable for precision le. 10. 1e. 20 I I Refer to stroke table for details I
assembly.
3. Mounting is possible from 4
directions. Model Selection Method
4. Piping is possible from 3 OUT Port 1. Select the bore size according to the thrust and practicality. Refer to the table on page 327.
directions. (On both sides)
HLH 2. Determine the selection conditions in order, starting from the upper row in the table below, and choose one of
the selection graphs to be used.
(On both sides) Vertical Horizontal
l(Load offset)
Mounting
position r-
Maximum
,;; 100 ..;300 ,.;500 ..;100 ,c:;300 ..;SQQ
speed(mm/s)
Load offsetl(mm) - 50 100 200 50 100 200
Selection graph (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10) (1 1) (12)
L: Overhang
(the distance from the cylinder shaft centre
to the load centre of gravity)
2.1) The relation between loading and overhang(Selection graphs)
Selection Graphs(2)
Maximumspeed 300(mm/s) or less
10 ..,.,.,.~~.,.,.,_,.,.,.,.,,.,.,.,."'="'=.,.,..,,,=
20 40 60 80 100 0·01 0 20 40 60 80
Overhang L (mm) Overhang L (mm)
HLH Series
Selection Graphs(3) Selection Graphs(4) 2.2) Selection Examples

Maximum speed 500(mm/s) or less Maximum speed 1OO(mm/s) or less Example Q): Mounting: Vertical
Load eccentricit 50mm Maximum speed: 500mm/s
Overhang: 40mm
10
it irnrnirnnrnrn1Hrn
.. ·--
--- •--- •---~-- ---~--- -~---
Load weight: 0. 1Kg
' ' ' ' ' ' '
-----~---,-- -r---
Refer to Graph based on vertical mounting and a speed of 500mm/s. In Graph , find the
intersection of a 40mm overhang and load weight ofO .1Kg, which results in a selection of 020.
"'
'=- 0.1 <ll20
Example (2): Mounting: Horizontal
,w20
E o= ,=c;:.;_cc
__;;,;
,_ === Cll16 <1>16 Maximum speed: 500mm/s
f 0.01 ;;;~;;;~;;;;;;;;;;;;:::J:::J:;;~;:::c::!~ 0 <ll10 Load eccentricity: 50mm
Overhang: 30mm
3:: ---f---f---f---<---:···:···:·---:----:---- <ll6
Load weight: 0. 1Kg
O.OOI O 20 40 60 80 100 20 40 60 80 100 Refer to Graph based on horizontal mounting, a speed of 500mm/s and load eccentricity of
50mm .ln Graph, fin d the intersection of a 30mm overhang and load weight of 0.1Kg, which
results in a selection of 016.
Selection Graphs(5) Selection Graphs(6)
Maximum speed 1OO(mm/s) or less Maximum speed 1OO(mm/s) or less
Load ecce tricit 00 m Load eccentricity 200mm
10 ---,--+ -+ -+-+--:---,--+-+-- 10 D Installation and application
++:+:++++
1. The actual loading and moment of cylinder must be less than it's allowable loading and
moment:
E 1.1) The allowable moment of cylinder
E E 20
<ll 16
=C>
<ll16 <ll10
~ 0.1 <ll6
Allowable torque (Nm)

6
0.1 Model Pitch moment Yaw moment Roll moment
'-~~~~~~~~-' 0.01 Yaw moment My
0 20 40 60 80 100 20 40 60 80 100 Mo My Mr
Overhang L (mm) Overhang L (mm) HLH6 0.25 0.25 0.41
My ( ~-+----+--3 HLH10 0.95 0.95 1.49
Selection Graphs(?) Selection Graphs(B) HLH16 3.28 3.28 3.45
Maximum speed 300(mm/s) or less Maximum speed 300(mm/s) or less Roll moment Mr "f F
Load eccentricity 50mm Load eccentricit 100mm HLH20 6.29 6.29 6.61
to 10 --,---
___ · ---,---
__,,___
__ . .
. --,---r---,-
__ __,,___
__
, --
__ ..,..,-,---
___ ,. __ ___ ,,. --
___ __
__ Mr~ ,
o lo
--,---.---,---,---
' ' ' '
' '
' ' ,' ---,---,---,---,--
' '
-- r--
-----,---,---r--
--,---.---,-- '---,' ---,---,---.---,--
' ' 0.
E -- ' . ' ' ' ' '
'
·-- .
' ' '
.
'
--,- --1---•--+--•--+--•---1---•--
'
-,---;---.---,---,---,---,---·-- .
' ''
__ ___ .... __ __ _,___ __ _,___ , __
-'---'---•---'---'----'---'---
' '
1.2) When the cylinder 1s subJected to different type of moment, there will be different degree
--'-
' --, <,
-,-------,---,---r---,--- ' r-- I
E E ' -,---,---,---,---,--
' ' ' ' of shift in performance, please refer to the following table for details.
' ' ' ' '
= =C>
·3::."', 0.1
-3::., 0.1
20
(l) 16 Table deflection due to pitch moment
(l)10 Table deflection (arrow) when a load acts upon the section marked with the arrow at
6 the full stroke of the compact slide. Model:HLH6 HLH
0.01 ~~~--~~~~ 0.01 0.12 ~ - ~.- - ~.~ - - ~ , - - ~ 2 5,30
0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100 E 0.10 -------1--------1--------1----
Overhang L (mm) Overhang L (mm) g o.oa ------J--------L----- ~- ----
:gc 0.06 : :
-------r-------c
~ 0.04 ------:----
~ 0.02
Oo, - -""'",-----="0.2
, ------,,
0~
.3----,-'0.4
Pitch moment Mp{N.m)
Model:HLH10
~
0.1 2 ~~~~~-~~~~-~
rrr-1·:- ::++--
I I I I I l I I I
0.1
<1>20
'E 0.1
E 50 40
-5-0,08
 16 30 25
= .:: 0.06 20 15
CJ>20
<1>16
"' 0.01
~
<1> 10 0
:go.04
10 5
<1>6 Stroke
i o.02 ---~----
o O'---"c.._c-c-~-0~.4~~0~.6~ ~0~.8,--.___,
1.0'
1 r~ ~
0.01 Pitch moment Mp(N.m)
20 40 60 80 100 20 40 60 80 100
Model:HLH16
1rn,_~ =1
0 2
Selection Graphs(11) Selection Graphs(12) 1
Maximum speed SOO(mm/s) or less Maximum speed SOO(mm/s) or less 'E ~
Load eccentricity 100mm Load eccentricity 200mm
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0

"' "' Pitch moment Mp(N .m)
'=' 0.1 ~ 0.1
f"
~j-
"fr"m il'°
E <ll20 E
16
=C> =C> - I I I I I I
10
~0.01 (l)6
~ 0.01 "" :
::::r:::r ::t:::::--::::;::::::::::::!~f!g
= = 50
~ 0.02 ---- ' , ----- + ----- ~ ------ ~ ----- ~- ----- Stroke

0.001 0.001
0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100 0 0 o:5 1. 0
0
1.'s 2.'o 2.'5 3:0 3.5
Overhang L (mm) Overhang L (mm) Pitch moment Mp(N.m)
~
HLH Series
Table deflection due to yaw moment 2. The compact slide can be OUT Port
Table deflection (arrow) when a load acts upon the section marked with the arrow at piped from 3 directions. Confirm Default port
the full stroke of the compact slide. ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ the pressure ports and operating
Model:HLH6 direction. (See drawing right)
My(~-+-----F-1 ' ~ ~: ~:-:-:-::-:~j::_:_:-::-:-::~r-:-::_:___-:~

t:_:_____ ~~;,·i 3. In compact slides with sensor
OUT Port
(On both sides)
IN art
~ 0.04 switch, there is a danger of (On both sides)
~ 0.02 ------ ~- sensor switch malfunction if the
00~-=o~.1---0~.2---0-.3--~0.4 mounting pitch is less than the M d I At least indicated interval (mm)
Yaw moment My(N.m)
oe d L
dimensions shown in Table right.
Be sure to allow at least the HLH6 5 21
1!Ii-:Rffl1~t~ indicated interval. HLH105 25

HLH1610 35
4. When the output of the HLH20 15 47
compact slide will be directly applied to the table, it should be applied along the rod axis.
~ 0.02 -----:-- ' -- :-----:-----:-----:-----:----
~ 0.01--~ troke (See drawing below.)
O ' 0~ ' 0~ ' 0~ ' 0.8
Eo.05
Yaw moment My(N.m)
v F--rtt,~Q
~r I
~o~:' I
The loading and piston rod are coaxial The loading and piston rod are offset
X
.§.004
§ 0.03 5. Be sure to use a flow control value, and adjust the speed to 500mm/s or less.
i5
a,
0.02 6. A compact slide can be mounted from 4 directions. Don't exceed the max. fastering torque
~ 0.01 then lightening the mounting bolts.
0 0
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
Yaw moment My(N.m)
0_07 Model:~LH20 : : , 60
_ 0.06 --------t --------~---------f --------+---- 50
I~:~! :_:_:_:_:_:_:_:_;::_:_:_:_:_:::~:::-----+--- - I ------ ii:~~

l ~:~! -~--------:: ::::::::;:::::::: 5/10
~ 0.01 - :-------- :---------:--------:-------- Stroke Model Bolts Max.fastening torque L1 Model Bolts Max.fastening tor ue L1 L
0 0~-o~.5--,-.0--1.~5--2~.o-~2.5 HLH6 M3 x 0.5 1.1(Nm) HLH6 M4 x 0.7 2.5(Nm) 12.7 9.4
Yaw moment My(N.m) HLH10 M4 x 07 2.5(Nm) HLH10 M5 x 0.8 5 1(Nm) 15.6 11.2
HLH16 M4 x 07 2.5(Nm) HLH16 M5 x 0.8 5.1(Nm) 20.6 16.2
Table deflection due to roll moment HLH20 M6 x 1.0 8.1(Nm) 24.0 16.0
Table deflection(at A) when a load acts upon section Fat the full stroke of the Axial Mounting(Tapped Holes)
compact slide.
HLH Model:HLH6
0.04 ~ - - ~ - - - ~ - - - ~
'' ''
---------1-----------:---
...1.
M r ~ ·. ,A 0.03
C:
0
:g
Q)
'\ii
0
::: ::::::::-r:::::_::r::::::::
0o 0.2 0.4 0.6
Roll moment Mr(N.m)
Model:HLH10 Model Bolts Max.fastenin torque L
HLH6 M3 x 0.5 1.1(Nm) 5
i::
_0.0201 ~~ HLH10 M4 x 0.7 2.5(Nm) 6
HLH16 M4 x 0.7 2.S(Nm) 6
'-'
-----! -----!------!---- !------:----+----
I I I I I I
HLH20 MS x 0.8 5.1(Nm) 8
~ 0.005 ---
7. Work Piece Mounting
0 °o o.'2 o.~ o.~ o.~ 1.'o 1.~ 1.4 7.1) Work pieces can be mounted on 2 surfaces of the compact slide. When mounting a work
Roll moment Mr(N.m)
piece, tighten the bolts properly at a torque value within the limiting range.
Model:HLH16
0.025 ~
E 0.0201----f
-;------
f ;-------•-------;------:---
l f f l- iece
~ :::: · t :j: +::: : t :

i 0.005_---~
0 0o o:5 /o /s 2.:0 2:5 a.o
Roll moment Mr(N.m)
E
~
: ::1~-~dmt+11
0.015 -----+-----f-----+-----~-- -r-··--+-----
~ 0.010 ----- ;------;----- ; ---- ;------ ; ------; -----
Model
HLH6
HLH10
Bolts
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0. 7
Max.fastenin tor ue L
1.1(Nm)
2.5(Nm)
5.5
7.5 8
i 0.005 ----- :__ --:------:----- ------:----- : ----- HLH16 M4 x 0. 7 2.5(Nm) 10 9
0 °a o'.s / /s 2: /s 3: 3.5 HLH20 MS x 0.8 5.1(Nm) 11 HLH20 MS x 0.8 5. 1(Nm) 9.5
Roll moment Mr(N.m)
•••
HLH Series
7.2) Since the table is supported by the linear guide, D Dimensions

take care not to apply strong impact or large
moment to the guide section.
7.3) Hold the slide when fastening work pieces with bolts,
If the body is held while tightening bolts, excessive
moment may damage guide section.
X - I
/ Countersink 6-$6 Dp: 3.5
Work ieces I V '°
=
1,±( ,J,
IW @ "I"
-"'
•-
~ co "'
,=-. -
IW
"' 41 lJ_Q_
5~_
JB "'
.,;
~
AB
A
Hold the slide and fasten the bolt 4-M3 x 0.5 D : 6.5
X
LB
AC
5
. .
44.5
J
36
:-
··-·=-~-:- ••:•
42 14 10 10
10 49.5 41 42 14 15 10
15 54.5 46 52 24 20 20
20 59.5 51 52 24 25 20
25 64.5 56 62 30 30 30
Hold the body and fasten the bolt
30 69.5 61 62 30 35 30
D Inner structure
3-M5 x 0.8 Thru.Thread, Thru.hole <D4.5

4-M5 x 0.8(2-Sides) 4-M4 x 0.7Thru.Thread
HLH
Countersink 6-(1)7.5 Dp: 4.5\
\ I I3
-~ @ ~J
;::; ~
"'
"'
'"''
~~
@ Cl> - ~
<O
"'
1 Slide table Aluminum alloy ~1 JB l.1Ll..
2 Piston rod Stainless steel li
- A
AR
3 Hexagon nut Carbon steel

4 Hexaqon nut Carbon steel N-M4x 0.7 D : 8
5 Rod seal NBR
8 Linear guide Stainless steel
9 Slide block
10 Bumper TPU
11
12
Magnet holder
Magnet washer
Aluminum alloy
NBR
5
. 51 .5
. =-
40
·-·=-~-=- ••:
50 14 10 10 4
Sintered metal
13 Magnet 10 56.5 45 55 14 15 10 4
(Neodymium-iron-boron)
15 61 .5 50 60.5 24 20 20 4
14 Steel ball SUS304
20 66.5 55 63 24 25 20 4
15 Piston seal NBR
25 71 .5 60 70.5 30 30 30 4
30 76.5 65 75.5 30 35 30 4
17 0-rino NBR
40 86.5 75 85.5 45 45 20 20 6
18 Bumper TPU
50 96.5 85 93 55 55 25 25 6
20 C clip Spring steel
HLH Series
3-M5 x 0.8 Thru.Thread, Thru.hole C!l4.5

Countersink 6-C!l7.5 Op: 4.5
5
. 61
·:- ··-·:-:•:-·:
47 60 20 15 10 4
10 66 52 64.5 20 20 10 4
15 71 57 69.5 30 25 20 4
20 76 62 75 30 30 20 4
25 81 67 80 40 35 30 4
30 86 72 84.5 40 40 30 4
40 96 82 95 50 50 20 20 6
50 106 92 104.1 60 60 25 25 6
60 116 102 114.5 60 70 30 30 6
HLH
3-M6 x 1.0 Thru.Thread, Thru.hole C!l5 4-M5 x 0.8 Op: 11

Countersink 6-C!l9.5,0p: 8
N-M5 x 0.8 0 : 9.5
5
. 73
1•:
57.5 72 20
=-··=- ,.:
15 10 4
10 78 62.5 72 20 20 10 4
15 83 67.5 82 25 25 20 4
20 88 72.5 82 25 30 20 4
25 93 77.5 92 40 35 30 4
30 98 82.5 92 40 40 30 4
40 108 92.5 100 50 50 20 20 6
50 118 102.5 113.5 70 60 25 25 6
60 128 112.5 122.5 70 70 30 30 6
,A Compact slide cylinder(Recirculating linear ball bearing)--HLQ Series
D Product series
Series name
DS1-H
HLQ 6
8
C>
C:
~ 12
"'
~
-g 16
0
0
20
25
Page 334 457

entrance of impurities into the cylinder.
3. Anti-freezing measure shalt be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent moisture freezing.
4. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, pay attention to conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface.
Anti-dust caps shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports.
Bore size Rod size Acting type Pressure area Operating pressure(MPa)
(mm) (mm) (mm') 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 06 0.7
Push side 42 8 13 17 21 25 29
6 3 Double acting
Pull side 57 11 17 23 29 34 40
Push side 75 15 23 30 38 45 53
8 4 Double acting
Pull side 101 20 30 40 51 61 71
Push side 170 34 51 68 85 102 119
12 6 Double acting
Pull side 226 45 68 90 113 136 158
Push side 302 60 91 121 151 181 211 HLQ
16 8 Double acting
Pull side 402 80 121 161 201 241 281
Push side 471 94 141 188 236 283 330
20 10 Double acting
Pull side 628 126 188 251 314 377 440
Push side 756 151 227 302 378 454 529
25 12 Double acting
Pull side 982 186 295 393 491 589 687
Compact slide cylinder(Recirculating linear ball bearing) AlrTAC
HLQ Series
Specification
:, . : I
Guide rail width (mm' 10 110 17 19 19 112
Number of Quide rail SinQle Quide rail I Double Quide rail
Operatinq pressure 0.15-0.7MPa(22- 100psi)(1.5-7.0bar)
SOP.P.d ranoe mm/s 50-500
Stroke tolerance 0-100+1,o >100+), 5
Cushion type Bumper(Both ends), Shock absorber
Sensor switches (1) DS1 - HD N, DS1 - HOP
Port size M5 x 0.8 I 1/8"
CD Sensor switch should be ordered additionally, please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max. stroke (mm)
6 10 20 30 40 50 50
8 10 20 30 40 50 75 75
12 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 100
D Symbol 16 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 125
20 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 150 150
25 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 150 150
D Product feature
1. Recirculating linear ball bearing, it achieves high precision, high rigidity,
with anti rust and dustproof function
Model CD
2. Through hole for body mounting
HLQ: Compact slide cylinder
(Double acting type)
3. Pin holes for positionin
(Recirculating linear ball bearing)
Improved repeatability of
HLQL: Symmetrical Compact slide cylinder
work mounting
(Double acting type)
(Recirculating linear ball bearing) Ad uster o tlon
®
__ Blank: Without_adjuster(Basic type) __
4. Floating joint design Bore size
!6, 8, 12, 16, 20, 25 !
HLQ Piston rod needn't endure additional torque
Stroke
5. Dual rod-doubles the output thrust IRefer to stroke table for details I
6. Pin holes for positioning Ma net
Improved repeatability of body mounting S: With magnet
7. Body mounting holes ___ A:_Adjustable_rubber stopper(Both_ends)__

provide 3 mounting
positions
8. Two models (HLQ/HLQL) are available for choosing due to different

designs of sensor slots and flexible cushioning elements.
____ AS:_Adjustable _rubber stopper(Extention) __ BS: Shock absorber(Extention)
___ AF: Adjustable_rubber stopper(Retraction)__ BF: Shock absorber(Retraction)
Adjustable end-position
Shock
absorber
CD When the thread is standard, the code is blank.

@ B type, BS type, BF type are unavailable for bore size of Cll6 .
••
HLQ Series
D Model Selection Method
Please select compact cylinder's type according to following procedure, and cross reference with
data sheets. 4) Moment check
1) Operating conditions(Accord1ng to mounting position and work form) Steps
1. Model used(Bore size, Stroke) Horizontal
2. Type of cushion(Bumper, Shock absrober) 1. Calculate actual moment: Mp, Mpo, My, Myo, Mr, Mro (Nm)
3. Mounting position ofwork(Top, front)
4. Mounting direction(Axial, Vertical)
5. Average speed Va(mm/s)
6. Applied load W(N) Fig. 1
7. Overhang L1, L2, L3(mm)
Explain: L1 is the distance of load's center beyond the end plank's Dynamic moment :
plane. If load's center is not beyond the end plank's plane, Mr=W x L3/1000
L1 is negative. Static moment :
Fig. 1: Applied load Mro=(W x a x L3)/1 000g
Dynamic moment :
My=O
My (
Myo '.J Static moment:
Myo= (W x a x L3)/1OOOg
2. Check
2) Kinetic energy check
Ste s Dynamic moment : ~ + ~ + -Mr- ,;;;;1
MpN, My= MrmH
1. Calculate kinetic energy of load E(J)
Static moment : ~ + ~ + ~ ,;;;; 1
E= 1 x \/j_ x ( 1.4 x Va )' Mpo~, Myom.. Mrom..
Z g 1000
2. Calculate allowable kinetic energy Ea(J) Vertical
Ea = K X Em.. 1. Calculate actual moment: Mp, Mpo, My, Myo(Nm)
K:Mountin work coefficient Fl 2 E :Maximum allowable kineticener Table 1
3. Check that kinetic energy of load doesn't exceed allowable kinetic energy:
E,;;;; Ea
3) Load check
HLQ
Dynamic moment :
Ste s
Mp=W x (L2+ 8)/1000
1. Calculate allowable applied load Wa (N)
Wa=K x x W Static moment:
T Mpo- Wx(L2+Bl + Wx a x (L2+8)
- 1000 1000xg
!K:Mounting work coefficient (Fig 2j W :Maximum allowable a lied load Table 1
2. Check that load(W) doesn't exceed allowable applied load(Wa):

w,;;;;wa
Dynamic moment :
Fig 2: Mounting work coefficient (K)
My=W x L311000
Top Front
Static moment :
Myo- Wx a x L3 WxL3
- 1000g 1000
Mounting work coefficient K= 1 Mounting work coefficient K=0.6

2. Check
Fig 3: Applied load coefficient ( 13 )
Dynamic moment : ~ + ~ ,;;;;1
Mpm.. My..,
Static moment: ~ + ~ ,;;;;1

i=: 0.7 Mpom., Myom,.
Q)
~ 0.5 Explain:
~ 0.4 L1, L2, L3: The distance of load center to mount plane(Determined by actuality).
~ 0.3 A, B: Correction value for center position distance of moment(Refer to table 2).
"'
:;; 0.2 Mpm,., My..,, Mr..,, Mpo..,, Myo.,,, Mro•.,: Maximum allowable moment(Refer to table 2).
.!!!
a_ g: Acceleration of gravity(g=9.81m/s' ) .
c.. a: Acceleration of inertia
<(
(Bumper: a= 1600 x (Va/1000)', Shock absorber: a=400 x (Va/1000)')
W: Load weight(Determined by actuality) .
HLQ Series
Inner structure
A,B
..
Note: Symbol and unit
Correction value for center position distance of moment mm

Basic type
a
E
Acceleration of inertia
Kinetic energy
-
J
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 '
10 11 12 13 14
Ea Allowable kinetic energy J

Emax Maximum allowable kinetic energy J
g Acceleration of gravity g=9.81 mis
K Mounting work coefficient -
L1, L2, L3 Overhang mm
Mp, My, Mr Dynamic moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Mp_ , Mym~• Mr_ Maximum allowable dynamic moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Mpo, Myo, Mro Static moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Mpo_, Myom,., Mro~, Maximum allowable static moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Va Average speed
w Applied load
mm/s
N ""'
Wmax Maximum allowable applied load N 2 Floatinq joint Carbon steel
~ Applied load coefficient 3 FixinQ plate Aluminum alloy
Table 1: Maximum allowable kinetic energy(Emax), Maximum allowable applied load(Wmax) 4 Rod seal NBR
Max allowable kinetic energy Emax(J) Max allowable
Model 6 0-ring NBR
Basic type Rubber stopper type Shock absorber type applied load Wmax(N)
HLQ6 0.01 0.01 - 4 7 Bumper TPU
HLQ8 0.024 0.024 0.048 8 8 Piston rod A Stainless steel
HLQ12 0.05 0.05 0.1 15 9 Piston rod B Carbon steel
HLQ16 0.1 0.1 0.2 30 10 Body Aluminum alloy
HLQ20 0.13 0.13 0.26 40 11 Mao net holder Brass
HLQ25 0.22 0.22 0.44 70 Sinlered metal Neodymium~ron-boron)
12 Mao net
Table 2: Maximum allowable moment(Nm), Correction value for center position distance of moment(mm) 13 Piston seal NBR
Bore Static moment Dynamic moment Correction value 14 Piston Brass
size Stroke 15 C clip Spring steel
Mpom., Myom., Mrom., Mp •., Mym., Mrm., A B
10 3.3 3.8 2.6 0.7 0.7 0.6 30 16 Linear guide combination
20 3.3 3.8 2.6 0.7 0.8 0.6 40 17 Back cover Brass
30 3.3 3.8 2.6 0.7 0.8 0.6 50 Aluminum alloy
~(
7 18 Slide table
40 7.2 7.9 3.6 1.3 1.3 0.6 60
50 12.4 12.7 4.7 1.8 1.8 0.6 70
10 10.1 9.1 8.8 2.5 2.5 2.0 30
20 10.1 9.1 8.8 2.6 2.6 2.0 40
8 30 10.1 9.1 8.8 2.8 2.8 2.0 50 7
40 12.4 10.8 10.1 3.4 3.4 2.3 60
HLQ 50 23.6 24.8 13.9 4.4 4.4 2.1 70
75 32.8 35.3 16.4 4.6 4.6 1.8 95
10 8.5 8.5 13.6 2.5 2.5 4 32
20 8.5 8.5 13.6 2.5 2.5 4 44
30 8.5 8.5 13.6 2.5 2.5 4 54
12 40 8.5 8.5 13.6 2.5 2.5 4 62 11
50 8.5 8.5 13.6 2.5 2.5 4 72
75 52.3 52.3 85.6 18.9 18.9 13 115
100 53.9 53.9 86.9 19.5 19.5 13 142
10 33.6 33.6 35.2 8.4 8.4 8.8 49
20 33.6 33.6 35.2 8.4 8.4 8.8 49
30 33.6 33.6 35.2 8.4 8.4 8.8 59
40 33.6 33.6 35.2 8.4 8.4 8.8 69
16 12
50 33.6 33.6 35.2 8.4 8.4 8.8 79
75 70.2 70.2 62.5 28.1 28.1 25 120
100 76.6 76.6 62.5 38.3 38.3 25 150
125 78 78 62.5 39 39 25 175
10 34.8 34.8 36.8 8.7 8.7 9.2 53
20 34.8 34.8 36.8 8.7 8.7 9.2 53
30 34.8 34.8 36.8 8.7 8.7 9.2 63
40 34.8 34.8 36.8 8.7 8.7 9.2 73
20 14
50 34.8 34.8 36.8 8.7 8.7 9.2 83
75 70.2 70.2 74.5 28.1 28.1 29.7 123
100 76.6 76.6 74.5 38.3 38.3 29.7 157
125 78 78 74.5 39 39 29.7 178
150 98.4 98.4 74.5 49.2 49.2 29.7 210
10 56.7 56.7 51 16.2 16.2 17 60
20 56.7 56.7 51 16.2 16.2 17 60
30 56.7 56.7 51 16.2 16.2 17 70
40 56.7 56.7 51 16.2 16.2 17 80
25 17
50 56.7 56.7 51 16.2 16.2 17 90
75 122.5 122.5 138.5 49 49 55.4 130
100 173.8 173.8 138.5 79 79 55.4 168
125 217 217 138.5 108.6 108.6 55.4 205
150 221 .8 221.8 138.5 110.9 110.9 55.4 230
••
HLQ Series

1. How to mount cylinder:
1. 1) Cylinder can to be mounted from 3 directions Front Mounting
Vertical Mountlng(Bodythread holes) : Axial Mountlng(Body thread holes)
. _=
-~ ----~
~
I
HLQ6 M3 x 0.4 0.9
HLQ8 M4x0.7 2.1
HLQ12 M5 x 0.8 4.4
5
6
8
/;//,?;/$/$ /$ /; ~ t-H-LQ
_ 1_6-+M
- 6_x_1-.0- +-7-.4- - - - +1-0_ _ __,
13
Top Mounting
Vertical Mounting(Body through holes)
HLQ6 M3 x 0.5 0.9 4.7
HLQ8 M3 x 0.5 0.9 4.7
HLQ12 M4 x 0.7 2.1 5.0
HLQ16 M5 x 0.8 4.4 5.0
'/! HLQ20 M5 x 0.8 4.4 8.0
HLQ25 M6 x 1.0 7.4 9.0
2.3) Since the table is supported by the linear guide, take care not to apply strong impact or
1.2) When mounting an compact slide cylinder, screws of appropriate length should be used
large moment to the guide section.
and tightened properly within the maximum tightening torque. If screws are tightened
2.4) Hold the slide when fastening work pieces to it with bolts, If the body is held while
beyond designed limits, malfunction may occur. If they are tightened insufficiently, it may
result in sliding of falling off from its position. tightening bolts, excessive moment may damage guide section.
Vertical Mounting(Body thread holes)
M d I Bolt Max. tightening Max. screw-

o e used torque (Nm) in depth(mm)
HLQ6 M4 x 0.7 2.1 Work ieces

HLQ8 M4x0.7 2.1
HLQ12 M5 x 0.8 4.4 10
HLQ16 M6 x 1.0 4.4 10
HLQ20 M6 x 1.0 7.4 12
HLQ25 MS x 1.25 18.0 16
Vertical Mountlng(Body through holes)
Hold the slide and fasten the bolt
3. About shock absorber,
3. 1) Shock absorbers are expendable. Promptly replace them when energy absorbing HLQ
HLQ6 M3 x 0.5 1.2 8.0 capacity decreases.
~ ~
HLQ8 M3 x 0.5 1.2 9.6 3.2) Never turn or adjust the screws on bottom of the shock absorber body. The screws are not
HLQ12 M4 x 0.7 2.8 13.4 for adjusting. Otherwise would cause oil leakage.
2
HLQ16 M5 x 0.8 5.7 16.7 3.3) Follow the table for tightening torque of shock absorber to lock nuts.
HLQ20 M5 x 0.8 5.7 22.0
HLQ25 M6 x 1.0 10.0 Model Shock absorber Tightening torque
HLQ6 Without shock absorber
Axial Mounting(Body thread holes)
HLQ8 ACA0806-1 N 1.67 Nm
HLQ12 ACA0806-1N 1.67 Nm
HLQ16 ACA1007-1N 3.14 Nm
HLQ20 ACA1210-1N 3.14 Nm
The screwsT HLQ25 ACA1412-1 N 10.8 Nm
HLQ12 M4 x 0.7 2.1 6.0 are not adjustable otherwise would
HLQ16 MS x 0.8 4.4 7.0 cause oil leakage.
HLQ20 MS x 0.8 4.4 8.0
4. How to mount sensor switch ,
HLQ25 M6 x 1.0 7.4 10.0
4.1) HLQ Series are all with magnet. Standard(HLQ)
The matching sensor switches
2. Work Piece Mounting:
are DS1-H, DS1-HL series.
2.1) Work pieces can be mounted on 2 surfaces of the compact slide.
Please refer to page 457 - 480
Front Mounting Mounting
for details.
4.2) Maintain a minimum spacing
of at least 3mm if two compact
cylinders are used side by side
in order to avoid malfunction.
5. Make sure to connect the compact cylinder to speed controller at the meter-out side, and
the speed of compact cylinder must below 500mm/s.
2.2) When mounting a work piece , tighten the bolts properly at a torque value within the
6. Don't apply a load beyond the range of the operation limits. Different load or torque will
limiting range. Use blots at least 0.5mm shorter than maximum thread depth to prevent
bolts from contacting the guide block. If the bolts are too long, they hit the guide block and cause different deflection to table, please see below for details.
cause damage.
•Hit•
HLQ Series
6.1) Table deflection due to pitch moment: 6.2) Table deflection due to yaw moment: 6.3) Table deflection due to roll moment:
Table deflection (arrow) when a load acts upon th Table deflection (arrow) Table deflects (A) when a load acts upon section Fat
section marked with the arrow at the full stroke of
the compact slide. :::i~o~ ~:~k:~t:~t~~~;he Li ,J,,,,,,,J,,,,,,L the full stroke of the compact sli e.
JF arrow at the full stroke of

the compact slide. My ( H-i-0~fi}
FFifi=======r-,
Lr-70mm
' )Mr
A~~;===iF
0.03
o.03 : : I . . . . . . . ~. ····j ·······+··············<····
cc
0
tl0.01
Q)
'1ii
0
CJ:>6
0
}Wt± ' ' '
10
'
Load F(N)
15
' ' '
r.02 ······!:~:~
~0.01
~
CJ:>6
0
::·~::J:::::::::::::··j:::6~··~~=~···
··+ !~
+· ~ 10
Load F(N)
~f+ 15
~" 1~·
Lr=70mm
0.05 0.03 ••••••;•••••••;•••••••;••••••• ;••••••••;•••••••;·····<···· 0.02 $=10\20\30
1:: . ,
0.04 1 r i
0.015
lo.03 E
.S
cc
0.01
! : '~=~o
Q0.02 g .' S=75
t3 .''''
Q)
~0.005
'1ii001 Q) '
'
0 0
O i i ' ' ' i i ' . ''
0 20 40 60
CJ:>8
0 20
Load F(N)
40
CJ:>8 CJ:>8 Load F(N)
Lr=90mm
0.09 --------------->----
S=100
0.07
. . '' 0.01 .. ''
0.05 . ''
i:: ~ =
'
E E
.s
14+tfl
.s
t03
Q)
~
§ 0.005
Q)
~0.01 '1ii
0
_ ~ : $=10/20/30
0 10 20 30 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
ct> 12 Load F(N) CJ:>12 Load F(N) CJ:> 12 Load F(N)
HLQ Lr=100mm
''
'
''
'
''
'
'' ''
' ' '' '' ''
0.07 ---------•---------•---------,--------- .....'' ---------•--------
'' u.u,, ..
--------,---------,---------,---------,--------·r············
0.18 ........ ,.........:........ , ........ ,........ 'S-125···
________ :_________ :________ : ________ :_______ : ___________ _
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
---------~---------t--------+--------+--------
''
;' ~125- /
/ /
_o.os ·········' ·········'········· '·········: ....... - 10(). _ 0.008
; ::~. /
i~~ IIIL
E )
...... ......... ..... ' E
.s .s
g 0.03
·: ~=40 ] 0004 /
n V
-="
Q) Q)
/
~001 0
Q)
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 0 50 100 150 200

ct> 16 Load F(N) CJ:>16 CJ:> 16 Load FIN)
Lr=100mm
..
0.07 u.u,,
0.10 f ····+···+···+······l······I·····-+·,'·
/
0.08 , .... --,....+ ..+ ----··•-----+ /'
0.05
,.,/
_0.008
.sE 0.06 , ---- + -- + ·--+ --·,f'·7 E
.scc0.03
E
.s /
~ 0.04 f·····+····+ ·,,1,
:g ~ 0.004
/
Q)
'1ii0.02 f·····h <"~

Q) Q) ,,,v
0 ~001 '1ii
0 "/
o'--1~0~20;,....,3~0~40;,....,5~0~6~0~1~0~--1 0 50 100 150 200
CJ:>20 Load F(N) CJ:>20 Load F(N)
Lr~~uumm
0.06 0.05
>---- + -··+---·+ -----·,-----+ · .,<....... 'S=1·25-- V
<r~
:S=1D0 /
0.04 ····:s=J'5···· /
E 'S=50 ia.03
.s , 7"· :,;--:,· '$ =40-···
··--,
cc
//
C 0
.2 0.02
t3 ti /""
Q)
-= ~0.01
Q)
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 a 100 200 300

CJ:>25 Load F(N) CJ:>25 Load F(N)
HLQ Series
D Dimensions
HLQ6 HLQL6
R
:3.5
.,,'-----t•r-t-_i;;.~...!\
co A~ -+--+-~+-+
Adjustable scope,;;5
, . .=~= _ 3 ~· l"J ;.:xtension a~us:~~ - M-M 3XO.S DpA
: : f
~o
i~t~~-Y 4 t i
"'
IA
Ad' ustable scop ,;; 10
(M/2-1)xKB
=
~
::,e
Port: 2- M5X0.8 e!,
13.5
"'
..;
"'~~~~~;ttt-r-11
crirtJM;..--1---~~
:3.5
20
'-:
(N-1)xLB LC
<l>3 ' \·03 Do:2.5 JB JC
"'
C.
Cl
= ~ I
8
X
"::,eI \ 4 ~
"'
~ z
~ 6j
"'
""' .!
@--$ - @-$
~1
"'6
-
""
.(I)-
'\
@--$ - @-$
~:
)'
I
~ "'
C.
I
4 I
"'!
N
Cl
,__ I
Across A
JB JC
C.
Cl
6
:::: ~ HLQ
~\ 'I03 Do,2.5/ (N -1 )xLB LC
~c
"'
"'z
I
Across A-A
HLQ6 x 30
10 48 41 .5 42 16 13 22 23 6 4 2 16 21 .5 10
. 48
•:
41.5 42
:
16 13
:--:
22 23 6 4 2
..
16
·:-
9
·-
21 .5
20 58 51.5 52 26 13 25 26 13 4 2 26 31 .5 20 58 51.5 52 26 13 25 26 13 4 2 26 9 31.5
30 68 61.5 62 20 29 21 6 36 41.5 30 68 61.5 62 20 29 21 - - 6 3 36 9 41.5
40 86 79.5 80 28 39 26 28 11 6 47 16 51 .5 40 86 79.5 80 28 39 26 28 11 6 3 47 16 51 .5
50 96 89.5 90 28 49 27 28 21 6 64 9 61 .5 50 96 89.5 90 28 49 27 28 21 6 3 64 9 61.5
HLQ Series
HLQ8 HLQL8
"':1
0 6 AC
1~1
AB
~1
A
Retraction adjuster 0
M-M3X0.50 :5
Adjustable scope,;;8.5
KB 1A Adjustable scope,;8.5
IM/ 2-1)xKB M-M3X0.5 D :5
ci
~
:,;
N
I 22.5
i~
e
-
-
.g.
~
'f'
z
HLQ
10
. 53 45.5
•:
46 19
:
13 25
:
25
:
7 4 2
..
18 10
•: .
23.5 10
. 53 45.5
.1-.:
46
:
19 13
:
25 25
:
7 4 2
..
18
•:
10
.
23.5
20 63 55.5 56 28 14 25 28 14 4 2 28 10 33.5 20 63 55.5 56 28 14 25 28 14 4 2 28 10 33.5
30 77 69.5 70 27 29 26 - - 6 3 42 10 43.5 30 77 69.5 70 27 29 26 - - 6 3 42 10 43.5
40 91 83.5 84 31 39 32 31 8 6 3 54 12 53.5 40 91 83.5 84 31 39 32 31 8 6 3 54 12 53.5
50 116 108.5 109 58 37 46 29 8 6 4 79 12 63.5 50 116 108.5 109 58 37 46 29 8 6 4 79 12 63.5
75 144 136.5 137 60 61 50 30 31 6 4 107 10 88.5 75 144 136.5 137 60 61 50 30 31 6 4 107 10 88.5
-----------------------------------
HLQB(Wlth shock absorber) HLQLB(Wlth shock absorber)
Retraction adjuster
scope ,;; 16 ""
Max: 18.5 r-°rt!=~===cLb==il-bJ__!J Max: 18.5
ACA0806-1N
Ad'ustable s
HLQ Series
HLQ12
8 AC
"'
C,
1# 1 ='"--------~-"
...
N gl
AB e---=-----'----"ii-~jp
A
Stroke= 75, 100

••••
1 ____ _ Extension adjuster M-M4X0.7Dp:5
[
.-
~-- Th
-t <ll4 •0 03 Dp:4 ,----------/
o A! /j Retraction ad·uster
r-"-=~==
5 . ----
KB "CC. Adjustable scope,;; 14

16 (M/2-1)xKB
~ o
"
11
M4X0.7 D :6 Port: 2- M5X0.8
PA 11 18
C,
IN- 1)xLB LC
C.
C 39 29 9
= LB
~ I
"'
I
E I
= t--t-'""iH::.:::..L.:Z::.J - -- ~---<i)- --- - - --<i)- - - - - - ¢--
~
Sl----h,..Jl--!;:=::;-i------J
E I
~1 ~
Ill 5 "C"-
Across A-A <Ill •i-03 Dp:4/ JB I JC
'?o
HLQ12 x40
HLQ
10
. 76
••:
66 67
:
32 18 28
: :
32 18 4 2
"
..
32.5 13
. .
35
20 76 66 67 32 18 28 32 18 4 2 32.5 13 45
30 86 76 77 40 20 38 40 20 4 2 42.5 13 55
40 103 93 94 39 38 34 - - 6 3 59.5 13 65
50 113 103 104 39 48 34 39 9 6 3 69.5 13 75
75 157 147 148 72 59 36 36 23 8 4 113.5 13 99
100 182 172 173 72 84 36 36 12 10 5 134.5 17 124
HLQ12{Wlth shock absorber)
Adjustable scope,;;7 Extension adjuster

ACA0806-1N I 11 Max:25.5
Adjustable scope,;; 16
Max:4.5
HLQ Series
HLQL12
Stroke= 75, 100
i--:-=-----'---"i-------..=-l ___ w
= , . . ~ - - - - - - - ~ -"
16
=
ii
0
"'
~
~
I
o>t--1--'-,H::,:::..)...,z'=-l -E
e 1--h-'l-!=-r. ·--·- <•, ----·- -<!>-·-·-·--<!>-
-E I I
I I
LB 39 I 29 19
(N - 1)xLB C HLQL12 x40
Across A-A
HLQ
10
. 76
-'•:
66 67
:
32 18 28
: :
32 18 4 2
..
32.5 13
. .
35
20 76 66 67 32 18 28 32 18 4 2 32.5 13 45
30 86 76 77 40 20 38 40 20 4 2 42.5 13 55
40 103 93 94 39 38 34 - - 6 3 59.5 13 65
50 113 103 104 39 48 34 39 9 6 3 69.5 13 75
75 157 147 148 72 59 36 36 23 8 4 113.5 13 99
100 182 172 173 72 84 36 36 12 10 5 134.5 17 124
HLQL 12(Wlth shock absorber)
Max:4.5
Adjustablescope.;; 16 "'.+'--~~
ACAOB06-1N :;!.L _f---"'"°I
Adjustable scope,;;n
Extension adjuster
HLQ Series
HLQ16
<=la.....,_ _ _ __...,_...,.___~-.
i--,.-;:,"---...;,.......,,..-,........,"-ljaaa]J
Stroke =75, 100, 125

••••
Adjustable scope.;6
5.5 Extension ad·uster
Retraction adjuster
KB A c3° Adjustable scope.;6.5

21 (M/2-1 )xKB !;l
- - - - - , - . . . - ~ ~ - - - - . ',C
"'
(N - 1)xLB LC
LB
I
f- I
--$--------• ------ >
-1
f-
~
H
~1
"'=
Across A-A 1
rr, s ·R·03 Do:s/ JB ~ JC
0
g
"t='
HLQ
10
. 89
'••;
77 78
:
39 18 38
;
39
;
18 4 2
"'
..
40.5 12
.
28.5
20 89 77 78 39 18 38 39 18 4 2 40.5 12 38.5
30 99 87 88 48 19 48 48 19 4 2 50.5 12 48.5
40 109 97 98 58 19 58 58 19 4 2 60.5 12 58.5
so 125 113 114 45 48 40 - - 6 3 70.5 18 68.5
75 157 145 146 52 73 46 52 21 6 3 108.5 12 93.5
100 200 188 189 88 80 44 44 36 8 4 151.5 12 118.5
125 225 213 214 88 105 44 44 17 10 5 176.5 12 143.5
·················· ··········-········· ···············---------·········· ···············---------·········· ·············----------··········· ·············-----------

HLQ16{With shock absorber)
12 Max:35
;
Ad'ustable sec e.;22
Max:19.5
@@ @@
ACA1 007-1N
@@ @)@ Retraction ad·uster
HLQ Series
HLQL16 2-M5X0.8 Dp:5
R Stroke= 75, 100, 125
1----,-,""---....,..........._..,.......,"-+---w
:= $-
PA ~~t-------~-~-"
"'
.,;
2-M5X0.8 D :5.5
C
~
21 (M/2-1)xKB "'0.
Cl
a Adjustable scope,,;;6.5
~ KB
A 'a'Q
"'..J. ,--,-,,,,,n---r "'
Li ___ .
11 5.5 M-M5X0.8 D :5
Retraction adjuster
A
AB
·1
AC
fH-J
I "i
(N - 1)xLB LC
LB
I <i} ©
II- I fE
--~ -------• ------ --¢----- ~- ----¢--------e-----e--
-1
II-
j
• ~ fE
"'
~
C.
45 35 13
1 Cl
©5 •0·03 Do:5/ JB JC
HLQ 'f' HLQL 16 x50
Across A-A "'
10
. . 89
•;
77 78 39
:
18 38
;
39
:
18 4 2
..
40.5 12
. .
28.5
20 89 77 78 39 18 38 39 18 4 2 40.5 12 38.5
30 99 87 88 48 19 48 48 19 4 2 50.5 12 48.5
40 109 97 98 58 19 58 58 19 4 2 60.5 12 58.5
50 125 113 114 45 48 40 - - 6 3 70.5 18 68.5
75 157 145 146 52 73 46 52 21 6 3 108.5 12 93.5
100 200 188 189 88 80 44 44 36 8 4 151.5 12 118.5
125 225 213 214 88 105 44 44 17 10 5 176.5 12 143.5
------- ·················· ....... ························-········ ················---------········· ···············---------········· ················---------···········

HLQL 16{With shock absorber)
Retraction adjuster
®® ®® ACA1007-1N
Max:19.5
@@ @@ Adjustable scope,;;22
12 Max:35
Extension adjuster
Adjustable scope ,;;2
HLQ Series
HLQ20
13 AC
1-q--q-1
"'
....
"' ~
--
AB
A ••••
15 6
Adjustable scope,;; 7.5

27
M-M5X0.8 D :8
3 15
(N- 1)xLB LC
"'C. LB 48 36 12
0
I I I
~ I I I
"'z I + I I I
-<:>- -<:>- -<:>- -<:>- -<:>- -<:>-
1-
0 ED
JC
~ HLQ
Across A-A
"'
10
. 108
•:
92.5 94
:
50 18
:
45 46
:
22 4 2
..
46.5
. .
16 32.5
20 108 92.5 94 50 18 40 46 22 4 2 46.5 16 42.5
30 108 92.5 94 50 18 48 46 22 4 2 46.5 16 52.5
40 118 102.5 104 56 22 58 56 22 4 2 56.5 16 62.5
50 136 120.5 122 48 48 42 - - 6 3 72.5 18 72.5
75 169 153.5 155 56 73 55 56 17 6 3 98.5 25 97.5
100 226 210.• 212 112 74 50 56 18 8 4 155.5 25 122.5
125 254 238.5 240 118 96 55 59 37 8 4 183.5 25 147.5
150 282 266.5 268 124 118 62 62 56 8 4 211.5 25 172.5
HLQ20(Wlth shock absorber)
Adjustable scope ,;, 21

ACA1210-1N 15 Max:34
Ad·ustable sco e,;,21
Max:15
HLQ Series
HLQL20
••••
A
AB
...
N
...
<O
14-4-1
13 AC
<P 5+8 .03 Dp:5 JB JC a.

0
\ lit ~
8
'i°
I "' <!) $
I + \
~1 +
* ~I-
* *
~-)-
+ + I I
I I
LB 48 I 36 112
Across A-A
(N - 1)xLB I r.
HLQ
I ,.1-.: : : : .. .
10 108 92.5 94 50 18 45 46 22 4 2 46.5 16 32.5
20 108 92.5 94 50 18 40 46 22 4 2 46.5 16 42.5
30 108 92.5 94 50 18 48 46 22 4 2 46.5 16 52.5
40 118 102.( 104 56 22 58 56 22 4 2 56.5 16 62.5
50 136 120.( 122 48 48 42 - - 6 3 72.5 18 72.5
75 169 153.( 155 56 73 55 56 17 6 3 98.5 25 97.5
100 226 210.' 212 112 74 50 56 18 8 4 155.5 25 122.5
125 254 238.' 240 118 96 55 59 37 8 4 183.5 25 147.5
150 282 266.( 268 124 118 62 62 56 8 4 211.5 25 172.5
HLQL20(Wlth shock absorber)
Retraction adjuster
ACA1210-1 N
Max:15
djustable scope,s;,21
HLQ Series
HLQ25
.,, 15 AC
6
.,,
a,
....
AB
K>-11
~]
A
20 6.5
~
g
Q ii
.:l .,,
0
'j' "'
~
"'.,!,
Across A-A HLQ
10
. 123
•:
105.5 107
:
55 23 55
: :
55 23 4 2
..
58
. .
12 35
20 123 105.5 107 55 23 46 55 23 4 2 58 12 45
30 123 105.5 107 55 23 55 55 23 4 2 58 12 55
40 133 115.5 117 65 23 65 65 23 4 2 68 12 65
50 157 139.5 141 80 32 75 80 32 4 2 92 14 75
75 182 164.5 166 65 72 60 - - 6 3 117 12 100
100 221 203.5 205 88 88 48 44 44 8 4 156 12 125
125 274 256.5 258 132 97 60 66 31 8 4 209 12 150
150 299 281 .5 283 132 122 65 66 56 8 4 234 12 175
HLQ25(With shock absorber)
ACA1412-1N
Ad'ustable scope .; 35
Max:26
HLQ Series
HLQL25
Stroke=75, 100, 125, 150
LJ.~----
20
Retraction adjuster
Across A-A
HLQL25x 75
HLQ
10
. •:
123 105.5 107 55
:
23 55
: :
55 23 4 2
..
58
. .
12 35
20 123 105.5 107 55 23 46 55 23 4 2 58 12 45
30 123 105.5 107 55 23 55 55 23 4 2 58 12 55
40 133 115.5 117 65 23 65 65 23 4 2 68 12 65
50 157 139.5 141 80 32 75 80 32 4 2 92 14 75
75 182 164.5 166 65 72 60 - - 6 3 117 12 100
100 221 203.5 205 88 88 48 44 44 8 4 156 12 125
125 274 256.5 258 132 97 60 66 31 8 4 209 12 150
150 299 281 .5 283 132 122 65 66 56 8 4 234 12 175
HLQL25(With shock absorber)
Max:26
Adjustable scope,;,35
Adjustable scope,;,35
HLQ Series--Accessories
BS: Shock absorber(Extention)

HLQ8-16
Body Mounting D
Accessory t pe
A: Ad'ustable rubber stopper(Both ends) HLQ20/HLQ25
AS: Ad'ustable rubber sto er(Extention)
HLQ: Standard AF: Ad'ustable rubber sto er(Retraction)
HLQL: B: Shock absorber(Both ends)
'
Bore size BF: Shock absorber(Retraction)
G
Accessory selection
' .. . :, .
A(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ6A HiLQBA F-HLQ12A
F
C
Both ends Table Mounting
B(Shock absorber) X F-HLQBB F-HLQ12B
HLQ:
AS(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ6AS F-HLQBAS F-HLQ12AS
Standard Extention
Retraction
BS(Shock absorber)
AF(Adjustable rubber stopper)
X F-HLQBBS
F-HLQ6AF F-HLQBAF
F-HLQ12BS
F-HLQ12AF ~3
.
BF(Shock absorber) X F-HLQBBF F-HLQ12BF I H •I
HLQ:
Both ends
. :, .
A(Adjustable rubber stopper)
B(Shock absorber)
F-HLQ16A
F-HLQ16B
F-HLQ20A
F-HLQ20B
F-HLQ25A
F-HLQ25B
8
: .. 8.5
:
22 12.5
t
14 38 6 11 1.2 M8x 1.0
.
M3 length : 14 14.5 8 12
'
M3 length :14
AS(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ16AS F-HLQ20AS F-HLQ25AS
Standard Extention
BS(Shock absorber) F-HLQ16BS F-HLQ20BS F-HLQ25BS 12 11 29 14 15.5 38 6 11 1.2 M8 x 1.0 M4 length : 16 20 9 12.5 M4 length :12
AF(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ16AF F-HLQ20AF F-HLQ25AF 16 12 36 16 17.5 48 7 14 1.2 M10x 1.0 M5 length : 16 23 10.5 17 M5 length :16
Retraction
BF(Shock absorber) F-HLQ168F F-HLQ208F F-HLQ258F 20 15 44.5 20 22 50 10 17 11 M12 x 1.0 M6 length :20 25 12.5 21 M6 length :20
Accessones\Bore size 6 8 12 25 16 54 22 24 66 12 19 12 M14x1.5 M8 length :20 33 16.5 23 M8 length :20
Both A(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQL6A F-HLQLBA F-HLQL12A
ends B(Shock absorber) x F-HLQLBB F-HLQL128
AF: Adjustable rubber stopper(Retraction, for standard)
~LQL: . 1 Ext . AS(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQBAS F-HLQBAS F-HLQ12AS
ymmetnca ent,on 8S(Shock absorber) x F-HLQBBS F-HLQ12BS
HLQ12-25 HLQ6/HLQ8
R . AF(Adjustabte rubber stopper) F-HLQLBAF F-HLQLBAF F-HLQL12AF
etract,on 8F(Shock absorber) x F-HLQLBBF F-HLQL12BF
Accessones\8ore s12e 16 20 25
Both A(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQL16A F-HLQL20A F-HLQL25A
ends B(Shock absorber) F-HLOL168 F-HLOL208 F-HLOL258
~LQL: t . 1 Ext t' AS(Adjustabte rubber stopper F-HLQ16AS F-HLQ20AS F-HLQ25AS
ymme nca en ,on 8S(Shock absorber) F-HLQ168S F-HLQ208S F-HLQ258S
R . AF(Adjustable rubber stopper F-HLQL16A F-HLQL20AF F-HLQL25A
etract,on 8F(Shock absorber) F-HLQL168 F-HLQL208F F-HLQL258
Note): A=AS+AF; B= BS+BF.
HLQ
Dimensions
AS: Adjustable rubber stopper(Extentlon) =·. ., . ...... : t
Body Mounting i-A---1 6

8
5
5
18
24
19
22.2
11 8
13 14
21 .5 7
21 .5 8.5
8
8
3
3
M2.5 length :6
M3 length :8
M6 x 1.0
M6 x 1.0
f-:;;l.c-i - , ' - - - .
12 5 31 29 18 16 30.5 11 11 4 M4 length :12 M8 x 1.0
M 16 5 37 36 21.5 18 24 12 14 5 M5 length :12 M10x 1.0
20 5 45.5 44 25.5 23 28 15 17 6 M5 length :16 M12x 1.0
25 5 54 53.6 31.6 28 32 16 19 6 M6 length :18 M14x1 .5
D AF: Adjustable rubber stopper(Ratraction, for symmetrical)

E
~
Table Mounting
HLQL6/HLQL8 HLQL12-25
~
I• H • I
=·.
ca
~
6 5 19 10.5 16.5 8 3
8 5 8.5 22 14 21.5 11 4
12 5 11 29 15.5 30.5 11 4
16 5 12 36 17.5 24 14 5
20
25
5
5
15
16
44.5 22 28
54 24 32
17 6
19 6
6
=·.
5
., . ..... 18
:
19 11 8
t
21 .5 7 8 3 M2.5 length :6 M6x 1.0
6 M6 x 1.0 M2.5 length :10 12.5 6.5 10.5 M2.5 length :10 8 5 24 22.2 13 14 21 .5 8.5 8 3 M3 length :8 M6 x 1.0
8 M8 x 1.0 M3 length :14 14.5 8 12 M3 length :14 12 5 31 29 18 16 30.5 11 11 4 M4 length :12 M8 x 1.0
12 M8 x 1.0 M4 length :16 20 9 12.5 M4 length :12 16 5 37 36 21.5 18 24 12 14 5 M5 length :12 M10 x 1.0
16 M10 x 1.0 M5 length :16 23 10.5 17 M5 length :16 20 5 45.5 44 25.5 23 28 15 17 6 M5 length :16 M12x 1.0
20 M12 x 1.0 M6 length :20 25 12.5 21 M6 length :20 25 5 54 53.6 31.6 28 32 16 19 6 M6 length :18 M14x 1.5
25 M14 x 1.5 M8 length :20 33 16.5 23 M8 length :20
~
HLQ Series--Accessories
BF: Shock absorber(Retractlon, for standard)
HLQ20/HLQ25
"'
HLQ8
~
LJJ.
:, .
8 24
=--·
23.5 13 14 38 6 8.5 11 1.2 M8x 1.0 M3 length :8
12 31 29 18 16 38 6 11 11 1.2 M8 x 1.0 M4 length :12
16 37 36 21 .5 18 48 7 12 14 1.2 M10 x 1.0 M5 length :12
20 45.5 44 25.5 23 50 10 15 17 11 M12 x 1.0 M5 length :16
25 54 53.6 31 .6 28 66 12 16 19 12 M14x1.5 M6 length :18
BF: Shock absorber(Retraction, for symmetrical)
HLQL20/HLQL25
HLQ HLQL8
:
8
12
.. 24
31
=--·
23.5
29
13
18
14
16
b
38 6
38 6
8.5
11
11
11
1.2
1.2
M8 x 1.0
M8 x 1.0
.
M3 length :8
M4 length :12
16 37 36 21 .5 18 48 7 12 14 1.2 M10 x 1.0 MS length :12
20 45.5 44 25.5 23 50 10 15 17 11 M12 x 1.0 MS length :16
25 54 53.6 31 .6 28 66 12 16 19 12 M14 x 1.5 M6 length :18
A ___C_o_m_p_a_c_t _sl_id_e_c_y_li_nd_e_r_(R_o_ll_e_r _be_a_r_in_g_)_-- _H_L_S_Se_r_ie_s
D Product series
Series name
DS1-H
8
C>
C:
~ 12
"'
~
-g 16
0
0
20
25
Page 352 457

entrance of impurities into the cylinder.
4. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, pay attention to conduct anti-rust treatment to the su rface.
Bore size Rod size Acting type Pressure area Operating pressure(MPa)
(mm) (mm) (mm') 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Push side 42 8 13 17 21 25 29
6 3 Double acting
Pull side 57 11 17 23 29 34 40
Push side 75 15 23 30 38 45 53
8 4 Double acting
Pull side 101 20 30 40 51 61 71
Push side 170 34 51 68 85 102 119
12 6 Double acting
Pull side 226 45 68 90 113 136 158
Push side 302 60 91 121 151 181 211 HLS
16 8 Double acting
Pull side 402 80 121 161 201 241 281
Push side 471 94 141 188 236 283 330
20 10 Double acting
Pull side 628 126 188 251 314 377 440
Push side 756 151 227 302 378 454 529
25 12 Double acting
Pull side 982 186 295 393 491 589 687
Compact slide cylinder(Roller bearing) AlrTAC
HLS Series
Specification
Bore size(mm) 6 8 12 16 20 25
ActinQ type Double actino
Qperatino pressure 0.15- 0.7MPa(22- 100psi)(1.5- 7.0bar)
SnAAd ranae mm/s 50-500
Stroke tolerance 0-100+1,o >100+1, 5
Cushion tvoe Bumoer(Both ends), Shock absorber
Sensor switches G) DS1-HD N, DS1-HOP
Port size M5 x 0.8 I 1/8"
Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max. stroke (mm)
6 10 20 30 40 50 50
8 10 20 30 40 50 75 75
12 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 100
16 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 125
D Symbol 20 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 150 150
25 10 20 30 40 50 75 100 125 150 150
Product feature
1. Roller bearing incorporating the cylinder, it achieves high precision, D Ordering code
high rigidity, high load, excellent linearity and non-rotate tolerance.
So it can be used in precision assemblage condition.
Model
2. Pin holes for positioning improved HLS: Compact slide cylinder
repeatability of work mounting (Double acting type)(Roller bearing)
HLSL: Symmetrical Compact slide cylinder
(Double acting type)(Roller bearing)
3. Floating jointer design
Piston rod needn't endure additional torque ®
Bore size Adjuster option
4. Dual rod , doubles the output thrust !6, 8, 12, 16, 20, 25 ! __ Blank: Without_adjuster(Basic type) __
HLS Stroke
5. Pin holes for ositionin
Improved repeatability of body mounting
6. Body mounting tap Mounting from 3 Ma net
direction available S: With magnet
__ A: Adjustable rubber stopper(Both ends)____BcS_h_ockabsorber(Both_ends)_________ _
7. Two models (HLQ/HLQL) are available for choosing due to different

designs of sensor slots and flexible cushioning elements.
Standard : HLS
__ AS: Adjustable rubber stopper(Extention) ______BScS_h_o_ck_absorber(E_xtention)___________ _
Retraction
__ AF: Adjustable rubber stopper(Retraction)___ ___BFc Shock_abso_rber(R_etra_ctkm)_ _________ _

Adjustable end-position
G) When the thread is standard, the code is blank.

® B type, BS type, BF type are unavailable for bore size of <ll6.
HLS Series
D Model Selection Method
Please select compact cylinder's type according to following procedure, and cross reference with
data sheets. 4) Moment check
1) Operating conditions(Accord1ng to mounting position and work form) Steps
1. Model used(Bore size, Stroke) Horizontal
2. Type of cushion(Bumper, Shock absrober) 1. Calculate actual moment: Mp, Mpo, My, Myo, Mr, Mro (Nm)
3. Mounting position ofwork(Top, front)
4. Mounting direction(Axial, Vertical)
5. Average speed Va(mm/s)
6. Applied load W(N) Fig. 1
7. Overhang L1, L2, L3(mm)
Explain: L1 is the distance of load's center beyond the end plank's Dynamic moment :
plane. If load's center is not beyond the end plank's plane, Mr=W x (C+L3)/1000
L1 is negative. Static moment :
Mro=(W x a x (C+L3))/ 1000g
Fig. 1: Applied load
Dynamic moment :
My=O
My (
Myo u Static moment:
Myo=(W x a x (C+L3))/1000g
2. Check
2) Kinetic energy check
Mp My
Ste s Dynamic moment: + + -Mr- ,;;;;1
MPmu My.., Mrma~
1. Calculate kinetic energy of load E(J)
Static moment : ~ +~ + ~ ,;;;; 1
E= 1 x \/j_ x ( 1.4 x Va )' Mpomax Myomu Mrornax
Z g 1000
2. Calculate allowable kinetic energy Ea(J) Vertical
Ea = K X Em.. 1. Calculate actual moment: Mp, Mpo, My, Myo(Nm)
K:Mountin work coefficient Fl 2 E :Maximum allowable kineticener Table 1
3. Check that kinetic energy of load doesn't exceed allowable kinetic energy:
E,;;;; Ea
3) Load check
HLS
Dynamic moment :
Ste s
Mp:W x (L2+ 8)/1000
1. Calculate allowable applied load Wa (N)
Wa=K x x W Static moment:
T Mpo- Wx(L2+Bl + Wx a x (L2+B)
- 1000 1000 x g
!K:Mounting work coefficient (Fig 2j W :Maximum allowable a lied load Table 1
2. Check that load(W) doesn't exceed allowable applied load(Wa):

w,;;;;wa
Dynamic moment :
Fig 2: Mounting work coefficient (K)
My=W x (C+L3)/1000
Top Front
Static moment:
Myo- Wx ax (C+L3) + Wx(C+L3)
- 1000g 1000
Mounting work coefficient K= 1 Mounting work coefficient K=0.6

2. Check
Fig 3: Applied load coefficient ( 13 )
Dynamic moment: ~ + ~ ,;;;; 1
Mp.,, MYmu
Static moment: ~ + ~ ,;;;; 1
i=: 0.7 Mpo.,, Myom,.
Q)
~ 0.5 Explain:
~ 0.4 L1, L2, L3: The distance of load center to mount plane(Determined by actuality).
~ 0.3 A, B, C: Correction value for center position distance of moment(Refer to table 2) .
"'
:;; 0.2 Mp.,,, My..,, Mr.,,, Mpo.,,, Myo.,,, Mro..,: Maximum allowable moment(Refer to table 2).
.!!!
a_ g: Acceleration of gravity(g=9.81m/s') .
c.. a: Acceleration of inertia
<(
(Bumper: a= 1600 x (Va/1000)'. Shock absorber: a=400 x (Va/1000)')
W: Load weight(Determined by actuality).
HLS Series
Note: Symbol and unit D Inner structure
A,B,C
.. Correction value for center position distance of moment mm
Basic type
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20
a Acceleration of inertia -
E Kinetic energy J
Ea Allowable kinetic enerQV J
Emax Maximum allowable kinetic energy J
g Acceleration of gravity g=9.81 mis'
K Mountina work coefficient -
L1,L2,L3 Overtiang mm
Mp, My, Mr Dynamic moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Mp_, My.u, Mrm, Maximum allowable dynamic moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Mpo, Mvo, Mro Static moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Mpo_ , Myo.u, Mro.u Maximum allowable static moment(Pitch, Yaw, Roll) Nm
Va Average speed mm/s
w Applied load N • Floating joint Carbon steel
•
13 Magnet holder Brass
Wmax Maximum allowable applied load N
2 Bumper TPU 14 Magnet washer NBR
~ Applied load coefficient
3 Screw Carbon steel 15 Magnet Sintered metal
(Neodymium-iron-boron)
Table 1: Maximum allowable kinetic energy(Emax). Maximum allowable applied load(Wmax)
4 Screw Carbon steel 16 Piston seal NBR
Max. allowable kinetic energy Emax(J) Max allowable 5 Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 17 Piston Brass
Model
Basic type Rubber stopper type Shock absorber type 6 Rod seal NBR 18 C clip Spring steel
HLS6 0.01 0.01 - 4
7 Front cover Aluminum alloy 19 Back cover Aluminum alloy
HLS8 0.024 0.024 0.048 8
8 0-ring NBR 20 Slide table Aluminum alloy
HLS12 0.05 0.05 0.1 15
HLS16 0.1 0.1 0.2 30 9 Bumper TPU 21 Nut Carbon steel
HLS20 0.13 0.13 0.26 40 10 Piston rod A Carbon steel 22 Screw Carbon steel
HLS25 0.22 0.22 0.44 70 11 Piston rod B Stainless steel 23 Screw Carbon steel
12 Body Aluminum alloy 24 Slide guide
combination subassembly
Table 2: Maximum allowable moment(Nm), Correction value for center position distance of moment(mm)
Bore Static moment Dynamic moment Correction value
Stroke
size Mpo... Myo... Mro... Mp... My... Mr... A B C
t·
10 3.3 3.8 2.6 0.7 0.7 0.6 27
20 3.3 3.8 2.6 0.7 0.8 0.6 42
30 3.3 3.8 2.6 0.7 0.8 0.6 52 7.3 16
40 7.2 7.9 3.6 1.3 1.3 0.6 72
' 50
10
12.4
10.1
12.7
9.1
4.7
8.8
1.8
2.5
1.8
2.5
0.6
2.0
87
32
..,..J
20 10.1 9.1 8.8 2.6 2.6 2.0 42
30 10.1 9.1 8.8 2.8 2.8 2.0 57
8 8.5 20
HLS 40 12.4 10.8 10.1 3.4 3.4 2.3 72
50 23.6 24.8 13.9 4.4 4.4 2.1 92
75 32.8 35.3 16.4 4.6 4.6 1.8 132
10 33.0 34.3 30.9 7.3 7.3 5.8 48
20 33.0 34.3 30.9 7.6 7.6 5.8 58
30 33.0 34.3 30.9 7.8 7.8 5.8 68
12 40 33.0 34.3 30.9 8.0 8.0 5.8 78 10 25
50 53.4 49.6 39.7 9.8 9.8 5.8 88
75 78.8 71.9 48.6 14.2 14.2 6.8 125
100 78.8 71 .9 48.6 14.7 14.7 6.8 160
10 33.0 34.3 30.9 8.8 8.8 7.6 43
20 33.0 34.3 30.9 9.2 9.2 7.6 53
30 33.0 34.3 30.9 9.5 9.5 7.6 63
40 33.0 34.3 30.9 10.0 10.0 7.6 78
16 11 30
50 53.4 49.6 39.7 12.2 12.2 7.6 93
75 78.8 71.9 48.6 17.6 17.6 8.9 130
100 78.8 71 .9 48.6 18.2 18.2 8.9 165
125 143.7 144.5 53.3 24.8 24.8 7.8 204
10 60.1 50.5 72.8 14.5 14.5 15.2 47
20 60.1 50.5 72.8 15.2 15.2 15.2 57
30 60.1 50.5 72.8 15.7 15.7 15.2 67
40 60.1 50.5 72.8 16.3 16.3 15.2 82
20 50 60.1 50.5 72.8 16.6 16.6 15.2 92 16.5 35
75 169.3 154.3 114.4 41.2 41.2 22.0 136
100 169.3 154.3 114.4 42.8 42.8 22.0 176
125 169.3 154.3 114.4 43.6 43.6 22.0 205
150 267.5 286.6 145.6 49.0 49.0 20.5 249
10 60.1 50.5 72.8 16.3 16.3 17.6 52
20 60.1 50.5 72.8 17.0 17.0 17.6 62
30 60.1 50.5 72.8 17.4 17.4 17.6 72
40 60.1 50.5 72.8 17.8 17.8 17.6 82
25 50 60.1 50.5 72.8 18.2 18.2 17.6 96 20.3 42
75 169.3 154.3 114.4 45.2 45.2 25.3 141
100 169.3 154.3 114.4 46.2 46.2 25.3 165
125 169.3 154.3 114.4 48.0 48.0 25.3 210
150 267.5 286.6 145.6 65.0 65.0 28.3 254
HLS Series

1. How to mount cylinder:
1. 1) Cylinder can to be mounted from 3 directions Front Mounting
Vertical Mountlng(Bodythread holes) I""' Mo,otlog(Body ~~•• holH)

HLQS M3 x 0.4 0.9 5.0
HLS8 M4 x 0.7 2.1 6.0
HLS12 M5 x 0.8 4.4 8.0
HLS16 M6x1.0 7.4 10.0
Fixing bolt I HLS20 M6x1.0 7.4 13.0
------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------' Top Mounting
Vertical Mounting(Body through holes)
HLS6 M3 x 0.5 0.9 4.0

HLS8 M3 x 0.5 0.9 5.0
HLS12 M4 x 0.7 2.1 5.5
HLS16 M5 x 0.8 4.4 6.0
HLS20 M5 x 0.8 4.4 10.0
HLS25 M6 x 1.0 7.4 13.0
2.3) Since the table is supported by the linear guide, take care not to apply strong impact or
1.2) When mounting an compact slide cylinder, screws of appropriate length should be used
large moment to the guide section.
and tightened properly within the maximum tightening torque. If screws are tightened
2.4) Hold the slide when fastening work pieces to it with bolts, If the body is held while
beyond designed limits, malfunction may occur. If they are tightened insufficiently, it may
result in sliding of falling off from its position. tightening bolts, excessive moment may damage guide section.
Vertical Mounting(Body thread holes)
Model Bolt Max. tightening Max. screw- X

used torque (Nm) 1n depth(mm)
M4 x 0.7 2.1 8.0 Work ieces
M4x0.7 2.1 8.0
M5 x 0.8 4.4 10.0
M6 x 1.0 4.4 10.0
M6 x 1.0 7.4 12.0
M8x1 .25 18.0 16.0
Vertical Mountlng(Body through holes)
Hold the slide and fasten the bolt Hold the body and fasten the bolt
3. About shock absorber:

3. 1) Shock absorbers are expendable parts. Promptly replace them when energy absorbing HLS
capacity decreases.
12.5 3.2) Never turn or adjust the screws on bottom of the shock absorber body. The screws are not
M4 x 0.7 2.8 18.0 for adjusting. Otherwise would cause oil leakage.
M5 x 0.8 5.7 25.0 3.3) Follow the table for ti htenin tor ue of shock absorber to lock nuts.
M5 x 0.8 5.7 28.0
M6 x 1.0 10.0 36.2 Model Shock absorber Tightening torque
HLS6 Without shock absorber
Axial Mounting(Body thread holes)
HLS8 ACA0806-1 N 1.67 Nm
HLS12 ACA0806-1N 1.67 Nm
HLS16 ACA1007-1N 3.14 Nm
4.0 HLS20 ACA1210-1N 3.14 Nm
The screwsT HLS25 ACA1412-1N 10.8 Nm
HLS12 M4 x 0.7 2.1 6.0 are not adjustable otherwise would
HLS16 MS x 0.8 4.4 7.0 cause oil leakage.
HLS20 MS x 0.8 4.4 8.0
4. How to mount sensor switch ,
HLS25 M6 x 1.0 7.4 10.0
4.1) HLS Series are all with magnet.
The matching sensor switches
2. Work Piece Mounting:
are DS1- H, DS1-HL series.
2.1) Work pieces can be mounted on 2 surfaces of the compact slide.
Please refer to page 457 - 480
Front Mounting Top Mounting for details.
4.2) Maintain a minimum spacing
of at least 3mm if two compact
cylinders are used side by side
in order to avoid malfunction.
5. Make sure to connect the compact cylinder to speed controller at the meter-out side, and
the speed of compact cylinder must below 500mm/s .
2.2) When mounting a work piece , tighten the bolts properly at a torque value within the
6. Don't apply a load beyond the range of the operation limits. Different load or torque will
limiting range. Use blots at least 0.5mm shorter than maximum thread depth to prevent
bolts from contacting the guide block. If the bolts are too long, they hit the guide block and cause different deflection to table, please see below for details.
cause damage.
HLS Series
6.1) Table deflection due to pitch moment: 6.3) Table deflection due to roll moment:
Table deflection (arrow) when a load acts upon Table deflect at A when a load acts upon section F at the
the section marked with the arrow at
the full stroke of the compact slide.
!F full .. ro~,, I~@·":J>·
Mp ( Li ,,l ,, ,,,J)/))J, Lr
Lr=24mm
0.020
0.03 ' ' ' '
0.03 -----/ 1------;------- ------~-------;------t-
}Wt±
l 015 ::::::m
_:i:::::::::~e~o~t : _ :::JS:~;io::::j::
- - - !- :ffl
cc
r·02 :::::T~:~:::::j:::::::::::::--i:::S=t ~40~:~f: ;0.010 -------+----------+- --------~- -------'.-s-=~0---+-
~++
0
---.--f-------~
''-~- --'-- __:' ---- ·' ---t~= 1i
g001 ~no• ..
tl0.01
0
Q)
'1ii
' ' '
10
'
15
' ' '
(.).
~
'
f -;
5
-- :
10
;
' '
15
~ ~ : 20" :- 10
!
(])6 Load F (N) (])6 Load F (N) (])6 Load F IN)

Lr=50mm
0.05 0.03 ------;-------;-------;-------;--------;-------;------;---- 0.04
liitl
0.04
0.03
E
§0.03 E
5 0.02
cc
Q0.02
t3
Q)
'1ii001
0
f::
O i i i ' ' i i
g
~0.01
ai
0
20 40 60 20 40
(])$ Load F (N) (])8 Load F (N) (])8 Load F IN)
Lr=65mm
0.10 0.035
- VtV!'."i
' ' ' ' ' '
0.08 0.030 --------:
E 0.025
S=1!0\20\30\40 i ~ i i
~~i
1006 5 0.020
:§004 .Q0.015
i5
~002
0 ~ 20 40 60 80 100
ii 120 20 40 60 80 100 120
~ 0.010
~ 0.005
20 40 60 80 100 120
(])12 Load F (N) (])12 Load F IN) (])12 Load F IN)
HLS
Lr=89mm
0.14 ' ' ' ' ' ' ---•-----.....-----•--
j_ o.o4 _____[_____j_ __ J.Js_ __j__s;ch011;1rnd...__[___ '' ' '' ' '' ' ''
0.035 ----------·-----------·----------·-----------<----
'
''
-----·---
'
L ~ij i: m ~I
0.12 -----!------!----+ S~12~----- i----- :S=100
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
''
'
E
§008
0.10
E o.025
5 0.020 -------~
_ _ _s:1;0_\2~VJ:2:t=
0.030 ----------4-----------~----------t-----------i-----------4---
Sa-~251---
75\ 109__
cc0.06
0 .Q0.015
g0.04 ~ 0.010
~002 --- ~ s;;w j ~ 0.005 ----------t ---------r----------r --------+--
0 50 100 150 200 50 100 150 200 40 80 120 160
(])16 Load F (N) (])16 Load F IN) (])1 6 Load F IN)
Lr=122mm
0.10 -------+-------+-------+------+-------+
' ' ' ' '
-------+---
' 0.040 ---------,------------•-----------•-----------,---------•---
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
''' ''' ''' ''' '''
0.035
E
§0.06
0.08
'20.04
Vi"ct;j'"'! 0.030 S=1i0\2
E 0.025
5 0.020
_Q0.015
~~\~30\40\5~
:
:
Si 75\.1~~,\~~ :
_______
~
t
,
: :
u
Q)
~ 0.010
----- !_________ _! ___________, _________, __ _
~002 ' ' ' ' '
.~ ~ - ~ 0.005 I
I
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
0 100 200 300 100 200 300 4u HU 1LU 1tiu

(])20 Load F (N) (])20 Load F IN) (])20 Load F IN)
Lr=154mm
0.040
1
' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
~~~
r
0.105 '' _________ _,_ '' '' ''
45 0.035 ' ' ' '
0.090 0.0 $~ S=i50 r=125 is=10Q S=75 0.030 S=10\2 ~91~31l\40\50 S'j?S\100\1~5 ______ !__ _
0.075 i : : S=l 50 i
eoo30 --- ~ : -- + --- ' ______ )_ --,--~"'!--- E 0.025 ---------~------- ---t - ------- ' ---------~---------r---
I 0.060 5o.020 ---------~ --- ---- -+---- ----t-----------~---------t---
,~Ffff1
..§. . ; : ' : !S=2Q
; 0.045 .Q0.015
:::::::J ::::::::t :
I°'" · · ~ 0.010 :::::--:-1 _:-_:::::: !:::::::::: !
0
.,
tl 0.030
~0.015 ~ 0.005
100 200 300 400 50 100 150 200
100 200 300 400
(])25 Load F IN) (])25 Load F IN)
(])25 Load F (N)
Bili
HLS Series
D Dimensions
HLS6 HLSL6
t
;~[~
1. 1
AC
A
AB
Adjustable scope,,;s
ILS
I
:I
'!'!
"'a. (M/2-1) x KB
5.5
0 11 0
,,,,~--,-'' - "'
""'.
C, KB '!'!
C,
X X
"'
N
::;;
"'I
::;;
... I N 1Q
"' '!'! 10
"'
a. 0
0
'!'! ,,,,
"'
""'. C, ' Retraction
11 (M/2-1)xKB X "--"
C,
adjuster
X
'!'!
"'I
::;; 5.5 19.5
N
::;; N M-M3X0 .5 Dp:4
...
I
A
I I AB : I
"'
~rrrP========;113
R 2-M2.5X0.45 D :3.5
6µ1. AC .1
co
a. LC JC
0
10 5
A HLS
Across A-A LB
Across A-A
N-1 x LB
C!>3'I03 Dp:2.5
10
. 48
.:- '·-·=-·-~
41.5 42
·=· ,.:
20 11 20 25 6 4 2
.. .:- ,,_
19 8 21.! 10
. 48
j :-
41.5 42
·1,-·:-·-;·=- ··=
20 11 20 25 6 4 2
..
19
•=· ,,_
8 21.5
20 58 51.5 52 20 21 30 35 6 4 2 28 9 3U 20 58 51.5 52 20 21 30 35 6 4 2 28 9 31 .5
30 68 61.5 62 20 31 20 20 11 6 3 39 8 4U 30 68 61.5 62 20 31 20 20 11 6 3 39 8 41.5
40 90 83.5 84 30 43 28 30 13 6 3 51 18 SU 40 90 83.5 84 30 43 28 30 13 6 3 51 18 51.5
50 106 99.5 100 48 41 38 24 17 6 4 61 24 6U 50 106 99.5 100 48 41 38 24 17 6 4 61 24 61.5
HLS Series
HLSB
AC
M-M3X0.5 Dp:5
6.5 3.5
Adjustable scop ,;;7.

<D3'io3 Dp:
~8.5~ 2-M3X0.5D :4.5

PA
4
R 14.5
a:, (N-1) x LB LC
a 12.5 LB
":
A
-----
HLS - - - - - -
Across A-A
JB
<D3'i03 D :3
;o
10
. 56
•:
48.5 49 20
:
17 25
: :
28 9 4 2
..
20 12
.
23.5
20 61 53.5 54 30 12 25 30 12 4 2 30 7 33.5
30 72 64.5 65 20 33 40 20 13 4 3 41 7 43.5
40 90 82.5 83 28 43 50 28 15 4 3 56 10 53.5
50 108 100.5 101 46 43 38 23 20 6 4 61 23 63.5
75 158 150.5 151 56 83 50 28 27 6 5 94 40 88.5
HLSB(With shock absorber)

Adjustable scope
St.max= 18.5
ACA0806-1N Extension adjuster
ACA0806-1N
8.5
-+$ - - $ , - @---<+>- -
-,- - - - ---<jr - -- - -,- -
Retraction adjuster
HLS Series
HLSL8
R
4
PA
2-M3X0.5 Dp:4.5
0
Adjustable scop,U.5
12 (M/2-1) x KB
KB
Adjustable scop,o
A
I i
l - ~
- - AB _ ______,
: I
HLS
12.5 7
N-1 xLB LC
Across A-A
10
. 56
•:
48.5 49
:
20 17 25
: :
28 9 4 2
..
20 12
.
23.5
20 61 53.5 54 30 12 25 30 12 4 2 30 7 33.5
30 72 64.5 65 20 33 40 20 13 4 3 41 7 43.5
40 90 82.5 83 28 43 50 28 15 4 3 56 10 53.5
50 108 100.5 101 46 43 38 23 20 6 4 61 23 63.5
75 158 150.5 151 56 83 50 28 27 6 5 94 40 88.5
HLSLS{With shock absorber)

Retraction adjuster
-4-----~----4--
-+~---~+--~---®-·- -
Extension adjuster
Adjustable scope
St.max=18.5
HLS Series
HLS12
Adj stable scop,;;5

00
<'>
6 KB
..,.X Cl>4 "lf03 Dp:3.5 M/2-1 x KB
::;;
..,.I 2- M4X0.7D :6 Port: 2- MSX0.8 C,
X
PA PB 11 9.5
"'
::;;
I
N
"' :::::::: 1
(N-1) x,...~~B__
LB_ ___,,
HLS
JB A "'
oo JC
Cl>4 '%03 Dp:3.5 C.
0
10
. 80
. .
:
70 71
:
40 15
:-·:
35 40 15 4 2
..
39.5
·:-
10
·-
25
20 80 70 71 40 15 35 40 15 4 2 39.5 10 35
30 80 70 71 40 15 35 40 15 4 2 39.5 10 45
40 92 82 83 25 42 50 25 17 4 3 51 .5 10 55
50 112 102 103 36 51 35 36 15 6 3 61 .5 20 65
75 158 148 149 72 61 55 36 25 6 4 87.5 40 90
100 212 202 203 76 111 65 38 35 6 5 131 .5 50 115
HLS12(Wlth shock absorber)

Ad'ustable sco e
St.max=17.5 Extension adjuster
ACA0806-1N
Retraction adjuster
•••
HLS Series
HLSL12 R 20
PA
2-M4X0.7D :6 Port: 2-MSX0.8
0
<X)
0
<ll4' ·03 D :3.5 X
(M/2-1) x KB '°
::;;
KB I
N
I
1:::±:;::;;;:;;;:::===::::::j::l==::::$=."==~==::::l!~..i
csr;'""'"•
Retraction adjuster
ll----~--- ---- -:
9 5
~
0.
0
<X)
~
'°I
::;;
z
HLS
A LB
Across A-A N-1 x LB LC
I •: : =-·: .. ·:-
·-
10 80 70 71 40 15 35 40 15 4 2 39.5 10 25
20 80 70 71 40 15 35 40 15 4 2 39.5 10 35
30 80 70 71 40 15 35 40 15 4 2 39.5 10 45
40 92 82 83 25 42 50 25 17 4 3 51 .5 10 55
50 112 102 103 36 51 35 36 15 6 3 61.5 20 65
75 158 148 149 72 61 55 36 25 6 4 87.5 40 90
100 212 202 203 76 111 65 38 35 6 5 131 .5 50 115
HLSL12(With shock absorber)
Retraction adjuster
Extension adjuster
St.max= 17. 5
HLS Series
HLS16
AB
A
37.5
Adjuslable scop,;,6.5
co 20
ci 21 (M/2-1) x KB ~
X Cl
"'
:::;
x
....I 2- M5X0 .8 Dp:5.5 Port: 2- M5X0.8 <C
:::;
I
N
PA
6.5
R
LC
LB
HLS
Across A-A
10
. 87
•:
75 76
:
40 16
:
35
:
40 16 4 2
..
42.5 8
. .
28.5
20 87 75 76 40 16 35 40 16 4 2 42.5 8 38.5
30 87 75 76 40 16 35 40 16 4 2 42.5 8 48.5
40 97 85 86 50 16 40 50 16 4 2 52.5 8 58.5
50 112 100 101 30 51 30 30 21 6 3 63.5 12 68.5
75 162 150 151 70 61 55 35 26 6 4 90.5 35 93.5
100 210 198 199 70 109 65 35 39 6 5 118.5 55 118.8
125 260 248 249 70 159 70 35 19 8 7 153.5 70 143.5
HLS16(Wilh shock absorber)
Extension adjuster
Retraction adjuster
HLS Series
HLSL 16 R
2-MSX0.8 Dp:5.5
0
21 (M/2-1) x KB
KB
Ad·ustable scop,;;6.5
12 6 37.5
A
AB
0
JB ~ JC
A "'
HLS
N-1 xLB LC
Across A-A
10
. 87
••:
75 76 40
:
16
:
35 40
:
16 4 2
..
42.5 8
.
28.5
20 87 75 76 40 16 35 40 16 4 2 42.5 8 38.5
30 87 75 76 40 16 35 40 16 4 2 42.5 8 48.5
40 97 85 86 50 16 40 50 16 4 2 52.5 8 58.5
50 112 100 101 30 51 30 30 21 6 3 63.5 12 68.5
75 162 150 151 70 61 55 35 26 6 4 90.5 35 93.5
100 210 198 199 70 109 65 35 39 6 5 118.5 55 118.8
125 260 248 249 70 159 70 35 19 8 7 153.5 70 143.5
Retraction adjuster
--t
18.5
ACA1007-1N
Adjustable scope
Extension adjuster
St.max=25
HLS Series
HLS20 13 AC
"'
C
18 6
::;
-
~-
r·
Adjustable scop,;;;6.5 Extension adjuster

A
AB
J
: I
46.5
rr"",-- ---- 1 I J:;;~
11
11
11
I
I
I
I
I
I
flj_---w-
F ~
' ' ' --~
00
'-"
A ·ustable scop,;;;7.5
00 KB
ci_
D 27 M/2-1 x KB
~
0 2- M6X1 Dp:6
X D
'-"
::.
I
PA x
<O
<O ::.
I
"'
6.5
R
N-1 x LB LC
28 12 LB
HLS
I . -..: : : : .. . .
10 97 81.5 83 35 25 50 45 15 4 2 40 43.5 10 32.5
20 97 81.5 83 35 25 50 45 15 4 2 40 43.5 10 42.5
30 97 81.5 83 35 25 50 45 15 4 2 40 43 .5 10 52.5
40 107 91.5 93 35 35 60 55 15 4 2 50 53.5 10 62.5
50 122 106. 108 35 50 35 35 15 6 3 35 68.5 10 72.5
75 161 145. 147 70 54 60 35 19 6 4 60 107.5 10 97.5
100 214 198. 200 70 107 70 35 37 6 5 70 115.5 55 122.5
125 268 252. 254 76 155 70 38 41 8 6 70 154.5 70 147.5
150 320 304. 306 88 195 80 44 19 8 7 80 186.5 90 172.5
HLS20(With shock absorber)

Adjustable scope
Extension adjuster
St.max=23.5
46.5
~ - - - ~- - - $ - IL.....tJ------r
- ~ - ----{®- ~ -
Retraction adjuster
••
HLS Series
HLSL20
PA 0
0
co 2-M6X1 Dp:6 x
<C
0 :;;;
~ 27 (M/2-1)x KB I
::;;
<C
I KB "'
Adjustable scop-.7.5
I i
II
'I'
I I
I
""==='- - ---- J Adjustable scop-.6
18 6 46.5
A
I AB
I
ITT- ~~
,
I ____- ~ - - - - - - - - ,
AC
I
JB
"'
.;' JC
g '""""'"""'11'"777\. ----
x
3
<C
:;;;
I
z~£aj
HLS
A LB
28 12
N-1 xLB LC
Across A-A
10
. 97
•:
81.5 83
:
35 25
:
50
:
45 15 4 2 40
..
43.5 10
. .
32.5
20 97 81 .5 83 35 25 50 45 15 4 2 40 43.5 10 42.5
30 97 81.5 83 35 25 50 45 15 4 2 40 43.5 10 52.5
40 107 91.5 93 35 35 60 55 15 4 2 50 53.5 10 62.5
50 122 106.5 108 35 50 35 35 15 6 3 35 68.5 10 72.5
75 161 145.5 147 70 54 60 35 19 6 4 60 107.5 10 97.5
100 214 198.5 200 70 107 70 35 37 6 5 70 115.5 55 122.5
125 268 252.5 254 76 155 70 38 41 8 6 70 154.5 70 147.5
150 320 304.5 306 88 195 80 44 19 8 7 80 186.5 90 172.5
Retraction adjuster
-$- - - t - - - $
- $@ - ----@- ~ -
14.5
ACA1210-1N
Adjustable scope
St.max=23.5 Extension adjuster
HLS Series
HLS25
"'
C 15 AC
g"'
--
-
A
AB
~
I
M-M6X1 Dp:13
<O
"'
Adjustable scop,;;8.5
0
2-M8X1.25 D :6.5
PA "'
"!
><
"'
::;;
I
"'
(N-1)xLB LC
LB
HLS
Across A-A
10
. 108
•:
90.5 92 45
=--·-
22
•:•:• ••:
50 45 22 4 2 40
..
47
•:
12
·-
35
20 108 90.5 92 45 22 50 45 22 4 2 40 47 12 45
30 108 90.5 92 45 22 50 45 22 4 2 40 47 12 55
40 118 100.5 102 55 22 60 55 22 4 2 50 57 12 65
50 131 113.5 115 35 55 35 35 20 6 3 35 70 12 75
75 172 154.5 156 70 61 60 35 26 6 4 60 90 33 100
100 213 195.5 197 70 102 70 35 32 6 5 70 119 45 125
125 271 253.5 255 76 154 75 38 40 8 6 75 155 67 150
150 311 293.5 295 80 190 80 40 30 8 7 80 180 82 175
HLS25(Wlth shock absorber)

Extension ad·uster
26 -t -t
I I
-~ -- ~ -
I I
Retraction adjuster
Nii
HLS Series
HLSL25 R
PA
2-M8X1 .25 D :6.5
0
M/2-1 xKB
KB
M
N
56.5
A
~
AB
ciJN
6 '%03 D :6 JB
AC
JC
~
I
HLS
A LB
N-1 x LB LC
10
. Across A-A
108
•:
90.5 92
=--·- -~·=· ··=
45 22 50 45 22 4 2 40 47
.. .:• ·-
12 35
20 108 90.5 92 45 22 50 45 22 4 2 40 47 12 45
30 108 90.5 92 45 22 50 45 22 4 2 40 47 12 55
40 118 100.5 102 55 22 60 55 22 4 2 50 57 12 65
50 131 113.5 115 35 55 35 35 20 6 3 35 70 12 75
75 172 154.5 156 70 61 60 35 26 6 4 60 90 33 100
100 213 195.5 197 70 102 70 35 32 6 5 70 119 45 125
125 271 253.5 255 76 154 75 38 40 8 6 75 155 67 150
150 311 293.5 295 80 190 80 40 30 8 7 80 180 82 175
HLSL25(Wlth shock absorber)

Retraction ad·uster
-<j>- -<j>-
1 I
-~ - +~ --
26 I I
-<l>- -<l>-
Adjustable s ope
Extension adjuster
St.max=37.5
HLS Series--Accessories
Body Mounting
(j)
Accessory type
A: Adjustable rubber stopper(Both ends)
HLS20/HLS25
AF: Adiustable rubber stoooer(Retraction)
B: Shock absorber(Both ends)
I
BF: Shock absorber(Retraction)
Bore size
(j) The list accessories are for HLS cylinder. Accessories that are adaptable to
other cylinder are not shown. Please refer to accessory list for selection and G
ordering information.
Accessory selection
' ... :, .
A(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ6A F-HLSBA F-HLS12A
Table Mounting
C
Both ends
B(Shock absorber) F-HLSBB F-HLS12B
~ 3
X
HLS:
AS(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ6AS F-HLQBAS F-HLQ12AS
Standard Extention
BS(Shock absorber) X F-HLQBBS F-HLQ12BS
Retraction
AF(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ6AF F-HLQBAF F-HLQ12AF I. H 'I
BF(Shock absorber)
Accessones\Bore size
X
16
F-HLQBBF
20
F-HLQ12BF
25
:, . =--• . •
B h d A(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLS16A F-HLS20A F-HLS25A 8 8.5 22 12.5 14 38 6 11 1.2 M8x 1.0 M3 Length: 14 14.5 8 12 M3 Length: 14
at en s B(Shock absorber) F-HLS16B F-HLS20B F-HLS25B 12 11 29 14 15.5 38 6 11 1.2 M8x 1.0 M4 Length: 16 20 9 12.5 M4 Length: 12
HLS:
Slandard Extention AS(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ16AS F-HLQ20AS F-HLQ25AS 16 12 36 16 17.5 48 7 14 1.2 M10 x 1.0 MS Length: 16 23 10.5 17 MS Length: 16
BS(Shock absorber) F-HLQ16BS F-HLQ20BS F-HLQ25BS 20 15 44.5 20 22 50 10 17 11 M12 x 1.0 M6 Length: 20 25 12.5 21 M6 Length: 20
Retraction AF(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLS16AF F-HLS20AF F-HLS25AF 25 16 54 22 24 66 12 19 12 M14x 1.5 MB Length: 20 33 16.5 23 MB Length: 20
BF(Shock absorber) F-HLS16BF F-HLS20BF F-HLS25BF
Accessones\Bore size 6 8 12 AF: Adjustable rubber stopper(Retraction)
Both A(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQL6A F-HLSLBA F-HLSL12A
ends B(Shock absorber) x F-HLSLBB F-HLSL12B For standard type For symmetrical type
~LSL: t. 1 Ext r AS(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQ6AS F-HLQBAS F-HLQ12AS
D
ymme nca en ion BS(Shock absorber) x F-HLQBBS F-HLQ12BS
R t er AF(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLQL6AF F-HLSLBAF F-HLSL 12AF
era ,on BF(Shock absorber) x F-HLSLBBF F-HLSL12BF
Accessones\Bore size 16 20 25
Both A(Adjustable rubber stopper) F-HLSL 16A F-HLSL20A F-HLSL25A
HLSL: ends B(Shock absorber) F-HLSL16B F-HLSL20B F-HLSL25B
s t . 1Ext f AS(AdJustable rubber stopper F-HLQ16AS F-HLQ20AS F-HLQ25AS
ymme nca en ,on BS(Shock absorber) F-HLQ16BS F-HLQ20BS F-HLQ25BS
R . AF(Adjustable rubber stopper
etract,on BF(Shock absorber)
F-HLSL16AF F-HLSL20AF
F-HLSL16BF F-HLSL20BF
F-HLSL25AF
F-HLSL25BF :, . ., ' ' - - ,- . : t
Note): A=AS+AF; B=BS+BF. 6 5 18 19 11 8 21 .5 7 8 3 M2.5 Length: 6 M6x 1.0

8 5 24 23.5 13 14 21.5 8.5 11 3 M3 Length: 8 M8x 1.0
Dimensions 12 5 31 29 18 16 21 .5 11 11 4 M4 Length: 12 M8x 1.0
AS: Adjustable rubber stopper(Extention) 16 5 37 37.5 23 18 24 12 14 5 MS Length: 12 M10 x 1.0
Body Mounting 20 5 45.5 47 28.5 23 28 15 17 6 MS Length: 16 M12x 1.0
25 5 54 56 34 28 32 16 19 6 M6 Length: 18 M14x1.5
M
----,
BF: Shock absorber(Retraction)
For standard type HLS20/HLS25
Table Mounting
:, . ., . ..
.
HLSL20/HLSL25
11
~ : t
'
6 5 7 19 10.5 16.5 8 3
C!)
8 5 8.5 22 14 21 .5 11 4
12 5 11 29 15.5 30.5 11 4
16 5 12 36 17.5 24 14 5
20 5 15 44.5 22 28 17 6 For symmetrical type
25 5 16 54 24 32 19 6
:,11: ; . • :, .
6 M6 x 1.0 M2.5 Length: 10 12.5 6.5 10.5 M2.5 Length: 10
8 24 14 38 8.5 11 1.2 M8 x 1.0 M3 Length: 8
8 M8 x 1.0 M3 Length: 14 14.5 8 12 M3 Length: 14
12 31 29 18 16 38 11 11 1.2 M8 x 1.0 M4 Length: 12
12 M8x 1.0 M4 Length: 16 20 9 12.5 M4 Length: 12
16 M10 x 1.0 M5 Length: 16 23 10.5 17 M5 Length: 16 16 37 37.5 23 18 48 7 12 14 1.2 M10 x 1.0 MS Length: 12
20 M12 x 1.0 M6 Length: 20 25 12.5 21 M6 Length: 20 20 45.5 47 28.5 23 50 10 15 17 11 M12x 1.0 MS Length: 16
25 M14 x 1.5 MB Length: 20 33 16.5 23 MB Length: 20 25 54 56 34 28 66 12 16 19 12 M14x 1.5 M6 Length: 18
Rod less magnetic cylinder--RMS Series
D Product series
Mounting type
Series name
Basic LB FA
RMS Series 10
C,
C: 16
t5 20
"'
~
.c 25
::,
0
D
32
40
RMSP Series
g,
16
t5
"'
Q) 20
:c
::,
0 32
D
RMSF Series 16
0,
.!=
u 20
"'
~ 25
.c
::,
0
D 32
40
Page 370 372

1. The maxi load to move must be less than the
~ 1200 1,,..,n
-- --
theoretical holding force. Q)
~
.le 1000
g,
,.....
~ ,-oo
'o 800
0 ~
I
--
--
.c I
600 ...- '
iii -"'
"
~ 400 ,-on
0
Q)
200
~- - --- - I '<'
.c 10
t- I '<' IV
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Pressure (MPa)
2. Horizontal mounting, the permissible radial load must be lower than the figures in the chart below.
Bore size Max. load w

10 1.1kq
·- ~
16 2.8kq RMS
20 4.7kq
I lw 25 6.8kQ
32 9.7k.a
Horizontal mounting(radial load) 40 15.8ka
3. Vertical mounting, the allowable direction moment must be lower than the figures in the chart below,
the dimensions of geometrical can be determined by the relation graph between loading and stroke.
r
Bore size Allowable direction moment Mp
10 0.50kgf · m
16 1.20k_gf · m
20 2.45kgf · m
25 3.92kgf , m
32 8.83kaf · m
40 13.7kaf · m
Note) Loading should be used with oriented device, example: Allowable load (W)
(Weight of oriented device+Loading
Horizontal oriented device Loading table =Allowable load)
(safety value)
w
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of impurities into the cylinder.
6. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, pay attention to conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust jam cap shall be
••
Rod less magnetic cylinder AlrTAC
RMS Series
Specification
. . . . . . . . . . .
Bore size (mm) 16 I 16 I 20 I 25 I 32 I 40 I 16 I 20 I 32
Operatinq pressure 0.15-0. 7MPa(23-100psi)(1.5-7bar)
Proof pressure 1.0MPa(145psi)(1 a.Obar)
Speed ranae mm/s 50- 400
Stroke tolerance mm 0-250 + ~O 251-1000 +~.S 1001- +~O
Cushion tvoe Variable cushion+Fixed cushion
Port size G) M5x 0.8 I 1/8' I 1/4' I M5x0.8I 1/8'
Safe holdinq force N 60 I 140 I 200 I 360 I 550 I 850 I 140 I 200 I 550
D Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max stroke(mm)
10 50 100 150 200 250 300 1000
16 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 1500
20 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 2000
25 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 2500
32 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 3000
40 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 3000
Symbol Note) Consult us for non-standard stroke.
D Product feature
1. This magnetic cylinder is basically a pneumatic rod less cylinder featuring
a mobile piston fitted with annular magnets. The mobile carriage is also
equipped with magnets to provide magnetic coupling (carriage/piston). Version
The carriage slide freely along the main tube. Blank: basic version
2. It is dust-proof as the isolation between the carriage and piston. P: P size version
3. It is compact in space. F: F size version
4. The non adjustable rubber bumpers and the adjustable pneumatic
cushioning on both ends of the cylinder ensure the smooth action. Bore size
Series name Bore size
RMS 10 Stroke
RMS, RMSF 16, 20, 25, 32, 40 IRefer to stroke table for details I
RMSP 16, 20, 32
RMS
Remark:
G) RMSF40 series do not have FA mounting accessories.
® Blank on thread code means metric Mthread. There is only metric thread for CD 16. If G or NPT thread is needed,
please comment.
RMS Series
Cl Inner structure and material of major parts Cl Dimensions
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
..... A+Stroke
1 End cap Aluminum alloy
3 Piston seal TPU
4 Maanet washer Carbon steel
5 Magnet Rare-earth material
6 Magnet washer Carbon steel
8 Wear rina Wear resistant material
9 Scraping dust ring Plastics
10 CClip Sprina steel
11 Barrel Stainless steel A+Stroke
12 Cushion 0-ring TPU
13 Washer Stainless steel
IITJllt• •I :
14 Cover Aluminum alloy
RMS10 81 63 9.5 38 25 M1 0x 1.0 9 14 4 15
15 Maanet Rare-earth material
RMS16 103 83 10 57 M10 x 1.0 10 14 4
16 Connectina rod Stainless steel
RMSP16 112 92 14.5 57 35 M1 0 x 1.0 10 14 4 20
17 Wearrina Wear resistant material
RMSF16 205 181 34 80 M16x 1.5 12 24 8
18 Bumoer NBR
RMS20 132 106 15 66 M20 x 1.5 13 26 8
19 Nut Stainless steel
RMSP20 143 115 19.5 66 40 M20 x 1.5 14 26 8 25
RMSF20 217 185 29.5 90 M22x1.5 16 29 7
RMS25 137 111 15 70 M26 x 1.5 13 32 8
46 30
RMSF25 238 206 375 90 M22 x 1.5 16 29 7
RMS32 156 124 16 80 M26 x 1.5 32 8
RMSP32 165 133 20.5 80 60 M26 x 1.5 16 32 8 36
RMSF32 270 238 48 110 M30 x 1.5 36 7
RMS40 182 150 22 92 M32 x 2.0 41 10
70 16 46
RMSF40 327 295 44.5 130 M38 x 1.5 46 8
. .. .
lllHI I •
RMS10
RMS16
RMSP16
-
-
-
M3 x 0.5
M4 x 0.7
M4 x 0.7
4
5
7
:
30
35
34
16
19
25
24
29
I
16.5 MS x 0.8
MS x 0.8
5
5.5
7.5
17
22
I
RMS
RMSF16 8 3 M5 x 0.8 7.5 26 26 77.5 20
RMS20 - M4 x0.7 5.5 50 25 28 1/8' 7.5
RMSP20 - M5 x0.8 7 40 30 37.5
1/8"
10 29
RMSF20 8 2.5 M5 x 0.8 8.5 32 32 76 15
RMS25 - M5 x 0.8 7.5 50 30 30.5 1/8" 7.5
33.5
RMSF25 10 3 M6 x 1.0 10 36 36 85 1/8' 20
RMS32
RMSP32
RMSF32
RMS40
-
-
10
-
-
-
3.5
-
M6 x 1.0 8
M6 x 1.0 9
8
-
12.5
50
48
60
40
48
40
37
41 .5
95
45
1/8"
1/8"
1/4'
8
10
2!l
11
39.5
49.5
RMSF40 12 4.5 M8 x 1.25 16 50 56 122 1/4' 25
MctJI
RMS Series
<ll16-<t>32
Accessor t e CD
TBB ,--------. TBB
LB: LB T e ~ -~ --- ~ - ~~
Model ftn::"~ '1'
L_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ J
'1' ~
Bore size
C+Stroke
CD The list accessories are for RMS cylinder. Accessories that are adaptable to other cylinder
are not shown. Please refer to accessory list for selection and ordering information.
<ll40
D Accessory selection BB BB
4Y44{1,ill4iiftffli41,,t,I,M
~Mount1ng
. accessones. rFA
rLB~---+1-
. ·. ~ ~ ~ 1
. ·.
RMS
~ ~ - - +t-·.~
.- ~~
RMSP RMSF
"i(~===~\t_
=Ji ~f
~l -¢
IL _______________ JI
-$- i
D Dimensions
C+Stroke
16 35 2.5 20 42 33 5.5 83 92 10 10
20 40 4 34 75 60 106 115 13 14
25 46 4 40 75 60 111 13
4-<l>AP
L ________ _J
32 60 4 40 75 60 124 133 16 16
40 70 5 52 36 82 66 150 16
AF
AC+Stroke AE
AA+Stroke
<!>16- <ll25
. AA AC C F
Bore size\ltem RMS RMSP RMS RMSP RMS RMSP RMS RMSP BB DB
16 113 122 101 110 83 92 10 10
20
25
32
158
167
184
167
193
142
151
170
151
179
106
111
124
115
133
13
13
16
14
16
1r ;J!ctf=~~:_:J-I.c'!J~
40 216 196 150 16 C+Stroke F
Bore s1ze\ltem AE AF AH AL AP AQ AT B
<!>32
16 42 33 20 9 5.5 6 2.5 35
20 43 30 23 18 6.5 8 3 40
54 40 26 20 6.5 8 4 46 i $ ~ ~
62
75
46
55
33
38
23
23
7
9
7
10
4
5
60
70 /~~~l------e------EFJ~~+~
~-- --f) ------ -¢ ____ J
C+Stroke
<!>16 - <ll25
:, . .. :I
16 35 4 30 52 40 5.5 181 12
20 40 4 38 64 50 6.5 185 16
25 46 4 38 64 50 6.5 206 16
32 60 4 50 36 84 70 6.5 238 16
<!>32, <ll40 D List for ordering code of accessories

F C+Stroke
Mounting accessories
Bore s1ze\accessories Cylinder model LB
FA
:::. RMS
<(
F- RMS16LB F-PB12FA
16 RMSP
RMSF F- RMSF16LB F- Ml12FA
!;;: RMS
AQ AL AL F- RMS20LB F- MF20FA
AC+Stroke 20 RMSP
AA+Stroke RMSF F- RMSF20LB F- MA20FA
:
16
.. 221 209 44 32 20 14 5.5 '.
6 2.5 35 181 12
25
RMS
RMSF
RMS
F- RMS25LB
F- RMSF25LB
F- MF25FA
F- MA20FA
F-RMS32LB F-MF25FA
20 235 219 54 40 23 17 6.5 8 3 40 185 16 32 RMSP
25 256 240 54 40 26 17 6.5 8 4 46 206 16 RMSF F-RMSF32LB F-MA40FA
280 RMS F-RMS40LB F-MF40FA
...
32 266 66 52 33 14 28 7 7 4 60 238 16
40 RMSF F-RMSF40LB -
40 353 333 80 60 38 19 30 9 10 5 70 295 16
A ___R_o_dl_e_ss_ m_a_gn_e_t_ic_c_y_lin_d_e_r_(W_i_th_g_u_i_de_)_- _-_ R_M_T_S_e_r_ie_s
Product series
Series name
CS1-G DS1-G
RMT Series
Page 374 457

1. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of
impurities into the cylinder.
3. Anti-freezing measure shalt be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent moisture freezing .
4. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, pay attention to conduct anti- rust treatment to the surface.
RMT
Rod less magnetic cylinder(With guide) AlrTAC
RMT Series
Specification
Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40
ActinA type Double actinA
Operatinq pressure 0.18-0.7MPa(28-100osi(1.8-7bar)
Proof pressure 1 OMPa(145osi)(10.0bar)
Temperature ("C) -10-60
SnAAd ranae (mm/s) 50-400
Stroke tolerance (mm) 0-250+1° 251-1000+1 5 1001-+/io
Cushion type Fixed cushion Shock absorber(Available)
Safe holding force (N) 140 1200 1320 Issa 1850
Port size G) M5 x 0.8 I 1/8" 11/4"
G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Stroke
D Symbol Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Max stroke(mm)
16 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 750
20 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 1000
25 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 1500
32 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 1500
40 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 750 800 900 1000 1500
D Product feature Note) Consult us for non-standard stroke.
1. This magnetic cylinder is basically a pneumatic rod less cylinder featuring
a mobile piston fitted with annular magnets. The mobile carriage is also
equipped with magnets to provide magnetic coupling (carriage/piston).
The carriage slide freely along the main tube.
2.11 is dust-proof as the isolation between the carriage and piston.
3. It is compact in space.
4. The non adjustable rubber bumpers and the adjustable pneumatic Model
cushioning on both ends of the cylinder ensure the smooth action. !RMT: Rod less magnetic cylinder(With guide)!
if shock absorber be used, the cushioning effect is more perfection.
5. Double guides ensure high precision and can endure proper side load Bore size
or prejudicial load. l16,20. 2s.32,4o I Cushion type
Blank: With two adjustable nuts
~
Stroke
Ma net A: With two shock absorbers
RMT
Remark:
~
G) Blank on thread code means metric Mthread. There is only metric thread for Cl> 16. If Gor NPTthread is needed,
please comment.
Mounting type
Top bolt mounting
Bottom bolt mounting

RMT Series
D Installation and application 1.3.3) Horizontal acting(Loading barycenter and acting direction is coplanar.
1. How to determine load: Loading center and slide table center offset):
1.1) The maxi load to move must be less than the theoretical holding force.
lwl =
1200
1100
~ 1000
Q)
i~=:,iJ;ti;r :I - :c:'~
1
fc 900
.E 800
0
C)
.!= 700
"C
.,:; 600
cij 500
I/
,r, 10 I
:, -
Max. load
W(kg)
.
I cr x 17.5 I
I 5.0+L, I
I
cr x36
6.0+L,
I
I
cr x60
6.0+L,
I
I
cr X 105
7.0+ L,
I
··-
cr x200
B.O+L,
:"; 400
~
0 300 Cll2,.L - - - - -
~ 200 ., , , . v ,.,.,.--- ---- 1.3.4) Incline acting(Acting direction and barycenter is vertical):
f-
100
~ ---
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0. 7 0.8 0.9 1.0 i
=
Pressure (MPa)
-~---I==========+"·
--I---
1.2) The relation between loading and stroke as below(Loading center and slide table center must be !
-,---1--
--
- --
- --
- --
- -,
-
superposition)
Bore size Max. load W(kg)

40 t--t--+--+--+-+-->c-----+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+----f cr X 36.4
30 t--+--+--+--+---t--+--'l---+--+--+--+--+--+--+----1 16 5.2+2(2. 7+L,)sin 8
20 (::':'.j:'.:'.:j'.:':'.j'.:'.::f:'.'.':f'.:'j,;.:.:.L:.:::&::L.;.L:X.:.:r.:..:..:~1=.1 0 X 74.4
20 6.2+2(2.9+L,)sin 8
rJ X 140
25 7+213.4+L )sin a
Bore size Max Load W(kg) Stroke scope cr x258
32 8.6+2(4.2+L,)sin 8
16 5.5 -500mm
cr x520
20 9.6 - 500mm 40 10.4+2(5.1 +L )sin 8
"C
25 16 -500mm
32 24 -600mm
"'
.2
1.3.5) Incline acting(Acting direction):
><
40 40 -600mm "'1'--'--'--'---'---'---'--'--'-'--'---'----'----'--'--'--'---"I
:::i!: 0 500 650 750 1000 1500
Stroke (mm) Bore size Max. load W(kg)
cr x 35 x k
16 5cos 8 +2(2. 7+L,)sin 8
1.3) You should keep the loading center and the slide table center be superposition, if not you can calculate
cr x72 xk
the load as below method. 20 6cos a +2(2.9+L,)sin e
First you should calculate the applied load coefficient( cr): o x120xk
25 6cos a +2(3.4+L,)sin e
Example) Bore size: 25mm, Stroke: 650mm
o x2 10 x k
(1)Max. Load=16kg 32 7cos a +2(4.2+L,)sin e
(2)When stroke=650mm, the allowable load=10.9kg cr x400 x k
40 Bees 8 +2(5.1 +L,)sin 8
(3) o =10.9/16=0.68
Note) When bore size is <ll 16 and stroke is 500mm, or bore size is <ll20 and stoke is 500mm,
or bore size is <ll25 and stoke is 500mm. or bore size is <ll32 and stoke is 600mm,or bore size RMT
is <ll40 and stoke is 600mm , the cr =1.
1.3.1) Horizontal acting(Vertical mounting): 1.3.6) Horizontal acting(Loading offset) :
Bore size Max. load W(kg) / }L

= 16
rJ X 36.4
10.6+2 X L,
./ ! ...J
-_- -_- -_- -_- - -<-
-0 1--:0 - t--
I cr X 74.4
__ I__ _ 20 12+2 XL,
I
_Q_J _:2:_ _l--
_-_ __
- __ - _--r"'
- __ 0 X 140
25 13.8+2 XL,
o x258 :, -
32 17+2 XL
Max. load cr x36
cr x520
40 20.6+2 x L, W(kg) 2.9+L,
1. 3.2) Horizontal acting(Loading center and slide table center offset) :

cr X 25.48
16 5.2+L, cr X 13.23
16 2.7+ L,
cr x 52.1
20 6.2+L o x 26.8
20 2.9+ L,
o x 98
25 7.0+L, cr x 44
25 3.4+ L,
rJ X 180
32 8.6+L cr x 88.2
32 4.2+ L
cr x364
40 10.4+L, rJ X 167.8
40 5.1+L,
RMT Series

2. About shock absorber
2.1) Shock absorbers are consumable parts. When a decrease in energy absorption capacity is
noticed, it must be replaced. Refer to the table below for shock absorber type. 13 12 11 10 8 6 5 4 3 2
2.2) Never loosen the bottom screw of the shock absorber. (It is not an adjustment screw.) That
may cause oil leakage.
2.3) Refer to the table below for tightening torques of the shock absorber setting nut.
D Unscrew nut, Never loosen the bottom 6Mountin new

Take out old shock absorber screw of the shock absorber shock absorber
That may cause oil leakage.
~Adjust the shock absorber to proper position

and tightening it with proper torque.
,,,,, • Maanet washer
•I 1 Shock absorber Combination 21 Carbon steel
ACA1006-A ACA1007-1N ACA1412-1N ACA2020-1N ACA2020-1N 2 Washer cover Aluminum allov 22 End cover Al uminum allov
1.67 1.67 3.14 10.80 10.80 3 Stainless steel barrel Stainless steel 23 Mobilitv iron Aluminum allov
4 Washer Carbon steel 24 C clip Spring steel
3. About sensor switch 5 Weartng ring Wear resistant material 25 Guide I Carbon steel
3. 1) Sensor switch only can be used for the cylinder with magnet . The magnet located the 6 Magnet Rare-earth matertal 26 Countersink screw Carbon steel
four corner of body's(refer below) .The cylinder with magnet have both group mounting 7 Maanet Rare-earth matertal 27 Fixina plate Aluminum alloy
hole for mounting rail. please refer to below for ordering sensor switch, mounting it into 8 0-rina NBR 28 Screw Carbon steel
the rsil's groove, adjusting it to proper position, tightening it with proper torque. 9 Wearrtna Wear resistant material 29 Sorina washer Sorina steel
•I 10 Scraping dust rina Plastics 30 Rail Al uminum allov
CS1-G, CS1-GX, DS1-G, DS1-GN, DS1-GP 11 Bumper NBR 31 Bumper block Stainless steel
12 0-ring NBR 32 Barrel Al uminum alloy
13 0-ring NBR 33 Bushing Bronze+Fill lubricant
14 Fixing plate Aluminum alloy 34 Gasket TPU
15 Nut SS41 35 Guide II Carbon steel
16 Joint POie Stainless steel 36 Countersink screw Carbon steel
17 0-ring NBR 37 0-ring NBR
18 Piston seal TPU 38 Steel ball Stainless steel
RMT 19 Magnet Aluminum alloy 39 Magnet Rare-earth material
Sensor switch rail 20 Magnet washer Carbon steel 40 Location washer NBR
Mountin hole for rail
Add) Refer to Page 464, 474 for detail of sensor switch.

RMT Series
Dimensions
:JA
: JA
A+Stroke
:..
16 107 '.
22.5 22.5 60
:-:
75 72 40 39
•
18 9.5 5
' :
75 30
·-·~
6.5 6.5
20 124 25.5 25.5 70 90 87 46 45 22.8 9.5 5 90 38 8.5 8.5
25 124 25.5 25.5 70 100 97 54 53 27.8 11 6.5 90 42 8.5 8.5
32 148 28.5 28.5 85 122 119 66 64 35 14 8 110 50 9.5 9.5
:..
40
16
170 35.5 35.5
M5 x 0.8 Dp: 10
95
30
:
145 142
50
76 74
M6 x 1.0 Dp: 9.5

43
5.5
14 8
• M5. x 0.8 12.

120 64
52
10.5
15.5
10.5
8.5
20 M6 x 1.0 Dp: 10 40 70 M6 x 10 Dp: 9.5 5.5 1/8" 16 63 22.5 10.5
25 M6 x 1.0 Dp: 10 40 70 MS x 1.25 Op: 10 7 1/8" 16 70 40.5 11.5
32 MS x 1.25 Dp 12 40 75 M10x1 .5Dp: 15 8.5 1/8" 20 86 57.5 17.5
40 MB x 1.25 Dp 12 65 105 M10x1 .5 Dp: 15 8.5 1/4" 25 105 50.5 10.5
RMT
•ti•
Memo AlrTAC
Note
RMT
Rotary table cylinder--HRQ Series
D Product series
HRQ Series
DS1-H
Mini Rotary Cylinder
C)
C:
:g 2
"'
~
.0
3
::,
0
0 7
Middle-sized Rotary Cylinder
- - C)
C:
10
:g 20
"'
Q)
:0
::, 30
0
0
50
Large-sized Rotary Cylinder
C)
C: 70
:g
"'
Q)
:0
100
::,
0
0 200
Page 380 457

3. Anti-freezing measure shall be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent moisture
freezing.
4. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long lime, pay attention to conduct anti-rust treatment
to the surface. Anti-dust caps shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports.
HRQ
Rotary table cylinder AlrTAC
HRQ Series
~,, . ..
Specification
Actina type
1-,•-·•-•-·•-·111-,1111
Double rack and pinion/Double actino)
Operating With adjustment bolt 0.1-0.7MPa(15- 100psi)(1.0- 7.0barl l 0.1-1.0MPa(15-145psi)(1.0-10.0bar)
pressure With internal shock absorber - I 0.1-0.6MPa(15-87psi)(1.0-6.0bar)
Temperature "C 0-60
Anale adiustment ranae 0-190° I 0-190°
Repeatable With adjustment bolt 0.2°
prec1s1on With internal shock absorber - I 0.05°
Theoretic moment (Nm)(0.5MPa) 0.2 I 0.33 I 0.63 I 1.1 I 2.2 I 2.8 I 5 I 7.5 I 11 I 22
Cushion With adiustment bolt Rubber bumoer
type With internal shock absorber - I Shock absorber
Port size
End ports
M5x 0.8 I 1/8" (1)
Side oorts I MS x0.8
Weioht a 120 I 175 I 270 I 535 1940 1126012060128901410017650
CD PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
Add) HRQ series are all attached with magnet, please refer to Page 457-480 for the specific content of sensor switch.
Maximum allowed movement energy and rotation times

D Symbol Maximal allowed energy (J) Rotation times (s/90° )
Model
With adjustment bolt With internal shock absorber With adjustment bolt With internal shock absorber
HR02 0.0015 - 0.2-0.7 -
HR03 0.002 - 0.2-0.7 -
HR07 0.006 - 0.2-1.0 -
HR0 10 0.01 0.04 0.2-1.0 0.2-0.7
D Product feature HR020 0.025 0.12 0.2-1.0 0.2-0.7
HR030 0.05 0.12 0.2-1.0 0.2-0.7
1. Rack and pinion design, stable functioning. HR050 0.08 0.30 0.2-1.0 0.2-0.7
2. Double cylinder structure, double output could be achieved. HR070 0.24 1.1 0.2-1 .5 0.2- 1.0
3. The manufacturing precision of working platform is high, and is easy for HR0100 0.32 1.6 0.2-2.0 0.2- 1.0
installation, and is of precise orientation. HR0200 0.56 2.9 0.2- 2.5 0.2-1 .0
4. The center of working platform has a through hole, and pipe can be Note) G):The movement energy should not exceed the allowed maximumenergy, or the inner accessories of product would be
damaged;
located and passed through this hole; ®:When the rotation times of with shock absorber is larger than the allowed tolerance, the bigger effect will belost.
5. Guide hole is designed on the both side of the cylinder body (10-200) or
undersurface (2-7), which is simply to install.
6. Two modes of buffer could be chosen, adjustment bolt buffer and internal
shock absorber, the maximum buffer energy of internal shock absorber is
3-5 times that of adjustment bolt buffer.
Model
!HRQ: Rotary Table/Rack & Pinion Style !
D Actual torque output
Specification
Applicable type: HRQ2, HRQ3, HRQ7 12 3 1 1o 20 30 so 10 1oo 200 I Cushion type
1.2 HRQ7
Specification Cushion type
~ 0.9 237 Blank: With adjustment bolt
~ HRQ3 10 20 30 50 Blank: With adjustment bolt
0.6
"'er
::, 70 100 200 A: With internal shock absorber
0.3 HRQ2
Note CD:When it is 2,3, 7, 10,20 specification, thread type is MS, it is blank here.
~ Add) HRQ series are all atteched with magnet.
0 0.8 1.0
HRQ Operating pressure (MPa) a Maximum allowed loading
Loading Model
Applicable type: HRQ10, HRQ20, HRQ30, HRQ50
type HRQ2HRQ3HRQ7 HRQ10 HRQ20 HRQ30HRQ50HRQ70 HRQ100 HRQ200
10 HRQ50
Maximum
8
~·~i
allowed
~6 HRQ30 radial 18 30 50 80 150 200 300 330 390 540
z loading
-4 HRQ20 (N)
"'~2
,.':' [_~ ~ ~ ~ j : : = :=:::::!=~::1:::=::::JHRQ10
~
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
Maximum
Operating pressure (MPa) allowed
axial 35 50 70 80 150 200 300 300 500 740
Applicable type: HRQ70, HRQ100, HRQ200 loading
(N)
40 HRQ200
'?
z
-
"'
30
20 HRQ100 ...... Maximum
allowed
~~ · ~· ~l
HRQ70
~ 10 bending 0.8 1.1 1.5 2.5 4.0 5.5 10.0 12.0 18.0 25.0
,.':' l_...§§§::::::::=::r:=:__1~~_J_~_J moment
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 (Nm)
Operating pressure (MPa)
HRQ Series

- ··--- <l>T
2-P I
~~
i ~~ ~
2-Q
(Side port) __EAj ~
~1
BA
B
Max.A
+
A
Uniform distributio
I 8-WDp:WA
J l4~
>I en=~ r~
~ir~t f,,. XDp:XA
,;;---
f
I VB W1 -
JB
" ST
HRQD-A(With internal shock absorber)
,,,,,
1
2
3
4
5
6
Adjustment bole
Hexagon nut
Seal washer
Front cover
Body
Hexagon socket head set bole
Carbon steel
Carbon steel
Carbon steel & Rubber
Aluminum alloy
Aluminum alloy
Carbon steel
,- . ..,
4i..l.~fo3
: :• : :
7 Table Aluminum alloy 2 76 164 18 132 30 28 118 110 IMS x 0.8 112 112 19.5 4
8 Hexagon socket head set bole Carbon steel 3 82 170 18 136.5 34.5 30.5 120.s 110 IMSx0.8 112 115.5 110.s 5
7 94.5 179.5 18 143 41 34.5 123 1115 IM6x1.0 115 118.5 112 6
9
10
Guide pin/flat key
Deep-groove bearing
Carbon steel
Subassembly ,- : : . ..
11 Bearino retainer Aluminum alloy 2 6 13.5 37 IM4 x 0.7 7.5 135 M4 x 0.7 4 135 14.5 IMS x 0.8 12.5
12 Deep-groove bearina/Needle bearing Subassembly 3 7.5 14 5 43 IMS x 0.8 8.5 14.5 M4 x 0.7 4 140 14.5 IMS x 0.8 15.5
13 Back cover Aluminum alloy 7 7.5 14 5 50 IMS x 0.8 8.5 14.5 MS x 0.8 5 Isa Is IMS x 0.8 18.5
..
14
15
16
Steel ball
Piston seal
Wear ring
Stainless steel
NBR
2
3
,- ~=-•
10
12
IMS x 0.8
IMS x 0.8
··-
14
14
,1:
6
7.5
.
14(H9) 125
17(H9) 12.5
l29(h9)
l33(h9)
5.5
5.5
29.5(h9) 14
34(h9) 14
5(H9) 11.5
6(H9) 11.5 ~v-·
17 Magnet Rare earths 7 14 IMS x 0.8 14 9 20(H9) 13 l39(h9) 6.5 40(h9) 14.5 7(H9) 11.5
18 Rack Stainless steel/Carbon steel ,-
19 Pinion Chrome molybdenum steel
: : : =-
20 0-rino NBR
2 M3 X 0.5 13.5 134 1185 M3 x 0.5 15.5 121 2(H9) 2 10.5 l2(H9) 12 24 HRQ
3 M3 X 0.5 13.5 138 123 M3 x 0.5 15.5 125 2(H9) 2 12.5 l2(H9) 12 28
21 Bumper NBR
7 M4 x 0.7 14.5 145 130 M4 x 0.7 16.5 129 3(H9) 3 14.5 l3(H9) 13 32
22 0 - ring NBR
23 0 - ring NBR
24 Hexagon screw Stainless steel
25 Shock absorber Subassembly
HRQ Series
. .. I I
HRQD-A( With internal shock absorber)
10
,.
120.5
. • IL-.fl•t •
109.5
... ., .
92
.'
9.5 50
:
54
:•
47 34 13
:
M10x 1.0
20 156 143 117 11 65 69 54 37 17 M12 x1 .0
30 165.5 152.5 127 11 .5 70 74 57 40 17 M12x 1.0
50 203 183.5 152 15 80 84 66 46 20 M14 x1.5
10
,.
28.5
. • ta..,11•• £
17.5
• ,!11 ., .
20.5
:
15.5 5 11 6.5
:-·-
60 27
20 39 26 27.5 16 9 14 8.5 76 34
30 38.5 25.5 29 18.5 9 14 8.5 84 37
50 51 31.5 38 22 10 18 10.5 100 50
,. . .. ·:-' ,._ . ..
,1:
10 MB x 1.25 12 6.5 M5 x 0.8 34.5 28 M5 x 0.8 4.5 29 20(H9) 4.5 45(h9) 8 46(h9)
20 M10x1.5 15 8.5 M5 x 0.8 47 30 M5 x 0.8 6 30 2B(H9) 6.5 60(h9) 10 61(h9)
HRQ 30 M10x1.5 15 8.5 1/8" 50 32 M5 x 0.8 6.5 34 32(H9) 5 65(h9) 10 67(h9)
..
50 M12 x 1.75 18 10.5 1/8" 63 38 M5 x 0.8 10 38 35(H9) 5.5 75(h9) 12 77(h9)
10 4.5 15(H9) 3 M5 x 0.8 8 M5x 0.8 8 32

:
3(H9) 3.5 16
:
3(H9) 3.5
=-·-
56 40
20 6.5 17(H9) 2.5 M6 x 1.0 8 M6 x 1.0 10 43 4(H9) 4.5 21.5 4(H9) 4.5 74 50
30 6.5 22(H9) 3 M6x1.0 8 M6 x 1.0 10 48 4(H9) 5 24 4(H9) 4.5 80 58
50 7.5 26(H9) 3 MS x 1.25 8 MS x 1.25 12 55 5(H9) 6 27.5 5(H9) 5.5 92 68
HRQ Series
C!)T
C!)S
C!)R <
0::
<(
(/)
I I j.'5
2 C!)J Do: JA
2 (!)KC 0:,
I '-'
Adjustable nut
r~
,+ \ I '''
~
'-'
- '---I= ~ '
-~ ~---------,------{++ - ~ -
<(
'-'
~
< I~ + ::I!
"'
2-K <(
::,
AD C!)G AD
C!)LJ Thru.hole
i----
Max.EA AC
Max.A
A\
HRQD-A( With internal shock absorber)
70
.. 1204
. '• . .. 1238
. - I 11111 •
170 117 ··- :-:!-:

92 188 84 175 153
:--·-
122 136
100 1223 1257 189 117 102 199 95 186 159 127 142
70
..
200 1276.5
IM20 x 1.5 134

. '•
1314.5
... 168
.
240 124
_ ............
120 1117 113 1106 174
: :
132 157
142 116 117.5110.5 110 157 IM12x175 I

100 IM20 x 1.5 134 168 ISO 119 117.5 110.5 130 166 IM12 x 1 75 I
160 124 120 112.5 150 180 IM16x20 I
70
..
200 IM27 x 1.5 136.5
118
.
110.s 11,a'
.. ·:-
·-··
174.5
. ..
175 44.5 MS X 0.8 I25.5 46(h9) Is l88(h9) 112.5 l90(h9) 19 l22(H9) l3.5 IM8 x 125 110
HRQ
100 118 110.5 11/8' 185 50.5 MS x 0.8 129.5 56(h9) 16 I98(h9) I14.5 11OO(h9) 112 I24(H9) I3.5 IM8 X 1.25 110
200 125 114 I118' 1103 63 MS x 0.8 I36.5 64(h9) 19 l116(h9) l165 l 118(h9) 115 l32(H9) l55 IM12 x 1.75 113
70
.. IM8 x 1.25 112.s 167
: :
5(H9) 15.5 1335 l5(H9) 13.5 1110 lao l5(H9) 13.5
:
100 IM10x 1.5 114.5 177 6(H9) 16.5 1385 l6(H9) 14.5 1120 1100 l6(H9) 14.5
200 IM12x 1.75 116.5 190 8(H9J las 145 l8(H9) 145 1140 1110 l8(H9) 165
HRQ Series
How to select product Diagram Description Calculation formula of moment of inertia Rotation radius
1. Determine the following working conditions according to the actual situation: Rectangle sheet
1.1) Rotation angle 0: The actual rotation angle must be within the maximum allowed ~ ma'
1=-
a'
range of rotation angle of cylinder. a a:Sheet ength (m) 12 12
1.2) Rotation time I: The rotation time must be within the maximum allowed range of m:Mass (kg)
rotation time of cylinder. Note: no special installation direction
1.3) Installation position of cylinder: Allow enough installation space, so as to ensure >--- - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - ~ - - - --<
leaving adequate space for rotation of cylinder and workpieces. Rectangle sheet ma' a'
l= -
~
1.4) Determination of loading mass and loading shape. 3
2. Calculation of necessary !argue needed when loading a:Sheet ength (m)
m:Mass(kg) Note:
rotation (T(N.m): 1. horizontal installation.
Calculate the necessary moment required for loading rotation according to the 2. pay attention to the change of movement
formula below, and combine with the forgue diagram of actual effect, to choose time when vertical installation .
a:Sheet length (m)
pneumatic cylinder with suitable !argue output.
b:Distance between
T:Necessary !argue required for loading rotation (N.m) the rotation axis I= ma' +mb'
K:Coefficient of allowance, K is defined as 5 12
and the gravity
T=Kxlx cil center of loading
l:Moment of inertia ( kg. m')
. 2e w:Angular acceleration ( rad/ s')
(m)
Note: the cuboids are same too.
w=-t-, m:Mass(kg)
e :Rotation Angle ( rad ) Concentrated load a,:Vertical distance ma,
!:Rotation time ( s) betweenthe l=m1a/+ +m,K f
2.1, Calculation method of moment of inertia in different conditions rotation axis and Note:
Diagram Description Calculat1on formula of moment of inertia Rotation radius
the concentrated 1. horizontal installation.
loading(m) 2. compared with m, disregard if m is extremely
a,:Length of arm(m) tiny.
o;,~ md' d' m,:Mass of 3. calculate K according to the shape of
I=- -
d:Diameter (m) 8 8 concentrated concentrated loading row by row. For example,
m:Mass (kg) loading(kg) 2r'
m,:Mass of arm(kg) when the loading is spheroid, K= - 5-
Note: no special installation direction
Gear
Classified disk Number
d1 :Diameter(m) of teeth a
m1d/+m2d/
~
d1 2+d/
d,:Diameter(m) I a:Tooth number of
8 8 gear
m,:d, Mass(kg)
m,:d, Mass(kg) Note: compared, with d,, disregard d1 if d,
b:Tooth number of 1,=(f)'I.
loading gear
is extremely tiny
~
Number
md' d' of teeth b
I=- -
d:Diameter (m) 16 16
m:Mass (kg) 3. Calculation of maximum movement energy E-(J):
Calculate the maximum movement energy E•., according to the formula below, and make sure that the
maximum movement energy is within allowed energy range of the chosen pneumatic cylinder,
excessive large movement energy would lead to damage of inner parts, please choose rotation
2mr' 2r' cylinder attached with shock absorber when the movement energy is fairly large.
Sp~ r:Radius(m) I= - -
5 5
m:Mass(kg)

E. ..= +
lw'=• w ...=T
20 w.,.: Maximal angularvelocity(rad/ s)
4. Calculation of loading rate

Thin-stick a1 :Length of
a,2+a/ Calculate the loading rate according to the formula below, and the loading rate must not be more than 1.
HRQ m1a,2+m2a/
stick(m) I=
~
a,:Length of
3 3 w, + - - - - -M- - - - - ,., 1
Loading rate= Maxim:;llowed + Maximal allowed Maximal allowed bending
st1ck(m) Note:
m, a, Mass(kg) 1. horizontal installation. axial loading radial loading moment of working platform
m,:a,Mass(kg) 2. pay attention to the change of movement W, : Actual axial loading W,: Actual radial loading M: Actual loaded bending moment
time when vertical installation.
of working platform
Rectangle sheet a,:Sheet
length (m) I= m,(4a,'+b')+m,(4a,'+b') 2a,' +2a,' +b' 5. Determination method
~
a,:Sheet
length (m)
12 6 It could be used only when the chosen pneumatic cylinder must meet the requirements of article 2, 3
b: Length of Note: and 4 simultaneously.
side(m) 1. horizontal installation.
m1:a1 Mass(kg) 2. pay attention to the change of movement
m,:a, Mass(kg) time when vertical installation.
Rectangle sheet
a:Sheet
~
m(a'+b') a2+b2
length (m) I= - - - --
b:Length of 12 12
side(m)
m:Mass(kg) Note: no special installation direction
HRQ Series

1. Rotation Direction and Rotation Angle
1.1) Rotation Direction
•• 2. The range of rotation angle has been adjusted to the
maximum in the factory, please do not enlarge the rotation
angle any more.
3. The movement energy should not exceed the allowed
maximum energy, or the inner parts will be damaged.
4. The rotary parts need no lubrication.
5. Series HRQ is eq uipped with a rubber bumper or shock
absorber. Therefore, perform rotation adjustment in the
pressurized condition(minimum operation pressure: 0.1
Mpa or more for adjustment bolt and internal shock
absorber types, and 0.2 MPa or more for external shock
absorber type.)
6. Refer to the table below for tightening torques of the
A) By adjusting the adjustment bolt, the rotation end can be set within the range shown in the up drawing: Maximum shock absorber setting nut.
ratation is 190° ; Shock absorber size Max. tightening torque(Nm)
B) The rotary table turns in the clockwise direction when the A port is pressurized, and in the counter-clockwise M10 3.5
..
direction when the B port is pressurized . M12 8.0
1.2 Rotation Ran e Example 90° Rotation M14 11 .0
M20 24.0
Adjustment amount by adjustment bolt B Adjustment amount by adjustment bolt B M27 63.0
Position in pin hole Adjust by Positionin pin hole
7. Never loosen the bottom screw of the shock absorber.
adjusting A
screw A (It is not an adjustment screw.) That may cause oil
leakage.
8. Shock absorbers are consumable parts. When a decrease
in energy absorption capacity is noticed , it must be
replaced .
8
Rotary table cylinder Shock absorber
Adjust by HRQ1 0 ACA1006-A
adjusting screw 8 HRQ20\HRQ30 ACA1209-A
HRQ50 ACA1412-A
Adjustment amount by adjustment bolt A Adjustment amount by adjustment bolt A HRQ70\HRQ100 ACA2020-A
Positioning pin hole Positioning pin hole HRQ200 ACA2725-A
9.Strictly control run out and parallelism of the dial according

to the requirements of the following table.
Plane arallelism and runout of the dial
90° Adjust by
adjusting
screwA
surface runout
of the dial
HRQ
Adjustment amount by adjustment bolt A, B Adjustment amount by adjustment bolt A, B
Positioning pin hole Positioning pin hole
Adjust by
adjusting
screw A
Plane parallelism of
0.1 A
the dial
I~ /
Adjust by Plane runout of the
0.1 A
90° dial
adjusting
screw B Cylindrical surface
I 0.1 A
runout of the dial
HRQ100 6.1 °
HRQ200 4.9°
Memo AlrTAC
Note
HRQ
ici:t:111
Air gripper--HFZ, HFP, HFY, HFR, HFC Series
D Product series
HFZ Series HFP Series HFY Series HFR Series HFC Series
CS1-G DS1-G DS1-H
.[ 6
t5
"'a, 10
:g
0 16
Cl
20
en
C 25
~
"'a, 32
C)
C
u.i
en
10
C
~ 16
"'
a,
:c 20
::,
0
Cl
25
32
en
C
u 6
"'a, 10
:c
::,
0
Cl 16
20
en
C
ti 25
"'
a,
C) 32
C
u.i
10
en
.!: 16
t5
"'
a, 20
:c
::,
0
Cl
25
32
16
20
g> 25
u
"'a, 32 HFD
:c
::,
0 40
Cl
50
Page 388 394 398 401 403 457
Installation and application A.

1. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before air gripper is connected with pipeline to prevent the entrance of impurities into
the cylinder.
4. If the air gripper is dismantled and stored for a long time, pay attention to conduct anti-rust treatment to the surface. Anti-dust caps
shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports.
ict:t•
Air gripper(parallel style) AlrTAC
HFZ Series
Specification
Bore size (mm) 6 10 16 20 25 32 40
ActinA type Double actinA Single acting
Double <!)6, <!)10 0.2- 0.7MPa(28- 100psi)(2.0- 7.0bar)
Operating acting Others 0.15- 0.7MPa(22-100osi)(1.5-7.0bar)
pressure Single <!)6, <!)10 0.35- 0.7MPa(50-100osi)(3.5-7.0bar)
acting Others 0.25-0.7MPa(36-100psi)(2.5- 7.0bar)
Lubrication Not reauired
Reoeatabilitv mm ±0.01 I + 0.02
Max. frequency 180(c p.m) I 60(c.p.m)
Sensor switches G) DS1-H I CS1-G I CS1-G, DS1-G, DS1-H

DS1-G
Port size M3 x 0.5 I MS x0.8
D Ordering code
D Symbol
HFTZ: Single acting HFSZ: Single acting
~
Blank:Standard
HFZ: Double acting and normally opened and normally closed
~~~ Bore size

6: Cl>6mm
10: Cl>10mm
1'
R: Narrow type
D Product feature 16: Cl>16mm
20: Cl>20mm
1. Integrated design of linear guide rail, 25: Cl>25mm
high rigidity and high precision. 32: Cl>32mm
40: Cl>40mm
2. A positioning pin is attached to
the bottom of the linear guide
~
B:Side mounting type
rail, which can prevent the
deviation of the positioning The ositionin
rail and body. pin prevents the
3. The hole of the body is deeper, deviation of the
rail and body
•
•
which can improve the precision
and the consistency of repeated ws;a,-oti~Md ~
narrow type
dismounting and positioning.
4. According to the actual using •
requirements of customers, the
initial position of clamping jaw can
be customized to meet the different The ositioning hole
'
is deeper than the NcThru.hoO ~""'"" ljp~
needs under different working conditions. traditional type
M and
Thrunarrow
...., -type
··~ ~
o o
0
HFZ
'
Fc""'"m mo~OOg •~~
G) Cl>6, Cl>32, Cl>40 bore size don't have R, W & M type. Add) HFZ series are all attached with magnet.
HFZ Series
4-M2 x 0.4 M3 x 0.5

CD6
0 91==~ ~ ~ ~ r = ~ ~= ;tl0pened Port
2.5 5.5
l~[t - --+- <'I 0

1 - - - - - - - ~ ~ "'
1 Pin Stainless steel
2 Bumper TPU
25.5
3 Piston seal NBR 10.5 ± 0.05 39
4 Piston Aluminum alloy/Stainless steel
53
6 Back cover Aluminum allov
7 C clip Spring steel CD10-CD40
8 0-ring NBR
9 Maanet Sintered metal(Neodymium-iron-boron)
10 Piston rod Aluminum alloy/Stainless steel
12 Rod packing NBR
13 Curved bar Stainless steel
16 Hexaaon screw Carbon steel
18 Guide sleeve Stainless steel
19 Assembly of clamping jaw and guide rail Stainless steel
CD 10
CD16-CD40
HFZ10 11 17 4
D
g HFZ16 34 45 6 124 124
er
(b HFZ20 45 68 10 236 236
Q)
a HFZ25 69 102 14 418 428

IIIJI•••
(C
::,
HFZ32 160 195 22 750 729
HFZ10 57
•:
37.5 16.5
:
30 23
t t. t:
12 M2.5x 0.45 3
=-
5.7
HFZ40 255 320 30 1340 1268 5 -~.05 4.8.05
HFTZ6 1.9 4 25 26 HFZ16 67.5 42.5 23.5 39 30.5 8 .8_05 5.805 15 M3 x 0.5 4 7
z HFTZ10 7 4 57 57 HFZ20 85 53 27.5 53 42 10 .805 8-805 20 M4 x 0.7 5 9
0
3 HFTZ16 27 6 125 125 HFZ25 103 64 33.5 71 52 12 .805 10.805 25 M5 x 0.8 6 12
Q)
'< HFTZ20 35 10 238 238 HFZ32 113(122) 67(76) 40 106 60 15 -805 12.805 29 M6 x 1.0 7 14
0
HFZ40 139(152) 83(96) 48 132 72 18 .805 14 .805 36 M8x1.25 9 17
(j)
5·
(C
'O
CD
g,
HFTZ25 55
HFTZ32 133
14
22
420
799
430
778 llTJI··· . : : :
co HFTZ40 220 30 1437 1365 HFZ10 M3 x0.5 5 16 23 M3 x 0.5 6 18 12 M3 x0.5 6 11.5 27
"'g_
::,
HFSZ6 - 3.7 4 25 26 HFZ16 M4 x 0.7 7 24 24.5 M4 x 0.7 8 22 15 M4 x0.7 4.5 16 30
(C
z HFSZ10- 13 4 57 57 HFZ20 MS x 0.8 8 30 29 MS x 0.8 10 32 18 M5 x 0.8 8 18.5 35
~ HFSZ16- 38 6 125 125 HFZ25 M6 x 1.0 10 36 30 M6 x 1.0 12 40 22 M6 x 1.0 10 22 36.5
e,_
HFSZ20- 59 10 238 238 HFZ32 M6 x 1.0 10 46 40(49) M6 x 1.0 12 46 26 M6 x 1.0 10 26 48(57)
HFZ
'<
§- HFSZ25- 87 14 420 430 HFZ40 M8 x 1.25 12 56 49(62) MS x 1.25 16 56 32 MB x 1.25 12 32 58(71)
g_ HFSZ32-
HFSZ40-
163
270
22
30
799
1437
778
1365
11.'Jltt· . .. •: . ' • f •1.r• I 1•1:n•r1J.."1:t
HFZ10 CD 11 •g "' 1.5 M3 x 0.5 7 19 10 15.5 +$ 11.5 .f

Note) The gripping force in the above table is in the working pressure of 0.5MPa, and HFZ16 '3-
CD17 05 1.5 MS x 0.8 7.5 19 13 21 +$ 15 _f
with a gripping point of L=20mm. HFZ20 CD21 +g 05 2 MS x 0.8 9.5 23 15 26.5 +$ 16.5 .f
Add) Please refer to page 391 for the definition of "L".
HFZ25 CD26 •g-05 2 MS x 0.8 9 24 20 33.5 +$ 19.5 .f
HFZ32 (1) 34 •g.05 2.5 MS x 0.8 9.5 31(40) 24 48 '$5 26 .f
HFZ40 (1)42 +~.05 2.5 MS x 0.8 10.5 38(50) 28 60 '~· 5 30 .f
Note) The values in "()" in the above table are single acting type sizes.
HFZ Series
Narrowt pe Rt pe) Thru.hole mounting type(N type)
a, CD10-CD40
<!>10-<!>25 ::,
~
~
€) $
EB
Modellltem UA(Opened) UB(Closed)

HFZ10-R 10 ·~ 6 .f
HFZ16-R
HFZ20-R
12.5 '&
17 ·a
6.5 .f
7 -10
HFZ6-N 2.3 2.5
....
11 '6 8 -10
HFZ25-R 23 '& 5 9 -10
HFZ10-N 2.8 3 5.7 15.5 ·~ 11 .5 -1
Note) The other dimensions are the same as standard type.
HFZ16-N 3.3 4 7 21 '6 15.f
HFZ20-N 4.5 5 26.5 ·~ 16.5 . 0
Side mountin t eB I e 19.5 o
HFZ25-N 5.5 6 12 33.5 ·~
<!>6 HFZ32-N 6.5 7 14 48 ·~·5 26 .f
HFZ40-N 9 9 17 60 +2.5 30 .f
Thru.hole mounting and narrow type(M type)
~
~
<l>10-CD40
HFZ10-M
HFZ16-M
HFZ20-M
HFZ25-M
33 4
45 5
55 6
7
9 17 '6
12 23 ' 2·5
6
9 _f
.f
65 .f
7 .f
~r - =- ____ _
~
fi
~
a, - -
EB
EB
$
$
Note) The other d1mens1ons are the same as standard type. ~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~----<
Bottom mounting type(F type)

CD6
n•nt I• : '••••.•hf• •• •••:n•rtJ.."f::lt :3 ~ '3 -'----~-.!,,...,_~~~~~-'

~ ~
HFZ6-B M2 x 0.4 2.5 5 2 11 ·a 8 .f <=

Q) "'
0
HFZ10-B M2.5x 0.45 3 5.7 2 15.5 't 11.5 .r QU

HFZ16-B M3 x0.5 4 7 2.5 21 '& 15 .f CD10-<l>40
HFZ20-B M4 x 0.7 5 9 4 26.5 '& 16.5 .?
HFZ25-B M5 x 0.8 6 12 5 33.5 ·a 19.5 .f
HFZ32-B M6 x 1.0 7 14 6 48 +55 26 .Y
HFZ40-B M8 x 1.25 9 17 7 60 'f 5 30 _f
Side mountin and narrow pe pe
CD10-CD25
HFZ
11 5 2 +g.025 4.5 2
HFZ16-F 14 8 2.5 +g.025 5.8 2.5
HFZ20-F 18 10.5 3 +0.025 7.5 3
HFZ25-F 22 13 9 4
u
w HFZ32-F 34.5 18 14.8
ll'lltt·
HFZ10-W M2.5 x 0.45 3

:
5.7 2
.I
10 '&
••• -, :
6.f
.....,:.i,
HFZ40-F
HFZ6-F M2 x 0.4
41.5
3
22
3.5 2
....
17.7
4 d1. 5 1.5 .8.5

HFZ16-W M3 x 0.5 4 7 2.5 12.5 '& 6.5_f HFZ10-F M2.5 x 0.45 4 6 2.45 5.5 •J 1.5 .8.s
HFZ20-W M4 x 0.7 5 9 4 17 ·~ n HFZ16-F M3 x 0.5 6 3.05 7.5 ·i 1.5 .8.s
HFZ25-W M5 x 0.8 6 12 23 5
5 'f
9 -10 HFZ20-F M4 X 0.7 8 10 3.95 11 .5 ' 2 -8
1.5 5
Note) The other dimensions are the same as standard type. HFZ25-F M5 x 0.8 10 12 4.9 16 +f5 2 -0.5
HFZ32-F M6 x 1.0 12 20 7.3 25 +2.5 3 .8 5
HFZ40-F M8 x 1.25 16 24 8.7 33 +3 3 .85
HFZ Series
Double acting type opened gripping force HFZ6
D How to select product 10 ~ ure O.~MPa ,
Please select pneumatic finger according to the following steps: z 8 --r-- --1 ' J)SjP.- - :- -
_,
' '' '
L.. _,_ i-9 .S~ a _
~
The selection of the effective gripping force ----> the confirmation of the gripping point
----> the confirmation of the external force put on the gripping jaw.
!" 6
4 -
'
- :== ';-"= ,=-=:..::.;:.:!81!!!:'.!:..::j
T
I
-OcSMl'lr
' n 4MPa
n ')i.JPa
1. The selection of the gripping force
·i 2 :
~
-
The work-pieces as shown in the left : j O~~5,......~10"'"'"'~1cc5- ~
20"'"'"'~2"'5-3"'0
F: Gripping force (N) Gripping point L (mm)
µ : friction coefficient between fittings
and work-pieces. HFZ1 0 HFZ25
m: mass of work-pieces 25
~
1 Pr~ssure°p.n;.f~
0.6MPa I
·r :-
I I
g: acceleration of gravity (=9.8m/s'}
z 20 -i --T].[~a1--r--:-
The condition that the work-pieces
won't drop is: 2 x µ F>mg
1s 1 t : 04~Pa- ~--:-
j 10 ~ 4= ~ ~o3M~a__:_
The gripping work-pieces shown above, on so: F>_f!!L g, I I I I 0.2MPa I
the impact condition of ordinary handling

2x µ
Safety coefficient is a, so Fis:
-~ 5
~
-~--+--:---f--f---:-
I I I I I I
state, taking safety coefficient a=4, have a
gripping force that is more than 10-20 times 10 20 30 40 50 60 20 40 60 80 100
F= ---'!!L x a Gripping point L (mm} Gripping point L (mm}
of the mass of the gripped objects. 2x µ
HFZ32
= .2 =0.1 Press re 0. 1MPa 1 1 1 300 --r--"I"-;,;;,~o-:-1i.i~ - - -:
F= 2 :~ 2 x4
= 10 x mg
F= 2 :~.1 x4
=20 x mg
- 1 - 0-~ Pa- 1- - , - - ,-- - --,
- :r-
_ J __ J_ -
, O.SMPa - - j - - t - - :
J 0:4Mh - -:
_ I_ -
z
250
200
--r--T--,-
l ~ j
0 §MPa
0.5M8a-
--1
-:
_ _J __ j_ __ l__ ~ MPa --: ~150 ~ : : 0.4Mr a :
.8 I I I 0.3MPa I
10timesofthe 20 times of the _ _J __ l. __ I__ .l0.2MPa _ _J g;oo
mass of the mass of the I
+- + -+ o.~ Pa - :
_ _J _ _ i_ _ _ j _ _ _J _ _ L _ _J
gripped objects gripped objects :~50 - - 1- - - .J- - - .J- - - -l - - -l
I I I I I I (!) I I I I I
10 20 30 40 50 60 20 40 60 80 100
Note) If the friction coefficientµ >0.2, for safety, please also select clamping force Gripping oint L (mm} Grippin point L (mm
according to the principle of 10-20 times of the mass of the clamped objects.
As for large acceleration and shock, it requires for greater safety coefficient. HFZ20 HFZ40
r--,--T--,--,--,- 5
I
I PresSure O.7MPa
I I I
I
I
1.1) The actual gripping force must be within the effective gripping forces of different 100 t- --Pfess"e:o.1Ml'l/ ---{---{- 400 - - r - - r --1-o.6MPa--1
z
pneumatic fingers specifications shown in the below chart. z 80 ~ ~ ~ - ~ -- ~ - - ~ - .,300 __ L__ l __ j __ ~ !!1Pa :
Q) I Q ~MPa I I I I I 0.4MPa
Double acting type closed gripping force HFZ6 ~ 60 r -- t- -- + -- I ,jp- - -,-
.E
g,40 I
0.4~Rt I
0.3~ a_- ---l _
~ 00 - -l= - - + - - -+ - - Clj3M£a._1
I I I 012MPa I
z
·c.. I I 0.2MPa I
.9-20 1- - - :i: - - +- - -+ -- =i - - -I- :~100 --,--1--,--, ---,
(!) I I I I I (!) I I I I I
20 40 60 80 100 20 40 60 80 100
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm)
Single acting normally opened gripping force HFTZ6

10 15 20 25 30 _ _ 1_ _ ......J. _ _ .L - _ L _ _ I_ _
Gripping point L (mm !---.! PresSure o.f MPa :
z __;__ J"":'"::-:i_ _ - L - - 1 - -
HFZ10 HFZ25
_ _ L __ J. __ __l __ __l _ _ _i _ 100 I 1Pressure O.i f..j!Pa I
- -~ ~
20 I I n .ftu1Pa
-~
I I I
e!~~~ _j __ j _
I I
80
I
F +-0.eM
Pa-~ -- ~-
z15 z I I
Q 5~Pa
I I
,J __ _J_
-....L __QJ MPa I I I
60 L l 5 10 15 20 25 30
O.SM I I I 0.4MPa I
" I
L ± Pa :!I __ _jI _ _ _j_
I
"~ I I I I I Gripping point L (mm}
~ 10 ......,_ _.___c_,O
,c.4~MPa I .8 40 ::±0 3MPa -,-
= I I 0.3MPa I =
I
I "' I I HFTZ10 HFTZ25
r--:-
C C
! I I : 0.2MBa I
-~ --1--- ~ - - ~ - 02$ Pa ~ - -~20 12 80 -,--T--,-- , - - 1 --,-
r T l' I I ;=--=-fP7eSS1ure-o1 MPa --i---i--
~ ~
o~sMfa-1- -r--:-
I I I I I I I I I I !Pressure 0.1MPa I
10 20 30 40 50 0 20 40 60 80 100 z
10 -~ ~
I I I I
~e¥Pa- i --:-
I I
Gri pping point L (mm} Gripping point L (mm) 8 - ----i - - to.5MPa - ; - - r - -1-
~
1 I ""l
- ~ - - + - -r - ; - - r - -1-
I I I
~ 40 =-=t::-::i -= ,-0.s.~~- ~ --:-
HFZ16 HFZ32 .8
=
C
4 ~ ~-~--:- .8
=
:! 20 - ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
- - + - -e- -e\3MPa
0.4MPa
r-- I
I
I
60 --,--,--1--r--,--
50 e O1M_!'! _ ~ _ -:- _
:~ 2 I
I
I
-~-- + --~-~--~--I-
I
I
I
o']SMPa
I I
I
I __I : : :o
- -1-
2s],1Pa :
~
I
[!S~
_li _i
---=r;o.5M
10.6MAa I
_-:--
I I " 10 20 30 40 50 60
Gripping point L (mm)
" 20 40 60 80 100 120
- - 1- - ---t - - + - o.4MPa - 1- -
1 I I 10 _3MP.a I HFTZ1 6 HFTZ32
--- +- - - - -+ - - - - !-
40 - , - ressure .-1-MP,r - - 1 250
I I I I Q.2MPa I ' I I
- -1- - -1- - - -+- - - C-- - -1- - -;---+ o.BMPa : : : 200 ~ eress~re 0...7.ME!a- :- HFZ
I I I I I
- :1 -- r --o 5MPa -r - - r - -1 z
____ r1 ____ ::1b.6MPa I_
_ _ _ _ _1
10 20 30 40 50 60 I I I I I I
50 100 150 Q.5MPa I
~
I
Gripping point L (mm} Gripping point L (mm) ~ 20 I I Q4¥Pa ~--:
.8 I 0.3MPa I : ~ ~ 4MEa_ .:-
HFZ20 HFZ40 ~ t ~ M~ :
I
----T---- , - - - - , -
0.3MPa I
I
60 ~ ureO. MP-a- -,---1 400 I 1 I I
50 ~ Pa.i -- i ---: 350
2300
10 20 30 40 50 60 50 100 150
I 0.5MPa I I I Gripping point L (mm} Gripping point L (mm)
r f
I
---t - - 1 - - -1
0.4MPa I I
.,,so 1--- ~:- -"-'""""-....l
+ 4 --t - - -1 ]200 1- · --t-1- - + -....ll.,.oJ!!!"'- HFTZ20 HFTZ40
I Q 3MPa1 I ~50 : 0.3MPa __ I 60 -- r -- 1 -- , -- , ---,- 1 Pr, ssure 0. MPa 1
--i -- i --¢m'Pa~---: .g! QQ I Q.2J Pa - - I 50 = -je--A'.l.' "'",0111~---:- 300 r
1
r
I 0.6MPa1
r---
I
- - +- - - -1- - - -1- - - --1 - - -1
I I I I I j 50 ---~---~---t---' z 40 =',---+~~M~a_-~---:- z 250
i i O.SMP! - - - ,
.,200
20 40 60 80 100 50 100 150 200 ~ 30 - - ~ ---t- ~~~a--~---:- ~1 50 L L 0·4rt:' __ '
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm} .E 0.4Mlj'a 1
g,20 - - ~ -- + - - -+ -o-.JMP8 - - 1- =
-[ 100
L L o.j MPa 1
~ 10 L l o 2sA1P•__:_ l ~ 50
I
___ L ___ L ___ L __ _
I I I
~ I I I I I I I I I
20 40 60 80 100 50 100 150 200

Gripping point L (mm} Gripping point L (mm)
HFZ Series
Single acting normally closed clamping force HFSZ6 The range of the closed gripping points
_ __J _ _ J __ .l.. _ _ L __ I_ _
~
z _ _1~ ~e_o~~P~i- _
~ a :
~
I : t t-M"'.f-"-
~
I 1 1 1 0.4MPa
1 O.JM'Pa
10 15 20 25 30 point
HFZ10 HFZ25
HFSZ10 HFSZ25 60 120
20 - ~ .ressi re f!:.7~Ea_~_ ~ essure0.7M a 1
120 --,--r--1- - , --r-1 -50 _ 100
E E
_-::-t=-::_11_:_6~1·__ j __ _j_ Z100 ~
1
I QS~Pa -{ --~--:
0 SMPa I L __I
540
:c f 80
: [ 0 5~Pa : : " 80
" I I I I " 30 2l 60
]10 L .L ..l0.4MPa- -_i-
~ 60 =!'=---...--,.>QIc,.4"'M'+P,._a L __I j ~ 40
l Q.35MPa : 0,
·[ 40
: 0.3MPa : _JI 20
i~
--L--.L-- ..l - - ~ - - _l - Q 25MPa I ~ 10 20
1 I I I I .g- 20 _ _J _ _ l_ _ _ l__ _l _ _ L _ _J
·.::
10
I I
20
I
30
I
40
I
50
C) I I
20 40 60 80 100 120
I I I I
i
w
0
w
O '--,-J,---',----"'-""-"'"'-"'-'"'-,,-~'-,-1
Gripping point
HFSZ16 HFSZ32 HFZ16 HFZ32

res ure 60 150
60
- l - ={P~~s~r;o":1MPai-i ,.
I
_ so
zso ~ o~M~-i--f-i z
200
I I
T i O 6~ Pa- ~
E eE100
"40 :::1 +Q.SM a--t--r---1
I
L ±
I
i O SMPa J E 40
'i: 'i:
~ ~ ~-~
I I
]30 dJ 4M
Pa I 0.4MPa I
I B 30
g>20
·c.
.g-10
I I : oj MPa :
1 0 25MAa
J
1
- - t- - - + - - -+ ---0.3MPa - --J
I
--, --T--,--, --,

I
I
I I I
I
I
~ 20 !"
'-'
50
~
_ ___j _ _ --1--- 1- - ---1- - - 1- - ---l
C) I I
10 20 30 40 50 60
I I I I
20
I
40
I
60
I
80
I I
100 1 10
0 ~-1~0~ 2~0~ -3~0 ~ 4~0~ 5~0~ -60'-'
'-'
·.::
C
8 50 100 150
Gri in oint L mm Gri in oint L mm w Gripping point (mm) w Gripping point L (mm)
HFSZ20 HFSZ40 HFZ20 HFZ40
I I I I 100 200
400 -.=-='=
Pr=esS:Ure O.~Mf~ _80
z I I I 0.6MPa I I E
,, 300 - ,-- , --,- -u.sMPat- - ~ 5 60
:c
: I I ~ 0.4MPa:
!200 I I 0.3MPa I I ~ 40
I I I I I I
Il:100 --,--T--1- - 1 --1--1
~ 20
~ I I I I I I
'-'
20 40 60 80 100 120 C
20 40 60 80 100 50 100 150 200
Gri in oint L mm 8
w Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm)
The range of the opened clamping point HFZ6

40
2. The selection of the gripping point

2.1) Please select the gripping point within the limited field shown below.
Over the limits, gripping jaws would be subjected to excessive torque loads, and
GrippingI~-H
lead to short life of the air gripper.
point
~ ~R_
"~; HFZ10 HFZ25
~
point
Land H have proper sizes
"' /
V
point '[ 80
"60
100
"~ 20 2l
~ 40
~x
~
w
'-'
·.::
80
C
10
10 20
Gripping point
30 40
(mm)
50
ro
80
w
.__._.,._,.......:>....J.,,__,._----'__,
20 40
Gripping point
60 80
(mm)
100
point
HFZ
His too long
2.2) In the allowable range of gripping point, it is better to design for short and light
fittings. If the fittings are long and heavy, the inertia force when the finger is open
HFZ16
60
- 50
E
HFZ32
100
-80
E
--~--~-·,
and close will become larger, and the performance of gripping jaw will be
E 40
'i: f 60 -
,, 30
degraded, at the same time it will affect the life. '-' g 40
2.3) When the gripped object is very fine and thin, you have to equip with gap between ~ 20 .ll!
fittings. If not, there will be unstable clamp, resulting in a position offset and ~ 20
~ 10 -
adverse clamping and so on. 1 0 ~ ~ 1-0~ -2-0 ~ -30~ ~40~ -5~0~ C
8
'-'
·.::
20 40 60 80 100
w Gripping point L (mm) w Gripping point L (mm)
~ ~ HFZ20
80
HFZ40
120
~
object is very fine
~
object is very thin '[ 60
e 100
580
'i: :c
~ 40 B 60
~ 20
i 40
'-' ~ 20
1
w Gripping point L (mm)
80
1
w Gripping point
HFZ Series
3. The confirmation of the external force put on the gripping jaw. Surface installation type
I
Fv
~
I Mp
l Mr
32
40
M6x1.0
M8 x 1.25
7. The installation method of the gripping jaw fittings

When install the gripping jaw fittings, you have to pay particular attention
that you can only hold the gripping jaw by using spanner, and then
10
12
lock the screws with alien wrench. Never clamp the body
directly and then lock the screws, otherwise the parts
will be easily damaged.
Bore size The bolts type Max. locking moment (Nm)
16 98 0.68 0.68 1.36 6 M2 x 0.4 0.15
20 147 1.32 1.32 2.65 10 M2.5x 0.45 0.31
25 255 1.94 1.94 3.88 16 M3x 0.5 0.59
32 343 3 3 6 20 M4 x0.7 1.4
40 490 4.5 4.5 25 M5x0.8 2.8
Note) The loads and torque values of said are all static values. 32 M6x 1.0 4.9
The calculation of allowable 40 M8x 1.25 11 .8
Examples of calculation
forces when moment loads work
8. Confinm that there is no external forces exerted on the gripping jaw.
In the guide rail of HFZ16, the external force of Transverse load acts on the gripping jaw, which will cause impact load and leads to the
Allowable load(N) the pitching moment static loads put on the point shaking and damage of gripping jaw. Equip with gaps so that the air gripper will not crash into
_ M(Maximum permissible moment)(N.m) of L=30mm is 1=10 N,
work-pieces and accessories at the end of its trip.
- Lx 10·• Allowable load F= 30 °~~~-•
= 22. 7(N) 8.1) The end of stroke under the open state of air gripper
Unit conversion constant
Actual load f=1 O(N)<22. 7(N)
To meet the using requirements
Installation and application

1. Due to the abrupt changes, the circuit pressure is low, which will lead to the decrease of the gripping
force and falling of the work-pieces. In order to avoid the hanm to the human body and damage to the
equipment, anti-dropping device must be equipped.
2. Don't use the air gripper under strong external force and impact force.
3. Please contact with us when the single acting type clamps only with the spring force.
4. When install and fix the air gripper, avoid falling down, collision and damage. There are gaps There aren't gaps
5. When fixing the gripping jaw parts, don't twist the gripping jaw.
6. There are several kinds of installation method, and the locking torgue of fastening screw must be 8.2) The end of stroke under the move state of air gripper
within the prescribed torque range shown in the below chart. If the locking torque is too large, it will
cause the dysfunctional. If the locking torque is too small, it will cause the position deviation and fall.
Tail installation type
X
The bore of the tail is used

for mounting and positioning
8.3) Reverse motion state
When reverse motion state, the gripping
point must be precision, otherwise in the
reverse motion state the air gripper
10 M3 x 0.5 0.88 <ll 11 •g.os 1.5 maybe impact with ambience and
16 M4 x 0.7 2.1 Cll 17 •g.os 1.5 will cause impact load .
20 MS x 0.8 4.3 10 Cll 21 •g.os 2
25 M6 x 1.0 7.3 12 Cll 26 •g.os 2
32 M6x1.0 7.9 12 Cll 34 •g.os 2.5 HFZ
Cll42 •gos
40 M8 x 1.25 17.7 16 2.5 "'
(!)
The installation of the front threaded hole 9. When the work-pieces are inserted, the center line should be coaxial, no offset, in case there
are external force generated on gripping jaw. When testing, it is specially required that the
manual operation should be reduced, the pressure should be used to run ii at a low speed,
and guarantee the safety and no impact.
8 Center coaxial Center offset

M4 X 0.7 10
M5 x 0.8 12 10. Please use the flow control valve to adjust the opening and closing speed of gripping jaw if
M5 x 0.8 13 too fast.
M6x1.0 16 11. People can not enter the movement path of air gripper and articles can not be placed on the
path too.
12. Before removing the air gripper, please confirm that it is out of working state, and then
discharge of compressed air.
Air gripper( mechanical para Ilel style) AlrTAC
HFP Series
Specification
Bore size {mm) 10 16 20 25 32
Acting type Double acting, Single acting
Fluid Air(to be filtered by 40 µ m fitter element)
Double <l>10 0.2-0.7MPa(28- 100psi)(2.0- 7.0bar)
Operating acting Others 0.15-0. 7MPa(22-100psi)(1.5-7.0bar)
pressure Single <l>10 0.35-0.7MPa(50- 100psi)(3.5-7.0bar)
acting Others 0.25-0.7MPa(36-100psi)(2.5-7.0bar)
Lubrication Cylinder: Not required; Gripper jaws: Lubricate grease
Max. gripping length(D mm 30 I 40 I 60 I 70 90
Max. frequency 180(c.p.m) 60(c.p.m)
Sensor switches (2) I CS1-G\DS1-G CS1-G\DS1-G, DS1-H
Port size M3 x 0.5 I MS x 0.8
CD Refer to right graph for the definition of max. gripping length.

(2) Sensor switch should be ordered additionally,
please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Symbol HFTP: Single acting

HFP: Double acting and normally opened
~~
Model Flgertype
HFP: Air finger(Double acting) Blank:Standard
(mechanical parallel style)
HFTP: Airfinger(Single acting and nrmally closed)
Product feature (mechanical parallel style)
1. A structure of lever type gripping is designed to reduce the cost under the
Bore size
premise of accuracy. 10: CD10mm N:Thru.hole mounting type
2. A sheet metal is installed between the finger and body to reduce abrasion 16: CD16mm
and extend the service life. 20: CD20mm
3. The contact area between finger and body is enlarged to reduce shaking 25: ct>25mm
32: CD32mm
and enhance the gripping accuracy.
4. The finger clamps when the piston rod pushes out and stretches when the
piston rod retracts. The gripping force is 20%-30% greater than the Add) HFP series are all attached with magnet.
tensile force.
5. Can be mounted from three directions.
6. Magnet is included in the standard configuration. Inner structure and material of major parts
HFP
'"'
1 C clip Spring steel
•
11 Gripping jaws Stainless steel
2 0 - ring NBR 12 Pin Stainless steel
3 Piston seal NBR 13 Screw Carbon steel
4 Magnet washer NBR 14 Magnet Sintered metal
I/Neodvmium-iron-boronl
5 Piston rod Aluminum allor 15 Piston Aluminum allor
Stainless stee Stainless stee
6 Rod oackinq NBR 16 Bumper TPU
7 Countersink screw Carbon steel 17 Back cover Aluminum alloy
8 Curved bar Stainless steel 18 Body Aluminum alloy
9 Pin Stainless steel 19 Retaining ring Stainless steel
10 Guide sleeve Stainless steel 20 Stopper sleeve Stainless steel
HFP Series
D Dimensions
Cl>32
Thru.hole mounting type Standard
p
The closed port

,,-.: : :
ll'UI I•
HFP10 57(62) 44.5(49.5) 16 23

I
7
I•
4 12
I:
M2.5x0.45 3 5.5 Cl>2.8 M3 x 0.5 5
=·
16
HFP16 72(77) 56.5(61.5) 23.5 34 11 5 15 M3 x 0.5 4 7 Cl>3.3 M4 X 0.7 8 24
HFP20 89.5(94.5) 69(74) 27.5 45 12 6 20 M4 X 0.7 5 9 Cl>4.5 M5 x 0.8 10 30
HFP25 104.5(109.5) 78.5(83.5) 33.5 52 14 8 25 M5x 0.8 6 12 Cl>5.5 M6 x 1.0 12 36
HFP32 118(126) 88(96) 40 60 18 9 29 M6x 1.0 7 14 Cl>6.5 M6x1.0 12 46
ILTHII •
HFP10 23(28) M3 x 0.5 6

:
18 12 M3 x 0.5 6 10
:
6(11)
I
10 Cl> 11 ,gos 1
·-
HFP16 29(34) M4 x 0.7 8 22 15 M4 x 0.7 8 16 6(11) 16 cP17 •g os 1.2
HFP20 34(39) MS x 0.8 10 32 18 MS x 0.8 10 18 8(13) 16 Cl>21 •g.os 1.2
HFP25 31.5(36.5) M6 x 1.0 12 40 22 M6 x 1.0 12 24 8(13) 16 Cl> 26 •g.os 1.5
HFP32 37.5(45.5) M6 x 1.0 12 46 26 M6 x 1.0 12 30 8(16) 20 Cl>34 ,g.os 1.5
ll'UI I • . .. . . .I I 1• • I :n•r1l.'f:T1
HFP10 M3x0.5 6 16.5(23) 10 14.5 'J 10.5 .f

HFP16 M5 x 0.8 7.5 20(25) 13 23.5 'J 15.5 .f
HFP20 M5 x 0.8 7.5 24(29) 15 32.5 'J5 20.5 .f
HFP25 M5 x 0.8 8 22(29) 20 35.5 'J·S 21.5 _f
HFP32 M5x0.8 9.5 26(37) 22 42 • 01.5 26.5 _f
Note) The values in"()' in the above table are single acting type sizes.
HFP
HFP Series
D How to select product Double acting type opened gripping force
Please select pneumatic finger according to the following steps:
The selection of the effective gripping force ---+ the confirmation of the gripping point HFP20
--+ the confirmation of the external force put on the gripping jaw.
The work-pieces as shown in the left:
F: Gripping force (N)
and work-pieces.
m: mass of work-pieces
'~'
.~ mg
g: acceleration of gravity (=9.8m/s')

The gripping work-pieces shown above, on so: F>....!!!L HFP10 HFP25

2x µ
Safety coefficient is a, so Fis:
state, taking safety coefficient a=4, have a
gripping force that is more than 10-20 times F= ....!!!Lxa
of the mass of the gripped objects. 2x µ
=0.2 =0.1
F=2~ap4 F=2~a1x4
=10 x mg =20 X mg
10timesofthe 20 times of the

20 Griooin~Oooint ro /mml 80
mass of the mass of the
gripped objects gripped objects HFP16
40 - - - - - r - - - - - ; - - - - - , - - - - - - r- - -
Note) If the friction coefficientµ >0.2, for safety, please also select clamping force ' ''
~ I I Pressure' O. 7MPa 1
~ ::: ::~ ;~r:

according to the principle of 10-20 times of the mass of the clamped objects. 2 30
---~ ureO.~MPa ---~--
As for large acceleration and shock, it requires for greater safety coefficient. -+---...._J""-0.6MP,a :
---~ ~ ~-~P:a..~--
1:
1.1) The actual gripping force must be within the effective gripping forces of different
pneumatic fingers specifications shown in the below chart.
--- ~
i i i Q
2 :a
.E
=80 --~
-~
i5 40
__ t
------+-__ ~
:
~
~
02Mr
-
Double acting type closed gripping force 0 0 10 20 30 40

30 60 90
Gri in oint L mm Gri in oint mm
HFP20
-----t:5
,i ---,..= oPressur~
~
?O ,0.7MPa_i,
z 60 .eMPa , , 2. The selection of the gripping point
m 5Q ~ .5MPa 1 2.1) Select the gripping point within the maximum gripping length range. Over the limits, gripping
~ 4o ----- ~
~
AMPa -: jaws would be subjected to excessive torque loads, and lead to short life of the air gripper.
~ 30 -----T --~------, n~- i
~ ~~ -----~-----:------t MPa-t ~·~

HFP10 HFP25
20
Gri
40 60
in oint L mm
80
~V
point
Land H have proper sizes
-,. I
Grippin
point
~ ~-;~~~-1: : - - - +-
~X
120 ------i-- ' '
----1-------1------,-
'
z 1 1 Pressur~ 0. 7MPa :
~1
JOO
_____ ~ ~MPa - ~-
.E ~ .6MPa i ~8
g,1 --------~ ~Pa !
point
·~ ~ MPai ----- ~ - His too long
i5 ---------,-----------+ --- !- Oc3Mpa-
0.2M~a ------:------r------r-----:-
: I : Q2~ :
2.2) In the allowable range of gripping point, it is better to design for short and light fittings. If
the fittings are long and heavy, the inertia force when the finger is open and close will
%,--~1~0~~2±0~~~30~~~4~0~ 00 20 40 60 80
Gri in oint L mm Gri in olnt L mm become larger, and the performance of gripping jaw will be degraded, at the same time it
will affect the life.
HFP16 HFP32 2.3) When the gripped object is very fine and thin, you have to equip with gap between fittings.
HFP 50 - - - - - --l- - - - - - ---l- - - - - - ~ - - - - - --l- - -
r 1 -:- If not, there will be unstable clamp, resulting in a position offset and adverse clamping
~ ure0.7Mra i and so on.
20
2 40 ----:=------:+ o.GMPa:-----:-- Z
-- ~
-- ! ~
Pa __ ~---
6MPa :
1-- j;: _~ L ~ ~
-----~ .5MPa
---- ~-
~ ~
c, 1 Q 3MHa
J_ j ~
o.2MAa
-----1 1 -r---
-1a
O2MP c: : 1
I I
i - -~ 5 :. 1, :, object is very fine object is very thin

OOc--~.,..,.-~~,;,-~~~~,,....., i§ 0 f---,c,c---,,,..---,c,c--l
0 30 60 90
10 Grioo~~ ooin?\ /mm\0 Gri in oint mm
••
HFP Series
3. The confirmation of the external force put on the gripping jaw.
a Installation and application
1. Due to the abrupt changes, the circuit pressure is low, which will lead to the decrease of
i 0 the gripping force and falling of the work-pieces. In order to avoid the harm to the human
i
0 i body and damage to the equipment, anti-dropping device must be equ ipped.
0 0 0 0 0 0 i
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 I 0
3. When install and fix the air gripper, avoid falling down, collision and damage.
I
i ...J 5. There are several kinds of installation method, and the locking torgue of fastening screw
+ must be within the prescribed torque range shown in the below chart. If the locking torque
is too large, it will cause the dysfunctional. If the locking torque is too small, it will cause
'-..___/
the position deviation and fall.
Fv Mp Mr

Note) The loads and torque values of said are all static values. for mounting and positioning
The calculation of allowable Examples of calculation
forces when moment loads work
In the guide rail of HFP16, the external
Allowable load(N)
force of the pitching moment static loads 10 M3 x 0.5 6 (!) 11 •805
M(Maximum ~ermissible moment)(N.m)
put on the point of L=30mm is 1=10 N,
- \~
Unit conversion constant
Allowable load F 0.68
16
20
25
M4 x 0.7 2
MS x 0.8 4.5
M6x 1.0
8
10
12
(!) 11•805
(!)21 '805
(!) 26' 8·05
1.2
1.2
1.5
= 30 X 10-'
32 M6x 1.0 13 (!) 34 ' 8·05 1.5
= 22. 7(N)
Actual load 1=1 O(N)<22. 7(N)
To meet the using requirements
0 0
Surface installation type
16 M4 x 0.7 2 8
20 MS x 0.8 4.5 10
· - · - · - -------- · - -
25 M6 x 1.0 7 12
0 0 32 M6 x 1.0 7 12
6. Other contents of installation and operation are the same with those of HFZ. Refer to the
'Installation and Operation' instruction of HFZ.
HFP
Air gripper(angular style) AlrTAC
HFY Series
Specification
Bore size (mm) 6 10 16 20 25 32
ActinA type Double actinA SinQle actinQ
IDouble acting 0.15-0. 7MPa(22- 100psi)(1.5-7.0bar)
Operating . I 0.3-0.7MPa(45-100osi)(3.0-7.0bar)
pressure 1 Smgle <ll6
acting I(J)10-(J)32 0.25- 0.7MPa(36-100osi)(2.5-7.0bar)
Lubrication Cvlinder: Not required; Gripper iaws : Lubricate arease
Cushion tvoe Bumoer
Max. freauencv 180(c.o.m)
Sensor switches G) DS1-H I CS1-G, DS1-G
G) Sensor switch should be ordered additionally, please refer to P457- 480 for detail of sensor switch.
6: <P6mm
10: <P10mm
D Symbol 16: <P16mm
HFTY: Single acting 20: <P20mm
HFY: Double acting and normally opened 25: <P25mm
Add) HFY series are all attached with magnet.
~
32: <P32mm
Gripping force and stroke

Theoretical gripping torque (N·cm) Max. length of griping O I Cl
D Product feature Acting Model Closed Opened point (L)(mm)
1
pemng ang e osing ang e
1. Using a single piston structure, large gripping torque. HFY6 7.4x P 10.6 x P 30
2. Integrated with variable flow valve, it is easy and convenient to adjust the HFY10 17.6 x P 29.4 X p 30
Double acting HFY16 90 x P 129 x P 40
speed of opening and closing of gripping jaw.
3. Reasonable gripping angle, wide range of actual use. HFY20 152x P 252xP 60
4. Precise positioning accuracy, it is more accurate and reliable when HFY25 304x P 473xP 70
HFY32 637x P 904 x P 85
gripping work-piece. 30+~ -10.~
HFTY6 5.7 x P 30
5. Various types of installation, it is convenient for the use in different
Single acting HFTY10 11.8x P 30
occasions. Normally HFTY16 71.2xP 40
6. All series are attached with magnet, so that it is easy to control. opened
HFTY20 122.4 X p 60
HFTY25 252x P 70
HFTY32 589xP 85
Note) The Pin the gripping torque shown in the above chart represents the actual use of air pressure.
• Gri pin ·aws Carbon steel

3 Front cover Aluminum allo
4 Rod ackin NBR
5 Piston rod Aluminum allo /Stainless steel
6 Bumper TPU
8 Ma net washer NBR
HFY 9 Piston Aluminum alloy/Stainless steel
10 Bumper TPU
11 Celi S rin steel
12 Aluminum allo
13 Stainless steel
14 NBR
15 NBR
16 Carbon steel
17 Brass
18 Fixed nut Brass
19 0 - rin NBR
20 Piston seal NBR
Sintered metal
21 Magnet
(Neodymium~ron-boron)
22 Bod Aluminum allo
25 Pin sheath Stainless steel
HFY Series
D Dimensions D How to select product

1. The selection of gripping force
Please determine the gripping force according to the below methods.
The work-pieces as shown In the left:

F: Gripping force (N)
and work-pieces.
m: mass of work-pieces
F~F
*
g: acceleration of gravity (=9.8m/s')

mg
K Dp: KA
(Fixed thread)
The gripping work-pieces shown above, on so:F>~
2x µ
state, taking safety coefficient a=4, have a Safety coefficient is a, so Fis:
gripping force that is more than 10-20 times F= - 2mg xa
of the mass of the gripped objects. X µ
=0.2 =0.1
mg mg
F= 2 X 0.2 X 4 F= 2xD.1 x 4
KC
=10xmg =20xmg
AB
A
10timesofthe 20 times of the
~:Mr:J
gripped objects gripped objects
Note) If the friction coefficientµ >0.2, for safety, please also select clamping force
according to the principle of 10-20 times of the mass of the clamped objects.
As for large acceleration and shock, it requires for greater safety coefficient.
Dp:MA 2. The selection of the gripping point
When the gripping force is determined, select the gripping point according to the limitation
6
:,
10
- .
47.5
52.5
J:- :
36
38.5
10.5
16.5
20
23
14
14
·-··
4
6.4
4
4
M2 x0.4
M2.5x 0.45
2.5
3
5
:
5.7
11
12
12
14.5
ranges shown in the below chart. If the gripping point is over the limit, the gripping jaw will
be subjected to excessive moment load, and lead to short life of air gripper.
Double acting type closed gripping force
Model: HFY20
16 62.5 44.5 23.5 30.5 24 8 7 M3x0.5 4 7 16 19
~
100 - , - , - , - , - , -,
20 78 55 27.5 42 30 10 8 M4 x0.7 5 9 20 23.5
90 -
25 92 60.5 33.5 52 36 12 10 M5x0.8 8 12 27 33
80 -
~
32 96.5 68 40 60 42 18 10 M6 x 1.0 6 14 27 29.5
70 -
:, - : :
60 -
6 M3 x 0.5 Thru. thread 12 26 Gripping point length (mm) z
50 -
10 M3 x 0.5 5 16 23 M3x0.5 6 18 12 M3 x 0.5 6
]" 40 -
16 M4 x 0.7 7 24 24.5 M4x0.7 8 22 15 M4 x0.7 8
g'30 -
20 MS x 0.8 8 30 29 MS x 0.8 10 32 18 MS x 0.8 10
:~20 - t>,.",,"-N~ V
25 M6x1.0 10 36 30 M6x 1.0 12 40 22 M6x 1.0 10 (!) 10
32 M6 x 1.0 10 44 37.5 M6x 1.0 12 46 26 M6x 1.0 10
:, - : . .. ·=-···. .··- ., : ..-,,1...--,11
7 +3.os Gripping point length L (mm)
6 1.5 M3 x 0.5 19 1.5 30° 10°
10 11.5 27 11 '8· 05 1.5 M3 x 0.5 19 10 30° 10°
Model: HFY25
16 16 30 17 '8° 5 1.5 MS x0.8 18.5 13 30° 10°
200
20 18.5 35 21 '8° 5 1.5 MS x 0.8 22 15 30° 10°
180
25 22 36.5 26'8°' 1.5 MS x0.8 23.5 20 30° 10°
160
32 26 30 34 '!°' 2 M5 x0.8 31 24 30° 10° Gripping point length L (mm)
140
Model: HFY10 120 -
30 100 -
z
25 ,, 80
z
20 - ~ 60
.g~ 15 - .[ 40
g> 10 .g- 20
'ci. (!)
.g- 5 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
<!> O L.i_1..O
L_:::j
15~ 2E
O§2~5~3i0__ Gripping point length L (mm)
Gripping point length L (mm)
Model: HFY32
400
Model: HFY16
360
60 320
50 z 280
z ,, 240
40
Q) ~ 200
~ 30 ';, 160
g> 20 ·as_ 120
.g- 80
!10
(!)
<!> 40
10 20 30 40
0
••
HFY Series
Single acting closed gripping force D Installation and application

1. Due to the abrupt changes, the pressure is low, which will lead to the decrease of the gripping force
F Model: HFTY20 and falling of the work-pieces. In order to avoid the harm to the human body and damage to the
e 4. When fixing the gripping jaw parts, don't twist the gripping jaw.
L 5. There are several kinds of installation method, and the torque of fastening screw must be within the
Gripping point length (mm) prescribed moment range shown in the below chart. If the locking moment is too large, it will cause
the dysfunctional. If the locking moment is too small, it will cause the position deviation and fall.
Model: HFTY6

Model: HFTY25 for mounting and positioning
180
I I I I I I I I
10 15 20 25 30
160 - + - f- - 1- -+ - + - f- -I
I I I I I I I
Gripping point length L (mm) 140 -T-r-1- , -T-r ,
120 +- t- -1- 1- +-t- -1 6
10 M3 x0.5 0.88
Cll7H9
Cll11H9
1.5
1.5
ztOO
16 M4 x 0.7 2.1 8 Cll17H9 1.5
20 MS x 0.8 4.3 10 Cll21H9 1.5
Model: HFTY10 25 M6x1.0 7.3 12 Cll26H9 1.5
32 M6 x 1.0 7.3 12 Cll34H9 1.5
The installation of front threaded hole The installation of front through hole
10 20 30 40 50 60 70

400 ,-1-,-,--i-1-,-,,
Model: HFTY32
- .J _L _ L_J _ .J _L _L_J
360
I I I I I I I I
320 _J -+-+-- f--+ - -+ -+--f--+
I I I I I I I I 6 M3 x 0.5 0.69 5 M2.5 x 0.45 0.49 5
z 280 ,-,- r, - , -,-r, 10 M3 x0.5 0.69 5 10 M2.5 x 0.45 0.49 5
Model: HFTY16
240 4-+--H-4-+--H 16 M4 x0.7 2.1 7 16 M3 x 0.5 0.88 7
50
z 40
i 200 20 M5 x 0.8 4.3 8 20 M4 x 0.7 2.1 8
"' 160
-~ 25 M6 x 1.0 7.3 10 25 M5 x 0.8 4.3 10
~ 30
.e i§ 120 32 M6 x 1.0 7.3 10 32 M5 x 0.8 4.3 10
80
Surface installation type
40
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Gripping point length L (mm) Gripping point length L (mm) 16 M4 x 0.7 1.6 6.5
20 M5 x 0.8 3.3 8
25 M6x 1.0 5.9 10
32 M6x 1.0 5.9 10
6. The installation method of the gripping jaw fittings

When install the gripping jaw fittings, you have to pay particular attention
that you can only hold the gripping jaw by using spanner, and then lock
the screws with alien wrench. Never damp the body directly and
then lock the screws, otherwise the parts will be easily damaged.
Bore size The bolts type Max. locking moment(Nm)
6 M2 x 0.4 0.15
HFY 10 M2.5 x 0.45 0.31
16 M3 x 0.5 0.59
20 M4 x 0.7 1.4
25 MS x 0.8 2.8
32 M6x 1.0 4.9
7. When gripping work-piece, the work-piece must be located in the center line of the
two gripping jaws, and the two gripping jaws also need to touch the work-piece at the
same time, otherwise they will be easily damaged.
8. Confirm that there is no additional external forces that are exerted on the gripping jaw. Transverse load
acts on the gripping jaw, which will cause impact load and leads to the shaking and damage of gripping
jaw. Equip with gaps so that the air gripper will not crash into work-pieces and accessories at the end of
its trip.
9. When the work-pieces are inserted, the center line should be coaxial, no offset, in case there are
external force generated on gripping jaw. When testing, it is specially required that the manual operation
should be reduced, the pressure should be used to run it at a low speed, and guarantee the safety and
no impact
10. Please use the flow control valve to adjust the opening and closing speed of gripping jaw if too fast.
11. People can not enter the movement path of air gripper and articles can not be placed on the path too.
12. Before removing the air gripper, please confirm that it is out of working state, and then discharge of
compressed air.
•mn•
Air gripper( 180° open/close type) AlrTAC
HFR Series
Specification
1: •.
Actinq type
I .
Double actinq
I

Operating pressure 0.15- 0.7MPa(21-100psi)(1.5-7.0bar)
.... /..... Temperature "C -10- 70
·r. Lubrication
Cushion type
Max. frequency
Repeatability
Gripping force G)
Open or close angle
0.1 6N.m
Cylinder, Not required; Gripper jaws: Lubricate grease
Bumper
60(c.p.m)
±0.2mm
I 0.55N.m I 1.10N.m I 2.30N.m I 5.00N.m
Open: -2° - -5° Close: 180°± 2°
Port size MS x 0.8
Sensor switches (2) DS1-H
CD The gripping force is the value when the operating pressure is 0.5Mpa.
(2) Sensor switch should be ordered additionally, please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
D Ordering code
D Symbol
Model • Mounting type

IHFR: 180° open/close air gripper! Blank: Mounting through
tapped holes
D Product feature Bore size
10: Cl>10mm
1. open/close type, simplify the gripping action.
16: Cl>16mm
2. A sheet metal is installed between the finger and body to reduce abrasion N: Mounting through holes ~
20: Cl>20mm
and extend the service life. (tapped in open/close •
3. Dust proof is designed in the finger part, which is applicable to special
working environment.
4. All series are all attached with magnet. CD HFR series are all attached with magnet.
25:
32:
Cl>25mm
Cl>32mm
direction) • •
...
5. Many mounting types to be choosed.
D Dimensions
D Inner structure and material of major parts p
The opened port
: ~ 2120 19~18'ii:~9~f D
2~
1 2 3
<
u
rH+::::;i;:=!===~=1
--;.:~ -,~ +,---~-,...~~
u
1
• Cclip Sprin steel 12
• Front cover Aluminum alloy
2 0 - rin NBR 13 Sheet metal Stainless steel Mounting through tapped holes
Countersink 14 Pin Stainless steel
3 screw Carbon steel
4 Piston seal NBR 16 Piston rod Stainless steel
5 Magnet washer NBR 17 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy
Sintered metal 18 Piston Aluminum alloy
6 Magnet (Neodymiumaronaoron 19 . Mounting through holes
0-ring NBR 2-M Thread D · MA (tapped in open/close direction)
7 Bumper TPU 20 Back cover Aluminum alloy 11m11 · ': : : I I• :•
8 Rod packing NBR 21 Body Aluminum alloy
10 71 58 15 30 22 23.5 6 4 M3 x 0.5 Cl>3.3 3 6 HFR
9 Grippin ·aws Stainless steel 22 Pin Stainless steel
16 84 69 20 38 28 28.5 8 5 M3 x 0.5 Cl>3.3 4 7
10 Pin sheath Stainless steel 23 Countersink screw Carbon steel
Countersink screw Carbon steel 20 106 86 26 48 36 37 10 8 M4 x 0.7 Cl>4.5 5 9
11 Push block Stainless steel 24
25 131 107 30 58 45 45 12 10 MS x 0.8 Cl>5.5 6 12
32 158.5 122 40 72 55 62.5 14 12 M6 x 1.0 Cl>6.5 9 16
D Example I L'J l f f " : : :
10 Cl>3.3 18 24 M3 x 0.5 6 35 M3 x 0.5 6 24 9
16 Cl>4.5 20 30 M4x0.7 8 41 M4 x 0.7 8 30 12
20 Cl>S.5 25 36 M5x0.8 10 50 MS x 0.8 10 38 16
25 Cl>6.5 30 42 M6x 1.0 12 60 M6x1 .0 12 46 18
32 Cl>6.5 35 46 M6x 1.0 12 64 M6x1 .0 14 46 26
11.TJltt• : .. ·:- ,,._
10 M3 x 0.5 4 9 30 (I) 11 '805 1.5 M5 x 0.8 7 28.5 3
16 M4 x 0.7 5 12 33 (I) 17 '805 1.5 M5 x 0.8 7 30.5 8
20 M5 x 0.8 8 14 42 Cl>21 '8·05 1.5 M5 x 0.8 8 38.5 12
25 M6 x 1.0 10 16 50 Cl>26 '8·05 1.5 M5x 0.8 8 48 14
32 M6 x 1.0 12 26 59 (1)34 '805 2 M5x 0.8 9 56 18
ilt•Si
Air gripper( 180° open/close type) AlrTAC
HFR Series
D How to select product 3. The selection of the gripping point

3.1) Please select the gripping point within the limited field shown left.Over the limits, gripping
1. Confirmation of effective gripping force
jaws would be subjected to excessive torque loads, and lead to short life of the air gripper.
1.1) Though the coefficient of friction between the attachments and the workpiece
3.2) In the allowable range of gripping point, it is better to design for short and light fittings. If
is different, select a gripping force which is 10 to 20 times greater than the
the fittings are long and heavy, the inertia force when the finger is open and close will
workpiece weight.
become larger, and the performance of gripping jaw will be degraded, at the same time it
1.2) If high acceleration or impact forces are encountered during motion, a further
will affect the life.
margin of safety should be considered.
Example: When the workpiece weight is 0.05 and the gripping point distance 60
E
Lis 30mm, the operating pressure will be Skgf/cm'. § 50
I
Effective gripping force=0.05kgx20 timesx9.8m/s'=more than 10N 40
G .c
Model selection: HFR 16 is recommended. The effective gripping force is 17N, ·-·-·-· · C)
Gripping C: 30
which is 20 times greater than the set value of gripping force. point ..!E
1.3) The finger thrust is expressed as F, when both fingers and attachments are in .; 20
>
full contact with the workpiece as shown in the figure below. ..!E 10
c 0
"'
() 1 2 3 4 5
Pressure P(kgf/cm')
0 0 0 0 D Installation and application
()
1. Due to the abrupt changes, the circuit pressure is low, which will lead to the decrease of the gripping
0
force and falling of the work-pieces. In order to avoid the harm to the human body and damage to the
-• 'f -
i
f i i g- 3. When install and fix the air gripper, avoid falling down, collision and damage.
F
-,- 5. There are several kinds of installation method, and the locking torgue of fastening screw must be
F: Single finger thrust within the prescribed torque range shown in the below chart. If the locking torque is too large, it will
L: Gripping point
cause the dysfunctional. If the locking torque is too small, it will cause the position deviation and fall.
2. Connection between gripping force and gripping point distance
-'t=i
Model: HFR10 Model: HFR16
z10 ---,----,----,---- ,----. 0 0
-0-:5-~
· Pr~Lsuc~0
: ::
o~Mc
:
!: z
30
25
0 0
Q)
-04
·- ~
,· - ·' -- •
, ---
•,' ---..: 2 20
' ' The bore of the tail is
.E
~::K~
-n:f~
~
-~---,~ ~-- : --:
c,
C:
~10
15
u
i
u
i use or mounting and
positioning
' .. .
' '
c5
' ' '
' ' '
10 M3 x 0.5 1 6 ct> 11H9
20 30 40 50 60 20 30 40 50 60 70
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm) 16 M4 X 0.7 2 a ct> 17H9 1.5
20 MS x 0.8 4.5 10 ct>21H9 1.5
25 M6 x 1.0 12 ct>26H9 1.5
Model: HFR20 Model: HFR25
32 M6 x 1.0 14 ct>34H9
The installation of the front threaded hole The installation of the front through hole
30 40 50 60 70 80 O 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 10 M3 x 0.5 6 10 M3 x 0.5
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm) 16 M4x0.7 2 a 16 M4 x 0.7 2
20 MS x 0.8 4.5 10 20 MS x 0.8 4.5
Model: HFR32
25 M6 x 1.0 7 12 25 M6x1.0 7
pr~T 0?M~~ , ~
32 M6 x 1.0 7 14 32 M6 x 1.0 7
1
: : : : 0.5 ~
~ : I I I I I Surface installation type
HFR ~ 20 03~~ ~--i---t---!

OAi
J8o 02~
40~,~~
0 3~ 4~ 50 6~ 70 80 90 32 M6 x 1.0 6
6.The installation method of the gripping jaw fittings
When install the gripping jaw fittings, you have to pay
particular attention that you can only hold the gripping
jaw by using spanner, and then lock the screws with all en
wrench . Never clamp the body directly and then lock the
screws, otherwise the parts will be easily damaged.
Boresize The bolts type Max. locking moment (Nm)
10 M3 x 0.5 0.6
16 M3 x 0.5 0.6
20 M4 x 0.7 0.8 Exterior arm
25 MS x 0.8 1.5 (Accessorie)
32 M6 x1 .0 3
7. Other contents of installation and operation are the same with those of HFY.
Refer to the "Installation and Operation' instruction of HFY.
Air gripper(parallel open/close type) AlrTAC
HFC Series
Specification
Bore size (mm) 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
0.2-0.6MPa(28-87psi) (2.0-6.0bar) I 0.15-0.6MPa(22-87psi)(1 .5-6.0bar)
Repeatability mm ±0.01
Max. frequency 120(c.p.m) I 60(c.p.m)
Sensor switches G) DS1-H , DS1-HL
Port size M3x0.5 I MS x 0.8
(1) Sensor switch should be ordered additionally, please refer to P457-480 for detail of sensor switch.
Model Bore size

D Symbol !HFC: Airfinger(Double acting, parallel type)! 16: <ll16mm
20 : <ll20mm
Finger type 25: <ll25mm
32: <ll32mm
1· Two g r i p p e ( i ) s 40: <ll40mm
50· <ll50mm
Product feature
C) C)
C) -~- mS~mm
1. Cuniform block is adopted in the interior of the air gripper to afford larger
gripper force .
2. The bumper is adopted in the front of piston, which can reduce the noise of
Y, Th,.,g,;&J
metal bump.
3. Apositioning hole is attached to the bottom of the body, which can improve the
precision and the consistency of repeated dismounting and positioning. X:
4. Precision repeating snatch which adopted roboticized equipment.
5. Kinds of series and styles for you to choice which snatch multiform workpiece .
D Gripping force and stroke Note: HFC series are all attached with magnet.
Gripping force per finger Opening/Closing
Model Effective valve(N) stroke (Both
External Internal sides)(mm) D Inner structure and material of major parts
HFCl16 23 21 4
HFCl20 42 37 4
HFCl25 71 63 6 C clip Spring steel
2 grippers HFCl32 123 111 8 0-ring NBR
HFCl40 195 177 8 Back cover Aluminum allo
HFCl50 306 280 12 Screw Carbon steel
HFCl63 537 502 16 Magnet washer NBR
Ma net Sintered metal(Neodymium-iron-boron
HFCY16 16 14 4
Piston seal NBR
HFCY20 28 25 4
Rod packing NBR
HFCY25 47 42 6 Countersink screw Stainless steel
3 grippers HFCY32 82 74 8 Cover blank Stainless steel
HFC
HFCY40 130 118 8 Piston rod Stainless steel
HFCY50 204 187 12 12 Gripper Stainless steel
HFCY63 359 335 16 13 Bum er TPU
HFCX16 12 10 4 14 Piston Aluminum allo
HFCX20 21 19 4 15 Magnet holder Aluminum alloy
HFCX25 35 31 6 16 Bod Aluminum allo
4 grippers HFCX32 61 55 8
HFCX40 97 88 8
HFCX50 153 140 12
HFCX63 268 251 16
Note) The gripping force in the above table is in the working pressure of 0.5MPa, and
with a gripping point of L=20mm(CJ> 16-CJ>25) or L=30mm( CJ>32-CJ>63).
Add) Please refer to page 405 for the definition of "L".
ilt•Hi
HFC Series
<D 16-<D25
a,
:3 ~ ~~--1---,--1-'-tl ....I
e
-;;
Q) al
g c3~------'1
C "'
C
0
II
a:
~,-,
~
u
w
3-<DJ(Thru.hole)
<DJA(Countersink)
Dp: JB(P.C.D=<PJC)
..... - • :1 : =• •-• ·-11:

HFCl16 35 M3 x 0.5 5 HFCY16 35 3 30 5 -0.01 8 10 2 !8:81 2 +0.2 4 M3 x 0.5 5
-0.03 0
HFCl20 39 M3 x 0.5 5 7 HFCY20 39 3 36 6 -0.QJ
-0.03 10 12 2 !8:81 2 ·i2 5 M3 x 0.5 5
HFCl25 41 M3 x 0.5 5 HFCY25 41 3 42 6 -0.01 12 14 2 !8:81 2 · ~-2 6 M3 x 0.5 5
-0.03
HFCY32 45 3 52 8 -0.01 14 20 2:881 2 ·i 2 9 M4 x 0.7 8
-0.03
HFCY40 49 3 62 8 -0.01 16 21 3 !8:81 2 •i2 9 M4 x 0.7 8
HFCl16 17 •i.os 1.5 M3x 0.5 -0.03
HFCl20 21 •i.os 1.5 MS x 0.8
HFCY50 57 3 70 10:88l 18 24 4!8:~ 2 · i 2 10 M5x 0.8 9
26 •ios 1.5 MSx0.8
HFCY63 68 4 86 12:88l 24 28 6 !8:81 3 ·i 2 11 M5x 0.8 9
HFCl25
..... - : :
2 +0.04 2 =-'"-'"'
HFCY16 6 2 3.4 6 6 25 +0.01 3 11 12.5 M3 x 0.5
<D32-<D63 2 +0.04 2
HFCY20 7 2.5 3.4 6 6 29 +0.01 3 13 14.5 M3 x 0.5
HFCY25 8 3 4.5 8 9 34 3 :881 3 5 145 17 M4 x 0.7
PB PA
HFCY32 11 4.5 4.5 8 9 44 3 :881 3 5 19.5 22 M4 x 0.7
HFCY40 12 4.5 5.5 9.5 9 53 4 +0.01
+0.04 4 6 23.5 26.5 MS x 0.8
<(
HFCYSO 14 5 5.5 9.5 12 62 4 :881 4 6 28 31 MS x 0.8
::::,
HFCY63 17 5.5 6.6 11 14 76 5!8:81 5 7 34.5 38 M6x1.0
"O
Q)
~ ..Q
OU
C
"O
"
"' ..... - : . .. :
HFCY16 6 25 11•i.os 1.5 M3 x 0.5 7 10 7 5
HFCY20 6 29 21 •i os 1.5 MS x 0.8 7 13 8 6
HFCY25 8 34 26 •ios 1.5 MS x 0.8 7.5 14.5 10 7
HFCY32 8 44 34 •ios 2 MS x 0.8 8.5 16 12 8
HFCY40 10 53 42•ios 2 MS x 0.8 9.5 17.5 14 10
HFCYSO 10 62 s2•ios 2 MS x 0.8 9.5 21 17 11
A HFCY63 12 76 65'i.os 2.5 MS x 0.8 12 24 23 15
HFCl32 45 55 8 -0.01 14 M4 x 0.7 8 11

-0.03
HFCl40 49 3 62 8 -0.01 16 M4 x 0.7 8 12
-0.03
HFCl50 57 3 70 10:88l 18 MS x 0.8 9 14
HFCl63 68 4 86 12:88l 24 MS x 0.8 9 17
HFCl32 3 +0.04 3 5 20.5 23 MS x 0.8 10 38 25 34 •ios M5x 0.8 8.5 16 24 16

+0.01
HFCl40 4 +0.04 4 6 23.5 26.5 M6 x 1.0 12 44 28 42 •ios M5 x 0.8 9.5 17.5 28 20
+0.01
HFCl50 4 +0.04 4 6 28 31 M6 x 1.0 12 52 34 52 •ios MS x 0.8 9.5 21 34 22
+0.01
HFCl63 5 +0.0
+0.041 5 7 34.5 38 M6 x 1.0 12 66 38 65 •ios 2.5 M5 x 0.8 12 24 46 30
ilm!I
HFC Series
D How to select product
Please select pneumatic finger according to the following steps:
<1>16-<1>25 The selection of the effective gripping force -> the confirmation of the gripping point.
The gripping work-pieces The work-pieces as shown in the left:

n: number of gripper
shown above, on the impact F: Gripping force (N)
condition of ordinary µ : friction coefficient between fittings
handling state, taking safety and work-pieces.
coefficient a=4, have a m: mass of work-pieces
gripping force that is more g: acceleration of gravity (=9.Bm/s~
than 10-20 times of the
mass of the gripped objects. The condition that the work-pieces
won't drop is: n x µ F>mg
=0.2 =0 .1 so· F>~

· nx µ
mg mg
F=2xo.2x 4 F=2xo.1 x 4 Safety coefficient is a, so F is:
=10 x mg =20 X mg
F = ~ xa
nx µ
10 times of the 20 times of the
gripped objects gripped objects
Note) If the friction coefficient µ >0.2, for safety, please also select clamping force
according to the principle of 10- 20 times of the mass of the clamped objects.
HFCX16 35 5 -0.01 8 M3 x 0.5 5 3.4 6 As for large acceleration and shock, it requires for greater safety coefficient.
-0.03
HFCX20 39 6 -0.01 10 M3 x 0.5 5 2.5 3.4 6
-0.03
6 -0.01 12 1.1) The actual gripping force must be within the effective gripping forces of different
HFCX25 41 -0.03 M3 x 0.5 5 3 3.4 6
pneumatic fingers specifications shown in the below chart.
Closed gripping force(I Type) HFCl16
HFCX16 2 11 1ri-05 1.5 M3 x 0.5 10 17 13
~.
HFCX20 2 13 21 •io5 1.5 MS x 0.8 13 19 15 30
26 'i·o5 1.5 MS x 0.8 7.5 14. 26 20 z
HFCX25 3 5 14.5 17
~
.E 20
C,
<1>32-<1>63 C
-~
~
~ 10
PB PA
F
10 15 20 25 30
<( CD Gri in oint L mm)
::, ::,
;; HFCl20 HFCl25
~ ~
~ .Q 60 - ~ PrisS~re 0.6Mfa ___ : I I I I
0 (.)
:----r
~ --- ,I---- Ir z
100 - + ----~ ---~ ---- ~
Pressure 0.6MPa 1
z
"
~ 40
-~
-~
I
I
0.5MPa
~AM~;---:
I
I
I
I
"u
80
-~ I I
p:: ----:
I I
-~~
.E .E 60
g> -~
- L---~ ----s g>
-~ I
20 --- +----~--- - -- ~
I o.~MPa :
:~ 40 -~ L
~ ~ a: i,
_ __ i ____ L---~---- L
I I I I
20 -~
I I I I
I I I I I I I I
10 20 30 40 10 20 30 40
HFCl32 HFCl40
~ 0.6r,.1Pa 1
r~~.~~~8- ~ -
z
150 -- ~
z 250 ---r I I --:---i-
e --f---: _ !---f-
120
~
o.~MPa
1 1
~ 200 --~ :----L_ o.4MPa :

---+-
90 --~ --l- :
0
.E
C, ~ 150 --: ---!-~ I I I I
- +-
I
w C : : : e2_MP~ ·c.
,;, -~ __ I ___ I __ i ___ L __ I_
60 .g- 100 -- ~ -
EC EB ~
L-.._
I
I
I
I
I I
I
I
0.2MP8
f--
I
I
I
(!)
I I I I I
HFC
30 - - +- - -f- - - +- - -!t.!MPJ'- 50 -- -r---1--- +---~.tMPp-
1 I I I I l I I I I
10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 50
HFCl50 HFCl63
HFCX32 45 3 55 8 -0.01 M4 x 0.7 8
-0.03 400
HFCX40 49 3 62 8 -0.01 16 21 2+0.2 9 M4 x 0.7 8 12 600
-0.03 0 z z
HFCX50 57 3 70 10:88! 18 24 2+0.2 10 M5 x 0.8 9 14
0 Q) 300
HFCX63 68 4 86 12:88! 24 28 3•i2 11 M5 x 0.8 9 17
"'
.E
C,
-= 200
3 +0.04 MS x 0.8 34 •io5 MS x 0.8
-~
HFCX32 +0.01 20.5 23 10 38 25 2 28 20 i, 100 I I
HFCX40 4 +0.04 4 6 23.5 26.5 M6 x 1.0 12 44 28 42 •io5 2 MS x 0.8 9.5 17.5 32 24 --,-- 0.11Mf:a l __
+0.01
HFCX50 4 +0.04 4 6 28 31 M6 x 1.0 12 52 34 52•io5 2 MS x 0.8 9.5 21 38 26 '
+0.01
5 +0.04 M6 x 1.0 65 •io5 MS x 0.8 12 24 20 40 60 20 40
HFCX63 +0.01 34.5 38 12 66 38 2.5 51 35
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point
ilt•~W
HFC Series
Opened gripping force{I Type) Closed gripping force(YType)
HFCl16 HFCl20 HFCY16 HFCY20

30 T --:
-- , - P essurf 0.6~Pa 60 I I I I I I 40 _J .Er~¥ !!.!'~ .§_ l:.~1.
~~-,~~j __ J
I I I I
z
I I
-- ~ --Oi5M-P1- -i --i
I I I I
z z 20 --~ z 35
I I
- ~ -r--1--r-- 1- -1--r
I I I I
"u 20
l i~
--1--- r - - -r - - -t --~--~
11
"~ 40 w ~ Pa :: ~
30 - ~--, - ,
I I I I
' ~~!)MP~--~
I I
~ 15
.le
"'
C
-~
:-------).__ I n 4MPa
--~-- ~ - ~
1
--~
1 .le
"'
C
-~ --~
~
- -1- - - t- - - -t- - - -t - - ~ - - ~
Pa : .le 25
.[ 20
.g- 15
- ~~
- ~
: I
I
I
1
- L_ _J __ L
I I O.~MP~
-,--r--,--T-- r -
---l - - + - - f--- ----1-- +-
_
1 0. MP
- __ 1_
10 -- ~ 20
~ ~
i--- :
__ L __ L __ L __ i
: 0.2~Pa
__
:
~ -~
: >- ,
--r-- r
, , 0,2MPa
,-- «- =.=i "' 10 -~~
I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I I 5 -J--L-~--~--~ -~--~
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
10 15 20 25 30 10 20 30 40 10 15 20 25 30 10 15 20 25 30 35
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point (mm) Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm)

I I I I
100 ----+----l-----+---- 1- - 150 -- ~ _r!Q.,§~e~ t-
1 I I I
z 80 - ~ 0~6 ~!_a__ ~_ z 120 -- ~ Y~--- i-

~ e 40
I I I I I
60 -~ ~8- - - ~ - ~ 90 --~ ---+-
~ .le I I I I I 0
~ MPJ
"'
C
f--- I I ~.3M~a g' 30
-~40 - ~ L- -~ 60 ·a.
~ 1 b.2M~a .9- 20
~20 -~ - ~ 30 I I
-- + ---,-- - +- - - 0.1M~.-
I I I (!)
I I I I
I I I I 1 I I I I
10 20 30 40 10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 50
Gripping point (mm) Gripping point (mm) Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm)

JJU
250 400 --L -- L -- ~ -- J -- ~ -- ~

I I I I I I 200
I I I I I I I
z z ~ e~.6M~ z z 300 1--~--iPr~[s~r;ksM~a-~-- :

200 300 --~ +--~~ ~Pi ~ 160 250 -- I -
1- - ~~ I~ --L--:--~-- I
" "~ :___ : ~ 1 " ~ 2QQ 1-_J __ ~j__ J __

~ 150
_J_ __ I ' I
.le - - ~ - - L __ , __ I Oj~p~ ]120 .,E ~ 0.4MPi I I
"'
C go 200 "'
C .S1so 1--~---+--~ J __ 1
·~1 00 -~ ~ I
I ·~ 80 .e: ~- ~--+-Q
.JMP~ - : :
~ ~ 100 L0.2MPa1
- - t-
1
t-
1 1
I I :..:::I ~ c5 100 ~ - ~ --,
50 : 1 0.J MPa: 40 5Q 1-- -J __ I __ I _fr._ _ ___ I
I
: : : : : : I
10 20 30 40 50 20 40 60 10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 50 60
Gripping point (mm) Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point (mm) Gripping point (mm)
HFCl63 HFCY63
z
600 --I==l- +-~~i~:~P_·~ 500 - - +- -
I
~
I
- 1- - -
I
+- -
s~re 0.6~Pa :
I
- 1- - -
I
+-
"
-,~ -~ 400
HFC ~ 400 -~ -~
z t---.J_
I I~
0 :5MP~
I
:
I
"' p
300 --~ 4Mlfa--i -
C
-~ l : l ~ O.~PE .J
~ 200 : : : o.2MPa J $:200
~
--~
, ,
.M~9--+-
0.2M~a ,
I I
0.1MPJ 100 ---:- ---,- --1n Mfla---:--
' I I I I
20 40 60 20 40 60 80 100
Gripping point (mm) Gripping point (mm)
etm•
HFC Series
Opened gripping force(Y Type) Closed gripping force(X Type)
HFCY16 HFCY20 HFCX16 HFCX20

I
I
35
I I I I I I 15
z 20 -- ~ reO.~MP~--: z 30 z
., 25 .,
£
e 15 __ ~ _ l Q)i_r,tl'_a_ ~ __ -:
11 ~ 11 £
0
20 £
0
10
"' !---!__ ! !n AlA I

"' "'
-~
C
10 --r--r-~ ~<!_-: C
-~ 15 -~
C
~ !--------+----- ! n !'" P~ ~ 10 ~
--l--k--+~
I I I I I 1
I I I I I I
10 15 20 25 30 10 15 20 25 30 35 10 15 20 25 30 10 20 30 40
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point (mm)
60 : : eo.{MPat---t 100 75 --~~-t ::r:~·~~~~l-

z
50 ~ --+---+
MPa :
---+
:
z 60
~
--+---:--- I p~-1---+-
II
I
e 40 ---+---___: i - --- T - - - r
e 45 --+
~ I
--- ~ -
~ 3o d_ ~ 4-~a -i "'
£
"' 30
I
I I 0.3M~a
-~20 ~ · - i -~
C 40 -~
I
-- }= - -:---:---,Q±~~a-
I I I I
~ :,--- ,- , - !!1::,P• : ~ 20 ~ 15 - - +I - - I
- 1- - -
I I
+- - - 1).tM~,r
I
10 -- 1- - - I ___ I - - - 1
I I I I I I I I I I
10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 10 20 30 40 50
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point (mm) Gripping point (mm)

~ ressyre0.6 Pa
200 -- + -
I
I
I I I I
- -1- - - + - - -1--- + -
I I I I 300 125 ---:- ---:-~ -:----:- - 1
200
2 160 -- ~
I
I
I
I
I
I l.
I
I
IJ'relsaraQ.SooPa
I
I
.1 _
I
I
z 250
e
2 100 --~ ---+- 2 150
e
£
120 --t---~~ ~ _0.!.5MP_a
---+- I
£
200 "'
~ 75
~
--:---: ~
I I
o.4MPa :
I I
-!-
1
I
"'
~ MRa g, 150 }100
"' 80 "' 50
-~ -- -L=.::.: + --+---03f;l~a-
~
:g: 100 ·~ --t-=t=I=~ a-
:~ 3M~a
-~
§ 40 -- +
:
I- +
: 0.21\ma
-+ -
(!)
50
~ 25
1
- - +- - -
I
1- - -
I I
+ - - - lft.1MPa-
I ~ 50
I 1 1 1Q.1MF?a
I
10 20 30 40 50 10 20 30 40 50 60 7 10 20 30 40 50 20 40 60
Gripping point (mm) Gripping point (mm) Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point L (mm)
HFCY63 HFCX63
I I I I I
-
1
--
1
-- -p ssu-o: P-a
500 --+---1---+-- ~ ---+- 300 I I I I I
I I I I I -~ --
z 400 -- ~ st re0.6~Pa f- z
e 300 -- + -
~
- -1- -- + - - -l--- + -
5MP~ :
e200 -~~ I I I I I I
HFC
£ ~ 4MPa : £ - ~L_:- J l ~ O.~MP3
.S200 -- ~
1 1 0 .3MRa 1
- 1- - - 1 - "'
C I I I I I I
0. --1---t--
1
--
1 0.2MP
.e- ~ : ~.2M~a : :~100
c'.5 100 --t i 0.1MPa---:- - i5 1
--,-- ,-
1 : : 0.1MP~
, I I I 1 I
20 40 60 80 100 20 40 60
Gripping point (mm) Gripping point (mm)
ilt•tli
HFC Series
Opened gripping force(X Type) D Installation and application
1. Due to the abrupt changes, the circuit pressure is low, which will lead to the decrease of the gripping force and
falling of the work-pieces. In order to avoid the hann to the human body and damage to the equipment,
anti-dropping device must be equipped.
5. There are several kinds of installation method, and the locking torgue of fastening screw must be within the
prescribed torque range shown in the below chart. If the locking torque is too large, it will cause the
dysfunctional. If the locking torque is too small, tt will cause the position deviation and fall.
HFCX16 HFCX20
15 -- , - Plessur~0.6"!Pa i-- : 30
I I I I I I
- - ~- -oTf~fP1- -i--i z
z 10 --~--t~ --~--~ 20
"'<'
--~ : 1 1 0.3MPa :
--J :
.E
C>
C
-- ~ -~ 10
~ 1
: 0.2t-,1Pa : : ~
__ L __ L __ ~ __ ] __ J _ =-:::j
I I I I I I
I I I I I I
10 15 20 25 30 10 20 30 40
M4 X 0.7 1.5
Gripping point L (mm) Gripping point (mm) 25 M4 x 0.7 2.1 1.5
HFCI
32 M5 x 0.8 4.3 10 2
HFCX
HFCX25 HFCX32 40 M6 x 1.0 7.3 12 CD 42 +io5 2
I I I I 50 M6x1 .0 7.3 12 CD 52 +io5 2
50 --- + ----1-----+---- f- 75 -- ~ rg(l §~rl!_ f-
63 M6 x 1.0 7.3 12 CD 65 +0.05 2.5
l I I I
z 40 - ~ 0.:.sr!_a__ i z 60 -- ~1 : a:sMP~- , --,-

: 16 M3 x 0.5 0.88 CD 17 +0.05 1.5
1 I I I I 20 M3 x 0.5 0.88 CD 21+o. 1.5
e 30 -~ ~8 ---l ~ 45 -- ~
.E I I I I
--~-
I 25 M4 X 0.7 2.1 CD 26 +io5 1.5
';, ~ MP~ ~ p.3M~a CD 34 +io5
·i2Q -~ L
: 1
HFCY 32 M4 X 0.7 2.1 2
~ : : b.2M~a 40 M5 x 0.8 4.3 10 CD 42 +io5 2
I I I I I
;§10-~ - - +- - -f- -- + ---O.tM~a- 50 M5 x 0.8 4.3 10 CD 52 +io5 2
I I I I
I I I I 1 I I I I
63 M6x1 .0 7.3 12 CD 65 +0.05 2.5
10 20 30 40 10 20 30 40 50
Gripping point (mm) Gripping point (mm) The installation of the front through hole
Model Bore size The bolts type Max. locking moment(Nm)

HFCX40 HFCX50 16 M3 x 0.5 0.88
200 20 M3 x 0.5 0.88
25 M3 x 0.5 0.88
z150 @i HFCI
HFCX
32
40
M4 x 0.7
M5 x 0.8
2.1
4.3
~
.E 100 50 M5 x 08 4.3
g, 63 M5 x 0.8 4.3
·a.
.g- 50 16 M3 x 0.5 0.88
C!l
20 M3 x 0.5 0.88
25 M4 x0.7 2.1
10 20 30 40 50
HFCY 32 M4 x 0.7 2.1
Gripping point (mm) Gri pping point L (mm) 40 M5 x 0.8 4.3
50 M5 x 0.8 4.3
63 M6 x 10 7.3
HFCX63
- -, · -r 'T ·r- ·r- · -,
1 1 Pl~ssulp 0.61,1Pa:
300 -,~ :
,-- 6. The installation method of the gripping jaw fittings
z -~ --: When install the gripping jaw fittings, you have to pay particular attention that you can only hold the gripping jaw
HFC .,200
<'
.E
-~ : , J. ~ O.~ P1
-: ,
by using spanner, and then lock the screws with alien wrench. Never clamp the body directly and then lock the
screws, otherwise the parts will be easily damaged.
I I I I I ---,
C>
1 1 1 0.2MPa 1
Install the gripping jaw fittings
-~1 00 * t
I
t:
I
:1
I
;§ 1 0.1MPa
Bore size The bolts type Max. locking moment(Nm)
20 40 60
16 M3 x 0.5 0.59
Gri pping point (mm) 20 M3 x 0.5 0.59
25 M3 x 0.5 0.59
32 M4 x 0.7 1.4
40 M4 x 0.7 1.4
50 M5 x 0.8 2.8
63 M5 x 0.8 2.8
em:•
Twist clamp cylinder--ACK Series
D Product series
Acting Bore
Series name
type size
ACK Series
0) 25
C:
u 32
"'
Q) 40
:0 50
ACKD Series ::,
0
Cl 63
Page 410

1. Clamping operation must be carried out within the clamping stroke and can not be performed within the
swivel stroke.
2. Clamping plane must be vertical to the cylinder axes. After the components are clamped, don't move the
components.
3. Before the cylinder is connected to pipeline, sundries in the pipe must be eliminated to prevent impurities
entering the cylinder.
Anti-dust cap shall be added in inlet and outlet ports. The end of piston shall be coated with anti-rust oil.
Cl Theoretical clamping force Unit: Newton(N)

Operating pressure(M Pa)
Bore size (mm) Rod size (mm)
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
25 14 67.4 101.1 134.8 168.5 202.2 235.9
32 16 60.3 120.6 181 .0 241.3 301 .6 361 .9 422.2
40 16 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.3 738.9
50 20 164.9 329.9 494.8 659.7 824.7 989.6 1154.5
63 20 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121.2 1401.5 1681.9 1962.2
ACK
Twist clamp cylinder AlrTAC
ACK Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 25 32 40 50 63
AclinA type Double actinA
Operatinq pressure 0.15- 1.0MPa(22-145psi)
SnAAd ranae mm/s 50-200
+ 1.0
Stroke tolerance n
Rotary angle tolerance ± 1.5°

Cushion type G) No cushion
Port size ~ M5x 0.8 I 1/8'
CD lflhere is no buffering device, exhaust throttle shall be added to achieve buffering effect.
® PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
Stroke
Symbol Bore s1ze(mm) Stroke type go• 180° Total stroke (90° /180° )
25 Rotation stroke 14 20 26
32 Clamping stroke 12 6 26
Rotation stroke 15 21 27
40
Clamping stroke 12 6 27
50 Rotation stroke 15 21 29
63 Clamping stroke 14 8 29
D Product feature
1. The material of seals guarantees the reliable performance of the cylinder
that is used under various conditions.
2. Three-slot guide structure leads to high guide precision.
3. There are single and double side clamping fingers can be selected (90°).
4. Levorotatory and dextrorotary are available; 90°and 180'.
5. The material of piston rod is made from special alloy steel, which has
ACK: Twist clam c linder(Double acting t e)
longer life after heat treatment.
ACKD: Twist clamp cylinder
(Double push plate type, only for 90° )
Rotary angle
Rotar direction
90: 90°
L: Push and turn left
1BO, 1so0
When the piston of cylinder Bore size

moves downward, the swivel 125 32 40 50 63!
arms moves anticlockwise,
this is called levorotatory.
R: Push and turn right
When the piston of cylinder

moves downward, the swivel
arms moves clockwise,
this is called dextrorotary.
CD When the thread is standard, the code is blank.
ACK
iiItel
ACK Series
4-CDJ Thru.hole
(..)
CD
, I ,
I · I
i. flt
I .i
L.:. _J
1 Screw Carbon steel Fixed S45C

2 Rocker Carbon steel
3 Rod ackin NBR
4 0-rin NBR 15 SCr440
5 Piston rod S45C 16 Bush in SCr440
6 Bod Aluminum allo 17 Steel ball Carbon steel
7 Piston seal NBR 18 Rota axis SCr440
8 Wearrin Wear resistant material 19 Bum er PTFE
9 Screw Carbon steel 20 Screw Carbon steel
10 Screw Carbon steel 21 Nut Carbon steel
11 0 - rin NBR

[$-1 4-CD J Thru.hole
i I !
Rocking shaft initial point adjustment
According to the actual need, loosening
screw, may adjust the rocking shaft
initial point.
Note: When assemble or disassemble the

rocker by spanner and alien wrench;
don't hold the body to assemble or
disassemble rocker, it may damage CB
the cylinder. LO
How to select the fitting for body's port
When ACK series with 180° rotation

or ACKD is selected.miniature air
fittings should be used to minimise
obstruction.
:. - ... : : : I .,. •:11 .,

25 85 65 16 23 40 16 58 48 76 14 26 14
32 95 73 19 23 54 19 86 70 118 16 26 14
40 97 74 19 26 58 19 88 70 118 16 27 15
50 109.5 80 25.5 26 68 25.5 114 93 160 20 29 15
63 115.5 86 25.5 30 82 25.5 121 93 160 20 29 15
ACK
:. - :I. ., :, :
=-·-·· .
25 20 12 6 35 4.5 30 M6x1.0 29.5 30 8 60 M5x0.8
32 20 12 6 50 6.5 44 M8x1 .25 37.5 50 9 100 1/8"
40 21 12 6 55 6.5 48 M8x1 .25 37.5 50 9 100 1/8"
50 21 14 8 60 8.5 55 M10x1.5 45 70 10 140 1/8"
63 21 14 8 70 8.5 64 M10x1.5 45 70 10 140 1/8"
ACK Series
How to select product

1. When arms are to be made separately, their length and weight should be 5. Calculation reference:
within the following range. 5. 1 Moment of inertia of arm (11) : Refer to the graph{3) after
the cylinder bore diameter is determined.
2. Allowable bending moment: 5.2 Moment of inertia of jig (12): According to shape of the jig
and the next item 6 "Calculation for moment of inertia",
Use the arm length and operating pressure within graph(1) for allowable
pick out a proper formula for calculation. The jig shown arm: I,
bending moment loaded piston rod. on the right graph is a cylinder ,its formula of moment
of inertia is:
jig: I,
l,=(m 2 *D*D)/8+m 2 *L * L
Jig mass :m,
When ACK32 is selected: L=0.05m(arm length);
100 lfD=0.04m m,=0.4kg
80 From graph(3): l,= 1.271 x 10-'(Kg·m'l
_ r _T_T_
60 - , - , - T- ,-
_ _l _ _L _ _L _ _L_
By Calculation: l,= (m, *D * D)/8+m, *L * L= C0.4 * 0.04 * 0.04)/8+0.4 * 0.05 * 0.05
=10.8 x 10-• (Kg·m')
40
E I I I I Total value: l=l,+l,=12.071 x 10-'=1.2071 x 10-'(Kg·m')
_ _l _ _L _ _L _ _L_
..s I I I According to graph(2),the highest speed of the cylinder should be less than 95 mm/s; According to
.c
C) I I Oper~ting r~nge I graph(1 ),it can be used under a pressure of 0.9Mpa. The average speed of piston=the highest speed
2
C: 20 - -+ -+--+- +- - +- of piston/1.6=59 mm/s.
I II I I
E I II I I
.:.: _ r _T_T_ TI
I I I _ I 6. Calculation for moment of inertia
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.59 0.6 0.78 ' 1.0 Diagram Calculation formula of moment of inertia
Operating pressure CMPa) 1. Thin bar
Example: When arm length is 80mm, pressure should be less than
Position of rotary axis:Vertical to
ACK32/40:0.59MPa the bar and through the end
ACK50/63:0.78MPa
3. Moment of inertia:
When the arm is long and heavy, damage of internal parts may be
caused due to inertia. Use the inertia moment and cylinder speed within 2. Thin bar
graph(2) based on arm requirments.
ma'
10·' the bar and through the center l=-
Bx 10·2
of gravity 12
6x 10-2
4x 10"'
2 x 10-2
10"'
8 x 104
6 x 104 3. Load at the end of lever arm
4 x 10..
2x104
10·' l=m, x
a/ 2
+m, x a, +k
~E 8 x 10"' 3
6x 10-1 - - - - - - - -f- -
=
0)
- - - - - - - -f---- - -
"'
ta,
4x 10"4
2x 10"'
10"
--------, -- k=m, x
2r'
5
_.;
E
C:
a,
Bx 10.i;
6 x 10.i;
4 x 10"'
========~==
- - - - -- - -f---- - -
--------r
_ _ Operating range 1 --
0
::;; 2 x 10-li
10·' __
Bx 10_.
6x 10..
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ c __
- - - - - - - -f- - -
4. Thin rectangular plate
(Rectangular parallelepiped) C: b
4x 10"' - - - - - - - -f---- - -
2x10"' --------r--- Position of rotary axis:Parallel to
sideband through the center
ma'
l=-
'' 12
Cylinder speed (mm/s) of gravity >,
I
Example: When arm's moment of inertia is 10-' Kg ·m' , cylinder speed should I
I
-V
I
I
I
I I I
be less than ', I .,"'
' , ..!.,,,."
ACK32/40: 1OOmm/s
ACK50/63: 170mm/s 5. Thin rectangular plate
Note) The average speed of piston=the highest speed of piston/1 .6 (Rectangular parallelepiped)
Position of rotary axis:Vertica to

4. Moment of inertia of cylinder's arm when rotating based on its rotary axis the plate and through the end 4a '+b' 4a,'+b'
l=m, x ~ m, x 12
shown in graph(3).
ACK Model Moment of 1nert1a(Kg m') I
ACK25 with single arm 2.006 X 10-5

,,
I
ACK25 with double arms 7.651 x 10-•

ACK32\40 with single arm 1.271 X 10-• 6. Thin rectangular plate
ACK32\40 with double arms 4.148 X 10-• (Rectangular parallelepiped)
ACK50\63 with single arm 9.614 X 10-'
Position of rotary axis:Through
ACK50\63 with double arms 1.888 X 10-3 the center of gravity and ma'+mb'
vertical to the plate(Same 12
as also thickrectanglaur
plate)
ilStli
Rotary clamp cylinder--QCK Series
D Product series
Series name
Basic FB CS1-J DS1-J CS1-G DS1-G
QCK Series
12
16
20
25
32
40
50
63
Page 414 415 457

3. Anti-freezing measure shall be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent moisture
freezing.
4. If the cylinder is dismantled and stored for a long time, please conduct anti-rust treatment to the
surface. Anti-dust jam cap shall be added in air inlet and outlet ports.
5. To insure the life-span of cylinder and jig, please use flow control valve to control the speed of
cylinder.
IN(Clamp)
OUT(Release) 11.3 22.6 45.2 67.9 79.2 90.4
IN(Clamp) 15.1 30.2 45.2 60.3 75.4 90.5 105.6 120.6
16 OUT(Release) 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7 160.8
IN(Clamp) 20.1 40.2 60.3 80.4 100.5 120.6 140.7 160.8
20 12 OUT(Release) 31.4 62.8 94.2 125.7 157.1 188.5 219.9 251.3
IN(Clam ) 37.8 75.6 113.3 151.1 188.9 226.7 264.4 302.2
25 12 OUT(Release) 49.1 98.2 147.3 196.3 245.4 294.5 343.6 392.7
IN(Clamp) 60.3 120.6 181 .0 241.3 301.6 361.9 422.2 482.5
32 16 OUT(Release) 80.4 160.8 241 .3 321.7 402.1 482.5 563.0 643.4
IN(Clamp) 105.6 211.1 316.7 422.2 527.8 633.3 738.9 844.5
40 16
OUT(Release) 125.7 251 .3 377.0 502.7 628.3 754.0 879.6 1005.3
IN(Clamp) 164.9 329.9 494.8 659.7 824.7 989.6 1154.5 1319.5
50 20 OUT(Release) 196.3 392.7 589.0 785.4 981.7 1178.1 1374.4 1570.8
IN(Clam l 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121 .2 1401 .5 1681 .9 1962.2 2242.5
63 20 OUT(Release) 311.7 623.4 935.2 1246.9 1558.6 1870.3 2182.1 2493.8
QCK
•Shi
Rotary clamp cylinder AlrTAC
QCK Series
Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Operatina pressure 0.15- 1.0MPa(23-145psi)(1.5- 10bar)
Rotation anale goo ± 10°
Rotation direction Turn left or turn riaht
Rotation stroke mm 7.5 I 9.5 I 15 I 19
Clamping stroke mm 10 20 I 10 20 30 I 10 20 30 50
+ 1.0
Stroke tolerance 0
Cushion type Bumper
Port size G) M5x 0.8 I 1/8' I 1/4"
CD PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
Add) QCK series are all attached with magnet, please refer to Page 457-480 for the specific content of sensor switch.
D Ordering code
D Product feature
1. It can be used on welding fixture, the QPQ surface treatment prevent
piston rod damage by welding slag; better than chrome plated piston rod.
2. The front cover with stainless steel dust scraping ring, can keep the dust
and welding slag out, and protect cylinder internal parts.
3. Strong magnet is optioned for CJl 32 - CJl 63 bore size, which can be used Bore size
in high magnetic fields. 112 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 I
4. The mounting dimension of body is the same asACQ series, can useACQ Ma net
Cl amoma s ro k e • S: With ma net
series' accessories.
Bore size Clamping stroke
D Inner structure and material of major parts CJl12 10,20
CJl16-CJl25 10, 20, 30
CJl32-CJl63 10, 20, 30, 50
CD Back flange is same as ACQ series (please refer below table), if need front flange, please contact us.
= ,baa I ·~
I~...
'
__ l..!Il::'.:=::: II
~-------~-
• I
Bore size\Accessories FB
12 F-ACQ12FA
Material Bore s1ze\Accessories
32
FB
F-ACQ32FA
Material
16 F-ACQ16FA 40 F-ACQ40FA
I" .... Aluminum alloy Aluminum alloy
20 F-ACQ20FA 50 F-ACQ50FA
IU -
1- / I 25 F-ACQ25FA 63 F-ACQ63FA
1,•1•
D The definition of rotation direction and angle
1 Rocker Carbon steel
3 Dust scraping ring No( CJl 12, CJl 16)\Stainless steel(Others)
5 Piston rod SCr440
7 C Clip Spring steel
9 Operating screw SCr440
10 0-ring NBR
11 0-ring NBR
Retracted stroke end(Clamp)
QCK 13 Magnet holder Brass( CJl 12, CJl 16)\Aluminum alloy(Others)
Levorotatory(QCKL): Dextrorotary(QCKR):
14 Magnet washer NBR When the piston of cylinder moves downward, When the piston of cylinder moves downward,
15 Magnet Sintered metal(Neodymium-iron-boron( CJl 12-Cll 25) the swivel arms moves anticlockwise, this is called the swivel arms moves clockwise. this is called
Plastic(Others) levorotatory. dextrorotary.
16 Piston seal NBR
18 Bumper TPU(Cll 12-Cll25)\NBR(Others)
19 Wear ring No( CJl 12-Cll 32)\Wear resistant material(Others)
Clamp
20 Piston Brass( CJl 12, CJl 16)\Aluminum alloy(Others)
22 Fixing screw Carbon steel
23 Bumper PTFE( CJl 12-Cll40)\POM(Others) The order code is L The order code is R
ilSI•
QCK Series
D Dimensions Installation and operation

To insure the life-span of cylinder and jig, please use flow control valve to control
AD AB+Clampin stroke PA 2-P PB
n <P32-<P63
the speed of cylinder.
2. The method of installation are mounted by flange on top or bottom.
Mounting on bottom Mounting on top
(.)
JA 4-KCountersink:l!lJ
KA 2-Sides
__,
(.) stroke
A+Clam in stroke x 2
<P20-<P25
2-K,Countersink: <PJ 3. Befor the cylinder is connected to pipeline sundries in the pipe must be eliminated,
2-Sides or may cause leakage.
4. Please clean the piston-rod and dust scraping ring to protect the cylinder.
5. The cylinder using normal magnet ring can use Rotation
(.) thesame sensor as ACQ series. For the cylinder ,)Stroke
using strong magnet ring we suggest using
AirTAC's CS1 -69AM sensor.
6. Because the rotary force is strong when the
cylinder's acting, we suggest using flow control
<P12 <P16 valve to control the speed to protect cylinder.
2-K,Countersink: <P J 7. Please install the cylinder following the right
Only can clamping in
2-Sides diagram. clamping stroke.
8. The installation method as the diagram below is
Note) All the s above are clamping stroke. wrong, and will injure the cylinder and shorten the cylinder life.
;
12
16
.. 55
59
,;
10.5
10.5
35.5
35.5
.,_
9
13
;
25
29
;
9
11
36.5
44.5 -
- 29
36
:• .
6
8
M3 x 0.5
MS x 0.8
3.3
3.3
6.5
6.5
3.5
3.5
;
15.5
20
•
20 86 8 62 16 36 16 60 - 51 12 M8 x 1.25 5 9 7 25.5
25 87 8 63 16 40 16 62 - 51 12 MB x 1.25 5 9 7 28
32 108 17.5 71.5 19 45 19 82 49.5 67 16 M10 x 1.5 5 9 7 34
40 109 25 65 19 53 19 85.5 57 67 16 M10x 1.5 5 9 7 40
50 133 31 76.5 25.5 64 25.5 114 71 88 20 M12 x 1.75 6.5 11 8 50 Don't installed horizontally Don't exert horizontally load or force
63
:
12
.. 136
22
30.5 80
M4 x 0.7
25.5 77
11 M4 x 0.7
25.5 120.5
7- 13
84 88
20
;
4
20
11
M12 x 1.75
3 10.8
8.5
.
M5 x 0.8
14 10.5
.. .;•
13.5
60
5.5
Rotation
)stroke
16 28 M4 x 0.7 11 M4 x 0.7 7- 13 25 5 14 3 13.8 MSx 0.8 15 5.5

20 36 M6x1 .0 17 M6 x 1.0 9.5- 20.5 35 7 18 3 17.8 MS x 0.8 30 6
25 40 M6 x 1.0 17 M6 x 1.0 9.5- 20.5 35 7 23 6 22.5 M5 x 0.8 30 7
32 - M6 x 1.0 17 M8 x 1.25 13.5- 25.5 45 10 30 7 29.5 1/8" 34.5 8.5
40 - M6 x 1.0 17 M8 x 1.25 13.5-25.5 45 10 30 3 29.5 1/8' 26.5 9
50 - M8 x 1.25 22 M10x1.5 14.5-30 65 10 37 3.5 36.5 1/4" 34 11.5
63 - M10x1 .5 28.5 M10 x 1.5 14.5-30 65 10 48 3.5 47.5 1/4' 34.5 11.5
Please don't clamp Do not more the
Please don't clamp on bevel workpiece when
when rotating. clamped
Q+2S
R+S
- ,;.::-=..;;,- ">,= ::;,-
9. Rocker
'. :'.. \ ~ . #c'. Jf :;
9.1) The design of rocker can keep it stable and can change direction by customer.
9.2) Please follow the diagram below on right side to assemble/disassemble the rocker
r---f-----1-=·-=--·=-·:=~--- by spanner and alien wrench; don't hold the body to assemble/disassemble rocker,
\ ~-----~:::::::::::::::::::::::: -r· or will damage the cylinder.
9.3) If need customize rocker, please contact us.
t-_-_-~t:1~ t:::::::::::::::::::::::: ·L QCK
Special conical
surface locked
Cll12 - Cll25 :, . . ' '
desi n can kee
it stable and can
4- <PN 4- <PN1 12 35.5 46 15.5 4.5 7.5 4.5 5.5 25 45 55
change direction
16 35.5 46 20 4.5 7.5 4.5 5.5 30 45 55 by customer.
20 62 70 25.5 6.5 10.5 6.5 8 39 48 60 ..-'rr=Fri'-.n
25 63 71 28 6.5 10.5 6.5 8 42 52 64
32 71 .5 89 34 6.5 10.5 5.5 8 48 56 65
40 65 90 40 6.5 10.5 5.5 8 54 62 72
50 76.5 107.5 50 8.5 13.5 6.5 9 67 76 89
63 80 110.5 60 10.5 16.5 9 9 80 92 101
FZ
esr.w
QCK Series
How to select product

1. When arms are to be made separately, their length and weight should be 5. Calculation reference:
within the following range. 5. 1 Moment of inertia of arm (11) : Refer to the graph(3) after
the cylinder bore diameter is determined.
2. Allowable bending moment: 5.2 Moment of inertia of jig (12): According to shape of the jig
and the next item 6 "Calculation for moment of inertia", _ar_m_: I_,- ~
Use the arm length and operating pressure within graph(1) for allowable
pick out a proper formula for calculation. The jig shown
bending moment loaded piston rod. on the right graph is a cylinder ,its formula of moment
of inertia is: ~ji~g:_I,_ _~
200 QCK50( 63
QCK32 40 l,=(m,*D*D)/8+m,* L* L Jig mass :m,
When QCK32 is selected: L=0.045m(arm length);
lfD=0.04m m,=0.4kg
From graph(3): l,= 1.653 x 1o-'(Kg·m'l
By Calculation: l,= (m, *D * D)/8+m, *L *L= ( 0.4 * 0.04 *0.04)/8+0.4 * 0.045* 0.045
=8.9 x 10-'(Kg·m')
Total value: l=l,+l,=10.553 x 10-'=1.0553 x 10-'(Kg·m')
.c
C, According to graph(2),the highest speed of the cylinder should be less than 150 mm/s; According to
C:
.!!! graph(1 ),it can be used under a pressure of 0.9Mpa. The average speed of piston=the highest speed
§ 20 of piston/1.6=94 mm/s.
~
6. Calculation for moment of inertia

0.1 Diagram Calculation formula of moment of inertia
1. Thin bar
Example: When arm length is 80mm, pressure should be less than
QCK20/25:0.45MPa the bar and through the end
QCK32/40:0.55MPa
3. Moment of inertia:
When the arm is long and heavy, damage of internal parts may be
caused due to inertia. Use the inertia moment and cylinder speed within 2. Thin bar
graph(2) based on arm requirments.
ma'
10·' the bar and through the center l=-
8x10·1
of gravity 12
6x10·1
4x10"1
2x10·1
10·'
Bx 10"3
6 x 10·3 3. Load at the end of lever arm
4 x 10·1
2x10"!
10·' l=m, x
a/ 2
+m, x a, +k
Bx10"4 3
NE 6x 10"4
C) 4x 10·• 2r'
: 2x 10·1 k=m, x 5
~ 10·· - - - - - - - -f----
w
.!:
Bx 10"1
6 x 10"1 - - - - - - - -f-- -
C: 4 x 10·1 - - - - - - - -f---- -
Q)
E
0
2x10·1 --- - - - - -f---- -
Operating range t=
::!: 10 5
Bx10·1
6x10"1
--------
--------
- - - - - - - -f-- -
-
- 4. Thin rectangular plate
(Rectangular parallelepiped) C: b
4x10"1 - - - - - - - -f---- -
2x 10·1 - - - - - - - -f---- - Position of rotary axis:Parallel to ma'
l=-
1o·• os--------,s"'o--,tamrrrn"">n\1\" sideband through the center
'' 12
Cylinder speed (mm/s) of gravity >,
I
Example: When arm's moment of inertia is 10-' Kg ·m', cylinder speed should I
I
-V
I
I
I
I I I
be less than ', I .,"'
' , ..!.,,,."
QCK20/25:82mm/s
QCK32/40:150mm/s 5. Thin rectangular plate
Note) The average speed of piston=the highest speed of piston/1.6 (Rectangular parallelepiped)
Position of rotary axis:Vertica to

4. Moment of inertia of cylinder's arm when rotating based on its rotary axis the plate and through the end 4a '+b' 4a,'+b'
l=m,x ~ m, x 12
shown in graph(3).
QCK I
Model Moment of 1nert1a(Kg m' )
,,
I
QCK12 3.555 X 10-•

QCK16 1.053 X 10-s
QCK20\25 5.257 X 10-• 6. Thin rectangular plate
QCK32\40 1.653 X 10-• (Rectangular parallelepiped)
QCK50\ 63 7.387 X 10-•
Position of rotary axis:Through
the center of gravity and ma'+mb'
vertical to the plate(Same 12
as also thickrectanglaur
plate)
ilstli
Clamping cylinder--MCK Series
Product series
Series name
CS1-A DS1-A DS1-69AM DS1-69DM
MCKA
40
50
63
MCKB
80
Page 418 420 457

1. In normal situation such as: edge packing, installation, jig test ... and so on. Standard cylinder is suggested.
2. In case of high-magnetic field generated by welding in the vicinity, anti-magnetic welding clamp cylinder shall be used
and corresponding anti-magnetic sensor switch shall be matched.
3. Before cylinder connecting , the dust must be eliminated to avoid it entering in the cylinder.
5. Under high temperature environment, the cylinder of high-temperature resistance shall be selected.
Anti-freezing measure shall be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent the water freezing in cylinder.
6. If cylinder is not used for a long time, please advert the surface to get rusty. Inlet and outlet ports should be have
anti-dust caps and also spread the oil to avoid getting rusty on piston rod.
D Theoretical clamping force Unit: Newton ( N )
acting Pull side 188.4 376.8 471 .0 565.2 659.4

Double Push side 392.6 588.9 785.2 981 .5 1177.8 1374.1 1570.4
50 20
acting Pull side 329.8 494.7 659.6 824.5 989.4 1154.3 1319.2
Double Push side 311.7 623.4 935.1 1246.8 1558.5 1870.2 2181 .9 2493.6
63 20
acting Pull side 280.3 560.6 840.9 1121.2 1401 .5 1681.8 1962.1 2242.4
Double Push side 502.6 1005.2 1507.8 2010.4 2513.0 3015.6 3518.2 4020.8
80 25
acting Pull side 453.6 907.2 1360.8 1814.4 2268.0 2721 .6 3175.2 3628.8
MCK
iiSf•
Clamping cylinder AlrTAC
MCK Series
Specification Cl Stroke
Bore s1ze(mm) 40 50
Double actin
63
e
80 ~:j,j@@1iDfoititMt@tiffl1!!1fflffifirjjffi,
40, 50, 63, 80 50 75 100 125 150 150
Air Remark) Consult us for non-standard stroke.
0.05-1.0MPa(8-145 si)
1.5MPa(215 si)
-20-80 "C
lnstallatsion e
Port size G)
<D PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available;
Symbol Mounting e
Blank: Without Y knuckle
MCK MCK-S, MCK-HS Bore size Y: With Y knuckle
140 so 63 80 I
fl ~ Stroke
!Refer to Stroke table for detial I
Product feature
<D When the bore is 80, only one type of orifice is available, so the code is blank.
1. It suits for workshops that make automation welding. ® In AC magnetic field, cylinder with powerful magnet is suggested and sensor switch for high-magnet shall be matched.
2. There is a scraping dust ring in front cover, and it is firm and durable In DC magnetic field, cylinder with powerful magnet must be used and sensor switch for high-magnet shall be matched.
that can avoid dust and splashed welding slag breaking cylinders. It is Please refer to Page 420 for option.
more reliable than dust helmet.
3. It fits the working environment where has strong magnetic field, if it
16 18 19 20 21 22
uses the sensor switch which is with strong magnet and anti- strong
magnetic field.
4. Inlet interface are optional on three sides; buffer adjustment and speed
limit adjustment are built-in.
5. Various types of sensor switches are available.
*) When Y knuckle is fixed, it shall be locked with

piston rod end thread by spring pin.
Wear resistant Speed

Carbon steel 11 Wear ring material 21 Aluminum alloy
controlled screw
12 Piston Aluminum allo 22 0-rin NBR
13 Cushion 0-rin TPU 23 Bead flan e S rin steel
14 Countersink S35C 24 Bronze Brass
15 Back cover Aluminum allo 25 Washer SPCC
16 NBR 26 Orifice Pin Midi steel
17 S35C 27 Pin S45C
18 NBR 28 Y knuckle Nodular cast iron
9 Piston 0-ring NBR 19 29 Spring pin Spring steel
10 Ma net Magnetism material 20
Application examples
MCK
MCK Series
D Specifications and ordering codes ofY knuckle D Dimensions

<D40,50,63(With magnet)
Mounting seat for Anti-magnetic sensor switch(available)
e Cushion
a:i::::::' controlled
Speed
controlled
valve ~<ll_4~0-,a;~&':,~
6-M6 x 1 20
dp:1113-sides) 1713-sides) M6•1.0
l<D30) Dp:12
.. -
MCKA50-Y
MCKB50-Y
40
... -.... -
40, 50, 63
40, 50, 63
16.5
19.5
MCKA:16.5
MCKB:19.5
*) If it goes with hinged-support, the width would be the same with front cover of cylinder.
<D40,50,63(Without magnet)
Cushion
Speed controlled
controlled valve
valve
MCKA:16.5
MCKB:19.5 e
Dimension and ordering code for :, -

astriction switch accessories 40 162 59 21 76 84 52 47 24 1/4" 20 9
50 165 65 23 80 87 60 57 22 1/4' 19 9.5
Astriction switch accessories contain mounting shelf and
63 167 67 23 87 89 74 70 22 1/4" 19 9.5
astriclion plank. They can be used in pairs, also can be used
independently. Their dimension and ordering code are below.
seat for Anti-ma netic sensor switch available Cushion

controlled
valve
i Jttf1 L9
4-M6X1.0
Dp:15
<D80(Without magnet)
Cushion
controlled
valve
4-M6X1 .0 MCK
Dp:15
*l If it goes with hinged-support, the width would be the same with front cover of cylinder.
•Sdi
Sensor switch--DS1-69AM, DS1-69DM Series
Specification
,. t ... ,..._.,,.,..;i!II
Switch logic Transistor without contact, normally opened type
Sensor type Transistor, two-line, nonpolarity
Operating voltage (V) 10-30V/DC
Max. Switching current 100mAMax.
Switching Rating (W) 3WMax.
Anti-magnetic current AC 17000A
Voltage drop 4.8V Max. @100mA DC
Leakage current 0.6mA Max. @30V DC
Min. working current 3mA Min.
Indicator Stable ranqe:Green LED ; Non-table ranqe:Red LED
Cable <l>5.3/0.5SQ x 2C x 3m/oil resistant, Flame retarded, flection/qravv PVC
Sensitivity 30- 40 Gauss
Feature
Max. Freauencv 8Hz
DS1-69AM, DS1-69DM series are anti-magnetic sensor switch, which Temperature ranae -10-?0"C
Shock 50m/s'
are for AC or DC magnetic environment.
Vibration 9m/s'
Protection IP 67/EN60529)
Protection circuit Transistor without contact, surae suooression
Fire retardant grade UL94-VO
D Ordering code
G) : DC type has not been on sale.
Dimensions
Number of sensor swich Code
69AM:Anti-magnetic sensor switch
(AC resistant welder)
69DM:Anti-magnetic sensor switch
(DC)
Wiring diagram
Internal circuit External circuit
Mounting
The MCK-HS(with strong magnet) cylinder must be used with the anti-magnetic sensor switch, and the
anti-magnetic bracket(F-MCK40H) must be ordered separately, the ordering code, dimensions and the
mountin method are below:
Ordering code F-MCK40H
Dimensions
Mounting
DS1-69 model
Sensor switch
MCK
Indicator action illustration
Indicator ~ ~ ~>l· · · ~~G~

Switch action output
Non-stable range Stablerange
ree~n~lig~ht~is~on~
ON
>1•••~~-~
Non-stable range
Cylinder mobile l o c a t i o n ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
~~~~~~~~~~P_o_w
_e_r_c_la_m
_p
~ cy_l_in_d_e_r~ ~~J_C_K_S_e_ri_e~s
Product series
Series name
•
g>
• ti
ctl
40
50
® a,
:n 63
=>
0
Cl
80
Page 422
D Applications
JCK
Power clamp cylinder AlrTAC
JCK Series
D Product feature
D Rod-crank-slider structure made of high-strength,

highly-wear-resisting material is adopted.
a) Stable and reliable structure which can produce
large clamping force at low working pressure.
b) Self-lock mechanism is adopted at clamping
position which can still provide clamping force even
after compressed air is off.
a / 1
a 4 sides are to be mounted /
with dimensions subject to /
Mechanism
DIN standard. D Mechanism and cylinder
designed as a whole.
' Sensor fix adopts special

design for convenient angle
adjustment and reduction of
Cylinder
welding spatter accumulation.
Sensing system immune to
interference providing steady
and reliable signal.
JCK
D 4 Arm styles AM 1, AM2, AM3 and AM4
each with 3 specifications R, C and L for
uses in different situations.
D Opening angle adjustment by changing
..
adjusting screw is easy and convenient.
-~.;,
JCK Series--Standard type
D Specification
ll' IL•t•
Output torque (0.5MPa)

,, I . :11-
120N.m I 160N.m I 380N.m I 800N.m
Opening angle 15°130°t45°160° r75°190°1105°1120°1135°
•
• ?)
Minimum opening and closure time 1 second clamping, 1 second opening
Position sensing Inductive approaching sensor
Cushion type Air buffer
• • Weight (135°) (:J) 2.2kg I 4.0kg I 5.5kg I 13.0kg
..,
!)
Port size (2)
G) This weight includes 15mm offset clamping arm;
1/8" I 1/4'
(2) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
D Ordering code
JCK: Power clamp cylinder

(Double acting)
Clamping arm position

Blank: horizontal Sensor switch
Blank: No sensor switch
K: With sensor switch
Clamping arm
Bore Clamping arm code Explanation G)
size
V: vertical
40
D Inner structure and material of major parts 1==- c.c:
- Blank No clamping arm
".::. . ~~~~ - "
I" '"
F 80
\
'
- AM1
(Offset 15mm) R
• •
- CJJ6 (])7
15~
Rf'.~
Bore size
40: CJJ 40
40
AM3
(Offset45mm)
C
c3C
L L'l- $-*__, _ _____
50: (])50 L
45 ~
63: CJJ63
80: CJJ80 AM1
(Offset 15mm) R
Opening angle
Opening angle Maximum opening angle 15 ~
- CJJ6 CJJ9
~
15: 15° AM1: 135°
JCK40 C
30: 30' AM3: 105' AM3
45: 45° AM1 : 120° (Offset45mm) -
JCKV40
60: 60° AM3: 105'
75: 75° JCK50\JCK63 45 ~ L
135°
90: 90' JCK80 50
63
'"''
1 Adjusting screw Free machining steel
105: 105' JCKV50
80 AM2
120 : 120° JCKV63 105° (Offset 15mm)
2 Back cover Aluminum alloy R
135: 135' JCKV80
3 Aluminum barrel Aluminum alloy
CJJ8 CJJ10.2
4 Front cover Aluminum alloy 1 5 ~-
Rf'.~----
5
6
7
8
Sensor switch
Sensor sw~ch fix
Y knuckle
Strengthen steel plate
Plastic
Alloy steel
Alloy steel
AM4
(Offset45mm)
C
c3C
L L***__,______
JCK
9 Retaining pin Carbon steel

45~ L
10 ConnectinQ rod Alloy steel
11 Clamping arm Cast steel
12 Pivot Alloy steel
13 Piston rod Carbon steel
G) Please refer to the drawing for detailed dimensions of clamping arm.
14 End cap Aluminum alloy
Others: Sensor switch can be ordered separately and please refer to relative contents.
15 Piston NBR
16 Cushion body Aluminum alloy
D How to select product

1. Please design appropriate fixture according to "Allowable Arm Load-Load Offset curve" diagram.
Load Offset (mm)

Model, JCK63 Model , JCKBO
Bore Maximum load torque 8000.00 12000.00
size 1 second period 2 second period
7000.00
10000.00
40 2.2Nm 3.3Nm \
50 4.5Nm 6.7Nm
6000.00
5000.00 \ BODO.DO \
63 6.0Nm
80 8.0Nm
9.0Nm
11.2Nm 4000.00
\ 6000.00
\
~ 3000.00 I'\. ~
S: distance from pivot point to center of mass of clamping arm
m: weight of clamping arm u..i 2000.00 "I'-. u..
i
4000.00
"" I"-.. ,..__
Model, JCK40 Model, JCK50
1000.00 ---- r------ 2000.00
-
7.00 16.00~~~~-~~~~~ 0.00 0.00
50 100 150 200 250 300 50 100 200 300 400
0,
-"' 6.00 J? 14.00 Clamp arm length (mm) Max Clamp arm length (mm) Max
E E 12.00
<ii 5.00
0,
C:
"'g' 10.00 Hol--+-t--+--t----,t--+--;
·a. 4.00 ·a. 3. Please choose appropriate washer according to 'Torque-Spacer thickness curve" diagram.
E E
0"' 3.00 0"' Note: Inserted washer exceeding maximum Besides, clamping arm length L represents
0 0 clamping torque position may lead to self-lock distance from pivot point to clamping position.
.c 2.00 .c
·3:.,
0,
1.00 ~
0,
2.00l-+-+-1-+---F==il--l---l
failure. Take safety issue into account when
considering thickness of spacer inserted.
For distance from mounting base locating hole
to pivot A, please refer to the following table.
0.00 o . oo~~~~-~~~~~ Clamp arm length L(mm) A Bore size A(mm)
50 75 100 125 150 175 200 50 75 100 150 200 250
40 12
Load Offset (mm) Max Load Offset (mm) Max
50 10
63 10
80 15
~ 16.00
E 14.00
~ 12.00 .__,,_,,+---+---+----+-__,
i:::ffB+fHlfTVRJ
[ 10.001---r-----'<,----t--
E
~ 8.00
0 1- -'kc---,'-"t--.,-----r---+--'-I
:l:
~
0,
2.QQl--+---+---+-_;::=l'-~ ·3:-g,., 5.001-+__=:,r---cc-l"-1:::--+---,1---1
o.oo~-~-~-~-~-~ o.oo ~~~-~~-~~~
50 100 150 200 250 300 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7
Load Offset (mm) Max Load Offset (mm) Max ~
Suggested washer depth Washer depth(mm)
Attention: Please use with speed control valve.
Model· JCK50 Clamp arm length L · 150mm
2000
/ I
" "'-,___
2. Please choose appropriate clamping position according to "Torque-Clamping Arm Length curve"
/ 0.5MPa
diagram. 1500
r - I
Note: For clamping force is produced by elbow mechanism,

maximum torque is only reached at final clamping arm position.
"' 1000
le
,E
E 500
,V
,; ~
"'-
-- - /
/
/
0.3MPa
u"' / 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3.5 4 4.5 5.5 6.5 7

~
Model · JCK63 Clamp arm length L · 200mm

2500
2000
,,,.i..---- ~"- 0.5MPa
Bore Maximum clamp torque
size 0.3MPa 0.4MPa 0.5MPa 0.6MPa 0.7MPa O.BMPa ~ 1500
/ "---- / ~.!:!1
,,,,::? r---- '-... u
40
50
72Nm
99Nm
95Nm
132Nm
120Nm
165Nm
143Nm
198Nm
167Nm
230Nm
191Nm
264Nm ~
,E
1000
/
,,,
63 230Nm 307Nm 384Nm 460Nm 537Nm 614Nm E 500
80 482Nm 643Nm 803Nm 964Nm 1124Nm 1285Nm u"' /
0.5 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5.5 6.5 7
Model , JCK40 Model , JCK50 '---------v--'
2500.00 3500.00
JCK
2000.00
\ 3000.00
\ 4500
Model · JCKBO
/
Clamp arm length L, 250mm
......
0.5M Pa - -
\ 2500.00
\
4000
3500
./ r ,--------i
"
' ..
1500.00 2000.00 ,?~ /
~ 1000.00 "' r--..__

~
1500.00
\ ~
3000
2500
./
,
"
'
I
0 3MPa -
-'
/
!
...........
----- r--.
! 1000.00
u..
"'I'-... r-- t--
~
.E
2000
1500
/
r---. ..... 1-../
u.. 500.00
500.00 --- E
"'
1000
500
/
/
0.00 0.00 u 00
0.5
50 100 150 200 50 100 150 200 250 1 ~ 5 4 4.5 5.5 6.5 7
Clamp arm length (mm) Max Clamp arm length (mm) Max Suggested washer depth Washer depth(mm)
D Dimensions
Horizontal clampi ng position Vertical clamping position

22± 0.1
0
-H
N
N 1----mTf"tTTtinrtr- - - - - . . . _ - - J
~
0
ti
.... ~
0
~+-- + - - - - - - --'-<-- - - - ~ ~
"'
0
6
-H
"'
N
37 ± 0.
Sensor switch(O tional)
X O
::a,
<O -..
' Q.
NO
50
With• dimension: pin hole position tolerance: ±0.02. Thread hole position tolerance: ±0.1.
Horizontal clamping position Vertical clamping position

Max105° /
0
107
22 ± 0.1
1)1 .
ti
N
N j -- r,h,+Trt-rrh- - - -+-,L----J
0
0
N ~
~ lO ;
6
0
.....
"'
0
.----- -+-- - - ----jo~-- -,...+-- - -tt-~ +-~~ ti
ti
""
C.
"'
,-: "'
0
0
0
"'
0
" .. .......t i
...
0 6
-H
"'
N
6 a,
67± 0.2 ti z
~ ""
JCK
Vertical clamping position

28±0.1
.,"'
'O
u5
ci
"'
N
-H
N
0 ~
ci
+I =-H ;! +I
"' = "'
C!
::: "'
0
"'
:::: ;-;; <O 0
+I
ci
+I
~o
"'
"'
30 ±0.2 ~
;:::
"'
"'
ci
N
+I ~"' 0~
u5
"'
10 28.5
~
X
ON
~~
NO
45
ci 28±0.1
-H
a, 144
Nf--tm-,,-,--m--m-~~......_
Max105'
N
ci
-H =
~ ci
-H
00 <O "'
0
ci
f---___,.H--+---H1----I +I
~
Cf= ;:::
"'
"'
ci
+I
N
"'
104 28.5
"'
.,;
N
X
ON
JCK i'-
• a.
NO
45
With • dimension: pin hole position tolerance: ±0.02. Thread hole position tolerance: ±0.1 .

28 ± 0.1
0
ti
<X) Max105°
Nt-1.,.,...,..,...,.,..,......~~-++-~I
"'
N
~
0
-H
~ "'
0
0
~ ~"-f-~+-~~-----c,,--.--+-,r'-''t---:',,--~---rl ti
"' 30 ± 0.2
, ;,--+-i---'i+-'~"'~ -~~-'--i:::::..~--=-~
0
ti
N
"'
a,
C") ~
106
0
ti 144 28±0.1, I=·= ~
<X)
Nt-,,.,,,...,.,.,.-,,,-,...,.,~......--. / -.- Max1os· "'a,
""C
ui
N
"'
~
N
0
ti =
"' ~
w =
~
60±0.2
0
ti
"'
"'
23±0.1
2-M10•1.5 2 Sides
Dp: 12 ~10~8---i~===i==:=J-~'---.C.._
Sensor switch(Optional)
JCK
106
With • dimension: pin hole position tolerance: ±0.02. Thread hole position tolerance: ±0.1.
108
73
U)
0 Q)
"O
ti en
"'
"'
N
0
-H
0
ti "'
0
0
....
0 0
+I
"' "'
<O
~o 0
0 -H
0
"' "'
"'
....
"'
2-M12•1 .75 2 Sides
Dp:13
150
"'
"'
142
108
Horizontal clamping position
..., ..~-) 35± 0.1
Max105'
/)I J
)~,
U)
Q)
"O
N bctcot,-,tcr-----,(-:-°11-,.........._ en
~
0
-H
0 - , ,, ,,, ,',,1 1, J
0 - "ac1,$!;
-H
~ ~
0
--+-- - -~ & - --+- ~--t--,/?~ - I - -~ c"--- -~
"' 0
:£ ti "'
0
0
ti
0
+I
"' "'
-+-!a!;J-~ '°
=t- 59 ± 0.2
$
~o 0
11 9 ± 0.1 -H
0
0
"' "'
U)
.:g
"' en 76 ~
....
"' Sensor switch(O tional)
....
2-M 12•1 .75 2 Sides I
Dp:13 a'"4 a.N
JCK
"'
"' "'
"'
142
JCK Series--Manual type
D Specification
ll' IL•t•
Output torque (0.5MPa)

., I . :11-
120N.m I 160N.m I 380N.m I 800N.m
Opening angle 1s·130· t45°160°115·,so·11 as·1120·
Minimum opening and closure time 1 second clamping, 1 second opening
Position sensing Inductive approaching sensor
Cushion type Air buffer
Weight (135°) (:J) 2.5kg I 4.5kg I 6.0kg I 14.0kg
Port size (2) 1/8" I 1/4'
G) This weight includes 15mm offset clamping arm; ~ PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available.
D Ordering code
JCK: Power clamp cylinder

(Double acting)
Clamping arm position

Sensor switch
Blank:~horizontal
Blank: No sensor switch
K: With sensor switch
.
Handle location
D Examples for using Blank: non-manual
•
1. When the clamped HL: handle on the left
plate is hollow and thin, V: vertical ,=
.- ~
the final clamping r-·-
\_ ' •
position should be
reached manually at low
'
speed before clamping •
with force to avoid
scallops left by fast clamping.
Bore size
2. When clamping forearm has a locating pin,
40: Cll40
it should be pushed out of the locating hole manually. 50: Cll50 HR: handle on the right
(Clamping should be done before the pin is well located.) 63: Cll63
3. When clamping mechanism is complicated with many small 80: Cl>BO
sheet-metal parts, clamping should be done manually at first to
avoid compressed air flushing well-assembled sheet-metal parts. Opening angle
Opening angle Maximum opening angle
15: 15°
Note: Part of manually clamping applications are listed above.
30: 30° JCK40
Other welding process may be in need of manually clamping. 105°
45 : 45° JCKV40
60: 60°
75 : 75°
JCK50-80 120°
so, so·
105: 105· Clamping arm
JCKV50-80 105•
120: 120° IPlease refer to standard type for details!
G) Please refer to the drawing for detailed dimensions of clamping arm.
Others: Sensor switch can be ordered separately and please refer to relative contents.
JCK
Self-lock: Self-lock:
1. By inletting compressed air. 1. By inletting compressed air.
Unlock: 2. By handle.
1. By inletting compressed air. Unlock:
2. By knocking retaining pin. 1. By inletting compressed air.
2. By knocking retaining pin.
3. By handle.
D Dimensions
JCK40AM 1 3
AM2 HR(HL) JCK40AM
AM4 HR(HL)
Max. 6mm back side.
0 0
N N

Note: Please refer to standard type for the others dimensions.
JCK50AM 1 3
AM2 HR(HL) JCK50AM
AM4 HR(HL}
- 15°
\::i HL
\\ \\
~
, ~. ,___,___,...,
JCK
Nole: Please refer to standard type for the others dimensions. Vertical clamping position
JCK63AM 1
AM2 HR(HL)
HR
JCK63AM 3
AM4 HR(HL)
Max120°
HR
JCK
Nole: Please refer to standard type for the others dimensions.

JCKBOAM 1
AM2 HR(HL)
HR
.:Jfr 4:i::..
JCKBOAMJHR(HL)
AM4
HR
JCK
Nole: Please refer to standard type for the others dimensions.

JCK Series--Clamp arm and Adjusting screw
D How to select clamp arm and adjusting screw

Accessories\C l1nder pe JCK40 JCK50 JCK63 JCK80
••• ••• ••• •••

F-JCKD0X15LM F-JCKD0X30LM
F-JCKDDX45LM F-JCKDDX60LM
Adjusting screw F-JCKD D X75LM F-JCKDDX90LM
F-JCKD0X105LM
F-JCKD D X135LM
F-JCKD0X120LM
•• •• •• ••
•• •• •• •••
F-JCKD0AM1R F-JCKD0AM3R
F-JCKD0AM1C F-JCKD0AM3C
F-JCKD 0AM1L F-JCKD0AM3L
• •• ••
•••
Clamp arm
F-JCKD0AM2R F-JCKD0AM4R
F-JCKD 0AM2C
F-JCKD0AM2L
F-JCKD0AM4C
F-JCKD0AM4L
•• ••
D Adjusting screw ordering code D Dimensions of clamp arm
•I•
Adjusting screw code C,

-H 117
ILM: Adjusting screw I N
"' i--;,-;-r-r.,,.,.-rn-,-~--~---...1
Cylinder type
Ad"ustin angle
Bore size 15: 15°
30: 30° ci
45: 45° ti
60: 60° ~
75: 75°
go, go·
105: 105°
120: 120°
135: 135° Clamparmcode : AM1R
D Clamp arm ordering code
AM1C
AM1L
Bore Clamping arm code Explanation

Cylinder type size
40
Bore size
80
- Blank No clamping arm · I ·
C,
AM1 ti 107
N
(Offset 15mm) R N
i-trrn+rr+rr1, - - - -~ --.1
15~
- (J)6 (J)7
40
AM3
(Offset 45mm) -
C
~
c3C ~ ----
L l-e-$<£"__,______
L
45 ~
AM1
(Offset 15mm) R
15 ~ - C!l6 C!l9
~~ -
AM3
(Offset45mm) -
C
c3C
L l+*-t__,______
45 ~ L
50
63
80 AM2
(Offset 15mm) R
- (J)8 C!l10.2
15 ~
AM4
(Offset45mm) -
C
c3C
~ ~----
L L•*•---------
45 ~ L
ilU
•
6 .....,_- - - - - ------..~ r~+
-H ,;-+-'-7'-!---f
"'"'
0
6
~ 1 - - - - - - - ~..__ _,_
>-1....L..,;,<--i---j
00
-H N
N 00 N
N D
2-(1)9 ± 0.2
Clamp arm code: Clamp arm code: AM1R
AM1C
AM1L
. . . , . .-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ll,lli,lo I• •
·-·· -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
"'
0
0
-H
o
N
00
N
2-Cll10.2±0.2
Clamp arm code: AM2R Clamp arm code: AM2R
AM2C AM2C
AM2L AM2L
105 ±0.1
I •
6
144
-H 1-+m-Tt"r"nT"TT"r----..
• 6
-H l--ihn-TTr'TtT"1TTI-- ......~
00 00
N N
N
"! 6
0
+I -H
""' ~ - - - - - --'<-- +-~-+ ""' ~ - - - - - --+-- ~- ~+

"'
o
2-Cll9
Clamp arm code: Clamp arm code:
AM3L
6 ~ J-,..,,,...,..,.,...,.,,....,.,.,,.__
~
-H rt-rtTT-trnTTl"T'-- -
00
00 N
N
J-l-4WC+W-ll--Ll.Ll---...
N
"! 6
0
-H
-H
JCK "'
.... ~ - - - - - ---'<--- + - ~-+ "'
.... ~ - - - - - - - + - -+- ,-+
Clamp arm code: AM4R Clamp arm code :

0
AM4C AM4C N
AM4L AM4L
ilU•
179
"'
(") "' ' " ' '
0
N•t--------¥--- ~
Clamparmcode: AM1R
AM 1C
AM1L "'
ci
"'
30 ± 0.2
a,
AM2C 0
AM2L
179
ci t -t-,t,-,t,.-rt,-,t,i--- ---
-H R50
"'
"" I-'-'""""....... . . . - - , _,,.,. - ··--.-./a
~
0
""
"·\ D
-H
.,, ~ - - - - --><---+-
~ .,..;~-r-t-----i
ClampaHdo ::::
~ :-
-1
~
~::'
=.-_-_--_. , -:=-:=-:==:=~~~ 1~1:.
5
AM3L
30 ± 0.02
N
0
ti
. , , ~ - - - - - - > < ---t-
~ >--t~ +-f----t
JCK
0
"'
D
Clamp arm code : AM4R ci
AM4C
AM4L
~ "'
ci
"'
JCK Series--Sensor switch
Installation and application of sensor switch

Sensor switch is well assembled before leaving factory which is free of adjusting. If you need to change
terminals' wiring direction, change new sensor or rearrange angle, please do as follows:
1.1) Steps of changing terminals' wiring direction:
Terminal
(Forward)
D Specification (See figure above.) Unscrew the hexagon bolt-->dismount sensor's Terminal-->change terminals' wiring
Ooeratina ranee 2mm direction as you need-->remounting-->screw up the hexagon bolt.
Voltage range 10-30V DC
Output type N.O., PNP, NPN 1.2) Steps of change new sensor switch:
Rated DC 150mA(max)
Switch freauencv 30Hz
Shell material PBT
Switch status indication Clamping, Red\ Opering: Yellow
Voltage indication Green
Hexagon bolt
Hexagon bolt
(See figure above.) unscrew two hexagon bolts G)-->dismount sensor seats as a whole-->unscrew two
D Hookup hexagon bolts @ -->dismount two sensor switch contacts(S01 \S02)-->unscrew hexagon bolt (2)-->remove
the sensor switch-->choose new sensor switch-->replace new sensor switch contact and screw up hexagon
Hookup
bolt (2)-->replace new wiring box and screw up hexagon bolt G)-->finished.
S01 <O>- Ecommended lock torque of hexagon bolt is listed in the following table:
Ecommended lock torque of hexagon bolt G)
Bore size I Hexaaon bolt type I Lock torque(N.m)
40 , 50 I M3 x 0.5 I 1.2-1 .5
S02 <O>- 63, 80 I M5 x 0.8 I 4.0-5.0
Ecommended lock torque of hexagon bolt (2)
Bore size I Hexaaon bolt tvpe I Lock torque(N. m)
r-·
Yellow G;~·-·! 40, so, 63, 80 I M5 x 0.8 I 4.0-5.0
Ecommended lock torque of hexagon bolt ®
I Bore size I Hexaqon bolt type I Lock toraue(N .m)
40 , so, 63, 80 I M3 x 0.5 I 1.2-1.5
2 4
Red-..;:
3
I 1.3) Steps of readjusting angle:
__ !!_ ___A~ ----· + __ j For more details, see latter contents.
1.4) Sensor switch's connection:
Sensor switch's connection need to use relevant male connector, which have separate male connector.
JCK
:§
4
•
, 3
2
and with wire male connector to be choused. The ordering code as below:
Name: On end cable
(3 meters length)
Ordering code:
Name: L shape cable
(3 meters length)
Ordering code:
Name: On end connector
(rotundity)
Ordering code:
Name: L shape connector
(rotundity)
Ordering code:
~<
X- F- PPVCS X- F-PPVCL X-F-PPVCV X- F- PPVCH
••
JCK Series

1. Mount the cylinder at desired place with bolts and locating pin after choosing a mounting B) Adjusting the clamping gap: Adjust washer G) under the mentioned state until the
surface. Connect the cylinder and control valve with joint and rubber hose. To adjust the gap between the upside braking block and downside one. (At this moment no
opening and closure speed, our pneumatic power welding clamp is equipped with return clamping torque is produced theoretically.)
stroke air buffering. Buffering cannot function well if the clamping arm is over-weighted so C) Applying clamping torque: insert the washer(j) furthermore under the mentioned
that clamping arm' weight must be within the allowable limit; state to produce desired clamping torque. (Make sure the mechanism passes the
2. Using clamping arm beyond the listed in this catalog is forbidden. dead position to produce self-locking i.e. the retaining pin is pushed out.)
3. Workpiece mounting method: D) Adjust washer (2) under the state mentioned in C to make the pressing block in
3.1) When only clamping torque is used for clamping:
contact with the workpiece. Side guide plate
Cylinder Clamping arm
3.31 When side guide plate is mounted:

Side guide plate is mounted on the clamping arm to
prevent transverse movement and make su re that no
transverse load is applied and that the arm would not be stuck .
4. Angle adjusting method::
Standard adjusting angle range of the pneumatic clamp is 15'-135' . Opening angle
Pressing block
can be changed via changing cylinder's stroke distance or the sensor's position;
Location block 4. 1I Step 1 of adjusting angle--change of sensor's position:
Sensor switch
(S021
Inlet on the
clamping side'
Please follow the steps to mount the workpiece onto the clamping arm: terminal
A) Clamping the arm: supply compressed air through the inlet on the clamping side to keep Hexagon bolt @
the arm and pressing block at the closure position simultaneously. Make sure the arm is
locked up.
0
B) Adjusting the clamping gap: adjust the spacer under the mentioned state to make the
pressing block in line with the workpiece's thickness. (At this moment no clamping torque A) Unscrew hexagon bolt G) with inner hexagon wrench to take out the sensor seats;
is produced theoretically.)
8) Unscrew hexagon bolt ® with inner hexagon wrench to take out sensor S01 and align it
C) Applying clamping torque: Insert the spacer furthermore under the mentioned state until to your desired angle indication positon and re-screw up hexagon bolt@. (Note: when
the gap is smaller than the workpiece's thickness and desired clamping torque is mounting sensor S01, the number "S01• should point downward except 15' .)
produced. (Make sure the mechanism passes the dead position to produce self-locking
C) After the sensor's position is adjusted, replace the sensor seats by screwing up
i.e. the retaining pin is pushed out.)
hexagon bolt G) with inner hexagon wrench {lock-up torque by related contents).
3.2) When hard braking is used for clamping :
Note: 1) sensor S02 controls the cylinder's end stroke position and its mounting position
( Clarnpin
The distanc~ ~~~ length L
is well set when leaving factory and is not changeable.
ard braking) 2) the sensor wiring box is provided with two outgoing orientations: forward and
Clamping arm
downward. Unscrew hexagon bolt (2) and then you can change the wiring box
orientation. After that, screw up
hexagon bolt (2).
Washer (2)
3) When remounting the sensor fix to its
original position, the gap between the
Pressing block
sensor and Y-knuckle should be less than
1.5mm. Otherwise, the sensor may not
function well.
Clamping arm
4.21 Step 2 of adjusting angle--change of the cylinder's stroke distance:
Washer G)
Up hard braking
The relation between the opening angle of clamping arm and cylinder's stroke JCK
distance is listed as follows:
Opening angle\Stroke(mm) JCK40 JCK50 JCK63 JCK80
Inlet on the 15' 20.2 21 .6 23.1 36.1
Down hard braking 30' 28.1 30.2 33.4 50.5
clamping side,.._
45° 34.8 37.5 41.6 62.7
Detail drawing of hard braking part A 60° 41 .4 44.6 49.7 74.5
75' 48.0 51.8 57.5 86.3
Please follow the steps to mount the workpiece onto the clamping arm: 90' 54.8 59.2 65.7 98.1
A) clamping the arm: supply compressed air through the inlet on the closure side to keep 105° 61.5 66.4 73.8 109.6
the arm and the braking block at the clamping position simultaneously. Make sure the 120· 67.4 72.7 81 .0 119.5
arm is locked up; 135° 71 .6 77.3 86.2 126.4
•Rt•
JCK Series
During actual operation, the cylinder's stroke can be changed by changing the adjusting 5.3) V-shaped block mounting,
screw at the bottom to control the clamping arm's opening angle. Detailed description is
V-shaped block
as follows:
Cylinder
Hexagon screw close to this surfaceshould be locked up first
Adjusting screw
Hexagon screw open to this surface should be locked up last
5.4) Holding torque of clamping arm (recommended):

When holding clamping arm, please choose recommended value in the following list:
A) Unscrew original adjusting screw with inner hexagon wrench
B) Choose suitable adjusting screw according to actual need (the bottom is marked Bore size Bolt type Holding torque (N.m)
40 M6x 1.0 13.8
with corresponding opening angle).
50 M6 x1 .0 13.8
C) Screw up new adjusting screw into the cylinder's end cap. 63 M8 x 1.25 33.0
5. Mounting clamping arm: 80 M10x 1.5 66.0
The clamping arm is already mounted when leaving factory which can be remounted
by yourself horizontally or vertically according to your actual need. 6. Self-lock function:
5.1) Mounting clamping arm horizontally: At the end of stroke, the crank-slider mechanism passes the dead point and gets self-locked
Unscrew 4 hexagon bolts on both sides of the clamping arm to remove V-shaped up. The retaining pin gets pushed up at this moment. Even when compressed air is off, the
block and then the clamping arm for substituting your desired one. cylinder can remain at closure state for safety. To open self-locking of the crank-slider
When mounting, please note the direction of the indicating line on the pivot.
mechanism, push down the retaining pin when compressed air is off.
Max, 135°
Warning:
Pushing down the retaining pin may cause clamping arm to spring off at closure state.
So when ushing the pin, please get yourself away from the clamping arm's operation range.
Pushing down the retaining

pin to unlock(non-regularway)
Clamping arm
Hexa on bolt
Retaining pin Retainin in ~
(Not pushed up) (Pushed up)
V-shaped block
Retaining pin not pushed up, Retaining pin pushed up,

crank-slider mechanism not self-locked crank-slider mechanism self-locked
Indicating line on the pivot point to the
clamping arm and V-shaped block mounting surface.
Indicating line on the pivot does not point to the

5.2) Mounting clamping arm vertically:
Clamping arm
Indicating line on the pivot does

not point to the clamping arm and
JCK V-shaped block mounting surface.
Indicating line
V-shaped block
Indicating line on the pivot point to the

ilffl:•
NPM series Boosting Unclamping cylinder
D Product series
Acting
Series name Specification
type
NPM series
0)
.[~
-,~"'
<.).
-
Cl> .0
::, 3.5T
.[~ 4.5T
en ..
• • Cl>
Cl>-.:,
~-rn 6.0T
"'<.)
o:;::::
=::, E
m
~::,
-.::, Cl>
>- C:
IC..
Page 440
Operating processes
Boosting process The spindle blowing process Restoration process
Airflow
adjustment nut
Lubricator bowl
Lubricator bowl
Microswitch Microswitch
When the h draulic piston rod

approaches the end of stroke,
the spindle blowing function
will work automatically.
NPM
Note:
Two microswitches are used to define the stroke of boosting unclamping cylinder.
Boosting Unclamping cylinder AlrTAC
NPM series
Specification
Specification 3.5T 4.5T 6.0T
Hydraulic side: single acting
Acting type
Pneumatic side: double actina
Fluid Air (filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Operating pressure 0.5M Pa-0.8MPa(72-115psi)(5-8bar)
Proof pressure 1.0MPa(143psi)(1 Obar)
Ambient temperature -5-60"C
Port size 3/8'
Boosting force@ 0.6MPa 3.5T I 4.5T I 5.7T
Weight 7Kg I 7.5Kg I 9.5Kg
Ordering code
There are four types of boosting unclamping cylinder. The microswitch, voltage and electrical connection mode
are optional.
Symbol
NPM 35T
NPM 45T 63X13
NPM 45T 63X15
NPM 60T 70X15
Electrical connection mode
Model Blank: DIN terminal
D Product feature NPM: Boosting I: Grommet
Unclamping cylinder
1. Special sealing materials can avoid the leakage of hydraulic cylinder. Standard voltage
2. Special surface treatment on the inner cylinder wall can improve A: AC220V
B: DC24V
resistance to wear and corrosion . C: AC110V
3. With spindle blowing function. E: AC24V
F: DC12V
H draullc bore size X stroke
63X13: Hydraulic bore size63mm; stroke13mm
Note: The model of solenoid valve is 4M310.
D Theoretical boosting force curves Unit: Ton (T)
8
j'.:'
7
Q)
~ 6
.E 5
C)
C:
4
~
0
0
3
a, 2
1
0
~-----_'.'.Jlll!ll
-+-NPM35T63X13
I ' ••l!J
2.5
I
•••3.8
3.2
•••a•E:•• Air pressure(MPa)
iJ,nJ,• • • •
4.5 5.1
-+-NPM45T63X13 15 3.2 3.8 4.6 5.4 6.2
-+-NPM60T70X15 3.8 4.8 5.7 6.7 7.6

1. The fixing plate of the boosting unclamping cylinder should be perpendicular to the spindle axis.
(Allowable perpendicularity error,;; 0.05mm/100mm).
NPM 2. Recommend using ISO VG32 anti-wear hydraulic oil. In addition, the oil level should be kept within the
specified range.
il!t•i
Boosting Unclamping cylinder AlrTAC
NPM series
D Inner structure D Key Dimensions
A-direction
Airflow speed control tube joint 011 0

Q)
>
~-
oi
> 0
,::,
·oC: N ffil
Q) i
0
en
, II~
(!) ••
~~;
<'.
I
I
'@
(.)
<'. ;;:; i J_
C:
Q) u.
•• lJ
"i ~
0,::,
.0
<'.
:1r.:
••
Q)
B§ n
.g
"' 0
E
.0 0
.3 ~ j ~ I • l • li a
111, 111, .
1
Hydraulic piston -
piston rod
Carbon steel
31 Piston 0-rina
32 Wear ring
NBR
Wear-resistant lTJ:J "'' I-
-
-
____ll:iJJ
___lI=rl
2 Booster bolt Alloy steel material en ~

Hexagon socket Medium (Low) 33 0-ring NBR
3
cap head screw carbon steel 34 Bumper pad TPU <!>60h7
4 Spring washer Spring steel 35 Back cover Aluminum alloy
5 Backing ring Steel 36 Connection block Aluminum alloy
6 0-ring NBR 37 Spring washer Spring steel
7 Wear rina Wear-resistant materia Hexagon socket cap Medium (Low)
38
8 Front cover Aluminum alloy head screw carbon steel
Mounting plate of 39 Universal silencer
9 Cool rolled plate NPM45T63X15 0.6MPa 4.5T 15mm 26-40 mm 426 159 192 13
limit switch Hexagon socket cap Medium (Low)
40 NPM60T70X15 0.6MPa 5.7T 15mm 26-40 mm 496.5 194 227.5 13
10 Spring washer Spring steel head screw carbon steel
Hexagon socket Medium (Low) Hexagon socket cap Medium (Low)
11 41
cap head screw carbon steel head screw carbon steel
12 Large steel tube Low carbon steel Medium (Low)
42 Tie-rod nut
13 Small steel tube Low carbon steel carbon steel
14 Sorina Serina steel 43 Tie-rod Medium carbon steel
15 Microswilch(NPM35T63-024) Lubricator bowl
44 Plastic
16 L-shape bracket Cool rolled plate (NPM35T63-012)
Hexagon socket 45 0-ring NBR
Medium (Low)
17 countersunk head Lubricator bowl fixing
carbon steel 46 Aluminum alloy
screw plate
18 Gasket Stainless steel 47 0-ring NBR
19 Spring washer Spring steel 48 Stroke adjusting sleeve Aluminum alloy
20 Screw locking plate Cool rolled plate 49 Hydraulic cylinder tie-rod Medium carbon steel NPM
Hexagon socket Medium (Low) 50 Universal male elbow PH601 Dl
21
cap head screw carbon steel PU tube 1
51 Plastic
22 Wear ring Wear-resistant materia (US98A060040DBK)
23 Special shape 0-ring TPU 52 0-ring NBR
24 0-ring NBR 53 Steel column Stainless steel
25 Special shape 0-ring TPU 54 Solenoid valve assembly (4M310100 )
26 Middle cover Alumi num alloy 55 Straight connector(PC10030)
27 Special shape 0-ring NBR 56 Exhaust throttle fittin l (PSL601AO)
28 Piston rod Medium carbon steel PU tube 2
57 Plastic
29 Piston Aluminum alloy (US98A 100065DBK)
30 Aluminum tube Aluminum alloy 58 L-shaped male elbow PL 10020)
Memo AlrTAC
Note
NPM
Stopper cylinder--TWH, TWG, TWQ , TWM Series
D Product series
Series
CS1-J DS1 -J CS1 -G DS1-G
20
25
32
40
0,
50
.!: 63
u 80
"'
~
.c
:::,
0
Cl
"S
c..
g>
ti
"'
Cl)
C)
rJ5 50
C)
C:
ti
"'
~
.c
:::,
0
Cl
CS1 - T DS1-T
"S
c..
6,
C:
ti
"'
Cl)
C)
32
C:
u5 40
C)
50
.!:
u
"'
Cl)
:g
0
Cl
CS1-J DS1-J CS1-G DS1-G

TWQ
"S
0,.
0,
C:
u 20
"'
Cl)
C)
25
C:
u5 32
40
g>
50
ti
"'a,
:0
:::,
0
Cl
Page 444 444 447 450 457

3. Necessary protection measure shall be taken in the environment with higher humidity, much dust or water drops, oil dust and welding dregs. TW
4. Dirty substances in the pipe must be eliminated before cylinder is connected with pipeline. Impurities must be prevented from entering the
cylinder.
6. The lateral load of the cylinder shall not exceed the allowable value in operation so as to maintain its normal operation and extend its service
life.
7. Anti-freezing measure shall be adopted under low temperature environment to prevent the water freezing in cylinder.
inlet and outlet ports.
Stopper cylinder AlrTAC
TWH, TWM Series
Specification
..
Bore size(mm) 20 125 132 140 150 163 ISO 150
Action Double acting type, Single acting-pull type
Operating!Double acting type 0.15- 1.0MPa(23- 145psi)
pressure ISingle acting-pull type CD 20:0.25-1.0MPa(35- 145psi) Others:0.2-1.0MPa(28- 145psi)
+1.0
Range of stroke tolerance 0
Cushion type Bumper
Lubrication Non required
Mounting type Flange
Shock less stopper(With non adjustable I Shock less stopper(With adjustable
Stopper type
absorber) absorber)
D Symbol Port size G) M5 x0.8 I 1/8' I 1/4" I 1/8'
TWH(TWM) TWH-S(TWM-S) Sensor's thread M5 x 0.5 I M8 x 1.0
-BD -BID G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to Page 457-480 for details of sensor switch.
TTH(TTM) TTH-S(TTM-S)
D Ordering code
~ ~
TDH (TDM) TDH - S(TDM-S)
~ ~ TWH: Stopper cylinder(Double acting type)

TDH : Stopper cylinder
D Product feature (Built-in spring double acting type)
1. JIS standard is implemented. TTH: Stopper cylinder(Single acting-Pull type)

TWM: Stopper cylinder(Double acting type)
2. Widening the piston rod can effectively improve the impact resistance Self-lock function
TDM: Stopper cylinder
ability of the cylinder. Blank: Without self-lock
(Built-in spring double acting type)
3. Heavy type stopper cylinder has shock absorber adjustable shock F: With self-lock
TTM: Stopper cylinder(Single acting-Pull type)
absorber, which can reliably absorb the impact energy.
4. Shockless stopper cylinder is equipped with self-lock device, which can Stopper
Bore size
prevent the returning of rebound of rocker caused by bar objects. Model Stopper
Model Bore size
5. Several series and specifications for stopper cylinders can be selected . L: shockless stopper
TWH, TDH, TTH 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 TWH (Non-adjustable absorber)
TWM , TDM , TTM 50 TDH
TTH K: Shockless stopper
(adjustble absorber)
Stroke
TWM, TDM K: Shockless stopper
Bore size Standard stroke (mm) TTM (adjustble absorber)
20, 25 15
32 20
40, 50, 63 30 Magnet
80 40 Blank: Without magnet
G) When the thread is standard, the code is blank. S: With magnet
Note) The buffer is not adjustable if the bore size is 20 and 25. It is adjustable if the bore is over 32.
D Lateral Load and Operation pressure

TWH20, 25, 32 TWH40, 50, 63, 80
1.0 1.0
ii". 0.9 C °/
,,, ~"or ii". 0.9 ';;!/ <i't 0/
-
)~
~ 0.8 ~0.8
"'I II / 111 "I I/
": 0.7 /
": 0.7 / /
~ 0.6 ~ 0.6
::l 0.5 I II /
::l 0.5 I / /
[ 0.4 I I
I / /''
[ 0.4
g 0.3 I ' /
V
g 0.3 I I V /
I II/ /
~ 0.2 ~ 0.2
'L/
~ 0. 1 ~0. 1
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 500 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
Lateral load: W(N) Lateral load: W(N)
TW TWM50
.;- 1.0 1,,,., /
a_
::,;
a:- 0.8 /
I~
Q.
0.6
0.4 /
/
C:
0.2 /
0
c;c
~
a,
8- 00 500 1000
Lateral load : W(N)
TWH, TWM Series
D How to select D Dimensions

Non-adjustable absorber(TWH-L(F). TDH-L(F). TTH-L(F))
Impact speed u [m/min]
Bore size CJ:>20, CJ:>25, CJ:>32 . Friction index µ =0.1 CJ:>20, CJ:>25
Load m[kg]
60
50
Friction index
oi 40 \l!JL
-"
E 30 '
'O
_."'
0
20
10
1cP20, '-5
""'~-
I'--.. Note:
When the speed is the same, the friction
index more higher, the Load more lighter.
0 10 20 30 40 so the rubbing surface is smoother is better.
Impact speed: V(m/min)
" - m l------------------------------------------------------------------ ------------------------------------------------------- 4- K(Thru,hole
~ Selection way:
Bore size CJ:>40, CJ:>50, CJ:>63, CJ:>80. Friction index µ =0.1
When load is 300kg, speed is 15m/min, and
800 friction factor is 0.1, draw a horizontal line in
700 the 300 position of Y axis in Table 3 to join
CJ:>80
600 with X axis' .15m/min q>63 cylinder used in
c» 500
\
=E 400
~ - '\_\ this application will be selected.
129 55 60
•I
"O
_."'
0
300
200
100
CJ:>50
Iman "!---. "'
"-"
"i---... ~ t::::::::::::
135.5
I
16
57.5 64
4.5 40 M5x0.8
r----. 16 6.5 47 M5x0.8
0 10 20 30 40 Note:The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension.
Impact speed: V(m/min) The type with sell-lock and the type without selnock have the same dimension.
Adjustable absorber(TWH-K(F),TDH-K(F), TTH-K(F))

cP32-cP80
D Inner structure and material of major parts s
er:
e
Cast steel\
Countersink screw Carbon steel 17 Rocker
Nodular Cast iron
Bod Aluminum allo 18 PIN S45C rindin rod
Piston Aluminum allo 19 PIN asket S45C rindin rod 'O
E' u.
Wear resistant 20 Obslruct block Powder metallurgy C <(
material
Piston seal NBR
Ma net washer Aluminum allo
22 Leader S45C rindin rod
'*
a:
<( u
<(
Wear resistant
Front cover Aluminum alloy 23 Sliding bushing
material
0-rin NBR 24 0-rin NBR
Packin NBR 25 Bum er TPU
Silencer
26 POM
Piston rod Cll32 Shockless
Shock absorber stopper sketch map
Fixed seat
~
PIN
Cli ID
ID :.::
Back cover Aluminum allo
DD
Aluminum allo 15 Rocker Nodular cast iron :, . •: ' I :

Aluminum allo 16 Roller Powder metallu 32 152.5 87 65.5 73.5 1.5 16 67 51.5 23
Wear resistant material 17 Obstruct black Powder metallu 40 191 112 79 92.5 3.5 16 82 62 26.5
NBR 18 Countersink screw Carbon steel 50 211 128 83 107.5 2 20 93 72 32
Ma net washer Aluminum allo 19 Leader S45C rindin rod 63 245.5 144.5 101 122 3.5 25 114 87.5 38.5 TW
Front cover Aluminum allo 20 Cancel ca Aluminum allo 80 299.5 171.5 128 145.5 3.5 25 138 109 49
0-ring NBR 21 Sliding bushing Bronze powder
metallurgy
:, . :• I : .., .
Absorber fix and POM 32 46 20 11 6.5 53 1/8" 16 12 18.5 28
0-ring NBR 22 adjust seat 40 53 25 11 6.5 65 1/8" 16 20 21 26
Gasket NBR 23 Bum er TPU 50 64 32 14 9 73 1/8" 18 20 26 24
Piston rod S45C rindin rod 24 Ma net 63 77 40 18 11 90 1/4" 24 20 30 24
Shock absorber 25 80 98 50 20 13 110 1/4" 30 25 37 23
Mountin seat 26 Note:The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension.
PIN 27 Back cover Aluminum allo The type with self-lock and the type without selflock have the same dimension.
TWH, TWM Series
D Dimensions 3. Multi-working position
Adjustable absorber{TWM-K(F), TDM-K(F), TTM-K(F) Even the flange is fixed, just adjust the mounting position of guide rod will be changed the working direction of
the stopper cylinder.
Air' t
Working
0
0
4. Working Forbidden
4.1) This function is used to cancel the stop action of the cylinder,
64 64
and make the work piece pass easy.
4.2) The steps are as following.
a. Screw off the cancel screw from the flange.
b. Put the roller seat down.
c. Fasten the cancel screw in the screw hole on the fixed
seat and the tail of the cancel screw should be inserted in
the hole made on the roller seat.
Note: The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension. 5. How to use stopper function
5.1) When the shock absorber is impacted deeply, added impact energy must be avoided . The cylinder without
shock absorber cann't be impacted by load, otherwise mechanical failure may be caused .
5.2) The maximum impact kinetic energy acting on the piston rod cann't exceed the allowable maximum values,
otherwise mechanical failure may be caused.
1. Function & Operating Manual
Proximity Seneor ~ - - - Wheel

(buy or not)
6. Self-locking
Unusually, when the stopper cylinder is operating, work piece will be rebound as the effect of shocker absorber.
Flange In order to keep the work piece steady, we have developed this self-locking device.
The auto-lock equipment can lock the rocker arm to avoid the products jumping back
IM----Body
-~ V m/min
d"11 0~
000
Bottom Ports
2. Adjustment of Shock Absorber

fr
2. 1) The Shock Absorber had been adjusted before the cylinder finished.
2.2) The client can adjust it if necessary.
WMounting kit
Original position of roller Lock the roller

df.
Unlock the roller

a. Loose the fixed screw.
b. Turn the Shock Absorber to adjust the cushion ability.
c. Fasten the fixed screw.
TW
) (,;;240°)
il!tli
TWG Series
D Specification
Bore s1ze(mm) 32 40 50
Fluid Double acting type, Single acting-pull type
Action Air(to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Operating!Double acting type 0. 15-1.0MPa(23- 145psi)
pressure ISingle acting-pull type 0.2-1 .0MPa(28- 145psi)
Range of stroke tolerance +h.o
Cushion type Bumper
Mounting type Flange(The mounting high can be changed)
Stopper type Round rod, Flat rod, Roller shock less stopper(with absorber)
Port size G) 1/8"
G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to Page 457-480 for details of sensor switch.
Symbol
D Ordering code
TWG TWG-S TTG-S
-BO -sJD ~
TWG: Stopper cylinder
(Adjustable for height,
D Product feature double acting type)
TTG: Stopper cylinder
1. JIS standard is implemented. (Adjustable for height,
2. Widening the piston rod can effectively improve the impact resistance single acting-pull type) Self.lock function
ability of the cylinder. Blank: Without self-lock
3. The installation height is adjustable and several rod end modes can be F: With self-lock
Bore size
selected. The cushion effect of the stopper cylinder with shock absorber 132 40 50 I
is better. Stopper
4. Shockless stopper cylinder is attached with self-lock device, which can Stroke C: Round rod
prevent the returning of rebound of rocker caused by bar objects. Bore size Stroke (mm) B: Flat rod
5. Several series and specifications for stopper cylinders can be selected. 32 10 15 20 R: Roller
40, 50 20 25 30 K: Shockless stopper (adjustble absorber
Magnet
S: With magnet
D Lateral Load and Operation pressure
Lateral load & operation pressure Round rod, Flat rod, Roller
200
130 <1>50
100 1'0 l----+--+- +---+----4'1-JJ-',0U-,
' "-1
/ ----l
55 f 0.9 1------+--+- +---+--+l-,L+---+----l

/
45 ' :;;: 0.8 t----t-----t----t- -t--?f-----ntc,rn-1:r-1
0:: 0.7 1----+--+-+----b'/- +-~~lq.,.c.., ~ ----1
C>
""
E
"' 0.6 / / /
10 5 0.5 / / 1> 50
~
'O
"'
0 0.4 ---
...J
[ 0.3 V: / ----
6 0.2 '/
'E 0.1 /,, __..
Q)
1 8" 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700
1 5 10 20 30
Saeed V(m/ min) Lateral load W(N)
TW
TWG Series
Round rod(TWG-C, TTG-C) Flat rod(TWG-B, TTG-B)
Cl>D
Cl>D
~ M ~
e e
ci5 ci5
+
a,
+
a,
N <( Cl>G N
X
<(
X
~ ~
e H e
Q)
en+ g 2-Sides en+

<( en <(
+
(.)
<(
<(
::c:
Cl>C
4-Cl>K
1
. Back cover Aluminum allov
(Thru.hole)
l'-+-::!>..----1---VI
2 Bumper TPU
3 Body Aluminum alloy :, . .:- ··-=--· :, . .:- ··-=--·
4 Wear ring Wear resistant material 32 95 138 57 170 140 120 50 18 32 95 38 57 170 140 120 118.5 50 18
5 Piston Aluminum allov 40 100 138 62 180 147 125 60 18 40 100 38 62 l8o 147 12s 122.s 60 18
6
7
8
Maonet washer
Packino
Flange
Aluminum allov
NBR
Aluminum alloy
:..
50
32
100 138
' :
62
37 16 15 19
180
:
150
158 125
IM36•1.S l38
60
. 18
.,
1/8' 9
50
:
32
.. 100 38 62 180 158 125 122.5
' : :
37 16 15 19 ISO IM36x1 5 138
60
. .. 18
1/8" 9
9 Fixed nut Carbon steel
40 44 16 16 19 160 IM45x1.Sl38 1/8' 12 40 44 16 16 19 160 IM4Sx1 5 138 1/8" 12
50 54 16 16 19 160 IM45x1.S l38 1/8' 10 50 54 16 16 19 160 IM45x1 5 138 1/8" 10
Carbon steel with
11 Piston rod Note: The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension. Note: The type with magnet andthe type without magnet have thesame dimension.
20 µ m chrome plated
12 Fixed seat Nodular cast iron
13 Lock pin Cast steel Shockless stopper(TWG-K(F), TTG-K(F)) Roller(TWG-R, TTG-R)
14 Rocker Cast steel
15 Roller Mild steel s
16 Steel ball Stainless steel Cl>D
Cl>R
17 Obstruct block Powder metallurqy
18 Cancel cap Aluminum alloy
19 Shock absorber ~
e ~ w
20 Lock ring Powder metallurgy en+ e <(
21 Sliding bushing Wear resistant material

N
a,
:,;
en+
Absorber fix and X a,
22 adjust seat POM N
~ X <( Cl>G
23 Magnet Plastic e ~
24 Piston seal NBR
en+ e
<( ci5
25 Spring Spring steel Q) +
<(
26 0-ring NBR "l5 H
27 Silence Sintered bronze particle
2-P if, 2- Sides
+
(.)
<(
::c:
<(
Cl>C
Cl>32 Shockless
stopper sketch map
:. -
18 32 116 18.5 50 18 37
TW 18 40 123 22.5 60 18 44
18 50 123 22.5 60 18 54
:, .
118" 9 32 6 1/8" 9 20 8
1/8' 12 40 6 1/8" 12 20 8
1/8" 10 50 6 1/8" 10 20 8
Note: The type with magnet and thetype without magnet have the same dimension.
Note: The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension.
The typewith self-lock and the type without self-lock have thesame dimension.:
TWG Series

1. Function & Operating Manual 4. Working Forbidden(Shock less stopper(K))
4.1) This function is used to cancel the stop
The appearance of Stopper
action of the cylinder, and make the work
piece pass easy.
-o\-- - -Roller Seat 4.2) The steps are as following.
a. Screw off the cancel screw from the
cancel Screw flange.
Fixed Seat b. Put the roller seat down.
11.G'=F--Lock plate c. Fasten the cancel screw in the screw
hole on the fixed seat and the tail of the
cancel screw should be inserted in the
Round rod(C) Flat rod(B) Roller(R) Shock less stopper(K) hole made on the roller seat.
5. How to use stopper fu nction
5.1) When the shock absorber is impacted deeply, added impact energy must be avoided . The cylinder
without shock absorber cann't be impacted by load , otherwise mechanical failure may be caused.
TWG Series appearance TWQ Series appearance 5.2) The maximum impact kinetic energy acting on the piston rod cann't exceed the allowable
maximum values, otherwise mechanical failure may be caused.
Scotch block
Lock nut
Front cover
Flange--f.~=~::s;;:::;."'.:
X
Body
Body
Rear cover-----11.----?1 6. Self-locking

Unusually, when the stopper cylinder is operating, work piece will be rebound as the effect of shocker
Bottom Port~
absorber. In order to keep the work piece steady, we have developed this self-locking device.
2. Adjustment of Shock Absorber

M M
2. 1) The Shock Absorber had been adjusted before the cylinder finished. a
2.2) The client can adjust it if necessary.
a. Loose the fixed screw.
b. Turn the Shock Absorber to adjust the cushion ability.
c. Fasten the fixed screw.
Original position of roller Lock the roller Unlock the roller
3. Multi-working position
3.1) If the body is fixed, just to adjust the scotch block, the working direction of the
cylinder will be changed.
3.2) For TWG series, adjusting the position of flange can be changed the working height.
~(0-360°)
Fasten the screw after

t TW
the lock nut is fastened
l'S'i..,,,,~t:I To adjust the position

after the screws are loosed
TWQSeries
Specification
Bore size(mm) 20 25 32 40 50
Fluid Double acting type, Single acting-pull type
Action Air(to be filtered by 40 µ m filter element)
Operating!Double acting type 0.15- 1.0MPa(23- 145psi)
pressure ISingle acting-pull type <1>20: 0.25-1.0MPa(35- 145psi) others: 0.2- 1.0MPa(28- 145psi)
Range of stroke tolerance +~.o
Cushion type Bumper
Mounting type Thru hole or screw hole
Stopper type Round rod, Flat rod/Rolle~ Round rod, Flat rod/Roller, Shock less stopper(with absorber)
Portsize CD M5x0.8 I 1/8'
G) PT thread, G thread and NPT thread are available. Add) Refer to Page 457- 480 for details of sensor switch.
Symbol
D Ordering code
TWQ TWQ-S TTQ-S
-BO -sJD ~
TWQ: Stopper cylinder
D Product feature (Height locked, double acting type)
TTQ: Stopper cylinder
1. JIS standard is implemented. (Height locked, single acti ng-pull type)
2. Widening the piston rod can effectively improve the impact resistance
Self-lock function
ability of the cylinder. Bore size Blank:Without self-lock
3. The installation height is adjustable and several rod end modes can be 120 2s 32 40 so I F:With self-lock
selected. The stopper cylinder with shock absorber has a better cushion
effect. Stroke
4. Shockless stopper cylinder is attached with self-lock device, which can Stopper
Bore size Stroke (mm)
prevent the returning of rebound of rocker caused by bar objects. C: Round rod
20, 25, 32 10 15 20
B: Flat rod
5. Several series and specifications for stopper cylinders can be selected. 40, 50 20 25 30
R: Roller
K: Shockless stopper (adjustble absorber)
Magnet
S: With magnet
G) When the thread is standard, the code is blank.
TW
TWQSeries
D How to select Cl Inner structure and material of major parts
Shockless stopper
Round rod, Flat rod, roller (With adjustable absorber) ..... '
200 200 1 Back cover Aluminum alloy
130 Ql50 2 Sorina holder Aluminum allov
100 100
Ql40 3 Bumoer TPU
[\.
50 <ll50 50 4 Bodv Aluminum allov
5 Sprina Sprinq steel
~20
~8·=· ~25 Ql32
E 20 "- 6 Piston Aluminum allov
E15
.. 10
'O
i --
' '\.
'''
~ 10
0
"'J',-... 7
8
Maanet holder
0-rina
Aluminum allov
NBR
"' 5
..:l '
....J
5
9 Front cover Aluminum allov
'' 10 Lock ring Powder metallurov
'' 11 Piston rod Carbon steel with 20 µ m chrome plated
''' 12 Roller Cast steel
1 ' 1 13 Sprina i in Sprinq steel
1 5 10 15 20 30 1 5 10 20 30 14 Countersink screw Carbon steel
Speed V(m/min) Speed V(m/min)
15 Slidina bushing Bronze powder metallurav
16 Packing NBR
Lateral load & operation pressure Round rod, Flat rod, Roller 18 Bumper TPU
19 Magnet Plastic
1.0 JQ)20 20 Piston seal NBR
0.9 21 Silencer Sintered bronze particle
.,
0..
0.8
0.7
I
I I
/<PLO
/
'!'~U
::;; / I/ / Ql 2 /
;;:-
cu
0.6
0.5 / J / /
TTQ-K(<J:>32-<1>50) ....
:3 I/ I I/ / - Ql50 1 Body Aluminum allov
"'"' 0.4
Q)
5. 0.3 JV / / L---' 2 Silencer Sintered bronze oarticle

C:
0 0.2 II v/ L--- 3 Piston Aluminum allov
~ 1//,, ~ 4 Piston seal NBR
;;; 0.1 5 Magnet Plastic
a.
0 6 Bumper TPU
00 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 7 Countersink screw Carbon steel
Lateral load (N) 8 Front cover Aluminum allov
9 Absorber fix and adjust sea POM
11 Piston rod chrome r lated
12 Mounting seat Nodular cast iron
D Installation and application 13 Lock pin Cast steel
14 Torsion spring Sorina steel
Please refer to page 449 for details.
15 Rocker Cast steel
16 Roller Mild steel
17 Steel ball Free cuttina steel
18 Obstruct block Powder metalluray
19 Cancel cap Aluminum alloy
20 Locking cushion Powder metallurgy
21 Shock absorber
22 Bushinq Sintered bronze oarticle
23 0-rinq NBR
24 0-ring NBR
25 Maanet washer Aluminum allov
26 Bumper Wear resistant material
27 Spring SPrina steel
28 Cushion POM
TW
-~11
TWQSeries
D Dimensions
Round rod(TWQ-C, TTQ-C) Flat rod(TWQ-B, TTQ-B)
Cll20, Cll25 <1>32, <1>40, (!)50 Cll20, Cll25 <1>32, <1>40, (!)50
<PM
~ ~
e e ~
in in e
N +
cc N
,t, in
X <(
X
<C N
X
,t,
~
<(
~
g .,."' e ~
e iii ... e ~
Q)
iii e
(/)
+
<(
en + e + iii
+ <( iii <( +
0
<( + 0
0 <(
<(
8-K d :KA 8-K d :KA

8-<l>J dp JA 8-<PJ dp:JA
=·.
20 67
·=- ··-=
22 45 36
•
12 9 7
:,
20
.
67
·=-
22 45
··-=36 12
• 10 9 7
25 68 20 48 40 16 9 7 25 68 20 48 40 16 14 9 7
32 68 20 48 45 49.5 20 9 7 32 68 20 48 45 49.5 20 18.5 9 7
40 80.5 28 52.5 53 57 25 9 7 40 80.5 28 52.5 53 57 25 22.5 9 7
:..
50
20
82
M6x1.0
28 54
10 36
64
:
24
71
22
25
.
M5x0.8
11 8
.,
16.5
·:•
9
50
:, -
20
82
M6x1.0
28 54
10
:
36
64
24
71
22
25
.
M5x0.8
22.5 11
•,
16.5
8
·:•
9
25 M6x1.0 10 40 30 20 M5x0.8 18 9 25 M6x1 .0 10 40 30 20 M5x0.8 18 9
32 M6x1.0 10 34 36 20 1/8" 20 10 32 M6x1.0 10 34 36 20 1/8" 20 10
40 M6•1.0 10 40 44 28 1/8' 20 11 40 M6•1.0 10 40 44 28 1/8" 20 11
50 M8•1.25 14 50 56 28 1/8' 22 12 50 M8•1.25 14 50 56 28 1/8" 22 12
Note: The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension. Note: The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension.
Shockless stopper (TWQ-K(F), TTQ-K(F)) <1>32, <1>40, <1>50 l@IMiM•dJiU•em
s <1>32, <1>40, <1>50
Conve
.,."' ~
o,
w
g
(/)
g
(/)
+ <(
+
cc
N
X
N +
a,
N X <(
X < <PM ~ ~
~ e e
e en iii ~
iii +
<( + e
<(
+
<(
iii
+
0
<(
.,."'
e
iii
+
0
<(
<P32 Shockless
stopper sketch map 8-K d :KA
8-<l>J dp:JA
TW
:..
t, •: : •
8- K dp:KA
8- <PJ dp:JA
=·
:,
20
25
32
40
-
78
81
87
103.5
•:
33
33
39
51
45
48
48
52.5
2
2
3
4
:
36
40
12
16
45 49.5 20
53 57 25
• 10
14
18.5
22.5
9
9
9
9
7
7
7
7
·-
32 120.5 172.5 48 11 45 49.5 120 19 17 IM6x1.0 110 34 50 105 51 54 4 64 71 25 22.5 11 8

40 152.5 1100 52.5 11.5 53 57 125 19 17 IM6x1.0 110 40 :, . : . .. . . . '
:.-
50
32
154 1100 54 11.5
36 120
. .. . .
1/8" 120
64 71 125 111 18 IM8•1.25 114
10 15 111.5 128 124.5 14.5 I

50 20
25
32
M6•1 .0
M6•1 .0
M6•1.0
10
10
10
36
40
34
24
30
36
22
20
20
M5•0.8
M5x0.8
1/8"
16.5
18
20
9
9
10
10
12
20
4
6
8
40 44 128 1/8" 120 11 20 114 124 138 114 I 40 M6•1.0 10 40 44 28 1/8" 20 11 20 8
50 56 128 1/8" 122 12 20 114 124 138 114 I 50 M8•1 .25 14 50 56 28 1/8" 22 12 20 8
Note: The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension. Note: The type with magnet and the type without magnet have the same dimension.
The t e with self-lock and the t e without self-lock have the same dimension.
-~+Ii
Cylinder joint accessory AlrTAC
I Knuckle
F-M27X2001
• •
F-M16X1501
F-M18X1501
•• ••
F-M20X1501
F-M22X1501
•• • •
F-M26X1501
D Ordering code
1!1111111!11!!1'"'9'!11
F-M27X2001
F-M36X2001
• •• •
Screw thread Thread pitch

M3: M3
M4: M4
Screw thread
M3
Thread pitch
050:0.Smm
070: 0.7mm
F-M5X0801
F-M6X1001
••• ••
M5: M5 M4 F-M8X1251
M6: M6
M8: M8
MS
M6
080: 0.8mm
100: 1.0mm
F-M10X1251
F-M12X1251
•••
M10: M10 M8, M10, M12 125: 1.25mm
M12: M12 M14, M16, M18
150: 1.5mm
M14:M14 M20, M22, M26
M16: M16 M27, M36, M42 200: 2.0mm
M18: M18
M20: M20
M22: M22
ID <(
M26: M26 zZ
M27: M27
M36: M36
M42: M42 NI CDND
...... : I
F-M14X1501 52.5 50 12.5 22 21 19 13.8 10 19 40 M14x1 .5
F-M18X1501 66.5 64 16.5 28 27 24 19.8 14 24 50 M18•1 .5
F-M22X1501 83.5 80 23.5 40 29 26 29.8 22 34 60 M22•1 .5
F-M26X1501 83.5 80 23.5 40 29 26 29.8 22 34 60 M26x1 .5
. . . . . , . --------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
~-
...... I
F-M3x0501 3 12 15.5 5 5 M3•0.5 3

F-M4x0701 4 16 21 6.8 8 M4•0.7 4
F-M5x0801 5 25 32 14.1 7.5 M5•0.8 6.3
F-M6x1001 6 21 28 8.5 8 M6•1.0 6
F-M8x1251 8 30 40 11 15 M8•1 .25 8
F-M10x1251 10 40 50 15 20 M10• 1.25 10
F-M12x1251 12 48 62 24 20 M12•1 .25 12
F-M16x1501 16 64 82 32 23 M16x1.5 16
F-M20x1501 20 80 102 40 30 M20•1 .5 20 I knuckle
F-M27x2001 30 110 139 51 45 M27•2.0 30
F-M36x2001 35 144 181 65 55 M36•2.0 35
F-M42x2001 40 168 211 85 62 M42•2.0 40
-~ti
Y Knuckle
F-M27X200Y
• •
F-M16X150Y
F-M18X150Y
•• ••
F-M20X150Y
F-M22X150Y
•• • •
F-M26X150Y
D Ordering code
l!ll'llll!ll!!l!'l'l!P.ft
F-M27X200Y
F-M36X200Y
e
e e •

M3: M3
M4: M4
Screw thread
M3
Thread pitch
050: 0.Smm
070: 0.7mm
F-M5X080Y
F-M6X100Y
••• ••
M5: M5 M4 F-M8X125Y
M6: M6
M8: M8
MS
M6
080: 0.8mm
100: 1.0mm
F-M1 0X125Y
F-M12X125Y
•••
M10: M10 M8, M10, M12 125: 1.25mm
M12: M12 M14, M16, M18
150: 1.5mm
M14:M14 M20, M22, M26
M16: M16
M18: M18
M27, M36, M42 200: 2. 0mm
,- : ,-~
F-M3X050Y 15.5 12 5 6 6
M20: M20
F-M4X070Y 22 16 8 8 7
M22: M22 F-M5X080Y 28 21 10.2 12 10
M26: M26 F-M6X100Y 32 24 12 12 10
M27: M27 F-M8X125Y 42 32 16 16 14
M36: M36 F-M10X125Y 52 40 20 19 18
M42: M42 ,.
F-M3X050Y M3•0.5 9 3 3
Clip F-M4X070Y M4x0.7 11.5 4 4
F-M5X080Y M5x0.8 15.5 6.5 5
F-M6X100Y M6• 1.0 16 6 6
F-M8X125Y M8• 1.25 21 8 8
F-M10X125Y M10• 1.25 25 10 10
M14\M18\M22\ M26
F-M18X150Y 19 50 28 64 28 47 40.8
h'=.,;..,'!-+-- '------'- '====I====='--'- F-M22X150Y 20 65 40 85 40 69.2 60.8
F-M26X150Y 20 65 40 85 40 69.2 60.8
,.,,,_
,.
F-M12X125Y
F-M16X150Y
25.4
32
12
16
·-
48
64
""""
24 62
32 80
O NA F-M20X150Y 44.4 20 80 40 102
PA F-M27X200Y 54 30 110 55 139
~
F-M36X200Y 70 35 144 73 179
F-M42X200Y 85 40 168 86 211
,- .. .
Yknuckle F-M12X125Y 12 M12•1 .25 32.4 26.2
F-M16X150Y 16 M16•1 .5 39 32.8
F-M20X150Y 20 M20x1 .5 53.4 45.2
F-M27X200Y 30 M27•2.0 64.2 54.8
F-M36X200Y 35 M36x2.0 80.2 70.8
F-M42X200Y 40.3 M42x2.0 115 93
Floating Joint
D Ordering code
l!IIRIPP.111111!'-!P.

M3: M3 Screw thread Thread pitch
M4: M4 M3 050: 0.5mm
M5: M5 M4 070: 0.7mm
M6: M6 M5 080: 0.8mm
M8: M8 M6 100: 1.0mm
M10: M10 M8, M10, M12 125: 1.25mm
M12: M12 M14, M16
150: 1.5mm
M14: M14 M18, M20
M16: M16
M18: M18
M20: M20
F-M8X125F
F-M10X125F
•••
F-M12X125F
•
Dimensions
Center of sphere
~ r-<
==-'9
- \ ~ i7, r
---1..
I
-
MC MB
~ MD
MA
Note: Angle compensation: ± 5°
Radial direction compensation: 0.5
:- ""'" ,, ....
F-M3X050F 23.5 7.5 3 15 11.8 5.5 2.4 4 M3•0 5 5.5 12
F-M4X070F 26 9.5 3 17 11.8 6 3 4 M4x0.7 7 12
F-M5X080F 34.5 13.5 3.5 22.8 13.8 8 4 6 M5x0.8 8 14
F-M6X100F 34.5 13.5 3.5 22.8 13.8 8 4 6 M6x 1.0 10 14
1,•,1: • . .... Ml =tMH ,M,!
MKL
-:1 -.- ----+"rt

~
r(
·l ·- ·- -· w
l:: ~ ::.
MK01
-· - Ll_ 1-
.M<L
MC
LJA£
MB MD
MA
....,- : t
F-M8X125F 51 20 6 17 24 10.5 6 8 M8x1 .25 M8x1 .25 13 Floating
F-M10X125F 58 22 7 21 26 11 6 10 M10•1.25 M10x1 .25 12 Joint
F-M12X125F 58 22 8 21 28 11 .5 7 12 M12•1.25 M12•1 .25 12
F-M14X150F 70 22.5 8.5 28 34.5 16 8 15 M14•1.5 M14•1 .5 12
F-M16X150F 90 27 10 41 44.5 19 8 17 M16•1.5 M16•1 .5 7
F-M18X150F 92 27 10 41 44.5 21 11 18 M18x1 .5 M18x1 .5 7
F-M20X150F 102 29 13 46 53 22 10 22 M20x1 .5 M20x1 .5 10
-~-i...
Universal Joint
••• • • •
• • • • • •
• •
F-M10X125U
F-M12X125U
F-M14X150U
• •
F-M16X150U
F-M18X150U
•• ••
F-M20X150U
F-M27X200U
•• • •• •
D Ordering code F-M36X200U

M4: M4 Screw thread Thread pitch
MS: M5 M4 070: 0.7mm
M6: M6 M5 080: 0.8mm
MS: MS M6 100: 1.0mm
M10: M10 MS, M10, M12 125: 1.25mm
M12: M12 M14, M16
150:1 .5mm
M14:M14 M18, M20
M16: M16 M27, M36 200: 2. 0mm
M18: M18
M20: M20
M27: M27
M36: M36
D Dimensions
,. .. . • I . . . . . .
F-M4X070U 6 18 5 10 27 36 M4x0.7 13 12.5 10 8
F-M5X080U 6 18 5 10 27 36 M5x0.8 13 12.5 10 8
F-M6X100U 6.8 20 6 12 30 40 M6x1.0 13 13 11 9
F-M8X125U 9 24 8 16 36 48 M8x1 .25 13 16 14 12
F-M10X125U 11 26 10 20 43 56 M10x1 .25 13 19 17 14
F-M12X125U 12 32 12 22 50 66 M12x1 .25 13 22 19 16
Universal F-M14X150U 14 36 14 28 57 75 M14x1.5 13 25 22 19
Joint F-M16X150U 15 40 16 28 64 84 M16x1 .5 15 27 22 21
F-M18X150U 16.5 46 18 30 71 94 M18x1.5 15 31 27 23
F-M20X150U 18 46 20 33 77 100 M20x1.5 15 34 30 25
F-M27X200U 25 70 30 51 110 145 M27x2.0 15 50 41 37
F-M36X200U 27.5 80 35 56 125 165 M36x2.0 15 57.5 50 43
Sensor switch AlrTAC
13 How to correctly select sensor switch 2. Switches with no indicator lights can be chosen when the internal resistance in
LED causes no action of the load
+ Magnetic switch with no contact
A. Confirmation of specification The internal voltage drop of linear magnetic switch with no contact is generally
Load current, voltage, temperature and impact performance beyond the scope of larger than that of magnetic switch with contact. The attentions are the same with
specification in product sample are not allowed to be used to avoid poor action or 1. In addition: DC12V relay is not used, please notice that.
damage of magnetic switch.
B. Confirmation of distance
The distance between two cylinders shall be longer than 40mm to prevent wrong
action caused by magnetic interfere between two magnetic switches when the
0 Attention
cylinders with magnet are horizontally used.
F. Notice of the leaked current
~•m••"" + Magnetic switch with no contact
When all linear magnetic switches with no contact are disconnected, if the leaked
current of internal circuit action passes through load, the requests are: load action
Distance> 40mm] current (cut current inputted into controller)> leaked current. If the request is not met,
the switch will always stay in power supply situation and can not be cut off. In this
~
situation, three-line switch shall be used. When N switches parallel, the leaked
current that passes through load is n times of the leaked current of single switch.
Cylinder with magnet
C. Confirmation of action speed of the cylinder

G. Never directly use the load produced by overvoltage
Magnetic switch is set in the middle position of the stroke. What shall be noticed is
that maybe no drive load action exists if the speed of piston is too fast and the action
+ Magnetic switch with contact
Switch with contact protection circuit or contact protection box shall be used in the
duration of magnetic switch becomes shorter under the situation that load is driven
situation that drive relay occurs overvoltage load
by electrical signal sent by magnetic switch when piston passes through. If the speed
of piston is higher than the maximum allowable speed, magnetic switch with
time-extending function shall be selected. Though there is zener diode that is used for protection of overvoltage in the output
part of magnetic switch with no contact, the repeated effect of pulse voltage may
damage components. Overvoltage absorbing components shall be inserted in the
situation that direct drive relay and electromagnetic valve occurs overvoltage load.
H. Situation that uses interlock circuit

Machinery type protection function is set to prevent faults. Machinery signal is
Action speed of piston (rod)
turned into switch signal through sensor, which is used together with magnetic
D. Confirmation of the length of wiring switch signal and forms dual interlock mode, whose credibility is higher.
Maintenance and examination shall be carried out termly to make sure the action of
+ Magnetic switch with contact interlock circuit is normal.
If the wiring that ends in load is too long, the service life will be shortened when
the suddenly added current is increased as the switch is supplied with power.
1) Contact protection box shall be adopted when the wiring is longer than Sm if the I. Ensure maintenance space
magnetic switch has no contact protection circuit.
2) For the switch with contact protection circuit, the suddenly added current can
not be fully absorbed and the service life will be shortened if the wiring is longer
than 30m. To extend its service life, it is necessary to connect to contact
Wiring diagram of sensor switch
protection box.
The wiring which has no effect on the function shall be within 100m.
Wiring shall be as short as possible +
E. Confirmation of internal voltage drop of magnetic switch ,-----------, Brown ,-----------,

+
1) Switch with indicator I .~--+'-----<---~ I ....__~·----;---~
When switches are connected in series, as there is internal resistance in LED,
pay attention to the raising of the voltage drop (when n switches are connected
in series, the voltage drop is n times of the voltage of one switch). If the switch
is used under the specified voltage, all magnetic switches can work normally,
but load may not act. What must be affirmed is that the load voltage shall be Sensor
above the lowest operating voltage, which shall meet the following formula: switch
internal voltage drop of power voltage switch> loaded lowest operating voltage.
-~t·
additional and adjustment of sensor switch Application environment of sensor switch
0 Attention 0 Danger
1. To avoid machinery damage 1. Magnetic switch is absolutely not allowed to be used in the atmosphere with ex-
plosive gas as ii has no anti-explosion structure.
Switch shall not fall down or impact or bear over great impact (switch with contact shall
2. Magnetic switch shall not be used in the situation with magnetism, otherwise it
be smaller than 300mls') when it is installed. Though the noumenon of the switch is
not damaged, its inside may be damaged and occur wrong action. will cause wrong action of the switch or reduce the magnetism of the magnet ring
in side of the cylinder
2. The wire of the switch shall not move with the action of cylinder 3. Magnetic switch shall not be used in the environment that is always eroded by
water. Otherwise, the sealed resin inside the switch will expand due to poor
The wire is easy to break, and if the force is added to the inside of the switch, the
insulation, which may cause wrong action.
internal components of the switch may be damaged; therefore, the wire of the
switch is absolutely not allowed to move with the action of cylinder. 4. Magnetic switch shall not be used in the environment that has coolant, detergent,
oil or chemicals. Please contact the company if the switch is used in the
3. Clamping torque shall be within the allowable scope when the switch is installed environment that has oil or chemicals or in the situation that ii will be badly
If the clamping torque is excessively high, the installed screw, accessories and influenced in a short time (such as poor insulation, wrong action caused by
switches may be damaged. If the clamping torque is insufficient, the additional expanded seaed resin and induration of the wire).
position of the switch may shift. 5. Never use in the environment that the temperature changes in circle. Or it will has
Clamping torque
bad influence on the inner part of the switch.Common temperature change
is exceptional.
6. Never use in the environment with excessively great impact.
When magnetic switch with contact meets excessively great impact
(over 300mls\ contact will wrongly act to send an instant (under 1ms) signal or
may scrap.
7. Never use in the situation that has the source of electrical pulse
4. Switch shall be installed in the middle position of the action scope If the equipment produces higher electrical pulse (magnetic booster, high-
Action scope refers to the scope of the switch connection. Adjust the additional posi- frequency inductive furnace and motor) near the cylinder with magnetic switch
tion of the magnetic switch as the piston is stopped in the center of the action scope. with no contact, the internal circuit components of the switch may be degraded
If the switch is installed near the two terminals of the action scope, Which is the limit and damaged.
of the on-off of the switch, the action of the switch is not steady. 8. Notice the accumulation of iron powder and denseness of the magnetic object.
The accumulation of iron powder such as chip powder and welding flame or the
~
situation with the denseness of magnetic object around the cylinder with
magnetic switch will weaken the magnetism in the cylinder and magnetic switch
may not act.
Sensing distance
Wiring of sensor switch Maintenance and service of sensor switch
0 Warnings
0 Hint
1. Wire can not bear the repeated bend force and stretching force to prevent breakage. Regularly maintain and examine the following points to prevent wrong action of the switch
2. Make sure that the power is supplied after connecting the load: for two-line type switch, 1. The switch shall be adjusted to the right additional position to fasten the small screw
the current will burn the switch instantly when the power is supplied if the load is not when the installed small screw for lightening the switch is loose or the additional
connected. position shifts.
3. No poor insulation Uoint with other circuits, poor earthing and terminal connection) in 2. To examine whether the wire has damage. The damage to wire will cause poor
wire is allowed to prevent the damage to switch caused by the current passing through insulation. If there is damage, the switch shall be changed or the wire shall be repaired.
the switch. 3. To examine whether the green light in the switch indicated by two colors is on when
4. II is no allowed to make a wiring with a parallel power line and high voltage line or use the piston stops at the set position. If the red light is on in this position, which means
one wiring pipe to prevent wrong action of the magnetic switch caused by interfere of that the position is not right and shall be rectified to make the switch shine in the set
control ci rcu ii. position.
5. Short circuit is not allowed in the load of the switch
6. Please notice that never make a wrong wiring
DC24V switch with indicator has polarity. Brown line or No. 1 terminal is"+", and blue
line or No. 2 terminal is"-".
G) Once they are connected reversely, the switch acts, but the LED will not be on. In
addition, once the current above stipulated number passes, the LED will be burned
and the switch can not act.
® However, the magnetic switch indicated by two colors will turn to normally opened
Sensor state once ii is reversely connected.
switch + Magnetic switch with no contact
For three-line switch, there is protection for circuit once the power is reversely connected
(that is the "+" and "-" of the power is mutually replaced). When "+" is connected with
blue line and "-" is connected with black line, the switch will be damaged.
ill-i:•
Connection method C. 3 wire solid state PNP type connection

1. General connection
When connecting 3 wire switches, it must
A. 2 wire reed switch type connection ,-----------, Brown
connect to DC power source. pay attention to +
1. General connection: ''' '
the wiring of black wire. Wrong connect will : 0
When connecting 2 wire switches, load must be '' .,

0
damage the switch. I Q)....,
connected in series with the sensor to prevent damaged. : c·5
Connect brown wire to the positive(+) and the
Connect the brown wire in series load with positive
blue to the negative(-). The black wire must !___ ~~~----- - 1
(+) and the blue wire to negative(-) of DC power source,
series load and to negative(-) only.
otherwise the LED will not light.
, , Brown
2. Series connection(And} i ---.-.--+'- - - - - a +
2. Series connection(And) When 3 wire solid state switches inseries(AND) i Black
When 2 wire switches in series(AND) use.the voltage use. Voltage drop will be added up. (Typical V i
drop will be added up.(Typical V drop about 2.5V drop about 1.5V per switch) : Blue
per switch) When series too many switches, excessive i 1.::..::r---1>1--,- - - ' h
When series too many switches, excessive voltage Power voltage drop will cause non-operation of r----------- 1 Brown Power
drop will cause non-operation of the load. the load. i
The quantity of switches in series due to the voltage The quantity of switches in series due to the i
of power source.
voltage of power source. !__ 1;;
__~_!:l> __-, ---'---'---4
__-__.i-_-
3. Parallel connection(OR)
When 2 wire switches in parallel(OR) use, the current
flow to the switch will be shared when switches all 3. Parallel connection(OR) :-----------; Brown +
in active.
When connection too many switches in parallel use, When 3 wire solid state switches in parallel (OR) i Black
possible concurrent operation will caues dim or off

use. Leakage current will be added up. i
LED due to lower current distribution.
When parallel too many switches in use, i
The quantity of switches in parallel due to the current
possibly cause wrong operation due to lower i 1::...:::1-1>1--,--+-'h
load current. ------------ Power
of load.
The quantity of switches in parallel due to the --....~+-......--1-_J
current of load.
B. 3 wire solid state NPN type connection

1. General connection
When connecting 3 wire switches, ii must Brown
connect to DC Power source. pay attention to '''
the wiring of black wire. wrong connect will ''
''
damage the switch. ''
Connect brown wire to the positive(+) and ''
''
the blue to the negative(-) . the black wire must '------------
series load and to positive(+) only.
Brown
''
2. Series connection(And) ''
When 3 wire solid switches in series ''
''
(AND) use. Voltage drop will be added up. ''
(Typical V drop about 1.5V per switch) '' Blue
When series too many switches, '

1_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1
Power
excessive voltage drop will cause
non-operation of the load.
The quantity of switches in series due to
the voltage of power source.
i,i
:
i B~:::n
Blue
,-----------, Brown
+
3. Parallel connection(OR)
When 3 wire solid state switches in I . ~__,'_ ______,
parallel (OR) use. Leakage current will be
added up.
When parallel too many switches in use, 1_ __________ _ 1
Sensor
Power
possibly cause wrong operation due to lower switch
load current.
The quantity of switches in parallel due to
the current of load. : ,·::
1_ __________ _ 1
The selection of sensor switch
DS1-B1/CS1-B1
••• •• •••
DS1-B2/CS1-B2
DS1-B3/CS1-B3
DS1-B4/CS1-B4
DS1-B5/CS1-B5
DS1-B6/CS1-B6
DS1-B7/CS1-B7
- ••
••
• • •• •
DS1-B8/CS1-B8
•• ••
DS1-F
CS1-F ••••••• ••••••
DS1-U
CS1-U •••••• ••••••• ••••••
••••••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
••••••••••
••••••••••
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •••••••
DS1-J
CS1-J •••••• •••••••••• •••
DS1-H
••• ••
••••••• •••••
••••••• •••••••••••• ••••••••
•••
••• •••••• ••••• ••••

••••
• •••••• •••••••••
•••••••••••••••
DS1-H
•••••••••••••••••••
Note: DS1 - D D is solid state output type and only adapt to DC 5-30V;CS1 - D D is reed switch type.
ilffl••
DS1-ASeries
Specification
,. I I I ..
Switch logic Transistor without contact, Normally opened type
Switch type Two lines tvoe NPN tvoe I PNP type
Operating voltage(V) 10-28V DC 5-30V DC
Max.Switching current(mA) 50 200
Switching rating(W) Max. 1.4 Max. 6
Current consumption 12(40)uA Max. @24V 15mA Max. @24V
Voltage drop 2.65V Max. @50mADC 0.5V Max. @200mADC
Cable Cl> 3.3,2C Black oil resistant PVC Cl> 3.3,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Leakage current 20(90)uA Max. @28V 0.01mA Max.
Sensitivity(Gauss) 25-700 60-75
Max. Frequency(Hz) 1000
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature ranqe('t) -10-70
Enclosure classification IP67(NEMA6)
Protection circuit Power reverse polarity, surqe suppression
Dimensions
I' 35 I i=--¥ 2000±20
~
7±1
1. 20±2 • I
Number of sensor switch
!DS1: Sensor switch ] C08: M8 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 quick ioint, lenqth of wire is 150mm
27.6
Specification of sensor switch 020: length of wire is 2m
030: lenqth of wire is 3m
Specification Product Series
050: length of wire is Sm
A: A type Use for SC series
100: length of wire is10m
Model of sensor switch

Blank: two-line /normall o ned
N: three-line NPN with no contact
current flows in I norrnall o ened
P: three-line PNP with no contact
current flows out I normall o ened
CD Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
type. The female joint plug has to be ordered additionally. Please refer to P480 for the specific data.
Mounting
Installation example Installation method
Body Sensor switch

Tiered~~
~
No additional accessories are
necessary for the sensor switch of
DS1-A (N, P)series. 11 can be directly
fixed onto the cylinder, which is
convenient and fast.
1. Loosen the connecting screw and

clamping screw and adjust the open
angle of the collet.
2. Push the button of sensor switch to
the bar and adjust it to the proper
position. Finally properly tighten the
clamping screw to fix.
Sensor
switch
ilta•
DS1-B1-B8 Series
Specification
,. IL-~: IL-~:i• IL-~:·-·--
Switch type Two lines type NPN type I PNP type
Max. Switching current(mA) 50 200
Voltage drop 2.65V Max. @50mA DC 0.5V Max. @200mA DC
Cable <1>4.0,2C Black oil resistant PVC <1>4.0,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature ranQe(°C) -10-70
Protection circuit Power reverse polarity, surQe suppression, output short circuit
Dimensions

IOS 1: Sensor switch I COB: MB quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 quick joint, lenQth of wire is 150mm
Specification Product Series 030: lenQth of wire is 3m
B1: 81 type Use for Sl32(40), JS132(40), SGC125 050: length of wire is Sm
B2: B2tvoe Use for Sl50(63), JSl50(63) 100: length of wire is10m
B3: B3type Use for Sl80, JSl80
Type\ ltem A B C D B4: B4type Use for SI 100, JSl100
DS1-B1 D 16.2 27.6 11 15.5 Model of sensor switch
B5: B5type Use for Sl125, JSl125, SGC250
DS1-B2D 18.2 29.7 14 15.7 Blank: two-line /normall o ened
B6: 86type UseforSl160
DS1-B30 21.9 31.7 16.6 15.5 N: three-line NPN with no contact
B7: 87type Use for Sl200 current flows in I norrnall o ened
DS1-B40 25.8 34.7 18 15.5
88: BB type Use for SGC160(200) P: three-line PNP with no contact
DS1-B5D 31.7 37.5 19 13
DS1-B60 39.4 44.5 26 13 current flows out I normall opened
DS1 - B7D 46.4 44.5 26 13 <I) Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
DS1 - B8D 25 38.6 15 15.5 type. The female joint plug has to be ordered additionally. Please refer to P480 for the specific data.
D Mounting

DS1-B (N, P) series. It can be directly
1. Loosen the clamping screw, snap

the sensor switch on the outer surface
of the cylinder, and adjust it to the
proper position. Tighten the clamping
screw and then tighten the anti-loose
screw cap to fix.
Sensor
switch
ilbtli
DS1-J Series
Specification
,. I I I
Switch type Two lines type NPN !voe I PNP tvoe
Voltage drop 2.65V Max. @SOmA DC O.SV Max. @200mA DC
Indicator Red LED
Shock(m/s'I 500
Vibration(m/s'I 90
Temperature ranqe('C) -10-70
Dimensions
LED Window
~ COS: M8 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm

C12: M12 quick joint, lenqth of wire is 150mm
lJEJ Specification of sensor switch

Product Series
SDA, TN, TWH , TWM,ACQ32-100
TWQ32-50, QCK32-63
020: length of wire is 2m
030: lenqth of wire is 3m

Blank: two-line /normall o ened
current flows cul I norrnall o ened
Cl Mounting

DS1-J (N, P}series. It can be directly
1. Loosen lhe clamping screw, slide

the inductive switch to the slot and
adjust it to the proper position.
Tighten the clamping screw and then
tighten the anti-loose screw cap to fix.
Sensor
switch
ilf*I
DS1-G Series
Specification
ItemI Type DS1-G DS1-GN DS1-GP
Switch type Two lines type NPN type I PNPtype
Cable CJ) 2.8,2C Black oil resistant PVC CJ) 3.3,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature range("C) -10-70
Protection circuit Power reverse polarity, surge suppression
Dimensions
~lffl
bd
<t
25.3
, j \] IDS1: Sensor switch J C08: M8 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm

C12: M12 quick 'oint, len th of wire is 150mm
LED Window Specification of sensor switch 020: len th of wire is 2m
MD, MK, TR, TC, ACQ, STW 050: len th of wire is Sm
G: G type TWH, TWM, TWQ, SDA20-100
QCK, HFZ10-40, HFY10-32
HFP10-32, RMT
Blank: two-line /norrnall o ened
current flows out I norrnall o ened
<D Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
Cl Mounting

DS1-G (N, P) series.It can be directly
fixed onto the groove alone the
cylinder, which is convenient and fast.
1. Loosen the clamping screw on

sensor switch, lead the sensor switch
to the additional slot and adjust it to
the proper position. Tighten the
Sensor
switch
*®'
DS1-E Series
Specification
ltem\Type DS1-E DS1-EN DS1-EP
Switch logic Transistor without contact, Nonmally opened type
Switch type Two lines type NPN tvoe I PNP tvoe
Operating voltage(V) 10-2SV DC 5-30V DC
Cable (J) 2.S,2C Black oil resistant PVC (J) 3.3,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Leakage current 20(90)uA Max. @2SV 0.01mA Max.
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Dimensions
6.2 ± 0.2
5±0.2
~
~ o i8
nt "!
C, 0
-H
IDS 1: Sensor switch J COS: MS quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
......
-H
C12: M12 quick ioint, length of wire is 150mm
Specification Product Series 050: length of wire is 5m
E: E ty e Use for SE.ACE series 100: length of wire is10m

Blank: two-line /normall o ned
current flows in I normall o ened
current flows out I nonmall o ened
G) Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
Mounting
Sensor switch
, , - Body
10,ran,uJOJ
groove
DS1-E (N, P)series. It can be directly
fixed onto the groove of the cylinder,
which is convenient and fast.
1. Adjust the clamping screw on

sensor switch . Then slide the sensor
switch to the additional slot and adjust
it to the proper position and tighten
the clamping screw to fix.
Sensor
switch
DS1-F Series
Specification
ItemI Type DS1-F DS1-FN DS1-FP
Switch type Two lines type NPN type I PNP type
Current consumption 12(40)uA Max. @24V 15mA Max. @24V I 17mA Max. @24V
Voltage drop 2.65V Max. @SOmA DC 1.0V Max. @200mA DC
Cable <P4.0,2C Black oil resistant PVC <P4.0,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Dimensions

!DS1 : Sensor switch I C08: M8 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 quick joint, lenoth of wire is 150mm
Specification of sensor switch
030: lenoth of wire is 3m
S ecification Product Series
F: Ft e SI, SU, SC, JSI , Ml, MASO 63
100: lengthofwire is10m
D The ordering code of mounting accessories
Bore s1ze\Series SC,SCL SU.SUL SI.SIL JSI Model of sensor switch
32 F-SC32H F-SU32H F-Sl32H F-Sl32H Blank: two-line /normall o ened
40 F-SC32H F-SU40H F-Sl40H F-Sl40H N: three-line NPN with no contact
50 F-SC32H F-SUSOH F-SISOH F-SISOH current flows in I norrnall o ened
63 F-SC63H F-SU63H F-S163H F-Sl63H P: three-line PNP with no contact
80 F-SC80H F-SU80H F-Sl80H F-Sl80H current flows out I norrnall o ened
100 F-SC80H F-SU100H F-Sl100H F-Sl100H <D Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screwthread
125 F-Sl125H F-Sl125H type. The female joint plug has to be ordered additionally. Please refer to P480 for the specific data.
160 F-Sl160H -
200 F-Sl200H
D Mounting
When the DS1-F, DS1-FN, DS1-FP

Mounting series sensor switch used with different
bracket
cylinders, different mounting accessories
must be ordered. the details are below.
1. When it used with Ml, MASO, 63 series
cylinders, you must order the band unit(the
ordering code is GXPAB-01), then depend
on the below outline 3, fixed the sensor
Outline 1: Used with SU SI JSI series
switch on the proper position of the
Sensor switch cylinder's body with the band unit.
Bod
2. When it used with SC series cylinders ,
you must order the Mounting bracket ( the
ordering code is below table ) , then
depend on the below outline 2, fixed the
sensor switch on the proper position of the
>-"-'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~---,
cylinder's body with the mounting bracket.
3. When it used with SU, SI, JSI cylinders,
you must order the mounting bracket( the
ordering code is below table), then depend
Sensor on the below outline 1, fixed the sensor
Sensor switch
switch switch on the proper position of the
Outline 3: Used with Ml, MA series
il®li
DS1-U Series
Specification
,- I I I .
Switch type Two lines !voe NPN !voe I PNP type
Current consumption 12(40)uA Max. @24V 15mA Max. @24V I 17mA Max. @24V
Cable CJ>4.0,2C Black oil resistant PVC CJ>4.0,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature ranqe(°C) -10-70
D Dimensions
D Ordering code
~
~[~ Number of sensor switch
I 26.o I~ IOS 1: Sensor switch I C08: MB quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 quick ioint, lenqth of wire is 150mm
Specification of sensor switch 030: lenoth of wire is 3m
S ecification Product Series 050: lenqth of wire is 5m
U: U t e SI, SU, SC, JSI, Ml, MA50 63 100: lengthofwireis10m
D The ordering code of mounting accessories
Bore s1ze\Series SC,SCL SU.SUL SI.SIL JSI Model of sensor switch
32 F-SC32H F-SU32H F-Sl32H F-Sl32H Blank: two-line /normall o ened
40 F-SC32H F-SU40H F-Sl40H F-Sl40H N: three-line NPN with no contact
50 F-SC32H F-SU50H F-Sl50H F-Sl50H current flows in I norrnall o ened
63 F-SC63H F-SU63H F-S163H F-S163H P: three-line PNP with no contact
80 F-SC80H F-SU80H F-Sl80H F-SIBOH current flows out I norrnall o ened
100 F-SCBOH F-SU100H F-Sl100H F-Sl100H (j) Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
125 F-Sl125H F-Sl125H type. The female joint plug has to be ordered additionally. Please refer to P480 for the specific data.
160 F-Sl160H
200 F-Sl200H
D Mounting
When the DS1-U, DS1-UN, DS1-UP

Mountin series sensor switch used with different
tr;'{-"""'==::::,;v,,,"\-,r bracket
cylinders, different mounting accessories
must be ordered. the details are below.
1. When it used with Ml, MA50, 63 series
1-'0=u=tli=ne~1
~:~U=se=d~w=it~h=SU
~ S=I =JS=l~se=r=
ies~ - - - - - - - - - - - , switch on the proper position of the
Sensor switch cylinder's body with the band unit.
Bod
2. When it used with SC series cylinders,
i-==~~~=~~=~- - - - - - - - - - - - , cylinder's body with the mounting bracket.
Sensor on the below outline 1, fixed the sensor Sensor
switch
switch on the proper position of the switch
Body
Outline 3: Used with Ml MA series
iii•
DS1-H, DS1-HL Series
Specification
,. IL--·-· IL-•ern•I IL--··""• .
Switch type Two lines tvoe NPN tvoe I PNPtype
Voltage drop 2.65V Max. @SOmA DC O.SV Max. @200mA DC
Cable <D 2.8,2C Black oil resistant PVC <D 3.3,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature ranQe(°C) -10-70
Protection circuit Power reverse polarity, surQe suppression

IOS 1: Sensor switch C08: M8 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 quick joint, lenoth of wire is 150mm
Specification of sensor switch 030: lenoth of wire is 3m
Product Series 050: lenQth of wire is Sm
100: lengthofwire is10m

Blank: two-line /normall o ened
current flows out I norrnall o ened
Cl Mounting

DS1-H (N, P)IDS1-HL(N,P) series. It
can be directly fixed along the groove
of the cylinder, which is convenient
and fast.

sensor switch, slide the sensor switch
into the installation slot and adjust it
to the proper position and tighten the
Sensor
switch
ilffl:I
DS1-M Series
Specification
ltem\Type DS1-M DS1-MN DS1-MP
Switch type Two lines type NPN tvoe I PNP type
Indicator Red LED
S06-S10 25-700 45-55
Sensitivity S12-S16 25-700 55-65
(Gauss) S20-S63 25-700 65-75
A20-A40 25-700 65-75
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s') 90
Dimensions
2000±20 Protection circuit Power reverse polarity, surge suppression
L~
25±2 1
8.8
t
0
Sensin point
I 24.5 I
L ,....-,---,r;
6.9 [ 0 1µ:::::::::ic:::~== Number of sensor switch
t IDS 1: Sensor switch I Cylinder barrel material Bore size
20: Cl>20mm
Specification of sensor switch 25: Cl>25mm
Aluminum alloy
Specification Product Series 32: Cl>32mm
M: M type PB, MA, MAL, Ml, MF, MBL 40: Cl>40mm
06: Cl>6mm
08: Cl>Smm
10: Cl>10mm
Blank: two~ine /normally opened
12: Cl>12mm
N: three-line NPN with no contact 16: Cl>16mm
current flows in I nonmall o ened
Stainless steel 20: Cl>20mm
current flows out I normall o ned 25: Cl>25mm
32: Cl>32mm
CD Connecting way 40: Cl>40mm
uick ·oint, length of wire is 150mm 50: Cl>50mm
C12: M12 uick ·oint, len th of wire is 150mm 63: Cl>63mm
020: len of wire is 2m
Cylinder Barrel material
050: length of wire is 5m S: Stainless steel
100: length of wire is10m A: Aluminum alloy
Mounting
No additional accessories are necessary for

the sensor switch ofDS1-M, DS1-MN, DS1 -
MP series. It can be directly fixed onto the
1. Strap band round the cylinder barrel.

Snap the clamping screw into button orifice
and adjust it to the proper position. Properly
tig hten the clamping screw to fix.
Sensor
switch
••
DS1-T Series
Specification
ltem\Type DS1-T DS1-TN DS1-TP
Switch type Two lines tvoe NPN tvoe I PNP type
Voltage drop 2.65V Max. @SOmA DC 0.5V Max. @200mA DC
Cable <P 3.3,2C Black oil resistant PVC <P 3.3,3C Black oil resistant PVC
Indicator Red LED
Shock(m/s') 500
Vibration(m/s2) 90
Protection circuit Power reverse polarity, surQe suppression
Dimensions
2000±20
u 6.9
--1
2s+2 I 8.8
t
0
point
!DS1: Sensor switch
I 24.s I
L ~-~.-.
s.9 1o 1~c::~....... '5:=:
t
T:Ttype TWG Cylinder Barrel material
!A: Aluminum alloy!

Blank: two-line /normall o ened Connecting way CD
N: three~ine NPN with no contact COS: MB quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
(current flows in I normall o ened C12: M12 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
P: three-line PNP with no contact 020: length of wire is 2m
current flows out I nonmall o ened 030: length of wire is 3m
Mounting
No additional accessories are necessary

for the sensor switch ofDS1-T. DS1-TN,
DS1-TP series. It can be directly fixed onto
the cylinder, which is convenient and fast.

Snap the clamping screw into button orifice
and adjust ii to the proper position .
Properly tighten the clamping screw to fix.
Sensor
switch
CS1-ASeries
Specification
ltem\Type CS1-A CS1-AX
Switch logic STSP Normally opened !voe
Switch type Reed switch with contact
Operating voltage(V) 5-240V AC/DC
Max. Switching current(mA) 100
Switching rating(W) Max. 10
Current consumption No
Voltage drop 2.5V Max. @100mADC
Cable C])3.3,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Indicator Red LED I No
Leakage current No
Sensitivity(Gauss) 60-75
Shock(m/s') 300
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature ranQe("C) CD -10-70
Protection circuit No
(])Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(- 40- -25"C) and
explosion-proof sensor switch.
~ 2000±20
7±1

ICS 1: Sensor switch
A: A type Use for SC series 050: length of wire is 5m
CS1-A 12.5
CS1-AX 4.5 Model of sensor switch
Blank: two-line magnetic spring pipe
with contact/normally opened
X: two-line magnetic spring pipe with contact,
without indicator light/normally opened
Mounting
Body Sensor switch

Tie rod ~~r-..-=-----
~
CS1-A, CS1-AX series. It can be
directly fixed onto the cylinder, which
is convenient and fast.
1. Loosen the connecting screw and

clamping screw and adjust the open
angle of the collet.
2. Push the button of sensor switch to
the bar and adjust it to the proper
position. Finally properly tighten the
Sensor
switch
ilfl•
CS1-B1-B8 Series
Specification
,. :1• :
Switch logic STSP Normally opened type
Cable Cll4.0,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
Shock(m/s') 300
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature ranoe(°C) G) -10-70
Dimensions Protection circuit No
(])Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(- 40- -25"C) and
rm
B

!CS1: Sensor switch COB: MB quick ioint, lenoth of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
030: lenoth of wire is 3m
Use for SU32-50, Sl32(40), 050: length of wire is 5m
Type\ltem A B C D B1: B1 type 100: length of wire is10m
JSl32(40), SGC125
CS1-B1 D 16.2 27.6 11 15.5 B2: B2 type Use for SU63, Sl50(63). JSl50(63)
CS1-B2D 18.2 29.7 14 15.7 B3: B3type Use for SU80, Sl80, JSl80
CS1-B30 21.9 31.7 16.6 15.5 Model of sensor switch
B4: B4type Use for SU100, Sl 100, JSl100
CS1-B40 25.8 34.7 18 15.5 Blank: two-line magnetic spring pipe
B5: B5type Use for Sl125, JSl125, SGC250
CS1-B5D 31.7 37.5 19 13 with contact/normally opened
B6: B6type Use for Sl160
CS1-B60 39.4 44.5 26 13 X: two-line magnetic spring pipe with contact,
CS1 - B7D 46.4 44.5 26 13 B7: B7 type Use for Sl200
CS1 - B8D 25 38.6 15 15.5 B8: B8type Use for SGC160(200)
G) Nole: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
Mounting
Lock nut
\Fastening screw No additional accessories are

CS1-B0, CS1-B0Xseries. ltcan be
1. Loosen the clamping screw, snap

the sensor switch on the outer surface
of the cylinder, and adjust it to the
proper position. Tighten the clamping
screw and then tighten the lock nut to
fix.
Sensor
switch
itfili
CS1-J Series
Specification
,.
Voltage drop 2.SV Max. @100mADC
Cable ClJ 3.3,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
Shock(m/s'I 300
Vibration(m/s'I 90
Temperature range('C) G) -10-70
<I)Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(- 40--25"C) and
LED Window
~ Number of sensor switch
L£ !CS1: Sensor switch

I C08: M8 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
SDA/TN/TWH/TWM/ACQ32-100 050: length of wire is Sm
TWQ32-50/QCK32- 63 100: length of wire is10m

Blank: two~ine magnetic spring pipe
with contact/normally opened
X: two~ine magnetic spring pipe with contact,
<I) Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
Mounting

CS1-J, CS1-JX series. It can be
1. Loosen the clamping screw, slide

the inductive switch to the slot and
adjust it to the proper position.
Tighten the clamping screw to fix.
Sensor
switch
ilti•
CS1-G Series
Specification
,.
Switch logic STSP Normally opened tvoe
Cable <D 2.8,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
Shock(m/s') 300
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature range(°C) G) -10-70
(DNote: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(- 40- -25"C) and
"' .
"":~
25.3 .4

iOOi ,
LED Window
i !CS1 : Sensor switch C08: M8 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 ouick ioint, lenoth of wire is 150mm
Specification Product Series 050: length of wire is Sm
MD, MK, TR, TC, ACQ, STW 100: length of wire is1 Om
G: G type TWH, TWM, TWQ, SDA20-100
QCK, HFZ10-40, HFY10-32
HFP10-32, RMT Model of sensor switch
with contacUnonnally opened
without indicator lighVnormally opened
Cl Mounting

CS1-G, CS1-GX series.It can be
directly fixed onto the groove of the
1. Loosen the clamping screw on

sensor switch, lead the sensor switch
to the additional slot and adjust it to
the proper position . Tighten the
Sensor
switch
ea,
CS1-E Series
Specification
ltem\Type CS1-E CS1-EX
Cable Cll 2.8,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
Shock(m/s') 300
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature range("C) CD -10-70
Cl)Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(-40--25"C) and
6.2 ± 0.2 explosion-proof sensor switch.
5± 0.2
N
ci ci
-H
....-H
..; Number of sensor switch
ICS 1: Sensor switch COS: MB quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
C12: M12 quickjoinl length of wire is 150mm
Specification Product Series 030: length of wire is 3m
E: E type Use for SE.ACE series 050: length of wire is 5m
with contacVnorrnally opened
Mounting
Sensor switch
'"~O'
groove ~
CS1-E, CS1-EX series. It can be
directly fixed onto the groove of the

sensor switch slide the sensor switch
into the installation slot and adjust it
to the proper position and tighten the
Sensor
switch
CS1-F Series
Specification
,-
Switch logic STSP Normally opened tvoe
Voltage drop 2.5VMax.@100mADC
Cable <D4.0,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
Shock(m/s') 300
Vibration(m/s') 90
Temperature ranQe(°C) G) -10-70
Dimensions
(])Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(- 40--25"C) and

I
CS 1: Sensor switch C08: M8 quick joint, lenQth of wire is 150mm
The ordering code of mounting accessories F: F type SI, SU, SC, JSI/MI/MA50(63)
Bore s1ze\Series SC,SCL SU.SUL Sl,SIL JSI
32 F-SC32H F-SU32H F-Sl32H F-Sl32H
50 F-SC32H F-SUSOH F-SISOH F-SISOH Blank: two-line magnetic spring pipe
with contact/nomnally opened
80 F-SC80H F-SU80H F-Sl80H F-Sl80H X: two-line magnetic spring pipe with contact,
100 F-SC80H F-SU100H F-Sl100H F-Sl100H without indicator light/normally opened
125 F-Sl125H F-Sl125H (j) Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
160 F-Sl160H type. The female joint plug has to be ordered additionally. Please refer to P480 for the specific data.
200 F-Sl200H
Cl Mounting
When the CS1-F, CS 1-FX series sensor

switch used with different cylinders,
different mounting accessories must be
ordered. the details are below.
cylinder's body with the band unit.
2. When it used with SC series cylinders,
>-"-'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~---,
Sensor Sensor on the below outline 1, fixed the sensor
switch switch
Outline 3: Used with Ml, MA series
Miff.Ii
CS1-U Series
Specification
,-
Operating voltage(V) 5- 240V AC/DC
Cable CD4.0,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
Shock(m/s'I 300
Vibration(m/s'I 90
Temperature ranQe('C) G) -10-70
D Dimensions <I)Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(- 40--25"C) and
A
~[~ B
I Ib_ 26.0 WJJ Number of sensor switch
!CS1: Sensor switch COS: MS quick joint, length of wire is 150mm
020: lenQth of wire is 2m
D The ordering code of mounting accessories U: U type SI/SU/SC/JSI/MI/MA50 63)
Bore size\Series SC,SCL SU,SUL Sl,SIL JSI
32 F-SC32H F-SU32H F-Sl32H F-Sl32H Model of sensor switch
40 F-SC32H F-SU40H F-Sl40H F-Sl40H Blank: two-line magnetic spring pipe
50 F-SC32H F-SU50H F-SISOH F-Sl50H with contact/normally opened
80 F-SC80H F-SU80H F-Sl80H F-Sl80H without indicator light/normally opened
125 F-Sl125H F-Sl125H <I) Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
160 F-Sl160H - type. The female joint plug has to be ordered additionally. Please refer to P480 for the specific data.
200 F-Sl200H
D Mounting
Sensor switch When the CS1-U, CS1-UX series sensor

Mounting switch used with different cylinders,
bra~~ . . .
different mounting accessories must be
ordered. tihe details are below.
Sensor switch cylinde~s body with the band unit.
Bod
2. When it used witih SC series cylinders ,
you must order tihe Mounting bracket ( the
ordering code is below table J , then
depend on tihe below outline 2, fixed the
sensor switch on the proper position of the,
>-"-'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-<
cylinder's body witih the mounting bracket.
3. When it used witih SU, SI, JSI cylinders,
Sensor on the below outline 1, fixed the sensor
Sensor
switch switch
cylinde~s body with the mounting bracket.
Outline 3: Used with Ml MA series
ilfi•
CS1-M Series
Specification
,.
Voltage drop 2.5V Max. @100mA DC
Cable <D3.3,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
SO&-S10 45-55
S12-S16 55-65
Sensitivity(Gauss)
S20-S63 65-75
A20-A40 65-75
Shock(m/s') 300
Vibration(m/s') 90
D Dimensions
Temperature range(°C) CD -10-70
2000±20 Enclosure classification IP67(NEMA6)
L~ Protection circuit No
2s+2 1
8.8
t
0 G)Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(-40- -25"C) and
oint
I 24.s I
L,_--....
6.9 [ 0 l~c::=~== Number of sensor switch
t
!CS1 : Sensor switch Cylinder barrel material Bore size
20: <D20mm
Specification of sensor switch 25: <D25mm
Aluminum alloy
Specification Product Series 32: <D32mm
M: M type PB, MA, MAL, Ml, MF, MBL 40: <D40mm
06: <D6mm
Model of sensor switch 08: <D8mm
Blank: two-line magnetic spring pipe 10: <D10mm
with contact/normally opened 12: <D12mm
X: two~ine magnetic spring pipe with contact, 16: <D16mm
without indicator light/normally opened Stainless steel 20: <D20mm
25: <D25mm
CD Connecting way 32: <D32mm
COB: MB quick joint, length of wire is 150mm 40: <D40mm
C12: M12 quick joint, length of wire is 150mm 50: <D50mm
020: length of wire is 2m 63: <D63mm
050: length of wire is 5m Cylinder Barrel material
100: length of wire is1 Om S: Stainless steel
A: Aluminum alloy
Mounting
No additional accessories are necessary for the

sensor switch of CS1-M, CS1-MX series. It can
Body be directly fixed onto the cylinder, which is
1. Strap band round the cylinder barrel. Snap the

Fastenin clamping screw into button orifice and adjust it to
screw
the proper position. Properly tighten the
Sensor
switch
CS1-T Series
Specification
,.
Operating voltage(V) 5- 240V AC/DC
Cable <ll 3.3,2C Gray oil resistant PVC (Flame retarded)
Leakage current No
Shock(m/s'I 300
Vibration(m/s'I 90
Temperature ranQe('C) G) -10-70
<I)Note: Please contact us for high remperature resistant(125"C),low remperature resistant(- 40--25"C) and
2000±20 explosion-proof sensor switch.
L~
2s±2 1
8.8
r
0
Sensing point
24.s
L,...I ___ ,....I Number of sensor switch
!CS1: Sensor switch
6.9 [ 0 jp:.:::::.:ic::==i,,,,,===
I
S ecification Product Series Cylinder Barrel material
T: Ttype TWG IA: Aluminum alloy!
Connecting way G)
Model of sensor switch COB: MB quick ·oint, len th of wire is 150mm
Blank: two-line magnetic spring pipe C12: M12 quick ·oint, len th of wire is 150mm
with contact/normally opened 020: length of wire is 2m
X: two-line magnetic spring pipe with contact, 030: length of wire is 3m
without indicator lighVnormally opened 050: length of wire is 5m
<I) Note: The quick joint that is attached at the end of wire is three-needle-male joint-linear-rotary screw thread
Mounting
No additional accessories are necessary

for the sensor switch of CS1-T, CS1-TX
series. It can be directly fixed onto the

Snap the clamping screw into button
screw
orifice and adjust it to the proper position.
Properly tighten the clamping screw to fix.
Sensor
switch
iltDi
MB & M12 Quick joint cables
Male Straight Connector D Female Connector

Three Pin-male joint-linear-rotary thread
Joint type
M83F: MB x 1.0 three need-female joint
linear
M83FL: MB x 1.0three need-female joint
ri htan le Wire length
M123F: M12 x 1.0three need-female joint 02: Wire len th is 2 m
Note: There is no need to order it individually. What only needs to do is to linear 03: Wire len th is 3 m
choose the sensor switch with quick joint. M123FL: M12 x 1.0three need-female joint 05: Wire len th is 5 m
10: Wire len th is 10 m
Three Pin-male joint-linear-rotary thread
Cable OD Cable color
2.9: OD 2.9mm B: Black (three core)
3.3: OD 3.3mm G: Grey (two core)
4.0: OD 4.0mm
4.5: OD 4.5mm
5.2: OD 5.2mm
Note: There is no need to order it individually. What only needs to do is to

choose the sensor switch with quick joint. MB3F(Three Pin-female joint-linear)
27.30
35.00
MB3FL(three Pin-female joint-90' right angle)
28.50
Two needle-male joint Three needle-male joint
~ : o wiring(NC) ~:lack(OUT)
1 1
Brown(+)~Blue(-) B r o w n ( + ) ~ Blue(-)
d
M123F(Three Pin-female joint-linear)
~ 3
M123FL(Three Pin-female joint-90' right angle)
Sensor
switch
Summary of acccessories
The accessories is necessary for intact air system.
AirTAC has many types of accessories for your
choice:
1. Shock absorber
2. Polyurethane re-coil hosepart
3. Fitting, Silencer, Speed Controller
Shock absorber
ACA, ACJ Series ...... .. ...... . ........... ....... ........ · 482
Polyurethane re-coil hosepart

PU Tube Series .... .......... ... ..... ... ...... ..... ... ..... 486
Fitting, Silencer, Speed Controller

One-Touch fittings : PC, POC Series .... ........ 489
One- Touch fittings : threaded type ...... .. .. .. ........... 490

One- Touch fittings: tube_tube type ......... .... ........ 497
Metal one-Touch fittings .. .. .. ...... .. ...... .... 501
Silencers ... .. .. . .. ........... .. ... .. ..... ... .. ... ... 503
Speed controllers .... .. ..... .... ...... .. ........... ... .. ... 505
Finger valve .. ...... ... .. ... ...... .... ..... ... ... ...... ....... 508
Pilot no-return valve .. ... .. .......... ..... .. .......... .... . 509
Accessorie
il!:1•
Shock absorber AlrTAC
ACA, ACJ Series
D Specification
ACA0806 6 3 5400 5 20 25 4 2 12
ACA1007 7 6 14500 10 40 50 4 2 26
ACA1210 10 10 30000 18 60 80 4 2 40
ACA1215 15 12 35000 20 75 100 4 2 48
ACA1412 12 18 36000 30 110 150 4 70
ACA1416 16 22 39000 40 140 180 4 78
ACA1420 20 25 45000 45 155 200 4 85
ACA2020 20 60 50000 240 660 960 4 175
ACA2025 25 65 54000 260 720 1040 4 2 185
ACA2030 30 70 58000 280 780 1120 4 2 210
ACA2040 40 80 65000 320 890 1280 4 2 225
ACA2525 25 100 75000 400 1100 1600 4 290
D Product feature
ACA2550 50 150 85000 600 1650 2400 4 370
1. Excellent and stable deceleration and shock absorbing; if impacted by load, the ACA2725 25 140 85000 560 1550 2240 4 372
resistance will automatically adjust. ACA2750 50 250 95000 1000 2780 4000 4 2 475
2. Outer body of integrated structure is treated by QPQ, which has optimum ACA3325 25 180 100000 720 2000 2880 4 2 596
ACA3350 50 300 120000 1200 3300 4800 4 2 750
corrosion and wear resistance and can withstand high pressure; it is easy to
ACA3625 25 220 135000 880 2400 3500 4 2 702
install and adjust for all threaded outer body which has good heat dissipation. ACA3650 50 350 150000 1400 2500 5600 4 2 889
3. With high hardness stainless steel shaft, the shock absorber has better impact
and corrosion resistance, and it can work under adverse conditions. Model S(trok)e Mbax.bende(Nrgy)
mm a sor e m
a~!;b~~~~~~r
(Nm/h)
Max. effective mass{kg) Max. impact speed{m/s)
Weight
(g)
4. Special oiling process leads to stable shock absorbing.
5. Compact structure and high max. absorbed energy. rmml'lilmll • lll'!mlllll I
6. We use Special lubricants as buffer medium, which adapts to wide temperature 10 4 43
range and ensures stable cushioning. ACJ1412 12 20 36000 160 4 75
ACJ2020 20 60 50000 960 4 189
ACJ2525 25 100 75000 1600 4 308
ACJ2550 50 150 85000 2400 4 395
ACJ2725 25 140 85000 2240 4 396
ACJ2750 50 250 95000 4000 4 510
ACJ3325 25 180 100000 2880 4 540
ACJ3350 50 300 110000 4800 4 800
ACJ3625 25 220 125000 2500 4 750
ACJ3650 50 350 130000 5600 4 950
ACJ4225 25 350 150000 5600 4 1150
ACJ4250 50 700 180000 11200 4 1420
ACJ4275 75 1050 210000 16800 4 1720
Prevention crash cap

ACA: Self-compensation type shock absorber Body male thread Prevention crash cap
ACJ : Adjustable type shock absorber Blank: Plastic cap
M20 and above F: Iron cap
Body male thread N: No cap
08: MB Blank: Plastic cap
10: M10 M20 and below
N: No cap
12: M12
14: M14
20: M20 Impact speed
25: M25 Model Impact speed
27: M27 1: Hioh soeed (Lioht load)
33: M33 ACA 2: Middle speed{Middle load)
3: Low speed{Heavy load)
36: M36
ACJ Not this code
Stroke
I The pecification for detail I
Shoe!
absorber
ACA, ACJ Series
D Max. absorbed energy and speed curve D Inner structure and material of major parts
21
.....
1 Bump cap PA66(M8)\TPU(M10-M 14)\TPU or S45C(M20-M42)
2 Bump cap(core) No(M8)\Cutting steel(Others)
3 0-ring NBR
Speed V(m/s) 4 Piston rod Stainless steel(M8- M27)\S45C (M33-M42)
5 Clip No(M8- M10)\Spring steel(M12-M42)
Adapt model:ACA2020-1-ACA3650-1
6 Front cover Brass {M8)\ Cuttina steel (M10l\Aluminum{M12-M42l
7 Front cover aasket No IM8\\ TPU(M10-M42\
8 Washer Spring steel
9 Front cover gasket NBR
10 0 -ring NBR
11 Correcting body Brass
12 Nut Ss41
13 Accumulator Foamex
14 Bodv Cuttina steel
15 Piston Brass
16 Serina serat Serina steel
17 Busher Copper(M8- M12)\Aluminum(M20-M27)
18 Inlet body Cutting steel (MB-M14)\Seamless steel tuble(M20-M42)
19 Spring SWPB
20 Steel ball GCr15
0 0.2 0.3 1 2 21 Setscrew Low allov steel
Speed V(m/s) Speed V(m/s)
Adapt model:ACA0806-2 - ACA1420-2 Adapt model:ACA2020-2-ACA3650-2
"'" PA66(M8)\TPU(M10-M14)\TPU or S45C(M20-M42)

1 Bump cap
2 Bump cap(core) No(M8)\Cutting steel(Others)
3 0-ring NBR
4 Piston rod Stainless steel (M8- M27)\S45C (M33-M42)
5 Clip No(MB- M1 O)\Spring steel(M12-M42)
6 Front cover Brass (MB)\ Cutting steel (M 1O)\Aluminum(M12-M42)
Speed V(m/s) Speed V(m/s)
7 Front cover gasket No (M8)\ TPU(M 1O-M42)
Adapt model:ACA0806-3- ACA1420-3 Adapt model: :ACA2020-3- ACA3650-3
8 Front cover gasket NBR
Nole:
9 0-ring NBR
1. The interval under the red line shows the energy range absorbed by corresponding shock
absorber. 10 Correcting body Brass
2. It is better to use 20%-80% of the Max. absorbed energy. 11 Nut SS41
12 Body Cutting steel
13 Accumulator Foamex
D Buffer curve 14 Piston Brass
15 Spring serat Spring steel
. . . . .•.T. ,".,.
8.0 80.0 16 Busher Copper(MB-M 12)\Aluminum(M20-M27)
z 17 Inlet body Cutting steel (MB-M14)\Seamless steel tuble(M20-M42)
~ 6.0 60.0 18 Spring SWPB
~ 19 Ball GCr15
>-
~ 4.0 40.0 e> 20 0-ring NBR
a, a,
e C:
w 21 Setscrew Low alloy steel
~ 2.0 20.0 22 Setscrew Low alloy steel
23 Back cover Brass
0.0 0.0 24 Screw Low alloy steel
0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0
Displacement ( mm ) 25 Knob Aluminum alloy
Note: As the chart shows, energy is absorbed by a lower reaction force at the beginning of
the stroke, then by a smooth linear deceleration. It decelerates smoothly at last.
Sh~k
absorber
ACA, ACJ Series
Dimensions Cl Accessories
Ji,1!f.il -- How to set stop coller
e[ffl- - ,__ 1-J-

-- ,__
- ,__ --- . 1-1- ---------- -----------
I-~
C9 F ._ ,._, J(Cross flat)

e- E
B D
Bump cap
C
11•nl • • : I
ACA0806 M8x1.0 6 45 31 5 4 3 6.5 6 11
ACA1007 M10x1.0 7 55 40 5 4 3 8.5 7.5 14 Impact direction
ACA1210 M12•1.0 10 62 46 5 4 3 10 7.5 17
ACA1215 M12•1 .0 15 78 57 5 4 3 10 7.5 17
ACA1412 M14•1 .5 12 80.5 62.5 5 6 4 12 12 19
ACA1416 M14x1.5 16 92.5 70.5 5 6 4 12 12 19
T1
ACA1420 M14x1.5 20 103 77 5 6 4 12 12 19
ACA2020 M20•1 .5 20 112.5 84.5 7 6 6 18 15 26 F-ACAOS LM
ACA2025
ACA2030
ACA2040
ACA2525
M20x1 .5
M20x1 .5
M20x1 .5
M25x1 .5
25
30
40
25
122.5
142
167.5
123
89.5
104
119.5
89
7
7
7
8
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
18
18
18
23
15
15
15
16
26
26
26
32
Accessory I TAccessories type
LM: Stop collar
ACA2550 M25•1 .5 50 183 124 8 6 6 23 16 32 FA: Flan e
ACA2725 M27•1 .5 25 127 93 8 6 8 24.5 17 36 Model Female thread size
ACA2750 M27x1 .5 50 192 133 8 6 8 24.5 17 36 08: MB
- --
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10: M10
ffl ~1-~~OJ g -
_,_
-
-
I--
,__
f--
,__
- - -- f-- <I
12: M12
14: M14
20: M20
25: M25
27: M27
I B F f-•\. J(Cross flat) E 33: M33
Plastic bump cap D
36: M36
...
C 42: M42
: I
ACA3325 M33x1 .5 25 148 81.5 8.5 10 10 27.8 15 41 25

ACA3350 M33X1 .5 50 213 121.5 8.5 10 10 27.8 15 41 25
ACA3625 M36•1 .5 25 148 81.5 8.5 10 10 27.8 15 46 25
M8• 1.0 11 14
ACA3650 M36x1 .5 50 213 121.5 8.5 10 10 27 .8 15 46 25
M10•1 .0 14 16
fJ!!I M12•1.0 17 20
--
~ t
- -
,__
1-1-
- - - - - -
<
- 1-1-
C9
e- Fw, J(Cross fiat) L M14•1.5 19 27 18
B ~-'--- D F-ACA20LM M20x1 .5 26 35 25
Bump cap 0
C e F-ACA25LM M25•1 .5 32 45 31
l\fJltt· : I
F-ACA27LM M27•1 .5 36 50 35
F-ACA33LM M33x1 .5 41 80 40
ACJ1007 M10x1.0 7 66 45 11 4 3 8.5 7.5 14
C F-ACA36LM M36x1.5 46 80 45
ACJ1210 M12 • 1.0 10 73 51 11 4 3 10 7.5 17
ACJ1412 M14X1.5 12 91 66.5 11.5 6 4 12 12 19
ACJ2020 M20x1 .5 20 124.5 90 13.5 6 6 18 15 26 F-ACA36FA F-ACA42FA
ACJ2525 M25x1 .5 25 132.5 92 14.5 6 6 23 16 32
ACJ2550 M25x1 .5 50 192.5 127 14.5 6 6 23 16 32
ACJ2725 M27•1 .5 25 137 96.5 14.5 6 8 24.5 17 36
ACJ2750 M27x1.5 50 202 136.5 14.5 6 8 24.5 17 36
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- --
~[-~~m ,__ ,_
ffi
Plastic bump cap
I
---o·- -
e
B
~~
,__ ,__
,__
F
~
L..:, ,
C
~ ..
J(Cross flat)
D
- - - lel-E
E
-
- Model
F-ACAOBLM
F-ACA10LM
Compatible absorber
ACA0806
ACA 1007, ACJ 1007
F-ACA12LM ACA1210, ACA1215,ACJ1210
IITlltl• : I F-ACA14LM ACA 1412, ACA 1416,ACA 1420,ACJ141 2
ACJ3325 M33x1 .5 25 156 82 16 10 10 27.8 15 41 25 F-ACA20LM ACA2020, ACA2025, ACA2030, ACA2040, ACJ2020
ACJ3350 M33•1 .5 50 221 122 16 10 10 27.8 15 41 25 F-ACA25LM ACA2525, ACA2550 , ACJ2525, ACJ2550
ACJ3625 M36•1 .5 25 156 82 16 10 10 27.8 15 46 25 F-ACA27LM ACA2725, ACA2750, ACJ2725, ACJ2750
'
ACJ3650 M36X1.5 50 221 122 16 10 10 27.8 15 46 25 F-ACA33LM ACA3325, ACA3350 , ACJ3325, ACJ3350
ACJ4225 M42•1 .5 25 161.5 85.5 16 12 12 34 .8 15 50 25 F-ACA36LM ACA3625, ACA3650, ACJ3625, ACJ3650
ACJ4250 M42x1.5 50 226.5 125.5 16 12 12 34.8 15 50 25 F-ACA36FA ACA3625, ACA3650, ACJ3625, ACJ3650
Shock ACJ4275 M42x1 .5 75 291.5 165.5 16 12 12 34.8 15 50 25 F-ACA42FA ACJ4225, ACJ4250, ACJ4275
absorber
ii!:!•
ACA, ACJ Series
How to select Cl Calculation of energy under load state
- ...
No-load state
~
Horizontal impact
CD Horizontal impact ® Horizontal impact with cylinder thrust
~
-
F ~
B ...
Load state
--- Impact weight (kg): m Impact weight (kg): m
~ Impact speed (m/s): V Impact speed (m/s): V
Kinetic energy (J(N.m): E1=mxv' Kinetic energy (J(N.m): E1=mxv'

2 2
.. .
Theoretical energy parameter table for cylinders under no-load state
6
I . I
0.102 0.119 0.170 0.203 0.254 0.271 0.339 0.424 0.509 0.678
I
"
Unit: J ( N.m)
I
0.848 1.27
Propelling energy(J(N.m):
Gross energy (J(N.m):
E2=0
E=E1+E2
Propelling energy(J(N.m) :
Gross energy (J(N .m):
E2=F x L
E=E1+E2
8 0.181 0.211 0.301 0.362 0.452 0.482 0.60' 0.754 0.904 1.21 1.51 2.26
10 0.283 0.330 0.471 0.565 0.707 0.754 0.942 1.18 1.413 1.88 2.36 3.53
12 0.407 0.475 0.678 0.814 1.017 1.085 1.36 1.70 2.035 2.71 3.. 39 5.09
CD Free fall ® Push-down by cylinder
16 0.723 0.844 1.21 1.45 1.809 1.929 2.41 3.01 3.617 4.82 6.03 9.04
IF
20 1.13 1.32 1.88 2.26 2.826 3.014 3.77 4.71 5.652 7.54 9.42 14.13
25 1.77 2.06 2.94 3.53 4.416 4.710 5.89 7.36 8.831 11.8 14.7 22.1
Bore
size 32 2.89 3.38 4.82 5.79 7.235 7.717 9.65 12.1 14.47 19.3 24.1 36.2
(mm) 40 4.52 5.28 7.54 9.04 11.3 12.06 15.1 18.8 22.6 30.1 37.7 56.5
50 7.07 8.24 11.8 14.1 17.7 18.84 23.6 29.4 35.33 47.1 58.9 88.3
63 11.2 13.1 18.7 22.4 28.0 29.91 37.4 46.7 56.08 74.8 93.5 140.2
80 18.1 21.1 30.1 36.2 45.2 48.23 60.3 75.4 90.43 120.6 150.7 226.1
100 28.3 33.0 47.1 56.5 70.7 75.36 94.2 117.8 141.3 188.4 235.5 353.3
125 44.2 51.5 73.6 88.3 110.4 117.8 147.2 184.0 220.8 204.4 368.0 552.0 Impact weight (kg): m Impact weight (kg): m
160 72.3 84.4 120.6 144.7 180.9 192.9 241.2 301.4 361.7 482.3 602.9 904.3
Impact speed (m/s): V Impact speed (m/s): V
200 113.0 131 .9 188.4 226.1 282.6 301.4 376.E471.0 565.2 753.6 942.0 1413.0
250 176.6 206.1 294.4 353.3 441.6 471.0 588.5 735.9 883.1 1177.5 1471.9 2207.8 Kinetic energy (J(N.m): E1=m x gx (J(N. m): E1=m x v'
Kinetic energy
320 289.4 337.6 482.3 578.8 723.5 771.7 964.6 1205.8 1446.9 1929.2 2411 .5 3617.3 2
Propelling energy(J(N.m): E2=mxgx L Propelling energy(J(N.m): E2=(mg+F) x L
For example:
When the pressure is 0.6MPa, bore size of cp40 under no-load state plus shock stroke of 12mm can Gross energy (JN.m): E=E1 +E2 Grossenergy (J(N.m) : E=E1+E2
produce energy of 9.04 N.m. Refer to the specification table, you will find ACA1412 fits.
Note: Cylinders under full-load state can produce as twice as the energy shown above.
Installation and Operation CD Rocker ® Rotation

1. The scale range of adjustable shock absorbers is Oto 9 (8). Factory set is at 6 (4) position.
0 means the softest, while 9 means the hardest;
2. Correct selection of shock absorbers can ensure a smooth deceleration and good shock-
absorbing properties;
3. If there exists rebounding at the beginning of the stroke, it shows the effective weight is too
high. In this case, self-compensation type shall be replaced by high speed type (-1 ), while
adjustable type shall be adjusted to softer, that is closer to O;
4. If there exists rebounding at the end of the stroke, it shows the effective weight is too low.
Impact weight (kg): m Impact weight (kg): m
In this case, self-compensation type shall be replaced by low speed type (-3), while adjustable
m":'~.
type shall be adjusted to harder, that is closer to 9; Impact speed (m/s): v=R x w Impact speed (m/s): v=Rx w
5. In the work process, lateral load should be avoided as possible as one can. Eccentric angle
Kinetic energy (J(N.m): E1=1 x w' Kinetic energy (J(N .m):E1=1 x w'
2 2
Shookabeo••••h"'"'~
.~ ---\e 2 Propelling energy(J(N.m): E2= T x L Propelling energy(J(N.m) : E2= Tx L
R R
Gross energy (J(N.m): E=E1+E2 Gross energy (J(N.m) : E=E1+E2
e 1<3°
6. The operating temperature range shall be -10 to 80't;
a 2<3° LJ
7. To extend the service life, piston shall be stopped 1mm before reaching the end. It is better to lmpactwei ht L Shock stroke m
install set screw with positioning and precise adjustment;
V Impact speed m/s h Height m
8. If two or more shock absorbers are installed at the same side, please make sure that they act
E Gross energy J(N.m) T Torque N.m
synchronously;
9. No painting, welding or cleaning with corrosive substance on the body as well as the piston rod . Kinetic energy J(N.m)
E1 N Round per Minute rpm
10.when installed the absorber, the moment forced on absorber can't be out of the range given (Potential energy)
in below list or may cause the absorber damage. Distance fron rotation center
E2 Propelling energy J(N.m) R m
to impact point
g Gravity acceleration 9.8(m/s') Moment of Inertia (l=mr'/2) kg x m'
Male thread Max Assembly Force
Compatible absorber F Thrust((,r x D' x P)/4) N Angular velocity(w =2 lT N/60)
Spec(of body) on Absorber(N m) c.:, rad/s
D Nore size mm (90° =1.57rad/s)
ACA0806 M8 x 1.0 2.0
p Air pressure MP a
ACA1007,ACJ1007 M10 x 1.0 3.5
ACA1210,ACA1215, ACJ1210 M12 x 1.0 8.0
ACA1412, ACA1416, ACA1420, ACJ1412 M14 x 1.5 11.0
ACA2020 ,ACA2025,ACA2030, ACA2040, ACJ2020 M20 x 1.5 24.0
ACA2525, ACA2550, ACJ2525, ACJ2550 M25 x 1.5 40.0
ACA2725, ACA2750, ACJ2725, ACJ2750 M27 x 1.5 63.0
ShO(k
absorber
Polyurethane re-coil hosepart AlrTAC
US98A,UE95A Series
US98A040025D D 4.0 2.5 0.75 200 8.0 35 10 0.94

US98A0600400 D 6.0 4.0 1.00 200 7.5 30 15 1.93
US98A080050D D 8.0 5.0 1.50 100 8.0 35 20 3.66
US98A080055D D 8.0 5.5 1.25 100 6.0 24 20 3.25
US98A080060D D 8.0 6.0 1.00 100 4.0 16 25 2.70
US98A100065D0 10.0 6.5 1.75 100 8.0 32 25 5.44
US98A100080D0 10.0 8.0 1.00 100 2.5 10 40 3.47
US98A120080D0 12.0 8.0 2.00 100 7.5 30 35 7.56 -20-70
US98A120100D0 12.0 10.0 1.00 100 2.0 8 60 4.24
US98A160120D0 16.0 12.0 2.00 100 7.5 30 80 8.32
UE95A040025D D 4.0 2.5 0.75 200 8.0 33 8 0.94

D Product feature UE95A060040D D 6.0 4.0 1.00 200 7.0 28 12 1.91
1. Plastic polyurethane material conforms to the ROHS environment protection UE95A0800500 D 8.0 5.0 1.50 100 8.0 33 17 3.58
requirement. UE95A080055D D 8.0 5.5 1.25 100 6.0 22 17 3.18
2. High elasticity: small bend radius enables PU tube to pass through the tight UE95A080060D D 8.0 6.0 1.00 100 3.7 15 20 2.64
space. UE95A100065D0 10.0 6.5 1.75 100 7.5 30 20 5.32
3. Anti-knot: better anti-knot effect than other plastic tube. UE95A100080D0 10.0 8.0 1.00 100 2.2 9 36 3.39
4. Excellent flexibility: it can bear repeated expansion. UE95A120080D0 12.0 8.0 2.00 100 7.0 28 30 7.27 -40-70
5. Anti-abrasion: long working life and suitable for the environment in which it is UE95A120100D0 12.0 10.0 1.00 100 1.8 7 54 4.08
easy to be worn. UE95A160120D0 16.0 12.0 2.00 100 7.0 30 75 8.13
6. Low permeability of gas: relieve the problems of leakage and pollution. Note:
7. Good anti-solubility: no solvent leaks, therefore it will not pollute the environment. G):The first square of "D D " in the type column is for ordering code "unit" and the second is for "color". Blue,black,
8. Low compression: maintain excellent physical character. orange and clear are standardd colors. Individual orders shall be placed for other colors.
9. Wide resistance: it has certain resistance to chemicals, water, fuel, oil and ® :Working pressure:3 to 1 safety factor.
bacterium.
D Ordering code
US98A 060 040 100M BU
• • • II
Standard color
US98A: Ester Base,Shore A98 ± 2 BU: Blue
UE95A: Ether Base,Shore A95 ± 2 BK: Black
GE: Orange
Tube OD CR: Clear
040: CD4.0mm WH: White
060: CD6.0mm CB: Clear Blue
080: CD8.0mm R: Red
100: CD10.0mm Y: Yellow
120: CD12.0mm
160: CD16.0mm
TubetD Material length

025: CD2.5mm 100M: 100m/coil
040: CD4.0mm 200M: 200m/coil
050: CD5.0mm
055: CD5.5mm
060: CD6 .0mm
065: CD6.5mm
080: CD8.0mm
100: CD10.0mm
120: CD12.0mm
G) Blue,black,orange and clear are standard colors. Individual orders shall be placed for other colors.
0
PUTIJBE
il!:llli
Polyurethane re-coil hosepart AlrTAC
UCS, UCE Series
D Specification
UCS080050006000 8.0 5.0 8.0 35 38 6

UCS080050009000 8.0 5.0 8.0 35 38 9
UCS080050D 12000 8.0 5.0 8.0 35 38 12
UCS080050D 15000 8.0 5.0 8.0 35 38 15
UCS080055D060DD 8.0 5.5 6.0 24 38 6
UCS080055D090DD 8.0 5.5 6.0 24 38 9
UCS08005501200 0 8.0 5.5 6.0 24 38 12
UCS080055015000 8.0 5.5 6.0 24 38 15
UCS100065006000 10.0 6.5 8.0 32 50 6
UCS100065009000 10.0 6.5 8.0 32 50 9
UCS100065D120DD 10.0 6.5 8.0 32 50 12
UCS100065D150DD 10.0 6.5 8.0 32 50 15 -20-70
D Product feature UCS120080D060DD 12.0 8.0 7.5 30 60 6
1. Plastic polyurethane material conforms to the ROHS environment protection UCS120080D090DD 12.0 8.0 7.5 30 60 9
requirement. UCS120080012000 12.0 8.0 7.5 30 60 12
2. High elasticity: small bend radius enables PU tube to pass through the tight UCS120080015000 12.0 8.0 7.5 30 60 15
space. Note:
3. Anti-knot: better anti-knot effect than other plastic tube. G): "D" in the type column is for "color", and "DD" is for "coupling type" and 'coupling mode".Blue,black,orange
4. Excellent flexibility: it can bear repeated expansion. and clear are standard colors. Individual orders shall be placed for other colors.
5. Anti-abrasion: long working life and suitable for the environment in which it is ®: Working pressure: 3 to 1 safety factor.
easy to be worn. ®: Material length: length of operating status=(D.8-0.9)xMaterial length.
6. Low permeability of gas: relieve the problems of leakage and pollution.
7. Good anti-solubility: no solvent leaks, therefore it will not pollute the environment. D Ordering code
8. Low compression: maintain excellent physical character.
9. Wide resistance: it has certain resistance to chemicals, water, fuel, oil and
bacterium.
Coupling form
1: Without coupling
2: With female-male coupling
Technical chart 3: With male-male coupling
Tube OD
Working Pressure At Hardness Coupling type
Elevated Temperature Comparison 080: <D8.0mm
100% ~ - - ~ - - ~ - - ~ 150 100: <D10.0mm A: one end is 30cm and the other end is 10cm
t--- - ----1 140 120: <D12.0mm
80% t-----\',c.........t-- --+- ----t

t--------1130
1-------1120
Tube ID
Jtt•1 [3c,
t---~----1110 B: Both of the tubes of the couplings are 10cm

70% t---~-t-""7'3......--+-----t 050: <D5.0mm
~
100 055: <D5.5mm
90 065: <D6.5mm
g NYLON 70 080: <D8.0mm C: Both of the tubes of the couplings are 0cm
'E 50% t-----i----.:- 4'-.::----'I PU 50
a, 00
~
G)
~ 40% PE 90
Standard color
~ 80 Shore D
;;: 30% t-----+----+------1 70 BU: Blue
£"' 20% >--- --+-- --+-- ------, PVC 60
50
BK: Black
GE: Orange Material length
40 CR: Clear 060M: 6m
30 WH : White 090M: 9m
0% ~ - - - - - ~ - - ~ 20 CB: Clear Blue 120M: 12m
23°C 37°C 51 °C 65°C ShoreA R: Red 150M: 15m
Y:Yellow
G) Blue,black,orange and clear are standard colors. Individual orders shall be placed for other colors.
Pipe end coupling

Male quick Female quick MI k I Female quick Male quick Female quick
coupling coupling a e quic coup ing coupling coupling coupling
PP40<D 12x <D8 SP40<D12x <D8 PPJOC!l!O x C!l 65 SP30C!l10 x C!l6.5 PP20<D8x <D5 SP20<D8 x <D5
---~-t--....._o
PP40/SP40-PU tube
(12 x 8) quick coupling use
PP30/SP30-PU tube
(10 x 6.5)quick coupling use
PP20/SP20-PU tube
(8 x 5)quick coupling use
PUTlJBE
•t=t•
Accessories--One-Touch Fittings AlrTAC
One-touch fittings---threaded type, One-touch fittings---tube-tube type, Threaded fittings---threaded type
Installation and Operation
1. Installation and removal of tubing: 3.3. Pulling or twisting the tubing excessively may damage the fitting. For a mounting guide
see the table below.
1.1. Installation of tubing Minimum bending radius of the
Grasp the tubing and slowly push it into the fitting until it comes to a stop. The tubing will tub1ng(mm)
be locked by the spring gasket. Tubing O.D. Minimum bending
1.2. Removal of tubing (<PD) radius(R)
Push the release button to open the spring gasket so that the tubing can be released . 4 20
Note:When remove the tubing, make sure the pressure in the tubing is Zero. 6 30
8 50
10 80
12 150
4. Connection thread tightening method of the fitting with MS type thread
First, tighten by hand, then use a wrench to tighten an additional 1/4 turn. Excessive
tightening may damage the thread portion or deform the gasket and cause air leakage.
Insufficient tightening may loosen the threads, or cause air leakage.
2. Connection thread tightening method 5.Tolerance of the Polyurethane tubing O.D.
Use an inner or outer hexagon wrench to tighten the fitting as show in the picture below.
±0.1 ± 0.1 ± 0.1 ± 0.15 ±0.15
Inner hexagon tightening Outer hexagon tightening 6. Other precautions
6.1. Before piping is connected, it should be washed to remove chips and other debris from
Outer hexagon wrench
inside the pipe.
6.2. Ensure the tubing being cut perpendicularly and no damage or scratch on the surface
of the tubing outside diameter.
6.3. Use pipe length with sufficient margin to avoid over-bending on the top of the fitting.
6.4. Pull the tubing back gently to make sure it has a positive seal before using.
6.5. Push the release button flange evenly and sufficiently to release the button. If the
release button is not held down sufficiently, the tubing cannot be withdrawn and the
outer surface of the tubing may be scratched and cause air leakage.
6.6. When removing tubing, do not rotate around or 360 degree. This may result in scratch
Note: Please refer to the tables below for the tightening torque and the depth of the thread
screw-in. and removal of the tubing difficult.
6. 7. When screwing together pipes and fittings, be certain that chips from the pipe threads
Thread type 3/8" 1/2" and sealing material do not get inside the pipe. Also, when the pipe tape is used,
Ti htenin torque 22 - 24 28- 30 leave approx. 1.5-2 thread ridges exposed at the end of the threads.
7. Safety instructions
Depth of the thread screw-in (mm)
7.1 When remove the tubing, make sure the pressure in the tubing is Zero.
Modellltem Thread Length A Depth of the thread A1
7.2 Do not use the ordinary fittings and tubing in locations where spatter is generated.
MS 3 3
1/8" 7.5 4 Spattering may result in a lire hazard.
"' 1/4" 10 6 7.3 Ensure that the pressure and ambient temperature are within the specified range.
3/8" 11 6.5 7.4 Do not use in an atmosphere having corrosive gases, chemicals, sea water, water,
1/2" 14 8 water steam, or where there is direct contact with any of these.
Note: If the fitting is connected with other parts, the external dimension L will be the value 7.5 Do not use in a place subject to heavy vibration and/or shock.
of the overall length of the fitting (B) minus the depth of the thread screw-in (A 1).
3. Caution
3.1. External force (bend, twist, and tension) may damage the fitting and cause air leakage.
3.2. Insufficient installation may cause air leakage or the tubing to release.
L li-,IIJli!!l!!!..-...i~ Tubing
Insufficient installation
Tube
fittings
PC, POC series
Specification
Operatina pressure range 0~9kaflcm'(0-0.9MPal
Negative pressure -750mmHg(10Torr)
Proof pressure 1.SMPa
Ambient and fluid temperature (°Cl 0-60
Applicable tubing Soft nylon or polyurethane
Color Grey/black
Dimensions
Product feature
1. The compact appearance space saving.
H M5 thread type ;J
~
2. The threaded portion is covered with
sealant and the MS thread is attached
·--------------------------
with a sealing gasket to prevent air
leakage over the connection thread
portion. IL' U ' I" oI .
M5x0.8
.. . . .
PC4MS 3.5 19.5 14 9 6.5
PC401 4 1/8" 7.5 19.5 14 10 7
3. The nickel plated body is anti-corrosion and
PC402 1/4" 10 19.5 14 14 13.5
anti-pollution, which allows broader applications. PC6MS MSx0.8 3.5 22.5 16.5 12 8.5
PC601 118" 7.5 22.0 18.5 12 7.5
4. Grey and black are optional for the release button. PC602 6 114" 10 24.5 18.5 14 15.5
PC603 3/8" 11 22.5 18.5 17 24
PC604 112" 14 26.0 18.5 21 46
PC801 1/8" 7.5 28 18.5 14 13.5
PC802 1/4" 10 27 18.5 14 13
D Ordering code PC803
8
3/8" 11 23.5 18.5 17 21
"!IP.'lll!llll!IIIIIP.ll'III PC804 1/2" 14 27 18.5 21 43.5
PC1001 1/8" 7.5 30 21 17 20.5
PC1002 114" 10 32.5 21 17 24
10
PC1003 318" 11 28 21 17 20.5
PC: Male connector PC1004 112" 14 26.5 21 21 36
PC1201 1/8" 7.5 32 .5 23 21 38 .5
Standard color
PC1202 1/4" 10 35 23 21 40.5
Standard color Specification 12
PC1203 3/8" 11 30.5 23 21 28.5
POC: Male connector Blank: Gray
D: Black
Thread connection
Release button:Gray
Release button:Black
.. PC1204 1/2" 14 32 .5 23 21 41 .5
Port size Thread connection Adaptable port size '

4: C!>4mm MS: MS x 0.8 ¢l4\ C!>6
6: C!>6mm 01: 1/8"
02: 1/4" ¢l4\C!>6 M5 thread type
8: C!>8mm
f-0-3:- 3-/8-" -----< ¢)8\C!> 10\ Cl> 12 ·--------------------------
10: C!>10mm
12: C!>12mm 04: 1/2"
D Table for interface port and tube 0.D.

Product Port size
Thread type ¢14
series ¢16 ¢18 ¢110 ¢112
MS
1/8"
•• •• •• •• •• Modellltem ¢ID R ¢IP L C K H Across flat
PC 1/4"
• •• POC4MS MS•0.8 9 3.5 18.5 14 2
•• •• ••
POC401 4 1/8" 10 7.5 18 14 2.5
3/8"
•••
POC402 114" 14 10 19.5 14 3
1/2"
MS
118"
•• •• ••
POC6M5
POC601 6
MSx0.8
118'
12
12
3.5
7.5
21 .5
22.0
16.5
18.5
2
4
POC 114"
318"
• • • •• •••
POC602
POC801
114'
1/8"
14
14
10
7.5
22.0
26.5
18.5
18
4
5
112" POC802 8 1/4" 14 10 25 18 6
POC803 3/8" 17 11 23.5 18 6
POC1001 1/8' 17 7.5 30 21 5
D Inner structure POC1002 1/4' 17 10 29 21 6
10
1,1, tt1[~II~. .
. ... .. POC1003 318' 17 11 28 21 8
1 Release button POM POC1004 1/2' 21 14 26.5 21 8
(ti 2
3
4
5
6
Guide
Spring gasket
Chuck
0-ring
Body
Aluminum alloy
Stainless steel
POM
NBR
Brass
POC1202
POC1203
POC1 204
12
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
21
21
21
10
11
14
34. 5
30
32
23
23
23
6
8
8
Tube
fittings
One-touch fittings---threaded type
Specification
Operating pressure range 0- 9kof/cm'f0-0.9MPa)
Proof pressure 1.5MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature ("C) 0-60
Color Grey/black
Product feature
1. Variable models can be widely used in every kind of pneumatic systems.
2. High circulation performance: bear the same flow with the volume of the tubing inside diameter.
3. Connect tubing easily and conveniently. The tubing connection portion is safe and durable.
4. The threaded portion is covered with sealant and the M5 thread is attached with a seal ing gasket to
D Table for interface port and tube O.D. prevent air leakage over the connection thread portion.
Port size 5. The nickel plated body is anti-corrosion and anti-pollution, which allows a broader application.
Product series Thread type Cl>4
Cl>6 Cl>8 Cl>10 Cl>12
M5
•• ••• ••• •• ••
1/8"
PL 1/4"
• ••
D Ordering code
••• ••
3/8"
1/2"
•
•••
M5
PLL
1/8"
1/4"
••• •• •• ••
Thread type
I
3/8"
1/2"
• •• •
PHW: Double universal PL: Male elbow
male elbow
!Blank: PT
M5
1/8"
••• •• •• •• RE .
la
Standard color
Standard Specification
PLF 1/4"
•• •• color
•• ••
3/8" PH F: Universal female PLL: Extended male PCF\PMF Release
1/2"
• elbow elbow ~
button: Grav
M5
1/8"
••
•
••
••• ••• ••
& Blank: Gray
Others
Release
button: Grav
Body:Gray
•••
PCF 1/4"
3/8" PEB: Male branch tee PLF: Female elbow PCF\PMF Release
button: Black
• • •
1/2"
M5
1/8"
•• ••• •• •• ••
A -
lg D: Black
Others
Release
button: Black
Body: Black
•
PMF 1/4"
•• ••
PED: Male run tee PCF: Female
3/8" Thread connection
1/2"
M5
•• •• • .
connector
~ .
Thread connection Adaptable port size
M5: M5 x 0.8 <1>4\<1> 6
•••
-
1/8"
•• •• 01: 1/8" <1>4\ <1>6

PH 1/4"
••
PYB: Branch "Y" PMF: Bulkhead 02: 1/4" <1>8\ <1>1 0
3/8"
1/2"
• •• • ~
-
connector
~
03: 3/8" WU
•••
1/8" ' 04: 1/2"
••• •••
1/4"
PHW
3/8"
•• PZB: Threaded cross PH: Universal male
Port size
+
1/2" 4: <1> 4mm
elbow
•• ••
L
M5 6: <1>6mm
PHF
1/8"
1/4"
•• •• ••
.
8: <1> 8mm
10:<P 10mm
•• ••
3/8"
1/2"
M5
•• •• • 12: <P1 2mm
••• •••
1/8"
PEB 1/4"
3/8"
• •• ••
1/2"
•• • • •
•••
M5
1/8"
•• ••
• •••
PKO: Male reducer triple branch
PED 1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
• •• •
• ~ _,
Standard color
M5
•• •• Standard Specification
••• •••
color
1/8"
PYB 1/4"
3/8"
• •• •• Port size
6: <P6mm
Release
Blank: Gray button: Grav
1/2"
1/8"
•• •• • • 8: <P8mm
10: cP 10mm
Body:Gray
Release
button: Black
••• •••
D: Black
1/4"
PZB
3/8"
1/2"
• •• Port size
4: <1>4mm
Body: Black
6: <1>6mm
8: <1>8mm
EA EA
a:,
w
...
PL4M5
"I
4
.
MS•0.8
...
9 3.5 14 17 15
:
8
. 3
. .. PLF4M5
II I
MS•0.8
o•
9 14 17 16 10
PL401 1/8" 9 7.5 14 17 18.5 10 4.5 PLF401 4 1/8" 9 14 17 21 14
PL402 1/4" 9 10 14 17 22 14 12 PLF402 1/4" 9 11 14 17 24 17
PL6M5 6 MS•0.8 12.5 3.5 17 20 17 8 4.5 PLF6M5 MS•0 .8 12.5 6 17 20 18.5 10
PL601 1/8' 12.5 7.5 17 20 20.5 10 6 PLF601 1/8" 12.5 8 17 20 23 14
PL602 1/4' 12.5 10 17 20 24 14 13.5 PLF602 1/4" 12.5 11 17 20 26 17
PL603 3/8' 12.5 11 17 20 25.5 17 20.5 PLF603 3/8" 12.5 12 17 20 27 21
PL604 1/2' 12.5 14 17 20 30.0 21 36 PLF801 1/8" 15 8 18.5 23 20 14
PL801 8 1/8" 15 7.5 18.5 23 20.5 10 7.5 PLF802 1/4" 15 11 18.5 23 27.5 17
PL802 1/4" 15 10 18.5 23 25 14 13 PLF803 3/8" 15 12 18.5 23 28.5 21
PL803 3/8" 15 11 18.5 23 26.5 17 21 PLF804 1/2" 15 13.5 18.5 23 30 25
PL804 1/2" 15 14 18.5 23 31 21 36 PLF1001 1/8" 18 21 25.5 24 17
PL 1001 10 1/8' 18 7.5 21 25.5 25 17 16.5 PLF1002 1/4" 18 11 21 25.5 26.5 17
10
PL1002 1/4' 18 10 21 25.5 27 17 19 PLF1003 3/8" 18 12 21 25.5 30 21
PL1003 3/8' 18 11 21 25.5 28 17 21 PLF1004 1/2" 18 13.5 21 25.5 31.5 25
PL 1004 1/2' 18 14 21 25.5 32.5 21 37 PLF1202 1/4" 21 11 23 28.5 28.5 17
PL1201 12 1/8" 21 7.5 23 28.5 26.5 17 19 PLF1203 12 3/8" 21 12 23 29.5 32 21
PL 1202 1/4" 21 10 23 28.5 28.5 17 21.5 PLF1204 1/2" 21 13.5 23 29.5 33 25
PL 1203 3/8" 21 11 23 29.5 33 17 25.5
PL 1204 1/2" 21 14 23 29.5 34 21 37
EA
cpp
(!JD
~
·--------------------------
(..)
H
a:, MS thread type
w
Mode Ill tern <l>D R <l>P L C K H(Across flat)
lllJltt·
PLL4M5
OI .
MS•0.8
0.
9 3.5 14 17 32.5
:
8
. PCF4M5
PCF401
PCF402
4
MS•0.8
1/8"
1/4"
9
9.5
9.5
6
8
11
21
23
26
14
14
14
10
14
17
PLL401 4 1/8' 9 7.5 14 17 36 10 PCF6M5 MS•0.8 12 6 21.5 16.5 12
PLL402 1/4' 9 10 14 17 39 14 PCF601 1/8" 12.5 8 25.5 16.5 14
PLL6M5 MS•0.8 12.5 3.5 17 20 35 8 PCF602 6 1/4" 12.5 11 28.5 16.5 17
PLL601 1/8' 12.5 7.5 17 20 38 10 PCF603 3/8" 13 12 29.5 16.5 21
6
PLL602 1/4' 12.5 10 17 20 41 14 PCF604 1/2" 13 13.5 31 .0 16.5 25
PLL603 3/8' 12.5 11 17 20 43.5 17 PCF801 1/8' 14 8 27.5 18.5 14
PLL801 1/8" 15 7.5 18.5 23 43.5 10 PCF802 1/4" 14.5 11 30.5 18.5 17
8
PLL802 8 1/4" 15 10 18.5 23 46 14 PCF803 3/8" 14.5 12 31 .5 18.5 21
PLL803 3/8' 15 11 18.5 23 48.5 17 PCF804 1/2" 14.5 13.5 33 18.5 25
PLL 1001 1/8' 18 7.5 21 25.5 51.5 15 PCF1001 1/8" 17 8 29 21 17
PLL 1002 1/4' 18 10 21 25.5 54.5 15 PCF1002 1/4" 17 11 33 21 17
10 10
PLL 1003 3/8' 18 11 21 25.5 55.5 17 PCF1003 3/8" 18 12 34 21 21
PLL 1004 1/2' 18 14 21 25.5 60 21 PCF1004 1/2" 18 13.5 35.5 21 25
PLL1202 1/4' 21 10 23 28.5 56.5 15 PCF1202 1/4" 21 11 33.5 23 21
PLL1203 12 3/8' 21 11 23 29.5 61 17 PCF1203 12 3/8" 21 12 35.5 23 21
PLL1204 1/2" 21 14 23 29.5 64 21 PCF1204 1/2" 21 13.5 37 23 25
Tube
fittings
ilM•
EA
l H
2-K r
' ~ I
'
Q>D I l
'
I•
r1 ---- - I-
C>
e
c..
e
G <(
'-------------------------- I ·- -------------------------
~ (.') I
I- ~ ,----"'- N
Rubberaa~ :'S (.)
"' M 1'. I I , I I ] 0
~
},r1l-~j : 1:11
ii I ...I
w
(.) 0
CD
w
!-'l~H
~
H ...I
II R
ll'IUe •
PMF401
oI .
1/8" M12X1 8 25 14 12 4 14
. 4 14
. ll'JIII •
PHW401 4
oI .
1/8"
o•
9 7.5 38 14 20.5
=-·
14.5 13 11
.
4
PMF402 1/4" M12X111 29 14 12 4 14 4 17 PHW601 1/8" 12.5 7.5 38 16.5 23.0 15 13 11
PMF601 1/8" M14X1 8 25.5 16.5 12.5 5 17 4 17 PHW602 6 1/4" 12.5 10 43.5 16.5 25.0 17.5 15.5 14
PMF602 6 1/4" M14X111 30.5 16.5 12.5 5 17 4 17 PHW603 3/8" 12.5 11 50 16.5 27.0 20 16.5 19
PMF603 3/8" M14X1 12 31 .5 16.5 12.5 5 17 4 21 PHW801 1/8" 15 7.5 40.5 18.5 26.5 16.5 15.5 11
PMF801 1/8" M16X1 8 27.5 18.5 13.5 5.5 19 4 19 PHW802 1/4" 15 10 43.5 18.5 28.5 18.5 15.5 14
8
PMF802 1/4" M16X1 11 32 18.5 13.5 5.5 19 4 19 PHW803 3/8" 15 11 50 18.5 29.5 20 16.5 19
8
PMF803 3/8" M16X1 12 33 18.5 13.5 5.5 19 4 21 PHW804 1/2" 15 14 61 18.5 32 24.5 22 24
PMF804 1/2" M16X1 13.5 34.5 18.5 13.5 5.5 19 4 25 PHW1002 1/4" 18 10 46.5 21 31 20 18.5 14
PMF1001 1/8" M20X1 8 30 21 14.5 7.5 24 5 22 PHW1003 10 3/8" 18 11 55 21 33 21 22 19
PMF1002 1/4" M20X111 35 21 14.5 7.5 24 5 22 PHW1004 1/2" 18 14 61 21 35.5 25 22 24
10
PMF1003 3/8" M20X1 12 36 21 14.5 7.5 24 5 22 PHW1203 3/8" 21 11 55 23 36 23 22 19
12
PMF1004 1/2" M20X1 13.5 37.5 21 14.5 7.5 24 5 25 PHW1204 1/2" 21 14 61 23 38 26.5 22 24
PMF1202 1/4" M22X1 11 34.5 23 15.5 8 27 6 24
PMF1203 12 3/8" M22X1 12 37.5 23 15.5 8 27 6 24
PMF1204 1/2" M22X1 13.5 39 23 15.5 8 27 6 25
1:1,0~... _,_
H
E
K
.~
~
r-. [ I
- "
·--------------------------
H
~ ·--------------------------
(.)
-i- ~ -E ~i
M5 thread type
"lj•,:1 1~
....J IL'.J. I
RB
1i
---- -
1i
"LI~~
I M5 thread type
...I 0
I R
K
:sj JI I 0 ~
E
~ I RA
ll•t•••·
PH4M5
oI .
M5x0.8
o•
9 3.5 17 14 19 8
. ll'HI
PHF4M5
t • oI ..
M5x0.8
.
M5x0.8
o•
9 3.5 6
:
20 14 19 8
.
4 4
PH401 1/8" 9 7.5 25 14 20.5 11 PHF401 1/8" 1/8" 9 7.5 8 29.5 14 20.5 12
PH6M5 M5x0.8 12.5 3.5 17 16.5 23.5 8 PHF6M5 M5x0.8 M5x0.8 12.5 3.5 6 20 16. 5 23. 5 8
PH601 1/8" 12.5 7.5 25 16.5 23 11 PHF601 1/8" 1/8" 12.5 7.5 8 29.5 16.5 23 12
6 6
PH602 1/4" 12.5 10 28 16.5 25 14 PHF602 1/4" 1/4" 12.5 10 11 35 16.5 25 17
PH603 3/8" 12.5 11 33 16.5 27 19 PHF603 3/8" 3/8" 12.5 11 12 40 16.5 27 19
PH801 1/8" 15 7.5 25 18.5 26.5 11 PHF801 1/8" 1/8" 15 7.5 8 29.5 18.5 26.5 12
PH802 1/4" 15 10 28 18.5 28.5 14 PHF802 1/4" 1/4" 15 10 11 35 18.5 28.5 17
8 8
PH803 3/8" 15 11 33 18.5 29.5 19 PHF803 3/8" 3/8" 15 11 12 40 18.5 29.5 19
PH804 1/2" 15 14 39 18.5 32 24 PHF804 1/2" 1/2" 15 14 13.5 47.5 18.5 32 24
PH1002 1/4" 18 10 28 21 31 14 PHF1002 1/4" 1/4" 18 10 11 35 21 31 17
PH1003 10 3/8" 18 11 33 21 33 19 PHF1003 10 3/8" 3/8" 18 11 12 40 21 33 19
PH1004 1/2" 18 14 39 21 35.5 24 PHF1004 1/2" 1/2" 18 14 13.5 47.5 21 35.5 24
~
PH1203 3/8" 21 11 33 23 36 19 PHF1203 3/8" 3/8" 21 11 12 40 23 36 19
12 12
PH1204 1/2" 21 14 39 23 38 24 PHF1204 1/2" 1/2" 21 14 13.5 47.5 23 38 24
Tube
fittings
~:::1:• ...--, .. ,-1.:·-
• DC
2-EA
2-K
• .•
I
'
R1 ----- l l ~ -- 0
e
a.
e
~! ~ ----- Y 1~ ~- - --=
I
N
I ·--------------------------
ID
w i f I 11 ~ M5 thread type
-' II R
M5 thread type
ffi~
(pt
ll'Ht
PEB4M5
t • ... .
M5•0.8
...
9 3.5 14 17 21
: ..
3.2
:
6.5 9
. 11111•
PYB4M5
t • ... .
M5•0.8
.. .
9 3.5 35.5 14
"
3.2 13
•
10 9
.
PEB401 4 1/8' 9 7.5 14 17 25 3.2 6.5 10 PYB401 4 1/8" 9 7.5 39.5 14 3.2 13 10 10
PEB402 1/4' 9 10 14 17 28 3.2 6.5 14 PYB402 1/4" 9 10 42.5 14 3.2 13 10 14
PEB6M5 M5•0.8 12.5 3.5 16.5 20 23.5 3.2 8 12 PYB6M5 M5•0.8 12.5 3.5 40.5 16.5 3.2 15.5 12 12
PEB601 1/8' 12.5 7.5 16.5 20 27.5 3.2 8 12 PYB601 1/8" 12.5 7.5 44.5 16.5 3.2 15.5 12 12
6 6
PEB602 1/4' 12.5 10 16.5 20 30.5 3.2 8 14 PYB602 1/4" 12.5 10 47.5 16.5 3.2 15.5 12 14
PEB603 3/8' 12.5 11 16.5 20 32 3.2 8 17 PYB603 3/8" 12.5 11 49.0 16.5 3.2 15.5 12 17
PEB801 1/8' 15 7.5 18.5 23 30.5 4.3 9.5 14 PYB801 1/8" 15 7.5 50 18.5 3.2 17 14.5 14
PEB802 1/4' 15 10 18.5 23 33 4.3 9.5 14 PYB802 1/4" 15 10 52.5 18.5 3.2 17 14.5 14
8 8
PEB803 3/8' 15 11 18.5 23 34.5 4.3 9.5 17 PYB803 3/8" 15 11 54 18.5 3.2 17 14.5 17
PEB804 1/2' 15 14 18.5 23 38.5 4.3 9.5 21 PYB804 1/2" 15 14 58 18.5 3.2 17 14.5 21
PEB1001 1/8' 18 7.5 21 26.5 34 4.3 11 17 PYB1001 1/8" 18 7.5 56.5 21 4.3 19.5 18 17
PEB1002 1/4' 18 10 21 26.5 36.5 4.3 11 17 PYB1002 1/4" 18 10 59 21 4.3 19.5 18 17
10 10
PEB1003 3/8' 18 11 21 26.5 37.5 4.3 11 17 PYB1003 3/8" 18 11 60 21 4.3 19.5 18 17
PEB1004 1/2' 18 14 21 26.5 41.5 4.3 11 21 PYB1004 1/2" 18 14 64 21 4.3 19.5 18 21
PEB1202 1/4' 21 10 23 30 41 4.3 13 21 PYB1202 1/4" 21 10 66 23 4.3 21 20.5 21
PEB1203 12 3/8' 21 11 23 30 42 4.3 13 21 PYB1203 12 3/8" 21 11 67 23 4.3 21 20.5 21
PEB1204 1/2' 21 14 23 30 45 4.3 13 21 PYB1204 1/2" 21 14 70 23 4.3 21 20.5 21
~ ffiI
I ' ' : ~
,,
<
w N !;! ffi+ ! ..•
"'
~Rf
- ---- -
:__ ~ - 'f,f/1' --------
'o i a.
e
trw:.
~ ..;.
,___i'<
"' 0
Cl]
w
! ~
i J t---.._tl_
...J
i R JC
n•ntt·
PED4M5 ". . M5•0.8

.. .
9 3.5 14 17 21
:
"
3.2
:
6.5 9
. n•utt ·
PZB601 ". .
1/8" 7.5 27.5 47.5
... .. :
12
.
PED401 4 1/8' 9 7.5 14 17 25 3.2 6.5 10 PZB602 6 1/4" 10 39.5 30.5 50.5 12.5 16.5 3.2 8 16 14
PED402 1/4' 9 10 14 17 28 3.2 6.5 14 PZB603 3/8" 11 32 52 17
PED6M5 M5•0.8 12.5 3.5 16.5 20 23.5 3.2 8 12 PZB801 1/8" 7.5 30.5 53.5 14
PED601 1/8' 12.5 7.5 16.5 20 27.5 3.2 8 12 PZB802 1/4" 10 33 56 14
6 8 46 15 18.5 4.3 9.5 19
PED602 1/4' 12.5 10 16.5 20 30.5 3.2 8 14 PZB803 3/8" 11 34.5 57.5 17
PED603 3/8' 12.5 11 16.5 20 32 3.2 8 17
PZB804 1/2" 14 38.5 61.5 21
PED801 1/8" 15 7.5 18.5 23 30.5 4.3 9.5 14
PZB1002 1/4" 10 36.5 63 17
PED802 1/4' 15 10 18.5 23 33 4.3 9.5 14
8 PZB1003 10 3/8" 11 52.5 37.5 64 18 21 4.3 11 22 17
PED803 3/8' 15 11 18.5 23 34.5 4.3 9.5 17
PZB1004 1/2" 14 41 .5 68 21
PED804 1/2' 15 14 18.5 23 38.5 4.3 9.5 21
PED1001 1/8' 18 7.5 21 26.5 34 4.3 11 17 PZB1 203 3/8" 11 42 72 21
12 59.5 21 23 4.3 13 26
PED1002 1/4' 18 10 21 26.5 36.5 4.3 11 17 PZB1204 1/2" 14 45 75 21
10
PED1003 3/8' 18 11 21 26.5 37.5 4.3 11 17
PED1004 1/2' 18 14 21 26.5 41 .5 4.3 11 21
PED1202 1/4' 21 10 23 30 41 4.3 13 21
PED1203 12 3/8' 21 11 23 30 42 4.3 13 21
PED1204 1/2' 21 14 23 30 45 4.3 13 21
Tube
fittings
••
JC
3-COPB
3-CODB
2-COJ
0 ••
6 1/8" 7.5 66.5 12.5

8 1/4" 10 79 15
10 3/8" 11 91.5 18
0
3.2 8 34 10 17.5 12
PKDB-602 3.2 9.5 40 12 21 14
PKD10-803 4.3 11 48 14.5 24 17
D Inner structure
.....
1 Release button POM
2 Guide Aluminum alloy
3 Spring gasket Stainless steel
4 Chuck POM
5 0-rino NBR
6 Body PBT
7 0-ring NBR
8 Stud Brass
Tube
fittings
D Dimensions
Product feature
2. High circulation performance bear the same fl ow with the volume of the tube
·:
BB0101 118" 118" 7.5 7.5 19.5 10
innerdiamater. BB0102 114" 118" 10 7.5 22.5 14
3. The nickel plated body is anti-corrosion and anti-pollution,which allows a broader BB0103 318" 118" 11 7.5 24 17
application. BB0202 114" 114" 10 10 25 14
BB0203 318" 114" 11 10 26.5 17
4. Metal fittings can be used in high temperature environment.
BB0204 112" 114" 14 10 30 21
BB0303 318" 318" 11 11 27.5 17
BB0304 112" 318" 14 11 31 21
D Specification
BB0404 112" 1/2" 14 14 34 21
OoeratinQ pressure ranQe o-9kaf/cm'I0-0.9MPal
Proof pressure 3M Pa
RB
D Ordering code
'--------------------------
u
<
__J
BB: Male connector
OD Thread connection II
01: 118' BD0102 1/4" 1/8" 10 8 14.5 14
BD: Male & female connector
02: 114'
~-
BD01 03 3/8" 1/8" 11 8 16 17
03: 3/8'
BD0104 1/2" 1/8" 14 8 19.5 21
BU: Double female connector 04: 112"
BD0203 3/8" 1/4" 11 11 16 17
00
BZ: Hexagon head cap plug
Thread connection I
01: 118"
BD0204
BD0304
1/2"
1/2"
1/4"
3/8"
14
14
11
12
19.5
19.5
21
21
02: 114•
[J 03: 318"
04: 112· '
Configuration table of tubing thread. u
Thread connection II
Product series Thread connection I '------ --------------------
01 02 03 04
01
02
• •• •• ••
BB
03
04
• •• BU0101 1/8" 8 17 12
BD
01
02
• •• ••
BU0202
BU0303
1/4"
3/8"
11
12
23
25
17
21
03
04 BU0404 1/2" 13. 5 28 24
01
02
• •
BU
03
04
• •
Thread connection
Product series 01 02 03 04
E!mmllllllcmmllllcmmllllcmmllllcmmllll
'--------------------------
BZ01 1/8" 7.5 11 10

BZ02 1/4" 10 14.5 14
BZ03 3/8" 11 16 17
BZ04 1/2" 14 19.5 21
Tube
fittings
em.w
Cl Dimensions
Product feature
2. High circulation performance bear the same flow with the volume of the tube
innerdiamater.
3. The nickel plated body is anti-corrosion and anti-pollution,which allows a broader BKC0425-M3 8
application. BKC0425-M5 4 2.5 8
4. Metal fittings can be used in high temperature environments. BKC0425-01 1/8" 7.5 20.5 10
BKC0604-01 1/8" 7.5 22 10
BKC0604-02 6 4 1/4" 10 25.5 5.5 10 14
Specification BKC0604-03 3/8" 11 27 17
Ooeratina oressure ranae 0--9kaf/cm'/0-0.9MPa\ BKC0805-01 1/8" 7.5 24 12
Negative pressure -750mmHg(10Torr) BKC0805-02 1/4" 10 27.5 14
Proof pressure 3M Pa BKC0805- 03 3/8" 11 29 17
6.5 12
Ambient and fluid temperature ("Cl 0-150 BKC0806-01 1/8" 7.5 24 12
Note: The temperature resistance level of the tubing should be confirmed first when used in high BKC0806-02 5.5or6 1/4" 10 27.5 14
temperature environments. BKC0806-03 3/8" 11 29 17
BKC1065-02 1/4" 10 30 15
BKC1065-03 6.5 3/8" 11 31.5 17
BKC1065-04 1/2" 14 35.5 21
10 7.5 15
BKC1075-02 1/4" 10 30 15
BKC1075- 03 7.5 3/8" 11 31 .5 17
BKC1075- 04 1/2" 14 35.5 21
BKC1208-02 1/4" 10 30 17
BKC: Straight locknut connector
m Tubing outer diameter

Thread connection
M3: M3X0.5
M5: M5X0.8
BKC1208-03
BKC1208-04
BKC1209-02
BKC1209-03
BKC1209-04
12
8
9
3/8"
1/2"
1/4"
3/8"
1/2"
11
14
10
11
14
31.5
35.5
30
31.5
35.5
7.5 17
17
21
17
17
21
04: CJJ4mm 01 : 1/8"
06: CJJ6mm 02: 1/4"
08: CJJ8mm 03: 3/8"
10: CJJ10mm 04: 1/2" Cl Installation and application
12: CJJ12mm
Tubing inner diameter 1. Method of inserting or removal a tubing
25: CJJ2.5mm
1.1 Inserting a tubing
04: CJJ4mm
05: CJJ5mm Place the locking cap over the tubing, and insert the tubing into the body, then
06: CJJ6mm tighten the locking cap. (As figure 1)
65: CJJ6.5mm
1.2 Removing a tubing
75: CJJ7.5mm
08: CJJ8mm Loosen the locking cap first, then remove the tubing. (As figure 2)
09: CJJ9mm
Note: When using the tubing ©8• $5.5, the straight lock nut connector of BKC0806can be used.
Configuration table of tubing and tubing thread
25
04
05
•• ••
BKC
08
06
65
•• •• •• Figure 1 Figure 2
10
75
08
•• ••• ••
2. Method of tightening the connector thread
12
09
• Tighten the connector with a hex wrench, as shown below.
Tube
fittings
·-
One-touch fittings---tube-tube type
Specification
Operating pressure ranqe 0~9kaf/cm'(0~0.9MPa)
Color Grey/black
Product feature
PM: Bulkhead union PE: Union tee Standard color Specification
Release button:
2. High circulation performance: bear the same flow with the volume of the A PM
Gray
tubing inside diameter.
3. Connect tubing easily and conveniently. The tubing connection portion is
lWfflll Blank: Gray Release button:
safe and durable. PLM: Bulkhead male elbow PY: Union "Y" Others Gray
Body:Gray
4. The threaded portion is covered with sealant and the MSthread is
attached with a sealing gasket to prevent air leakage over the connection
1!::!ln-m_ ~ Release button:
thread portion. ClWPl ~ PM
Black
5.The nickel plated body is anti-corrosion and anti-pollution, which allows PP: Plug PV: Union elbow D: Black Release button:
a broader application. Others Black
Body: Black
Port size
PZ: Cross PU: Straight union
+
4: Cll4mm
6: Cll6mm
. 8: Cll8mm
'
10: Cll10mm
Ports1ze II 12: Cll12mm
Product series Ports1ze I
C!>4 Cl>6 Cl>8 Cl>10
C!>4
C!>6
••
••
PG C!>8
Cl>10
Cl>12
•• • PG: Different diameter Standard color Specification
C!>4 straight~ Release button: Gray
PEG
C!>6
C!>8
• •
Blank: Gray
Body:Gray
Release button: Black
•• PZG: Different diameter PEG: Different diameter D: Black
•
Cl>10 Body: Black
C!>12
C!>4
• cross tee
PEW
Cl>6
C!>8
• •
Port size II
4: Cll4mm
C!>10
Cl>12
•• •
PKG: Reducer triple branch PEW: Different diameter
union tee _A_
6: Cll6mm
8: Cll8mm
C!>4
~ lllfljJJ 10: Cll10mm
PYW
C!>6
C!>8
• • PHK: Universal reducer PYW: Different diameter
Port size I
••
Cl>10 union "Y" 4: Cll4mm
C!>12
C!>4
• triple b r a ~ 6: Cll6mm
8: Cll8mm
PGJ
C!>6
Cl>8
•• ••
10: Cll10mm
12: Cll12mm
C!>10
C!>12
•• •
PHD: Universal reducer four PGJ: Plug-in reducer
branch union
~
C!>4
PZG
C!>6
C!>8
• •
IJC=J
Cl>10
• • Inner structure
C!>12
C!>4 ,, ..
PKG
C!>6
C!>8
• •
Cl>10
Cl>12
• 1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1
"'''
C!>4 1 Release button POM
C!>6 2 Guide Aluminum alloy
PHK C!>8
C!>10
• •
3
4
Spring gasket
Chuck
Stainless steel
POM
C!>12 5 0-ring NBR
C!>4 6 Body PBT
Cl>6
PHD C!>8
C!>10
• • Tube
Cl>12
fittings
Dimensions
'
''
1--------------------------
Cl.
e
I
N
PE4 4
... ".
9 14 17
"
3.2 6.5 PU4
oI
4 9 14 29.5
PE6 6 12.5 16.5 20 3.2 8 PU6 6 12.5 16.5 34
PE8 8 15 18.5 23 4.3 9.5 PUB 8 15 18.5 38.5
PE10 10 18 21 26.5 4.3 11 PU10 10 18 21 43
PE12 12 21 23 30 4.3 13 PU12 12 21 23 47
~ A
' '
·-------------------------- ' --------------------------

0
]J
3- CJlP
oI ... " oI
PY4 4 9 31. 5 14 3. 2 13 10 PM4 4 M1 2X1 29 14 10 7 14 4
PY6 6 12.5 37 16.5 3.2 15.5 12 PM6 6 M14X1 34 16. 5 10.5 11 17 4
PY8 8 15 42.5 18.5 3.2 17 14.5 PM8 8 M16X1 38 18.5 11.5 13 19 4
PY10 10 18 48.5 21 4.3 19.5 18 PM10 10 M20X1 43 21 12. 5 16 24 5
PY12 12 21 54 .5 23 4.3 21 20.5 PM12 12 M22X1 46.5 23 13.5 17.5 27 6
EA
2- K
2-E 0
e ' '
I
N
f l -l--1-+<l. '-------------------------- ' ----------------------- ---

e
I
, - ,-1- - t --t- N
4
... ".
9 14 17
"
3.2 6.5 PLM4
oI
4
...
9 M12X1 12 7.5 14 17 31 14 4 14
6 12.5 16.5 20 3.2 8 PLM6 6 12.5 M14X1 12.5 8.5 17 20 35.5 17 4 17
8 15 18.5 23 4.3 9.5 PLM8 8 15 M16X1 13.5 9 18.5 23 39 19 4 19
10 18 21 26.5 4.3 11 PLM10 10 18 M20X1 14.5 11 21 25.5 44.5 24 5 22
12 21 23 30 4.3 13 PLM12 12 21 M22X1 15.511 23 29.5 48 27 6 24
Tube
fittings
ilN:•
'
·--------------------------
()._
e
J,
2-KA <(
0
<D
.!::::!
2-EA eI ~
0
"'()._
oI 0 •• u•: o I• 01:
PP4 4 5 3 15 27.5 PEG6-4 6 4 12.5 16.5 14 20.0 19.5 3.2 8
PP6 6 7 3 17 32 PEGB-6 8 6 15 18.5 16.5 22.5 22 4.3 9.5
PPB 8 9 4 18 36 PEG10-8 10 8 18 21 18.5 25.5 25.5 4.3 11
PP10 10 11 5 20 42 PEG12-8 12 8 21 23 18.5 29 28.5 4.3 13
PP12 12 13 6 23 44 PEG12- 10 12 10 21 23 21 29 29 4.3 13
'
'
'
•--------------------------
~ a.
e
..,.I a.
e
I
"'
=
(I)
a::i .!::::!
0"'
a,t
' 0
"' a.
oI o• o I• o I: o•
PZ4 4 34 9 14
"
3.2 6.5 13 PEW6-4 6 4 12.5 16.5 14 20 19.5
"
3.2 8
PZ6 6 39.5 12.5 16.5 3.2 8 16 PEW8-6 8 6 15 18.5 16.5 22.5 22 4.3 9.5
PZ8 8 46 15 18.5 4.3 9.5 19 PEW10-8 10 8 18 21 18.5 25.5 25.5 4.3 11
PZ10 10 52.5 18 21 4.3 11 22 PEW12-8 12 8 21 23 18.5 29 28.5 4.3 13
PZ12 12 59.5 21 23 4.3 13 26 PEW12-10 12 10 21 23 21 29 29 4. 3 13
DC
2-DB
' '
-
(I)
-<D
N
·;;;
A
·;;;
N
.-----------------
- - - -- - - - ' --------------------------
(.)
I '''
ct
e
"'e
()._
' ~
I~
3- P
o I• o I: 0 •• o•: oI 01: o•
"
.1
PG6-4 6 4 12.5 9 16.5 14 33.5 PYW6-4 6 4 36.5 12.5 16.5 14 3.2 15 12

PG8-4 8 4 15 12.5 18.5 14 37.5 PYW8-6 8 6 42 15 18.5 16.5 3.2 16.5 14.5
PG8-6 8 6 15 12.5 18.5 16.5 38 PYW10-8 10 8 48.5 18 21 18.5 4.3 19 18
PG10-6 10 6 18 15 21 16.5 42 PYW1 2-8 12 8 54 21 23 18.5 4.3 20.5 20.5
PG10- 8 10 8 18 15 21 18.5 42.5 PYW12-10 12 10 54.5 21 23 21 4.3 21 20.5
PG12-8 12 8 21 18 23 18.5 46.5
PG12 - 10 12 10 21 18 23 21 47
Tube
fittings
11ml
3-<l>PB
A '
K I L
I ·--------------------------
~1
---- -!
(l_
a ~I ~~-
----
I/
a
I
f-+ ~
I
-
rt
a
I
"'
o I• o I: o• 0 • •
PGJ6-4 6 4 9 14 21 35 6 75 14 18.5 15.5 25

PGJ8-4 8 4 12.5 14 22 39 8 85.5 17 21 16.5 29.5
PGJ8-6 8 6 12.5 16.5 22 39.5
PGJ10-6 10 6 15 16.5 25 44
PGJ10 - 8 10 8 15 18.5 25 44.5
PGJ12 - 8 12 8 18 18.5 26 48.5
PGJ12-10 12 10 18 21 26 49
A
JC
' 4-<l>PB '
4- <l>DB
'-------------------------- ' --------------------------

w
(l_
(.) a
I
"'
<<
co._
~I.De.I DC I 2-KA ea
A I I
"'"'
O I 1 o I: o I: 0 • .I
PZG6-4 6 4 39 39.5 12.5 16.5 14 3.2 8 16 PHD8-6 6 90.5 14 18.5 16.5 15.5 25
PZG8-6 8 6 45 46 15 18.5 16.5 4.3 9.5 19 PHD10-8 10 8 102.5 17 21 18.5 16.5 29.5
PZG10-8 10 8 52 52.5 18 21 18.5 4.3 11 22
PZG12-10 12 10 59 59.5 21 23 21 4.3 13 26
JC
3-<l>PB '
3-<l>DB
'--------------------------
rt
a
I
w "'
oI .1 o I: 0 • • 0 •: 0
PKG6- 4 6 4 58.5 12.5 9 16.5 14 3.2 8 34 10 17.5

PKG8-6 8 69 15 12.5 18.5 16.5 3.2 9.5 40 12 21
PKG10-8 10 8 80 18 15 21 18.5 4.3 11 48 14.5 24
Tube
fittings ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~
Metal one-touch fittings
D Specification
Operating pressure 0-9kgf/cm (0-0.9MPa)
Applicable tubinQ Nylon or Polyurethane
Color Grev/Black
Note: The temperature resistance level of the tubing should be confirmed first when used in high temperature
environments.
Configuration table of tubing inner diameter

Port size
Product series Thread type
<1>4 Cl>6 Cl>8 <1>10 <1>12
M5
1/8'
•• •• •• ••
IJ Product feature
1/4"
• •• • ••
••
BPC 3/8'
1. High flow capacity; The flowrate of these fittings is equivalent to that of

1/2'
M5
•• •• •
the adaptable tubings. 1/8"
1/4'
• •• ••
2. Inserting or removal tubing is simple and convenient, and the connecting
portion is reliable and durable.
BPOC 3/8'
1/2'
••
3. Sealant is coated on threaded portion. The M5 metric thread is attached
with a sealing gasket, to ensure no leakage of the threaded connection
M5
1/8'
•• •• ••
• ••
1/4'
••
part. BPCF 3/8'
4. The fitting metal body adopts a special nickel-plating process, which has 1/2"
good corrosion resistance. M5
5. Metal fittings can be used in high temperature environment. 1/8'
1/4'
• •• •• ••
BPMF 3/8'
1/2'
••
. Port s1ze
Product series qi 4 qi6 qi8 Cl>10 <1>12
~alllllllllllllalllllllllllllalllllllllllllalllllllllllllalllllllllllll
BPC: Metal male connector

j Thread type
!Blank: PT I
IJ Inner structure
Thread connection
@ MS: M5X0.8
01: 1/8'
BPOC: Hexagon socket head 02: 1/4' 1 23456
metal male connector 03: 3/8'
04: 1/2'
.....
D
1 Metal connector Brass
- 2 Locatina rina Aluminum allov
Port size 3 SprinQQasket Stainless steel
4: Cl>4mm 4 Locatina seat Aluminum allov
BPCF: Metal female connector 6: Cl>6mm 5 Soecial shaoe 0-rino Viton
8: Cl>8mm 6 StraiQht connector body Brass
I=§ . 10: CJ>10mm
12: CJ>12mm
BPMF: Metal bulkhead female
connector
G
BPM: Metal bulkhead connector 4: Cl>4mm
6: Cl>6mm
~ 8: Cl>8mm
~ 10: Cl>10mm
12: Cl>1 2mm
Tube
fittings
Metal one-touch fittings
Dimensions
.,.
H ~
n
CllD w~
·-------------------------- H
~"'
i ! i
~
' --------------------------
~.
: I :
I "'
~
(.)
'
--!-- - ~-
'
R;i I
-'
n•nt 1- O•I• •
M5X0.8
...
9
BPCF4M5 5 21 14 10
4
BPCF401 1/8" 9.5 8 23 14 14
BPCF6M5 M5X0.8 12 5 21 16 12
11'11'
BPC4M5
I• O•I .
M5X0.8 3.5 19.5 14 9
' . BPCF601
BPCF602
BPCF801
6
8
1/8"
1/4"
1/8"
12.5
12.5
14
8
11
8
25
28
27
16
16
18
14
17
14
BPCF802 1/4" 14.5 11 30 18 17
BPC401 4 118" 7.5 19.5 14 10
BPCF1002 1/4" 17 11 32.5 20.5 17
BPC402 114" 10 19 14 14 10
BPCF1003 3/8" 18 12 33.5 20.5 21
BPC6M5 M5X0.8 3.5 22 16 12
BPCF1203 3/8" 21 12 35 22 21
BPC601 118' 7.5 21.5 18 12 12
6 BPCF1204 1/2" 21 13.5 36.5 22 25
BPC602 1/4' 10 24 18 14
BPC603 3/8' 11 22.5 18 17
BPC801 1/8" 7.5 27.5 18 14 •:i·
BPC802 8 114" 10 26.5 18 14
CllD ' Ill,:._
BPC803 3/8" 11 23 18 17
n
~
BPC1001 118' 7.5 29.5 20.5 17
BPC1002 1/4' 10 32 20.5 17
10
BPC1003 3/8' 11 27.5 20.5 17
BPC1004 1/2' 14 25.5 20.5 21 (.)
·--------------------------
BPC1202 1/4" 10 34.5 22 21 w
BPC1203 12 3/8" 11 30 22 21
BPC1204 1/2" 14 32 22 21
H ~
1:t:l11--1"•1 .. f·1--
ll'UI I • 0 I •
BPMF401 4 1/8" M12X1 8 25 14 12 4 14 4 14
~
CllD
r-1 ti'
,, BPMF601
BPMF602
BPMF801
6 1/8"
1/4"
8 1/8"
M14X1 8 25 16 12
M14X1 11 30 16 12
M16X1 8 27 18 13
5
5
5.5
17
17
19
4
4
4
17
17
19
BPMF802 1/4" M16X111 31 .5 18 13 5.5 19 4 19
i'' I' i''
L_J __ J
1"' (.)
'
·-------------------------- BPMF1002
BPMF1003
10 1/4"
3/8"
M20X1 11 34.5 20.5 14
M20X1 12 35.5 20.5 14
7.5
7.5
24
24
5
5
22
22
' BPMF1203 12 3/8" M22X1 12 37 22 15 8 27 6 24
I I -'
BPMF1204 1/2" M22X1 13.5 38.5 22 15 8 27 6 25
3£~~'1
R
•:·
'~~
A
'
' --------------------------
11•111 I •
BPOC4M5
011 .
M5X0.8
...
9 3.5 18.5 14 2
.
4
BPOC401 1/8" 10 7.5 17.5 14 2.5
BPOC6M5 M5X0.8 12 3.5 21 16 2
BPOC601 6 1/8" 12 7.5 21.5 18 4
BPOC602 1/4" 14 10 21 .5 18 4
BPOC801
BPOC802
BPOC1002
8
10
1/8"
1/4"
1/4"
14
14
17
7.5
10
10
26
24.5
28.5
17.5
17.5
20.5
5
6
6
u,1111 ·
BPM4 4
II I
M12X1 28.5 14 10 7 14
. 4
BPOC1003 3/8" 17 11 27.5 20.5 8 BPM6 6 M14X1 33 16 10 11 17 4
BPOC1203 3/8" 21 11 29.5 22 8 BPM8 8 M16X1 37 18 11 13 19 4
12
BPOC1204 1/2" 21 14 31.5 22 8 BPM10 10 M20X1 41 .5 20.5 12 16 24 5
BPM12 12 M22X1 45 22 13 17.5 27 6
Tube
fittings
Accessories--Silencers AlrTAC
BSL, BSLM, BESL, PAL, PALM series
Specification
1t•ntt· : : I =~·•: ,•.
: I• : : O•: I :
•• : ,,
Thread connection MS x0.8 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" M5 x0.81 1/8" I 1/4" 3/8" 1/2"
Silencing effect(dB)
1 1•111 , - :
15
1111:
10
I :
10
I :
10 10
I• ....,...., ...., .. ,, ..
15 I 12 I 12 12
I .. 12
1r,
Thread connection 1/8" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 1/8" 1/4" I 3/8' I 1/2" 1/8" 1/4"
Silencing effect(dB) 10 10 10 10 25 25 I 25 I 25 25 25
Operating pressure 0-9kgf/cm'(0-0.9MPa)
Negative oressure -750mmHg(10Torr)
Dimensions
D Product feature
BSL, BSLM, BESL series

1. This silencers have excellent noise silencing performance. {.)
2. The installation of the silencer is simple and convenient, and the

·--------------------------
connecting portion is reliable and durable.
3. It is easy to adjust the exhauct flow of the throttling type silencer.
PAL, PALM series

1m111 ·
BSLMS
.
M5x 0.8 3.5 19.5 8
.
1. The silencer body is made of plastic. BSL01 1/8" 6 24 12
2. The mini type silencer has the characteristics of small volume and BSL02 1/4" 8 30 15
compact structure. BSL03 3/8" 9 38.5 19
BSL04 1/2" 12 47.5 22
Silencer Type Standard color

'
BSL: Universal silencer Tvoe Color code Color definition
BSLM: Mini Silencer Top cover: grey ·--------------------------
Blank: grey
.
BESL: Throttling silencer PAL Body: gray
PAL: Plastic silencer PALM
D: Black
Top cover: black
Body: black
11.'lltt·
.
PALM: Mini plastic Silencer BSLMMS M5 x 0.8 3.5 9.5 8
Others No such code
BSLM01 1/8" 6 11 11
Thread connection BSLM02 1/4" 8 13.5 15
M5: M5 x 0.8 BSLM03 3/8" 9 15.5 19
01: 1/8" BSLM04 1/2" 12 20.5 22
02: 1/4"
03: 3/8'
04: 1/2"
Configuration table of tubing thread. {.)
Thread connection
Product series M5
01 02 03 04
BSL
BSLM
•• •• ••• •• ••
BESL
•• •• •• BESL02 1/4" 8 42.5 35 14
••
PAL BESL03 3/8" 9 49 41.5 17
PALM
• BESL04 1/2" 12 61 53.5 24
PAL, PALM series
11.'lltt·
PAL01
. ..
1/8" 16 7 33 14
.
PALM01 1/8" - 10 16 10 PALM01
PAL02 1/4" 20 10 62.5 17
PALM02 1/4" 16 10 36 14
PAL03 3/8" 26 12 68 24
PAL04 1/2" 28 12 73 24
Silencer
Accessories--Silencers AlrTAC
BSL, BSLM, BESL, PAL, PALM series
D Flowrate characteristic D Inner structure
12000
'BSL04
'2 10000
.E :e.SLQL
::J 8000
§ 6000 ' ·"•
,.
~
0
4000 Body I HPb59-1 I
Sound absorbing! Copper particle I
o= 2000 2
a, 1000 I _i _____ TI _____ TI _____ T'I _____ iI' ______ _ cover I sintered I
'5 500
300 --= --=-F::.-:-_-_f .:::::-_-f-.:.::::.~------!---.:-.::i":.----l6.SLM_5__
0
100
0 5
Inlet pressure(bar)
3000
.....
500 1 Adjusting cap Aluminum alloy
400 2 Throttlina column Aluminum alloy
~~~ 3 Lockina cao Aluminum allov
100 4 Lockina rina Aluminum alloy
5 Silencer rina Coooer oarticle sintered
8
6 Silencer body Brass
Inlet pressure(bar)
PAL, PALM series

8000
7000
6000
E 5000
:5 4000
f 3000 2
~ 2000
""
.....
§ 1000 1 Silencer top cover I POM I
:5 500 2 Silencer body I POM I
0
~88 3 Silencer filter element I Polyethylene fiberl
Inlet pressure(bar)
BESL series inlet ressure and outlet flowrate

Throttling bolt completely open
E 3000
:5 2500
2a, 2000
~ 1500
_g 1000
500
0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Inlet pressure(bar)
Operating pressure: 0.5MPa

~ 800
E
::J 600
OJ
.; 400
~ 200
0
u::
0 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Number of turns
2400
I 2000
d. 1600
"§,. 1200
800
u::0
400
0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Silencer Number of turns
Accessories--Speed controllers AlrTAC
PSA, PSL, PSS series
Specification
Operating pressure range 0-9kgf/cm'{CHJ.9MPa)
Negative pressure -750mmHg{10Torr)
Ambient and fluid temperature (°Cl 0-60
Color Grey/black
Table for interface port and tube O.D.

Port size
Product series Thread type <1>4 <!>6 <!>8 (1)10 <!>12
M5
1/8'
•• •• ••
•• •••
PSL 1/4'
D Symbol
3/8'
1/2'
•• ••
PSA
r"-··-··-
Meter-out (Al Meter-in (Bl M5
1/8'
• •• ••
; ~J ; ~ PSS 1/4'
••
••
I ' I '
'
.
:.. .. _ .. _ .. .J l_______ t_______ J 3/8"
1/2'
D Product feature
1. The silencer is small size, and light weight with small installation space.
2. Excellent flow charatentics,high sensitivity and easy to adjust.
~,ea;;;
PSA e~
e e e e
3. The silencer brass body adopts a special nickel-plating process, which
has good corrosion resistance and anti-pollution property. Inner structure
4. Anti-drop structure is designed on the regulating rod . • • • 6 '
5. The sealant being coated on threaded portion can ensure no leakage of Aluminum allo or Brass
the threaded connection part. Aluminum allo
6. The inserting direction of universal speed controller can be adjusted
Brass
in 360 degree.
NBR
NBR
sleeve Aluminum allo
NBR
PBT
PSUpaed~I"
Standard color
Standard
Specification
~m --------------- ----------------------- --------------- ----------
PSS: Universal speed
color ""
1 Handle Aluminum alloy or Brass
Blank: Release button: Gray
controller ~ Body:Gray
2 Lock nut Aluminum alloy
Gray
3 Needle Brass
Release button: Black 4 Body Brass
D: Black
Body: Black 5 0-rina NBR
Port size 6 0-rina NBR
4: CD4mm Control method 7 Bushina PBT
C
6: CD6mm A: Meter-out 8 0-rino NBR
8: CD8mm 9 Seat rino Brass
10: <P10mm andle mark:i·n\·~:.. 10 Rubber body PBT
12: <P12mm 11 Chuck POM
Controlled flow !
12 Guide Aluminum alloy
Thread connection w • 13 0-ring NBR
Thread Adaptable 14 Serina casket Stainless steel
connection port size 15 Release button POM
M5: MS x 0.8 (!)4\(1)6
01: 1/8"
02: 1/4" Aluminum allo or Brass
03 3/8" 2
3
4
5 NBR
6 NBR
PBT
PSA: Straight speed Specification 8 NBR
controller. color 9 Brass
Bl k G Release button: Gray 10 PBT
an : ray Body:Gray 11 NBR
Release button: Black 12 PST
Port size D: Black NBR
Body: Black
4: <P4mm 14 POM
6: <P6mm 15 Stainless steel
8: <P8mm 16 Aluminum allo SP.eed
10: <P10mm 17 controller
12: <P12mm
D Dimensions
'
K
'--------------------------
'-'
a, '-' I j :5 thread type

w
~~
'-'
PSL4M50 19 9.5 8
PSL4010 14 20.5 15 11
PSL6M50 M5x0.8 10 16.5 23.5 11 .5 8
PSL601 0 1/8" 14 16.5 23 15.5 11
6 PSA4 4 41 11 29 26.5 9.5 14 7 3.2 14
PSL6020 1/4" 12.5 18 10 47.5 16.5 25 18 14 32
PSL6030 3/8" 12.5 22.5 11 52.5 45.5 16.5 27 20 19 59.5 PSA6 6 52.5 16.5 43.5 36.5 13 16.5 7.5 4.3 11 20
PSL8010 1/8" 15 14 7.5 41.5 35 18.5 26.5 16.5 11 18 PSA8 8 59.5 16.5 47 40 15 18.5 8.5 4.3 11 22
PSL8020 1/4" 15 18 10 47.5 41 18.5 28.5 19 14 33 PSA10 10 69 21 53.5 46.5 18 21 10.5 4.3 14.5 26
PSL8030 3/8" 15 22.5 11 52.5 45.5 18.5 29.5 20 19 60 PSA12 12 78.5 26 58.5 51 21.5 23 12 4.3 17.5 32
PSL8040 1/2" 15 28 14 58.5 51.5 18.5 32 25 24 96.5
PSL 10020 1/4" 18 18 10 47.5 41 21 31 20.5 14 34.5
PSL 10030 10 3/8" 18 22.5 11 52.5 45.5 21 33 21.5 19 62
PSL 10040 1/2" 18 28 14 58.5 51.5 21 35.5 25.5 24 98
Flowchart
PSL12030 3/8" 21 22.5 11 52.5 45.5 23 36 23.5 19 64 Controlled flow rate
12
PSL12040 1/2" 21 28 14 58.5 51.5 23 38 27 24 100
Note: 'O • stands for A or B. A indicates meter-out type while B indicates meter-in type. PSA4
The two types are with the same overall dimension.
EA
CIJPA
'--'
·--------------------------
3 4 5 6 7 8 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
Number of needle rotations Inlet pressure (MPa)
'-'
a,
w
l
'-'~
M5 th. read type
~ PSA6 - -
~ PSA8 - - ~900
PSA6 - -
PSA8 - -
, , , , , ,
c z 800 --+--i---~--}--i ---:- -
::;; ~700 --.:.--~---~--.:.--~-- 1
2~~~
---.:.--
:? 600 __ 1__ J___L--l -- --L--l--

1
., 400
oi 300
~500
c::'.400
--f--i---~--:
--i--i---,
-~,---:--T-
-r-
---: -:--
~ 200
~ 100
PSS4M50
PSS6010 12.5 14 7.5 41 .5 17 17 15 11
""
~
~
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111113 14 15
Number of needle rotations
u~~ ==~::~-==~==t=I==t)==
"".,
Cl) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
PSS6020 12.5 18 10 47.5 17 19 17.5 14 u
0 u: Inlet pressure (MPa)
PSS8010 15 14 7.5 41.5 18.5 17 15 11
8
PSS8020 1/4" 15 18 10 47.5 41 18.5 19 17.5 14
PSS10020 1/4' 18 18 10 47.5 41 21 20.5 17.5 14 PSA10
10
PSS10030 3/8' 18 22.5 11 52.5 45.5 21 24 20 19 PSA12 - -
PSS12030 3/8" 21 22.5 11 52.5 45.5 23 25.5 20 19
12
PSS12040 1/2" 21 28 14 58.5 51.5 23 28 25 24
Note: 'O " stands for A or B. A indicates meter-out type while B indicates meter-in type.
The two types are with the same overall dimension.
SP.eed
controller
Controlled flow rate Cl Selection, Installation and Operation
PSL4 M5,PSS4M5(0perating pressure 0.5MPa) PSLi M5,PSS4M5
ii: 6 1. The speed controller has meter-out type and meter-in type:
go~--------~
~ 80
fi~i~i:::~::~,: : ,~:
8Q>------,------,--------,------+------:------,---r1
:? ,----+----+----+---+---+---+--+--~ -----1
~ 70>------1------1------,------+------:----,~------•
~ 60 ~ 601-----+----+------,------+----~<----+-----t _W~o,;og
p,;odpl, 1:. --::on:~:t~da::::~c.:i.on ________
:::! ,---,-----,-----,---+----,-----,--?+ ---,----1 c: 50,------,------, ----,------f----:------------,
2 40>---,-----,----,---+----,-----,-,r--+ ---,----1 ~ 40>-----+ ----+----',"---+-----:-----t------, Controlled threaded end to tubing connection --\
~
3:
~ 30>------•------•/--•------+-----•-----•------• low end. ,
g 20,---,-----,----,---+----y--,----+ ---,-----1 ~ 20 w 2 The air flow is free from the tubing :
-0
2 s: 10 ________________________________connection end to the threaded end.j ___________________________________ _
~ 0o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ~ 00~0~.-
1 -0~2-0~.3-0.~4-0~.s-o~.s~o.7
0
Q)
B: Meter-in i
Handle marking "B"
u Number of needle rotations LL Inlet pressure (MPa) 1. The air flow is free from the threaded! );
Free flow end to tubing connection end. : ~
!, !,
2. The air flow is controlled from the :
tubing connection end to the :
__________________ ______________threaded end____________________________:------------------------------------
4 6
':L~01,PSS801 (Operating pressure 0.5MPa) 2. Select the different control method according to the actual requirement. The meter-out
350 ~ - - - - - - - - ~ type is the first priority.
~200 ~ - - - - - - - - ~
~ 180 l--+--+--•----1 ---,--_,___ ,___,___.,_ ___,___ ,__l'---I ;i:300 2.1. The application example of the ! 2.2. The application example of the meter-in
£ 160 ,-----+--+---,---•---•---•---•---+-------•/--•---1 ~250 meter-out speed controller i speed controller
~ 140 1--+--+--+---:--+-+-+--:---+- + ,r,---i---1 -·-····-·-·---·-····-·-· -· -·-··-· -·-·-·-····---·-·-·-··+· -·-·-·· ··-·-·-·-·-····-·-·-·-·-··-·-·-· -· -····-·-·---·
:::!120 ,---,--+--1----:---,---,---,---:---+--,,--,---,---1 i200 Solenoid valve Double acting : Solenoid valve Si~gle acting
Q) 100 1
E
~
---,-++---1---+---,---,---:--+,;';---,---,---1
BQ>--+--+-+ --1--+ --1---,-~=++--;---,---1
60'___,___,_,___ ,___ ,__ _y_, ___, __ + _, ___, ___, ___,
;;= 40>---•--+-+--,~----·---·---•---++--s---s---\
~150
a,
E3:
100
50
, ~ .,,W I cylmd"
-0
2 20,---'---',4 -- 1---•---•---' ---•--+--0 ---•- - -•---\
e o ~~~~~~~~~~
0
0
-=
(\l 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0. 7
c: 4 8 10 12 Q)
LL
8 Number of needle rotations Inlet pressure (MPa) Meter-out speed controller Meter-in speed controller
1. Installation and removal of tubing:

1.1. Installation of tubing
6 6
PSL1B002,PSS18002(0perating pressure 0.5MPa) Grasp the tu bing and slowly push it into the fitting until it
comes to a stop. The tubing will be locked by the spring
~ 350 ~ - - - - - - - - ~
<( ;i:6001------•------'------•------+------'-----'-/ gasket.
i 300 f--+--+--+---1---+--+-+-<--+--+--t--,l"'t ~ 500 , ______, ______,_______ ,------+------1,/---,------1
~ 250 1--+--+--1----,---,---,---,---:---,----1---'1--,--1
...J ~ 400 ,-----+----+------+-----/------,------+-----• 1.2. Removal of tubing
-200 f--+--+-->----•--->---•---•---•---+--->-/->---•--i
Q) !300 1-----+-----+------~-------:-------1------+-----t Push the release button to open the spring gasket so that
E 150 1--+--C---,----l---!---:---:---l---,"'-'---:---:--1
Q) 200 ,------,---0, ------,-------,------:------,------1 the tubing can be released .
~ 100 1--+---l--+---1--+ --1-,_,..-c:--+ +--1---l--j
-= Erno
3:
Note:When remove the tubing, make sure the pressure in
j 50 the tubing is Zero.
~ 00"""----'------'----4'-----'-----'----'-----'8----'---1~0----'---~12--' ~ 0o 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
~
8 Number of needle rotations u._ Inlet pressure (MPa) 2. Mounting of the speed controller
Mount the speed controller into the inlet and outlet port of the
cylinder with a wrench.
6 10 Note: Please refer to the fittings for the tightening torque and
PSL1~003,PSS1~03(0perating pressure 0.5MPa) PSLl003,PSS 1203 thread screw-in depth.
ii: 12 12
~1200 - - - - - - - - - -o:'. 1~0 ~ - - - ~ - ~ - ~~
I 1000 H ---H -++--c-+-+-+-+--:--+-+-> ~ 1200 ,------,------,------,------~------· -----_
, ______,
1. Adjustment of the cylinder speed
2 8QQ H ---H --+---;--+--•--•--•---H---4 -,----1 i10001-----+----+------+-----+------;----~-----t 1.1. Make sure the speed controller is turned off before applying air pressure. The
~ 600 H --_, __ , __ .,_ ___ , ___ , __ , __ _,_ __ , ___,--,r--+--•---1
~ 800 >-----+----+------+-----+--r -,------+-----• cylinder may fly out due to the high speed if the air is inlet when the speed controller
...J
: 600 f-----+-----+-------+c/ -+------,------+-----1
0
is turned on.
~400 l-+-+ -1--+-+ --1-+-+-+~ --1--+-+--I E 400 ,------,------~-----,-------,------,------,------1
-= 1.2. Adjust the speed by opening the needle slowly from the fully closed state. When a
]l 200 H H --+c,-:----,-- +++:++- 1 ~200
-= needle valve is turned clockwise, the air flow through is reduced and the actuator
i
u
0o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Number of needle rotations
~
LL
00 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Inlet pressure (MPa)
speed decreases. When a needle valve is turned counter-clockwise, the airflow
through is increased and the actuator speed increases.
8 .
PSL
_ 1004,PSS1204(0perating
12 pressure 0.5MPa) PSLf~ 04,PSS1204
i 2000 - - - - - - - - -
~2000 ,------,------, ---- ,------~-----,-----,--,r ,
~ 1600 l--'--•--•---•--•--•--+--•--•--•---•- •--;<-•---1 ~
21200 f--,--,---,.--,--,--,---,.--,--,--,---,t-,---,--+---1 E 1WO , ------,------,------,------+---=·-----,------1
:::.
Q)
2 1000 l------t-----+------V'---+------1-----+-----t 2. Operation of the speed controller
E800 H --,--+-+--H--+--,---,-~----,---H--+--1 Q) 2.1. Do not use tools such as pliers to rotate the handle. Do not apply excessive force or
3:
0
~4001--,--,--1---,-cs--f--,--,-1--,---,-,--,---,.--1 E 500 l------:--/ -S-------S-------:------1-------:------t shock when the needle is at the place of top or bottom. It can cause damage or air
3:
2 0
leakage.
2c -=~ 0. 1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 2.2. A certain amount of leakage is allowed in the closed state of the speed controller. It
8 Number of needle rotations u._ Inlet pressure (MPa)
is not designed for the use as stop valve with zero air leakage. SP.eed
controller
&i•t•
Accesso ri es--F in ger va Ive AlrTAC
PHV series
Specification
Qperatina pressure 0-9kaf/cm'ro-0.9MPal
Neaative pressure -750mmHa(10Torr\
Proof Pressure 1.5MPa
Temperature range(°C) 0-60
Applicable tubing Nylon or Polyurethane
Color Grey/Black
Table for interface port and tube O.D.

. Port size
Product series ()) 6 ())8 ())1 o <))12
lmmmllllllalllllllllmllllalllllllllmllllalllllllllmllllalllllllllmllll
D Symbol D Inner structure

Two-way Three-way
~ p R
"'"
1
2
Knob
Fixing ring
POM
Aluminum alloy
3 Spool Aluminum allov
4 Cam groove block POM
Product feature 5 Pin Stainless steel
6 Plastic body PBT
1. When the three-way valve is closed, the outlet pressure is released, 7 Locatina block Aluminum alloy
which facilitates in commissioning and maintenance. 8 Spacer POM
2. The finger valve has excellent flow characteristic and high sensitive 9 Special shape 0-rina NBR
10 Soacerrina Aluminum allov
unti-direction characteristic. 11 Special shape 0-rina NBR
12 Locating seat POM
13 Sprina aasket Stainless steel
D Ordering code 14 Locatina rina Aluminum allov
15 Plastic interface POM
'!ft'l'I.....,...
Fitting type Standard color

PHV: Finger valve Standard color Specification Dimensions
•
Release button: Gray
Blank: Gray
Body:Gray
Release button: Black
D: Black
Body: Black
Valve specification
Port size
6: <D6mm A: Three-way
JC
8: CD8mm
10: <D10mm
12: <D12mm
B: Two-way
0
Koob ideobfi,[§j a.
e
I
N
D Diagram of finger valve in the open and closed states

"t : o• :
Valve is closed, when the angle When the three-way valve is
11•n• I ;
"
between the arrow on knob and closed, the outlet pressure is PHV60 6 51 .5 17 40.5 12.5 16.5 10 4.3 8 18
the arrow on valve released, which facilitates in PHV80 8 58 .5 18 42.5 15 18.5 11 .5 4.3 8.5 19
Closed ~ ~ ~b-od~y~is~9~0~de-g-re-
e commissioning and maintenance.
(as figure below) PHV10D 10 66 21 42 18 21 11 4.3 11 24
state
Close PHV12D 12 71 22 46 21 23 13 4.3 11 24
Note: "D" indicates "A" or ' B", "A" indicates three-way, and "B" indicates two-way.
The two kinds of valve have same dimensions.
Valve is open, when the direction
of the arrow on commutation knob
Air inlet is consistent with that
Opened~~ -
state ~ -
Inlet Outlet
Finger Airoutlet
varve
Accessories--Pilot no-return valve AlrTAC
PCVseries
D Specification
Model PCV06 PCV08 PCV10 PCV1 5 PCV06F PCV08F PCV10F PCV15F
Operating pressure range 0.1-1.0MPa
Temcerature ranee -20-70(°C)
Operating frequency 60(Cycle/minute) I 40(Cycle/minute) I 60(Cycle/ minute) I 40(Cycle/minute)
Port size G) 1/8' I 1/4' I 3/8" I Jt,' I 1/8" I 1/4' I 3/8" I Jt,'
Pilot cart size M5X0.8 I 1/ 8" I 1/4" I 1/4" I <ll6 I <ll6 I <ll8 I <ll8
G) PTthread, G thread are available.
Symbol D Ordering code
Model
D Product feature
IPCV: Pilot no-return valve I
1. Can be used for safety loop of pressure holding.
2. Can make cylinder momentary stop, accurate orientation. Port size
06: 1/8" 1 PIiot port type
3. Can be used special loop. Pilot cart tvce Pilot cart size Inlet/outlet cart size
08: 1/4"
4. Fitting joint type is used for pilot port, which saved space and 10: 3/8" M5X0.8 1/8"
Blank: Female
improve efficiency of installation. 15: 1/ 2" 1/8" 1/4'
thread
1/4" 3/8' , 1/ 2"
<ll6 1/8', 1/ 4"
F Fitting
D Inner structure <ll8 3/8', 1/ 2"
Aluminum alloy D Flow chart, Relation between min. pilot pressure and operating pressure
or Brass
Brass Relation between min. pilot pressure and operating pressure
NBR Flowchart 2.0
Brass 1.8 ..c.
SUS304
2500 ~ - - - - - - - - - - ~
~ 1.6
.v
2000 !. /
Brass
NBR
1500
_ _ _ _ _ [_ _ _ _ _ ,_ _ _ _ _l _cv1~ · 81 4
~ 1.2
::,
~ 1.0
./
./
NBR ./,.,.
9 Conversion Aluminum alloy I 1000

[ 0.8
0 0.6 ,.....
..,,--
fitting
10 Pluger
or Brass
Brass+NBR = '5. 0 4
~ 0. 2
11 Spring SUS304
OD 2 3 4 5 6
12 Pedestal Brass
Operating pressure (bar) Operating pressure (bar)
Typical application
Accurate orientation D Dimensions
z-~ · . ,.
,~ -·
~ i EA Cl> ~
~
I '
r--
.J::!L BC ~ .J::!L ~ ~
T
~
: I:
u.lJ
HA
l-.!.-f
I HA
+ I
I
' 1'
I RB u RB
~ I ,,-RB u
,~1 1 ~ ' v- ' v-
u
i
f:r~
--
V I '\ F"" ~ Vi '\ f"-",
u
~c~)E I'
~ ( T} ±::J
I c-:c·-·-'i
Pressure holdin
f iGrfil:: a{: ffi
--+
ffi I
<'sf
I
I
1:Er
1 .J HA
A
ffi I I I
~I 1:Er
I
.J HA
RA
PCVD PCVD F PCVD G PCVD FG
I~ e
C CA D EA EB HA HB RA RB RC
~I
C CA D EA EB HA HB RA RB RC
PCV06 48.5 7.5 16 16 14 12 PT1/8 PT1/8 M5X0.8 PCV06G 48.5 5.5 16 19 14 12 G1/8 G1/8 MSX0.8
PCV08 59 10 20.3 21 17 14 PTl /4 PT1/4 PT1 /8 PCV08G 59 6.5 20. 24 17 14 G1/4 G1 /4 G1/8
PCV10 74.5 11 25 26 22 17 PT3/8 PT3/8 PT1/4 PCV1 0G 74.5 7.5 25 30.5 22 17 G3/8 G3/8 G1/4
PCV15 79.5 14 28 29.5 24 19 PTl /2 PT1/2 PT1/4 PCV1 5G 79.5 9 28 34.5 24 19 G1 /2 G1/2 G1/4
PCV06F 58.5 7.5 6 16 16 14 PT1/8 PT1/8 PCV06FG 58.5 5.5 6 16 19 14 G1/8 G1/8 -
PCV08F 67 10 6 20.3 21 17 - PT1/4 PT1/4 PCV08FG 67 6.5 6 20.' 24 17 G1/4 G1/4 -
PCV1 0F 82 11 8 25 26 22 PT3/8 PT3/8 PCV10FG 82 7.5 8 25 30.5 22 G3/8 G3/8 -
PCV1 5F 87 14 8 28 29.5 24 - PT1/2 PT1/2 PCV1 5FG 87 9 8 28 34.5 24 G1/2 G1/2 -
PCV
AirTAC Production system AlrTAC
Index
2 D PEB One-touch fittings P493

2J Angle seat valve P127 DPC Pressure switch P170 PED One-touch fittings P493
2KL Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P118 DPS Pressure switch P167 PEG One-touch fittings P499
2KS Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P102 DS1 Sensor switch P457 PEW One-touch fittings P499
2KW Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P110 E PG One-touch fittings P499
2L Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P114 EAV Air valve(5/2(3) way) P65 PGJ One-touch fittings P500
2P Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P126 ESV Solenoid valve(5/2(3) way) P40
PH One-touch fittings P492
2S Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P98 F
PHO One-touch fittings P500
2V Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P124 F F knuckle P455
PHF One-touch fittings P492
2W Solenoid valve(2/2 way) P106 G
PHK One-touch fittings P500
3 GA Air distribution block P150
3A Airvalve(3/2 way) P52 GC F.R.L combination P134 PHV Finger valve P508
3F Foot pedal valve P93 GCD D DC F.R.L combination(metal bowl) P1 47 PHW One-touch fittings P492
3FM Foot pedal valve P93 GF Filter P140 PKO One-touch fittings P494
3L Push-pull valve P76 GFD D DC Filter(metal bowl) P1 47 PKG One-touch fittings P500
3V Solenoid valve(3/2 way) P22 GFIGSIGU Pressure gauge P166 PL One-touch fittings P491
3V1 Solenoid valve(3/2 way) P14 GFC FR.L combination P136 PLF One-touch fittings P491
3V2 Solenoid valve(3/2 way) P16 GFCD D DC FR.L combination (metal bowl) P147 PLL One-touch fittings P491
3V2M Solenoid valve(3/2 way) P18 GFR Filter & regulator P138 PLM One-touch fittings P498
3V3 Solenoid valve(3/2 way) P20 GFRD D DC Filter & regulator(metal bowl) P1 47 PM One-touch fittings P498
4 GL Lubricator P144 PMF One-touch fittings P492
4A Air valve(5/2(3) way) P55 GLDDDC Lubricator(metal bowl) P1 47 POC One-touch fittings P489
4F Foot pedal valve P94 GR Regulator P142 pp One-touch fittings P499
4H Hand lever valve P74 GV Soft start-up valve P148
PSA Speed controllers P505
4HV\4HVL Hand lever valve P79 GZ Safe on-off valve P149
PSL Speed controllers P505
4L Push-pull valve P77 H
PSS Speed controllers P505
4M Solenoid valve(5/2 way) P36 HFC Air gripper P387
HFP Air gripper P387 PU One-touch fittings P498
4V Solenoid valve(5/2(3) way) P28
A HFR Air gripper P387 PV One-touch fittings P498
AC F.R.L combination P152 HFY Air gripper P387 PY One-touch fittings P498
ACA Shock absorber P482 HFZ Air gripper P387 PYB One-touch fittings P493
ACE Compact cylinder P259 HLH Strict slide table cylinder P327 PYW One-touch fittings P499
ACJ Shock absorber P482 HLQ Strict slide table cylinder P333 PZ One-touch fittings P499
ACK Twist clamp cylinder P409 HLS Strict slide table cylinder P351 PZB One-touch fittings P493
ACQ Ultra-Compact cylinder P267 HRQ Rotary table cylinder P379 PZG One-touch fittings P500
ADW Dripleg drain P165 HSV Hand lever valve P78 Q
AF Filter P158 I QCK Rotary clamp cylinder P413
AFC FR.L combination P154 I I knuckle P453 R
AFR Filter & regulator P156 J RMS Rodless magnetic cylinder P369
AL Lubricator P161 JCK Power clamping cylinder P421
RMT Rodless magnetic cylinder(With guide) P373
AR Regulator P159 JSI Standard cylinder P213
ASC Flow control valve P95 M
s
S3 Control valve P81
B M3 Control valve P83
M5 SC Standard cylinder P201
BB One-touch fittings P495 Control valve P85
BC F.R.L combination P152 MA Stainless steel mini cylinder P239 SDA Ultra-Compact cylinder P281
BD One-touch fittings P495 MAL Aluminum mini cylinder P247 SOR Regulator P163
BESL Silencers P503 MBL Aluminum mini cylinder P253 SE Standard cylinder P175
BF Filter P158 MCK Clamping cylinder P417 SGC Standard cylinder P189
BFC FR.L combination P154 MD\MK Multi-mounting cylinder P287 SI Standard cylinder P181
BFR Filter & regulator P156 MF Stainless steel mini cylinder P233 SR Regulator P162
BKC One-touch fittings P496 Ml Stainless steel mini cylinder P219 STW Slide table cylinder P319
BL Lubricator P161 MPE Thread Cylinder P303 SU Standard cylinder P195
BPC Metal one-touch fittings P502 MPG Plate Cylinder P299 T
BPCF Metal one-touch fittings P502 MU Mini free mount cylinder P295 TCL\TCM Tri-rod cylinder P313
BPM Metal one-touch fittings P502 N
TN\TR Twin rod cylinder P307
BPMF Metal one-touch fittings P502 NPM Boosting Unclamping cylinder P439
TW Stopper cylinder P443
BPOC Metal one-touch fittings P502 NRV Non-return valve P96
BR Regulator P159 p u
BSL Silencers P503 PAL Silencers P503
u U knuckle P455
BSLM Silencers P503 PALM Silencers P503 UCS\UCE Polyurethane tubing P486
BU One-touch fittings P495 PB Stainless steel mini cylinder P225 US\UE Polyurethane tubing P486
BZ One-touch fittings P495 PC One-touch fittings P489 y
C PCF One-touch fittings P491 y Y knuckle P453
CM3 Control valve P87 PCV Pilot no-return valve P509 z
CS1 Sensor switch P457 PE One-touch fittings P498 ZM3 Control valve P91

KTC

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

KTC

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Product system of AirTAC--lndex

Solenoid valve(3/2 way, 5/2 way, 5/3 way)

- - 3V1 -3V3 Series .. ... ... ....... ........ 14

..,m,,r=- 3V2M Series .. ... .. ....................... 18

- - 4V100-400 Series ........ .. .......... ··28

Air valve(3/2 way, 5/2 way, 5/3 way)

- - 3A100-300 Series .... .. .. ........... 52

Manual control valve, mechanical control valve and other valves

Fluid control valve ( 2/2 way l

- - 2S Series solenoid valve .... 98

- - GC Series(F.R.L combination) .. ..134

A\B series (F.R.L. combination , FR.L. combination, filter& regulator,

- - AFCIBFC Series(FR.L combination) ... . 154

- - AFRIBFR Series(Filter & regulator) .... . 156

- - AR\BR Series regulator .. .. ........ 159

~ - - - - - - - - - ~- - AL\BL Series lubricator .. .. ...... ... 161

Other series( regulator, pressure gauge , pressure switch)

- - SR Series regulator ... ...162

- - GS, GF, GU Pressure gauge .... 166

DPS Series Pressure Switch ..... 167

DPC Series Pressure Switch .. ... 170

Standard cylinder (ISO standard , JIS Standard, Other standard)

- - SE Series ................... .. ... .... ·· ··175

- - SI Series ... ..... ...... .. ... .. ... ... ...... .181

- - SGC Series ......... .. .... ......... .. .... 189

- - SU Series ... .. ... .. ... .. .. ..... .. ... .... 195

- - SC Series ... .. ... .. .. ... ........ ...... .. 20 1

- - JSI Series .. ........................... ... 213

Round line cylinder

- - Ml Series ..... .... ..... .. ...... 219

- - ACE Series .. .... ................. .. .... 259

- - ACQ, TACO Series ...... .... ......... 267

SDA Series ... .... ..... .. ... .... .. ...... 281

Multi-mounting cylinder, twin rod and tri-rod cylinder

- - MD\MK Series ..... ............ .. .........287

.~~\,~.-~ ~ MPE Series ... ... ............... ...... .. 303

TCL\TCM Series ... .. ...... .. .........313

Sl ide table cylinder

STW Series . ... ........ .... ...... ..... 319

HLH Series ...... .. ... .. .. ... ... .. ....... 327

- - HLQ Series ............... .. .. ... ... ... .. 333

,.,. - - HLS Series ... ............ .... .... .. ... 351

Magnetic Coupled Rodless cylinder

RMS Series .. .. .. ..... .... ........ .. ... . 369

Rotary table cylinder

- - HFZ Series ............. .... .. ... .. ... ... 387

Twist clamp cylinder, Clamp cylinder

- - ACK Series .. ... ... ..... ..... ........ .... 409

- - QCK Series ....... .... ... .... ...... ... .. -413

- - MCK Series ...... .. ... ..... .... ....... .. 417

Boosting Unclamping cylinder, Stopper cylinder, accessories

- - NPM Series ...... .. .. .... .. ... .. .. .. .. .. 439

Polyurethane tubing, Fitting, Silencer, Speed Controller

- - Polyurethane tubing ..... .. ... ...... 486

Requests of Pneumatic System on Design-Selector and User

Attentions on the Design and Selection of Pneumatic System

Attention for the Use of Lubricant for Pneumatic System

Requests of Pneumatic System to Compressed Air

13%Hldi IM¥HUN 11\Mniiliiili

1 psi =6.895 kPa =0.07 kg/cm' =0.06895 bar =0.0703 aim

Solenoid valve Fluid control valve

Manual control, mechanical control and other valves

The selection of valves 13 Notice for Application and Maintenance